JP2020049341A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by determination means in a display means for a predetermined period of time; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the display means; symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol for each piece of information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means; and display mode variable means for varying a display mode which is displayed in the symbol display means on the basis of a period in which the predetermined number of pieces of information is acquired by acquisition means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. .

  In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting port during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the right to perform the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information, and the number of the retained ball information is Is displayed on the display means.

JP 2010-057441 A

  However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage unit in which the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored, Determining means for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means on the display means for a predetermined period of time And a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. For each piece of the information stored in the storage unit before being performed, a symbol display unit that displays a corresponding symbol, and a symbol display unit based on a period in which the information is acquired by the acquisition unit by a predetermined number. table A display mode changing means for changing the display mode that is one having a.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the display mode changing means changes a display mode in a display area where the symbols are displayed based on the period.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, it is suggested that the display area where the symbol is displayed in the symbol display means is an area where the symbol is displayed. The mode is set to be displayed even during a period in which the symbol is not displayed.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the display mode changing means changes the suggestion mode corresponding to the period.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage unit configured to store the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a storage unit configured to store the information in the storage unit. Determining means for performing a determination based on the information, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period, and the display means A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed, and For each of the information stored in the storage means, a symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol, and a display mode displayed on the symbol display means based on a period during which the information is acquired by the acquisition means by a predetermined number. To A display form changing means for varying, and has a.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display mode changing means changes the display mode in the display area where the symbol is displayed based on the period.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the display area in which the symbol is displayed in the symbol display means, a suggestion mode indicating that the symbol is displayed is set even in a period in which the symbol is not displayed. It is.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the third aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display mode changing means changes the suggestion mode corresponding to the period.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6 (a). 7A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device. 14A is a front view of the tilting device, FIG. 14B is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a diagram illustrating XIVc− in FIG. 14A. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in XIVc line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. FIG. 17A is a front view of the driving device, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the driving device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 18. (A) And (b) is a front view of a release member and a rotating claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. (A) is a side view of a slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of a release member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a release member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in a 5th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member along the line LIXb-FIXb in FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is FIG. 59 (a). 10 is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the vibrating apparatus in the LXa-LXa line of FIG.59 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in (a) of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a), (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the arrow LXVIIb direction of FIG. 67 (a). It is. (A) is a sectional view of the operation device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in (a) of FIG. 6, and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of an arrow LXVIIIb in (a) of FIG. It is. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive in a 6th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member, and a 2nd transmission member of a left disk cam. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74A is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a partial side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of an engaging member, (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the arrow LXXVIIb direction of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disc cam, and (f) is a front view of the right disc cam. FIG. 78 is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along a line corresponding to a line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) in which the back pack was opened to the inner frame with the inner frame opened to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame, and opened (deployed) the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where the front frame was removed. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window of the front frame are exploded and shown. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window of the front frame are exploded and shown. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a binding movable member in which a released state and a fixed state of the binding movable member are illustrated side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95 (a). (A) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a), and (c) is a schematic drawing of the binding movable member and the harness. FIG. 96D is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the image, and FIG. 96D is a schematic top view of FIG. 96C. (A) And (b) is a top view schematic diagram of a front frame, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and a harness which schematically illustrate a binding movable member and a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a 1st bending area. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a back exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a side view schematic diagram of a light guide member, (b) is sectional drawing of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a). It is a partial rear view of a right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper frame member. It is an exploded back perspective view of an upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of (a) of FIG. 124, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of (a) of FIG. FIG. 124D is a top view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. FIG. 124A is a partial cross-sectional view of a front assembly, a rear assembly, an upper frame member, a main body frame, and an upper plate member along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124A, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of a front assembly, a rear assembly, an upper frame member, a main body frame, and an upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support device, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support device. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support device, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a board support device. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board surface support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board surface support apparatus. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) And (b) is an exploded front perspective view of a ball launching unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of a ball launching unit showing a state of sending out a ball by a ball feeder in a time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of a ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member, showing the relationship between the yarn and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 4 is a partial front view of a ball launch unit, an inner rail, and an outer rail after a ball is launched. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a production operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a production operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 153 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat member, and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal, a flat member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) And (b) is a back perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center axis rotation device and a loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of a back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back board, a side substrate, and a 2nd effect member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide board, and a 2nd effect member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. (A) And (b) is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fit device in a twelfth embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operating device. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operating device. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of a twelfth embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in a 13th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along the line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of an inner frame in a 14th embodiment in a line corresponding to a CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of Drawing 86. (A) is a partial back view of the front frame in a 15th embodiment, (b) and (c) are back views of a fraud detecting device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIb in FIG. 206 (a). It is a partial expansion perspective view of a light guide member, and (c) is a partial expansion perspective view of a light guide member which typically shows the downward concave part provided in the light guide member in area CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIe of FIG. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a partial enlarged front view of a distribution apparatus. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which three reserved balls are set while the third symbol is changing, and (b) is a diagram in which four reserved balls are set while the third symbol is changing. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display mode in which a character J0 appears from a display area C. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four reserved balls are set during the fluctuation of the third symbol and the recommended value without vacancy does not increase, and (b) shows a state from the state of FIG. 6 (a). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls further increases and exceeds a recommended value. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls increases in a short period, and (b) shows that the character J0 in the display area C indicates the optimal number of reserved balls according to the state. It is a figure showing a display mode in the case. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when a character J1 is displayed in the display area C while the third symbol fluctuates, and (b) changes to a reserved ball while the third symbol fluctuates. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display mode when a character J2 is further displayed in a display area C. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum number, and (b) is a display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C has changed when an over-win has been achieved. FIG. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode at the time of making a player accumulate up to six ball | balls during reach, and (b) is a figure which accumulates up to six ball | balls, and the pattern arrangement | sequence changes It is a figure showing a display mode in the case of having performed. (A) is a figure showing the display mode of the lucky display of the previous jackpot hold, (b) shows the display mode when the player presses the button after the number of hold balls has accumulated to six FIG. (A) is a figure showing a display mode of an effect during a long opening, and (b) is a view showing a display mode of a floating effect of a long opening winning. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an outline of various counters in a first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing one example of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ordinary random number table in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the special figure 1 big hit type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the special figure 2 big hit type selection table in the 1st control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a normal variation pattern selection table that is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table for time reduction which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the winning command table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the content of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a content of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the hold change selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the hold effect mode selection table in the first control example. . (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the reserved lid range selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the normal reserved lid range selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the notice A mode hold lid range selection table in the first control example, and (d) is the notice B mode hold lid range in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the selection table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-time winning holding lid cover selection table in the first control example; FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a reserved lid command selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a reserved lid color change selection table in the first control example. It is. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the lucky hold command table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a background mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a reserved character selection table in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the hold character change table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the speech balloon selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal speech balloon selection table in the first control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a notice A balloon selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a notice B balloon selection table in the first control example. It is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term winning balloon table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a reach-rendering balloon table in the first control example. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the lucky hold | mouth balloon selection table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the at-reach effect lottery table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the reach start time calculation table in the first control example. FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky hold lottery table in the first control example. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable execution determination process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 change start processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol change start process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by the MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lucky display determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hold | maintenance attraction effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the holding | maintenance lid setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hold | maintenance character setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the blowing lid setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the short-term winning determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lucky hold | maintenance storage process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the short-term winning management process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hold | maintenance attraction effect management process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a sensor input process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a mode switching process. (A) is a flowchart showing a hold lid command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a suspended character display process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a balloon display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the flow of the special design fluctuation | variation and a continuous effect in 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship between continuous production and background display in the 2nd example of control. (A) is a display mode showing a display screen during a continuous effect in the second control example, and (b) is a display mode showing a display screen during a special effect in the second control example. It is a display mode showing the background change during the continuous production in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the content of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the content of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation processing 2 which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart which showed starting winning processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 2nd example of control. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the prize information related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the stop command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process during the time saving which is performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the effect return process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically some content of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the effect setting process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous effect return process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special effect setting process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display screen when power is turned on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen when power is turned on in the fourth control example. (A) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen after power-on in a fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a fluctuating game screen of the first rotation after power-on in the fourth control example. . It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 4th example of control. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the content of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the content of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a volume table in a fourth control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a start-up process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an initial volume setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a volume setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a stop command process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the volume related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 4th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a storage error A screen at the time of power-on in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage error B screen at the time of a game operation in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. 6 is a timing chart when a retry operation is performed in the tilting device. It is a timing chart when a touch sensor is detected in the tilting device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically some ROM contents of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically some ROM contents of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an operation effect selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting operation scenario table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilt operation scenario A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilt operation scenario B table in the fifth control example. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an origin detection operation A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an origin detection B table in the fifth control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting initial operation table in the fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor input process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the retry process during the touch input performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which showed tilting device control processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the operation effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the tilting initial operation process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process during operation effect performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the return operation process after production performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a retry operation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode during the change of the third symbol in which the retained ball has a jackpot A fluctuation, and (b) is a diagram in which the retained ball is further changed from the state of FIG. 346 (a). It is the figure which showed the display mode when one is digested and it becomes jackpot A. 346 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode during super time in which one more reserve ball is digested from the state of FIG. 346 (b), and FIG. 347 (a) ) Is a diagram showing a display mode in a case where one more is digested from the state of FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of a chance, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode during a probability change. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode when a big hit was started, and (b) is a figure which showed the display mode of the effect of the 1st big hit. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when notifying that there is a button effect during a big hit, and (b) is a diagram in which a button is pressed from the state of FIG. 350 (a). It is the figure which showed the display mode at the time of alert | reporting to the player that the certainty change was provided. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot has ended, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot has ended and the probability change mode has been entered. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the promotion lottery table in the sixth control example. FIG. It is the model which showed typically some content of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop symbol switching process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the stop symbol change process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command receiving process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flow chart which showed opening processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 6th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the big winning prize ball processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a round process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a sixth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing stop symbol replacement processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart showing a game state setting process to be performed. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit related display processing performed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the big prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the sixth control example. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (A) is a figure showing the display mode during the effect when the long open is won in the seventh control example, and (b) is a view showing the display mode in the case of the long open effect in the seventh control example. FIG. It is a figure showing the display mode during long opening effect regulation in the 7th example of control. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically some content of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the long opening effect process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a seventh control example. It is the flowchart which showed the long open related process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in the 7th control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIGS. 1 to 4
4, as a first embodiment, the present invention relates to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”).
An embodiment will be described in the case where the present invention is applied to (10). FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12.
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the front side of the front side with the side provided with the shaft as the opening and closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, a front view (
Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable on the front side with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. ing. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is, for example, a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2)
(See Reference), the stage is changed, or the content of the effect of the super reach is changed, and the like, the operation is performed by the player.

Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminated parts 29 to 3 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs around the periphery of the window 14 c.
3 are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. Further, a front view of the front frame 14 (FIG. 1)
In the upper left portion, a display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs, is provided.

Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 1
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the ball 0, lending of a ball is performed according to the operation. Done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. Return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof. I have. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 that are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

A touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a is provided inside the operation handle 51, and a firing stop switch 51 for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation.
and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of turning operation (turning position) of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view,
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 330, a through Gate 67,
The variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable display unit 8
Numerals 0 are provided in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 is connected to the inner frame 12 through the window 14 c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1).
It can be seen from the front side of. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is formed.
An arcuate inner rail 61 made of a band-shaped metal plate is erected at an inner position of the outer rail 62 similarly to the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided on the front of the game board 13).
(Area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 61 (FIG. 2)
A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the game board 13 to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B determine whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second symbol.
It is configured so that it can be used properly depending on whether or not the winning opening 640 has been won. In particular,
When the ball has won the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while, on the other hand,
When the ball has won the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. Note that a plurality of L
The ED is configured such that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and various combinations of the emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B include:
As a stop symbol after the end of the change, not only is it determined whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot,
If it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds after a 15-round jackpot,
A transition to the low-probability state, and a predetermined number of times of change (for example, 100 times of change) is a jackpot in which the time saving state is set.

The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, the state of the game that is neither probable change nor time reduction (
This is a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability increases.

During probable changes or during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the second winning port 64
The time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared to the normal time. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the second winning opening 640 is not changed.
At least one of the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per one time may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640.
Triggered by a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variation display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display in, and passing of a ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second symbol. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640.
Are configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time.
Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second
The lighting of the symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Also, the through gate 67
Is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Also, the first symbol display device 37A
, 37B indicate the number of balls to be held, so that the second symbol holding lamp may not be lit.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is the first.
This is indicated by a symbol display device 37B.

Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment,
Although the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same, Is different from the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is paid to the second winning port 640, for example, a prize paid out when a ball is paid to the first winning port 64. The number of balls may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the second winning port 640 may be set to five.

The second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State) and the ball is the second winning opening 6
It is in a state where it is easy to win 40.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probability change and during the working hours,
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, “○” is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (expanded) is increased. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”).
), It is more advantageous for the player to obtain a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery by winning a prize in the first winning port 64 and to aim for a jackpot.

On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 so that the second winning opening 64 is formed.
Since the electric accessory 640a attached to 0 is likely to be in an open state and easily wins in the second winning opening 640, the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640. It is better to shoot a ball (so-called “right-handed”), pass through the through gate 67 to open the motorized accessory, and aim for a 15R sure-change big hit by winning in the second winning opening 640. This is advantageous for the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, the pachinko machine 10 may aim at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handing” or the second winning opening 640 by “left-handing”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball in accordance with the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Need to be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way of hitting the ball can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol and Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state,
The specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position may be the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. The present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out-opening 71 is provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
Are stored in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Substrate box 100-10
Reference numeral 4 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and is used to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102,
When the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 11
2 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. Some RAM 203
And various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 causes a jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of the display on the 7A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device is executed.

Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. Work area where values are stored (
Work area). The RAM 203 retains data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.
The configuration is such that all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (FIG. 255), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (FIG. 254). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (FIG. 253) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205
The payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing drive on the front side with the lower side of the open / close plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205.

The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a power supply device 1.
The MPU 201 is connected to a signal output from various switches 208 and an R signal output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erasure signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has M
A stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the PU 211 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like are stored. have. The RAM 213 stores the pachinko machine 10
Even after the power is turned off, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 so that data can be held (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also supplies a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 1
11, but not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the ball is directed by the main control device 110.
a. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (
On the condition that the operation handle 51 is not operated), the firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. .

The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation Display control device 114 such as display) and notice effect
This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in the above. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 22
5, a main controller 110, a display controller 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to each other. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the sound lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, a sound corresponding to the display content is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and is also associated with the display content. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113,
Is to control the display such as the fluctuation effect of the third symbol in. The display control device 11
4 transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be matched.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with the RAM erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 is provided with an AC 2 supplied from the outside.
A voltage of 4 volts is taken in, and various switches such as various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
9 volts for driving solenoids, motors, etc., 5 volts for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and generate these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltage. A necessary voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
This is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminals 201 and 201 of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when the voltage becomes less than 22 volts, the power failure (
It is determined that power interruption or power interruption has occurred, and the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be normally executed and completed.

The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG.
Reference numeral 00 denotes a central portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in a front view (that is, a central portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed into the player, and is provided in a region defined by a housing recess 17 a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Will be arranged. A signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) by the player performing the tilting (rotating) operation of the tilting device 310.

A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the finger of the hand can enter without difficulty. Thereby, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in a manner in which the fingertip is arranged on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player grips the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the operation of the tilting device 310 is often performed with the left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

FIG. 6A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6B is a view of VI of FIG. 6A.
FIG. 7A is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line b-VIb, and FIG.
0 is a partial front view, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along a line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A.

6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. FIG. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in a first state (an initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the up-down direction. In FIG. 7, the tilting device 310 is shifted from the first state. A state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and rearward by being raised around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be able to automatically operate between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is, for example, a specific display (for example, a display of “press a button”) on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
Is performed by the player when appears.

Here, for example, when the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by a method of vigorously dropping the hand downward, such as when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the near side depending on the degree of tilting. This is an aspect in which the hand is shifted and the palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing a pushing operation by a method of dropping his hand vigorously downward.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1, The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform the operation by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to make the method of dropping the hand vigorously downward. Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged can be reduced.

The difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the viewpoint of the player will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand that pushes and operates the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is reduced in area from the viewpoint of the player to such a degree that the operation surface 312a1 is visually recognizable in the first state while being invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed outside the player's viewpoint). Thereby, the first
The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protective lens member 31
1i is configured such that the area of the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) disposed inside the operation device 300 is gradually increased.
The difference in the amount of light (the degree of light and darkness) of light that can be visually recognized by the player in the first state and the second state is increased, and the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state. .

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side of the little finger near the shaft 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm with the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating the wrist about the axis), With the palm integrated with the operation surface 312a1, the tilting device 310 can be pushed in and operated comfortably.

Accordingly, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to let the hand drop vigorously downward.
Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG.
Is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported on a shaft 314 in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at a rear end.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that applies a direct impact to the tilting device 310, and detection sensors 324L and 32 that detect a pressing operation from the first state.
4R are disposed outside the lower frame member 320 surrounding the tilting device 310 from below.

As described above, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for providing the driving force outside the lower frame member 320, the area inside the lower frame member 320 is largely used, and the tilting is performed. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. This allows
A large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG.
FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR <b> 1 disposed at left and right ends at a rear end (a rear end in FIG. 12), and the tilting device 310. A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and that defines a pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. A large opening in the center with a recessed portion disposed facing the lower frame member 320 and fastened to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320 Tilt device 3 with
The driving force is applied to the tilting device 310 via an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the second frame 10 in the second state, and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and constitutes a tilting device 310 and a link mechanism. A driving device 340 for transmitting the power, and a protective cover device 3 fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protecting the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from the left and right and the rear.
50 mainly.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321. Part 3 composed of a plate-like member arranged horizontally at the upper end on the back side
22, a lower bearing portion 323 which is a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322 and receives the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 from below, and a lower portion of the bottom plate portion 321. Left detection sensor 324L and right detection sensor 324R arranged in a pair on the left and right sides
And an opening 325 that is an opening formed by cutting a portion disposed below the horizontal portion 322 at a center position in the left-right direction of the bottom plate portion 321.

The bottom plate portion 321 contacts the tilting device 310 to determine the end of movement of the tilting device 310 and has a plurality of openings through which the portion of the tilting device 310 is connected to the bottom plate portion 3.
21.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a formed at the front center portion, a detection hole 321b formed along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and an opening 325.
And an insertion hole 321c that is formed symmetrically on the left and right sides.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a position in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed to have a size that allows the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass therethrough. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 extends below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be given to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is provided with a detection piece 311gL, 311 protruding from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
gR is a through hole configured to be insertable. Detection piece 31 protruding from detection hole 321b
By disposing 1 gL and 311 gR in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the driving device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a plane for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, and extends upward from the upper surface thereof and has a U-shaped cross section having an open portion on the near side. The locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler-type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are connected to the bottom plate 32 of the lower frame member 320.
It is arranged at a position where the separation distance (position of the detection groove) from 1 is equal on the left and right.

Further, the photocoupler-type sensor includes a light projecting unit for projecting light and a light receiving unit for receiving light from the light projecting unit, and gaps (slits, detecting grooves) into which a detecting part can be inserted. Means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341 f of the driving device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

On the other hand, as for the vertical width, the driving device 340 has a configuration in which the LED device 341f is arranged so as to protrude toward the upper front side (see FIG. 17B).
The drive device 340 is pushed up after passing through the LED device 341.
f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the rotating claw member 34 can be moved from the LED device 341f.
The vertical width of the opening 325 can be reduced as compared with the vertical width including up to seven.

The upper frame member 330 is opposed to the opening 331 that is an opening having a size to be hooked by the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. And an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed in a semicircular shape whose lower side is opened and which supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured so as to be vertically dividable and covered in three directions except the near side, and is fixed to a lower end portion of the driving device 340 and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340. A voice coil motor 352 supported on the bottom plate and disposed on the front side and having a vibrating surface directed obliquely upward and upward; a left detection sensor 353L which is a detection sensor having a detection groove above the bottom plate of the main body cover 351; And a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 illustrates a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R disposed on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center can be visually recognized.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the vibration surface of the voice coil motor 352 is
The bottom plate 321 is disposed substantially parallel to the bottom plate 321. Thus, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes the projecting protrusion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler-type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340. Disk cam 344L, 3 of drive device 340
44R are arranged in such a manner as to be arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L, 353R.
The detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disc cams 344L and 344R are connected to the detection sensors 353L and 353L.
It is possible to detect whether or not the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase by detecting whether or not the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection groove of the 53R.

In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 have the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L and 353L are provided.
There are two types of specific phases that can be detected by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 (a
14) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is FIG. XIVc)
It is sectional drawing of the inclination apparatus 310 in the -XIVc line. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, the tilting device 310 is configured such that a case main body 311 composed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and having upper and lower openings, and an upper opening of the case main body 311 is covered. A lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 fastened to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and a state sandwiched between the rear ends of the case body 311 and the lid 312. , A torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314, and the case body 311 at the rear end of the case body 311 and the lid 312.
A ring-shaped ring member BR1 for fixing the lid 11 and the lid 312 inseparably is mainly provided.

The case body 311 includes a bottom plate 311a that is inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened at the center of the bottom plate 311a, and left and right sides of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending from the flange projecting downward along the edge of the shaft toward the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d having a semicircular cross section supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And an insertion groove 311e, which is a groove arranged at a position where both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-like portion 311f formed in a hook shape and locking a central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A left detection piece 311gL and a right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending in a pair on the left and right below the bottom plate 311a, and a predetermined amount from the front end of the bottom plate 311a toward the front. An extension portion 311h to be provided and a protective lens member 311i which is disposed above the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and is formed of a light transmitting material. And a protruding projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the center in the left-right direction at the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player, the bottom plate 311a
It is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the surface 20 in a plane.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is provided in the guide hole 3 of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the driving device 340.
It is a cylindrical member inserted through 45b, and has a role as a portion for transmitting a driving force to and from the driving device 340.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions that are inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. Is longer than the right detection piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL about the shaft 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22), the pushing end (see FIG. 22). 23), the left detection piece 311gL is extended as compared with the right detection piece 311gR so that the rotation angle becomes the rotation angle of the tilting device 310).

The extended portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 10), extends to a position where it is locked by the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330. It is configured in an embodiment.

The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from above (FIG. 14A).
(See FIG. 14 (c)) together with the curved shape when viewed in the left-right direction, so that the load when the player pushes the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow).
Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging protrusion 311j is formed so as to protrude at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate 311a, and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320.
Is pushed in, (see FIG. 29), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321 a, and the tip protrudes below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 31
2b is fixed to the top plate member 312a, and the LED device 34 in the first state (see FIG. 6).
And a cylindrical member 312c formed of a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding 1f.

In the first state (see FIG. 6), the cylindrical member 312 c emits light emitted from the LED device 341 f toward the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 6) while improving the strength of the lid 312 by rigidity in the axial direction. While being held inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such a limitation is released and the light is emitted from the LED device 341f in a wide range.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light transmissive material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has an extended end formed of a shape matching the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. And a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape at the center.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right torsion portions, and has two arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the torsion portion, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of torsion portions. , Is provided.

Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 (a)
FIG. 17B is a front view of the driving device 340, FIG. 17B is a side view of the driving device 340 when viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving device 340. It is.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, a driving device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a driving motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft 343 for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (non-rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft 343).
Left disk cam 344L, right disk cam 344R) and the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344.
Release member 346 that is pivotally supported by the arm member 345 that is pivotally supported by the shaft member 341c of the main body member 341 and that comes into contact with the first overhang portion 344c1 and the second overhang portion 344c3 of the disk cam 344 in the rotational direction. A rotating claw member 347 that is coaxially supported with the releasing member 346 and that relatively moves with the rotation of the releasing member 346; and a coil spring that generates a biasing force in a direction in which the rotating claw member 347 falls down. A first spring SP1 which is a spring member of
And a second spring SP2, which is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction to separate the rotating pawl member 6 and the rotating claw member 347 from each other.

The main body member 341 is bent rearward on the left and right sides and formed in a U-shape in a top view.
41a, a shaft support hole 341b drilled at the same position of a plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a facing the same and supporting the disk cam 344, and an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. A shaft portion 341c protruding in the left-right direction at a position shifted from the shaft support hole 341b to the front side in an aspect having the extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c; A lighting support portion 341 extending from the housing portion 341a toward the front upper direction.
e, and an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and having an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f is a triangular member on an upper surface thereof, and a portion for refracting light (
(A part that refracts light). Thereby, the light of the LED device 341f can be evenly irradiated upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 is provided inside the motor housing 341a in a U-shape.
1a is provided with a fixing member 342a fastened and fixed.

The fixing member 342a supports the rotation gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotation gear.

The arm member 345 is bored in one end at a perfect circular shape, and is bored in a shaft support hole 345a supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344, and at the other end in a rectangular shape. And a guide hole 345b through which the shaft 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a is in contact with the shaft 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310. It is formed at a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft bar 343. The transmission shaft bar 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which disk cams 344 (refer to FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and a driving motor 342 supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
A transmission gear 343b meshing with the rotating gear of the above, a movable clutch 343c capable of switching whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by axial movement, and a movable clutch 343c And a coil spring 343d that presses the transmission gear 343b against the transmission gear 343b.

The cylindrical member 343a has a D-shaped fixing portion 3 for fixing the disc cam 344 to both ends thereof.
43a1 and 343a2, the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center side than the left fixing portion 343a1. Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is
43c is formed to have such a length that it can move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when it moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b includes a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted,
A clutch portion 343b2 in which unevenness is formed along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the axis from a surface facing the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
43c1 and a clutch portion 343c2 formed with irregularities along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the axis from the surface facing the transmission gear 343b and configured to be able to engage with the clutch portion 343b2. .

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have an apex angle of about 100.
It is composed of a convex part and a concave part having a mountain shape of °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the relative rotation of the movable clutch 343c with respect to the cylindrical member 343a becomes impossible, so that the clutch portion 343b of the transmission gear 343b.
2 and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b causes the cylindrical member 34 to move through the movable clutch 343c.
3a. Thus, by rotating the drive motor 342, the disc cam 3
44 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

Note that the movable clutch 343c normally operates the transmission gear 3 by the urging force of the coil spring 343d.
The clutch portion 343b2, 343c2 is arranged at a position close to 43b, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2, 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3
It is configured to be movable in a manner to separate from the transmission gear 343b along 43a2.

The disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. In the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R are substantially mirror-shaped, and the difference is that the detection hole 3 is different.
Since only the positions of 44eL and 344eR are described, only the left disk cam 344L will be described, and the description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

FIG. 20A is a side view of the left disk cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the left disk cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb of FIG. is there. Note that FIGS. 20A and 20B show a state where the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having portions projecting from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is located at the center of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a protruding in a cylindrical shape inward, a circular rib 344b protruding inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a circular rib 344b outside the circular rib 344b. A rib having a height lower than that of the circular rib 344b is protruded inward, and 2
An engagement rib 344c having a portion projecting radially outward at a location; and a circular rib 344b.
Between the arm member 3 and the engaging rib 344c.
It mainly includes a connection pin 344d connected to the P.45 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL formed near the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is disposed at a position forming an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the others are configured by mirroring the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

The center shaft portion 344a has a cross section D whose inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19).
It has a shape in which the outer periphery is internally fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular-diameter rib 344b is protruded to a position where it can abut on the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disk cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thus, misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c projects radially outward at a position shifted by 80 ° in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is provided. From the overhang portion 344c1, the first retraction portion 344c2, and the first overhang portion 344c1 that withdraw from the first overhang portion 344c1 radially inward at a position shifted by an angle θ1 (the angle θ1 = 50 ° in the present embodiment). At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (the angle θ2 = 150 ° in the present embodiment), a second overhang portion 344c3 that overhangs radially outward again, and the second overhang portion 344c
And a second retracting portion 344c4 that retracts radially inward at a position shifted by an angle θ3 (in the present embodiment, the angle θ3 = 20 °).

In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connection pin 344d is disposed at a position where the distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state is the longest (see FIG. 22). That is, the connection pin 344d is provided on the opposite side of the shaft 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the center shaft 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

FIGS. 21A and 21B are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. Note that FIG. 21A illustrates a large angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21B illustrates the release member 346. In contrast, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 has rotated to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

The state in which the release member 346 is rotated by being in contact with the disc cam 344 is in a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position between the guide slots 347b). (See FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 346a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). A projection pin 346b projecting in the thickness direction in an arc shape about the center axis of the shaft support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and a shaft support hole 346a. And an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting at the maximum diameter.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the engaging portion 346d engages with the engaging rib 34 of the disc cam 344.
4c (see FIG. 20). In the present embodiment, the engagement portion 346
Since the outer periphery of d is curved, the contact with the engagement rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed from a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. Along the guide pin 346b of the release member 346, the guide slot 347b is drilled so as to be able to guide the guide pin 346b (the guide pin 346b has a size including the movement locus of the protrusion pin 346b inside), and the second spring SP2.
The end of the first spring (see FIG. 18), the insertion hole 347c through which the end of the first spring is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347d projecting downward in a hook shape at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). And a pull-down hole 347e drilled so as to allow insertion.

In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21A, the release member 346 is disposed at the end position in the backward rotation direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 21A) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the downward direction is applied to the engagement portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate integrally in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engagement portion 346d rotates in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the pushing direction is applied to 346d, only the release member 346 is rotated until the small angle state shown in FIG. 21B is reached, and the posture of the rotating claw member 347 can be maintained.

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example in a case where a player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

FIGS. 22 to 24 show the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
FIG. Note that FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state illustrated in FIG. 23 shows a state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. FIGS. 22 to 24 show an example of a player's hand that performs a continuous tapping operation on the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives a biasing force in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate 311 a is connected to the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotating claw member 347.
Is hooked on. Thereby, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is connected to the right detection sensor 32.
It is arranged in front of the 4R detection groove (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an operation of pushing the tilting device 310, the tilting device 31
0 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 3
11gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is continuously hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval at which the player repeatedly hits the torsion spring 31.
5 cannot be returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, and the player may feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. However, in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 is moved against the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) that pushes down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342. Therefore, there have been problems that the product cost increases and space cannot be saved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibrating operation is provided at a position facing the protruding projection 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. You.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 31 can be moved without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315.
The return operation of 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player long-presses the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 is driven. Since an unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times that the right detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated. By driving the motor 352, the load of returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hit operation can be improved. This allows
The player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (a tilting operation) from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 3
0 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.

Note that FIG. 25 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG.
25 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25 and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 has changed. In FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 has been moved from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 28 shows a state in which the rotary claw member 347 has rotated only in the forward rotation direction and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 has returned.
29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 performs a reciprocating rotation operation. In FIG. 29, a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state in FIG. 28 is shown, and in FIG. 30, a circle from the state shown in FIG. When the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount, the engagement rib 34 is rotated.
The state where the second overhang portion 344c3 of 4c has reached the second initial state in which the second overhang portion 344c3 is in contact with the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated. 28, the tilting device 3 in the state of FIG.
The position of 10 is shown by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand that pushes and operates the tilting device 310 is shown by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312
The upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside 2c. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be ensured to be large. Accordingly, the cylindrical member 312c has an effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and an effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disc cam 344 is moved forward (in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state. Direction, the first protrusion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, and the release member 346 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotating claw member 347 is rotated in the backward rotation direction to a position where it is disengaged from the bottom plate 311a of the tilting device 310.

The change in the posture of the release member 346 is determined by the first retraction portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 34.
Since the disk cam 344 is rotated until the disk cam 344 faces 6d, the tilting device 310 rises by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the state of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (end position farther from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the operation of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the upward operation of the tilting device 310 has an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27),
When the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, the releasing member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are caused to rotate forward by the urging force of the first spring SP1 (counterclockwise in FIG. 27). (Rotational direction), and the rotating claw member 347 returns to a state where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (a state shown in FIG. 25). At this time, the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction to increase the angle (upper angle in FIG. 27) between the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347, and thus the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the cover 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area in which the protection lens member 311i can be visually recognized from the player's viewpoint is the tilting device 31 in the first state.
0, so that the light of the LED device 341f is directed in the front direction (the direction toward the player).
Can also be irradiated. Therefore, when the posture of the tilting device 310 changes, the LED device 3
The traveling direction of the light emitted from 41f can be changed, and the effect of producing light can be improved.

In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and subsequently, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction by the same amount. FIG.
28 (clockwise), the angle D1 shown in FIG.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down in the range of. Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting above the upper frame member 331 changes corresponding to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is
Since it is arranged on the front side of 41f (the left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 28). Can be.

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in a direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c Moves only in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. Accordingly, when the player performs the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate 311 a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotary claw member 347, thereby The member 347 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and subsequently the tilting device 310 is pushed in, whereby the bottom plate portion 311a is turned into the hook-shaped portion 347d.
, The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

Accordingly, the player moves the tilting device 310 shown in FIG.
After the player depresses 0, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases his / her hand.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). Thus, after performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 to the final end, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to a player who keeps putting the hand on the tilting device 310.

That is, the purpose is to generate a driving force that assists the raising of the tilting device 310 with the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 24), and to perform a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 disposed at the pushing end position. Can be used for

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases his / her hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower frame member 320.
Is buried in the lower surface of the voice coil motor 352, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only in a state where the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end.

Therefore, in comparison with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pressed and operated, it is determined whether or not the vibration by the voice coil motor 352 occurs at the pressing end.
Only the player who pushed and operated the tilting device 310 can be grasped.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in such a case, the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to produce a vibration effect when the jackpot is determined, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 Can be improved as a prefetch means.
Thereby, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, the disc cam 344 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the second overhang portion 344c1.
By rotating the disk cam 344 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) by a predetermined amount until the disk drive contacts the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, the drive device 340 can be set to the second initial state. .

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotation direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhang portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhang portion 344c3 comes into contact with the engagement rib 344c.

In addition, from the state of FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and after the first protrusion 344c1 of the engagement rib 344c passes through the engagement portion 346d, the reverse rotation is performed. In this way, the driving device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is moved in the forward rotation direction while maintaining the posture of the rotating claw member 347 (FIG. 29).
(Counterclockwise).

Next, referring to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, the case where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (moving up) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( (Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down through the second state (a tilting operation).

FIGS. 31 to 34 show the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
FIG. In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is moved forward from the state shown in FIG.
FIG. 32 shows a state in which the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 31) by rotating the release cam 346 in the counterclockwise direction.
Is rotated by a predetermined amount, and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state.
2 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is reciprocatingly rotated from the state shown in FIG.
3 shows a state where the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position.
In FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by imaginary lines,
In FIG. 34, an example of the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotating claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting is performed. The device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves the disc cam 344 via the arm member 345. Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disc cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the engagement between the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 is released), the posture of the disc cam 344 is changed. 310 can be arranged in the second state (from the first initial state, the disc cam 344 is set at 180 °).
(Rotated posture). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 moves upward at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the state change is obstructed by the disk cam 344 (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating by a predetermined angle at a slow speed, and it takes a long time until the tilting device 310 enters the second state.

As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and subsequently, the disc cam 344 is moved backward by the same amount (counterclockwise). FIG.
By repeating the operation of rotating the lens D2 clockwise), the angle D2 shown in FIG.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down in the range of. Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, in response to the operation in which the tilting device 310 repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D2, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting above the upper frame member 331 changes. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is
Since it is arranged on the front side of 41f (the left side in FIG. 33), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33). Can be.

That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the up-down operation shown in FIG.
The two types of up-and-down motions (lifting motions) shown in FIG. 33 can be performed immediately after the restriction of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342 can be created.

Thereby, compared to the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in expectation of a big hit), and the tilting device 310
Of the player can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only a load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311
c only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated to lift the shaft 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. Accordingly, when the player performs the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of reaching the state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the bottom plate 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and then pushing the tilting device 310. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

Accordingly, the player moves the tilting device 310 shown in FIG.
After the player releases his hand after depressing 0 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310
Can be maintained in the first state.

Next, referring to FIGS. 35 to 37, after the player performs the pushing operation, the rotating claw member 3
An operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by 47 will be described. With this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of up-and-down operations (tilting operations) of the tilting device 310 or to continuously perform one of the operations.

FIGS. 35 to 37 show the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
FIG. In FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is moved in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG.
FIG. 36 shows a state in which the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) by rotating the release cam 346 in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 35). FIG. 37 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) to a position where the disk cam 344 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, and FIG. The disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
The state where the left side detection sensor 353L of 50 is in the ON state is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging on the tilting device 310 from above is shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retraction portion 344c4 of the engagement rib 344c is engaged with the engagement portion of the release member 346. 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 changes when the engagement rib 344 c pushes up the release member 346, but the projection pin 346 b of the release member 346 moves in the space of the guide elongated hole 347 b of the rotary claw member 347. The rotation pawl member 347 is shown in FIG.
The posture shown in FIG.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to release the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the rotating claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the tilting device 310 being lifted can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and the rotating cam 344 is subsequently rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in FIG. 7, the driving device 340 can be in the second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but it is necessary to go through the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the up-and-down operation (tilting operation) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2 as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of keeping his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if a special display such as “long press” is not displayed. is there.

This is, for example, an operation that occurs due to forgetting to release the hand that pressed and operated the tilting device 310 to concentrate on the production. In this case, the tilting device 310 is lifted even if the restriction by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for vertically moving (tilting operation) the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2,
The posture of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is useless, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the left detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 (FIG.
5) is maintained in the ON state (while the tilting device 310 is tilted to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not reversely rotated, and as shown in FIG. In the first initial state of the driving device 340 in which the left detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) is turned on, the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the driving of the driving motor 342 is stopped).

In the state shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, since the tilting device 310 does not perform the ascending operation due to the player's hand being placed above the tilting device 310, in this case, the state shown in FIG.
The change up to the state shown in FIG. 7 occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, the player's hand continues to be placed above the tilting device 310, and the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (up to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, when the left detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) maintains the ON state, the circle is left as it is. Rather than rotating the plate cam 344, the plate cam 344 may be immediately rotated in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the driving device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and unnecessary load is not applied to the driving device 340, so that the life of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a device for preventing the destruction of the driving device 340 will be described. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. In FIG. 38, the tilting device 310 is in a state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state.
The hands of the player holding and fixing are illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 39, the illustration of the upper member of the main body cover 351 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grips and fixes the tilting device 310, the arm member 34
Since the movement of the disk cam 344 is restricted, the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, the drive motor 342
A high load occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may fail.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate freely with respect to the transmission shaft bar 343a for fixing the disc cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from breaking down.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disc cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portion 343b is rotated.
2, 343c2, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. Thus, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can idle. Thereby, the drive motor 3
42 can be prevented from breaking down.

When the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 passes through the first state if the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °).
When the left side detection sensor 324L of the 20 is not turned on (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player has intentionally performed an unnecessary operation of holding and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped, for example, by notifying by displaying it on the third symbol display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation.

This makes it possible to select a case where the player has intentionally performed an erroneous operation, to notify only to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the drive motor 342 early,
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor deviates from the initial phase of the disc cam 344, which has the same phase as the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the occurrence of the phase shift, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left detection sensor 353L of the protection cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting that the driving device 340 has entered the state, it can be specified that the driving device 340 has entered the first initial state, and the control of the driving motor 352 is resumed with that state as the initial position (the driving motor 342 is controlled by the driving device 340). Even if a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c by resetting the initial phase), control is performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are re-aligned. It can be performed.

With this, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342
It is possible to prevent a deviation between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, it is possible to perform an effect by appropriately operating the tilting device 310.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle around the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

FIGS. 40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 40, the disc cam 3 is moved from the state shown in FIG.
FIG. 41 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been further rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW from the state shown in FIG. 40. In FIG. 42, the disc cam 344 is moved backward (in the direction of arrow CW) from the state shown in FIG.
FIG. 43 shows a state where the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the arrow CW direction from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 31
0 stands up to the second state via the first state shown in FIG. On the other hand, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 3, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG.

This is due not only to the fact that the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as going from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG.
Is rotated in the arrow CW direction, this is because the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is not released even if the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the releasing member 346 from below. In this case, the releasing member 346 is lifted by the engaging rib 344c, and the rotating claw is rotated. Member 3
No load in the direction of pushing up 47 occurs. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's viewpoint, FIG. 38 to FIG. 40 and FIG.
Up to the first state shown in FIG. 4, both seem to be the same operation, and the movement after the first state is different from that of FIG. 41 or FIG.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state is determined by the drive motor 342.
(See FIG. 39). However, due to the difference in the change in the drive sound due to the change in the number of revolutions of the drive motor 342, the player notices the mode of the control being performed, and the effect to be executed from now on. There is a risk that the player will be grasped and lose interest of the player. Also, the tilting device 3
When the operation of suddenly stopping the motor 10 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves toward the first state from the state shown in FIG.
Is different only in its direction, so that it is difficult for a player to grasp the rotation direction in the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves to the first state when the degree of expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, it is confirmed whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state.
Since the player can grasp the change in the degree of expectation of the effect, the player is informed that the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. The movement of the tilting device 310 can be watched.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the driving motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. The device 340 can be prevented from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) suddenly in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the drive motor 3
42 can be eliminated, and the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, a case where the tilting device 310 performs an up / down operation without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player performs an operation of pushing down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 44, the disk cam 3 is moved from the first initial state of the driving device 340 (see FIG. 25).
FIG. 44 shows a state in which the reference numeral 44 has been rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 44).
The disc cam 344 has an angle at which the overhang portion 344c1 does not pass through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346.
The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhang portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2 are engaged with the engagement portion of the release member 346. By rotating the disc cam 344 reciprocally while maintaining the positional relationship that does not pass through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can reciprocate up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 changes in the backward rotation direction (
44 (clockwise direction in FIG. 44), the tilting device 31 is maintained in a state shown in FIG.
When the player moves up and down, even if the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 do not engage, and the player releases the hand to release the tilting device 310.
Moves upward from the first state (the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotating claw member 347 is engaged with the tilting device 310), and an operation mode in which the vertical motion is continued can be implemented. .

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, a difference in the effect is provided between the above-described first operation mode and the second operation mode and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a different meaning from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. The user can know whether the user has been moving up or down in the third operation mode.

The difference in the effect is that the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). Is performed) when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even after releasing the hand after pushing the tilting device 310). If the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since an opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Although the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up in the first embodiment has been described, the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment has the When the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 23
48 is configured to perform a sliding operation. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 45A is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 according to the second embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 5 (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a side view of the release member 2346.

FIGS. 46A and 46B are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking operation of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. .

In FIG. 46 (a), the rotating plate member 2347 has the second spring S
FIG. 46B shows a state in which the rotation plate member 2347 rotates to the end position against the release member 2346 against the urging force of the second spring SP2. The small angle state is illustrated. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated by being in contact with the disk cam 344 is in a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the convex pin 3).
46b is located at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b) (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a shaft portion 341c (
As the functional members pivotally supported by the releasing member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47), the rotating member 2347 is provided on the opposite side of the releasing member 2346 with the rotating plate member 2347 interposed therebetween. And a slide claw member 2348 configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of FIG. In the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed in a shape curved so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and a forward end at an upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b projecting in the shape of a hook (to the left in FIG. 45) and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to overlap in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper of FIG. 47A). A reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the bending portion 2348a, and a protruding pin 2348d protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c are mainly provided. Prepare.

The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to a length slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is
In a state of being fitted inside the 347f, it is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is provided on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is used for a bottom plate 2311 of a tilting device 2310 described later.
This is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force to be attracted to a.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion for reinforcing the slide claw member 2348.

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member inserted into the functional long hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is formed of a metal rod inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. Release member 234
6 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, and the protruding pin 2348d
The slide claw member 2348 is slid by being pushed by the side surface of 46e.

The rotating plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c,
In addition to the pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the sliding operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a support elongated hole 2347g into which the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end of the rotary plate member 2347. The side surfaces of the pair of plate-like portions facing each other are such that the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated forward (see FIG. 46 (counterclockwise), the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47).
Is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered at.

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). The projecting pin 2348 is provided in the supporting long hole 2347g.
When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved in a state where d is inserted, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and it is possible to prevent the slide claw member 2348 from wobbling. it can.

The release member 2346 includes a functional support hole 2346e that is a long hole formed in the thickness direction, in addition to the shaft support hole 346a, the projection pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engagement portion 346d. .

The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length formed by a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. A hole 2346e1, a second long hole 2346e2 extending from one end of the first long hole 2346e in a direction inclined in a direction opposite to the shaft support hole 346a,
Mainly equipped.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 moves to the rail portion 234.
It slides along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 keeps the moving speed of the protruding pin 2348d without time delay for the movement of the releasing member 2346. Reflected on speed.

That is, when the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 is quickly slid, while when the rotation speed of the release member 2346 is reduced, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 is also reduced.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along the arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional long hole 2346e is directed in a straight line direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, a force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the release member 2346 causes the slide claw member 2 to rotate.
Although the 347 may slide, the slide claw member 2347 does not slide when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled in the large angle state. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the slide claw member 2348 is engaged with the tilting device 2310, so that the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising.

FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in a time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 47, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is connected to the release member 234.
48. FIG. 48 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. 47 to engage the release member 2346. 49 shows a state in which the portion 346d is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG.
2 shows a state restored by the urging force.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet 2311a1 and the hook 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310 is pressed.
Since the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released by the change in the posture of 10, the tilting device 2310 does not apply a large load to the slide claw member 2348.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet part 2311a1 and the hook-shaped part 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, when the release member 2346 operates quickly, the operation of the tilting device 2310 also becomes quick.

Accordingly, the slide claw member 2348 is caused to slide at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction by the urging force of the torsion spring 315, thereby causing the slide claw member 2348 to rotate backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a different speed from the upward movement when the restriction of the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is released by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the releasing member 2346 is released, the releasing member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 returns to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the operation mode increases, the association between the operation mode and the jackpot expectation degree makes it easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of prefetching. Attention can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-like portion 234 of the slide claw member 2348 is raised.
8b and the magnet 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 by magnetic attraction.
Therefore, by securing a large magnetic force, the load applied to the tilting device 2310 can be increased as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315.

That is, normally, when the player places his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 and the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. (Even if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, FIG.
In the state shown in (1), the tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner of lifting the player's hand.

Thereby, when the tilting device 2310 is raised, a difference can be provided in the load in the rising direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing a hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in the load with the degree of expectation of the jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading. Can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player. However, the operating device 3300 in the third embodiment is described. Is configured so that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or in the state of being pushed by the player. You. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right detecting piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate 311a of the case main body 3311 and the left detecting piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). A left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position perpendicular to the axis and at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane disposed at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR,
The extension length is shorter than the left detection piece 311 gL in the first embodiment.

FIGS. 51A and 51B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. FIG.
1A, the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51B, the tilting device 331 is in the first state.
A state in which 0 is being pushed is shown. Also, FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b)
In order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are indicated by solid lines. In addition, a portion where each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R overlaps with each of the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51A, when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3
311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, and the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is connected to the left detecting sensor 324L.
While the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).
.

By detecting a change in the state of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing, it is in the state of being pushed. , Or in the state of returning.

That is, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing. The left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

FIGS. 52A and 52B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. FIG.
FIG. 2A shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, and FIG.
FIG. 2B illustrates a state where the tilting device 3310 is moving from the end of the pushing to the first state. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R overlap the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), in a state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detecting sensor 324L and the right detecting piece 311 is inserted.
11gR is inserted through the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the ON state).

As shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state arranged at the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detecting sensor 324L. The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing. Sensor 324L is ON and right detection sensor 324R is ON
By detecting that the state has changed from the state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the state of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 and the tilting device 3
When an auxiliary load for raising the 310 is applied, the voice coil motor 352 is tilted during the upward movement of the tilting device 3310, rather than the voice coil motor 352 colliding with the tilting device 3310 during the downward movement of the tilting device 3310. Colliding the device 3310 can provide a load that effectively raises the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in operation, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 310 after pushing the tilting device 3310 from the first state is operated.
The ascending speed of 310 decreases. In this case, even if the player performs a continuous tapping operation on the tilting device 3310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the hand of the player, and the continuous tapping operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 effectively, the tilting device 3310 can be compared with a case where the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the tilting device 3310
Can be performed comfortably.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where the tilting device 310 is pressed by the player. However, the operating device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is described. Is a mode in which the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 during the change from the second state to the first state is detected, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed based on the detection result. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is protruded in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding protrusion 311j of the case main body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This is a part for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

FIGS. 54A and 54B are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating a pressing operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 54A, the tilting device 431 is used.
0 is the second state, and in FIG. 54B, the tilting device 4310 is shifted from the state shown in FIG.
Is pressed, and the front detection piece 4311k passes downward through the lower detection sensor 4321e. In FIGS. 54A and 54B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54A and 54B, the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e at the front side of the bottom plate 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are sensors of a photocoupler type, and are disposed in such a manner that the detection grooves are oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass therethrough. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on a circular orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing down the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k is set to the upper detection sensor 4
321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e in order. By detecting the interval of the passage timing, the magnitude of the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be determined, and whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

Here, in the case where the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which the acceleration can be applied is long). The upper limit of the operation speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no deceleration means, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 robust as a safety measure when the player pushes with full power, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the pushing end may be built in, and the tilting device 4310 may be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who decides to perform the pushing operation gently, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it is easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 may not be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the intervals of the timings of switching between the ON state and the OFF state, a strong reaction force is applied to the tilting device 4310 until it is not necessary. Can be prevented.

That is, for example, when the interval between the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned off. If the driving is not performed and the above-described timing interval is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

Accordingly, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is low, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated with a small force. Pushing operation can be performed.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, the tilting device 4310
Not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the pushing end can be applied as the reaction force against Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG.
The voice coil motor 352 is driven before the movable member 11j extends below the lower frame member 4320, and the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310. You.

As a result, the tilting device 4310 is pushed while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out.
The impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the voice coil motor 352 and the voice coil motor 352 collide.

FIGS. 55A and 55B are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. FIG.
5A illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55B illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end.

In FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the lower frame member 4 is provided for easy understanding.
The outer shapes of the upper frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines,
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 35
2 is shown by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second state at a high speed, the projecting protrusion of the tilting device 4310 is in a state in which the tilting device 4310 is reaching the pushing end from the first state. The set portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are in contact with each other.

When the tilting device 4310 is pushed in, the direction in which the projecting protrusion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352. The force of the pushing operation can be consumed by moving the button. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be applied, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction like a disk brake, but has a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force. Therefore, damage to members is suppressed, and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), since the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 have already contacted each other, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Accordingly, the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 contact each other is suppressed, and the deceleration of the tilting device 4310 from the first state to the pushing end is suppressed. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55B, when the tilting device 4310 is disposed at the pushing end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction, and stops descending. Therefore, it is unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55B, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). This allows
After the tilting device 4310 is pushed to the end and pushed, the effect of transmitting vibration to a player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310 can be performed.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of performing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 disposed at the pushing end position.

Next, an operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the tilting device 31 is rotated by vibrating the voice coil motor 352.
Although the case where vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes in 0 has been described, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is configured such that the lower frame member 5320 has the weight member 5 arranged at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric.
A drive motor 5411 for rotating the drive motor 412 is provided, and vibration is transmitted to a player touching the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, differences between the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment.
FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the operation device 5300 is different from the operation device 300 in the first embodiment in that the lower frame member 320 is a lower frame member 5320 and the driving device 340 is different from the operation device 300 in the first embodiment.
Is a driving device 5340, and the voice coil motor 35
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

A vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411 is provided on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch is provided on the drive device 5340. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412.
410, a transmission device 5410, a flexible member 5420 which accommodates the drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410 and is made of a flexible material, and a bottomed plate having an open upper surface. And the lower frame member 53.
And a housing member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the main body 20.

The transmission device 5410 includes a driving motor 5411 formed of a rotating electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a rotation shaft of the driving motor 5411 pivotally supporting a portion corresponding to a pivot. And mainly comprising.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of right and left fixed portions 5411a formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on which the shaft projects.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra, and is eccentrically supported by the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is changed, and the drive motor 5411 is configured to vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 includes a main body 5421 having a cylindrical container shape having a bottom on the side opposite to the side where the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction of the drive motor 5411, and a main body 5421 in an assembled state. The left and right sides of the main body 5421 are connected to a pair of rib-shaped legs 5422 protruding in the form of a rib, and the left and right rib-shaped legs 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body 5421. Attitude maintaining section 5423 in which fixing section 5411a is embedded
And a pair of protruding legs 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body 5421 in a pair.

The main body 5421 has the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411 and has a container-shaped depth. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body 5421, the axial end face of the drive motor 5411 and the open end face of the main body 5421 are formed on the same plane. In this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-shaped legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the left and right rib-shaped legs 5422 are provided by the posture maintaining portions 5423 on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is greater than that of the lower rib-shaped leg 5422.

Since the protruding leg portion 5424 is protruded in a columnar shape, the load can be easily concentrated on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Accordingly, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the flexible member 54 with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 is changed.
The resolution of the degree of deformation 20 can be made fine.

In the assembled state, the housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and a weight member 5 adjacent to the first housing portion 5431.
The second storage portion 5432 in which the first storage portion 412 is stored, the first storage portion 5431 and the second storage portion 5
And a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of 432.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is adjusted until the lower rib-shaped leg 5422 reaches the bottom.
When the load applied during insertion is released (assembly load released state), the projection leg portion 5424 is set to have a depth that projects from the upper surface.

The depth of the second storage portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 to apply the flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembly load state), the depth is set so as to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

The concave groove 5433 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth dimension slightly extended below the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in an assembly load state. You.

FIG. 59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59 (a). )
FIG. 60 is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. In FIG. 59A, a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Also,
In FIG. 59 (a), when the tilting device 310 is set to the first state, the first region S51, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310, and the player is pushed three times from the first state into the player. An end area S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed at the end position, is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), a protruding leg portion 5424 is protruded in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as a rotation axis. Therefore, the tilting device 310
The maximum amount of deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change (see FIG. 56) can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodation portion 5432 in the assembly load release state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the protruding legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extending direction. Therefore, the protruding legs 5424 can be evenly pushed right and left on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, so that it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right (when tilting left and right on the sheet of FIG. 59B) at the time of pressing. Thus, the protruding leg 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of FIG. 59 (b).

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 is
And a pair of through holes 5321d formed so as to be able to insert thereinto. Since the width of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding leg 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is protruded. When pressed against the leg 5424, deformation of the projecting leg 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.
Accordingly, the deformation of the shape of the projecting leg 5424 is suppressed, and the main body 5421 together with the projecting leg 5424 is suppressed.
Can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

FIGS. 60A and 60B are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59A. Note that FIG. 60A shows the assembly load released state, and FIG.
At 0 (b), the assembly load state after the protruding leg 5424 is pushed inward of the first accommodation portion 5431 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59A). Illustrated. The outer shapes of the second housing portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, the vibration device 540 is changed from the assembly load released state.
When a load is applied to the lower leg 0424 and the assembly load state is reached, the protruding leg 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg 5
As the 422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60B, the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force for pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the end position, the tilting device 310 is pushed. It is possible to reduce the impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57).
Further, since the load is based on the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38) is used. The lifting speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is reduced. In this case, even if the player performs the continuous tapping operation of the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the hand of the player, and the continuous tapping operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 effectively, the tilting device 310 can be used as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 moves upward only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 60A, in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not abut on the inner wall of the second storage portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even when the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in the assembly load released state, no vibration occurs due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the minute vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and the accommodation member 543.
Transmission to 0 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the main body 542 of the flexible member 5420 in the assembly load state.
1 is configured in such a manner that the upper and lower protruding legs 5424 and the lower rib-shaped legs 5422 are allowed to be displaced up and down by deformation.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg 5422 is slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be reduced, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

The main body 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg 54
22 extend in the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body 5421 and are arranged in a pair on the left and right at uniform intervals from the center axis to the right and left. The radially outer end of the 5422 is deformed in such a manner as to move right and left outward (in which the resistance is smaller at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg 5422) (see FIG. 60B).
In this case, since the projecting direction of the rib-shaped leg 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg 5422 can act in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second housing portion 5432 collide with each other is reduced by the lower rib-like leg portion 54 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421.
22 can partially absorb the elastic force. Thus, the displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

FIGS. 61A and 61B are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59A.

61 (a) and 61 (b) illustrate an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) illustrates a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation axis. In (b), a state where the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed below the rotation axis is illustrated. FIG.
In FIG. 1 (a) and FIG. 61 (b), the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player, and the terminal region S52 is pressed.
The state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state of occupying is illustrated.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is placed on the upper side in the assembly load state, the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is moved to a position where the distance from the lower bottom of the second storage portion 5432 becomes the distance Q1. The axis is arranged. Note that, in the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is a distance equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in an assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412
2 (rubs). Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared to the assembly load released state, so that different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

The contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 causes the weight member 5412 as a repulsive force.
Is generated upward (FIG. 61 (b) upward). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 move close to and away from each other in the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is changed in the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ). By this repulsive force, the flexible member 5 and the drive motor 5411 supporting the weight member 5412
Since the 420 moves upward, the force by which the flexible member 5420 pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) back upward (in the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310) can be reinforced.

As described above, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is applied to the flexible member 542.
By adjusting the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 by configuring a combination of a force that is generated as an elastic recovery force of zero and a force that is generated by abutment between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. be able to.

That is, after the tilting device 310 starts to contact the protruding leg portion 5424, the terminal region S52 (FIG. 59).
(A), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is generated as a force to push the tilting device 310 back, and after the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the weight member 5412 is reached.
The repulsive force between the second storage portion 5432 and the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes the tilting device 310 back. Accordingly, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the termination region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made lighter and the impact during the pushing operation can be reduced satisfactorily. This adjustment can be performed while the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is maintained. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is used due to the difference in detection timing. ) Is determined to be higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 is used to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320.
It is desired that the load on the tilting device 310 be increased. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than the specific speed, the weight member 5412 is previously operated so as to be in the downward (see FIG. 61B) posture.

Thus, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 is determined by the rotation shaft of the second housing portion 543.
2 can be raised upward from the lower end of the inner wall by a radius Ra. Thereby, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 is The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pressed down by the same amount by the tilting device 310, the compression size of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A). By doing so, it is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, the contact of the member occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the transmission device 5410 and the tilting device 310. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player pushing the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the transmission range of the vibration can be widened. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum of the pushing or a part of the side of the hand can be used. Vibration can be transmitted to the player via the. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation where the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the player tilts the device 310 (see FIG. 56).
Only when the vibration device 5400 forms the assembly load state by pushing the
Vibration is generated when the 412 and the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed, and the pushing operation of the player is detected. The vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the player.

That is, in the case where the player performs the pushing operation in a mode in which the player releases his / her hand immediately after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 (the mode of pushing in a pulse), the vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 is pushed in. In such a case, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated until the player releases his / her hand (the start of the vibration cannot be made in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the tilting device 310 is pressed, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance and the vibration is ready to be generated, so that the vibration can be transmitted simultaneously with the pressing of the tilting device 310. Thereby, the player can experience the effect by the vibration.

In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing portion 5431. Therefore, the drive motor 5411
Even if is driven, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

Accordingly, the state where vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The drive device 5340 is different from the drive device 340 in the first embodiment in a disk cam 5344 and a transmission shaft 5343. Other components are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed at the center of a pair of disk cams 5344 composed of a left disk cam 5344L and a right disk cam 5344R.

FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Note that the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 534
Since 4L has a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arms A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft 5343 are arranged at the connection portion with the transmission shaft 5343. It is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R is moved from the disk portion to the circular rib 344 at the center position.
a support cylinder portion P1 extending in a tubular shape to the side where b is disposed, and an axially symmetrical elongated hole shape extending along the axial direction of the support cylinder portion P1 to a position approximately half the extension distance. A long hole recess C1 recessed from the disc portion, and an axial end of the support tubular portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1 extend toward the disc portion along the axial direction. And a pair of holding arm portions A1.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as a region recessed in the long hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a remaining without being recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged with the elongated hole concave portion C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to do.

The long hole concave portion C1 is formed so that the shape of the concave cross section is slightly longer than the width of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is in a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the long hole concave portion C1 (
(Longitudinal direction).

Further, the opposing surfaces of the long hole concave portion C1 are configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed in an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. Thereby, the columnar member 5
343a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

The holding arm portion A1 is formed from a surface of a pair of arm portions facing each other,
An engagement protrusion A1a is provided to protrude in a direction approaching the partner's arm. Engagement protrusion A1a
Engages with the distal end of the cylindrical member 5343a at the time of connection with the transmission shaft 5343 to prevent the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disk cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engaging projection A1a is the engaging groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
4 is formed from a shape that matches the arc shape. As a result, as compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface, the radial overlapping length in the state where the engaging projection A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 (FIG. 65) (B) the length in the left-right direction).

The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (a long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connection pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is concave along the axis near the axis. (A side surface on the opening side of C1) and a surface position.

Thereby, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (the lower side in FIG. 63B) with respect to the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65B). reference). Therefore, as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a outside the concave surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63B), the length of the cylindrical member 5343a projecting from the concave surface portion C2 is set to be longer.
It can be shortened by the thickness of the e-ring (see FIG. 65 (b)).

Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (space required for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction of the right disk cam 5344R (direction parallel to the surface). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the recessed area (radial area) of the recessed surface portion C2.
Thus, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 shows the transmission shaft 5343.
It is a front exploded perspective view of. The difference between the transmission shaft 5343 and the transmission shaft 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fitting groove 5343a3 formed by a fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof and a fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in front view.
The clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixed portion 5343a1 with the groove interposed therebetween.
When the disk cam 5344 is fitted until the fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning in the axial direction 4 and the e-ring fitted to the fitting groove 5343a3 are reached, the engaging protrusion of the holding arm portion A1 is formed. And an engagement groove 5343a4, which is a groove with which the portion A1a is engaged. In addition, the fitting groove 5343a3 is disposed outside the pair of plates in which the shaft support holes 341b are formed in the left-right direction in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion where the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

Before the e-ring is fitted, the column is formed before the e-ring is fitted because a mechanism in which the e-ring is later fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a portion where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a is formed by the e-ring. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

In a state where the diameter is uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, whereby the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b by the e-ring. And the axial displacement of the disc cam 5344 can be prevented by the e-ring.

With the above-described configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343, the disk cam 5344 is provided.
Can be assembled to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch. That is, when assembling the disc cam 5344 to the transmission shaft 5343, the column member 5343a is connected to the end of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on which the engaging projection A1a is provided. From the opposite end, engage groove 5
343a4 to the position where the engagement projection A1a fits. At this time, the engagement groove 5343a4
Before the engagement protrusion A1a is inserted to the position where the engagement protrusion A1a fits, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a can expand the distance between each other. In this manner, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed. Thereafter, when the distal end of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging protrusion A1a, the engaging protrusion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. Thus, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 functions not only in one-touch assembly but also in this embodiment as a structure for preventing destruction. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

FIG. 65A is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65B is a right disk cam 53 along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG.
FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65A. FIG. 66A is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the right disk cam 5344R in the XVIb-LXVIb line.

FIG. 66 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player applies an overload to the unloaded right disk cam 5344R shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extending distal end portion of the support tubular portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging projection A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extending distal end portion of the support tubular portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the elongated hole concave portion C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the columnar member 5343a to the axial falling displacement is reduced. On the other hand,
As shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connection pin 344d are connected,
Since the cylindrical member 5343a and the right circular cam 5344R are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the right circular cam 5344R, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a to the axial falling displacement increases.

Therefore, when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R by the player forcibly pressing (pulling up) the tilting device 310 (the displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). Is applied, the direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the columnar member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of low resistance,
As shown in (a) and FIG. 66 (b), when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R,
On the plane parallel to the plane of the disk portion, the disk portion is axially deformed with the support shaft r1 connecting the connection pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 as the center. As a result, the position of the distal end of the connecting pin 344d is greater along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R than in the position shown in FIG.
Displace.

FIG. 67A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 67B is a diagram illustrating the operation when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 146 is a partial rear view of the device 5300. 67 (b), the illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are illustrated. In FIG. 67 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft 5343R is shown by a solid line, and the shaft is overloaded due to overload. The outline in the state shown is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 67 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is illustrated, and the state near the connection pin 344d is illustrated in an enlarged manner. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disc cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay on the spot and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load occurs, the right disk cam 5344R can perform the above-described shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be reduced.

In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the manner of connection with the arm member 345 due to the shaft falling deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67A, when the outer periphery of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd by the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62),
The shaft support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connecting pin 344d are displaced,
In order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in an axially inclined state.

Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67 (a) due to the shaft falling deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the protruding tip side are right circular. The position is shifted along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This displacement is caused by the right disk cam 534.
Since the displacement between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of 4R can be partially absorbed, the drive motor 342 (
In the case where (see FIG. 62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disk cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other by the axial deformation of the disk cam 5344. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped and fixed. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates backward (in the direction of the arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but is repelled by the second spring. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, since the rotating claw member 347 is stopped by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stopped,
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed down by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 is repelled in the direction. Is the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347.
Act on. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 abuts against the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disc cam 5344, the first member does not depend on the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344.
Of the elastic force of either the spring SP1 or the second spring SP2, the disc cam 5344
The elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344 can be increased.
Thereby, the load applied to the disk cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased,
Since the consumption of the driving force of the driving motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
5 can be reduced irrespective of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344.

In the present embodiment, since the right disk cam 5344R is formed to have a line-symmetrical shape with respect to a straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). The right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed irrespective of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the displacement direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). Shaft can be deformed by resistance.

FIG. 68A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 68B is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 146 is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 68B, illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted. In FIG. 68 (a), in order to facilitate understanding,
The outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft bar 5343 is shown by a solid line, and the outer shape of the right-hand cam 5344R that is overloaded and the shaft is tilted is shown by an imaginary line.

FIG. 68A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and falls down by the angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. Is shown of the player's hand gripping.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the player holds the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not, the right disk cam 5344.
The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the R axis falling, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

Note that the items described as the right disk cam 5344R also apply to the left disk cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, and an overload occurs. When,
The right disk cam 5344R performs a tilting operation in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of the tilting operation in the axial direction, the occurrence of overload can be noticed at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, the drive motor 34
2 is driven during one rotation of the right disk cam 344R, the detection hole 3 of the right disk cam 344R is rotated.
Although 44eR passes through the right detection sensor 353R, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate.
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right detection sensor 353R and the input to the right detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, by the time the overload is detected, the right circular cam 3
There is a problem that the detection of overload is delayed because a time period for rotating the 44R by a predetermined angle is required.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disc cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 66 (b)), the overload occurs. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a detection method, for example, the engagement rib 34 is provided between the support tubular portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c.
A method using the notification device E1 fixed to 4c is illustrated (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 66A).
.

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input unit, and is disposed in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arms A1 intersects with the engagement rib 344c. In addition, the input section is disposed in a manner to protrude toward the support cylinder P1. In a no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65 (b)), and in an overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder P1 are formed in contact with each other (see FIG. 65). 66 (b)). Thus, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, an operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connection pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344, the engagement rib 344c are formed of separate members, and are configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, differences between the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, since the right disk cam 6344R is formed by mirroring the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will not be described.

As shown in FIG. 69, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disk cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d, similar to the first embodiment.
And a disc member 6344L1 provided with a detection hole 344eL and supported by the column member 343a.
And a ring member 6344L2 that is rotatably supported coaxially with the disk member 6344L1 and relatively rotates with the disk member 6344L1.

The disk member 6344L1 has the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment disposed at the center position of the disk portion, and is annularly and axially spaced apart from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in a radially outward direction. An annular rib 6344f protruding along is provided.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring main body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. And receiving gear teeth 6344i disposed radially outward in the thickened portion.

The annular main body 6344g is formed such that its inner peripheral diameter is larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b. In the assembled state, the annular main body 6344g is externally fitted to the circular rib 344b, so that the central shaft portion 344a is formed. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable about.

Note that the end surface of the annular body 6344g on the side of the disk member 6344L1 in the axial direction is the annular rib 63.
44f. As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the surface of the disk member 634 is reduced.
The contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the contact is made with 4L1. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i are meshed with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Accordingly, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In the present embodiment, the rotation speed of the ring member 6344L2 is set to
(While the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times, the disk member 63
The number of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the number of receiving gear teeth 6344i are set in such a manner that the 44L1 makes one rotation).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft bar 343, and is an auxiliary column member 6348 arranged in a posture parallel to the column member 343a.
a and the second fixed to the auxiliary column member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b and the ring member 63 fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348
And a reduction transmission gear 6348c meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the 44L2.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, a description will be given of how the tilting device 310 is lifted up from the first state of the tilting device 310 by a plurality of types after the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released.

FIGS. 71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 6300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 71 illustrates a state similar to the state illustrated in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344R2 has rotated one rotation in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) from the state illustrated in FIG. (A state in which the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by 1/3 in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) while the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by more than one rotation and then reversed by that amount). Is illustrated. In FIG. 73, FIG.
The state where the ring member 6344L2 has rotated by a predetermined angle in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) from the state shown in FIG.

Here, from the state shown in FIG. 71, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is actuated by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operating device 300 according to the first embodiment, the reaching position when the tilting device 310 is lifted instantaneously (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is the second state. It was limited to the position where it was arranged (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relatively, the connecting pin 344d, which is a support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c are provided. Of the tilting device 31 can be changed.
It is possible to increase the types of arrival positions of 0.

That is, when the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG.
10 instantaneously rises due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state where it is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state (see FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) releases the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 71 and the releasing from the state shown in FIG. 72 by the rotating claw member 347. Without waiting for the rotation of 344)
And the position at which it reaches can be changed.

Accordingly, for example, when the gaming machine is configured in such a manner that the degree of expectation of the effect is changed by a difference in height at which the tilting device 310 instantly rises and reaches from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, there is no limitation on whether to increase the degree of expectation of the tilting device 310 ascending or to increase the degree of expectation of the type where the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is lower.

However, by keeping the rising position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation is maximized, the expectation is improved. Can be associated with the magnitude of the amount of displacement by which the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, the player can be motivated to confirm to which position the tilting device 310 is raised, so that the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can be encouraged to do so. Therefore, the tilting device 3
Regardless of the ten production modes, it is possible to suppress a game method in which the tilting device 310 is randomly operated.

Next, an operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 includes a disc member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are provided on separate members, and the separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they can be relatively rotated. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as the above-described embodiments,
The description is omitted. First, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 74A is a front view of a right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, and FIG.
(B) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and (a) of FIG.
FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right circular cam 7344R taken along the line XVa-LXXVa.
FIG. 74 is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74 (a). Note that the right disk cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, and a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R is a disk member 7344R having a central shaft portion 344a through which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in an assembled state.
1 and a ring member 73 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1.
44R2 and an engaging member 7 having an engaging portion 7630 which is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and which fits into the equally-divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2.
344R3.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center,
A detection hole 344eR is provided in a portion extending in a flange shape radially outward from the edge of the cup.
And the engagement rib 344c is partially omitted (the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first
This is a member having a shape (the space between the drawing portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in a surface state in an assembled state, and is a first circular recessed portion 7 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
410, a second circular concave portion 7420 which is a circular concave portion having a diameter smaller than the first circular concave portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and a first overhang portion 344c1 and a first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 that is formed in the radial direction therebetween, and a radially outer side from the back side surface (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) of the second circular recessed portion 7420 near the insertion hole 7430. And a fixing projection 7440 that is provided in a protruding manner.

The insertion hole 7430 is inserted from an intermediate position between the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2.
The first elongated hole 7431 which is an elongated rectangular elongated portion along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at the shifted position, and the end of the first elongated hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1. A second elongated hole 74 which is a rectangular elongated hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1.
32 and the second elongated hole 743 with the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 on the first elongated hole 7431 side as a fulcrum.
And a return portion 7433 that extends to the 32nd side.

The size of the second long hole 7432 in the width direction (short direction) is smaller than the size of the first long hole 7431 in the width direction (short direction), and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. direction(
(Shorter direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 75 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is inserted into the second long hole 743.
2 so as to be movable outward.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and has a sufficient height to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (a)
FIG. 76 is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG.
76 (c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 is
A ring-shaped plate portion 7510 having a ring-shaped plate shape on which the 44d is protruded, and the ring-shaped plate portion 7510
And a thick portion 7520 that extends in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion and has a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the depth of the first circular recess 7410 and an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner diameter of the first circular recess 7410. You. Thus, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the resistance of the relative rotation from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to reach (not interfere with) the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75 (a)). Is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recess 7420. This prevents the resistance of the relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from being excessive while enabling the engaging member 7344R3 to be able to operate in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 75A) in the assembled state. can do.

The thick portion 7520 has a deformed through hole 7521 formed in the axial direction, and a concave portion formed in the deformed through hole 7521 radially outward at regular intervals in the circumferential direction (in the present embodiment, equally divided into 5). And an equidistant concave portion 7522 to be provided.

The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is different from a shape that is disposed radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3 described later is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. Be composed.

FIG. 77A is a front view of the engagement member 7344R3, and FIG.
) Is a side view of the engagement member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)), the engaging member 7344R3 is located outside the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 arranged on the side and the rear end portion of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 (FIG. 77 (
b) An extending portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the right end portion, and an engagement extending from the leading end of the extending portion 7620 in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 77B). Mainly includes a portion 7630 and a coil spring CS1 formed of a coil spring disposed on the side of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 facing the engaging portion 7630.

The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611 that is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the distal end of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extending portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state,
When the coil spring CS1 is pushed inward in the radial direction in opposition to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip has an extension length projecting inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction slightly smaller than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends in the assembled state with a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

As will be described later, the engagement member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

Referring to FIG. 78, a method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described. FIG. 78 (a)
Is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is an arrow LXX of FIG. 78 (a).
FIG. 78 (c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (d) is an arrow LXXVIII of FIG. 78 (c) when viewed from the direction VIIIb.
FIG. 78 (e) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the d direction, and FIG.
FIG. 78 (f) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e).

In FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 78 (c) and FIG.
FIG. 78 (e) and FIG. 78 (f) show a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the 344R1, and in FIG. 78 (e) and FIG. 78 (f), the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344 are attached to the disk member 7344R1.
The state where R3 is inserted is shown. Also, in order to facilitate understanding, FIG.
In FIG. 78 (d) and FIG. 78 (f), the illustration of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 is omitted.

As a method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engagement member 734 is inserted into the first long hole 7431.
The engaging portion 7630 of 4R3 is inserted (see FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b)). As described above, the width dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the width dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the engaging portion 7 is moved in the depth direction of FIG.
The engaging member 7344R3 is slid to the position where the position of the fixing protrusion 7440 coincides with the position of the fixing member 7344.

At the position after this movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the displacement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 78 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 is suppressed. The member 7344R3 can be held immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

In addition, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first long hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven out of the second long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the direction in which the second elongated hole 7432 extends, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved by the elastic recovery force to the second position. It enters inside the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

In a state in which the second elongated hole 7432 is inserted inward, the tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extending portion 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, and the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (See FIG. 78 (d)), so that the movement of the extension 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. Thereby, the engagement member 73
Since the movement of 44R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the position of engagement member 7344R3 from shifting during operation.

After the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disk member 7344R1, the engaging member 734
While the 4R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1, the disk member 734 is pressed.
The ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of 4R1. When the load is released from the engagement member 7344R3, the engagement portion 7630 moves in the radially outward direction D7 by the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. By this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally-divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. In addition,
The right disk cam 7344L has a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

Next, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that in FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347 are used.
The disk cam 7344 is shown as a center, and other unnecessary parts are not shown.

The rotating claw member 7347 of this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the length of the guide slot 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes, the projecting pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement.

The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80A) of the main body portion is cut obliquely in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

In FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80 (b) and FIG. 81, the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79 (a)). Are illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 79 (a), the release member 7346 has an engagement member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R.
FIG. 79 (b) shows a state in which the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), and FIG. 80 (b) shows a state in which the release member 7346 starts rotating.
(A) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 and is pushed to the end, and in M6-2 (b), the disk member 73 is changed from the state shown in FIG.
FIG. 81 shows a state in which the right disc cam 7344R is rotated in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG. 80B, and the engaging member 7344R3 is moved from the release member 7 in FIG.
The state after separation from 346 is shown. It should be noted that FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG.
(A) and FIG. 80 (b) show a state in which the release member 7346 has reached the end of a range in which it can rotate relative to the rotating claw member 7347 (a small angle state).

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in a state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contacting, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward,
The state of projecting outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79 (b), a release member 734 is provided on the outermost diameter side surface of the engagement member 7344R3.
In a state where the engaging portion 346d of No. 6 is in contact, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 are in a small angle state.

In the present embodiment, when the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320, the small angle state of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 is formed. Inner peripheral surface and first overhang portion 344c1 of engagement rib 344c and first retracting portion 3
The disc cam 7344 is arranged in a positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 in a state where the disc cam 7344 is in contact with the cam 4444 (see FIG. 80A).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the rotation of the disc cam 7344 causes the release member 7346 to rotate toward the small angle state, and when it becomes impossible to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member 7346 is released. From 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disk cam 7344.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backward rotation direction cannot be continued. The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80A). In this pushed-in state, the engagement portion 7630 is disposed radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the modified through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, and as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 734 changes from the state shown in FIG.
Even if 4R1 is rotated, ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to this difference in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 is moved to the one equally-divided recessed portion 75 originally disposed.
22, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the engagement member 73
Since the contact between 44R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes outward in the radial direction, and the engaging portion 7630 is again housed in the equally recessed portion 7522. In this process, one equally recessed portion 7522 in which the engagement portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted.

That is, by passing the process shown in FIG. 79A to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the engagement rib 344c and the arrangement of the connection pin 344d provided on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into concave portions 7522. Can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval of the concave portions (72 degrees).

Referring to FIG. 82, when disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, engagement member 73
The operation of 44R3 will be described. 82 (a), 82 (b), 83 (a) and 8
FIG. 3B is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are illustrated as centers, and other unnecessary parts are not illustrated.

FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b) show how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) in chronological order. In FIG. 82 (a), the release member 734
82 and a state immediately before the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R comes into contact with the engaging member 7344R3. In FIG. 82 (b), the lowering starts by the engagement member 7344R3 abutting against the release member 7346 from above. FIG. 83 (a) illustrates a state where the disc cam 7344 further rotates in the forward rotation direction from the state illustrated in FIG. 82 (b), and FIG. 83 (b) illustrates a state where the release member 7346 is The state after the engagement member 7344R is separated is shown.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates forward, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 rotate backward (FIG. 82 (a)). When rotating in the (circumferential direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 734 are controlled by the elastic force of the first spring SP1.
7 can only be loaded in the forward direction.

Therefore, there is no load enough to push the engagement member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engagement member 7344R3 is in contact with the release member 7346 from when it comes into contact with the release member 7346 until it separates.
R3 maintains a state of projecting outward in the radial direction. Therefore, when rotating the disc cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, the relative rotation of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented.

By changing the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344 from these configurations, the disk member 7
Whether or not the relative rotation between the 344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be switched. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which the relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width as in the first embodiment, Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction in which the relative rotation occurs (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81).

In the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 for relatively rotating the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84).
In this state, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated.

Thereby, a state in which the player is not noticed (a state in which the tilting device 310 stops) is
It can be used as a state for changing the relative posture of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 at a position that is not visible to the player.

With reference to FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, a description will be given of a plurality of types of modes in which the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state according to the present embodiment. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of operation device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B by releasing the rotation claw member 347 (disc cam 7344).
FIG. 85 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship capable of being displaced (without rotating).
FIG. 79 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 has been rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by one of the equally-spaced recesses 7522 through the process described in FIG. 79, and FIG. 84 and FIG.
In both cases, the state where the second overhang portion 344c3 is in contact with the engagement portion 346d is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the rotating claw member 347 is shifted from the first state.
By releasing the fixation by, the movement range in which the tilting device 310 moves immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2) can be changed.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted rearward and downward from the position shown in FIG. It moves to a state where it sinks below the two states.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 3 is moved from the first state.
The position at which 10 reaches immediately by the ascent operation (without rotation of the disc cam 7344) can be changed. Thus, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the power of the operation device 7300 as the effect device can be improved.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described. However, the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes the cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the pachinko machine 8010.
, The vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction. Also, the definition of this direction is shown in FIG.
The same applies to the description with reference to the drawings prior to No. 6.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (unfolded) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. Inner frame 1
FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state opened (deployed) with respect to FIG.
90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed). FIG. It is a front view of machine 8010. In FIG. 90, the reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed with a wooden plate as an upper side and a lower side and aluminum plate as a left and right side. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game arcade by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island facilities. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has a support structure (a hinge 18 and the like) and a locking structure of the inner frame 12 of the outer frame 11. The member may be provided in a game arcade.

As shown in FIG. 89, a front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12. The left side is a rotation base end side (opening / closing base side) and the right side is a rotation tip side in front view. (Opening / closing front end side) so as to be rotatable forward.

As shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening and closing base side) and the right side is the rotation when viewed from the front. It is rotatable rearward as a moving tip side (opening / closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are locked to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. And a function to lock the front frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 12. In these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, an unlocking operation is performed by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed at the front of the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, each is released.

The front frame 14 is rotatably mounted on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57, 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and these front door mounting brackets 57, 58 (the metal fitting 57 is a columnar portion, and the metal fitting 58 is a shaft). The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the inner frame 12 with a metal plate having a hole.

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front side end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 above the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the rear side. It is pivotally supported by a pivot support plate portion 12e having a fitting concave portion 12e1 (see FIG. 126) which is recessed to have a fitable size. The front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped cylindrical shape projecting upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which cylinders having different diameters are vertically connected, the diameter of the upper cylinder is smaller than that of the upper cylinder). (A small shape) is axially supported by being externally fitted to the support pin 19a.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. Various members (illuminated parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) are provided on the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.
And the unit (the operation device 300, the operation handle 51, and the like) are fastened and fixed to form the front frame 14.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window 14c having an opening smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in a front view (see FIG. 86). This window 1
4c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, so that the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, game board 1
3 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89).

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 has a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than the window 14c and having transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) for integrating the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And The fixed frame is made of transparent glass 16a made of synthetic resin.
, 16b, the glass unit 16 is formed as an integrated double-layer glass by bonding the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a, 16b to a fixed frame.

In addition, the glass unit 16 is formed to be colorless and transparent by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, the game area may be formed not colored and transparent but colored and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illuminated parts 8029 to 8033 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window part 14 c in the front frame 14. These illuminated parts 8029-8
In 033, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach, or the like. In addition, the illumination unit 8030 on the upper side of the window 14c incorporates a light emitting unit that lights up when a predetermined error occurs, such as a shortage of payout balls, and a light emitting unit that lights up during payout of a prize ball.

In addition, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member made of punching metal) that covers a speaker assembly 450 that outputs a sound effect or the like according to a game state is provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window 14c. . As shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are swelled toward the near side below the window 14c, and are vertically arranged side by side.

The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them toward the ball firing unit 112a while aligning them in a line. In addition, lower plate 50
Has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the rear side surface of the lower plate 50.

In addition, it is not necessary to provide a portion for storing game balls at a plurality of locations separately in the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is used as a single storage portion. Is also good.

An operation device 300 that is manually operated by the players is provided on the near side of the upper plate 17 (the storage area for the game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to a player's operation is performed on a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. This operation device 300 may be provided in another part such as around the lower plate 50 other than the upper plate 17,
It may be provided at a plurality of locations, or may be a push-button switch as an operation method, and may be configured to be capable of inputting information by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicating with the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicating with the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( FIG. 92).

A payout ball receiving portion 143 that projects rearward and is opened upward is formed at an upper corner portion (a corner portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) of the passage forming unit 140, and the payout ball receiving portion 143 is formed. 143 is divided into right and left by a partition wall 144, thereby forming a passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, respectively.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion that forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul ball received in foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and is then discharged to lower plate 50. The foul ball passage 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

In addition, the foul ball passage 145 joins with a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which unfired balls flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 are guided by a ball removal operation by the player. It is formed as follows.

On the back side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to upper right and left corners, and bulge to the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the electric decoration portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the internal substrates and one end of the electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14 are provided. An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is provided, and the electronic board and the connector are covered by multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

In a portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring passage groove 14h communicated to the left and right electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032, and the electric decoration portions 8031 and An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are pulled out rearward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. It is.

Therefore, when the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is applied to the illumination unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the near side in FIG. 89). A connector of a conductive wiring or a connector having one end connected to the internal substrates of the illumination portions 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic substrate 14i.

The multi-functional cover members 171 attached to the front end of the front frame 14 are disposed as a pair on the upper and lower sides of the inner frame 12 at the front end of rotation.
0 (refer to FIG. 126), it is in a positional relationship facing the front and rear, and can be in contact with each other depending on the situation. The details will be described later.

On the rear side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member formed of a resin material and having an open front side is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame. A long cover member 173 that accommodates wiring in a space is mounted from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a configuration in which the cross-sectional area decreases as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation front end side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a that forms the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring, An upper wall portion 173b, which is disposed in parallel with the lower side of the front frame 14 and is disposed above the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides in plane with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140. It is composed of a shape.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion which is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and the lower wall portion 173a and the upper An upwardly extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upwardly extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that an end portion connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

In other words, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (a wave shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave) while the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall portion 173c. It protrudes to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, a change in the wiring position (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed can be absorbed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

On the back side of the front frame 14, an upwardly extending wall portion 173 c of the long cover member 173 (the front frame 14).
Of the body frame 14a and a vertically long plate portion at the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 and formed of a resin material. And an inverted cup portion 178 that opens downward and has a reverse cup shape.

The reverse cup portion 178 is, for example, a portion for improperly pushing and expanding the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from near the lower hinge 18, and entering the game area to take measures against cheating. It is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the inverted cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed from a resin material,
It is possible to take countermeasures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the end of the piano wire. That is, when the piano wire whose tip is heated enters and is pressed against the inverted cup portion 178, the heat is applied to the inverted cup portion 178.
Can be melted and passed through the inverted cup portion 178 in the same manner as the long cover member 173.
Will also melt. When the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wire accommodated in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burned out. , Making it easier to detect fraud.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is formed in a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and abuts (closes) to each other in plane. Further, since the normal of the lower surface of the inverted cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the inverted cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. When the inverted cup portion 178 is melted, the long cover 173 can be melted with a high probability, so that fraudulent acts can be easily found.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted from the gap forcedly opened to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the distal end thereof becomes a wall portion. 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire proceeds in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 (
(It proceeds in the left-right direction), so that the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

Also, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force given to a person who commits wrongdoing through the piano wire from increasing, for example, the lower wall portion By arranging the detection device for detecting the entry of the piano wire in the space below the 173a, it is possible for the person who commits the wrongdoing to find the wrongdoing before fleeing and to easily secure the person who does the wrongdoing. .

In other words, even if the piano wire is guided into the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the wrongdoing cannot determine it, so that he or she thinks that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, the window 14c).
Through the front end of the piano wire (until the end of the piano wire can be seen from the front side), allowing the wrongdoer to do it naturally (without suspicion that the piano wire has not been inserted correctly). . Therefore, it is possible for the person who commits the misconduct to notice that the misconduct has been found, and to prolong the time required to escape.

Note that the detection device may be a device constituted by a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be provided on the locking mechanism 20RK or on the rear side of the operation handle 51. In the case where the detection device is provided on the operation handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally provided on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the entry of the piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball firing unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided at the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a includes an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball struck by the launching solenoid 701 formed by an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A firing rail 730 that guides the game ball so that it is emitted toward the region between
And a ball feeder 720.

The ball feeder 720 transmits the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) to the firing rail 730.
Supply one by one on top. In this case, the supplied game balls are arranged on a projecting path of a plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. Then, the input of an electric signal to the firing solenoid 701 causes the plunger 702 to move the firing rail 7.
The player moves toward a game ball on the game 30 and the game ball is launched toward a game area. Note that the electric actuator of the ball firing unit 112a is not limited to the firing solenoid 701, and a firing motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball firing unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the firing rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. Has been established. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates in a front-rear direction through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover this through hole from the front side. Fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a body-side upper dish passage portion 161 and a body-side lower dish passage portion 162. The main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 are
A passage is internally formed such that one end is opened toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with a through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end is opened downward. Is changed by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction). In this configuration,
The ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame 1
The payout ball receiving portion 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the fourth unit 4 enters. A front door-side upper plate passage portion 141 is disposed below the main body-side upper plate passage portion 161, and a front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 is disposed below the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the upper dish passage portion 161 on the main body side is provided on the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160.
A shutter 163 is provided for regulating the outflow of the game ball from the lower plate passage 162 on the main body side. The shutter 163 has a blocking position for narrowing the exit portions of both passages and blocking outflow of the game ball,
It is provided so as to be switchable to both positions of an allowance position allowing the outflow of the game ball.

An urging member (a coil spring or the like) for urging the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12, the urging member is attached. The shutter 163 is kept at the blocking position by the force. Thereby, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state where the game balls are stored in the main body-side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls fall down is avoided. I have.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14 resists the shutter 163 against the above-described biasing force. Is pushed back to the allowable position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. In the board 167, the places where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided and the places where the connector CN3 is provided are configured by separate boards. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are connected to the main controller 1
While the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113 while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, the connector CN3 is intended to prevent malfunction by using a different board. by.

With reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, a portion of the front frame 14 below the window 14c will be described. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded and shown. FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are exploded and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window 14c of the front frame 14,
c, on the front side of the upper plate 17, diagonally above and to the right of the lower plate 50, and at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, the operation device 300 is disposed.
A cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the cover.

The cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship to cover the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and has a width substantially equal to the width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right ends of the cover 370 are disposed vertically below the electric decorations 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The cover cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 at least by fastening portions 370a formed at the left and right ends, and has a body bending portion 371 configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project toward the front side. The main body curved portion 371 is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right central portions and the left and right end portions toward the sides closer to each other in the width direction. Hanging portion 372 configured in a V-shape, a main body curved portion 371 and a hanging portion 3
A light-transmitting portion 373 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and fixed to at least one of the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372; and a main body curved portion 371 The left flat support 374 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end, the right flat support 375 formed as a flat on the upper surface of the right end of the main body curved portion 371, and the right flat support 375 from the rear side. And a supporting groove 376 (a tapered shape) in which the width of the recess is increased toward the back side.

The main body curved portion 371 has a front side edge portion having a rounded curved shape, and has a rear side edge portion in a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17, and the upper plate in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). 1
7, and a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300, which is provided continuously with the rear left edge 371a and abuts on the front side edge of the operation device 300. A rear middle edge portion 371b abutting on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and the rear middle edge portion 371b
1b, a rear right edge 371c which is provided on the opposite side of the rear left edge 371a and has a shape matching the front side edge of the ball letting operation unit 40 and which comes into contact with the ball letting operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state. Mainly equipped.

The hanging portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body bending portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported, and which is a right corner cover 38 disposed at the right corner of the front frame 14.
This is a part that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by being formed into a shape that does not create a gap between the operation device 300 and the right corner cover 380 (a shape where contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). Note that the hanging portion 372 is located at a position on the front side with respect to the recessed portion 15a described later,
A screw inserted from below into the bottom plate on which the 5a is formed is screwed into the bottom plate on which the recess 15a is formed.

The light transmitting portion 373 is a portion that can transmit the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and can produce an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. In addition, in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 is arranged close to the lower frame member 320.

In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is arbitrarily determined. In the present embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, light is emitted upward (disposed on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e).
Six LEDs irradiate light downward (disposed on the lower surface of the lighting support part 341e)
Are arranged respectively.

Light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in the LED device 341f passes through different numbers of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the light transmitting unit 373. I do. On the other hand, tilting device 3
When 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310, and then passes through the light transmitting portion 373. .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting unit 373 is smaller than when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Then, the case where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is stronger. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control to change the amount of light), and in accordance with the state change of the tilting device 310. An effect of changing the amount of light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 can be performed.

Further, as another effect control method, it is possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, in accordance with the change of the tilting device 310 from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the light amount is increased (in a stepwise manner) while the tilting device 310 is changed to the first state. By controlling the light amount to change slightly (in a stepwise manner) in accordance with the change from the first state to the second state, light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 373 due to the change in the state of the tilting device 310 is controlled. Can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

The left side flat support portion 374 contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8031 vertically in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. . This can suppress the downward displacement of the illuminated part 8031.

In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the right-side flat support portion 375 vertically contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side flat support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. . Accordingly, the downward displacement of the electric decoration 8032 can be suppressed.

Although details will be described later, the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 are formed by the upper panel unit 40.
When the upper panel unit 400 abuts on the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400 and is displaced downward,
An upward reaction force is generated from 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400. for that reason,
According to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illuminated portion 8031, the illuminated portion 8032, and the cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the vehicle can be widely distributed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end of the illuminated portion 8032 entering from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electric decoration portion 8032 is in a state of entering the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032 and the front end of the right side flat support portion 375. And the position match.

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electric decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. A separate fixing part for fastening the cover 370 and the illuminated part 8032 to each other can be dispensed with.

Below the window 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is provided on the main frame 14a at the back of the main frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) disposed on the front side of the main frame 14a). The passage forming unit 140 is disposed on the body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the body frame 14a) on the rear side of the plate member 14d. The main body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) with the main body frame 14a interposed therebetween. The main body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member (a member constituting the upper plate 17 or the like) disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin penetrates the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire or a piano wire having a heated end is pressed and melted), the front frame is not affected. It functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed, and it is possible to prevent the illustrated wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the open front side is a passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box part 151 fitted to the fitting part 140, and a flat plate-like plate part 152 that covers the back surface of the lower side of the foul ball passage part 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

Since the fitting box 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145, the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the foul ball passage are formed. Not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the 145,
Even when the wire is penetrated in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction, the illustrated wire is
It is possible to prevent entry beyond 40.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back of the foul ball passage 145 and the ball emptying passage 147, a wire exemplified in the passage forming unit 140 is pressed to the right of the lower plate 50 to form a through hole. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized member from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. As a case where such a situation occurs, for example, a wire is pressed against a place where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness before and after the operation device 300 is reduced (a place obliquely above the rear of the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a case where a through hole is opened and the illustrated wire enters is illustrated.

Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation portion rear member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the rear side, and the operation portion rear member 155 has the cylinder lock 20 disposed in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The upper and lower positions are fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the size in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of the left and right long plate member. A through hole 156 formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can penetrate therethrough;
A pair of insertion holes 157, which are bored above and below the 56 and through which screws for fastening and fixing the operation unit rear member 155 to the main body frame 14a, and a portion (left end) which is overlapped on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 are vertically Mainly includes a pair of connecting insertion holes 158 that are formed in parallel with each other, and an opening / closing restricting portion 159 that protrudes rearward from the through hole 156 at the rotation base end side.

The connection insertion hole 158 is formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140.
48 is arranged so as to coincide with the front-back direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is located at a position where the connecting portion 148 coincides with the upper connecting hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
58 is inserted into the connecting through-hole 158 at a position that coincides in the front-rear direction with the protruding portion 148a projecting rearward in a columnar shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of 58. And a screw-in portion 148b formed as a hole into which a screw can be screwed.

With this configuration, when the operation unit rear member 155 is overlapped on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the projecting portion 148a is passed through the upper connection insertion hole 158 so that the passage forming unit 140 and the operation unit rear surface are connected. By aligning the screw with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connecting through hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operation unit rear member 1 can be easily formed.
55 can be fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140.

An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end of the operation portion rear member 155 in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed and the lower edge thereof at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c that extends rearward from a plate that forms the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 so as to divide the region. 148c is
In an assembled state (see FIG. 89), it is formed in an L-shape that can be brought into contact with the wall 158 a in up, down, left, and right directions.

Therefore, in order to align the operation unit rear member 155 with the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connection insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is vertically moved with respect to the extension wall portion 148c. The right and left surfaces make it possible to quickly and easily adjust the position and posture of the operation unit rear member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140.

The opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is disposed in front of and behind the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86).
Under predetermined conditions, the front frame 1 is brought into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13 so that
4 has an effect of restricting the closed state.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that extends toward the rear side of the operation portion rear member 155 and is formed of a synthetic resin. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is harder to bend than when it is formed into a flat plate with the same thickness, and the amount of material required while securing rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open part. Can be reduced. Therefore, the same thickness as the thickness of the other part of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength depends on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low and the strength of the part formed as thin as possible) (Thickness), the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the formability.

The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as rigidity can be secured and the shape can be maintained, and is not limited to a U-shape. For example, as compared with a flat cross section, a cross section of a curved (wave) shape, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wavy cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used.

Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear member 155,
a may be bent to extend from the rear side to the rear side, or may be composed of a metal part extending rearward from another member fixed to the rear side of the main body frame 14a. However, as in this embodiment,
Forming the opening / closing restricting portion 159 from a synthetic resin prevents the plate surface support device 600 from being chipped or dented when it comes into contact with the plate surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed from a metal member. can do. Thereby, the worker who changes the state of the board support device 600 and attaches or detaches the game board 13 can reduce the risk of being injured by touching a chip or a dent formed in the board support device 600.

Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is disposed on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, the cylinder lock further disposed on the rotation distal end side. It is possible to ensure a long interval between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at the location 20. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are locked by mistake when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. it can.

As a path through which a foreign substance such as a wire enters, for example, a path passing through a gap in the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the rear surface of the main body frame 14a even when following the gap of the operation device 300.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying power to the operation device 300 is provided at the right end position of the long cover member 173 in the front and rear direction of the body frame 14a.
a1 (see FIG. 103), the harness HN3 is connected to the protective cover device 350 (
It is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower right corner of the outer peripheral wall of FIG. 57).

Thus, even if a foreign matter such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the substantially case-shaped operation device 300. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign substances such as wires from entering the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

In addition, as the foreign matter that enters the operation device 300, a liquid is considered. For example, a player who feels bad about the game result may pour drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. that time,
The operation device 300 at an affordable position tends to be a prey to which drinking water can be poured, and when no countermeasures are taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 1)
3) may break down.

Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like, but as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it is configured to be separable and independent, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

In addition, on the bottom plate upper surface of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300), a concave portion 15a is formed in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recess 15a is configured as a deep recess.
It is not a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed in some places (for example, see FIG. 13,
The transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the clearances).
The concave portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the liquid that falls below the operation device 300.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is disposed near the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17B), and further, is connected to wiring. Since the portion is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the illumination support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), the liquid such as drinking water is supplied to the drive motor 3
42, it is possible to prevent failure.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the up-down direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that liquid such as drinking water may be splashed. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, the failure of the voice coil motor 352 can be prevented.

With the above-described configuration, even if a player such as drinking water is splashed on the return player, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the player touches the upper surface of the operation device 300 and touches the touched portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from squeezing the business hours.

Below the window 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that FIGS. 93 to 9
FIG. 6 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 have been removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG.

FIG. 93 (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93 (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93 (b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The bundling movable member 180 is a member that is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and that binds the harnesses HN <b> 1 to HN <b> 3 extending leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall 173 c.

In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) is used.
The harness HN2 connected to the ball letting operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) is guided to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board, and is bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, each of the illumination units 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (FIG. 86)
) Is connected (collected) to a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173, and a bundle of extension harnesses HN is connected from the relay board.
3 moves to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm 182 pivotally supported, and one side surface of the movable arm 182 in the direction of rotation along the lower edge of the movable arm 182 (the side facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93A). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from the side opposite to
93 is a U-shaped portion disposed on the other side surface (the side surface opposite to the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93 (a)) in the turning direction, and can lock the binding arm portion 183. A pair of locking portions 184
And a temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from a lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 at a position (intermediate position) between the pair of binding arm portions 183 and having an opening.

Note that while the binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm 183, the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (high rigidity) than the binding arm 183.

The main body portion 181 has a fixed portion 181a having a cross section formed in a substantially horseshoe shape on the upper side and having a through hole in the center and having a through hole in the center, and protrudes from the lower left and right corners of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of rotation preventing protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate stopper extending downward from the lower edge of the front end of the fixed portion 181a and having its extended end curved close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, and a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a.
(See FIG. 96 (a)), and a cylindrical fastening portion which is a portion disposed above the support plate portion 181d and whose outer shape is formed in a cylindrical shape whose diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened. 181e,
Mainly equipped.

The plate member 14d includes, at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, a hole group 14d1 including a through-hole arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of rotation preventing portions 181b.

When a screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to a corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, a pair of rotation preventing protrusions 181b are fitted into corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and to prevent the binding member 180 of the binding movable member 180 from being fixed.
The attitude with respect to d can be determined.

The intermediate stopper 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between the plate members 14d.
In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping downward by reducing the distance between the extension end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, and the center is located on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the circle to be arranged, a region for accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 (the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 18) while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation.
1c) can secure a large cross-sectional area.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane for guiding the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and has a cylindrical fastening portion 181.
As for e, its outer peripheral surface is fitted inside the base end side portion of the movable arm 182, and pivotally supports the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion that is smoothly connected to a plane OS1 that is offset from a shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with a base end portion supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. 182a, and a thin plate portion 182b having a long and thin shape that is continuously provided on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivot position.

The base end portion 182a has left and right ends (a portion where a straight line connected to an axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and a rear end portion (the end with the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion externally fitted to the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. The approaching portion) extends in the rotational direction from the side wall. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the same side, and the distance between the side walls becomes gradually shorter as approaching the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

Therefore, the rigidity of the base end portion 182a is maintained higher than that of the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on circumstances. .

Since a pair of the binding arm portions 183 have the same shape, only one will be described, and the other description will be omitted. The bundling arm 183 has small width portions 183a formed near the distal end with a width equal to the width of the root and large width portions 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a alternately at equal intervals. It is formed. In a fixed state, the binding arm 183 is inserted from below into a through-hole formed between the locking arm 184 and the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 93B).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm 183 is formed to be slightly larger in thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, since the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in a fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B), a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm 183.

The locking portion 184 has a large opening 184a formed on the movable arm 182 side and the large opening 1
A small opening 184b formed on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 with the opening 84a therebetween and having a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a is mainly provided (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass through without being close to the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass. The large width portion 183b has a size that cannot pass (is locked).

According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm 183 is to be moved relative to the locking portion 184, the binding arm 183 is disposed on the side of the large opening 184a (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 becomes smaller). ,
When the binding arm 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging it on the small opening 184b side. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole at the center thereof, through which the binding band can be inserted. Even if the binding arm portion 183 is broken due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bound.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is the XCIVb of FIG. 94 (a).
FIG. 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing a lower left corner of the front frame 14 along the line −XCIVb, and FIG. a) XCV
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the front frame 14 in the b-XCVb line.

94 (a) and 94 (b) show a state where the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 ( b)
A state in which the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically long metal portion constituting the left portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range) is illustrated. .

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 has an axis (parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14).
It is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees around a vertical axis). This angle is usually used in view of the situation of installation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the amusement shop (a situation where the pachinko machine 8010 is juxtaposed on the left and right and if it is rotated by 90 degrees or more, it may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010) In this case, the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14 is sufficiently larger.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not elastically deform and can be rotated with respect to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no movable arm 182, the possibility of the movable arm 182 being degraded due to elastic deformation and broken can be reduced.

Next, the manner of supporting the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Harness HN1 to HN
3 is supported by the binding movable member 180, so that the arrangement is defined. For example, the 3 can be prevented from being erroneously pinched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and disconnected.

FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). FIG. 96 (c) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

96 (a) and 96 (b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. You. That is, since the horizontal line of the intermediate stopper 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c is the same, the horizontal line is extended from the upper extending wall 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally, and can be supported by the intermediate stopper 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c in the vicinity of the cylindrical fastening part 181e, which is the pivot position of the movable arm 182, the upper extending wall 173c sandwiching the intermediate stopper 181c.
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the side opposite to
2 can be made. Thereby, FIG. 96 (b) and FIG. 96 (d)
As shown in ()), the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, which can prevent extreme bending deformation.

In addition, by disposing the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
The area surrounded by 3 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Accordingly, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b) schematically show the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN which schematically illustrate the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
3 is a schematic top view of FIG. Note that FIG. 97 (a) illustrates one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97 (b) illustrates the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the center axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically illustrated. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and supported by the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is also similar to the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 about the rotation center point P57. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b),
When the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 rotates about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, the inner frame 12
The opening and closing of the thin plate portion 182b is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 9).
6 (b) and FIG. 96 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the bundling movable member 180 are connected to the front frame 14 regardless of the open / close state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12.
A vertically long metal part (FIG. 96 (d), which constitutes the left part of the body frame 14a of FIG.
(The portion where the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 contacts). That is, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are forcibly circumvented so that the harness HN
It is possible to prevent the curved portions of 1 to HN3 from approaching the turning front end of the front frame 14.

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from hindering the work of the worker during the work performed by opening and closing the front frame 14, and to prevent the harness HN when the front frame 14 is closed.
It is possible to improve the fit of N1 to HN3 (fit that is curved only once at the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed vertically above the inverted cup 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 91). The intermediate stopper 181c disposed vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3. For example, the tip of a wire or a piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the inverted cup portion 178. In addition, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which a wire enters between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when a wire is pressed against the lower surface of the inverted cup portion 178 to melt and penetrate the wire and advance the wire toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the inverted cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. Harness H in which the tip of the heated wire is supported by intermediate stopper 181c
It is pressed against N1 to HN3. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out, and conduction is disabled.

When the electrical continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, an error signal is output and an alarm is sounded (an error screen is displayed), thereby making it possible to quickly detect a fraud. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who performs wrongdoing from gaining wrongful profit.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 burns out, the ball can be fired even when the operation handle 51 is rotated. Disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from the time the fraud is committed to the time the fraud is discovered (it is possible to detect the fraud early).

In this case, a wire is entered into the game area, and after the game area is manipulated (for example, after bending a nail to make it easy to win illegally), the ball is placed in the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. , It is possible to prevent a person who commits an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball from firing a ball, thereby preventing improper profit from being given. That is, it is impossible to perform a specific wrongdoing.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burned out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is used. 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Therefore, anyone who commits wrongdoing,
Because of the possibility that the user may not be able to collect the bills and the remaining balance of the card inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his / her misconduct, the act of deterring fraud is exerted. be able to.

Further, in order to eliminate the possibility that it is impossible to collect the bills and the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) and perform fraud, the card unit (ball lending unit) Even though the balance of the unit is 0 yen, the cheating is performed without leaving the seat, so that the gaming machine shop can easily notice the fraud.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is disconnected, the card unit (ball lending unit) (
In a gaming machine store that outputs a disconnection error (CR error) (not shown), the disconnection error (C
R error), it is possible to easily grasp the possibility of fraud.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
0 and the outline of the ball guide opening 53 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide openings 53 are arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145. In the present embodiment, the front door side lower plate passage 1
The lower end of the ball guide opening 53 occupies an area about 2/3 of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53 at the left part of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145 has the remaining part at the right part of the ball guide opening 53. Partition plate 53a so as to occupy a region (a region of about 1/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53).
Partitioned by.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50. S-shaped paths SL1, S in which the extending direction is directed (switched) at least once to both the left and right sides.
L2.

The S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. Thereby, the window 14c (see FIG. 86)
While ensuring a large vertical dimension of the lower plate 50, the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased, so that a larger vertical dimension of the game area and the effect area can be ensured, and the lower plate 50 (and its Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the upstream side, the stress of ball replenishment given to the player (stress due to the need to replenish the ball from a thousand boxes when the ball for the lower plate is exhausted is lost, etc.) ) Can be configured.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2, respectively, as regions whose extending directions are bent in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. With features. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region in which the left and right of the characteristic portion are reversed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1. And a region NEa2.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NE disposed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 such that the left and right of the characteristic portion are reversed.
b2. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending area NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending area NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, a side wall Na disposed on the opposite side to the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. A ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting with the extending direction of the side wall Na, and extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and approaching the side wall Na toward the extending end. And the adjacent walls Nc,
Nb and Nc extend from the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The near wall Nc has a surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb and is formed to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface for a sphere. On the other hand, a surface Nc2 opposite to the surface Nc1 (a surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (a wire or a small-diameter metal represented by a piano wire). This function will be described later. The distance of the gap Nin between the adjacent wall Nc and the side wall Na at the extended lower end is the wire H.
M is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter).

As shown in FIG. 99, due to the shape of the first bending area NEa1, the wire HM inserted incorrectly
Can be prevented from entering deeper. In other words, as shown in FIG. 99, the front door side lower plate passage portion 14 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance is used as an entry route of the wire HM inserted illegally.
In this case, the person who commits the wrongdoing is the wire H
M advances while being pressed against the side wall of the lower door passage portion 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 by the wrongdoer, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1. Even in this case, since the wire HM advances rightward through the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. Will be. That is, a pair of bending regions NEa1,
By arranging the NEa2 to be reversed left and right, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without leaking.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when the wire HM enters the gap Nin. In addition, the tip position of the wire HM at each timing is illustrated by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is illustrated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. Here, when the wire HM is caught (sandwiched), further progress of the wire HM can be prevented, and furthermore, the wire HM can be prevented from being held, and fraudulent acts can be quickly found. it can.

On the other hand, even when the wire HM does not catch and moves further, if the wire HM projects from the gap Nin, the wire HM projects further in a posture in which the tip faces downward.
Is advanced, the tip of the wire HM advances downward. Therefore, the wire HM
The dispensing device 133 arranged upstream of the dispensing ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146
Can be prevented from reaching the game area arranged on the upstream side of the game.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) to cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an incorrect payout ball, or allowing the wire HM to reach the game area and causing the electric accessory 64 to reach the game area.
For example, by forcibly opening a movable device such as 0a (see FIG. 2) and making it easy to win illegally, it is possible to prevent an illegal payout ball from being obtained and a person who commits an illegal act to obtain an illegal profit. .

Returning to FIG. 98, the description will be continued. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of a portion downstream from the merging region CE where the ball ball passage portion 147 joins is approximately twice as large as the diameter of the ball (in this embodiment, twice or more). Thus, when the sphere flowing down the ball passage 147 is disposed in the merging area CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage 145 enters the merging flow path CE (the balls simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two spheres are arranged vertically, the possibility that the spheres are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in a portion downstream from the merging region CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and connecting the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2 up and down. The width of the passage 145a is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere.
The rear side bottom plate portion of 40 protrudes toward the front side as it goes downward.

In a region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the rear bottom plate portion of the passage formation unit 140 is located at the same position as the upstream end of the passage portion 145a, and in a region downstream of the passage portion 145a, The rear bottom plate portion is located at the downstream end of the passage portion 145a and the surface position.

In other words, the foul ball passage portion 145 is located in the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a.
The front-rear width is set to be larger than the downstream area of 5a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 145 has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the ball downstream of the passage 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to be slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, the foul ball passage 145
In the case where the ball stays at the same time, the number of balls that can stay can be increased because a plurality of balls can be arranged at different positions in the upstream and downstream directions of the passage portion 145, and the center of the ball in the front-rear direction can be increased. It is possible to prevent the two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time, since they are prevented from being lined up (slightly shifting left and right and up and down).

In other words, the approach of the ball to the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. Thereby, even when two or more foul balls continuously flow into the foul ball passage portion 145, the foul balls can be prevented from reaching the merging region CE at the same time. The possibility of being interposed between the upper and lower walls can be reduced.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow lower surface of the ball is directed rightward. Plate portion 146a that is inclined downwardly and the foul ball receiving portion 1 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a.
And a passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate portion 146a.
And a curved guide plate portion 146c which extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the forty to the back side, and which curves upward in a direction in which the extension direction is toward the back side.

While the ball is guided along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side), the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b causes the foul ball receiving portion 1 to operate.
The passage position of the ball passing through the front side through 46 can be brought closer to the right side of foul ball receiving portion 146. In other words, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be.

Thereby, the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be finished before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (since the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While the width of 145 is set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed in a range (for example, the passage portion 145a) that forms the S-shaped path SL2.
), The passage width is set to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), so that it is possible to prevent an illegal tool having a larger outer shape from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 100 and 101 show a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illuminated portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be long in the left and right directions, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032. In this lower support structure, the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400 has, like the support groove 376 of the cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side to the front side. (See FIG. 118), and fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 fit into the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 50
0 is concatenated.

Accordingly, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 need not be directly fastened and fixed, but can be connected and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. Note that, based on the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling the upper panel unit 400 to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order of fastening the upper panel unit 400 after fastening the right panel unit 500. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 which are divided into right and left are respectively replaced with left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. The heavy plate units 500R, 5R
00L can be prevented from being separated from side to side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (the fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIGS. 102 and 103, the main body frame 14a is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a.
The upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the front panel unit 400 and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are shown as being disassembled from the main frame 14a.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between the upper frame member 410 and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and the concave portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 12).
1 and FIG. 122).

The fastening portion 14e1 has a through-hole through which a screw is inserted from the back side thereof, and fastens the screw passing through the through-hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, thereby forming the upper frame. It is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 104, the body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the main frame 14a by screws inserted from the rear side into insertion holes formed in the main frame 14a, is disassembled from the main frame 14a, and the upper panel unit 400 and the upper side plate member 14e are shown. In addition, the illustration of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 is omitted, while the cover 370 is illustrated for reference.

In the actual assembling procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main frame 14a. In the right panel unit 500, the right side wall portion forms the right side edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

FIG. 105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510.
FIGS. 108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 shows a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are superimposed in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate unit 50R.
It mainly includes a vertically long plate-shaped support plate portion 510 to which 0L and 500R are fastened and fixed and which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate unit 500 is inserted into the support plate 510 by screws inserted from the rear side to the front side.
L, 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate 510, and in this state, the support plate 510 is
4a is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted from the back side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending the extension portion 511a in a plate shape from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side, and is in an assembled state. (FIG. 86
), A fixed plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511a contacts the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, a board member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511, A plurality of cover side through holes 513 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and the lens side through holes 514. And a pin support hole 515 formed in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b in which the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side in a shape overlapping with the substrate member 512 in a front view, and the base member 511b comes into contact with the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

The base 511b is in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and the heavy plate units 500L and 500R.
(See FIG. 115 (b)), so that the heavy plate units 500L and 50L can be contacted.
It is possible to suppress the 0R from falling in the left-right direction. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixing plate 511, the extending portion 51 is larger than the base portion 511b.
1a is shifted to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extension portion 511 is formed.
a, the outer cover member 560 contacts the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction on the front side of FIG.
On the left side surface of the support plate portion 510, the rear side end portion of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the left side surface of the support plate portion 510 by being formed as a surface substantially at the same position as the side surface of the base portion 511b. The inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 contacts the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row that is curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. . In other words, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes are parallel to each other toward the light guide member 540 from directly behind the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak. The light enters the light guide 540 and exits from any of the surfaces of the light guide member 540, and the ingress and egress of light and the path thereof will be described later.

The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 527 provided on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting a screw fastened to the rear fastening portion 527 from the rear side. When the screw is fastened to the back fastening portion 527, the inner cover member 520 is attached to the support plate portion 51.
Fixed to 0.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 556 provided on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw fastened to the rear fastening portion 556 from the rear side. When the screw is fastened to the back fastening portion 556, the outer lens member 550 is connected to the support plate portion 51.
Fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin support hole 515 has a left-right width slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, and a vertical width set to be approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined.

That is, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced up and down with respect to the support plate portion 510 in a fastening preparation state where the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut on the support plate portion 510 from the front side (projections 566). (In the case where the position is displaced up and down by about the same diameter as the above), the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. Thereby, the protrusion 566 is formed.
Is inserted into the pin support hole 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L,
By moving the 500R up and down by the position shift, the position shift can be eliminated and the fastening and fixing can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L is provided with a window 14c (FIG. 86).
Inner cover member 520 which forms the right edge of
And an inner lens member 530 that is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmissive colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R is provided with a light guide member 540 that is disposed to face the left heavy plate unit 500L.
An outer lens member 550 that is made of a light-transmissive white resin material and has a front end facing the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction and a front end facing the front-rear direction, and the outer lens member The light guide member 54 is disposed on the right side of the light guide 550 and is formed of a resin material that does not transmit light.
And an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 show the heavy plate unit 50.
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L and 500R. Note that FIG. 110 is a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side, and five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Is exploded and shown.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed at an upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening portion 523 provided at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560; a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521;
A plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and formed to be longer than the short fastening portions 525; The outer cover member 560 is a cylindrical portion that is inserted through the lens member 530, and the inner cover member 520
A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the support plate 510 are screwed, and a plurality of back fastening portions which are provided on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 from the back side are screwed. 527
And mainly comprising.

The main body plate portion 521 has a front-side end portion 521a having a corrugated shape, and a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front-side end portion 521a and the back-side base portion 521b at a short width portion (a portion closer to the back side) of the corrugation. Is provided.

The rear side base 521b is a base 511 of the support plate 510 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86).
(b) an inner side surface 521b1 which comes into contact with (conforms with) the left side surface.

The connection plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion that is disposed so as to be inclined leftward toward the back side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connection plate portion 521c.

In this embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged so that the intervals increase in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 are made different from each other, and the effect of the light is produced by the openings 524.
Everything can be different.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-rear direction, and is recessed in the left outer surface in the left-right direction. And a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a that is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b that is recessed in the left outer side in the left-right direction. That is, screws are inserted into the outer cover member 560 at two locations at the upper end and at one location at the lower end, and are fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the support groove 376 of the cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are provided in parallel at four locations at the top and bottom, and in the assembled state, the inner lens member 530.
Functions as a window for viewing Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape that protrudes rightward with the connecting plate 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is arranged so as to be recessed to the right from the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at a boundary between the rear side base 521b and the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion is the design shape in the present embodiment, the inner cover member 52.
The surface of 0 (left side surface) corresponds to the portion protruding leftward (see FIG. 111). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b has a design-like shape and is concavely curved rightward between the above-described boundary portions.
That is, the surface of the rear side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates left and right as it goes up and down.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the design surface side. In the case where the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a concavity, which is liable to be a dead space, is formed on the reverse surface of the design-shaped overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dead space can be effectively utilized by disposing the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, and the space on the back surface side (the inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 is provided. Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 is formed in a vertically long plate-like main body plate portion 5.
The front end 531 a of the inner cover member 520 has a corrugated shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end 521 a of the inner cover member 520.

The front side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is formed in the front-rear direction at a switching position in the front-rear direction of a curve forming a wave shape. And a support hole 531 through which the projecting portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c.

The support hole 531b is formed in a front portion of the front end 531a in a wave shape, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back side. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b is fixed.
Even if a load is applied near 31b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in a wave-like rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the support hole 531c can contact the light guide member 540 is provided on the rear side. . That is, the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is enhanced by the inclined rib portion 532, so that the support hole
Even if a load is applied in the vicinity of 31c, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531c from being deformed or displaced.

In addition, the main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d that is formed in the left and right direction and has a size that allows the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted, at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through-hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and a pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 that vertically connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.
b).

The upper and lower plate portions 532a extend so as to fill a gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a. That is,
Like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that extends leftward toward the back side, and therefore has a shape in which the left and right widths become longer toward the back side (the front end is a front end in top view). Triangular shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhang portion 533 that extends leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhang portion 533 includes, on the side opposite to the overhanging side, a light scattering portion 533a that is provided in a wavy shape and that has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has a concave portion for changing the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 512a disposed on the rear side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a lattice pattern on both left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512 a to the rear end of the light guide member 540 is changed to the left and right directions through the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. You. The light guide member 540 is hot-bent to a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and has a width in the thickness direction from an end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to a front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512 a
) Is a processed part for changing the light from The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is depressed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512a to form the light guide member 5.
The light is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of 40.

In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is formed by forming a template having a pattern in which a conical portion having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of a bottom circle of about 1 mm is dispersedly arranged in a grid at about 3 mm intervals. It is formed by pressing (hot pressing) the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that has reached the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion, and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but preferably has transparency, and is preferably an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, or an amorphous olefin resin. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
Acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound). Among them, particularly, by using an acrylic resin, the light guide member 540 has a high average luminance and a small decrease in the luminance distribution.
Can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the thickness of the light guide member 540 at the LED 512a side end is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the heat bending process is improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed in a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end is slightly displaced to the rear side from the front side end 531a of the inner lens member 530, and the right and left sides are formed. Is also formed from a wavy shape.

The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. For the degree of the wave shape,
Although there is no particular limitation, the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm
It is preferred that: By using such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of imparting three-dimensional freedom while maintaining good mechanical properties with little distortion after hot bending. .

The details of the wavy shape waving right and left will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the inner cover member 520 will be described.
Is located to the left at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c, and located to the right at a position between positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portions 521c (located away from the inner cover member 520). It has a wave shape.

As described above, the wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot bending a base material having a concave portion. As a method of the thermal bending process of the present invention, a concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (female mold) which are curved while being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + a heating temperature of 10 to 40 ° C.
This is done by pressing the base material into a mold having a male mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin is mainly composed of an acrylic resin, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferable that the heat treatment be performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

At this time, the heating temperature of the base material is equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material at the time of heating to a deflection temperature under load of + 40 ° C. or lower and a melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is maintained, and the light source light before and after the heat bending process is performed. Fluctuating angle can be suppressed. Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and unevenness in luminance distribution in the light guide plate. In addition, by setting such heating temperature conditions, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 that constitutes the light guide plate, and the main body plate portion 5.
41 mainly extending from the upper and lower ends of the outer cover member 41 and through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted.

The light guide member 540 includes a fastening portion 542 and a concave portion 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526.
In other positions, it has no portion penetrating in the left-right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is formed of a single plate without a hole at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the effect of the light through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. Inner fitting 5
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes into which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and project rightward in a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553, and pass through the outer cover member. An overhang portion 554 that can be viewed, a plurality of through holes 555 into which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a support plate portion that protrudes from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and is provided from the back side. And a plurality of rear fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 is formed such that the shape of the front and rear end portions follows the shape of the front and rear end portions of the light guide member 540. That is, the outer lens member 550 extends leftward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551, and the front side end portion 551a that forms a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. The light guide member 540 has a corrugated shape and is slightly displaced to the front side with respect to the front end of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front end of the light guide member 540 and the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. You.

The front end 551a is located at a position where the curve forming the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction.
A plurality of protrusions 551b are provided protruding toward the front side and fitted in the support holes 531b and 531c in an assembled state (see FIG. 86).

On the surface of the front end 551a on the side opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540,
A number of bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) bulging in a semicircular shape in a side view are formed vertically. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, The light emission at the front end face can be a strip-shaped light emission mode that extends vertically.

The insertion hole 553 is provided in a concave deep portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhang portion 554. Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, a rear fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550, and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the screw arrangement). it can). Thereby, the area (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) facing the player can be enlarged.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 on the side facing the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member is provided. 5
The surface 40 and the main body plate portion 551 abut on each other (see FIG. 114B).

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in a direction in which the light guide member 540 is disposed to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LED 512a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate 510,
It is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced, and it is possible to cause light from the LED 512a to enter the light guide member 540 with high accuracy.

The outer cover member 560 includes a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a receiving surface at an upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561 that can receive the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520. In addition, a plurality of screws having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and an elongated hole formed in an oval shape with a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. An upper fastening portion 562 having a screw receiving portion 562a, and a receiving surface at a lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561 which can receive the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520;
A lower fastening part having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening part 523a and an elongated hole shape having a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and having a screw receiving part 563a through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. Part 563 and the long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520 at the front end of the main body plate portion 561.
26, which is formed to have a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526, a horizontal elongated shape longer than the vertical width, and formed from the opposite side. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 into which screws are inserted, an opening 565 formed to have an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhang portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a projecting rear surface from the main body plate portion 561. And a plurality of protrusions 566 to be provided.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is
The left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the 70 (see FIG. 92) are formed as grooves to be fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 by fitting the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the right panel unit 500 has a shape protruding to the front side by the cover 370. Thus, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the overhang 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted.
It is formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhang portion 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 can be narrowed, so that an unauthorized act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

Referring to FIGS. 112 and 113, left heavy plate unit 500L and right heavy plate unit 500
The method of assembling R will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a).

In addition, FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) show a state in which the protruding portions 551b are arranged on the back side of the support holes 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) show the protruding portions. Part 55
The state where 1b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are brought into contact in the left-right direction (FIG. 11).
2 (b)), the left heavy plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the protrusions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

Thus, at the front end on the front side of the right panel unit 500, the protrusions 551b, 551 are provided.
By adopting a configuration in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting c through the support holes 531b, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 on the front side is improved. be able to.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front side end (
The number of screws that are arranged on the front side of the light guide member 540 and that fasten and fix the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R can be reduced, whereby light is blocked by the screws. Since the area can be reduced, light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 can be easily visually recognized as a strip extending in the vertical direction.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening portions) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 on the front side is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously introduced at the time of fastening. When a load is applied to the light member 540, the light guide member 540 is provided.
Can be reduced. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be disposed near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered front end) can be expanded. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being visually interrupted near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L are connected. And the light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R,
Surfaces that are parallel to each other are formed along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship where they can abut against each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the left heavy plate unit 500L.
Functions as a guide surface (guide) for moving the right panel unit 500R in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R, so that the right panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, the right panel unit 500 is attached to the support plate 510 by the left heavy plate unit 5.
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled by fastening and fixing, respectively. At least two kinds of procedures can be considered for the assembling procedure.

The first procedure is a method in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R are fastened and fixed to each other and then fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. The second procedure is a method in which the right heavy board unit 500R is fastened. Is fixed to the support plate portion 510 alone, and then the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted through the support holes 531b.
In this method, the left heavy plate unit 500L is fastened and fixed to the right heavy plate unit 500R and the support plate 510, respectively. These two procedures can be similarly employed when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

As described above, since assembly and disassembly can be performed in two different procedures, the operator performing maintenance or the like can use the right panel unit 50 in either procedure depending on the location of the part that needs to be replaced.
It is possible to select whether to disassemble and assemble 0, and to shorten the working time.

In either case, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are required to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R.
Need to slide each other in the plane direction. Protrusions 551b, 551c and support holes 531b
This is because it is necessary to release the engagement with the. When sliding the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R in the plane direction, at least one of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

As described above, the configuration in which the protrusions 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b are fitted is such that the right panel unit 500 is pryed open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and the right panel unit 500 is disassembled. It helps prevent illegal acts that enter the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the machine 500.

That is, in the case where the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, by removing the screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled, and an illegal act can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and unless the screws are removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104), By making it difficult to disassemble the heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from outside the pachinko machine 8010. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that enters the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the effect will be described. FIG. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . Note that in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c),
The illustration of the support plate 510 is omitted.

Light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 is applied to the light guide member 540 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is moved right and left by the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape waving in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114 (b)), light is condensed on the side forming the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thus, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (the right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 is closer to the outer lens member 550 at a position corresponding to the uppermost one of the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted to is diffused and can be used for production.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode of light production (condensed or diffused) performed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as a boundary. The effect can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of producing light is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, but various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region, or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, it is possible to make the mode of producing light on both the left and right sides different. .

The light guide member 540 always has a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, for the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also set to the second opening from the top in correspondence with the vertical width being increased as the opening 524 goes upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
> R2) Similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2> R3).

Accordingly, even when the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 does not change, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit light condensed for each of the openings 524 is different. The amount of light to be emitted can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the amount of visible light can be larger in the upper opening 524 than in the lower opening 524.

Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the lowermost opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4１R1) and the center of the concave surface. The normal coming out is slightly inclined upward. Therefore, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the upper and lower openings 524 can be strengthened, and the effect of light can be sharpened. At the same time, the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 is directed to the player's eyes. The light can be emitted upward.

As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as a length connecting the middle point of the upper side and the middle point of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 opposed to the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 opposed to the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the radius of curvature R3. The width of the opening 524 facing the upper and lower portions is a vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R4 is the upper and lower width W4.

In the present embodiment, the upper and lower widths W1 to W4 are formed such that the lower opening 524 of each opening 524 is reduced (W1>W2>W3> W4). That is, in the curvature radii R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the upper and lower widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. Thereby, a portion where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, the radius of curvature R
1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524. On the other hand, in a place where the degree of light collection is strong (for example, a part with a radius of curvature R3). The vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1, so that light is not excessively incident on the opening 524. Therefore, with the configuration of the present embodiment, the light emission mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center point of each of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114 (b) is a point corresponding to the focal point of light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and each of the upper and lower widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. Is arranged at a substantially intermediate position.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in a region KE at the boundary between the openings 524. Here, the region KE is a band-like region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent opening 524. That is, as shown in FIG.
The upper end of E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 located adjacent above it, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 located below it. Therefore, the LED 512 is located in the area KE.
The light irradiated in the front-rear direction from a is viewed from the left side of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 114 (c)).
), The vehicle proceeds in a state hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the area KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is
Therefore, even if the light collecting action is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small.

On the other hand, in the region KE, the light guide member 54 is formed to have a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface.
Since the shape of 0 can be formed from a curved shape having no corners and concentration of stress can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

In addition, by forming a convex shape to the left in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed to the right, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance of the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. .

For example, the LED 512a that causes light to enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5a
By turning on 12a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without any gap. At this time, since the right side shape of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE has a concave shape, light emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the region KE crosses the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being viewed dark in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, which is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the overhang portion 554 (FIG. 106)
) Can be sharpened.

Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary between the openings 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, a corresponding portion (a portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a band shape. Can be done.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shorter than the upper and lower portions thereof (the distance from the LED 512a is shorter). Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end even if the light amount is weak. The effect may be performed using the light that reaches the front end.

That is, although it cannot be visually recognized through the connecting plate portion 521c, the front end 5
31a (see FIG. 105), a light effect that can be visually recognized (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared, and the jackpot expectation degree of the effect is set to be high, so that the position of the player's eyes can be adjusted. , Can be moved further away from the game board 13 than the front side end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree of fatigue of the eyes of the player can be reduced, and the player can play a long game without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, and is visually recognized by the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Accordingly, a clerk who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and does not visually recognize the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 and visually recognizes the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

As a result, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed while the cheating player is not aware of it, so that the cheating player can escape. Can be prevented.

Note that, by inverting the left and right shapes of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player, and may not be visible to the clerk.

FIG. 115A is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG.
It is a sectional view of light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line of (a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that tapers gradually from the end face (thickness: about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The front end of the light guide member 540 (LED 512)
The part farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm in order to maintain mechanical strength, and the left and right widths are reduced at the same gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed with the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end face of the portion of the inner lens member 530 opposed to the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is compared with the end face of the portion opposed to the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111).
Since the distance from the end face on the 12a side becomes longer, the width is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is vertically sandwiched between the portions near the support hole 531b and is disposed at a position depressed to the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the support hole 531b
Due to the shadow created by the nearby portion, the portion near the support hole 531c is more easily visually recognized as dark than the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a portion of the light guide member 54 opposed to the support hole 531b is arranged.
Since the width (thickness) of the end surface of the light guide member 540 in the portion arranged to face the support hole 531c is larger than that of the end surface of the support hole 531c, the light emitted from the LED 512a is received. Thus, a large area of the light emitting surface can be secured.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any one of the LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light that is visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c is reduced.
The amount of light visually recognized in the vicinity of 1b can be increased, and the difference in distance in the front-rear direction and the degree of darkening due to shadow can be reduced. Thereby, the front end 531 of the inner lens member 530 is formed.
With “a” as the foreground, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform over the top and bottom (the difference in strength is small).

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 is visible. In FIG. 116, an example of a path (a traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. Spreads and proceeds to the outside.

Conversely, light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved. Therefore, the LED 51 that generates light incident on the light guide member 540
While the arrangement of 2a is fixed, the light emission mode (coarse, dense, light and dark) can be changed on both surfaces of the light guide member 540. In other words, the light can be visually recognized by the player in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Further, light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is
By being curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b), 0 is bent not to the side but to the player side (see the arrow of the imaginary line in FIG. 115 (b). The line arrow
An example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540 is shown). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, thereby improving the effect of the light emission effect.

Returning to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, the description will be continued. The upper panel unit 400 includes the upper side plate member 14.
e and fitting grooves 522b, 562b arranged at the lower right end at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 (see FIGS. 108 and 109).
And is supported from below, and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14.

FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410 An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410; a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e; ,
Mainly equipped. Note that illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted in FIGS. 117 and 118 (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit in which a decoration indicating a model name or the like is provided on the front side surface, and L
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is included. By the included LED emitting light,
Performs light effects.

The illumination unit 401 includes a main body 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on a rear outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending in a horizontally elongated plate shape from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion protruding from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side above the plate-like portion 404 to form a cylindrical inner side. A tubular portion 405 having a shape formed by penetrating the wavy wall portion 403; and a plurality of fastening portions 406 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly comprising.

The main body 402 is formed in a box shape such that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open side, and a space is formed inside. In addition, the included LED is arranged on the electronic board,
The electronic board is fixed to the main body 402.

The wavy wall portion 403 is easily engaged with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine an assembling position in the left-right direction.
It is a part that improves the workability of the assembling of No. 01.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. In addition, on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, a horizontally long groove shape which vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed in a concave shape.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring, which passes the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED included in the main body 402 is provided to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by screws being fastened to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side frame member 410e and the upper side plate member 14e, so that access to the inside is prevented. It is formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG.
0 is an exploded rear perspective view. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410
A main body member 411 to which the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a lower edge plate member formed of a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411 and fastened and fixed from the rear side along the lower edge of the main body member 411 420, a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and a front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411. And the left corner support member 430L fastened and fixed to the main body member 411, and the main body member 411 is fitted from the back side to a position protruding to the front side from the opening 414, and is pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back side. And a lens member 440 that is restricted from falling to the back side and constitutes the electric decoration 8033.

The main body member 411 is a left and right long member having openings formed on both left and right sides for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and the speaker cover 27 being disposed so as to cover the opening. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 which is opposed to the tubular portion 405 of the electric decoration unit 401 is smaller than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. A support through-hole 413 formed to penetrate with a slightly larger inner shape;
And an opening 414 penetratingly formed in the upper right corner in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electric decoration unit 401. Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the electric decoration unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 can be easily performed.

The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted into the support through hole 413 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86).
Thus, the wiring projecting through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the electric decoration unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. Thus, the other end of the wiring can be prevented from being detached.

The support through-hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted.
Thereby, the support through-hole 413 can be used for positioning the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be viewed in a front view. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) has an LED 14 at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
e2 is provided, and the emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape in a top view on the back side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower right end face, and a recessed groove 417 from the back side at the lower left end face. A supported groove 418 to be formed, a fastening portion 419 that is disposed at a position symmetrical to the left and right near the upper end portion, and is formed so that a screw can be screwed therein, and a second portion that is formed so that a screw can be screwed at a position closer to the top and bottom. And a fastening portion 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the lower edge front end). Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitted state (FIG. 86).
), A load (such as weight) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end of the electric decoration 8031, and the fitted state (
In FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 40 is formed via the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed.
The load (weight and the like) given from 0 can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is provided at a position where a screw inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape from a position where the screw does not reach the tip from the base. And an enlarged rib 419a to be provided.

As described later, the enlarged rib 419a connects the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. (See FIG. 125 (a)), which will be described in detail later.

In the present embodiment, the ribs 419a having the same shape are arranged at three locations around the fastening part 419 at intervals of 120 ° along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening part 419.

The second fastening portion 419 b (see FIG. 118) is provided at the lower position of the main body member 411 with the fastening portion 14 e 1 of the upper side plate member 14 e (see FIG. 100) and the concave portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450.
2, 482 (see FIG. 122), and at a position above the main body member 411, at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450. Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view at a lower front side edge of the main body member 421, After extending from the upper edge of the corrugated wall portion 422 to the front side, it extends upward from the extending end thereof, and has a cross section L
An L-shaped extending portion 423 formed in a character shape, and a plurality of L-shaped extending portions 423 disposed at equal distances left and right from the left and right central positions (upper end positions of the curved shape) of the main body plate portion 421 and vertically penetrated. And an opening 424 constituted by a small-diameter through-hole.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and back contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extending portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the location where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut vertically can be increased, and the strength can be improved.

The opening 424 is connected to the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
1 is an opening through which a vibration wave (sound) output from the back side of the speaker assembly 450 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 is transmitted (emitted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 that are circular openings through which vibration generated toward the front side passes in the speaker assembly 450.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through-hole 430R2 formed in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 430R2
The light applied to the lens member 440 through the opening 414 is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

FIG. 121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are jointly fastened to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connection holes 469. The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper plate member 14e. Note that the speaker assembly 450 is a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 45 having a substantially symmetrical shape.
0L, the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the speaker assembly 4 will be described.
Description of 50L is omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device for converting an electric signal into an audible sound wave so that the sound can be heard, and a speaker 451 inserted through the through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451. A front assembly 460 fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape substantially matching the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in a front view,
The rear assembly 48 which forms a space between the front assembly 460 and the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).
0 is mainly provided.

The speaker 451 is connected to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460.
The speaker 451 is attached to the speaker 451 and produces an effect sound in connection with the game.
Through which a speaker connection line 453 (for example, an electric wire composed of a copper wire and a covering portion covering the copper wire) is drilled in the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 102). 102, the terminal connector of the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (FIG. 102).
(See FIG. 4) to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

A front cover of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass through. And this protective cover 4
The speaker 451 covered with 54 is mounted on the front assembly 460 in a state where the front surface is aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is scattered. It is possible to reproduce and output high quality sound without any delay. Further, the front cover of the speaker 451 can be suitably protected by the protective cover 454 without deteriorating the sound quality.

The front-side assembly 460 is a left-right elongated cup-shaped main body 46 having an open back side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the upper and lower widths, and a back surface of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462. An extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower edges of the main body 461 from the upper and lower sides to the outside in the vertical direction;
A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end to the front side, a light passing through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner of the main body 461 in the front-rear direction, and a speaker 451 on the right side of the main body 461. , A plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending in a rib shape from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the rear side, and the rear assembly 480. A plurality of fastening portions 468 to which the set screws are fastened and fixed, a connection hole 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted, and a distal end side main body. And a front recess 471 recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the portion 461T.

The main body 461 includes, as regions divided in the left-right direction, a base-side main body 461B disposed on the side where the through-hole 466 is formed, and a center in the left-right direction of the base-side main body 461B (see FIG.
(1 left), and a main body 461T connected to the center in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 121) of the intermediate main body 461M. The base body 461B, the intermediate body 461M, and the tip body 461T have a continuous space formed between the base body 461B, the middle body 461M, and the rear body 480.

The main body 461 includes a rear side wall 461H formed as a wall surrounding substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in a front view. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion that is not turned inside (an edge portion where a flange or the like is not formed inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Is done.

The extension plate 463 has a through hole 463a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 463
a from the back side of the main body frame 14a, the joint fastening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1
4e, and is inserted into the joint fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the rear assembly 480.
And through the through hole 463a, and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

In other words, the speaker assembly 450R is configured such that the screws inserted into the through holes 463a through the upper side plate member 14e from the rear side of the main body frame 14a are screwed into the main body member 411, so that the extension plate 463 is so tight that the screws are tightened. Pressed against rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material interposed therebetween). Thereby, the sound effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recess width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 passing through the wiring passage concave portion 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sound effect from being lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes, thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem. In FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is shown so as to be visible.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the wiring passage concave portion 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. Thereby, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passing through hole 465 is provided for the LED 14e disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 is a through-hole through which light emitted from the lens 2 toward the lens member 440 passes.

The passage forming rib 467 abuts the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap in front and rear, and bends a plurality of times into a space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480.
(See FIG. 123). This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed to have a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (ie, slightly protrudes from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 includes a main body 48 that is formed in a cup shape having a long left and right side and an open front side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the upper and lower widths, and a back surface of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482. An extension plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower edges of the main body 481 from the upper and lower sides to the outer side in the vertical width;
The wiring pressing protrusion 484 protruding toward the front side of the main body 481, the light passing through hole 485 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body 481, and the cup-shaped bottom plate (back side plate) of the main body 481 A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape to the front side;
68, a plurality of through holes 488 formed as through holes into which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the front-rear direction, and front to rear sides at positions corresponding to the front recessed portions 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. And a rear recess 491 recessed toward the main body.

The main body part 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer periphery of the main body part 481 at a position moved inward by the thickness of the main body part 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. Front side wall portion 48 formed from a shape fitted inside the rear side wall portion 461H
1H.

The speaker assembly 450R is provided with a double wall fitted on the rear side wall 461H and the front side wall 481H on the entire outer periphery, so that air can be prevented from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the sound effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary protrusions that protrude to the front side beyond the wire pressing protrusion 484 at a position sandwiching the wiring pressing protrusion 484 on the left and right with an interval capable of passing through the speaker connection line 453. 481Ha.

The auxiliary protrusion 481Ha is a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being shifted when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha have a tapered shape that expands to the left and right toward the front side (front end side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 45 is formed.
Even if 3 comes off from the wiring passage concave portion 464 and shifts right and left, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembling. In the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 in a front view, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle. The recessed portion is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 483
a from the back side of the main body frame 14a, the joint fastening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1
4e, and is inserted through the joint fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102).
0, and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

In other words, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the rear side of the main body frame 14a by the screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, so that the screw is tightened. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex part 484 is provided along the upper edge of the rear side plate of the main body part 481 and is formed to have a width to be fitted into the wiring passing concave part 464, and has a depth greater than the depth of the wiring passing concave part 464. The speaker connection line 453 is provided with a projecting length slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covering portion of the covering portion of the speaker connecting line 453.

That is, the speaker connection line 4 is inserted into the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion 464.
By passing through 53, the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 is compressed, and a gap is generated between the speaker connection line 453 and the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion 464. Can be prevented. As a result, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the sound effect is reduced due to sound leakage from an opening through which the sound passes.

The light passing through hole 485 is provided for the LED 14e disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 is a through-hole through which light emitted from the lens 2 toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passage through-hole 485 is formed from a circular opening having a size surrounding one LED. The light-passing through-hole 465 is a through-hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light-passing through-hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape increases toward the front side, and is assembled (see FIG. 100). ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming rib 487 is formed at the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, abuts each other without any gap in front and rear, and is formed in a plurality of spaces formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. These are ribs forming a curved passage (see FIG. 123) that bends twice. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, and is connected to the front side wall portion 481H.
Are formed at the front and rear ends and the surface position. That is, the rear side end of the passage forming rib 487 is
1 is connected to the rear side plate. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed such that a front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and at that time, a compression force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, a compressive force toward the rear side is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the compressive force causes the passage forming rib 4
67 and 487 close the gap therebetween while being elastically deformed in the front-rear direction (FIG. 124 (b)).
reference).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is low and the passage-forming rib 487 may bend right and left, the compressive force does not work well, and the gap may not be able to be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is reduced by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (further, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), (Strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be.

The rear recess 491 is formed in a shape that is inverted from the front recess 471 in the front-rear direction, and forms an opening in cooperation with the front recess 471. The opening is formed so as to surround the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly outward from the outer shape). It is arranged at a position surrounding the outer shape.

FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is the rear assembly 48.
0 is a front view. In FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), in order to facilitate understanding,
The speaker connection line 453 is shown by imaginary lines, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 that are arranged to face each other are shown with the opposing surfaces facing toward the front of the drawing. That is, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are obtained by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the center of the paper surface. Can be matched. That is, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e can be brought into contact with the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the base body 46 of the front assembly 460 is provided inside the speaker assembly 450.
An acoustic room is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, with the acoustic chamber as a base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path of the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 extends toward the distal end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and alternately move up and down toward the left side. Rib portions 467a, 467b arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment)
, 467c, 467d, and 467e.

By forming the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the ribs 467 can be assembled.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, and each rib portion 487a,
Wiring can be prevented from being sandwiched between the wirings 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

Each of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body 461 and the rear side wall 461H, so that each of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d.
, 467e can enhance the rigidity of the main body 461.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e form a bent passage for passing the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451 is used.
In this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels while avoiding the passage-forming ribs 467, while the vibration wave generated from the vibration proceeds linearly.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is applied to the left side (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is arranged on the L side and is closest to the left and right direction (for example, the rib portion 467b) is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (the arrow L and U directions).

On the other hand, after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws is disposed on the left side (arrow L side) and is closest to the rib portion (for example, in the left-right direction). When the rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (the direction of the arrow L, D).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4
When the 67e is arranged alternately up and down, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent up and down, and the traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws is secured longer than the left and right width of the space. can do.

Thereby, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed by the pair of concave portions 471, 491, and suppress the generation of the standing wave due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 467 is performed by the concave portions 462 and 463b.
Can also be caused. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted to the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 disposed immediately near the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). (Directions of arrows L and U).

Therefore, the concave portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect obtained at the time of assembly.

As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming rib 487 is provided with the wiring pressing convex portion 4 for holding down the wiring.
The ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, and 4 are formed on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to 84 and are arranged at a plurality of positions (five in this embodiment) alternately up and down toward the left side.
87d and 487e.

Since the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e are connected to the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H, the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d.
, 487e can enhance the rigidity of the main body 481.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the front assembly 4
The ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of the 60 are formed in a shape that matches in the front-rear direction, and are opposed to each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).

The operation of each of the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e is similar to the operation of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 487 is performed by the concave portions 482 and 483b.
Can also be caused. That is, the vibration wave Ws is moved to the upper left between the concave portion 482 disposed immediately adjacent to the rear concave portion 491 and the concave portion 483b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). Direction (arrows L and U). Therefore, the concave portion 48
2,483b also has an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect obtained at the time of assembly.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced in vertical width as the distance from the speaker 451 is increased, and is once narrowed at a position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are vertically arranged. Further, the vertical width is increased at once at a position further away from the speaker 451, and thereafter communicates with the opening formed by the concave portions 471, 491. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the speaker 451
Is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, so that the vibration wave Ws (voice) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is
In order to find an exit, the vehicle advances to the tip side main body 461T, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. Tip side main body 4
The vibration wave Ws (sound) reaching 61T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420 in this order, and then the speaker set. The sound is emitted outside the three-dimensional body 450R (outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the rear part of the speaker 451 is formed by the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and the recess 47.
The sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is directly connected to the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening and the opening 424 (refer to FIG. 120) formed by the first and the 491. It is possible to reproduce and output with high sound quality without being stuck.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase, and converts the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 into the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451. It is possible to emit sound from the opening formed by the above. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 450 does not cancel out by the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it is possible to amplify the heavy bass. This allows
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can perform an effect full of presence,
It is possible to enhance the interest and excitement of the player for the game.

In this embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is disposed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the bass output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is transmitted to the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). Thereby, the effect of the game by the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side can be appropriately provided to the player playing the game on the front side of the front frame 14.

Tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) is performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450,
This can be performed by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
The path of the vibration wave Ws is defined as a path that avoids each of the 0 rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e. Therefore, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by individually setting the arrangement of the ribs 7d and 467e and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e and the length of the vertical extension.

In the present embodiment, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 4
67d, 467e and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487 of the rear assembly 480.
In addition to the above objects, d and 487e are disposed at portions where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 can be reinforced. The front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be prevented from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed.

Further, in the assembled state, the extension plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 125A).
7c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screws being screwed into the fastening portions 468, the extension plates 463, 48 are provided.
A screw is screwed into a fastening portion 419 that is inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a of the third and third rib portions 467c and 4c when the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed.
87c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other to form the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48.
0 can be prevented. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
The front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by 7d.

In addition, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to upper ends of the concave portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portions 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e are aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is connected to the upper side plate member. Before the speaker assembly 45e is fastened and fixed, the speaker assembly 45
The 0 concave portions 462 and 482 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, the concave portion 462
, 482, an upward load is applied from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

For this reason, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. In the present embodiment, since the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462 and 482, the recessed portion is formed from the fastening portion 14e1. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482, and to improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482.

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is considered. It can be easily suppressed.

In such an illegal act, a wire, a piano wire or the like is illegally penetrated into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 includes the front recess 471. In addition to the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 is formed in a closed box shape. The gap between the openings formed by the wiring pressing projections 484 is closed by the speaker connection lines 453. Therefore, when wires, piano wires, and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly is passed through an opening other than the portion into which the wire has entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of wire, piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 through the upper side plate member 14e and extending the tip from 450.

In addition, since the through-hole formed as an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes through the upper side plate member 14e is disposed near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speaker 451, a wire or a piano wire is provided. For example, the distance between the front recess 471 and the opening formed by the rear recess 491 where the speaker and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 can be increased.

Therefore, even when such misconduct is performed, the success rate of the misconduct can be reduced, and it is easy to prevent the occurrence of the wrongful profit.

FIG. 124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a). FIG. 124 (a) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is the arrow CXXI in FIG. 124 (a).
FIG. 14 is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the Vd direction. FIG. 124 (a)
124) and FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, whereas the speaker connection line 453 is not illustrated in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c). .

As shown enlarged in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (the lower surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that is inclined inward toward the rear side. The outer side surface 481Ho of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 124 (b)
The upper surface) has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the rear side and has an inner surface 461H.
It is shaped to fit with i in the assembled state. Thereby, the work efficiency of the operation of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front end of the rib 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib 487c before the assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib 487c receives a compressive load from the rib 467c and is elastically deformed. Since a compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c due to the restoring force generated by the elastic deformation, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed so as to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the contacting rib portions.

As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body 461M has a shorter front-to-rear dimension than the base main body 461B and the distal main body 461T. Therefore, the tip side main body 46
As compared with 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass in the intermediate main body 461M can be reduced (narrowed). Thereby, the sound effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the distal end side main body portion 461 </ b> T disposed above the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 is inside the intermediate main body portion 461 </ b> M. It is largely secured in such a manner as to bulge in the front-rear direction compared to the space. Thereby, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal-side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal-side main body portion 461T and released at a low speed. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved, for example, it is possible to make the bass sound easier to hear by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125 (a) shows the front assembly 46 along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124 (a).
0, rear assembly 480, upper frame member 410, main body frame 14a, and upper side plate member 14e. FIG. 125 (b) is a front assembly 460 along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is a partial sectional view of the side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e.

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is provided with a through hole 463a,
483a is fastened and fixed to fastening portion 419, so that front assembly 460 is formed.
, The rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are sandwiched between the main assembly frame 14a and the main assembly frame 14a.
That is, by disposing the enlarged rib 419a at a surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , The front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at a position below the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is placed at a position above the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the concave portions 462 and 482 of 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (pass through the recessed portions 462, 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), so that the front assembly 460 is formed.
The upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e are configured to be fastened and fixed without the intermediary of the rear assembly 480.

The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is attached to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

In the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is provided inside the concave portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the rear side is provided inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is
482 (a portion extending toward the front side is disposed inside).

In the present embodiment, since the left and right separate speakers 451 are provided in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, the other speaker assemblies 450R and 450L on the other side are provided.
It is possible to avoid a collision with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 provided in the 450L, and to reproduce the sound with high quality as a transparent sound without blocking the reproduced sound.

In the present embodiment, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper plate member 14e abut on the upper surface of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125A). In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper plate member 14e protrudes toward the front side at a portion arranged to face the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480, The projecting portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut on each other in the front-rear direction. That is,
The speaker assembly 450 does not abut (stick) on the entire surface of the upper side plate member 14 e, but has a contact state in which the speaker assembly 450 makes line contact particularly at the lower end.

In this case, the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and contacting the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, a portion projecting from the upper plate member 14e and abutting on the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin).
However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be provided, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, and the like. By using these metals, sound can be made thicker.

Further, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (porcelain), etc. are applicable. When these members are used, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Regarding the shape, it may be protruded in a long plate shape, may be protruded in a spike shape, or may be protruded in a rounded dot shape. Further, the present invention is not limited to the case where the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

Note that the arrangement of the portion functioning as the above-described insulator is determined by the speaker assembly 45.
It is not limited to the back surface of the lower end of 0. For example, the back of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the back of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the speaker assembly 4
It may be 50 sides or front.

For example, when it is arranged on the back surface of the upper end, the member functioning as an insulator is formed in a tubular shape, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted. The positioning may be performed by the following. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as the insulator can be eliminated, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function as the insulator by tightening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The sound effect can be adjusted by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (load applied to each other).

At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 can be connected to the screw inserted into the connection hole 469 (see FIG. 123 (a)) or the connection hole 469.
And a screw inserted into a through hole provided at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left and right position where the through hole is disposed, the through hole being provided on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left and right direction and having the same shape as that of FIG. As a result, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from being detached from the upper side plate member 14e.

The upper frame member 410 is fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with respect to the upper frame member 41.
Reference numeral 0 denotes a fastening portion 14e1 (FIG. 1) of the upper side plate member 14e other than the screw inserted into the through hole 483a.
00) is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) to be fastened and fixed. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the load is not applied to the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fastening the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, The upper frame member 410 can be prevented from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (adjusting the fastening condition).

In addition, the same as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above,
The same can be said for the relationship with the main body frame 14a which is connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In addition, FIG.
(B) shows the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed.

First, in order to describe a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a,
12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, a left front support portion 12 a and a left rear support portion 12 b are separated from each other in order to support the left end of the game board 13. Will be arranged.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the left front front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that is inclined rearward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13. A flat surface 12a2 extending leftward and rightward from the left end is formed. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 abut on each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b has an outer shape formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, a front end surface formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a center portion opened in a cup shape. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside and a portion projecting from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in such a manner that the elastic support portion 12b1 projects toward the front side as it goes to the left in a natural length state. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 cooperates with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a,
A tapered shape is formed that expands to the side (rightward) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction. Thereby, the workability at the time of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 by the worker can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIGS. 128 (a) and 128 (b) show the CXXVIIIa-CXXV of FIG. 127 (b).
129 (a) and FIG. 129 (b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the board support apparatus 600 and the game board 13, respectively. It is. In FIGS. 128 and 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 whose left end has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12 is illustrated. 128 (b) and FIG. 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and in FIG. 129 (b), the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding,
Some configurations of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 are omitted from the drawing.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, and the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent.
Is slid between the left front support portion 12a and the left rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated about an axis directed in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the near side is provided. Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 12
Since a1 is formed, a range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other.
Can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the left end portion of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a
The game board 13 is rotated so as to be close to the inner frame 12 about the back side edge of the game board 1 and the contact position between the front face of the game board 13). In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted by the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
2c. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction with an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 90).
The guide rib 1 supports the game board 13 from below and has a front upper end portion cut as an inclined surface.
A plurality of 2c1 are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in a top view. Each time, the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1, so that the game board 13 can ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side so that the rotation of the game board 13 can proceed without delay. . Therefore, the workability of the operation of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game store. This prevents the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rear inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation.
The workability when assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved without depending on the rear inclination of 013.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at the same inclination angle as the rear inclination at the time of setting the game store. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 rides
The inclined surface of 2c1 can be made horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 arranged vertically and released in a later-described state, and the rear face of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the released state, the board supporting device 600 is configured such that the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 (the portion disposed on the front side from the position where the game board 13 is fixed) are provided on the game board 13.
, The workability of assembling the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 to the rear side, a load is applied to the claw member 640 after the rotation via the game board 13, and the board support device 60
0 changes to a fixed state described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, the game board 13
When the is fixed, the upper and lower board support devices 600 change their states almost simultaneously.

In addition, the game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c, and the vertical position is regulated. FIG. 129 (a
As shown in FIG. 129 and FIG. 129 (b), the board supporting device 600 does not contact the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board supporting apparatus 600 (the game board 13 is It is not pushed up by the support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Accordingly, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably detached with the state change of the board supporting device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 is pushed to the back side, the game board 13 is rotating with the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum.
The force required to apply a load to zero can be reduced by the long width of the game board 13, and even a weak operator can attach the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the game board 13 has its left end portion set to the left front support portion 12a.
And two upper and lower portions by the left end rear support portion 12b (see FIG. 126).
When the right end of the game board 13 is insufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in a fixed state), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. Even if there is, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed by the reaction to push the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12 to close it. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board supporting device 600 from being changed by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 to close the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

When the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by a support portion 12a.
, 12b, the right end is fixed by the board supporting device 600, and the lower end is restricted in the vertical position by the support bottom 12c.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13
Is connected to various members provided on the game board 13 and wiring connected to various devices, and is supported by the game board 13 so as to be changeable in a plane direction of the game board 13. A floating connector 13a and a receiving connector 12d which is provided on the inner frame 12 near the lower board support device 600 and to which wiring connected to the control board unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back surface are provided. They are connected in the direction of rotation of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d are arranged in a posture inclined in such a manner that the connection direction is directed in a direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 is provided with a board supporting device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower members are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. In addition, since the pair of upper and lower board supporting devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, one board supporting device 600 will be described, and description of the other board supporting device 600 will be omitted.

130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board supporting device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front perspective of the board supporting device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. Note that FIG.
(A) and FIG. 130 (b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the game board 1 using the board support device 600.
3 illustrates a release state in which the fixing of 3 is released. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board supporting device 600. As shown in FIG. 132 and FIG.
Reference numeral 0 denotes a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in a top view, a pre-rotation claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted through and fixed to the frame member 610, and its rotation. A regulating front claw member 630 rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 which is disposed on the front side of the front claw member 620 and inserted through and fixed to the front claw member 620; The post-rotation claw member 6 rotatably supported by the third shaft member P63 inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620
And 40 mainly.

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are disposed to face left and right. A pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line in the plate portion 611a, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612; , On the rear side of the support hole 612, along an arc centered on the support hole 612.
11a, an arcuate recess 614 recessed from below, and a plate 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612.
A rod-shaped regulating rod 615 inserted and fixed to the inner frame 1a is screwed into the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). And a pair of fixing plates 616 that are fastened and fixed to the main body.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
Is formed as a columnar metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the base end side of the insertion, inserted into the support hole 612, and then pressed at the end at the insertion end to form the support hole 612.
Fixed to The fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same as those of the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P.
63 is the same, and the description is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 is a main body plate portion 621 in which a sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 which are formed in a straight line through the plate portion 621a opposed to the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the front upper corner of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed;
and a pair of support holes 624 which are formed in a straight line on the rear side of the hole a and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, at the same time, the pre-regulation claw member 63
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the 0 supported hole 632, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624.
At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.
Is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is disposed to face left and right, and is a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front and rear direction.
And a pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view with an extended portion 621a2 extending vertically from the front end of the long portion 621a1, and an upper edge of the plate portion 621a is connected. A connecting plate portion 621b to be fixed; a rear-side extension plate 621c extending downward from the rear end of the connecting plate portion 621b by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b; Part 621a
2, a hanging back plate portion 621d extending perpendicular to the plate portion 621a toward the opposite plate portion 621a, and a hanging back plate portion 621d extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d. And a front-side extension plate 621e that extends inclining to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be perpendicular to each other.

The rear-side extension plate 621c is arranged so that the lower surface thereof can contact the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate 611 (see FIG. 134A). By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb is moved to the main body plate portion 611.
Begin to abut.

Thus, when the worker starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the operation is completed, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, while the force required at the start of pushing is reduced, the momentum of the rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in an assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back of the hanging back plate 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction to bring the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the hanging back plate 621d close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction to separate the lower end of the claw member 640 from the rear side wall of the main body plate 611 after the rotation.

The pre-regulation claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate 631 formed by bending the sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle to form a letter shape in a side view, and is disposed to face left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 which are formed in a straight line in the plate portion 631a to be formed, and which are supported by the second shaft member P62, and inclined forward from the lower end portion of the front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 633 that is extended by extension, and a curved surface 634 that is curved as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion that is arranged to face the front frame 14, and
Is the portion that comes closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when is set to the release state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), and thereby restricts a free posture change of the pre-regulating claw member 630.

The post-rotation claw member 640 is a body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the body plate portion 641 and is disposed to face left and right. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b connecting the pair of supported holes 642 and the pair of plates 641a, which are formed in a straight line through the plate 641a and connected to the third shaft member P63. And an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a part that contacts the back side of the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-back position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in an unlocked state (see FIG. 129 (a)), the inclined extension plate 643 has a tilt angle that makes contact with the back surface of the game board 13. It is formed.

FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the process in which the board supporting device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in time series. Further, FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135
In (b), the arrangement of the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged close to the board supporting device 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board supporting device 600 are shown by imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 134 (a), the released state of the board supporting device 600 is shown, and in FIG. 135 (b),
The fixed state of the board support device 600 is shown in each figure. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed immediately behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). Thus, the simple operation of pushing the claw member 640 after rotation to the rear side via the game board 13 causes the claw member 640 after rotation to rotate too much about the first shaft member P61 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61). Accordingly, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state after the rotation.

Here, the biasing force in the direction approaching the hanging back plate portion 621d is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 by the torsion spring NBa as described above. Therefore, when other external force does not act, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand,
When the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 abuts on the restriction bar 615, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is restricted.

That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the claw member 6 before rotation is rotated.
20, the front side on which the extending portion 621a2 is disposed is tilted, while the front side of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises in a manner separated from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulating rod 615 is located on the front side of the curved surface 634, and the second shaft member P
While contacting the resistance portion 634a that intersects the circle centered at 62 (from FIG.
Until 5 (a)), the front-side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises with the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is disposed to face the regulating rod 615,
When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction around the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 side of the inclined extension plate 633. The distal end portion is disposed close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (from FIG. 135 (a) to FIG. 135).
(B)).

The angle range in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and moves (from FIG. 134A to FIG. 135A
In the range ()), even if a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 in a direction in which the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted, the operation is performed by the downward load. At this time, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 becomes a posture change in the direction facing the downward load (posture change in the rising direction), so that the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the pre-regulation claw member against the downward load. The posture change of 630 is regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 is in contact with the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is regulated by the game board 13 while the game board 13 is not pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630, so that the pre-rotation claw member 620 is formed.
Can be prevented from rotating. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 provided on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship in which the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the inclined extension plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connection plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), the game board 13 abuts on the back surface of the rear-side extension board 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt), the rear-side extension board is used. 621c
Between the game board 13 and the game board 13. Thereby, the game board 1 in the state of FIG.
3 can be prevented from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139) described below applies a load to the game board 13,
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side due to the reaction.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in a state where the board surface supporting device 600 is released and the front claw member 620 is rotated by a load from the front frame 14, the front frame 14 is disposed on the front frame 14. Depending on the state of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630, the case where the board supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state, the case where the board supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state, and is stable at a halfway angle May occur.

The board supporting device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle, and in this state, the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89)
Can be closed, the distance between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 becomes short, which may hinder the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 due to a load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multi-function disposed on the front frame 14 is adopted. When the cover member 171 contacts the pre-regulation claw member 630, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, it is possible to remind the clerk who has performed the operation of closing the front frame 14 that the board support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

If the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board support device 600 is fixed, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the pre-regulation claw Depending on the state of the contact of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the case where the board supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state and the case where the board supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stabilized at a halfway angle occur (only, The board supporting device 600 reaches a fixed state).

For this reason, in this embodiment, when the front frame 14 is set to the closed position, the multifunctional cover member 171 extends to a position where the multifunctional cover member 171 can come into contact with the pre-regulation claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the restriction bar 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear side extension plate 621 c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13. There is no.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the front end of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. I have.

Thereby, when the game board 13 is arranged at the position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the clerk pushes the game board 13 slightly less, and the game board 13
The case where the front frame 14 is not closed until the case where the front frame 14 is stably installed is resolved. In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 is
When a load is applied to the panel support device 600, the load can change the board supporting device 600 to a fixed state.

Accordingly, the workability of the operation of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged on the board support device 600 in the released state such that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact with each other (FIG. 1).
34 (a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the back side. That is, the pawl member 640 after the rotation is displaced by the game board 13, and the pawl member 620 before the rotation is accordingly rotated, thereby changing the board surface support device 600 to the fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the state of the board supporting device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 abut in the front-rear direction. In this state, the game board 13
Is moved (tilted) to the front side while moving (tilting) while pushing down the hanging back plate portion 621d. Therefore, the torsion spring NBb provided to the pawl member 620 before rotation via the claw member 640 after rotation. Is applied as resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the game board 13
Can be suppressed from moving (tilting) near the upper end of the front side.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is arranged to face the restriction rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates, the first shaft member P61 is centered. The non-resistance portion 634b abuts on the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the circular arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

Thereby, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b),
The possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves forward (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is connected to the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG.
135 (b), a curved surface is formed in which the radius centered on the second shaft member P62 gradually increases toward the portion contacting the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b).

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed rearward by the multifunctional cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), and the pre-rotation claw member 620 is rotated, so that the second shaft member P62 is rotated.
Is displaced, the non-resistance portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are separated for a moment. Therefore, the resistance given to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the regulation bar 615 is reduced for a moment, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is vigorously brought close to the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. The state changes to the state shown in FIG.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 135B, the dimensional relationship is such that the multi-function cover member 171 is separated from the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Also, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position immediately before the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 can be moved to the front claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. , And then the board support device 600 can be fixed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, in a state in which the back side surface of the rear side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 (For example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the board is to be replaced, the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed). Thus, the working efficiency of the worker can be improved.

When the board supporting device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633 is used.
To the upper front side to rotate the pre-regulation claw member 630 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 6
15 is not in contact with), it is possible to rotate the pre-regulation claw member 630 with a light force,
By continuing the rotation as it is, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released in a state where the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed to the front side by the displaced rotating claw member 640 (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is released.

Further, as shown in FIG. 129 (a) and FIG. 134 (a), in the released state,
3 is in contact with the lower surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. This can eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 falls to the front side when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

Note that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can perform an operation of switching between a released state and a fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to the state change of the board support apparatus 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support apparatus 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are shifted up and down. In addition, there is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 64 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released.
0 does not match. In other words, as shown in FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), compared to the amount by which the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced, the pre-rotation claw member 6 supporting the game board 13 is displaced.
20 and the amount by which the claw member 640 is displaced after rotation is smaller.

Accordingly, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (a degree that the pre-regulation claw member 630 is restricted from being returned by the restriction bar 615), Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front and rear positions of the game board 13 at the positions supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

In addition, the same effect is produced because the post-rotation claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation claw member 620. That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the release state (FIG. 13)
4 (a), the post-rotation claw member 640 can be displaced in a direction to increase the angle between the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBb. It is said.

Therefore, the amount of displacement of the game board 13 pushed out by the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed as compared with the amount of displacement of the claw member 620 before rotation, so that the game board at a position supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be suppressed. 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. Thereby, the game board 1
3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, a relationship between the board supporting device 600 disposed below and the front frame 14 will be described. FIGS. 136 to 139 show the CXXXVI- of FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine 8010 in the CXXXVI line. 136 to 139 show the front frame 14 in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14.

In FIG. 136, the released state of the board supporting device 600 is shown, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board supporting apparatus 600 is shown, and in FIG. 138, the board supporting apparatus 600 is shifted from the released state to the fixed state by a predetermined angle (about 25 °). 139) The rotated state is shown in FIG. 139 in a state immediately before the board supporting device 600 is fixed, and the thickness of the game board 13 supported by the board supporting device 600 is shown by imaginary lines. Is done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the board supporting device 600 and the opening / closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, FIGS.
138 and 139 are indicated by imaginary lines in FIG. 138 and FIG. 139.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board support device 600 is released, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing control unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board supporting device 600, the game board 13
The front frame 14 is allowed to be closed in a state in which the front frame 14 is removed, but in a state in which the game board 13 is arranged, the closing of the front frame 14 is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board supporting device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the board supporting device 600 is avoided. . In addition, since the game board 13 is disposed on the back side as compared with the disposition of the board support device 600 in the released state, interference between the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing control unit 159 is provided. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board supporting device 600, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed state by a predetermined angle, the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (FIG. 1).
38), the open / close restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a rearward load to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is performed by the action of the regulating rod 615. (Fig. 138 clockwise) and the rotation direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (Fig. 138).
The direction opposite to the counterclockwise direction makes the reaction force excessive, so that it is difficult with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 138, the closing of the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, in the state where the game board 13 is provided, the front lower end of the game board 13 may abut on the rear side extension plate 621c in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139) when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before the fixed state, the opening / closing control unit 159 And the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes.

Further, in this state, when it is intended to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a rearward load to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is performed by the action of the regulating rod 615. The direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the claw member 630 before regulation (FIG. 13)
(8 counterclockwise direction) does not become the opposite direction, and it is easy to push in with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 135 (a)).

Accordingly, in the state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the claw member 630 before regulation is pushed through the opening / closing regulating section 159, and the board supporting device 600
Can be fixed, so that the front frame 14 can be closed.

FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member that closes the back of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball firing unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b).
Is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a. FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143 (a) illustrates a state where the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) illustrates a state where the ball receiving member 731 is reversed after being disassembled. . That is, in FIG. 143 (b),
The back side of only the ball receiving member 731 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a includes a base member 710 formed of metal or die-cast, and a base member 711 centered on the right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. A closed state in which the front of the base member 710 is partially covered (see FIG. 142A) and an open state in which the front of the base member 710 is opened (see FIG.
a) A ball feeder 720 having a cover member 721 which is rotatably supported between (a) and (b).
And mainly comprising.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721, is locked by a hook or the like that elastically deforms to the base member 710, is provided on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of a synthetic resin or the like. In order to regulate the attitude of the firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, the firing rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 hit by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731 A fastening portion 716 in which a screw that is cylindrically protruded toward the front side and that fastens and fixes the ball receiving member 731 is screwed into an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges straightly from the base member 710 to the front side; , And a plurality of positioning projections 719.

The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 into which the bar-shaped portion 722 is inserted at the right corner, and a locking portion 7 formed to be able to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction.
13, a protruding portion 714 protruding toward the front side in the vicinity of the right side of the locking portion 713, and opposed to the suction force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142A). And a defect determination convex portion 715 that is protruded.

The protrusion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A), and is located on the left side of the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. An opposing plane 714a formed opposite to the side surface 724c and formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and an inclined surface that is opposite to the opposing plane 714a and that is inclined rightward toward the back side. And a surface 714b.

When the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination convex portion 715 does not abut on the attraction force generation solenoid 741, but loosens the attraction force generation solenoid 741 ( In a state of being floated from the cover member 721, the cover member 721 is formed at a protruding height which abuts and restricts rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening force of the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosened, and to form a case in which the cover member 721 cannot be closed so that the sales force is applied to the clerk. It can be noticed that the fastening of the generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before the malfunction of the ball firing unit 112a occurs, repair (fixing the suction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed beforehand.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported by the base member 711,
Switching controlled to change the state between a restricted state in which the ball P8 entering the inside of the cover member 721 flows down and a permitted state in which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) is allowed to flow down to the firing rail 730. And an apparatus 740.

The cover member 721 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material into a cup shape with the back side (the front side in the drawing in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) opened, and a pair of loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. , A hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the right and left opposite sides of the bar portion 722, and a ball P at a position displaced toward the bar portion 722 from the hook portion 723.
8 (see FIG. 144) is disposed in such a manner that the ball passage opening 724 is sized to be able to pass through and is drilled in the front-rear direction, and projects slightly upward from the lower edge of the inner end of the ball passage opening 724. A cutting metal member 725, and a shaft rod portion 72 that supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.
6 is mainly provided.

The switching device 740 includes a suction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member having one end loosely fitted to the shaft bar portion 726.
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its attitude depending on whether or not a magnetic force is generated, and a sheet metal member that is locked on the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 A metal plate 743, a guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the ball guide arm member 742, is disposed below the ball passage opening 724, and is inclined downwardly away from the ball passage opening 724, and upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744. The ball P8 is extended by an interval capable of accommodating the ball P8.
And a regulating projection 745 projecting toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane perpendicular to the plane 6.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided, and the falling plate portion 724 that is inclined downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotational radial direction.
a, a rib portion 724b which is disposed above the flow-down plate portion 724a and is extended downward in a rib shape from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724, and the inclined front end surface descends and slopes toward the back side;
A left inner side surface 724 connected to the left end of the falling plate portion 724a and having a surface formed along the vertical direction.
c). With these configurations, the sphere P8 that has flowed into the sphere passage opening 724 flows downward and to the right.

When the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A), the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b, and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, the ball P8
Flows down in such a manner as to be separated from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction.
While arranging in such a manner as to protrude inside the ball passage opening 724, it is possible to prevent the ball P8 from hitting the cutting metal member 725.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member extending from the intermediate position of the base member 710 so as to incline upward toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, a ball P8 (FIG. 14)
4) is disposed at an interval shorter than the diameter of the ball receiving member 731.

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 and the long direction are parallel and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. Through hole 731a formed as a long hole along the direction and for passing the fastening screw
Like the bulging portion 716a, the bulging portion 716a is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction), and has a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and the bulging portion 716a. A regulating groove 731b formed with a groove depth slightly larger than the protruding height.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716, the ball receiving member 731 is swollen by the bulging portion 71.
6a can be slid along the straight line in which the sphere P8 bulges, and thereby the sphere P8 (FIG. 14)
4) (the distance from the plunger 702). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing intensity of the ball P 81 (the operation handle 51
(See FIG. 86) can be easily adjusted.
In addition, since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the attitude of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and extends diagonally upward and to the left; Mounting plate portions 730b and 730c hanging from front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a;
Ob and 730c are attached to the base member 710 with screws inserted into a plurality of (two in this embodiment) attachment holes 732.

Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c, and a sound or a vibration generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball is provided. Is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and is provided with a ball P8 (see FIG. 146 (b)).
)) To guide the ball P8 upward by contacting the front and rear two places on the peripheral surface thereof.

FIG. 144 (a) to FIG. 144 (c) are front views of the sphere launching unit 112a showing a sphere sending state by the sphere feeding device 720 in a time series. 144 (a) to FIG.
In (c), the illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

144 (a), the switching device 740 is in the regulated state (the state in which the supply of power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity), as shown in FIG. 144 (a). In the case of, the regulating protrusion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, and abuts on the game ball P <b> 8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which power is supplied to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protrusion 745. Retreats above the sphere, and the regulation of the downward flow of the sphere P8 is released, whereby the sphere P8 flows above the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the ball P <b> 8 abuts on the front side wall of the base member 711, whereby further downward flow is regulated, and the ball P <b> 8 stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), when the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, the ball P8 riding on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not contact the front side wall of the base member 711. Is done. Thus, the ball P8 is guided to the rear side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744, and is guided to the firing rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the firing rail 730 one by one. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a ball stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725 a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 is inserted and a falling plate portion 724 a. A lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and a notch with a sharp acute end formed between the lower blade portion 725b and the same plate as the base plate of the lower blade portion 725b. Blade section 72 extending from
5c.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip is inclined more rearward than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side protrudes above the falling plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the base end (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the base end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape in a front view.

The cut between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to the ball. Then, referring to FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, the sphere P
A description will be given of how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the yarn 8 and is advanced.

FIG. 146 (a) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG.
FIG. 147 (a) is a front view of the sphere launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front view of the sphere launching unit 112a when viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb at 46 (a). FIG. 148 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the yarn Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG.
It is a partial front view of 12a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62. 146 and FIG.
In FIG. 7, illustration of some components of the ball firing unit 112a is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the sphere P guided to the firing rail 730
8 stays in contact with the left lower edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)), and from this state, a current flows through the firing solenoid 701 and the plunger 702 vigorously projects. Then, a firing force is applied to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the firing rail 730 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

Here, the ball P8 is struck while one end of the thread Y8 is fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. It has been known that the player can loosen the ball P8 to repeatedly detect the ball P8 at the winning opening.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 is configured to be cut using the momentum of the firing of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is arranged at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the falling plate portion 724a in such a manner that the yarn Y8 is moved closer to the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the firing rail 730 passes under the falling plate portion 724a.
When the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the rolling ball P8, the middle portion of the yarn Y8 moves along the upper surface of the falling plate portion 724a, so that the upper edge of the yarn Y8 protruding above the falling plate portion 724a. It enters under the portion 725c, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

While the player holds the end (the other end) on the near side of the thread Y8, a load accompanying the firing of the ball P8 is applied to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). Thus, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

When the firing strength of the ball P8 is low, there is a possibility that the yarn Y8 is not cut due to insufficient tensile force, but in this case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area, It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the yarn Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of an improper act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the rendering operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit 1000. The main difference between the gaming board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the gaming board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operation device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. Are substantially the same.

In the upper frame portion of the center frame 86, a rendering operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is provided. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and an advance / retreat operation unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100.

The reciprocating operation unit 900 raises and lowers the petal operating device 800 up and down by the driving force of the driving motor 921 (the reciprocating operation, that is, the operation of moving inward of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the third operation). The operation includes at least one of an operation of retreating to the outside of the display area of the symbol display device 81), and a petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other end is connected to the other end. Of the arm gear 9 and the end of the arm gear 9
A driving arm 910 that rotates by transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 921 via the driving motor 24, and a driving motor 92 that generates a driving force for driving the driving arm 910.
1, a transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 921 to the driving arm member 910, and sliding in the left and right direction in conjunction with the turning operation of the driving arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930, a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal operation device on the right and left opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910. And a driven arm member 950 in the form of a long plate that connects the driven members 800 to each other.

Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 shows the petal operating device 80.
0 is a front view, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. In FIG. 154, the supporting substrate 801 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

The petal operating device 800 is configured such that a member such as a petal 802 is supported on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is disposed on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the drawing. And a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position on the right side of the upper end in the central body portion of the supporting base material 801, and a driving shaft of the central motor 804 is moved forward through a small gap formed in the supporting base material 801. A first gear 804 </ b> G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

An opening 8 is provided at a position slightly lower left of the center motor 804 in the center body portion of the support base material 801.
01P is pierced, disposed to the right of the opening 801P, and extended rearward into a pair of cylinders.
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, a detection arc plate 88 of a loose fitting device 880 described later is used.
Donut-shaped recess 801D recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass
(See FIG. 152) is formed.

The center motor 804 of the supporting substrate 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the center motor 804 is fixed.
Below this, an oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long, generally elliptical area in the center and cover the peripheral area from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion forming an upper end region, and a substantially U-shaped lower portion forming a region below the upper portion.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 has a shape that slightly extends up and down as a whole, but since the petal operation device 800 is arranged to be movable up and down as described later,
The operating space can be reduced by forming the support base 801 into a vertically long shape rather than a left and right long shape.

At this time, the center motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively concentrically arranged so as to be overlapped with the position of the opening 801P as will be described later.
Since it is linked to (links to) G, it can be placed at any position on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G as long as they do not interfere with each other. They are arranged on the right side via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a slightly inclined position toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an interval between the supporting base material 801 and the driving arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the supporting base material 801 from being increased, and the driving base arm member 910 is connected to the supporting base material 801 via the driving arm member 910. Thus, the driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the supporting base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In FIGS. 155 and 156, the support base 801 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin molded to imitate the shape of one of five petals separated from each other, which constitute a flower of a hibiscus in a flowering state as a whole. And a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back side.

FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arc-shaped front shape that extends in the radial direction in the arrangement state, and has a shape that gradually swells forward from the center to the outer periphery (FIG. 15).
4).

Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the periphery thereof has an irregular shape when viewed from the front. The five petals 802 are not strictly identical in shape to each other, but are slightly similar in unevenness and the like, but are formed in approximately the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge is formed so that the specific color (red) is dark without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape and has a screw hole inside at two locations, that is, the vicinity of the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and the radial center portion. I have.

The petals 802 are located behind the rear side 802a arranged on the rounded tip side (counterclockwise side in front view, right side in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where they are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803.
The front side portion 802b arranged from 2a to the tip sharp side (clockwise in front view, left side in FIG. 157 (a) on the paper) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side 802b is closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side 802a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one side, and the rear side 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other side. Petals 802 are arranged so as to gather toward the same center with the tip on the inner peripheral side.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced back and forth, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802 at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175).
b can be superimposed on the front and back, so that the difference (size difference) in the shape of the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) is remarkable. be able to.

The five petals 802 have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear surface having a circular opening S1 at the center as a whole in the arrangement state (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat member 803 is provided with the five petals 8 described above.
02, each of which is a long plate-shaped resin member separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending in a substantially rectangular shape from the center to the outer peripheral side in the arrangement state, and further has an outer peripheral edge portion extending forward.

Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arrangement state (near the inner circumference).
, A pair of screw-in portions 803S that extend rearward in a cylindrical shape and have screw holes inside are integrally formed at positions separated in the circumferential direction (the short direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portions 803S are formed so as to be located substantially on both side walls in the circumferential direction (transverse direction) of each flat plate member 803. Further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along portions on both side walls of the flat plate member 803. Slide ribs 803a, which are perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extend rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape, extend to both sides along a surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw portion 803S. Thus, it is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the threaded portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has screw insertion holes inside at two locations corresponding to the screw-in portions 802S of the petals 802, respectively.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat member 803 has a corresponding screw-in portion 8 of the corresponding petal 802.
02S is abutted from the front, and a screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is fixed to the corresponding petal 802.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are appropriately referred to. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slit member 810 is disposed behind the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-like member having a similar front shape in which five similar shaped portions are annularly continuous, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the center. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

156 will be described again. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape at the front and rear at two adjacent locations among five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and at the middle one of the three locations except the two locations. A threaded portion 813S having a screw hole inside the extension is integrally formed, and a positioning boss 81 is formed from the leading edge of a portion where the threaded portion 813S is not formed among the above-mentioned five places.
3a is extended. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of the bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both-side slits 815. Each of the center slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, in the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 toward the outside, that is, in the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the center slit 81
Reference numeral 4 extends along a direction D12 inclined at an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in the case of the pachinko machine 8010) in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

Both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight space therebetween.

In this manner, a set of three slits, the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals). Each end of the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a circular shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost double-sided slit 815 in the set of these three slits, that is, of the four corners of the three slits, the two corners on the small diameter side are the two-sided slits. It has a substantially rectangular shape in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (a rectangular cut is formed). The rectangular extension (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803 a of the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to a side end of a flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both-side slits 815 are formed, and has a smaller outer diameter than the outer peripheral ends of the center slit 814 and both-side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Has an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

Thereby, the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 are formed is enhanced by the arc plate 816. Therefore, the center slit 814 and both side slits 81
Deformation of the flat plate on which 5 is formed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG.
Since each set of the pair extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the five sets of the central slits 814 and the both-side slits 815 are shifted inward by that amount. , The slit members 81 are also arranged densely.
0 is compact.

In other words, if five sets of the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed in the circular opening 811
Is formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, rather than being arranged so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11. In this case, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, a slide member 820 is arranged in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. Slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 157, reference numeral 20 denotes a resin member having a long plate-like front shape. The thickness is reduced at both ends of the slide member 820, and the tip is formed into a semicircular shape in front view. Extending portion, a central portion which is bulged out of the rendering portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 formed in the extending portion, and a front surface extending from the center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 protruding from the side and inserted through the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 fixed so as to penetrate back and forth in a manner protruding from the center of the slide member 820 to the rear side. .

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged so that the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersects the long direction at right angles. And both side slits 815.

On the other hand, a central slit 814 and both-side slits 815 of the slit member 810 include:
The screw portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted from the front side. When fully fitted, the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the screw-in portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is separated from the flat plate member 8 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
03 is fixed to the rear side. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the center slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the slit 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

Thereby, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the center slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 810. At this time, the flat plate member 803 is
The slide rib 803a regulates the slide rib 803a so as to slide in a fixed outward position without rotating around the center 22.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the center motor 804, and FIG.
(A) and FIG. 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. In FIG. 161 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. Note that FIG.
In the description of FIG. 0 and FIG. 161, FIG. 155 and FIG.

As described above, the rotating plate 830 is disposed from the rear side on the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed on the front side, with a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831, and formed around the peripheral wall.

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall
The rotating plate 830 is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 so as to extend along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to close in a loop shape elongated in a front view.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a small gap of play. The ridge corner at the extended end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be angled.

The guide rail 832 is located at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 at a position in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall.
It extends in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front along a substantially intermediate direction between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831, and then forms an arc toward the clockwise direction in the front view further than the intermediate direction. While being curved, it extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 175 (a)).

The end of the guide rail 832 on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, the peripheral wall of the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the center end is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall of the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end protrudes forward from the front end of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are equally spaced from the pivot opening 831. It extends so as to spiral from the periphery to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830 </ b> G that extends rearward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in a peripheral wall shape and has teeth on the outer periphery is integrally formed on the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830. The second gear 830G is disposed so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is driven to rotate by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 projecting rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174 (c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five places as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is not linear but linear. As a result, the pivotal opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, so that the rotating plate 830 is smoothly pivotably supported.

As shown in FIG. 161 (a), a second gear 830G is further provided on the rear side of the second gear 830G.
A third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically, and is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

At the center of the third gear 810G, a circular pivot opening 810a is formed.
0a, screw insertion holes 810b are provided at positions corresponding to the three screw insertion portions 813S of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156) at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a. Each positioning hole 810c is drilled.

The third gear 810G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is disposed on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810.
In contrast, positioning is performed by inserting positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) into positioning hole 810c, and inserting a screw (not shown) through screw insertion hole 810b into screw insertion portion 813S (FIG. 1).
(See 56).

As a result, the slit member 810 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G, and is braked by the oil damper 805. Is held on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotating device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the center shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut out along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852. And a flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to increase the diameter at the front end, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen portion 856 penetrating the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, a front screw portion 857 having screw holes therein at two places on the left and right sides of the lumen portion 856, and a side from the front screw portion 857 to the lumen portion 856 side. A holding portion 858, which is formed in a shape having a counterbore at a deviated position toward the rear side, and two support protrusions 859 extending slightly short forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. . The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

The inner peripheral surface of the lumen 856 extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing portions, extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft 852, and A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. A rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from the rear screw portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, an LED board 861 is provided in front of the central shaft member 851.
Is arranged. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate slightly smaller in diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED substrate 861 at positions corresponding to the front screw-in portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted and positioned in the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861, and a screw is inserted through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED substrate 861.
The LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 by being screwed into the front screw-in portion 857 of the central shaft member 851.

An insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the center shaft member 851 in a size that allows the screw-in portion 869 of the center decoration member 868 to be fitted inside.

As shown in FIG. 162, the front surface of the LED substrate 861 faces forward at one location at the center and at many locations arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles multiplexed (doubled) around the one location. LE
D865 are arranged and fixed, respectively, so as to emit light forward.

In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, laterally oriented LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is supposed to. Note that the horizontal LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED board 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the front LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is disposed and fixed rearward.

On the front side of the LED board 861, a center decoration member 868 is arranged. Central decorative member 868
Is made of a resin material that has a specific color (yellow) but is almost transparent, extends from the long plate-like base to the back side in a columnar shape, and has a screw hole at the center where a screw can be screwed. And a pair of screw-in portions 869 to be provided.

The screw portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861. LE
The insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861 is provided in the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the D substrate 861 interposed therebetween.
Is screwed into the screw-in portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855, whereby the center decoration member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. Thus, the center decoration member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED board 861.

The loose fitting device 880 has a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. And a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member. A main body cylindrical member 883 which is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and which is loosely and rotatably fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 883S extending in a front and rear cylindrical shape and internally having a screw hole at two of the four locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the leading edge of the formed and the above-mentioned four places where the screw-in portion 883S is not formed.

At four positions corresponding to the screw-in portions 883S and the positioning bosses 883a, the main body cylindrical member 8 is formed.
83 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with the same protrusion length as the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a in the outer diameter direction in the shape of a rib and at the same time in the axial direction. Extending over the sliding rib 88
3b is formed.

A decorative member 884 formed on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED substrate 861 and covering the LED substrate 861 from the front side in an assembled state (see FIG. 149), and the decorative member 884 is externally mounted. A rear cover 886 which is fastened and fixed in the vicinity of the diameter and has a bottomed cup shape in which the outer peripheral side rises to the front side from the fastened portion and abuts against the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the rear side and is fastened and fixed. , Are arranged.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated on its front and back surfaces (yellow in the present pachinko machine 8010), whereby the side surface is mirror-finished. Therefore, for example, light emission can be performed by reflecting the light of the horizontal LED 866 disposed on the back side of the LED board 861 near the outer periphery.

The decorative member 884 is a member that performs light emission by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 provided on the LED substrate 861, and has a hibiscus flower shape, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light transmissive resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. In addition, an opening 885 is formed in a central portion with a size that allows the center decoration member 868 to be inserted.

The main body cylindrical member 883 thus configured is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G disposed behind the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As shown in FIG. 161 (a), a fourth gear 880G slightly smaller in diameter than the third gear 810G and larger in diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed to the rear side of the third gear 810G.
A pair of intermediate gears 808 rotatably supported by the support base material 801 and meshing with each other are meshed with each other.

One of the intermediate gears 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with one of the gears meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is connected to the intermediate gear 8
08 and rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

At the center of the fourth gear 880G, a circular pivot opening 880a is formed, and the pivot opening 88a is formed.
Around 0a, a screw insertion hole 880b is formed at a position corresponding to the two screw insertion portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883, and a positioning hole 880c is formed at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. I have.

The fourth gear 880G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and has a positioning boss with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) is inserted into the positioning hole 880c to perform positioning, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 880b into the screw insertion portion 883S (FIG. 16).
3) and fixed.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off, and the slit is formed. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d that extends to the rear side in an arc shape around the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. As the detection arc plate 880d, plates of the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 154), the detection arc plate 880d is in the donut-shaped recess 80.
1D (see FIG. 152), and is detected by a photocoupler type detection sensor 801C that is provided so as to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. That is, in the present embodiment, no matter which posture the fourth gear 880G starts rotating, the detection arc plate 88
The rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (center angle 72 °) can be detected (minimum angle 7).
2 ° can be detected, and rotation of 72 ° or more can be ensured by the detection).

The assembly of the center shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED board 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, the rear ends of the shaft portions 852 project slightly rearward from the pivotal openings 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is attached to the support base 801.
(Refer to FIG. 152). The rear insertion portion 853 of the support base 801 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) of the support base 801 and positioned there. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base 801 by being inserted into the insertion hole and fixed with screws.

At this time, a wire is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wire is led backward through the inner cavity 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801 </ b> P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward with respect to the support base material 801, and as shown in FIG. 154, the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.
The rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted to the outside, and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 is fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 8.
12 is attached so as to fit outside.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 has eight places along the circumferential direction, and the threaded portions 883S,
Since it is locally bulged by the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b, the slit 810 comes into linear contact with the inner peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is smoothly and rotatably supported.

FIG. 164 shows the petal operation device 800, the driving arm member 910 and the driven arm member 95.
0 is a rear perspective view, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. The petal operating device 800 vertically moves up and down (moves forward and backward) when a vertical load is applied from the driving arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIGS.
2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member fastened and fixed to the deepest portion inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and at the lower left corner in front view. A support pillar 1110 protruding in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear housing 1120 in which a plurality of gears are recessed above the support pillar 1110 so as to be able to be housed from the front side, Rail fixing portion 1130 disposed on the rail, and the rail fixing portion 1130
And a support slot 1140 formed as a slot that is inclined downward as it approaches the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910,
In the vicinity of the outer periphery at the front end, a pair of left and right holes, which are screw holes 1111 formed so as to allow screws to be screwed therein, and a pair of upper and lower front surfaces on the same surface as the leading edge of the screw portion 1111 And a positioning boss 1112 extending to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is formed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in the shape of a letter when viewed from the rear. A rotation shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by the shaft 1110; a connection protrusion 912 projecting in a stepped cylindrical shape on the front side at a position near one end of the long body member; A transmission elongated hole 913 that is formed in a linear elongated shape from the bending point of the long main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the petal operation device 800 is supported at the other end of the long main body member. And a support portion 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 includes an inner fitting protrusion 925 that is fitted in the transmission elongated hole 913, and a flange 926 that protrudes radially outward to a position where the detection sensor 1162 detects the rotation of the arm gear 924. In conjunction therewith, the support column 1110 rotates about an axis.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a concave portion for accommodating the gear of the transmission means 920, and is composed of three circular concave portions that are connected to each other while slightly intersecting with each other. The first storage portion 1121 and the second storage portion 11 connected to the first storage portion 1121
22 and a third housing portion 112 in which an arm gear 924 which is disposed directly opposite to the first housing portion 1121 with the second housing portion 1122 interposed therebetween and which is fitted to the drive side arm member 910 is housed.
3 is mainly provided.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and slidably supported up and down. It has an insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on a line.
The posture of the petal operating device 800 is maintained constant by the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R.

The support slot 1140 is a slot that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined and disposed so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° as viewed from the front. An extension wall 1141 is provided to extend to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven arm member 950 is formed of a long rod-shaped main body member formed substantially in a straight line in a rear view, and is provided with a columnar projection at one end to the rear side. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 slidably supported by the support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted into the supported projection 951, and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported projection 951 in a state in which the collar is internally fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. Thus, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported projection 951, and the outer diameter is
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side substrate 1000S, and the second effect member 940. FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive-side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. is there.

The slide plate 930 is supported by the side base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported long holes 931 formed in the front and rear direction in a long hole shape extending left and right. It is connected to the connection protrusion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by a base end side long hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction and formed in a vertically extending elongated hole shape provided on the left end side, and provided on the right end side. And is connected to the second effect member 940 through a front-end side insertion hole 933 that is formed in the front-rear direction.

The base-side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stop portion 932a formed along a locus at which the connection protrusion 912 rotates at the upper end around the support column 1110, and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. And a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a columnar portion disposed in a substantially triangular shape on the front side on the left side of the back plate 1100 when viewed from the front, and has a threaded portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed at the tip. A plate-like member fastened and fixed to the supporting column 1150 having a fixing plate 1001S, which is disposed at a position corresponding to the supporting column 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. And a support protrusion 1002S protruding rearward in a columnar shape in a positional relationship (three places) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931 and a circular hole in the front-rear direction at the right corner in front view. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S that is concavely formed in the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Concentric with Ridge 1005S which is projectingly provided on the front side along the arc shape
And mainly comprising.

The support projection 1002S is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed from the tip of the support projection 1002S.
The support plate 1002S is arranged in a gap between the support protruding portion 1002S and a screw for preventing the slide plate 930 from being slidably moved. You.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc concave portion 1004S and the convex ridge portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotation operation of the second effect member 940. Part. The protruding ridge portion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is at a regular position, but is formed at a protruding height at which the second directing member 940 can abut if it is displaced or bent from the regular position. Is done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body that is formed in such a manner that a lower end portion is bifurcated and an upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the pivoted support post 941, and is located on the rear side at the right corner in front view. A shaft-supported column portion 941 that is formed in a columnar shape and supported by a shaft support hole 1003S with a collar interposed therebetween, and an auxiliary protrusion that is disposed adjacent to the shaft-supported column portion 941 and protrudes rearward in a columnar shape. Part 942,
Mainly equipped.

The pivoted support portion 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed at the tip. An entrance 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). The supported shaft portion 941 has a shaft support hole 1003 with the collar interposed therebetween.
When a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 941a in a state where a disk-shaped lid member 945 having a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is arranged at the distal end in a state of being inserted into the S, the lid member 94 is screwed.
5 plays a role of retaining. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the front end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin-made collar is fastened and fixed at the front end, thereby preventing the slide plate 930 from falling off. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are linked with each other by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal-side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the circular concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the circular concave portion 1004S. Thus, even if the second effect member 940 is likely to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 contacts the arcuate concave portion 1004S and resistance is generated, so that bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. The rear plate 1100 includes three screwing portions 1161 configured to be capable of screwing screws when fastening a plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921,
A detection sensor 1162 that detects a flange portion 926 that protrudes radially outward from the arm gear 924 within a predetermined angle range, and a collar that guides a coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 are rotatably mounted on a shaft. A shaft support 1163 to be supported, a cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the substrate cover 1000C below and to the right of the support elongated hole 1140, and the substrate cover 10 arranged close to the cover support portion 1164.
It mainly includes a wiring stopper 1165 hidden from the front in 00C and a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes screw-in portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use,
Even if the portion that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 in front view is missing,
The displacement of the second effect member 940 can be regulated by the screw-in portion 1006S.

As described above, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fixedly fastened to each of the side base material 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are stacked and arranged back and forth and fastened to each other. 1000C, side substrate 1000S and back plate 11
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. Accordingly, even when a heavy device such as the petal operating device 800 is moved up and down by rotating the driving side arm member 910, the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S are easily suppressed. Can be.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the up / down operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. FIGS. 168, 170, and 172 show the petal operation device 800, the advance / retreat operation unit 900, and the back plate. FIG. 169, FIG.
71 and 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

168 and 169 show a state in which the driving arm member 910 is arranged at the upper end side of the movement range, and in FIGS. 170 and 171, the connecting protrusion 912 (see FIG. 164) of the driving arm member 910. ) Is shown at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 is shown.
Is shown at the lower end of the movement range.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the driving side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the driving side arm member 910 is fitted into the inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151), and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, the inner fitting protrusion 9
Since only 25 is displaced and a range in which the driving arm member 910 maintains its posture (a range in which it rotates idly) is generated, the resistance of the driving motor 921 at the time of starting can be reduced.

170 and 171, the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained while the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared to the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive-side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are linked to each other, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized as linked. Can be done.

Here, by moving the second production member 940 in a manner that the second production member 940 projects toward the position where the petal operation device 800 was originally arranged, the second production member 940 becomes as if the second production member 940 is the petal operation device 8.
00 can be visually recognized as operating.

Next, the collecting and rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central shaft rotating device 850. 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 175 (b) is the petal operating device 8
FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (b)
Fig. 176 (c) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, Fig. 176 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 without the central shaft rotating device 850, and Fig. 176 (d) is a slit member. FIG. 810 is a front view of the rotating plate 830.

177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 177 (b) is the petal operating device 8
FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (b)
178 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 without the central shaft rotating device 850, and FIG. 178 (d) is a slit member. FIG. 810 is a front view of the rotating plate 830.

FIG. 179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 179 (b) is the petal operating device 8
FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operating device 800 is lowered by the elevating operation and is at the lowest position, the petal operating device 800 moves from the initial position (assembly position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to FIGS. 176 and 177.
178, a widening operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, and a rotation operation (second operation) is performed at the fully open position. The operation (third operation) can be performed to return to the initial position (convergence position).

In the initial position (assembly position), as shown in FIG.
The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 157) is located at the center slit 81 of the slit member 810.
4 is located at the inner end (end on the side of the circular opening 811), and as shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are most concentrated toward the central decoration member 868 at the center. Position, and is in a collective state that constitutes a flowering hibiscus flower as a whole.

When the petal 802 is at the initial position (assembly position) as described above, the first
When the gear 804G is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c), the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)) interlocks with the rotation, so that the rotating plate 83 is rotated.
0 is rotationally driven clockwise in rear view as indicated by an arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 with a small frictional resistance at the pivot opening 831 so that the rotation plate 830 can easily move around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, via the third gear 810G as described above. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotating plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, first, the rotating plate 8
Only 30 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is kept stopped (see FIGS. 176 and 177).

When the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates counterclockwise in front view as shown by an arrow A11 on the front side thereof,
Accordingly, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in a direction in which the slide pin 823 is pushed outward in the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, the sliding pin 823 moves as shown in FIG.
Since the slide pin 823 is regulated by the center slit 814, the slide pin 823 moves linearly from the inner end to the outside along the center slit 814.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that a slight torque is also applied to the slit member 810. However, the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds the torque, and accordingly, With the slit member 810 held in a stopped state, the slide pin 823 is rotated by the rotation of the rotating plate 830 to move the center slit 8.
It will move linearly outward along 14.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start an expanding operation in which the petals 802 expand radially outward from the gathering position. In this expanding operation, the slit member 8
As described above, since the center slit 814 of the ten extends along the direction D12 inclined at an angle θ11 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. Although a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward, on the other hand, the movement speed of the slide pin 823 becomes relatively high due to the inclination.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as described above, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotating plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the operation of expanding the petals 802 can be performed more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively small as compared with the above-described case, Assuming that the moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and further, for example, assuming that the center slit 814 is inclined clockwise in the front view with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed decreases. Any reduction is even more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise as viewed from the front along the direction D15 between the tangent and the normal to the pivot opening 831 from the center end as shown in FIG. Thereafter, it extends outwardly while being curved in an arc toward the clockwise direction in a front view more than the direction D15, and extends so as to spirally spread outward as a whole with the five guide rails 832. .

As the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in the front view, the slide pin 82
3, the moving speed becomes slower. Further, the guide rail 832
Is more curved toward the clockwise direction in the front view than the direction D15, the more the slide pin 823
, And the movement speed is more remarkable.

That is, in the case of the center slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by tilting the slide pin 823 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in front view and further bending it in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, a groove is formed by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, when a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. For this reason, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced while the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is reduced at the expense of the movement speed.

On the other hand, in the case of the center slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of departure. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. Is configured.

As described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced by the guide rail 832 to prevent a problem such as deviation, thereby ensuring the reliability of power transmission.
In FIG. 14, the role sharing is performed by increasing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the slide pin 823 is
Upon reaching the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement in FIG. 4 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 radially expand to the fully open position and become fully open, and the expanding operation ends.

In this fully opened state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move so as to be radially separated, so that the petals 802 can be continuously viewed outside the decorative member 884 in a front view. 802 is arranged. Thereby, as compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), the decorative member 884 is visually recognized integrally like a hibiscus flower which is one size larger (FIG. 178 (b)).

As described above, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the center slit 814, and cannot move outward any more, the slide pin 823 will be thereafter moved.
Is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814, so that the rotating plate 830 cannot further rotate in the same direction as before with a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805.
Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state after the end of the expanding operation can be maintained.

After the end of the expanding operation, the rotational power in the same direction as that from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotating plate 830. When the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 starts to rotate counterclockwise in front view as indicated by an arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830 by completely removing the braking by the oil damper 805. Thus, after the expanding operation, the petals 802 rotate counterclockwise in a front view in a fully opened state as shown by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

At this time, if the rotation power is continuously applied to the rotating plate 830 without stopping the central motor 804 after the expanding operation, the rotating operation is immediately continued so as to continue from the expanding operation to the rotating operation. Can be migrated.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a front view in the fully opened state as shown by an arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise as viewed from the front) as indicated by an arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position 84 is large, the rotation speed of the petals 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

After the above rotation operation is completed, the first gear 804G is moved by the central motor 804 to the contrary,
When rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as indicated by arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), first, only the rotating plate 830 is rotated while the slit member 810 is stopped by the oil damper 805 while being stopped. As shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 2B, the motor is driven to rotate clockwise in rear view, whereby an assembling operation in a direction opposite to the above-described expanding operation is performed.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement of the center slit 814, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement. Then, they gather to return to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, return to the gathering state, and end the gathering operation.

Thereafter, the central motor 804 may be stopped to terminate the operation of the petal operation device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. It is operated again, and the first gear 804 is further driven by the central motor 804.
When G is rotated clockwise in rear view as indicated by arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), petals 802
However, as shown by an arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b), it rotates clockwise in the front view in the assembled state.

When the petals 802 rotate clockwise in a front view in an assembled state as shown by an arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is turned in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in front view) as shown by an arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). To rotate. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position 84 is large, the rotation speed of the petals 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 from the gathering operation to the rotation operation as described above,
The transition may be made after a pause and a pause, or the transition may be made immediately so as to continue without interruption.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operating device 800 is rotating.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described. The unit 9140 has a cut-out 9145 formed in the wall forming the foul ball passage 9145.
b is formed, and the sheet metal member 9150 extends along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment in that the inner configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145, the lower end portion and the front The vertical positional relationship of the lower end of the door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front end to the back of the passage forming unit 9140 in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . The sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of areas including the concave end of the S-shaped path SL2,
The depth of the recess is substantially equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that protrudes rearward from the plate member 14 d (see FIG. 91), and faces upward from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand loads.

The thin plate blade portion 9153 allows the yarn Y8 to pass through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the yarn Y8, thereby illegally operating the ball inside the game area and obtaining an illegal profit. And is arranged for cutting the yarn Y8 passed through the foul ball passage 9145. Here, possible misconduct will be described.

148 will be described again. As described above, the ball firing unit 112a of the eighth embodiment
Is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by using the force of the ball to be fired. If the force of the fire is weak, the yarn Y8 is cut. The ball could be fired without it.

On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, and is discharged to the lower plate 50 via the foul ball passage portion 145. Therefore, there is no possibility that the ball directly enters the game area.

On the other hand, for example, when the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the yarn Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P fixed to one end of the yarn Y8
8 in a state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, and the yarn Y9
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is disposed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701). Even if it is punched out, the yarn Y8 is not cut into the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is hit vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 fired in advance is in the foul ball passage 1
It passes through 45, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the person who commits the wrongdoing can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2) and the like, and an improper profit can be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when performing a wrongdoing using the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, the thin plate blade 145 is formed in the foul ball passage 145 through which the yarn Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

In other words, when the wrongdoer pulls the yarn Y8, the yarn Y8 rubs against the thin blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the yarn Y8 and cutting the yarn Y8 at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145 exposing the thin plate blade portion 9153
b is formed on the side closer to the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, so that the thread Y8 is arranged inside the notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled. The thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance to an upward load by abutting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This prevents the thin blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin blade portion 9153 when the yarn Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, the thin plate blade portion 915 is formed from the yarn Y8.
Most of the load applied to 3 can be used to damage yarn Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b, At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. This can prevent the thin blade portion 9153 from breaking or chipping due to the collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end of the foul ball passage 9145 is disposed below the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the dispensed ball. That is, since the person who commits the wrongdoing is afraid of finding the wrongdoing, the ball P
After grasping the ball 8, the ball P8 is moved close to the body (eg,
(For example, in a pants pocket), and it is easy to perform an illegal act of pulling or loosening the thread 8. In this case, the state where the yarn Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (contacts the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 extends through a position about the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the prize ball is paid out, the lower plate 5 is moved from the lower end of the lower door passage portion 9142 on the front door side.
When the ball discharged to 0 hits the lower plate 50 and bounces off, it hits on the yarn Y8 disposed on the front side of the ball guide opening 53 or hits the yarn Y8 while lowering the lower plate 50 (FIG. 1). (See FIG. 2) to the right and flow down through the bottom opening disposed behind the ball release lever 52. That is, by disposing the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate portion is formed. Passage 9
The ball discharged from 142 to the lower plate 50 comes into contact with the yarn Y8, so that the possibility of damaging the yarn Y8 can be increased, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

Thirdly, on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, a right inclined surface 9142a is formed which is inclined downward toward the right. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it easier to give a rightward speed to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the front door side lower plate passage 9142.

As a result, the thread Y8 is discharged before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 decreases.
You can aim the ball towards. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly impart a rightward (facing to the ball ball passage portion 9145 side) velocity component to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower plate 50. It is possible to increase the percentage of balls that step on the yarn Y8 or hit the yarn Y8.

Fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 9142 is provided with the ball guide opening 5.
3 occupies an area of about の of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage 9145 has a remaining area (right and left of the ball guide opening 53) at the right part of the ball guide opening 53. (A region of about 1/3 of the width dimension), and a rising regulation step portion 9053a is formed at the boundary.

As shown in FIG. 180, the climbing regulation step portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, and a foul disposed on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion that connects to the left end (left end) of the lower bottom near the exit of the spherical passage 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding regulation step portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms the front door side lower plate passage 91.
42 and foul ball passage 9145 are communicated. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door-side lower plate passage 9142 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the yarn Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the riding restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.
Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the ball rolling on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and abutting on the climbing regulation step portion 9053a from climbing to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the riding restriction step portion 9053a allows the ball to pass in the left-right direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts the ball in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment is described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. With reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, differences from the eighth embodiment will be described.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. 184 illustrates a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed obliquely from the upper right, FIG. 185 illustrates a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed obliquely from the upper left, and FIG. The state seen from diagonally below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage 10145.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is formed by a notch 10 that is recessed from the front end to the back side of the passage forming unit 10140 in the upper curved inside portion of the S-shaped path SL2.
145c. The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side so as to cover below the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of areas including the concave end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the depth of the concave is approximately the same as twice (diameter) the radius Ra (see FIG. 180) of the sphere. You. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole formed in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d for guiding the ball to the passage portion 145a. The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. Auxiliary projection 1 protruding from the back side to the back side
4d2. The auxiliary projection 14d2 is shown by imaginary lines in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is not shown in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 in the front-rear direction is spherical. The radius Ra is about P8. Therefore, the foul ball passage 101
Since it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down 45 from colliding with the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 from breaking or chipping due to the collision with the ball P8. Thus, the durability of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the rear side as it goes toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-back width) of the gap on the back side of the protrusion 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is determined by the width of the passage portion 14.
It becomes wider as it is closer to 5a. Thereby, the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is
It becomes easy to enter the gap on the back side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, which is the gap where the 0153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the rear side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a portion forming a bifurcated blade portion, the first thin plate blade portion 10153
Is extended leftward from the right end of the front side edge slightly upward. As a result, between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, an acute concave portion 1015 in which the concave deep portion has an acute angle.
5 are formed.

The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members provided for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8, similarly to the thin blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute angle concave portion 10155 is disposed on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the back side edge of the notch 10145c. Thus, when the yarn Y8 enters the back side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, the yarn Y8 enters the acute angle recess 10155, and the yarn Y8
Can be easily damaged.

Since the second thin blade portion 10154 disposed on the front side is disposed on the upper side as compared with the first thin blade portion 10153, the yarn Y8 which is pulled obliquely downward on the front side by a wrongdoer. Can easily enter the deep part of the acute angle recess 10155.

A plate-shaped portion continuously provided to the right of the thin plate blades 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate 10145d.
And is configured to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage 10145.

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are disposed facing left and right opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in left and right opposite directions. You. That is, at these two points, the yarn Y8 is pulled in the left and right opposite directions.

For example, a person who commits a wrongdoing releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand and tries to avoid the discovery of the wrongdoing by the ball P8 flowing backward through the foul ball passage 10145 and being discharged through the game area. According to the present embodiment, a load in the left-right opposite direction is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 at the lower end side extended end of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays.

This causes the ball P8 and the yarn Y8 to stay inside the foul ball passage 10145, and the yarn Y
By prolonging the time during which the 8 is exposed to the game area, it is possible to expedite the detection of fraud.

Note that an adhesive member (such as glue or trim) may be provided at a deep portion of the acute angle recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute angle recess 10155. In this case, even if the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 coming to the wrongdoer's hand is cut, the yarn is adhered to the sticky member provided in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is moved to the game area. , And is kept in place, so that it is possible to expedite the detection of fraud using the yarn Y8.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) having a low firing intensity and not reaching the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50 has been described. A receiving foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is disposed at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is formed of a resin material so as to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A tip member 206 that is formed and disposed in close proximity to the ball firing unit 112a
2a, and a guide member 2062b formed near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 of a flowable width between the ball and the tip member 2062a.

A foul ball passage 2062c is formed downstream of the gap V11 and communicates with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the main body upper dish passage portion 161. Foul ball passage 2
062c is formed to have a width slightly larger than a width that allows one ball to pass through the furnishing, and a spare for the ball preventing member 68 is disposed above it.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the main body-side upper dish passage 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body-side lower dish passage 162 is provided in the above-described embodiment. The formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied to the upper plate 17 exclusively via the main unit upper plate passage 161. When the ball on the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) arranged to protrude inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the dispensing device is turned on. It is configured such that the payout of the ball from 133 stops.

That is, in the present embodiment, the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c is also dispensed by the payout device 133 (
The ball paid out from FIG. 87 is also supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, as described above, the balls are adhered to both ends of the yarn Y8, and one ball is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c to thereby form the yarn Y8.
When thinking of fraudulent acts that let the person enter the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c,
The action of damaging the yarn Y8 by hitting the dispensing ball to the yarn Y8 can be generated without depending on the degree of accumulation of the balls on the upper plate 17. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily cut at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball preventing member 68 disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and is shown side by side as a rear perspective view. In the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 is appropriately referred to.

The return ball preventing member 68 is temporarily fixed to the game board 13 with a metal long screw B11 in such a manner that the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b supporting the tilting gate member 68a is arranged on the near side.

Specifically, on the back side of the return ball preventing member 68, the guide member 2062b is hollow. A support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity so as to protrude cylindrically from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b, and has a threaded groove formed therein for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A closing plate 2062b4 for closing the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the front end of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2.
In the state where b1 is in contact, a long screw B11 is inserted into a through-hole previously drilled as a mounting hole in the base member 68b1 and a through-hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 with its position aligned with the through-hole. Is inserted and screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 in this state, whereby the return ball preventing member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

Note that the closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface, which are the side that contacts the guide member 2062b, match the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is
It is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of 62b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that the surface of the guide member 2062b, which constitutes the outer frame of the game area, descends and falls as it approaches the tip member 2062a. That is, the gradient increasing unit 206
The straight line L11 extending toward the distal end member 2062a along the 2d surface is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) of the distal end member 2062a that constitutes the outer frame of the game area (in this embodiment, the diameter of the sphere is (About 1/3 lower side) and intersects the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when a ball is fired toward the game area, the gradient increasing unit 20
62d is retracted from the path of the sphere, and it is possible to avoid collision of the sphere with the lower end portion of the gradient increasing portion 2062d. On the other hand, when the ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d. And it is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball firing unit 112a side.

The front side surface 2062d1 of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is between the obstruction plate 2062b4 and
The cut 206 having a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and allowing the thread to enter (about 2 [mm] in this embodiment).
It is recessed to the rear side to the position where 2b1 can be formed. The location where the cut 2062b1 is formed is a location where the path of the ball driven into the game area and the foul ball path 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

In the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view, on the front side than the side surface 2062d1,
A cutout 2062b3 for a semicircle is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. The notch 2062b is provided for exposing the long screw B11.

As described above, since the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cuts 2062b1 are formed, similarly to the method described in the ninth or tenth embodiment, The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 during fraudulent acts performed through the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, due to the arrangement of the cuts 2062b1, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 disposed deep in the cuts 2062b1 when receiving a load that pulls both ends (FIG. 190 (
a)). In this state, the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, so that the thread Y8 is rubbed with the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, the cut 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. This can prevent the cut 2062b1 from being arranged at the position where the shot ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically below the center of the ball), so that the cut 2062b1 collides with the shot ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the sphere from being affected.

In addition, the person who performs the wrongdoing performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the yarn Y8 that protrudes toward the player (the ball P8 is fixed). (See FIG. 182) to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area, so that near the gap V11 close to the player, the yarn Y8 is shifted toward the front. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c near the front side, the yarn Y8 can be easily inserted into the cut 2062c as compared with the case where the cut 2062c is arranged near the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 provided with a detection unit projecting downward is provided in a cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with a load extremely weaker than a load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. For this reason, the possibility that the button-type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a.
N-OFF can be switched.

FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190A, the weight 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68 is shown.
A state where the weight 68a2 side is inclined to the foul ball passage 2062c side by the weight of 2 is shown. In FIG. 190 (b), the weight 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the gate member 68a is pushed up.
The state where the opening / closing portion 68a1 side is inclined to the foul ball passage 2062c side is illustrated. Also,
In FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used in the misconduct is shown for reference, and the button-type switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190 (b), the button-type switch SW11 is turned on. It is shown that it is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball preventing member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and provides enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows off under its own weight. Even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting of the opening / closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state returns to the state shown in FIG.
This is because it is possible to return to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) by the timing at which the ball is guided to 62c (the shortest after 0.6 seconds).

On the other hand, for an object that does not flow away like a sphere, for example, an object that progresses while filling a passage such as an endoscope, the return ball prevention member 68 has a large resistance. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraud.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is caused to travel through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball, to reach the inside of the game area, and to try to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, The nail (not shown) implanted in the game board 13 is bent, the ball is gripped and put into a winning opening, the tip of the device is used as a guide plate to the winning opening, or a laser is emitted from the tip. Cheating nails).

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that enters illegally is shown by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, when the distal end of the device such as the endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball, in the present embodiment, the distal end is moved while rejecting the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is displaced by the distal end of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), it is connected to the distal end of the endoscope. The insertion portion (elongated flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a
2 will be maintained in a state of being pushed up. Therefore, it is difficult to repel the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from moving further.

Here, in the case where the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is destroyed and enters the inside, the fraud cannot be prevented as it is. On the other hand, in this case, the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, so that the button-type switch SW1 is maintained.
By performing control so that an alarm is sounded when 1 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time, fraudulent acts can be found early.

Further, when the button-type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned OFF.
Since N is set (see FIG. 190 (a)), the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.
On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, the state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

The member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c does not need to be the return ball preventing member 68, and may be another movable member. However, as in the present embodiment, the return ball preventing member 68
When the return ball preventing member 68 provided on the game board 13 is broken or bent due to long-term use, the replacement can be performed early. As a result, as compared with a case where the replacement member of the return ball preventing member 68 is simply purchased as an option, it is possible to play a role of preventing fraud before replacement, and it is possible to eliminate the trouble of searching for a storage location forgotten. The effect described above can be obtained. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball preventing member 68. For example, a configuration in which the gate member 68a is supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be provided) may be used.

In addition, whether or not the above-described effect of preventing the illegal action is exhibited when the return ball preventing member 68 is broken or bent and replaced is determined by the degree of breakage of the return ball preventing member 68. , The fraudster does not know if the exchange has taken place, and
Even if it has been replaced, the degree of damage is not known, so that the deterrence of fraud can be maintained.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only at the gathering position or the fully opened position has been described. However, the petal operating device 2800 according to the twelfth embodiment can perform the rotating operation even at the expanding position. It is configured in an embodiment. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 192
As shown in the figure, the rear cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 is different from the configuration of the rear cover 886 in the eighth embodiment in that the flange 2 extends radially outward from the rear end outer edge.
887 and a regulating portion 2888 projecting rearward from the extending end of the flange portion 2887. The loose fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment is different from the loose fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
The only difference is that the rear cover 2886 is different from that of the rear cover 80 in comparison with the first embodiment.

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 is protruded to a position where it can contact the front side portion 802b but cannot contact the rear side portion 802a.

In the present embodiment, a case is described in which a single flange portion 2887 and a single regulating portion 2888 are arranged, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886.
Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the regulating portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIG.
4 (a) and FIG. 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. 193 and 194 illustrate the operation example of the petal operating device 2800 in chronological order, and include FIGS. 193 (a) and 194 (a), FIGS. 193 (b) and 194 (b).
The state at the same time is shown in FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and in the same cross-section, a pair of screw-in portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803.
S is viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), a pair of screw insertion portions 2803S arranged inside the both-side slits 815 are provided on opposite sides with the screw insertion portion 803H as a center. An inclined surface 2803T that is inclined in a manner away from 2803S is provided.

The inclined surface 2803T is approximately 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
It is formed inclined. The action of the regulating section 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 193 (a) and FIG. 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( When the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in front view), the restricting portion 2888 abuts on the front side portion 802b of the petal 802, and the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888.

If the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise in front view) while the petal 802 is receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888, the petal 802 receives the load. In order to change the posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in a normal posture illustrated in FIG. 194A (a posture in which the longitudinal direction is oriented in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815). From the center slit 814 as shown in FIG.
In addition, the posture can be changed to the inclined posture inclining with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. Petal 8
In 02, the posture changes as much as possible.

As described above, the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 changes, so that
While the load from 88 is received, the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), since the slide member 2820 has only the small width slide rib 803a abutting on both side slits 815, the frictional resistance is suppressed,
The slide member 2820 can be smoothly moved in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 has the slide rib 803a with the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 280 with the inner inner wall with respect to the slits 815 on both sides.
Since the 3Ts are respectively brought into contact (pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than the width of the slide rib 803a, the frictional resistance is significantly increased. In addition, since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-side slits 815 in both short-side directions of the both-side slits 815, frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. .

Therefore, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 in the longitudinal direction is increased, so that the sliding members 28
20 without reaching the ends of the slits 814 and 815,
156 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the normal posture and the inclination in the inclined posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 and the movement resistance.

In this case, the slit member 810 starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) by breaking off the braking by the oil damper 805. That is, from the state shown in FIG.
Start rotating counterclockwise in front view. This direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 moves away from the regulating portion 2888, so that the load applied to the petal 802 from the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800. In FIG. 195, FIG.
The state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated in the expanding position. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in front view) to the direction of rotation of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is applied to the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156).
Since the braking force is higher than the braking force of FIG. 156, the petal 802 can be rotated in both the forward and reverse directions while maintaining the expanding position.

FIGS. 196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. 196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 show the petals 802 moving from the expanding position to the gathering position in chronological order.

In FIG. 196 (a), from the state shown in FIG. 195, the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG.
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the posture of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 is returned to the normal posture.

Further, when the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) is higher than the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 from the slide pin 823. The rotation operation of 802 stops, and the petals 802 slide and move toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically perform the operation of rotating the petals 802 at the expanding position and then returning the petals 802 to the gathering position.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where the petal 802 contacts the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view). If so, contact between the front side portion 802b and the regulating portion 2888 can be avoided, so that the petals 802 can be moved to the fully open position and rotated at the fully open position in this embodiment.

Further, the arrangement of the restricting portion 2888 may be such that the petal 802 does not come into contact with the petal 802 at the gathering position or the fully opened position, or the petal 802 which rotates at the fully opened position.
By slightly changing the posture, it is possible to slip through the restricting portion 2888 and set a position where the load can be passed, thereby preventing the restricting portion 2888 from obstructing rotation of the petal 802 in the fully open position. it can.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the rear cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, the petals 802 can be provided.
When the flower expands, it can be used as a mark as to whether it passes through a position close to the star-shaped pattern or a position far from the star-shaped pattern. It is possible to cause a difference between performing the rotation operation and performing the rotation operation halfway.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. The pattern of the pattern can function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

Note that the restricting portion 2888 may be provided at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the viewpoint of design, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 abutting on the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing the posture may be used as an effect (for example, an effect indicating the magnitude of the expected jackpot). In this case, it is possible to change the meaning content to be transmitted to the player, depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (while flickering) while causing a slight change in posture by contacting the regulating portion 2888. .

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts on the regulating portion 2888 is the tip position,
If the contact position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion of the petals 802 when the posture changes is changed. Therefore, even when the restricting portion 2888 is configured to be fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes posture can be changed in a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199.
In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates and rotates with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanding position is described. However, the petal operation device according to another example of the twelfth embodiment is described. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 independently rotates according to the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partial enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 illustrate, in chronological order, an operation example of the petal operation device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise in front view from the state illustrated in FIG. 198 (a). Also,
In FIG. 198 (a), FIG. 198 (b), FIG. 199 (a), and FIG.
The arrangement and shape of the zero guide rail 832 is shown in phantom lines.

When the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since the rotation of the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 together with the rotation exceeds the applied resistance is the same as in the twelfth embodiment, the description is omitted here.

In addition, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross-section.

Here, when rotating the rotating plate 830 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, since the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 is With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). In the present embodiment, additional concave portions 3814a, 3815a, 3815 are provided on the side for receiving the slide member 2820 thus displaced.
b is formed.

That is, the difference between the slit member 3810 and the slit member 810 is that the center slit 814 is formed on the clockwise wall of the central slit 814 in the wall extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814.
A central recessed portion 3814a recessed in a manner to widen the width of the center slit 815 and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 disposed on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 in the front view, and the clockwise side in the front view. A clockwise recessed portion 3815a that is recessed in the wall portion of the slit so as to widen the width of the slit 815 in the lateral direction, and a radial direction of the slit 815 that is disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. Of the wall extending along the front side, the wall on the clockwise side in front view has slits 81 on both sides.
5 is mainly provided with a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed so as to widen the width in the short direction.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the clockwise concave portion 3815a is
The third slide rib 803a is disposed to face.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central concave portion 3814a is
19 from the position facing the guide pin 822 of FIG.
8 (a) lower side).

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recess depth greater than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a radial length longer than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

The counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is in the state shown in FIG.
03 from the position opposed to the inclined surface 2803T of the slit member 3810 on the rotation center side (
198 (a) (on the lower side).

The counterclockwise concave portion 3815b has a concave depth greater than the clockwise concave portion 3815a, and a radial length longer than the central concave portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise in front view will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG.
When starts rotating clockwise in front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction in FIG. 198 (a) (the direction in which the rightmost slide rib 803a enters the clockwise concave portion 3815a) (FIG. 198 (b)).

Accordingly, the contact between the flat plate member 2803 and the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the slits 815 on both sides is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in a front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are brought into contact with the clockwise concave portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member). 138 (a) and 199 (b) with the fulcrum as a fulcrum between the F.3810 and the F.3810.
)reference).

Note that the center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b have a deeper depth than the clockwise concave portion 3815a, so that the above-described slide member 2820 and flat plate member 28 are provided.
03, the contact between the guide pin 822 and the central concave portion 3814a, and the screw-in portion 280
The contact between the 3S and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is avoided.

Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a clockwise depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not abut the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A surrounding recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is lower than the resistance applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. . Accordingly, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate together.

As shown in FIG. 199 (b), when the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwing portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) reach a posture in which the posture is orthogonal to the front view. When the slide rib 803a at the center in the radial direction accommodated in the slits 815 on the clockwise side abuts on the wall of the slits 815 on both sides, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be viewed from the front with the abutting portions as fulcrums. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise concave portion 3815a
Moves to the counterclockwise side in a front view from the concave base end of the clockwise concave portion 3815a.

That is, a state in which the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 194).
(See (a)), so that the rotating plate 830 is continuously rotated clockwise in front view, so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved to the radial center side.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) is reached, the rotation of the rotating plate 830 causes the slit member 3810 to rotate along with the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotating direction. And the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

This allows the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 to perform operations that cannot be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation involved in rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 194 (b)). )), Until the changed posture is restored,
193 (see FIG. 193 (a)) which is fastened and fixed to the plate member 2803 (rotational operation that rotates with the slit member 3810) intervenes (FIGS. 195 and 196).
(A) and FIG. 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation associated with rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 198 ( a)), and by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise as viewed from the front, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199 (b)).
. In other words, the rotation operation (rotational operation that rotates along with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. Can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expanding operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 198 (a)), rotating plate 830 in any state (phase or posture)
By rotating clockwise from the front, the slide member 2820 and the plate member 2803 are assembled from the position of the plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture). The movement can be started toward the position.
Thus, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG.
93 (a)) is rotated (see FIG. 195) during the expansion (see FIG. 198 (a)), and then the arrangement of the petals 802 at the time of the gathering operation toward the gathering position (see FIG. 197) varies. The operation of the petal operation device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described.
A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed to penetrate through the curved wall portion 8326. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202 (a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202 (b) illustrates the tilting device 310 in the second state. A state in the middle of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment is different from the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments in that the lower frame member 8300
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the 320 has not been described, and the other configurations have been almost described in the operating devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments.
Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other components will be described with some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is disposed to face the protection lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially oval shape at the left and right center positions. The first through hole 8326a and the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321 has an oblong rectangular cross-sectional shape as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b formed along the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes formed at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in front view. And a through hole 8326c.

The through holes 8326a to 8326c are provided for the purpose of facilitating the passage of the liquid such as the drinking water described above and the purpose of facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. And a through hole having: The coin-shaped foreign object may be used, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is in the way to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or the tilting device 310 and the upper frame may be meaningless by the player of interest. Member 33
It may be fitted in the gaps V13 and V14 between 0.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 that is configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310.
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smoother, but the gap V13
, V14 are more likely to be inserted.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the ring member BR1 (
(See FIG. 14B). In other words, the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end. It is configured to be easily shifted (deformed) from side to side near the front end. Note that the positional deviation (deformation) includes, for example, positional deviation utilizing rattling caused by the sum of design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and positional deviation caused by slightly deforming each member. (Deformation).

Therefore, in normal use, the clearance V13 between the upper frame member 330 on the left and right sides of the tilting device 310
However, even if the clearance V13 is designed not to be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a one-yen coin), the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the left and right (for example, left). In this case, the gap V13 formed on the other side (for example, on the right side) is provided by the tilting device 310 during normal use.
A gap V1 having a size obtained by adding a gap V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 on each of the left and right sides.
3, which is large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign matter.

That is, the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be equal to or less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the right and left, a coin-shaped foreign matter may be inserted.

In addition, the gap V14 between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also determined using the play near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310.
If the load is shifted (deformed) by applying a load facing the rear side to the gap 10, the gap V14 can be easily enlarged, so that a coin-shaped foreign matter can be inserted into the gap V14.

In the present embodiment, a left or right gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is provided.
Alternatively, if the tilting device 310 tilts while the coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted in the gap V14 in the front-rear direction, the coin-shaped foreign matter may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 202 (a) and FIG. 202 (b), when the left and right walls of the tilting device 310 are configured so as to be narrowed inward toward the left and right toward the center in the vertical direction, the tilting device 310 easily fits the fingers of the player. While a good operational feeling can be created, the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202A) projects outward from above the constriction of the case main body 311. , A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320, so that the lower frame member 8320 can easily enter.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operation resistance becomes excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem may occur in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the light transmittance of the protective lens member 311i may be deteriorated, which may hinder the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign matter is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be executed with the operation device 8300, so that the clearance V13,
It is desirable to remove the coin-like foreign matter as soon as it is detected that a coin-like foreign matter has been inserted into the V14. However, in a state where the through-hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, the operation device 300 is used to remove the coin-like foreign matter. It needed to be disassembled.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

FIG. 203A is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG.
3A is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb, and FIG.
FIG. 03 (c) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, and FIG.
)) Is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 along a CCIIId-CCIIId line,
FIG. 203E is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 taken along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203A.

The first through hole 8326a has the same center in the left-right direction as the center in the left-right direction of the vibration device 5400, and is formed with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the (vibration device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 58)). You. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left and right central positions of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. The liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is connected to the extension 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state (FIG. 12).
(See FIG. 2). Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V14 rides on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (to the left and right when viewed in the vertical direction in the second state). Tilting device 3 because it is curved toward
In the first state of 10, an inclination D81 that inclines downward and toward the left and right center, and an inclining device 310
The coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through-hole 8326a along the inclination D82 which is inclined downward toward the front side due to the inclination (see FIG. 201).

This makes it possible to minimize the required size of the first through hole 8326a while facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter, thereby maintaining the design flexibility of the lower frame member 8320. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be more easily ensured as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly expanded right and left.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is determined by the tilting device 310 in the first state.
The portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) has a size equal to or larger than the size of the target object assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign matter. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 [m].
m].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell 313a is an LED device 341f.
(See FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, the spherical shell 31
Except for 3a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 connected to the left and right and up and down of the spherical shell 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (the mirror-finished members are fixed). Light that has passed through the spherical shell 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, since the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that reduces the amount of light, the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through-hole 8326a is partially closed, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is equal to the coin-shaped amount. Is weaker than when no foreign matter is present (a coin-like foreign matter is shadowed). That is, it is possible to easily recognize that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains in the lower frame member 8320 by using the light amount and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as clues. Member 832
The possibility of remaining at zero can be reduced. Note that this effect is achieved by the first through hole 832.
This is not limited to the case where it is visually recognized through 6a, and the same applies to the case where it is visually recognized through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

The second through-hole 8326b allows the coin-shaped foreign matter that has fallen on the bottom plate
It is configured as a through hole that can be discharged in a direction along the surface of the first surface. Therefore, in this embodiment, the left and right widths of the second through hole 8326 are set to about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is set to a size capable of discharging the largest coin-like foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin). Is formed with a width in the normal direction of about 2 [mm].

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged near the left and right centers of the bottom plate 321, the second through holes 8326 b can be easily formed even after the coin-shaped foreign matter slides down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate 321. In addition, coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed.

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibration device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be used for discharging outward beforehand.

The center axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (FIG. 20).
3 (a)), it is formed as a through hole through which coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 can be removed in an upright state (posture).

That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be formed in a size capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign matter when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is about 30 [mm] when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

When removing the coin-like foreign matter, the cover 370 is removed and the operation device 830 is removed.
0 is exposed only when viewed from the front (see FIG. 92), and the operator can access through holes 8326a to 8326c.
Can be accessed. The covering cover 370 is connected to the fastening portion 3 of the main body bending portion 371.
70a (see FIG. 91) is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with screws inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed with screws inserted vertically. Therefore, if the screws are removed with the front frame 14 opened (see FIG. 89), the cover 370 can be easily removed. Therefore, the working time can be reduced.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operation device 8300.

Note that the harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector 8353 that is opened to the right outside at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203 (b)).
. In each of the above embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even in the unlikely event that a coin-shaped foreign matter cannot be taken out, it is easy to operate by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if the replacement of the normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which the coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be promptly replaced with the normal operation device 8300.

Thus, even if a normal operation is not performed due to the coin-shaped foreign matter entering the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promptly restarted.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the case where no load is applied from the front frame 14 when the board supporting device 600 is fixed is described, the board supporting device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment is arranged so as to be able to abut on the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged in such a manner as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via the front-rear displacement member 2652. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 204 (
FIG. 204A illustrates a state in which the front frame 14 is open to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted). In FIG. 204B, the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12. The state is illustrated. In FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified, and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment includes a load transmitting device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmitting device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 disposed so as to be vertically displaceable on a front side of a plate portion (plate portion disposed on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 which is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12; The vertical displacement member 2651
A longitudinally displaceable member 2652, which is disposed so as to be in contact with the lower end of the frame and is supported so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction, a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the longitudinally displaceable member 2652,
52 is a portion which is displaceably sandwiched between the front and rear at two places and fixed to the plate portion 611a, and which comes into contact with the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653 to face the front and rear displacement member 2652 toward the front side. An urging member 2655 such as a coil spring for applying an urging force toward
Is provided.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state in which it is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state in which it is separated. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), it retracts from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), it comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb, The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 at the lower position is located at a position where a slight gap is provided between the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The longitudinal displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)), and by being pushed by the front frame 14 and being pushed backward. At the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that is inclined downward toward the distal end is formed at the rear distal end of the longitudinal displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a is moved from the vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position, to the longitudinal displacement member 262.
Reference numeral 52 denotes an inclined surface that is continuously connected to a vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where it is disposed at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652 a is provided at a position in front of the longitudinal
Is the lower position, and the inclination angle and the formation range are set so that the upper and lower displacement members 2651 are located at the upper position at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is disposed at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed by the thickness in the front-rear direction to the side where the load becomes large. be able to.

Thereby, the load which the claw member 640 after rotation applies to the game board 13 from the back side can be increased, and the state in which the game board 13 abuts on the hanging back plate portion 621d of the claw member 620 before rotation can be easily maintained. The distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board supporting device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board supporting device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of the fixing, the board supporting device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses and fixes the board against the hanging back plate portion 621d.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, a spring having a lower elastic coefficient than the spring used in the eighth embodiment is used as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Can be reduced, the degree of freedom of the operator's choice, and
Workability can be improved.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
In the case where the inverted cup portion 178 is melted with a heated piano wire and the intrusion enters the interior as it is, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are spread over the inverted cup portion 178, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are drawn.
Has been described to detect burnout due to a heated piano wire, and to detect fraud early. However, the fraud detecting device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment uses the case where the inverted cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire. In addition, it is configured to detect the heat and prevent burnout of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

FIG. 205A is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG.
(B) and FIG. 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. FIG. 205 (
FIG. 20B shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in the reduced shape, and FIG.
FIG. 5 (c) shows a state in which it has returned to the tensile shape (the stored shape) due to the application of heat. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is not
A cross-sectional view is shown at an intermediate position between the front and the back of 281.

The fraud detecting device 2280 is configured in a box shape having an opening on the rear side and the lower side, and
A main body box portion 2281 which is mounted on the rear side of the main body box portion 2281 so as to cover a rear side opening of the main body box portion 2281;
1 and a back cover member 2282, a space is formed.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner, and has an inverted cup portion 217.
8, an extending portion 2283 in contact with the left surface of the wall portion 2178 a, a narrowing portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner, and near the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowing portion 2284. A protrusion 2285 protruding upward from the front and a concave portion recessed from the rear side on the left side wall of the main body box 2281, one end of which protrudes outside the main body box 2281, and the other end is protruded from the main body box 2281. A first conductive portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281;
1 is housed in a concave portion formed from the back side in the right side wall portion, one end of which protrudes outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left and right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and has the first conduction A second conductive portion 2287 formed to have a length capable of contacting the upper surface of the portion 2286, a torsion spring SP15 for generating an urging force for pressing the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286,
A shape memory spring 2288 that rides on the upper surface of the constricted portion 2284, is supported by the protruding portion 2285, and is disposed below the second conducting portion 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287, one ends of separate wirings are respectively connected to portions protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other ends of the wirings are connected to the main control device. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 come into contact and become conductive (see FIG. 205 (b)), the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205 ( c) cuts off the conduction,
Control is performed so that an error signal is output using the disconnection as an input.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a warning is output at a high volume from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. The game is controlled so that it is impossible to play the game.

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detecting device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire can be used as it is on the long cover 173. Penetration can be prevented.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and proceeds further, is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 disposed at the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has a characteristic of maintaining a deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to a previously stored shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 is used.
, The transformation temperature is set to a temperature (about 80 °) about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to a transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2286 are connected. The conduction with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of wrongdoing can be achieved.

An extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2282 in a vertically long shape and drilled in the front-rear direction. Overhang. When the temperature returns to the low-temperature state after the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tension state, the operator presses down the extending portion 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205B). ) Again. That is, even after a fraudulent activity is discovered, the device can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the concave portion formed in the light guide member 540 has a uniform shape, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted to both surfaces has been described. The right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment includes a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upwardly concave shape formed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically illustrating the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206C schematically illustrates a downward concave portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIc of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206 (d) is a light guide schematically showing the downward concave portion 2543d provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light member 2540, and FIG. 206 (e) shows an upward concave portion 254 recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). The e is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically. In FIG. 206A, the illustration of the support plate 510 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206A, the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape that extends straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) provided on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically vertically in accordance with the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Although concave portions are formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment, in the present embodiment, the concave portions 254 are formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530.
3 can be changed.

That is, a region CCVIb disposed above and on the side of the inner lens member 530 and a region CCVIb disposed above and on the side of the outer lens member 550 with reference to the bottom of the curvature of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between c, a region CCVId located below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and a region CCVIe located below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the area CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The upward concave portion 2543b is arranged such that flat surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged), and a curved surface is arranged on the upper side and the rear side. Is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
Is hardly reflected at this position in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543b refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light to the outer lens member 550 side. The emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a direction inclined upward as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 206 (c), in the area CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The downward concave portion 2543c is formed by placing a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and in a posture in which curved surfaces are disposed on the lower side and the back side. Is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
Is hardly reflected at this position in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543c refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light to the inner lens member 530 side. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 206 (d), in the area CCVId, a downward concave portion 2543d formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The downward concave portion 2543d is formed by placing a flat surface on the upper side and on the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and having a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. Is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
Is hardly reflected at this position in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543d refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the effect of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 206 (e), in the area CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The upward concave portion 2543e has a hot press in a posture in which flat surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. Is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
Is hardly reflected at this position in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543e refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in a region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (the inclination angle with respect to the bottom is 45 ° and the diameter of the bottom circle is approximately (1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the inner lens member 5
Light emitted to 30 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206A, the light travels toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction of collecting light, and travels toward the outer lens member 550 in the direction of spreading light. Can be done. In other words, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is possible to provide a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted from both surfaces thereof.
The effect of the light emission effect can be improved while suppressing the left and right width of 0.

As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be covered by gravity, the torsion spring 3
15 can be made unnecessary.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the pushing end has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, an effect of “button that cannot be pushed” can be performed. it can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the operation end (the end of the overhang operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap occurs between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the generation of the impact sound of the collision with the lower frame member 320 during the operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and to notice that the state of the “button that cannot be pushed” is not obtained until the tilting device 310 is pushed. it can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connection pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be formed of a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disk cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, so that the engaging rib 344c is rotated forward in this state. Immediately after changing the attitude of the rotary claw member 347, the degree of ascending of the tilting device 310 can be changed. Therefore, the operating state of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 can be formed more than in the first embodiment.

In addition, the operation state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (the ascending end can be sequentially switched). Thus, it is possible to perform an effect in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched while suppressing the deterioration of the driving motor 342 by operating the driving motor 342 in one direction.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 that applies a driving force to the tilting device 310
Is described based on the operation speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of the operation, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of the operation. For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (
During the lowering operation), the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and immediately before the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end and immediately starts moving upward. Alternatively, the rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started. In this case, while the tilting device 310 is continuously pressed, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be increased. .

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage member 543 is attached to the tilting device 310.
0 may be fixed and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside. Tilt device 31
When fixing the housing member 5430 to the bottom plate portion 5321, for example,
When the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end, the protruding leg 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate 5321 so that the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400 is reduced. May be changed to switch whether or not the weight member 5412 can contact the housing member 5430.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or more, the flexible member 5420 is operated. Can be increased, and a state in which the weight member 5412 contacts the housing member 5430 can be formed. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at a high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. Can increase the variation of the production.

For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, a message such as "press a button" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press a button. By performing a display such as "Large chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilting device 310) in a specified manner is determined as a condition for transmitting vibration to the player.
It is possible to increase the player's willingness to operate the button (tilting device 310) in a specified manner, and to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be inverted from the degree of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310 in magnitude. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is low, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 may be increased, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can contact each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition that the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 is transmitted to the player, and the player is encouraged to reduce the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do.
Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from pushing the tilting device 310 with brute force, and it is possible to prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 with brute force.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibration device 5400 is arranged to be able to abut on the housing member 5430 in a state where the tilting device 310 is not pushed in,
The weight member 5412 may be formed in such a manner that the weight member 5412 can be arranged so as not to be in contact with the housing member 5430 on condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of movement. In this case, the tilting device 31
In the state where 0 is not operated, vibration can be transmitted to the player and the effect can be lively,
The player changes the production mode in a way that stops the vibration when pushed in, so that the surroundings are hard to notice (
(A difference in expectation) can be recognized, so that a premier feeling that only the player playing this machine, except for the surrounding players, can feel the change in the production mode Can be.

In addition, as a variation of the effect, when the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so as not to be in contact with each other when the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, the weight member 5
It is desired to generate both the case where the 412 and the housing member 5430 are in a position where they can be continuously contacted. This can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused by a difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, the disk cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the axis of the disk cam 5344 so that the disk cam 5344 is deformed.
Although the case where the frictional force is generated by the contact between the release member 44 and the release member 346 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is drilled partially projects in the direction approaching the disk cam 5344, and is configured to abut when the disk cam 5344 is axially deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a movable portion, a large frictional force is generated between the disk cam 5344 and the disk cam 5344 as compared with the case where the disk cam 5344 abuts on the operable release member 346. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut on the front frame 14, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the upper or lower panel support device 600 may be configured to be able to contact the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board supporting device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board supporting device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600, the game board 13
Although the case where the vertical position does not change has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front side, and the front end portion is the board surface support device 60 in the released state.
0 may be arranged below the upper surface of the rear side extension plate 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is put on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear-side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom, 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be reduced as compared with the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or may be a combination of bent back and forth and left and right. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
Immediately behind 3, it is preferable to form a long path before and after because the ball can be discharged smoothly. In addition, since the range of the foul ball passage 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed by making the path bend back and forth, it is possible to prevent the launch path from interfering with the foul ball passage 145. Can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
The position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, light reaching the player through the opening 524 is viewed faintly. In addition, the light guide member 540 does not need to bend vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straightly extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the path that bends up and down is formed by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of up, down, left, and right.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary projection 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi form a rear side wall portion 461H.
May be separated from each other by a diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the speaker. in this case,
Since the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, a load in a direction in which the speaker connection line 453 is pulled out of the speaker assembly 450 is applied to the speaker connection line 453 due to the resistance of the sandwiching. Speaker connection line 4
53 can be prevented from coming off the speaker 451.

The auxiliary protrusion 481Ha contacts the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H in the thickness direction within a range of a protrusion length corresponding to the depth of the wiring passage recess 464, and further protrudes therefrom. In the range of the length, a step may be provided in the middle so as to be separated from the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the range in which the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H form a double wall is sufficiently ensured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be held while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, in the case where the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base body 461B and the tip body 461T correspond to the speaker room, and the intermediate body 461M corresponds to the duct. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body 461M in the front-rear direction to be equal to that of the base main body 461B and the distal main body 461T, the base main body 461B and the intermediate main body 461M are expanded.
A large speaker room may be configured jointly with the M and the tip side main body 461T.

In addition, the description has been made assuming that the base-side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the distal-side main body portion 461T, but the magnitude relationship may be reversed or the same volume may be used. Speaker 45
The arrangement of 1 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be the center in the left and right direction, or may be the position between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, each of the rib portions 467a to 467a-4
Of the 67e, 487a to 487e, the adjacent rib portion is in the left-right direction (the direction connecting the base body portion 461B and the distal body portion 461T, the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491). Although the case where they do not overlap in the direction (direction intersecting with the direction) is described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rib portions adjacent to each other (for example, the rib portions 467d and 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, since the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze, for example, the front concave portion 47
By inserting a thin metal wire such as a piano wire through an opening formed by the first and rear recessed portions 491 and making the tip of the wire into the game area difficult, it is possible to prolong the time required for the illegal action, It is possible to suppress cheating. In this regard, the suppression of fraudulent acts includes suppression of fraudulent acts and gaining fraudulent profits through fraudulent acts (successful fraudulent acts).
And the like.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 is the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830.
G and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 may be configured to mesh with each other. in this case,
Since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be linked with each other, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operating device 800 but also during the expanding operation and the assembling operation. it can. Accordingly, the sliding operation of the petal 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed simultaneously, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the rotation plate 830 expands and contracts with the rotation thereof or a configuration in which the rotation plate 830 rotates about an axis different from the rotation axis may be used.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides by the operation of the drive-side arm member 910 has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal operating device 800 is connected to the tip of the second effecting member 940 so that the second effecting member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operating device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing control unit 159 when the board surface support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state will be described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit rear member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to abut against each other in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing control unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board supporting device 600 is fixed, but the upper board supporting device 600 is not fixed, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game The game board 13 disposed to face the operation unit back member 155 in accordance with the right side of the board 13 being tilted to the front side.
Is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 can interfere with each other. Thus, it is possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board supporting device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board supporting device arranged above the inner frame 12 is fixed. 6
Whether or not 00 is in a fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 which are arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board arranged above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, it is possible to restrict the front frame 14 from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. This makes it possible to remove the function of determining the state of the board supporting device 600 installed above the inner frame 12 from the multifunctional cover member 171, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171. it can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where the multifunctional cover member 171 does not come into contact with the board supporting device 600 regardless of the state of the board supporting device 600 (
(Chamfering). In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of a synthetic resin collides with the metal board support device 600, and
Since the possibility of damage to the multifunctional cover member 171 can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover) for a long time.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case will be described in which the right panel unit 500 in which light applied to the end face of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is disposed on the right end and front side of the front frame 14. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, the right panel unit 500 is configured to be switchable between a state where one surface is arranged on the front side and a case where the other surface is arranged on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). The configuration in which the right panel unit 500 rotates about a suitable axis) can switch the mode of light applied to the center frame 86. Further, the mode of light applied to the center frame 86 and the center frame 86
The effect can be diversified by switching the correspondence with the mobile character that moves inwardly.

That is, for example, out of the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is placed in a state where one surface is arranged on the front side, Consider switching between the case where it is arranged on the front side and the case where it is arranged. Inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged opposite to the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the position near the end) emits light, while the outer side of the outer cover member 560 side emits light. When the surface faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory that is arranged to face over the wide area of the opening 565 (in a wider area than the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the movable character can be switched.

In this case, for example, the moving effect can be operated in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion, so that the effect can be improved. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory, the surface of the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524, while the surface on the moving accessory side. At the timing of turning, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) in a direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. Thus, switching to change the position where light is emitted in accordance with the movement of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a for light emission control.

In the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is collected (the brightness is increased, the light amount is increased, and clear light emission is performed), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is emitted. Diffuse (lower brightness, lower light intensity, faint light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emission target (liquid crystal or moving object)
Can be changed.

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a position in which the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the moving object or the liquid crystal). In this case, the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a position arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), so that the moving role object and the liquid crystal have a beam shape (
Light can be emitted in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving role and the liquid crystal while irradiating light having a narrow width. Accordingly, it is possible to emit light in a wide range at a position distant from the moving role and the liquid crystal while emitting only the details of the moving role and the liquid crystal.

In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 are provided.
Although the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the above has been described, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as a configuration in which the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the yarn Y8, the configuration is vulnerable to the extent that the broken portion falls, and the detection sensor is disposed at a position where the broken portion passes when falling. Is also good. In this case, by detecting that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, by issuing an alarm and controlling to forcibly stop the launching of the ball, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts early, and It is possible to minimize the profit (loss of the gaming machine hall) obtained by the person who commits the wrongdoing.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations for improving the frictional force may be added. For example, the frictional force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be used to form a resin. The operating resistance may be improved by cutting into the slit member 810.

Also, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in a posture inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, a wall portion of both side slits 815 arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T includes:
A concave portion may be formed to such an extent that the inclined surface 2803T can enter. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance due to the inclined surface 2803T entering the concave portion.

In the above-described sixteenth embodiment, the case where the traveling direction of light is changed to the direction of collecting light or the direction of spreading light by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540 is described. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 depends on each area CCVIb.
Since the direction of inclination is upward in all of CCVIe, it is possible to make it easier for light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking to select a machine to play. Thereby, the pachinko machine 8010 can improve the effect of attracting customers.

Also, for example, regions CCVIc and CCV that are regions that emit light to the inner lens member 530
A downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in Ie, and an upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions where light is emitted to the outer lens member 550. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined in the upward direction. While the light can be made to easily travel toward the height of the line of sight of the person who is walking, the light traveling toward the player and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform an effect of illuminating the balls stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the balls look brilliant. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player playing the game while improving the effect of attracting pachinko machines 8010.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example,
Once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly called a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) is used to increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, besides pachinko machines, areachi, sparrow balls, slot machines,
The game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The change display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or
After a lapse of a predetermined time, the change display of the identification information is stopped and definitely displayed, and a predetermined game value is given to the player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of game media.

In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, a symbol change is started due to an operation of an operation lever,
For example, due to the operation of the stop button or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a predetermined game value is provided to the player on condition that the final symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol. Is generated, and a large number of balls are paid out to the lower saucer to the player. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, the configuration is partially changed from the above-described embodiments, and the control example will be described. The same configuration as the above-described embodiments will be described in detail. Is omitted.

  FIG. 207 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the game board 13 in the first control example has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, and a rail 76. , 77, a general entrance 63, a second entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, a distribution device 700, and the like, and the periphery thereof is formed by the inner frame 4 ( (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with a thin plate material, and is formed so that various structures provided on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof cannot be seen by a player. The general entrance 63, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like. Although details will be described later, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter and a right second ball entrance 640r are provided inside the distribution device 700. The ball that has entered the opening 710a is sorted by the sorting device 700 to one of the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r (see FIG. 208).

  The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is provided inside the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear sides. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 218) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 207) of the inner rail 76 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. At the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right portion in FIG. 207), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37a and 37b each including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 207). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 218), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the first control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b determine whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r. It is configured to be used properly according to. Specifically, when the ball has won the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated, while the ball is in the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance. When the player wins 640r, the first symbol display device 37b operates.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate in a lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change, during a time saving operation, or during a normal operation, or to indicate in a lighting state whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is changing. In addition to indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probable jackpot (jackpot A, C) or a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot (jackpot B) by a lighting state, indicating the number of reserved balls by a lighting state, A seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r has a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot types determined here, there are prepared 16R time reduction 100 times jackpot (jackpot A), 16R probability odd symbol jackpot (jackpot B1), 16R probability variable even symbol jackpot (jackpot B2), 2R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C). ing. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the change is completed, but also indicate a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot. .

  Here, the “16R time reduction 100 times jackpot” (jackpot A) means that the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the same even-numbered symbol to notify that it is a jackpot, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 After the jackpot game of the round, the game shifts to the low probability state, and during a predetermined number of times of change (for example, 100 times of change), it is a big hit in which the time is reduced. The "16R odd odd jackpot" (jackpot B1) indicates that the third symbol is a jackpot by being stopped and displayed at the end of the same odd symbol, and thereafter the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. This is a probable jackpot in which the state shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot and the electric jackpot state is reached until the next jackpot game is executed. The "16R probable odd symbol big hit" (big hit B2) means that the third symbol is finally stopped and displayed at the same even number symbol to inform that it is a big hit, and thereafter the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds After the jackpot, the game is shifted to the high probability state (until the next jackpot game is executed), and until the next jackpot game is executed, it is a probability changing jackpot that is in the electric support state. The "2R probable big hit" (big hit C) means that the third symbol is finally displayed as a specific symbol combination (chance eye), and then the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after two rounds of big hits. (Until the next jackpot game is executed) It is a probability change jackpot. In the case of the big hit C, the power support state is not set after the big hit game.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The “electric support state” in the “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the lottery probability of the second symbol is set high and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is set short. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. 640 refers to a game state in which a ball is likely to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability increases).

  During the power change during the probability change (during the power support game state) and during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. It will be changed and a longer time will be set compared to normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second entrance 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  It is to be noted that, during the electric power support and the time reduction during the probability change, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, 1 A change may be made in which the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time is increased from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit. At least one of the number of times to perform the change may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per one time are not determined. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

  In the gaming area, a plurality of general entrances 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is triggered by a winning (starting winning) of one of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r. Triggered by a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variation display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display in, and passing of a ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second symbol.

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86. In addition, the center frame 86 protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third symbol display device 81 to prevent game balls from abutting against the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, whereas the The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (a second symbol (see FIG. 207)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is moved. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during power support or during time saving during the probability change than during the normal game state. In this way, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during power saving and during working hours during the probability change, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, during the electric support during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. In the case where the ball is likely to win at the entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is attached to the game board in the area on both sides of the variable display unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured to be able to pass a part of the ball flowing down the game board 13 among the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and is also lit by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, but may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution device 700 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins (enters) through the opening 710a to the sorting device 700, the entered ball is alternately distributed to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. Can be When a ball wins (enters) the first entrance port 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. Due to this, a jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 218), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a. Further, when the ball wins the right second entrance 640r, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, as in the case of the right second entrance 640r. When the second entrance switch is turned on, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 238) performs a jackpot lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

  On the other hand, below the distribution device 700 in front view, a second ball entrance 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins at the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 238), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b. Normally, the second entrance 640 prevents the game ball from entering (it is difficult to enter) by restricting the entry of the game ball in a state where the left and right electric auditors 640a formed in a wing shape are upright. ) Configuration, and when a normal symbol described below is hit, the electric accessory 640a is rotated outward by about 45 degrees as an opening operation in a fixed operation pattern to form an inverted eight-shape. The game balls are guided to the second entrance 640 so that the game balls can easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r are each provided with five balls as prize balls when the ball wins, and the second entrance 640 receives two balls. It is also one of the winning holes paid out as balls. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance port 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance port 640, and the right Although the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640r is configured to be different, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance. The number of awarded balls paid out when a ball wins at 640 and the number of awarded balls paid out when a ball wins at the second right entrance 640r may be configured as the same number.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol during the electric support during the probability change and during the working hours is higher than that during the normal period, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter. In the display, the symbol “○” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily win the second entrance 640 can be created during probable change or during working hours, as compared with normal times.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640, so that the ball basically enters the opening 710a. When a ball is entered and the entered ball is sorted to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r, a jackpot lottery is executed.

  On the other hand, during power support or during working hours during the probability change, the ball is passed through the left or right through gate 67, so that the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since it is in a state where it is easy to win the ball entrance 640, the ball that entered the opening 710a is sorted to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r, and the second entrance A jackpot lottery associated with entering the mouth 640 is also easily executed. Therefore, the chance of the jackpot lottery increases during the normal game, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a game state according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the power is being supported during the probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation). Can change the way the ball is fired. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to any of the first entry port 64, the second entry port 640, and the right second entry port 640r becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (variation). After the time has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to become a big symbol stop symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the big jackpot. , A jackpot occurrence is indicated. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the distribution device 700 in a front view. For example, it may be to the left of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the entrances 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 640r is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. Out port 66 is arranged below distribution device 700.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 238). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 238). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (FIG. 255), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (FIG. 254). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (FIG. 253) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37a, 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the touch sensor 290, the setting switch 291, the RTC 292, the firing sensor 293, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. I have.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 238). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, power outage signal SG1 is output to main controller 110 and payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the distribution device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a partially enlarged front view of the distribution device 700. As shown in FIG. 208, the distribution device 700 is disposed below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13. A through-hole formed in the game board 13 accommodates therein a flow path portion through which a game ball entering the opening 710a flows down and a flow path portion through which a game ball entering the second entrance port 640 flows down. The base member of the distribution device 700 is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side.

  The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described opening 710a located at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a located below the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a. A through-hole (not shown) located on both sides in the left-right direction and formed in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole (not shown) located below the through-hole and formed in the front-rear direction. It is formed mainly in preparation.

  The distribution member 760 is formed in a box-shaped body with a front side opened while being formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view. The distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to be inclined downward from the substantially central position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. The left and right ends of the sorting member 760 are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

  The distributing member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from the central position in the left-right direction toward the left and right sides when viewed from the front, a distributing member 762 disposed at the center of the mutual inclined surfaces 761, and a distributing member 762. And a throwing hole formed above the main body.

  The distributing member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and is inserted into three annular projections 762a protruding outward at an interval of 90 degrees around the axis from the outer edge thereof and inside the annular shape. And a shaft portion 762b.

  The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around the axis, is formed in a columnar shape, and is inserted inside the ring of the distribution member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the interposed member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is rotatably disposed around the shaft portion 762b.

  The projection 762a is a projection for alternately allocating the ball to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball passing through the opening 710a is thrown, and the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is located. A ball is sent to the opposite side in the left-right direction. That is, the ball thrown from the opening 710a can be thrown in the left-right direction by the projection 762a at the center. The projections 762a projecting from both ends regulate the displacement of the distribution member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is positioned by the weight applied when the ball passes (the distribution member 762). The rotation of the distribution member 762 is regulated by the contact between the tip end surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the protrusion 762a at the center, the guided ball collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed down. As a result, the projection 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the projection 762a displaced downward abuts on the inclined surface to regulate the displacement.

  The inclined surface is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter, referred to as a “third ball-sending path KR3”) on which the balls distributed to the left and right by the above-mentioned distribution member 762 roll and are thrown. It is formed to be inclined downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and are sent (rolled) to the lower end of the inclined surface 761.

  At the end on the descending side of the inclined surface 761, the side surface on the back side is formed so as to incline in the direction approaching the interposed member so as to increase the thickness toward the front as it goes toward the end. As a result, the ball rolled on the inclined surface 761 and fed to the end thereof is transferred to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r of the interposition member disposed in front of the sorting member 760. Can be sent to More specifically, the ball that has been distributed to the left side in front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (enters) the first ball entrance 64. On the other hand, the ball that has been distributed to the right side in front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (enters) the right second ball entrance 640r.

  The interposed member is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the variable winning device 65 described above at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a first ball entrance 64 penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side, and a right side. The first ball entrance 640r and the right second entrance 640r penetrated in the front-rear direction.

  The first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r are respectively formed on the front sides of the left and right ends of the sorting member 760, and are formed on the back side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the spaces at the left and right ends of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r. Therefore, a path for passing a ball rolling on the upper surface of the inclined surface 761 of the above-described sorting member 760 through the first ball entrance 64 and into the through hole of the winning member 730 and a right second ball entrance 640r And a path for sending the ball to the through hole of the winning member 730 can be formed.

  The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the opening 710a is sent to the sorting member 760 and sent to the third throwing path KR3 in one of the left and right directions by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball thrown to the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the ball inside the first entrance 64 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side is thrown. The ball is sent to the fourth throwing route KR4. Here, a game ball that has entered the first entrance 64 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that a game ball has entered the first entrance 64.

  On the other hand, when the ball thrown on the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the right second entrance 640r of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. Is thrown to the fourth throwing route KR4 inside. Here, the game ball that has entered the second entrance 640 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second entrance 640r.

  In this manner, the game balls that have entered the opening 710a are alternately distributed to the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640 by the distribution member 762. It is possible to allow a game ball to enter the right second entry port 640r to uniformly generate a reserved ball. Thereby, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be generated evenly, and the number of one reserved ball becomes the upper limit, and the overflow that is not stored as the reserved ball can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not change at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. With this configuration, the lottery of more games is executed in a short time and the determination result can be displayed, so that the game can be played more efficiently.

  The third symbol is composed of main symbols of numbers from “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit B1”, one of the odd symbols “1, 3, 4, 7, 9” of the main symbols is stopped and displayed in a double-row pattern. A variable display is performed. In addition, in the case of “big hit A” or “big hit B2”, a fluctuation display is performed in which any of the main symbols of even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” is aligned. In addition, in the case of the jackpot C, the chances formed by the combination of “341” are displayed. The combination of the chances is not selected when the lottery result is out of order. In the present embodiment, the chance eyes are configured to be displayed in a specific combination of the third symbols. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and special symbols (for example, gold fish symbols) different from the normal third symbols of 0 to 9 are provided. ) May be displayed in one or a plurality of combinations, or characters such as “chance” may be displayed and notified.

  Next, the effect display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 217. As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper two-thirds are the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform a variable display. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which, when the holding ball held in the main display area Dm is changed and displayed (dynamic display), a held symbol to be changed is moved and displayed. is there. The reserved symbol moved to the execution display area is displayed as a symbol larger than the reserved symbol so that it can be identified that the corresponding special symbol is being changed. In addition, when the fluctuation is performed, the color of the symbol is changed or the pattern of the symbol is changed to indicate the lottery result of the changing special symbol.

  The small area Ds2 is a reserve that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, the right second entrance 640r, and the second entrance 640. This is an area for displaying the number of balls and a preview effect image. In the small area Ds2, a character display area C in which a preview effect image of the character is displayed when the number of the reserved balls reaches a predetermined number or more is set.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of the variable display, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the center portion, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbol are displayed so as to be visible, so that a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, the running pedestal symbol m0 indicating that the reserved ball corresponding to the running special symbol is moved and displayed is displayed in the small area Ds1, and FIG. 210 ( When the change of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is executed as shown in a), a round symbol is displayed. In addition, among the reserved symbols (circle symbols) displayed in the small area Ds2, the circle symbol displayed on the leftmost side indicating that the most reserved order is first is hidden, and thereafter, the small symbol is displayed. A round symbol having a larger diameter than the reserved symbol is displayed in Ds1. In this case, the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 moves to the position where the leftmost reserved symbol, which has been hidden, is displayed, and then the retained symbol displayed successively moves and is displayed. Is done. When the reserved symbol moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as the symbol being executed, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol to be started to change, the selected changing pattern, and the like. Then, the color and the symbol of the symbol being executed are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed and the selected change pattern based on the symbol being executed displayed in the small area Ds1. Can enhance the interest of the people. Note that the symbol being executed displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color and the pattern at the start of the change, but also the effect of changing the special symbol during the period of the change is performed. For example, the timing at which the third symbol switches from the high-speed fluctuation to the low-speed fluctuation, and the reach display mode (a display mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped at the same symbol and the middle symbol is scroll-displayed) are used. It is executed at a timing or a timing at which a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (b), in the small area Ds2, a first reserved symbol pedestal m1 indicating that the reserved symbol indicating that the reserved order is the reserved order in which the variation order is the earliest is displayed. It is displayed on the left end. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal m1, a second reserved symbol pedestal m2 indicating that the reserved order is the second, a third reserved symbol pedestal m3 indicating that the reserved order is the third, the reserved order Is a fourth pedestal m4 for a reserved symbol, indicating that the pendant is the fifth, a pedestal m5 for a reserved symbol, indicating that the pendant is the fifth, and a pedestal for the sixth reserved symbol, indicating that the reserved order is the sixth. m6, a seventh reserved symbol pedestal m7 indicating that the reserved order is the seventh, and an eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 indicating that the reserved order is the eighth, in a state where the reserved symbol is not displayed. Is also displayed.

  When the predetermined number of reserved symbols is not displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol base m5 to the eighth reserved symbol base m8, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed. The reserved number suggestion symbol P has a variable lid shape on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5, on which a character "5" indicating that the reserved order is the fifth is displayed. Similarly, the character “6” is displayed on the upper part of the sixth reserved symbol pedestal m6, indicating that the reserved order is the sixth, and the reserved order is seven on the upper part of the seventh reserved symbol pedestal m7. The variable lid shape in which the character of "7" indicating that the order is the eighth is displayed, and the character of "8" indicating that the order of the reservation is the eighth is displayed on the upper part of the eighth reserved symbol base m8. It consists of symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (b), when the reserved number is 0, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is straddled over the area from the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8. It is configured so that the player can recognize that the maximum number of reserved items is eight in total for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four pieces are set for the first special symbol and a maximum of four pieces are set for the second special symbol. In this control example, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Thus, the configuration may be such that the occurrence of overflow is suppressed.

  A character display pedestal C1 is displayed on the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 to indicate that it is an area where a notice character is displayed. With this configuration, even when the notice character is not displayed, the player can check the area where the character is displayed in advance, and can easily play the game.

  As shown in FIG. 210 (a), when the third symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed in the main area Dm (during the variance display period of the special symbol), the first entrance 64 or the right. When game balls enter the second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640, if the number of reserves corresponding to the entered special symbol is less than the maximum value, the upper part of the pedestal display corresponding to the reserve order. Will display the hold symbol. FIG. 210 (a) shows a display of a reserved symbol when the number of reserved symbols is three.

  As shown in FIG. 210 (a), until the number of reserved balls is three, the reserved number suggesting symbol P is displayed in the display area where the fifth to eighth reserved symbols are displayed. . Further, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), when the number of holdings becomes four, the variable cover symbol for displaying the fifth holding of the holding number suggesting symbol P is hidden and variably displayed. . With this configuration, when the reserved symbol is displayed up to the vicinity of the variable lid symbol, the symbol is not displayed, and the problem of the player misunderstanding the variable lid symbol as the reserved symbol and misunderstanding the actual number of reserved balls is suppressed. it can. Further, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), when the number of the reserved balls becomes four, not only the variable cover pattern in the display area of the fifth reserved ball is hidden but also the girl display It is configured to display a character design.

  Note that the character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment display suggesting the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls by a balloon, and provides the player with the maximum number of reserved balls. The number of remaining items can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls becomes seven, the character "one more" is displayed in the comment display, and when one more reserved ball is stored, the upper limit number of reserved balls is displayed. This indicates that the eight reserved balls are in the stored state. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the number up to the upper limit of the number of reserves, and in the state where the number of reserves is the upper limit, the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, right By entering one of the second entrances 640r (the entrance corresponding to the special symbol which is not the upper limit of the suspension), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the overflow that is not retained and stored.

  In the present control example, when a game ball enters the opening 710a of the sorting device 700, the distressed game ball is alternately changed by the sorting member 762 of the sorting device 700 to the first entrance 64 (first One special symbol) and the right second entrance 640r (corresponding to the second special symbol). Thereby, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be easily alternately and uniformly stored. Thereby, even when the number of retained balls of the entirety (including the first special symbol and the second special symbol) becomes seven, the player can play the game into the opening 710a without worrying about overflow. The game can be continued so that the ball enters.

  Further, when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit value, the character “MAX” indicating that the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit value is displayed, and although the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit value, the player However, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball continues to be fired and the overflow of the reserved ball occurs.

  In FIG. 211 (a), the fourth retained ball is stored, and the reserved ball is determined by the pre-reading process (Z320: see FIG. 249) in the start winning process (Z105) of FIG. The information on the selected variation pattern type is output as a winning command to the audio lamp control device 113, and based on the information, for example, when it is determined that there are various types of jackpots or missed super reach, the player The display style of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the white reserved pattern is changed to red) as an effect to give the expectation to the jackpot, and is displayed. Display it as it is without displaying it. Further, an effect is displayed in which the girl is displayed in the character display area C and the character "as is" is displayed, suggesting that the number of reserved items is not further increased. Here, when the fifth reserved ball is stored, the character “OVER” is displayed as a balloon from the girl in the character display area C as shown in FIG. You will be notified as if it overflowed. As a result, the player can be given an expectation that the fourth holding ball will be displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to prevent the player from firing and consuming the game ball) needlessly.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (a), when the number of 0 reserved balls is stored up to 4 in a short period (for example, 5 seconds), at the timing when the fourth reserved ball is stored, The fifth and sixth variable lid designs P of the pending number suggestion symbol P are hidden, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the word "early" is displayed. A notification indicating that the reserved number suggesting symbol P is specially displayed variably because of its shortness is executed. Here, normally, when the number of the retained balls is four, the variable cover symbol of the retained number suggesting symbol P is not displayed at the fifth position, but within five seconds, the number of the retained balls is zero. By increasing the number to four, a special display rule is displayed in which the fifth and sixth variable cover symbols are displayed as non-display. With this configuration, the effect to be executed can be varied depending on the increase period of the number of reserved balls or the interval at which the reserved balls are stored, and it is determined that the number of reserved balls has exceeded a predetermined number in a short period of time. Can be easily recognized. Further, in the present control example, the display mode of the variable cover symbol P is configured to be different from the normal mode. However, the display mode of the variable cover symbol P is not changed. (The color, pattern, and shape of the reserved symbol can be changed).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212 (b), a variable display example of the variable cover symbol P in the time-saving gaming state will be described. In the time-saving gaming state (the probability of determining whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol is high), unlike the normal game state (the probability of determining whether the symbol is a symbol is low), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, FIG. As shown in (5), the fifth (m5) and sixth (m6) variable cover symbols P are not displayed. Then, the character of the girl is displayed, and a character that informs the player to play the game so as to memorize up to the sixth reserved ball “insert up to 6” by a balloon is displayed. In the time-saving gaming state, the probability of determining whether or not a normal symbol is accepted is set to a high probability, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is also set to a short time, so that the ordinary electric accessory (electric support) 640a is easily set to the open state, It becomes easier for game balls to enter the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. Therefore, during the time reduction game, the overflow of the reserved ball tends to occur. Therefore, during the time reduction game, unlike the normal game, many variable cover symbols P are not displayed, and the upper limit value of the reserved ball is 8 By prompting the player to play the game so that the number of the balls becomes six, which is smaller than the number of the balls, it is possible to play the game so as to suppress the state where the reserved ball is stored up to the upper limit value and the overflow is likely to occur. it can. In the time-saving game state, the seventh (m7) variable cover symbol P is not displayed when the number of the reserved balls reaches the fifth, and the eighth (m8) variable lid symbol when the number of the reserved balls reaches the seventh. P is hidden.

  In the present control example, during the time saving game, the seventh variable cover symbol P is not displayed when the number of the reserved balls reaches the fifth ball. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The eye and the eighth variable lid symbol P may be configured to be maintained in the displayed state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game to generate six or more reserved balls.

  When the fourth ball is stored, the sixth and seventh variable lid designs are hidden according to the content of the winning command, and the girl is prompted to increase the number of balls to the sixth ball. May be displayed so as to indicate “insert up to 6”. In this way, by informing the player of the type of the jackpot game (probable change or regular hit) in advance as a benefit by putting up to 6, the player's willingness to accumulate reserved balls in the player Can be increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 213 (a) and 213 (b), the configuration is such that the type of the girl displayed in the character display area C is changed according to the pre-read result of the reserved ball (information indicated by the winning command) in which the stored type is stored. Have been. The example shown in FIG. 214 (a) is an example in which a girl character which is normally displayed when the number of reserved balls becomes four is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 213 (b), four characters are displayed. An example in which a special girl character different from the normal one is selected and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result of the look-ahead result is a specific result when the eye holding ball is stored is shown. I have. Here, the specific result is a result of winning in a lottery that determines a type of girl different from the normal time, and if the pre-read result is a jackpot or out of super reach, the winning probability is set high. . With this configuration, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation of a jackpot based on the character type of the girl displayed to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, with reference to FIGS. 214 (a) and (b), a description will be given of a display mode in a case where the number of reserved items reaches the maximum value and an over-win is made thereafter. FIG. 214 (a) shows that when the reserved number is stored up to the upper limit, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is indicated by a balloon comment that the retained number is the upper limit. Is displayed. Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is changed to the character J2. Is displayed, and the character "Overflow" indicating that overflow has occurred is displayed. In this way, when an overflow occurs, the occurrence of the overflow can be suppressed by notifying the player of the occurrence of the overflow in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the present control example, the character type is variably displayed for the purpose of suppressing the overflow. However, when the purpose is to increase the profit on the game store side, the character to be displayed is generated by causing the overflow. Depending on the type of the comment and the content of the comment, it is determined whether the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed, the pre-read result of the stored ball (whether the result of the determination), and the current game state (normal game state or positive change game state) ) May be configured to be notified. With this configuration, by playing a game while generating an overflow, the player can enjoy various effects, and can generate an overflow that is disadvantageous to the player.

  With reference to FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b), a description will be given of a display mode in a case where the during-reach holding effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 215 (a), when a variation pattern (various types of normal reach and various types of super reach) which is a reach display mode is performed, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in FIG. 262) is performed. When it is determined that the special hold effect is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 215, when the reach display mode is set, the display mode of the reach-in-reach hold effect is set. When the hold effect during the reach is executed, the fifth and sixth variable cover symbols P are hidden, the girl character J1 is displayed, and “save up to 6” in the speech balloon comment, regardless of the number of held balls. Is displayed to indicate to the player that six reserve balls are to be accumulated during the reach fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 215 (b), when up to six reserved balls are actually stored during the reach display, the reach symbol of the even symbol "6" becomes the odd symbol "7" which is a symbol type that is advantageous to the player. Variable and displayed. Further, the character "well done" is displayed in a balloon from the girl character J1, and the color of the sixth reserved symbol is changed (for example, from blue to red) and displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the emission of the game ball and play the game even during the reach, thereby increasing the profit on the game store side.

  In this control example, the example in which the reach symbol is changed when the number of reserved balls reaches the designated number (six) has been described. In some cases, instead of changing the reach symbol to an odd symbol, the main display area Dm displays an effect of swimming the fish from right to left, etc., and the degree of expectation of the jackpot is determined by the number and color of the fish. It is configured to give a notice or to provide an advance notice display that suggests the result of the validity determination such as “congratulations”.

  The display mode in the lucky hold effect will be described with reference to FIGS. When a specific change (a change won in the preliminary lottery to execute a lucky hold effect) is executed. If a previous hit was made, the number of the hold balls corresponding to the change is stored. 216, a mark symbol n6 as shown in FIG. 216 (a) is displayed on the variable lid symbol P corresponding to the number of retained balls, and corresponds to the mark symbol n6 "Aim for 6" from the girl character J1 in the character display area C. The notification that prompts the player to accumulate the reserved balls up to the reserved number is executed. As shown in FIG. 216 (b), when up to six pending balls are stored during the lucky pending effect, the characters “well done” are displayed, and when the frame button 22 is pressed, the main display area Dm is displayed. In addition, a character (preliminary display mode) indicating that a probable change jackpot is to be given to a special symbol in the course of change, "Confirmed change" is displayed.

  In this way, it is configured to notify up to the jackpot type when the jackpot game is made. In this control example, the present effect is configured to be executed when the jackpot is a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The type may be determined, the type may be reported, and a big hit may be expected.

  In addition, the lucky hold effect is such that when a hold ball stored in the variable lid pattern P (5 to 8 holds) is a hit, the number of the hold balls is stored, and the lucky hold is performed when the next big hit change is executed. It is configured to be displayed as a pending number. With this configuration, when the previous jackpot has occurred, the player can be made aware of the number of stored holds, and a state in which the number of holds is stored as much as possible is set to a lucky hold. A game can be played so that the effect is easily executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), the reserved symbol has a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls at the time of winning (the total value of the number of reserved first and second special symbols) (the number of reserved at the time of winning: FIG. 216 is displayed. When the reserved symbol is exhausted (the change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol is started), the number of held at the time of winning is slid and moved (variable) to the reserved symbol display area in which the order of variation is one smaller. Even if it is displayed, it is displayed with the same number. With this configuration, even when the change starts, the number of suspensions at the time of winning in the change can be confirmed.

  In the case of a jackpot game, the number of holds at the time of winning the jackpot game executed in the effects (opening effect, round effect, ending effect, etc.) during the jackpot game is displayed and notified by a number, a symbol, or the like. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 (a) and (b), a long-time hit (a hit game in which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state for a longer period of time than a normal hit) which is one of the hit types of the ordinary symbol A description will be given of a display mode of a hold effect when the long open effect in ()) is executed. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when a normal symbol is won for a long time and a long-time winning game is started, a comment “Opening” is displayed in the main display area Dm. This display informs the player that the long-period game is being executed, and the first ball entrance 64 or the right second entrance without firing the game ball during the long-period game which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a problem that a chance that a game ball enters the ball opening 640r is missed. Also, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r during the long game, the reserved symbol corresponding to the entry is a black color different from the normal one. It will be displayed as a pending symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to distinguish between a reserved ball stored during a long-time game and a reserved ball stored during other periods.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (b), when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol stored during the long hit game is started, the scroll display of the third symbol is started in synchronization with the start of the scroll display. , The treasure chest symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the words "Large chance if the treasure chest opens!" Are displayed, and the effect of opening the treasure chest during the change of the third symbol is performed. It is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is highly expected to be a big hit.

  With such a configuration, when a long hit of a normal symbol is executed, the effect of the reserved ball is changed, and a special effect is also performed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball. By performing a long hit, the effect of the game can be varied greatly, and a game with a fresh taste can be provided.

  Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 variably displays by displaying a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed as the ball passes through the through gate 67, and stops after the variance ends. As the symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown in a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable display in which a symbol of “○” and a symbol of “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit is displayed. Done. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”), the pachinko machine 10 operates the electric accessory 640a for a predetermined time (opens). As a result, the configuration is such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  It should be noted that, as in the present control example, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the plurality of lamps on and off in the second symbol display device 83, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is not limited to the maximum number of four balls as in the case of the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r, but is three or less, or The number may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  The sorting device 700 is disposed below the variable display device unit 80. Inside the sorting device 700, the game balls that have entered the opening 710a are alternately sorted by the sorting member 762, and the balls are distributed. Are provided with a first entrance 64 and a right second entrance 640r. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r, a first entrance switch and a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. When the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch are turned on, the main controller 110 performs a lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. This is indicated by the LED 37a of one symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r are also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls when the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are respectively entered is the same. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Good. For example, a prize for the right second entrance 640r as four prize balls when entering the first entrance 640r as three prize balls when entering the first entrance opening 64. The number of balls may be set to be larger than the number of prize balls for the first entrance 64.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated a number of times (for example, 16 times (16 rounds in the case of the big hit A)) set for the type of the big hit game to be executed. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 218). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 218). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  The special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed in order to select the special random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type. A special hit type counter C2 to be used, a stop type selection counter C3 for determining a special symbol stop type (reach hit type, out-of-reach (out-length A, out-of-short A), out-of-reach type), variation pattern selection , And an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1. Further, a random number counter C4 is used for lottery of ordinary symbols, and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting an initial value of the random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 255). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a including four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved ball of the first special symbol, and a reserved ball of the second special symbol. And a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a change type counter are provided in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, the same value is stored in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of entering the right second entrance 640r.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the ordinary winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The special random number counter C1 is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 957), and reaches 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 957 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 957). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 255).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1, for example, is periodically updated (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the special symbol big hit random number is set by a special symbol big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 221 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot when the value of the random number matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a higher probability of being a special symbol jackpot than the low probability. And the number of random hits included in each of them is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. Note that the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability special symbols and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability special symbols (see FIG. 221 (a)) are provided. Are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and is incremented by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , Reaches a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), and then returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. At the timing, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is deviated. If the random number is, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a special symbol big hit, the first symbol display device 37 is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. . In the present embodiment, four types of jackpot types are set such as “jackpot A”, “jackpot B1”, “jackpot B2”, and “jackpot C”, and “jackpot A”, One of “big hit B1”, “big hit B2”, and “big hit C” is determined. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The special random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. In the special winning random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are three random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random numbers “0 to 2” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability. 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 958, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 3, so the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “3/958”.

  On the other hand, at the time of the high probability of the special symbol, there are 27 random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value “0 to 26” is stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for the high probability. . As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 958, and the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 27. Therefore, the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “27/958”.

  In this embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, and the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability Therefore, a random number value for each jackpot is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be predicted, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 222 (a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type includes a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the first special symbol. A special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2 which is referred to in correspondence with the 2 special symbol lottery is set.

  The special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1 indicates that when the change of the first special symbol stops, the lottery result in the change is a big hit, the special symbol set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area. A determination value for matching (determining) with the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored in association with the big hit type.

  FIG. 222 (b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is “0 to 39”, the big hit type is “big hit A”. When the value was “40 to 75”, the jackpot type was “big hit B1”, and when the value was “76 to 79”, the jackpot type was “big hit B2” and “80 to 99”. In the case of the big hit type, “big hit C” is set.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that four types of hits (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, and big hit C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Have been.

  In addition, the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the change of the second special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the change is a big hit. A determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored in association with the big hit type.

  FIG. 222 (c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2, the big hit type when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is “0 to 39” is “big hit A”. When the value was “40 to 87”, the jackpot type was “big hit B1”, and when the value was “88 to 91”, the jackpot type was “big hit B2” and “92 to 99”. In the case of the big hit type, “big hit C” is set.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that four types of hits (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, and big hit C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Have been. Further, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type selected when the determination result is a big hit is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player is provided with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It can be interested in which of the lotteries is being executed. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability change jackpot to which the probability change is given to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same (60%), the probability variation ratio is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to suppress a problem in which the probability variation rate is not constant as a whole. In addition, since the selection ratio of the big hit C in the second special symbol is set lower, the probability that the 16R certain change big hit is selected is set higher than that of the first special symbol, so that it is configured to be advantageous to the player. I have.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). By the above-described stop type selection counter C3 and variation type counter CS1, rough display modes such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach are determined. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 and the detailed The symbol variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 255) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 220b) storing a random value for determining the variation time of the symbol variation from the values (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the main control device 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b includes a normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 used in a gaming state (normal gaming state) when the probability of determining whether or not the symbol is normal is low. And a time-saving variation pattern table 202b2 used in the game state (high-probability game state or time-saving game state) when the probability of determining whether or not the symbol is normal is high. In addition, as will be described in more detail later in the description of the selection of the variation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 determines whether the hit / fail judgment result, the number of pending balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the content of the rough variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time are determined, and a variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 to 224, a description will be given of the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern. FIG. 223 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the special symbol lottery results, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter are set for each of the variation patterns. The value with CS1 is assigned. In addition, when the result of the hit determination is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined in accordance with the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d based on the acquired value of the special hit counter C2). Is set. Further, when the result of the determination is incorrect, a variation pattern is set for each of the number of retained balls (one to four or five to eight) at the start of the variation.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, when the hit determination result is a hit, when the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls). If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of “0 to 50”, the normal reach jackpot A (variation) No1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “51 to 250”, the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 100”, and the variation is selected. The super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is “101 to 159”, and the super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “160 to 198”. Selected.

  When the jackpot type is “jackpot B1” or “jackpot B2”, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is set to “0” for 1 to 8 pieces (that is, regardless of the number of held balls). 60 ", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No1) is selected for the value" 0 to 198 "of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “61 to 250”, the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 100”, and the variation is selected. The super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is “101 to 159”, and the super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “160 to 198”. Selected.

  When the jackpot type is “big hit C”, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of “0 to 250” for 1 to 8 pieces of holding (that is, regardless of the number of holding balls). , The super reach jackpot D (fluctuation No. 5) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 “0 to 100”, and the super reach for the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “101 to 198”. Big hit E (fluctuation No. 6) is selected.

  As described above, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, a variation pattern that is a normal reach or a super reach having a long variation time is selected regardless of the number of holdings. Therefore, by executing a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, it is possible to make the player expect that the result of the hit determination is a big hit.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is incorrect, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of “0 to 209” for one to four reserved balls, the change type counter is If the deviation length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of CS1 “0 to 198” and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 239”, the variation type counter CS1 When the value of the normal reach A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value “0 to 198” and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “240 to 245”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is When the super-reach outlier A (variation No. 9) is selected for “0 to 198” and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “246 to 250”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “ Super reach out B (fluctuation No.10) is selected for the ～198 ".

  If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of retained balls of 5 to 8, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "210 to 239", the value of the change type counter CS1 is "0" to "198". When the normal reach A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “240 to 245”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is superimposed on “0 to 198”. When the out-of-reach A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “246 to 250”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is superimposed on “0 to 198”. Chihazure B (fluctuation No.10) is selected.

  As described above, when the result of the determination is incorrect, the change pattern is set to be easy to select when the number of reserved balls is small (when the number is 1 to 4) and the change time is long. By allowing a game ball to enter the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r, a reserved ball is likely to be generated, and a period in which the change of the special symbol is stopped occurs (the lottery game is not performed). It is configured such that a trouble that the player gets tired of the game due to the occurrence of the period) can be suppressed. Also, when the number of reserved balls is large, the selection rate of normal reach or super reach is set to be low, and when the number of reserved balls is large, the variation of normal reach or super reach is executed, so that the player determines whether the ball is hit or not. Can be expected to win.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 224, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time-saving variation pattern table 202b2. In the time-saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are set for each of the variation patterns. Is assigned. In addition, when the result of the hit determination is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined in accordance with the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d based on the acquired value of the special hit counter C2). Is set. Further, when the result of the determination is incorrect, a variation pattern is set for each of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation (one or two or three to eight).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 224, when the hit determination result is a hit, when the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls). If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of “0 to 90”, the normal reach jackpot A (variation) No1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of “91 to 250”, the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 100”, and the variation The super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is “101 to 159”, and the super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “160 to 198”. Selected.

  When the jackpot type is “jackpot B1” or “jackpot B2”, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is set to “0” for 1 to 8 pieces (that is, regardless of the number of held balls). In the case of any of "100", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No1) is selected for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “101 to 250”, the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 100”, and the variation is selected. The super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is “101 to 159”, and the super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “160 to 198”. Selected.

  When the jackpot type is “big hit C”, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of “0 to 250” for 1 to 8 pieces of holding (that is, regardless of the number of holding balls). , The super reach jackpot D (fluctuation No. 5) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 “0 to 100”, and the super reach for the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “101 to 198”. Big hit E (fluctuation No. 6) is selected.

  As described above, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, a variation pattern that is a normal reach or a super reach having a long variation time is selected regardless of the number of holdings. Therefore, by executing a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, it is possible to make the player expect that the result of the hit determination is a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the result of determination is incorrect, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of “0 to 209” for one or two reserved balls, the change type counter is When the deviation length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of CS1 “0 to 198” and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 229”, the variation type counter CS1 If the value is "0 to 198" and normal deviation A (variation No. 8) is selected, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is If the super reach A (variation No. 9) is selected for “0 to 198” and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “240 to 250”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “ Super reach out B (fluctuation No.10) is selected for the ～198 ".

  When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 199" for the number of retained balls of 3 to 8, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "198". If the normal reach A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “200 to 229”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is superimposed on “0 to 198”. When the out-of-reach A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “230 to 239”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is superimposed on “0 to 198”. Chihazure B (fluctuation No.10) is selected.

  Here, the variation time (variation period) in the variation pattern of the deviation short B is set to 2000 ms (2 seconds), and is configured to be shorter than the variation time that can be selected in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. I have. As a result, when the result of the determination is incorrect and the number of reserved balls is three or more, the short symbol B is selected with a high probability, so that the special symbols can be changed more frequently in a short time. In addition, it is possible to easily shorten the period until the jackpot is determined (the period between the jackpots), thereby increasing the efficiency of the game.

  The ordinary random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the ordinary random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a normal symbol hit is set by a normal random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device. If the value of the random number matches the winning set in the normal winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. Further, the ordinary random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) is used for the low probability of the ordinary symbol (the period in which the ordinary symbol is in the normal state) and the probability that the ordinary symbol is hit from the low probability. There are two types, one for high-probability times (a period in which the symbol is usually in a time-saving state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Further, as the hit type of the normal symbol, a normal hit and a long hit are set, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set respectively.

  Here, in the normal winning of the normal symbol, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), in the big hitting gaming state, the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is operated to the open state in the open time of 0.2 second is executed once. It is a hit. In addition, during the working hours, during the probable change period, the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time hit is a time when the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state in the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed during the probable change period and the opening operation during the long period are set to be the same during the normal working hours, but the invention is not limited thereto. Opening operation. Specifically, for example, the operation to be in the open state may be performed once for three seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ball enter the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r at the time of hitting for a long time, and the fluctuation in the second special symbol during the normal game. The display can be easily executed, and the change display of the second special symbol in which a notice notice with a fresh taste or the like is displayed allows the player to enjoy a change in the game effect.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), when the value of the acquired ordinary hit random number counter C4 is one of 5 to 6 at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, the normal symbol of the ordinary symbol is obtained. Is determined. Also, if it is one of 7 to 8, it is determined that it is a normal symbol long time hit. On the other hand, if the value of the obtained ordinary random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, it is determined that the ordinary symbol is the ordinary winning. In addition, at the time of the high probability of the normal symbol, the configuration was such that the long hit of the normal symbol was not set. However, at the time of the high probability of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is the same as the long hit. The hit is substantially the same as the long hit.

  In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency at which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency of entering the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of the game ball by the player and increase the profit on the game store side. On the other hand, during the short working hours and the probable change period in which the probability is high, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640a to operate can be given with a probability of “1 / 1.2”, and the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance is provided. The opportunity to enter the 640r can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball by the player and set a gaming state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game with a high probability of playing the game, and can play the game for a longer time.

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained ordinary random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 8”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) , A symbol “○” is displayed. If the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is “5 to 6”, the electric accessory 640a is opened (opening operation) for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” as a normal hit. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol hits, but the opening is performed. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened. If the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is “21 to 28”, the right second entrance 640r is opened for “2 seconds × 2 times” as a long hit.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in the normal random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 221 (c)). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. If the value of the obtained ordinary random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stopped symbol (the second symbol). The symbol “○” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened “2 seconds × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the right second entrance 640 r Since the opening period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 times → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the right second entrance 640r is opened only for “2 seconds × 2 times” when a normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the ordinary random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243). Are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 255).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 218, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 219, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 255), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 254). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 220 (a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221), the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 221 (b)), In addition to the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 222 (a) to (c)), a winning command table 202e is set. Although omitted in the present control example, the ROM 202 stores, in addition to the above, various data necessary for the game, programs, and the like.

  FIG. 225 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the winning command table 202e. In the winning command table 202e, in the look-ahead process (S320: FIG. 249) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a determination result such as a variation pattern in which a stored ball is selected at the start of variation is determined. It is a table for determining a winning command corresponding to a result. As shown in FIG. 225, when the lottery result in the pre-reading is a big hit, a winning command corresponding to the determined big hit type and the selected variation pattern type is determined. As a result, not only the variation pattern type and the hit / failure determination result but also the jackpot type can be notified by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. When the lottery result is out of order, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. In the winning command table 202e, the same winning command “C100” is set in the winning command table 202e as any of the variation pattern types of outlier length A, outlier short A, and outlier short B.

  As shown in FIG. 220 (b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, open count counter 203g, long time open flag 203i, time reduction counter 203j, change execution It has a flag 203k, a probability change flag 203m, a big hit flag 203n, a fluctuation order storage area 203p, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. Also, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores an ordinary winning random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is obtained at the timing when the ball passes through the right or left through gate 67, and the obtained data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). ) Are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) in the vacant areas indicated by ()). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the order of winning is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prize stored in the other reserved areas is the same as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the counter value increases to a maximum value of 4. One is added (see Z404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see Z205 in FIG. 33).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N of times of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see Z206 in FIG. 33 and Z405 in FIG. 35). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the retained balls based on winning in the right second entrance 640r, and the other configuration is the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls in the variable display retained in 110 itself. As a result, the number of balls to be changed, which is managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is retained in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even in the case where the actual deviated display shows a deviation from the held ball count, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f counts up to four times the number of waiting balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of retained balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4 ( (See Z504 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see Z406 in FIG. 250).

  When the ball passes through the right or left through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of changing display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is obtained. Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (Z505 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the right or left through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (FIG. Z503 of No. 252: No).

  The opening number counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times the electric accessory 64c is opened. The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

  The long-time release flag 203i is a flag indicating that a long time is being hit. The long time release flag 203i is set to ON in the process of Z429 in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 251) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, in the process of Z403 in the normal symbol variation process (Z106: FIG. 250), when the variation of the ordinary symbol is newly started (after the long-time winning game is executed, the variation of the next ordinary symbol is started. Off).

  The time reduction counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203j during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and a special symbol jackpot is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Is done. In other words, when the special symbol hits, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is newly set regardless of the value of the time reduction counter 203j.

  The change execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether to execute the change of the first special symbol or the change of the second special symbol. In the present control example, the change is started according to the order in which the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r are entered (the order in which they are stored and held). Here, when the change of the special symbol is stopped and the change of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, the change execution determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (Z204: FIG. 245). Thus, it is determined whether the next variation stored is the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the pending data based on the pending storage order data stored in the later-described variation order storage area 203p. Then, the corresponding variation execution flag 203k is set to ON according to the determination result (Z245, Z247 in FIG. 245).

  The probability change flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current game state is the probability change game state. This probability change flag 203m is determined when the jackpot game being executed is other than the jackpot A in the process of Z1113 in the jackpot control process (Z1104: FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 ( Z1111: No), it is set to ON. In the special symbol variation process (Z104: FIG. 244) performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the process is set to off when the variation display of the special symbol that is a big hit is stopped.

  The big hit flag 203n is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a big hit game. The big hit flag 203n is set to ON when the start of the big hit game is set in the process of Z221 of the special symbol change process (Z104: FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the big hit control process (Z256: FIG. 256) of Z1114 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the big hit game end timing comes, it is set to off.

  The fluctuation order storage area 203p is an area in which, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second right entrance 640r and is stored as a reserved ball, the reserved order is stored. In the present control example, the change of the special symbol is configured to be executed in the order in which the special symbol is stored, and one of the special symbols is not executed with priority. Further, in the present control example, since the sorting device 700 is configured to be alternately assigned to the first entry port 64 and the right second entry port 640r, the change is started in the order in which the entries are stored. Therefore, even in the fluctuation of the special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed alternately, and only one of the retaining balls is digested, so that the retaining ball of the special symbol is used. The problem of overflow can be suppressed.

  In the other memory area 203z, necessary flags, counters, storage data, and the like in other control processes executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but the details are omitted.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a change pattern selection table 222a, a hold change selection table 222b, a hold effect mode selection table 222c, a hold lid range selection table 222d, and a hold lid command selection. Table 222e, hold lid color change selection table 222f, lucky hold command table 222g, background mode selection table 222h, hold character selection table 222i, hold character change table 222j, speech balloon selection table 222k, reach effect lottery table 222m, reach start time A calculation table 222n and a lucky hold lottery table 222p are stored.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on a variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are respectively set corresponding to the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command. One fluctuation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

  The pending change selection table 222b determines whether or not to display the pending symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 variably based on the received winning command, and is required for an effect to be executed according to the content of the change. 9 is a selection table for acquiring a suitable pending change value.

  FIG. 227 (a) schematically shows the contents of the pending change selection table 222b. In the hold change selection table 222b, the value of the effect counter 223h is assigned to the type of the received winning command, and the display for changing the hold symbol of the sub display area Ds with respect to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. The mode (see FIG. 211A) and the pending change value are set. The details of the acquired hold change value will be described later in a hold effect mode selection table 222c.

  Specifically, when the winning command type is out of order, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 180”, the display mode of the reserved symbol is not changed from the normal reserved symbol. Is determined, and the pending change value obtains 0. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “181 to 198”, the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed from a white circle symbol (a normal reserved symbol display mode) to a blue circle symbol (change A). And the pending change value gets 1.

  If the winning command type is out of normal reach, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", no change is determined, and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is any of "51 to 100", the change A is determined and the pending change value acquires 1. In the case of any of “101 to 198”, it is determined that the white circle symbol is changed to the green circle symbol and displayed, and “2” is acquired as the pending change value.

  If the winning command type is out of super reach, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 30”, no change is determined, and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is any of “31 to 90”, the change A is determined and the pending change value acquires 1. If it is any of “91 to 198”, the change B is determined, and the pending change value acquires 2.

  When the winning command type is the normal reach jackpot, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “0 to 20”, it is determined that there is no change, and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is any of "21 to 90", the change A is determined and the pending change value acquires 1. If it is any of “91 to 198”, the change B is determined, and the pending change value acquires 2.

  When the winning command type is the super reach jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “0 to 10”, it is determined that there is no change, and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is any of "11 to 100", the change A is determined and the pending change value acquires 1. If it is any of “101 to 189”, the change B is determined, and 2 is acquired as the pending change value. In the case of any one of “190 to 198”, it is determined that the white circle symbol is changed to the red circle symbol and displayed, and 3 is acquired as the pending change value.

  In this way, by receiving the winning command, the color of the reserved symbol is changed and displayed according to the content thereof, so that not only the special symbol in the variable display but also the reserved symbol displayed is retained and stored. It is possible to predict the success / failure determination result corresponding to the held symbol. In addition, the player can be notified in advance that the reach display mode will be achieved when the display is variably displayed in the change B. Therefore, even if the special symbol is not changed, the hold storage may be performed. For example, it is possible to make the player expect that the change will be started, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game even if the change of the special symbol that is lost during the change is executed. Furthermore, by setting a hold change value for each reach type, it is possible to develop a reach effect via a different execution effect even for the same hold change, and a player with an unexpected effect It is possible to attract.

  The holding effect mode selection table 222c is a table for selecting a plurality of modes prepared according to the holding change displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  FIG. 227 (b) schematically shows the contents of the hold effect mode selection table 222c. In the hold effect mode selection table 222c, the hold effect mode is set according to the value (range) of the hold change value acquired in the hold change selection table 222b (see Z2404 in FIG. 266). Specifically, when the hold change value is “0”, the normal mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. The normal mode is a state in which all the holding symbols being displayed are not changed (state), and when the number of the holding balls becomes four or more, the distance between the holding symbol and the display range of the variable cover symbol P is one. This mode is variably displayed (see FIG. 210B).

  If the pending change value is any of “1-2”, the preliminary effect A mode is determined (selected) as the pending effect mode. The notice A mode is a state in which any change (any of change A to change C) is set to the held symbol being displayed (state), and when the number of held balls becomes four or more, the held symbol is held. This is a hold effect mode in which the display range of the symbol and the variable cover symbol P is displayed without an interval (see FIG. 211 (a)). Note that, strictly speaking, FIG. 211 (a) is not a display mode representing the notice A mode, but an example of a display mode of a hold effect mode of a notice B mode described later. In the notice A mode, the content of the displayed comment in the state of FIG. In the notice A mode, when a reserved ball is generated after the reserved symbol whose color has been changed and the reserved symbol is displayed, one variable cover symbol P is not displayed accordingly (for example, the state of FIG. 211 (a)). Is increased (occurs) by one, so that the variable cover symbol P with the character 5 is hidden), and the comment indicating the degree of expectation to the jackpot for the symbol with the variable color is changed. The display is performed by a balloon. As described above, in the notice A mode, after the color of the reserved symbol is changed, in order to cause the game to be performed so as to generate the reserved ball, every time the reserved ball is generated, the big hit against the variable reserved ball is performed. It is configured to notify the degree of expectation.

  When the suspension change value is “3”, the preliminary effect B mode is determined as the suspension effect mode. The notice B mode is a case where the reserved symbol being displayed changes, and when the number of reserved balls becomes 4 or more, any change (change A , Change B, change C) is set (state), and when the number of reserved balls becomes four or more, there is no space between the display range of the reserved symbol and the variable cover symbol P. (See FIG. 211 (a)) or a mode in which a reserved symbol is displayed on the display range of the variable lid symbol P (see FIG. 211 (b)).

  With such a configuration, the display range of the variable cover symbol P can be variously changed not only by changing the color of the reserved symbol but also by increasing or decreasing the number of reserved balls. The pleasure of playing can be expanded, and it is possible to attract players. Also, unlike the notice A mode, this is a hold effect in which the player performs a game so as not to generate a hold ball any more, and the player interrupts the game (the operation of firing the game ball) to change the color. The expectation can be increased by focusing on the start of the change (dynamic display) of the special symbol corresponding to the held symbol. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The reserved cover range selection table 222d includes a plurality of data tables for acquiring a reserved cover range value required for setting the display range of the variable cover symbol P displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. Is set.

  Here, a special effect performed during the normal mode will be described. In the normal mode, as special effects, a short-term winning effect, a hold effect during a reach, and a lucky hold effect are provided.

  The short-term winning effect is an effect that is executed when the required time from the state where the number of reserved balls is 0 to the number of retained balls and becomes 1 to 4 is less than 5 seconds, and is normal. In the mode, the interval between the reserved cover symbol P and the reserved symbol is set to be one reserved ball (the reserved cover symbol P is variably displayed), but in the short-term winning effect, FIG. And the number of the reserved cover symbols P is variably displayed so that the interval between the reserved cover symbols P and the reserved symbol becomes two, and a girl character J0 indicating that it is a short-term prize production is displayed. This is a production in which the comment "Early" is displayed. In the short-term prize production, when the game state is the normal state, no other special production is executed (the value of the special production status storage area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of reserved balls has changed from 0 to 1 or more. In this case, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 when the number of reserved balls becomes four before the short-time prize timer 223q for measuring the elapsed time has elapsed 5 seconds (see Z2425 in FIG. 267). ) To start the execution (see FIG. 212 (a)), and when the short-time prize timer 223q has passed 5 seconds, set the special effect status storage area to 0 (see Z2606 in FIG. 270) and end the execution. It is.

  The “reach pending effect” is an effect that sets a notice display mode that prompts the player to play a game so as to accumulate a predetermined number (for example, six in FIG. 215 (a)) during the reach fluctuation. . In this reach pending effect, when the variation type is reach, whether or not to execute is determined based on a reach effect lottery table 222m described later, and when the execution is permitted, a reach start time calculation described later is calculated. The value of the hold effect start timer 223r set based on the variation type by the table 222n becomes 0 after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, and another special effect is executed at the timing when the reach effect starts. If not (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the execution is started by setting the special effect status storage area to 2 (see Z2327 in FIG. 262) (see FIG. 215 (a)). This is an effect that ends when the fluctuation ends.

  The lucky holding effect is to store the number of holdings when the holding ball (holding symbol) is stored (displayed), and when a jackpot (specific determination result) occurs, the holding ball that has become the jackpot is A predetermined mark symbol (see FIG. 216 (a)) is displayed in a reserved symbol display area corresponding to the number of retained tokens at the time of entering the entrance, so that the reserved balls can be stored up to the marked symbol. This is an effect of displaying a notice display mode that prompts a player to play a game. When the reserved symbols are stored up to the mark symbol, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), pressing the frame button 22 causes the player to enter the current gaming state (probable changing gaming state (special gaming state) or low probability gaming state). An effect of notifying the state (normal game state) is executed. In the lucky hold effect, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and when the winning determination is made in the past, the value of the number of held balls is determined. Is stored when the lucky hold storage value 223p is stored. When the lucky hold storage value 223p is stored, the possibility of execution is determined based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p described later. The execution is started (see FIG. 216 (a)) by setting the value of the special effect status storage area 223n to 3 (see Z2307 in FIG. 261), and ends when the next change starts.

  As described above, even during the normal mode in which there is no change in the hold, the hold effect related to the hold symbol is displayed in the time interval of the start winning, the number of the held balls in the reach change, and the result of the winning / failing determination based on the past start winning. Various effects can be provided depending on the stored contents and the effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 228 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the reserved lid range selection table 222d. The reserved cover range selection table 222d includes a normal reserved cover range selection table 222d1, a notice A mode reserved cover range selection table 222d2, a preliminary B mode reserved cover range selection table 222d3, a short-time winning reserved cover range selection table 222d4, and a reach effect. A holding lid range selection table 222d5 and a time reduction holding lid range selection table 222d6 are provided.

  The normal reserved cover range selection table 222d1 is a table used to acquire a reserved cover range value when the reserved effect mode is the normal mode. FIG. 228 (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal hold lid range selection table 222d1. In the normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1, a reserved lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of retained balls. In the normal mode, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the game state is the normal state (low-probability game state (the jackpot probability is low probability and the non- In the game state), a reserved lid range value is acquired (see Z2354 in FIG. 263), and a lucky pending effect is produced (the value of the special production status storage area 223n is 3), and a reserved lid range value is acquired (FIG. 263). Z2346).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is “0 to 3”, 4 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “4”, 3 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “3”, 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “2”, 1 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “1”, 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “0”, 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

  The notice A mode hold lid range selection table 222d2 is a table used to acquire a hold lid range value when the hold effect mode is the notice A mode. FIG. 228 (c) schematically shows the contents of the notice A mode hold lid range selection table 222d2. In the preliminary A mode hold lid range selection table 222d2, a hold lid range value is acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2351 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is “0 to 3”, 4 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “4”, 4 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “3”, 3 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “2”, 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “1”, 1 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “0”, 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

  The notice B mode hold lid range selection table 222d3 is a table used to acquire a hold lid range value when the hold effect mode is the notice B mode.

  FIG. 228 (d) schematically shows the contents of the notice B mode hold lid range selection table 222d3. In the preliminary B mode retaining lid range selection table 222d3, a retaining lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of retained balls and the value (range) of the retaining preliminary counter (see Z2349 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is “0 to 4”, and when the value of the pending notice counter is “0 to 4”, 4 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is “5 to 8”, when the value of the reserved notice counter is “1 to 4”, the reserved cover range value is 4 and the value of the reserved notice counter is “5”. In the case of, when the hold lid range value is 3 and the value of the hold advance notice counter is "6", the hold lid range value is 2 and when the value of the hold advance notice counter is "7", As the reserved lid range value, 1 is acquired, and when the value of the reserved advance notice counter is “8”, 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

  The short winning prize holding lid range selection table 222d4 (FIG. 229 (a)) is a table used to acquire a holding lid range value when executing a short prize winning effect. FIG. 229 (a) schematically shows the contents of the short-time prize holding lid range selection table 222d4. In the short-time prize holding lid range selection table 222d4, a holding lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2342 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is “4”, 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “5”, 1 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “6 to 8”, 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

  The reach effect pending lid range selection table 222d5 is a table used to acquire the reserved lid range value in the case of the reach pending effect. FIG. 229 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reach effect pending lid range selection table 222d5. In the reach effect pending lid range selection table 222d5, a retained lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of retained balls (see Z2344 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is “0 to 8”, 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

  The special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the special effect is not in the normal mode and the game state is the time reduction state (the value of the counter during the time reduction is not 0). 7) is a table used to acquire the hold lid range value in FIG.

  FIG. 229 (c) schematically shows the contents of the time-saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6. In the time-saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6, a reserved lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of retained balls (see Z2353 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is “0 to 6”, 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “7”, 1 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “8”, 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

  With such a configuration, the display range of the variable cover symbol P to be displayed is variously changed in accordance with the hold determination switched according to the determination of the winning at the time of the start winning or the variation type, thereby providing the player with It is possible to express a production effect that enhances participation.

  The reserved lid command selection table 222e sets the display range of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved lid range value acquired in the reserved lid range selection table 222d. Is a table used to select a command for performing the operation.

  FIG. 230 (a) schematically shows the contents of the hold lid command selection table 222e. The reserved cover command selection table 222e sets a reserved cover command to be transmitted to the display control device for the reserved cover range value (range) acquired by the reserved cover range selection table 222d.

  Specifically, when the reserved lid range value is “0”, the reserved lid command is determined to be BF00, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is the shortest display (see FIG. 214 (a)). When the reserved cover range value is “1”, the reserved cover command is determined to be BF01, and the display range of the variable cover symbol P is 1 (only the reserved 8 area). When the reserved lid range value is “2”, the reserved lid command is determined to be BF02, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 2 (the area of reserved 7 to 8 (see FIG. 212 (a))). When the reserved lid range value is “3”, the reserved lid command is determined to be BF03, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 3 (the area of reserved 6 to 8 (see FIG. 213 (a))). When the reserved cover range value is “4”, the reserved cover command is determined to be BF04, and the display range of the variable cover symbol P is 4 (the area of reserved 5 to 8 (see FIG. 211A)).

  The setting of the holding lid command is performed in the holding lid setting processing (Z2229) executed in the winning command receiving processing (Z2209) at the time of starting winning, and is executed in the fluctuation pattern receiving processing (Z2202) at the start of fluctuation. This is performed in the holding lid setting process (Z2229). Therefore, the display of the variable lid symbol P can be changed by setting the display reserved lid command based on the retained lid range value (see Z2355 in FIG. 263) every time the number of retained balls changes.

  The reserved lid color change selection table 222f indicates the designated number (in the example shown in FIG. 211 (a), when the advance notice effect indicating that the reserved number shown in FIG. 4 is a data table for determining a reserved cover symbol P corresponding to an area where the reserved symbol is displayed, when a reserved ball is generated exceeding (4 pieces). The reserved lid pattern P determined in the reserved lid color change selection table 222f is normally (normally, a black frame, the inside is transparent white, and a number indicating the number of reserved corresponding to the reserved display area is displayed inside. Displayed in a different manner from the specified color (the internal color is green with transparency). In the reserved lid color change selection table 222f, the secondary display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the reserved advance notice counter 223g for recognizing the display position of the reserved colored symbol to be described later and the current number of retained balls. It is a table for selecting a command for setting a range of a color change of a reserved cover symbol P displayed in an area Ds.

  FIG. 230 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the hold lid color change selection table 222f. When the hold effect mode is the notice B mode, the hold lid color change selection table 222f specifies a color change range for the value (range) of the hold notice counter 223g and the value (range) of the number of held balls. In accordance with the change range, a hold lid command for changing the display range of the variable lid symbol P from a normal white display mode to green (see FIG. 211 (b)) is set (see Z2348 in FIG. 263). I do.

  Specifically, when the value of the hold notice counter 223g is any of “0 to 4”, and when the value of the number of held balls is any of “0 to 4”, the hold lid command is No setting, no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the reserved cover command is determined to be BF10, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is five. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the reserved cover command is determined to be BF11, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 6. When the value of the number of reserved balls is “7”, the reserved cover command is determined to be BF12, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the reserved cover command is determined to be BF13, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 8.

  When the value of the suspension notice counter 223g is "5", when the value of the number of retained balls is "5", the reserved lid command is not set, and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is “5”, the reserved cover command is determined to be BF20, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is six.

  When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the reserved cover command is determined to be BF21, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is “7”, the reserved cover command is determined to be BF22, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 8.

  When the value of the suspension notice counter 223g is "6", and when the value of the number of retained balls is "6", the reserved lid command is not set, and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of retained balls is “7”, the BF30 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of retained balls is seven. When the value of the number of reserved balls is “8”, the reserved cover command is determined to be BF31, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is 7 to 8.

  When the value of the suspension notice counter 223g is “7”, and when the value of the number of retained balls is “7”, the reserved lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of retained balls is “8”, the BF 40 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of retained balls is eight.

  When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "8", and when the value of the number of held balls is "8", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range.

  As described above, by changing the display mode in an area different from the reserved symbol that is changed by the determination of the winning / non-prize determination result in the previous winning (pre-reading determination), attention to the player can be further increased. At the same time, the player can freely determine the degree to which the number of reserved balls is to be increased depending on whether or not to stop launching, so that it is possible to enjoy a wide variety of reserved symbol modes and later fluctuation announcement effects.

  The lucky hold command table 222g is a table for selecting a command for changing the display mode of the variable cover symbol P displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of target hold balls.

  FIG. 231 schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold command table 222g. In the lucky hold command table 222g, when the lucky hold effect is being produced, the area of the target number of held balls is stored by the lucky hold storage value 223p, and the display hold lid command is set based on the value (FIG. 261). Z2306).

  More specifically, when the lucky hold storage value 223p is 5, the hold cover command FB50 is determined, and the area of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 6, the hold lid command FB51 is determined, and the area of the variable lid pattern P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle (see FIG. 216 (a)). When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 7, the hold lid command FB52 is determined, and the area of the variable lid symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 8, the hold lid command FB53 is determined, and the area is changed so that the area 8 of the variable lid symbol P is surrounded by a circle.

  In this way, by notifying the number of reserved balls whose winning / failure determination result has become a big hit in the previous start winning prize, the interest of the game is raised, and when the number of reserved balls is small (less than 5), the player is notified to the player. It is possible to encourage the player to win a prize, and an effect that improves operation can be realized.

  The background mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting a background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the background mode storage area 223i. FIG. 232 (a) schematically shows the contents of the background mode selection table 222h. In the background mode selection table 222h, the background mode is selected for the value of the background mode storage area 223i.

  Specifically, when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 0, the background A (sea background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 1, the background B (mountain background) is determined. When the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 2, the background C (river background) is determined. When the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 3, the background D (city background) is determined. .

  The hold character selection table 222i displays the contents (type) of the hold character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the background, the hold effect mode, and the effect counter 223h. This is a table for selecting (determining) the contents.

  FIG. 232 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reserved character selection table 222i. The hold character selection table 222i stores the hold character for the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode stored in the hold effect mode storage area 223m, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. Are set (see Z2363 in FIG. 264). The reserved characters are J0, a girl with short hair (see FIG. 210 (b)), J1 is a girl with tied hair (see FIG. 213 (a)), and J2 is a girl with long hair (see FIG. 213 (b)). ), An image that a player can easily identify like a blonde girl with long hair (not shown) is prepared.

  Specifically, when the background mode is “background A”, when the suspended effect mode is “normal mode”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 150”, J0 (see FIG. 210 (b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “151 to 189”, J1 (see FIG. 213 (a)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 213 (b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the pending effect mode is the "advance notice A mode" or the "advance notice B mode", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “100 to 199”, J2 is determined as the reserved character.

  When the background mode is any one of “background B”, “background C”, and “background D”, and when the pending effect mode is “normal mode”, the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 150”. If it is either one, J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “151 to 189”, J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character. When the pending effect mode is the "advance notice A mode" or the "advance notice B mode", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “100 to 199”, J3 is determined as the reserved character.

  In this way, by determining each of the hold characters having a high degree of expectation according to the difference between the hold effect mode and the background changed from the start winning, the display mode of the hold effect having a high expectation degree is maintained without impairing the atmosphere of the background effect. It becomes possible. In addition, the player can recognize a notice with a high degree of expectation, in addition to a change in the held symbol and a change in the held character.

  In addition, the number of fluctuations executed as the game is performed, the number of jackpots, the number of executions of the super reach, and a symbol or a character to which a point displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the game production is obtained. May be configured to store the history information such as the number of points obtained by the above, and change the character to be selected in consideration of the history information. With this configuration, the selected character can be changed as the game is played, and the problem that the player gets tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In addition, an RTC (real-time clock) may be provided to change the character selected based on the date and time information. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the character to be selected with the lapse of time since the introduction of the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to suppress a problem of getting tired of the game.

  The hold character change table 222j stores the contents of the hold character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 with the background, the hold effect mode, the current hold character, and the effect counter 223h. It is a table for selecting based on the.

  FIG. 233 schematically shows the contents of the pending character change table 222j. The hold character selection table 222i includes the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode stored in the hold effect mode storage area 223m, the current hold character in the display mode, and the value of the effect counter 223h. For (range), the content of the pending character to be changed is set. The change of the reserved character is selected when the winning prize is started when the reserved ball number is the upper limit value and the winning is over (Z2366: Yes), and the display character command is set (see Z2267 in FIG. 264). . If the selected character is different from the currently displayed character, the character is changed (variable). If the selected character is the same as the currently displayed character, the changed character is changed. (Variable) does not occur.

  Specifically, when the background mode is “background A”, when the hold effect mode is “normal mode”, when the current hold character is “J0”, the value of the effect counter 223h is “ If it is any of "0 to 180", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “181 to 189”, J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 214 (b)) is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is “J1”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 190”, J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “191 to 189”, J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is “J2”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 199”, J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the pending production mode is either "Advance notice A" or "Advance notice B", when the current pending character is "J0", when the value of the production counter 223h is any of "0 to 80" Has no change since J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "81 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is “J1”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 90”, J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “91 to 199”, J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is “J2”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 199”, J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

  When the background mode is any one of “background B”, “background C”, and “background D”, when the hold effect mode is “normal mode”, when the current hold character is “J0”, If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "151 to 199", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. If the current reserved character is “J1”, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 170”, J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “171 to 199”, J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. If the current reserved character is “J3”, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 199”, J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the pending production mode is any of "Advance notice A" and "Advance notice B", when the current pending character is "J0", the value of the production counter 223h is any of "0 to 50" Has no change since J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "51 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is “J1”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 70”, J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “71 to 199”, J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. If the current reserved character is “J3”, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 199”, J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

  As described above, by changing the reserved character by the over prize, the player can have a means of confirming the pass / fail result within the current number of reserved balls by the over prize, thereby increasing interest in the game. it can. In addition, as for the held character to be changed, a character having a higher expectation is set after the change than before the change, and when the hold effect mode is not in the normal mode, the change ratio of the held character is set to be higher. Therefore, when there is a change in the pending production mode, the player can have a means of knowing the result of the pass / fail judgment through the means for intentionally generating an over-winning prize, thereby providing a playability that enhances operation. Becomes

  In the speech balloon selection table 222k, a plurality of data tables for setting speech balloon (comment) content (see FIG. 211A) displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are set.

  FIG. 234 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the balloon selection table 222k. The speech balloon selection table 222k includes a normal speech balloon selection table 222k1, a preview A speech balloon selection table 222k2, a preview B speech balloon selection table 222k3, a short-time prize speech balloon selection table 222k4, a reach production speech balloon selection table 222k5, a lucky hold speech balloon selection table 222k6, A time-saving balloon selection table 222k7 is provided. The set balloon content is the content of the comment display issued by the reserved character in the character display area C.

  The normal balloon selection table 222k1 indicates that the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 210 (b)), and the game state is the normal state. , A table used to acquire the contents of a speech balloon.

  FIG. 234 (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal speech balloon selection table 222k1. In the normal balloon selection table 222k1, the content of the balloon is obtained for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2393 in FIG. 265).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of “0 to 4”, the balloon content is not acquired (see FIG. 210 (b)), and the value of the number of reserved balls is “5”. In this case, the balloon content is YES, and if the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", two more balloon contents are acquired, and if the value of the reserved ball number is "7", One more balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is “8”, the balloon content is MAX (see FIG. 214A).

  The notice A speech balloon selection table 222k2 is a table used for acquiring speech balloon contents when the suspended effect mode is the notice A mode (see FIG. 211A).

  FIG. 234 (c) schematically shows the contents of the notice A balloon selection table 222k2. In the notice A speech balloon selection table 222k2, speech balloon contents are acquired (see Z2390 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the result of the winning information command.

  Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of “0 to 3”, the balloon content is not acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is “4”, the result of the hit / fail determination is In the case of a hit, a throb is acquired as the content of the balloon, and in the case of a miss, a throb is acquired as the content of the balloon. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", if the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit, the balloon content is obtained as expected, and if it is off, the expected ball is obtained. If the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", and if the result of the hit determination is a hit, the balloon content is 70% expected? Is acquired and the content of the balloon is expected to be 60%? Is obtained. If the value of the number of reserved balls is “7”, and if the result of the hit determination is a hit, the balloon content is expected to be 80%? Is acquired, and if it is off, the balloon content is 70% expected? Is obtained. If the value of the number of retained balls is “8”, and if the result of the hit determination is a hit, the content of the balloon is intensely heated! In the event that is missed, what happens is the balloon content! Is obtained.

  Although configured in this manner, the notice A balloon selection table 222k2 refers to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h in addition to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the determination result of the winning information command to determine the content of the balloon. It may be further provided to produce an effect expressing various feelings of expectation.

  The notice B speech balloon selection table 222k3 is a table used for acquiring speech balloon contents when the suspended effect mode is the notice B mode (see FIG. 211B).

  FIG. 234 (d) schematically shows the contents of the notice B balloon selection table 222k3. In the notice B speech balloon selection table 222k3, speech balloon contents are acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the reserved effect counter (see Z2388 in FIG. 265).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of “0 to 4”, the content of the balloon is acquired as it is (see FIG. 211A), and the value of the number of reserved balls is “5”. In the case of, if the value of the hold effect counter is any of "0 to 4", OVER (see FIG. 211 (b)) is obtained as the balloon content, and the value of the hold effect counter is "5". In this case, STOP is acquired for the balloon content, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is “6”, when the value of the reserved effect counter is any of “0 to 5”, the balloon content is OVER. If the value of the hold effect counter is acquired and the value of the hold effect counter is “6”, the balloon content is STOP, and if the value of the number of hold balls is “7”, the value of the hold effect counter is “0 to 6”. In either case, OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon, and the There the case of "7", balloon contents STOP is determined, if the value of the pending cell count is "8", balloon contents MAX is obtained.

  With this configuration, it is possible to recognize a winning when a change in the reserved symbol with a high degree of expectation occurs by the content of the balloon, and to continue launching more than the current value of the reserved ball number to reduce the reserved ball number. It is possible to notify the player of the determination as to whether or not to increase the number, and to suppress the occurrence of useless launching, thereby enabling the player to play the game efficiently. In addition, even when a change in the reserved symbol having a high degree of expectation occurs, the setting of the content of the speech balloon may be changed so that the launching is continued.

  The short-term prize balloon selection table 222k4 is a table used to acquire balloon content in the case of a short-term prize (see FIG. 212 (a)).

  FIG. 235 (a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning speech balloon selection table 222k4. In the short-term prize speech balloon selection table 222k4, speech balloon contents are acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2382 in FIG. 265).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is “4”, the content of the balloon is fast! (See FIG. 212 (a)), and when the value of the number of reserved balls is “5”, the balloon content is very fast! Is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is “6”, the balloon content is super fast! Is acquired, and when the value of the number of pending balls is “7”, the content of the speech balloon is sound speed! ! Is acquired, and when the value of the number of pending balls is “8”, the speech balloon content is fast! ! ! Is obtained.

  With this configuration, the start winning prize interval is short, and the degree of increase in the number of reserved balls can be recognized by the player by the balloon of the reserved character, and the effect can be enhanced.

  The reach effect-in-progress balloon selection table 222k5 is a table used to acquire balloon content when a reach performance is in progress (see FIG. 215 (a)).

  FIG. 235 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reach-effect-in-progress balloon selection table 222k5. In the reach effect speech balloon selection table 222k5, speech content is acquired (Z2384 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the pending effect counter and the value (range) of the number of retained balls.

  Specifically, when the value of the pending effect counter is “0”, and when the value of the number of retained balls is any of “0 to 4”, the balloon content is stored up to 6! (Refer to FIG. 215 (a)). In the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired. In the case of "6", OK is acquired for the balloon content, and "7 to 8". In the case of any one of the above, the balloon content is obtained as OVER, and when the value of the pending effect counter 223h is “other than 0”, when the value of the number of pending balls is any of “0 to 4”, , Up to 6 balloons! In the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the well-acquired balloon content (see FIG. 215 (b)) is acquired, and "7" is acquired. In the case of any one of ".about.-8", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

  By configuring in this way, by changing the balloon of the hold character during the reach effect, it is possible to prompt launch when the number of reserved balls is small, and in the reach effect during the hold effect, By changing it, the game can be played without getting bored.

  The lucky hold speech balloon selection table 222k6 is a table used to acquire the content of a speech balloon during a lucky hold effect (see FIG. 216 (a)).

  FIG. 236 (a) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6. In the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6, a value corresponding to the hold ball value is set as the lucky hold ball number (see Z2684 of Z268), and the lucky hold storage value 223p , The value of the number of retained balls (range), and the value of the retained change value (range), the content of the balloon is acquired (Z2386 in FIG. 265).

  Specifically, when the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is “5”, when the value of the number of hold balls is any of “0 to 4”, the hold change value is “0 to 3”. In either case, the target of the balloon content is set at 5, and if the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", if the pending change value is "0", the content of the balloon is OK, If the pending change value is any one of "1-2", GOOD is acquired as the balloon content, and if the pending change value is "3", the balloon content has been acquired well, but the number of retained balls is obtained. Is any of "6 to 8", and if the pending change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

  When the value of the lucky pending storage value 223p is “6”, when the value of the number of pending balls is any of “0 to 5”, and when the pending change value is any of “0 to 3”, Aiming at 6, the balloon content is obtained (see FIG. 216 (a)), and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", when the pending change value is "0", the content of the balloon is OK. Acquired, if the pending change value is any of “1-2”, GOOD is determined as the balloon content, and if the pending change value is “3”, the balloon content has been well acquired, When the value of the number of retained balls is any of “7 to 8”, and when the retained change value is any of “0 to 3”, OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

  When the value of the lucky pending storage value 223p is “7”, when the value of the number of pending balls is any of “0 to 6”, and when the pending change value is any of “0 to 3”, Aiming at 7 is obtained for the content of the balloon, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is “7”, when the reserved change value is “0”, the content of the balloon is OK and the reserved change value is “ In the case of any one of “1” and “2”, GOOD is acquired as the content of the balloon, and when the pending change value is “3”, the content of the balloon is acquired well, but the value of the number of retained balls is “8”. In the case of "", if the pending change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

  When the value of the lucky pending storage value 223p is “8”, when the value of the pending ball number is any of “0 to 7”, and when the pending change value is any of “0 to 3”, If the value of the number of reserved balls is "8" and the pending change value is "0", "OK" is acquired for the balloon content and the reserved change value is " In the case of any one of “1” and “2”, GOOD is acquired as the content of the balloon, and when the pending change value is “3”, the content of the balloon is acquired although it has been performed well.

  Thus, by changing the content of the balloon depending on the difference in the number of lucky reserved balls, the player can enjoy the game by aiming at the number of reserved balls to be won. If the lottery result of the lottery result within the range of 5 to 8 holdings is determined as a winning or losing judgment result of the number of the holding balls started and won in this way, the display mode of the lucky holding can be updated without getting tired. The game can be continued.

  The time-saving speech balloon selection table 222k6 indicates that the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode, and the gaming state is the time-saving state (the value of the counter during time-saving is not 0). This is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon.

  FIG. 236 (b) schematically shows a time-saving balloon selection table 222k7. In the time-saving balloon selection table 222k7, the content of the balloon is obtained for the value (range) of the number of retained balls (Z2392 in FIG. 265).

  Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is any of “0 to 5”, the balloon content is entered up to 6 (see FIG. 212 (b)), and the number of reserved balls is “6 to 7”. In either case, OK is obtained for the balloon content.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the optimum number of reserved balls during working hours, and the player can grasp the transition state of the number of reserved balls based on the notification mode. If the situation of the optimal number of reserved balls can be maintained, fluctuations will be interrupted and it will be in a standby state, and the situation of inefficient time will be avoided. It can be used as a criterion for efficiently playing a game.

  The in-reach effect lottery table 222m is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the on-hold display effect in reach displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 215 (a)).

  FIG. 237 (a) schematically shows the contents of the during-reach effect lottery table 222m. In the during-reach effect lottery table 222m, whether or not to execute the during-reach hold effect is determined based on the value (range) of the number of retained balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. (Refer to Z2324 in FIG. 262) Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of “0 to 3”, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 99”, the reach is in progress. The display of the hold effect is not performed, and in the case of “100 to 199”, the display of the hold effect during the reach is possible. When the value of the number of retained balls is any of “4 to 5”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 140”, the display of the retained effect during reach is not performed, and “141 to 199” is not performed. In this case, it is possible to display the pending effect during the reach. If the value of the number of retained balls is any of “6 to 8”, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 199”, the display of the in-reach retained effect is not performed. As described above, by setting a high ratio of displaying the holding effect during reach when the number of holding balls is small, an effect that prompts the player to accumulate the holding when the number of holdings is small is executed.

  The reach start time calculation table 222n indicates a reach pattern in a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) of a reach display mode to be executed (a display mode in which symbols in left and right symbol columns are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the same third symbol). It is a data table for discriminating the start time (start period) which starts the holding effect during reach in the time (period) used as a display mode. In the reach start time calculation table 222n, a hold effect start timer is selected based on the execution availability of the hold effect (see FIG. 215 (a)) acquired by the reach effect lottery table 222m and the variation type.

  FIG. 237 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reach start time calculation table 222n. The reach start time calculation table 222n sets a hold effect start timer based on the variation type when it is determined that the hold effect can be executed during the reach obtained by the reach effect lottery table 222m (FIG. 262). Z2326).

  Specifically, when the variation type is the normal reach jackpot A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, and when the change type is the super reach jackpot A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, When the variation type is the super reach jackpot B, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms. When the change type is the super reach jackpot C, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 ms, and the change type is super. In the case of the reach jackpot D, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 ms. When the variation type is the super reach jackpot E, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 20000 ms and the variation type is out of the normal reach A. In the case, the hold production start timer is 10,000m There is determined, if the change type is normal reach out B are pending effect start timer is determined 10000ms, when the variation type is normal reach out C is pending effect start timer 10000ms is determined.

  The lucky hold lottery table 222p acquires the execution availability of the lucky hold effect (see FIG. 216 (a)) based on the number of held balls and the effect counter 223h. FIG. 237 (c) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold lottery table 222p. In the lucky hold lottery table 222p, whether or not the lucky hold effect can be executed is acquired for the value of the number of held balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h (see Z2304 in FIG. 261).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is any of “0 to 2”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 99”, the lucky pending effect is executed. Is not performed, and when it is any of “100 to 199”, the lucky hold effect can be executed. When the value of the number of retained balls is any of “3 to 4”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 189”, the lucky pending effect is not performed, and “ 190 to 199 ", a lucky hold effect can be executed. When the value of the number of retained balls is any of “5 to 8”, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 199”, the execution of the lucky pending effect is not performed. In this way, by setting the ratio of performing the lucky hold effect high when the number of held balls is small, an effect that prompts the player to accumulate the hold when the number of held balls is small is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. Winning information storage area 223f, hold notice counter 223g, effect counter 223h, background mode storage area 223i, SW effective time counter 223k, hold effect mode storage area 223m, special effect status storage area 223n, lucky hold storage value 223p, short term win At least a timer 223q, a hold effect start timer 223r, a sensor valid time counter 223s, a touch counter 223t, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). A counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waits) of the special design fluctuating effect up to four times for each special symbol type. The number of pending balls when a winning information command is received or when a fluctuating pattern command is received Update according to the increase / decrease timing.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. A counter that counts up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of waits) of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main controller 110 for each type of special symbol, when a winning information command is received, It is updated in accordance with the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and controls the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get value. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and outputs the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, the main control device 110 detects the start winning and adds the number of balls to be retained in the variable display, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and subtracts the number of reserved balls. In this case, a ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b corresponding to the command (see Z2207 in FIG. 259). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

  The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 reserved The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is The value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2221 in FIG. 260), and the third symbol is set. It is turned off when the variable display is set on the display device 81 (see Z2502 in FIG. 269). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (Z2102) of the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2204 in FIG. 2590), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. Off (see Z2506 in FIG. 269). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a winning start for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special random number counter C1 acquired in accordance with the start winning, From the values of the special hit type counter C2 and the change type counter CS1, various types of information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, change pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is drawn. The main control device 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and receives the prize information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information has four areas (the first area to the first area to 640) corresponding to the type of the entrance (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) which detected the entrance. Of the vacant areas in the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  In the first control example, the main control device 110 is based on various information (whether or not, a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, a variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to a winning start is drawn. Although a configuration for setting the winning information command and notifying the audio lamp control device 113 is used, other configurations may be used.

  For example, when a start winning is generated, the various information predicted corresponding to the starting winning includes various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. And a setting means for setting a prize information command. When the prize information command is received, various information (prize information) already stored in the prize information storage area 223f and the received prize information command are included. It is also possible to provide a determining means for determining whether or not various information (winning information) matches. Thus, it is possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

  Further, in the first control example, a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set when a new start winning is generated and is notified to the audio lamp control device 113. The notification timing is not limited to the above-described timing (the timing at which the prize information command is set). For example, a storage unit for temporarily storing the prize information command is provided. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game condition is variable (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, when the big hit game starts or ends, or the like), or the special symbol starts to change (or At the time of (stop), a configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (a so-called look-ahead effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

  In the present control example, based on the respective winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, as a pre-reading effect, setting of an effect mode such as changing a display color of a reserved symbol is performed. As described above, by executing various effects (pre-reading effects) based on the respective winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can be given to each of the reserved balls before the start of the variable display. It can give you a big win. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

  When the change of the reserved color of the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, the reserved notice counter 223g changes the reserved number (the display position of the reserved symbol whose reserved color has been changed due to the digestion of the reserved ball). This is a counter for determining the position of the reserved symbol whose display color has been changed. The hold notice counter 223g determines that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 in the winning command receiving process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) executed when the special symbol winning command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In some cases (Z2403: YES), when the pending change value acquired from the variation type of the received special symbol winning command is other than 0 (Z2405: No), there is a change in the pending symbol (see FIG. 211 (a)). ) Is set to the reserved ball value (see Z2406 in FIG. 266). For example, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), when the value of the number of reserved balls at the time of the start winning is four, the reserved notice counter 223g is set to four. The set suspension notice counter 223g is decremented by one each time the special symbol changes, and the subtracted value is 0 in the change pattern receiving process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) executed at the start of the change. In this case (Z2225: YES), the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode by setting the hold change value to 0 and clearing the hold effect mode storage area (Z2226).

  The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting various effects. Each time the main processing is executed, one is added in the range of 0 to 198 and repeatedly updated. More specifically, the selection tables for various effects selected using the effect counter 223h include a hold change selection table 222b, a hold character selection table 222i (hold character), a hold character change table 222j (hold character), and during reach. There are an effect lottery table 222m (executability of holding effect during reach) and a lucky holding lottery table 222p (execution of lucky effect), and various effects are selected according to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h.

  In addition, when performing these selections, the update range is set to a prime number (199) in order to avoid synchronization of the update cycle of the effect counter 223h with other counters and timer values. We do not bias the selection results.

  The background mode storage area 223i is a storage area that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and stores numerical values necessary for determining the background mode. Regarding the switching of the background display mode, in the frame button input monitoring / production process (Z2107), it is determined whether or not a standby state in which a demonstration screen is displayed (Z2801), and it is determined that the standby state is established (Z2801: Yes). , It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802: Yes), the content of the background mode storage area 223i is set by adding 1 (Z2804). Then, the display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804), and when the display switching command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. As the background image, different background images that can be recognized by the player are prepared, for example, the background A is the sea, the background B is the mountain, the background C is the river, and the background D is the city.

  The SW valid time counter 223k is a counter for counting the valid time (valid period) in which the operation can be performed in an effect that occurs when the special button is pressed while the special symbol is changing. In the SW effective time counter 223k, when the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No) in the frame button input monitoring / producing process (Z2107), a fluctuation pattern accompanying the press of the frame button 22 is displayed. When it is set (Z2803: Yes), the SW effective time is set (Z2804) based on the set fluctuation pattern. If the set SW effective time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2802), and if the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), the SW If the value of the valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2806: Yes), and if a notice effect is being performed (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is reset (set to 0), and a display notice display command is displayed. Is set (Z2811), and a predetermined effect is executed.

  The hold effect mode storage area 223m stores information for discriminating a plurality of hold advance notice modes prepared according to a change in hold when executing a notice effect on a hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is remembered.

  In the holding effect mode storage area 223m, the holding notice counter 223g is set to 0 in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) executed when the special symbol winning command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In this case (Z2403: Yes), the holding effect mode is set (Z2404) based on the value (range) of the holding change value obtained for the variation type of the received special symbol winning command. As described above, if the hold change value is “0”, the normal effect mode is set as the hold effect mode, if the hold change value is “1-2”, the advance notice A mode is set, and if the hold change value is “3”, For example, the notice B mode is set.

  The content of the hold effect mode storage area 223m is the value of the hold notice counter 223g, which is decremented by 1 each time the change of the special symbol starts in the change pattern receiving process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol. Becomes 0 (Z2225: YES), the hold effect change mode is changed to the normal mode by setting the hold change value to 0 and clearing the hold effect mode storage area 223m (Z2226).

  The special effect status storage area 223n stores information for determining the contents of the special effect executed when the suspended effect mode is the normal mode. As described above, the special effects include a short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212 (a)), a hold effect during reach (see FIG. 215 (a)), and a lucky hold effect (see FIG. 216 (a)). Yes, a special effect is executed according to a change in the special effect status storage area 223n. The special effect status is a status (state data) for indicating (determining) the type of the held effect being executed.

  In the short-term prize production, in the short-term prize determination process (Z2407) executed when a prize command is received, when the game state is the normal state (Z2421: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0. Yes (Z2422: Yes), the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is 4 (Z2423: Yes), and the short-time prize timer counts the time (5 seconds) generated when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is 0 Is not 0 (Z2424: Yes), 1 is set to the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2425), and the short-term winning effect starts to be executed. On the other hand, during the short-term prize production, in the short-term prize management process (Z2111), when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes) and the short-term prize timer is 0 (Z2605: Yes), Then, the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2606), and the short-term winning effect ends.

  In the reach pending effect, in the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern receiving process (Z2202) executed at the start of the special symbol variation, the variation type of the special symbol is reach variation. If (Z2321: Yes), the hold effect mode is in the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and if the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the reach effect effect lottery table 222m is used. When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2325: Yes), the holding effect start timer 223r is set based on the variation type (Z2326), and the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 2 (Z2327). After a lapse of time, the holding effect start timer is set in the holding effect management process during reach (Z2112). If 23r becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), in announcement display setting command (Z2706) Succoth performing pending effect in reach, hold demonstration in reach begins execution. While the reach-in-reach effect is being executed, the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2708) at the special symbol change end timing (Z2707: Yes), and the reach-in-reach effect is ended.

  If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227), the lucky hold effect is in the normal mode (Z2302: Yes), Is 0 (Z2303: Yes), and when the result of the execution effect drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p is permitted (Z2305: Yes), 3 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n. (Z2307), and the lucky hold effect starts to be executed. During the execution of the lucky hold effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) at the start of the next fluctuation after the effect is started (Z2308: Yes), The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky hold effect ends.

  The lucky hold storage value 223p is determined when the winning / non-winning result of the winning information command output at the time of starting winning is determined to be a big hit (pre-reading is determined). Is a storage area where the value of the number of reserved balls is stored. The lucky hold storage value 223p is determined in the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) executed in the prize command receiving process (Z2209) executed at the time of the start winning when the lottery result of the prize is a big hit (Z2442: Yes) If the value of the number of reserved balls is 5 or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the number of reserved balls is set to the lucky reserved stored value 223p (Z2444). In addition, as described above, when the hold effect mode is set to the lucky hold effect, a display hold lid command is set based on the lucky hold storage value 223p (see Z2306 in FIG. 261), and the lucky hold effect is displayed. (See FIG. 216 (a)).

  The short-time winning timer 223q is a timer for counting the elapsed time from when the value of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes 0 or more to 1 or more, when the value becomes 4 or more. When the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the short-time winning timer 223q sets a timer value of 5 seconds. The winning timer 223q is decremented by one (Z2602). As described above, when the suspended effect mode is the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212 (a)), the short-time winning effect is displayed until the short-time winning timer 223q becomes 0. As described above, by performing the short-term prize production with the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term prize timer 223q, the shorter (earlier) the period until four prizes are, the longer the execution period of the short-term prize production becomes, and the player Can recognize the speed of the period required to win four prizes.

  Note that the short-term prize production may be configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after four prizes are won. This has the effect that the player can easily recognize that four prizes have been won within 5 seconds.

  The hold effect start timer 223r is a timer for counting the timing at which the reach effect (see FIG. 215 (a)), which is an effect relating to the hold symbol, is executed during the reach change of the special symbol.

  The hold effect start timer 223r determines that the special symbol change type is reach change in the reach-in-reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the change pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the special symbol change. In some cases (Z2321: Yes), the pending effect mode is the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the in-reach effect drawing lottery table 222m. When it is determined that the acquired execution effect is possible (Z2325: Yes), the timer value is set by the reach start time calculation table 222n (Z2326).

  When the timer value is set to the hold effect start timer 223r, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 in the reach effect control process (Z2112) until execution of the hold effect in reach is started ( If the pending effect start timer 223r is not 0 (Z2701: Yes), 1 is subtracted from it (Z2702: No). Further, as described above, when the value of the timer after the subtraction becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), no other special effects are performed, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes). ) Is set (Z2706) for the advance notice display command for performing the holding effect during the reach, the execution of the holding effect during the reach starts.

  The sensor valid time counter 223 s is a counter that counts the time when the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. When the sensor valid time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No) in the sensor input processing (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), the sensor valid time counter 223s is notified. When the effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor valid time set in the notice effect is set in the sensor valid time counter 223s (Z2823). If the set sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0, it is decremented (Z2824), during which the detection of the touch sensor is valid. When the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: Yes), and the value obtained by adding 1 (Z2826) to the touch counter 223t reaches the upper limit value. (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2809).

  The touch counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times that the detection of the touch sensor 290 is on during the period in which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. When the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / producing process (Z2107), the touch counter 223t activates the touch sensor 290. When it is on (Z2825: Yes), 1 is added (Z2826), and when the added value is the upper limit (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2829).

  The other memory area 223z is an area in which various data, flags, counters, and the like in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are set or stored.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 259) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Directing). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, an initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) executed after the boot process by the boot program (see Z3001 in FIG. 275) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 242) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and generates one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236 b and a second frame buffer 236 c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 274).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 239). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “○” at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “x” at the same position as the symbol “○” are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", an image indicating it is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if it is "special symbol loss", an image indicating it is stopped for the variable effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts a game while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b, and images indicating “O” and “X” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance 64 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 238, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 209) numbered “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the fluctuating effect on the first symbol display device 37 after the entry to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry port 640r or the second entry port 640 has occurred. Instead, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Accordingly, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but displays the character in the resident video RAM 235. By reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving an error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in each of the sub-areas is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, for example, a variable effect, a round effect A display data table corresponding to an ending effect and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, a stop symbol indicating the departure is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol, and the ball enters the second entrance. When the ball entrance 640 easily enters, the prize balls increase. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain the expectation that a special symbol jackpot can be obtained without the player. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that a game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for designating an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. When the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is displayed with a smaller size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table.

  If the MPU 231 specifies to display any of the backgrounds (the sea, the beach, the background of the preparation period, and the background dedicated to the time effect) corresponding to the background mode, the MPU 231 determines whether The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time elapses.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 240) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is used to add An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 242) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effects defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  Note that if all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 241 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 241 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 241, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 243) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 243, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 239 on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , In the main processing (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 (see Z3005 in FIG. 274). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see Z4705 in FIG. 285 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 276 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 276 (b), Z3309). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see Z4601 in FIG. 285 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 285 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 242) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 242) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 242) that describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (Z3303 in FIG. 283) ), A pointer update process (see Z4305 in FIG. 284 (b)) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 242), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 242, the back image used for the image of one frame and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 276 (b Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see Z4307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 286). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see Z4810 in FIG. 286). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 287).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see Z4902 in FIG. 287).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 243 to 256. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 243 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the counter value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. In the corresponding buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (299 in this embodiment, respectively). , 99, 239) are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (Z104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) of the first entrance 64 (Z105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 244 to 256.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (Z107). The details of the ordinary symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (Z108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (Z109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 290, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the special symbol variation process (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (Z104). The special symbol change process (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (Z201). Here, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203n is on. If it is on, it is determined that a big hit is being made. During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (Z201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display is retained in the special symbol) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are acquired (Z203). . After acquiring the values of the respective counters, a fluctuation execution determination process is executed (Z204). The details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 245. In the variation execution determination process (Z204), a process of determining a special symbol in the next order of variation is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination processing (Z204) is the special figure 1 (first special symbol) (Z205), and the variation execution in the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is performed. If so, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (Z206), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set ( Z207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (Z1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z208). In the process of Z208, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z209). The special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209), a process such as selection of a change pattern (change period) necessary for starting the change of the first special symbol is executed.

  In the process of Z205, when it is determined that the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (Z205: No), the special figure 2 (the second special (Z210). It should be noted that this process is not performed unless the variation of the special figure 2 is executed (Z210: No), that is, the reserved ball is not stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, if the variation is executed in the special figure 2 (Z210: Yes), the same processing as the above-described processing for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is performed for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2.

  Specifically, the value of the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (Z211), and the reserved ball indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation. A number command is set (Z212). According to the pending ball number command set here, the command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is executed by the MPU 201 in an external output process (Z1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 258). Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (Z213). In the process of Z213, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 2 variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z214). The special symbol 2 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (Z215: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z216), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z215, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (Z215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) described later with reference to FIG. 246 or a special symbol 2 change start process (Z214) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A special symbol lottery is held. More specifically, it is determined whether or not a special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the special random number counter C1. If the big hit is the first special symbol, it is determined according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C are determined. It is determined whether the hit is a jackpot B1, a jackpot B2, or a jackpot C.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. When the big hit C occurs, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the processing of Z217 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (Z218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (Z218: Yes), a jackpot start is set (Z219), the probability change flag 203m is turned off, and the value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to 0 (Z220). After that, the big hit flag 203n is set to ON (Z221), a stop command is set (Z224), and the process ends. That is, during the jackpot game, a low-probability gaming state is set, the electric support gaming state (time-saving gaming state) is also released, and a non-electric supporting gaming state is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (Z218: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 1 or more (Z222), and the value of the time reduction counter 203j is determined. Is greater than or equal to 1 (Z222: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203j is decremented by 1 (Z223), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203j during time saving is 0 (Z222: No), the processing of Z223 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, the variable execution determination processing (Z204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination processing (Z204). This variation execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and includes the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is determined based on the values of the various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether to execute.

  In the variation execution determination process, first, the variation execution flag 203k is turned off (value is set to “0”) to initialize (Z241), and the data of the variation order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is obtained. (Z242). Next, the data in the fluctuation order storage area 203p is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether or not the data of the execution area is the special figure 1 (Z244). If the data of the execution area is the special figure 1 (Z244: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to the variable execution in the special figure 1 (Z245), and this processing ends.

  In the process of Z244, if the data of the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 1 (Z244: No), it is determined whether the data of the execution area is the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z246). (Z246: Yes), the variation execution flag 203k is set to variation execution in Tokujin Figure 2 (Z247), and this process ends. In the process of Z246, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z246: No), the process ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209). This special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is executed in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol departure” is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in step (1).

  In the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209), first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (Z251). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is currently in the probable change period (high probability game state) (Z252). The determination as to whether or not the period is the probable change period is performed by determining whether or not the probable change flag 203m is on. The probability change flag 203m is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the big hit game.

  When it is determined that the probable change is being performed (Z252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, and the processing shifts to Z253. In the process of Z253, based on the value of the special random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221 (a)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained. It is acquired (Z253). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. As described above, 27 random numbers of “0 to 26” are set as the random numbers of the special symbols in the probability change game state (special game state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the values of these are set. If the winning random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the processing shifts to Z255.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z252 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal gaming state (Z252: No), the processing of Z254 is executed. In the process of Z254, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z251 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special random number counter C1 is compared with the random number of 978 stored in the special symbol large random number table 202a one by one. In the normal game state (low-probability game state), three random numbers of “0 to 2” are set as the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number of these hits are set. If the numerical values match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the processing shifts to Z255.

  In the process of Z255, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of Z253 or Z254 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the acquired special random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a) (Z255), and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (Z255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z251. , The display mode at the time of the big hit is set (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1, and the special type big hit (big hit) A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C) determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 39”, it is determined to be the big hit A (16R big hit, 100 time savings), and if it is in the range of “40 to 75”. , Is determined to be a jackpot B1 (16R probable odd symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of “76 to 79”, it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probable odd symbol jackpot) and is in the range of “80 to 99”. If there is, it is determined that it is the jackpot C (see FIG. 222 (b)).

  In the process of Z256, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are set as stop types.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined based on the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z257). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of Z257, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big symbol in the third symbol display device 81 until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is the jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 50”, it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of “51 to 250”, Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

  In the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuating display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuating time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode and the out-of-reach display mode as long as the change time is the same, even in the out-of-reach display mode. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, “outside (for a long time)”, “outside (for a short time)”, “outside normal reach” various types, “outside super reach” various types, and “outside special reach” various types are defined. ing. As the fluctuation patterns of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C, various “normal reach” and various “super reach” are defined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z255 that the special symbol has been removed (Z255: No), the display mode at the time of the removal is set (Z258). In the process of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. , A fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is checked, and the normal reach, super The variation time of the symbol variation such as reach is determined.

  When the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is set (Z260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of Z275 or the process of Z259 is set (Z261). When the processing of Z261 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol change processing (Z104).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the special symbol 2 change start process (Z214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 change start process (Z214). This special symbol 2 change start process (Z214) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is executed in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol departure” is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in step (1).

  In the special symbol 2 change start process (Z214), similar to the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209), the special symbol 2 stored first in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b acquired by the process of Z271. The values of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are obtained (Z271).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is currently in the probable change period (high probability game state) (Z272). When it is determined that the game state is in the probable change period (Z272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 displays the special symbol. Since it is in the probable change state, the flow shifts to the processing of Z273. In the process of Z273, based on the value of the special random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z271 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol big hit is obtained (Z273). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. As described above, 27 random numbers of “0 to 26” are set as the random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the special hit random number counter C <b> 1 matches the random number values of these hits. In this case, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the flow shifts to Z275.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probable change state in the process of Z272 (Z272: No), the process of Z274 is executed. In the process of Z274, based on the value of the special random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z271 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol big hit is obtained (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special random number counter C1 is compared with the random number of 978 stored in the special symbol large random number table 202a one by one. Three random numbers of "0 to 2" are set as the random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the special random number counter C1 matches the random number value of the special symbol, the special symbol is determined. Is determined to be a jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the flow shifts to Z275.

  In the processing of Z275, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of Z273 or Z274 is a special symbol jackpot (Z275). If it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot of the special symbol (Z275: Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271 (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2, and the four types of special symbol big hits (big hits) are compared. A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C) determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 39”, it is determined to be the big hit A (16R big hit, 100 time savings), and if it is in the range of “40 to 87”. , It is determined to be a jackpot B1 (16R probability variable odd symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of "88 to 91", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variable even symbol symbol jackpot), and to the range of "92 to 99". If there is, it is determined that it is the jackpot C (see FIG. 222 (c)).

  In the process of Z276, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are set as stop types.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined based on the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big symbol in the third symbol display device 81 until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is the jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 50”, it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of “51 to 250”, Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

  In the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuating display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuating time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode and the out-of-reach display mode as long as the change time is the same, even in the out-of-reach display mode. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, “outside (for a long time)”, “outside (for a short time)”, “outside normal reach” various types, “outside super reach” various types, and “outside special reach” various types are defined. ing. As the fluctuation patterns of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C, various “normal reach” and various “super reach” are defined.

  In the process of Z275, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (Z275: No), the display mode when the special symbol is out is set (Z278). In the process of Z278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviated symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. , A fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is confirmed, and the normal reach, super The variation time of the symbol variation such as reach is determined.

  When the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is set (Z280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of Z277 or the process of Z279 is set (Z281). When the processing in Z281 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (Z105). This start winning process (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64. This is a process for executing a pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol based on the holding process of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process (Z105: refer to FIG. 248) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (Z301). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (Z301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is changed) is acquired (Z302). ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (Z303).

  Then, whether there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (Z301: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (Z303: No), an over-winning information command is set (Z304), and the process shifts to Z309. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (Z301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (Z303: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (Z305). Then, a reserved ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z306).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (Z1001) of a main process (see FIG. 255) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of Z306, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the above-described timer interrupt processing Z103. Is stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (Z307). In the process of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is set as the first area. Next, the special figure 1 is set at the bottom of the fluctuation order storage area 203p (Z308), and the pre-reading process (Z320) is executed. The prefetch processing (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, as for Z309 to Z316, for each of the processing of Z301 to Z320 described above, the processing corresponding to winning in the first entrance 64 was awarded to the right second entrance 640r or the second entrance 640. The same processing is performed only by changing to the processing for the matter, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that when a game ball wins at the right second entrance 640r or the second entrance 640, even if the value is stored as a reserved ball, the respective values of the special random number counter C1 and the special collision type counter C2 are not changed. The acquired special symbol 2 is stored in the empty reserved area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the special special random number counter C1 and the special special hit counter for the second special symbol based on the entry into the right second entrance 640r or the second entrance 640 are similar to the first special symbol. By acquiring the values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type selection counter CS1, a lottery can be executed using a common random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The winning probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

  After executing the processing of Z308 or the processing of Z316, the prefetch processing (Z320) is executed. The details of the prefetching process (Z320) will be described with reference to FIG. 249 as described above. Based on the values of the various counters obtained for the incoming ball, a process of determining in advance each lottery result executed at the start of the change is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is selected based on the incoming ball, but may be selected at the start of the change. With such a configuration, a storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of the fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the respective counters, a part of the counters (for example, only the change type counter CS1) may be obtained at the start of the change. With this configuration, it is possible to acquire a counter related to the hit / fail judgment at the time of entering the ball, and to obtain a counter irrelevant to the hit / fail judgment at a later time. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the look-ahead process (Z320), which is one of the start winning processes (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (Z320).

  In the pre-reading process (Z320), first, based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1, a determination is made as to whether or not the change has started (Z351). In this hit / fail determination, the same processing as the processing of Z255 in the special symbol 1 change start processing (Z209: see FIG. 246) and the processing of Z275 in the special symbol 2 change start processing (Z214: see FIG. 247) are executed. . In addition, this determination as to whether or not to win is made at the time of starting / stopping determination (determination) (Z255 in the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209: see FIG. 246), and Z275 in the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214: see FIG. 247)). ) Corresponds to the preliminary right / wrong determination (prior determination) executed prior to (i). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the processing of Z351 is a hit (also referred to as a specific determination result) (Z352). When it is determined that the determination result is a hit (Z352: Yes), the variation pattern type is acquired from the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 (determination). (Z353). Next, a winning information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e based on the obtained variation pattern type (Z354), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z352 that the hit / fail judgment result is out of range (Z352: No), the variation pattern is selected from the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and variation type counter CS1. The type is acquired (Z355). Next, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a winning information command is set out of the winning command table 202e (Z356), and the process ends.

  As described above, before the start of the change, the result of the pass / fail determination in advance is output as a winning command to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the holding ball is established. It is possible to recognize the result of the determination of the success or failure and the hit type in advance. Therefore, based on the winning command, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the player of a notification of the result of the determination as to whether or not the ball is to be held in advance. Effects such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of the determination as to whether the ball is in the holding ball or not). Further, since one winning command is output to the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the ordinary symbol variation process (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation processing (Z106). The normal symbol variation process (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a hit with an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (Z401). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening / closing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (Z401: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (Z401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (Z402: No), the long-time release flag 203i is set to OFF (Z403), and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of changing display in the normal symbol is held). Is obtained (Z404). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (Z405). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 0 (Z405: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (Z405: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (Z406).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (Z407). In the process of Z407, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is obtained (Z408).

  Next, a normal symbol variation start process is executed (Z409), and this process ends. The normal symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 251. However, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is correct, and based on the result of the determination, the variable period (variable time or variable time) of the normal symbol is determined. (Dynamic display time) is determined, and if the result of the hit determination is a hit, a process of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (the operation pattern of the per-figure game) corresponding to the hit type is performed. Execute.

  In the process of Z402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z410). The fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand by the processing of Z437 or the processing of Z438 in FIG. 251 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z410, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Z410: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (Z410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z411). In the process of Z411, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of Z427 or the process of Z431 in FIG. 251, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display. The device 83 is set so as to be stopped (lighted up). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of Z435 in FIG. 251, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). When the stop display is set by the process of Z411, when the second symbol display updating process (see Z1007) of the main process (see FIG. 255) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of Z427, the process of Z431, or the process of Z435 in FIG. In the present control example, the symbol “○” is configured to be lit and displayed even in the case of a long-time hit and a normal hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured to perform “◎” for a long time and “○” for a normal time).

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (Z412). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (Z412: Yes), the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (Z413), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing in Z412, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see Z1005) of the main process (see FIG. 255) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of Z430 or the processing of Z434 in FIG. 251 are completed. Since the opening operation data of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the hit type of the ordinary symbol is set in the ordinary symbol change start process (Z408: see FIG. 251) described later, the hit type of the ordinary symbol is set in Z413. Is configured to set the opening / closing control corresponding to. On the other hand, in the process of Z412, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (Z412: No), the process of Z413 is skipped and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 251, the ordinary symbol change start process (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation start processing (Z408). This normal symbol change start process (Z408) is a process for starting the normal symbol change executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 251) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243). This is the process to be executed.

  It is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (Z421). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (Z421: Yes), the processing shifts to Z424. In the process of Z421, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (Z421: No), it is determined whether or not it is in the probability change or the time reduction (Z422). If neither the positive change nor the time saving is being performed (Z422: No), the process proceeds to Z424.

  If it is probable or time saving (Z422: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, the normal hit acquired in the processing of Z407 in FIG. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)), a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (Z423). Specifically, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the ordinary random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 221 (c)).

  In the process of Z424, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 acquired in the process of Z407 in FIG. Based on the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)), a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (Z424). Specifically, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the ordinary random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 221 (c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 6”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 7 to 239”. , It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 221 (c)).

  In the present embodiment, during a special symbol big hit, it is configured such that a lottery of a normal symbol is hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (ie, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. The reason is that a ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a is prevented from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second entrance 640, even if it is possible to prevent a ball from entering the second entrance 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, Many balls enter the entrance 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 becomes maximum (four times).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of Z423 or Z424 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (Z425). It is determined whether the hit type of the ordinary symbol is a long time hit (Z426). The hit type of the ordinary symbol is determined by comparing the value of the ordinary hit type counter acquired when passing through the through gate 67 (not shown) with a preset determination value. In the present control example, the value of the ordinary hit type counter is repeatedly updated within the range of 0 to 198 at the timing synchronized with the other special hit type counter C2. If it is any of "0 to 3", it is determined to be a long hit, and if it is any of "4 to 198", it is determined to be a normal hit.

  When it is determined that the type of the normal symbol hit is a long hit (Z426: Yes), a display mode for a long hit is set (Z427). In the process of Z427, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol “O” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time start command is set (Z428), and the long-time release flag 203i is turned on (Z429). Then, the processing shifts to the processing of Z430.

  In the process of Z426, when it is determined that the type of the normal symbol hit is the normal hit (Z426: No), the display mode at the time of the normal hit is set (Z431). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change or the time reduction is being performed (Z432). Then, if it is during the probability change or during the working hours reduction (Z432: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (Z433). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (Z433: Yes), the process proceeds to Z434. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of Z433, if the special symbol is not during the jackpot (Z433: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to two seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to two. The process is set (Z430), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the process of Z430, 2 is set to the number-of-opening times counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the opening time counter 203h.

  In the process of Z432, when neither the probability change nor the time saving is in progress (Z432: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z434. In the processing of Z432, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. At 0.2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (Z434), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the process of Z434, 1 is set to the number-of-opening times counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set to the opening time counter 203h.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z425 that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (Z425: No), the display mode at the time of the out-of-design is set (Z435). In the process of Z435, it is set so that the symbol “x” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the processing shifts to Z436.

  In the process of Z436, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (Z436). If the probability is changing (Z436: Yes), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z437). Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, if the probability change is not in progress in the process of Z436 (Z436: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and this process ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening per long time are the same operation as in the case where a normal symbol hits in a state of constant change and time saving, but not limited thereto. It may be configured to set.

  Next, a through gate passage process (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (Z107). This through gate passage processing (Z107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 243), and it is determined whether or not a ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (Z502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (Z503).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (Z503). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503: Yes), the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (Z504). Then, the value of the ordinary winning random number counter C4 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. This is stored in the area (Z505), and this processing ends. In the process of Z505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (Z801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 254, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (Z902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 208) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (Z904). If it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the process proceeds to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on (Z904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information has been stored in the RAM 203 (Z905). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to Z913 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (Z907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to Z913 in such a case. As will be described later in the processing of Z1014 in FIG. 255, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Z913). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process (Z914, Z915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203 is also performed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of Z911.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (Z905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( Z907: Yes), and transmits a status command based on the long-time release flag 203i (Z908). Next, while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (Z909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (Z910), and the process proceeds to Z911. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of Z911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of the Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (Z1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of Z101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243) is determined. Send a prize ball command. Further, the command for transmitting the number of reserved balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 244) and the start winning process (see FIG. 248) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process and the pre-reading process (see FIG. 249) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). The details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric auditors product opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control of the electric auditors accessory 640a is set by the process of Z412 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 250), the opening / closing control of the electric auditors accessory 640a is started.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 246) is changed by the process of Z257 or Z259, or the special symbol 2 change start process (see FIG. 247) is changed by the process of Z277 or the process of Z279. When the pattern is set, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation display according to the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process (Z1006), the process of Z257 or Z259 of the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 246), or the process of Z277 of the special symbol 2 change start process (see FIG. 247) or When the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the processing of Z279 ends, the fluctuation display executed on the first symbol display device 37 ends, and Z256 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 246) starts. Or the processing of Z258, or the special symbol 2 change start process (see FIG. 247), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of Z276 or Z278. Stop display (lit display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process (Z1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of Z437 or the process of Z438 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 251), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Also, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of Z410 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 250), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of Z427 or the process of Z431 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 251). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the processing shifts to Z1001, and the above-described processing after Z1001 is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (Z1009: No), until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (Z1010, Z1011).

  First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of Z1002 (Z1011).

  Here, the execution time of each processing of Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, and thus the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1) are repeated. , The initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of Z1008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 253 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after Z1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). And transmits it (Z1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (Z1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of Z1008 is performed when a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in Z1001 to Z1007 ends, or when one cycle of processing of Z1010 and Z1011 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from Z1001. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of Z1001 as in the case where the processing is initialized in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (Z901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from Z1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (Z1004). The jackpot control process (Z1004) is executed in the main process (FIG. 255). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects corresponding to the jackpot and a special winning opening (large jackpot) are performed. This is a process for releasing or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 256), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (Z1101). The process of Z219 of the special symbol change process (FIG. 244) is executed to set the start of the special symbol jackpot, and when the special symbol jackpot starts (Z1101: Yes), the opening command is set ( Z1115), this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started (Z1101: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (Z1102). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of Z1102, if the special symbol is not in the big hit (Z1102: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z1102, if the special symbol is in a big hit (Z1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103). If it is a start timing of a new round (Z1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is released (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (Z1105). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The set round number command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z1103, if it is not the timing of starting a new number of rounds (Z1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of Z1106, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (Z1107), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (Z1106: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (Z1108). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the processing of Z1108, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108: Yes), the ending command is set (Z1109), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, if it is not the ending start timing (Z1108: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the jackpot end (Z1110). The jackpot end timing is a timing at which a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that the timing has not reached the jackpot end (Z1110: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z1110 that it is the timing to end the jackpot (Z1110: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is the jackpot A in the processing of Z1111 (Z1111). If the current jackpot type is the jackpot A (Z1111: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203j is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the big hit flag 203n is set to off (Z1114), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is not the jackpot A (Z1111: No), the probability change flag 203m is set on (Z1113), and then the jackpot flag 203n is set off (Z1114). The process ends.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 257, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing of the Z2118 (see FIG. 258). ) Is determined (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 258, upon receiving a power-off command from main controller 110 (see Z2115 in FIG. 258), sound lamp control device 113 executes power-off processing in Z2118. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of Z2118 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is OFF (Z2002: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply of the Z2118 is turned off. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of Z2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: Yes), the process proceeds to Z2004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: No), the process proceeds to Z2008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z2003: Yes), and the flow shifts to Z2004. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after a momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of Z2118 is completed, or is reset only to MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the processing is started by the application, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: No), and the process proceeds to Z2208.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (Z2002: Yes), the start-up processing of this time is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing of Z1318, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process shifts to Z2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of Z2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (Z2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (Z2006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (Z2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of Z2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Z2118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 258). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Z2118 is executed. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process of the Z2118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (Z2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (Z2010). The permission is set (Z2011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of Z2008 with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up processing of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, and the processing of Z2008 is performed via the processing from Z2004 to Z2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: No), Z2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to Z2010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (Z2010), and interrupt permission is set. Then (Z2011), the process proceeds to the main process. Thereafter, it is determined whether a status command has been received from main controller 110 (Z2012). This status command indicates whether or not a normal symbol is being hit for a long time based on the long-time release flag 203i in the Z908 process of the startup process (see FIG. 254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Command. If it is determined in the processing of Z2012 that the status command has been received (Z2012: Yes), the long-time open flag 203i is set based on the received status command, and this processing ends (Z2013). . Here, if the received status command indicates that the vehicle is hitting for a long time, the long-time release flag 203i is turned on. Set to off.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the command that can determine whether or not the symbol has been hit for a long time is output from the main control device 110, so that the sound lamp control device 113 can also determine the state. Can be.

  The reason why the clearing process of Z2009 is skipped is that when the process from Z2004 to the process of Z2008 is performed via the process of Z2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of Z2004. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the processing of this time Z2101 was executed (Z2101). If not (Z2101: No), the processing shifts to the processing of Z2113 without performing the processing of Z2102 to Z2112. In the process of Z2101, whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly determined by Z2102 to Z2112, which is a process related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , Z2113, the variable display setting process of Z2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of Z2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the processing of Z2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z2103 to Z2114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2102). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of Z2108 described later (Z2103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (Z2104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to Z2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of Z2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a display control command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (Z2107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (Z2108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in Z2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (Z2110), and the flow shifts to the processing in Z2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of Z2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing in Z2110 ends, short-term winning management processing is executed (Z2111). The short-term prize management process (Z2111) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 270. ) Is performed.

  After executing the short-term prize management process (Z2111), the process of the in-reach pending effect management process (Z2112) is executed. The details of the during-reach pending effect management process (Z2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 271, but during the period in which the variation mode of the third symbol (special symbol) is the reach display mode, a predetermined number of held balls is set. A process of setting a specific effect (notification effect) for notifying the player that a game is to be accumulated so as to accumulate the game is executed.

  When the processing of Z2112 ends, a command determination processing is executed (Z2113). This command determination processing (Z2113) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After executing the command determination processing (Z2113), the variable display setting processing is executed (Z2114). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of Z2115 (Z2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power-off process is executed (Z2118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (Z2119), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of Z2115 (Z2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (Z2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z2116: No), the process returns to Z2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z2116: Yes), the processing is performed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and analyzed. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). If a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201: Yes), a variation pattern reception process is executed (Z2202), and this process ends. The details of the variation pattern reception processing (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (Z2203). When the stop type command is received (Z2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and the process is terminated. .

  In the processing of Z2203, if the stop type command has not been received (Z2203: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received (Z2206). When the reserved ball number command is received (Z2206: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (Z2207). After that, the process ends. Here, the reserved ball number corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the reserved ball number corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Is stored.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2206, when the command of the number of reserved balls is not received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command of the special symbol is received (Z2208). If a special symbol winning command is received (Z2208: Yes), a winning command receiving process is started (Z2209), and this process is ended. The details of the winning command receiving process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 266. Is performed, and a setting process for executing each holding effect determined to be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2208, when a special symbol winning command is not received (Z2208: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing ends.

  Here, the variation pattern reception processing (Z2202), which is one of the command determination processing (Z2113: FIG. 259), will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern reception processing. In the variation pattern receiving process (Z2113), a variation pattern (production mode) of a detailed special symbol, a preview display mode, a display mode of a hold announcement, and the like are set based on the received variation pattern command.

  In the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 260), first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and a variation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). Thereafter, a display notice display command is set in the fluctuation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the hold notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by one (Z2224). Here, the display announcement display command is a command for instructing to display various announcement effects determined based on the fluctuation pattern (for example, a comment announcement or a mini-character announcement suggesting a result of the determination of success or failure).

  When the processing in Z2224 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the suspension notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225). If it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225), the hold change value is set to 0 and the hold effect mode storage area 223m is cleared (Z2226). If the value of the suspension notice counter 223g is 1 or more (Z2225: No), the process of Z2226 is skipped, and the process shifts to the process of Z2227. Next, a lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed. With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), even when an effect of changing the color of the reserved ball based on the result of the pre-reading determination is performed, the value of the reserved advance counter 223g is used to determine the reserved ball. The display position is changed according to the digestion, and after the change of the special symbol corresponding to the holding ball with the changed holding ball color is started, the change is stopped and the display becomes non-display, the holding change value Can also be set to 0, which is the initial value. Therefore, even when the color of the ball is changed, the order in which the variable display of the ball is started can be correctly notified to the player.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 261, the lucky display determination processing (Z2227) executed in the fluctuation pattern reception processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the lucky display determination processing (Z2227). In the lucky display determination process (Z2227), a process of determining the number of reserved balls at the time of winning in the past jackpot and setting display of a mark symbol (retained effect) in a display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls is performed. Execute.

  In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 261), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2301). That is, it is determined whether or not the game is in a normal state in which a special holding effect is not executed. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), it is determined whether the mode is the normal mode (Z2302). If it is not in the normal mode (Z2302: No), this processing ends. In the process of Z2302, when it is determined that the normal mode is being performed (Z2302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2303). When it is determined that the lucky hold storage value 223p is 0 (Z2303: Yes), the present process is terminated. Here, when the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is 0, it indicates that the number of hold balls at the time of winning a special symbol determined as a big hit is not stored.

  When it is determined that the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is 1 or more (Z2303), whether or not the effect is possible is determined based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p provided in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 237 (c)). It is acquired (Z2304). Here, in the lucky hold lottery table 222p, a process of acquiring the value of the effect counter 223h to determine whether or not to execute the lucky hold effect based on the determination value of the effect counter 223h set corresponding to the current number of held balls. Is executed.

  Based on the processing in Z2304, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect (executable effect) is executable (Z2305). When it is not possible (Z2305: No), this processing is ended as it is. If it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: Yes), a display lid cover command is set from the lucky hold command table 222g (FIG. 231) based on the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p (Z2306). ). Next, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (Z2307), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2301 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2301: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308). . That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky hold effect has been executed in the previous change. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is cleared (0 is set as an initial value) (Z2309), and this processing is performed. To end. In the processing of Z2309, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2308: No), the processing is terminated as it is. As described above, the lucky hold effect is set at the start of the change, and is ended when the special effect status is set to the initial value at the start of the next change. In the present control example, the lucky hold effect is an effect that is executed during a period in which the special symbol is changed once, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is configured to be executed in a period in which a plurality of changes are executed. You may. The number of changes of the special symbol to be executed at the start of the lucky hold effect may be determined, and the change may be performed when the change of the number of times is executed. May be set to end when the end lottery is won, or to end the production when all the reserved balls are exhausted or when the demonstration display is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. After the lucky display determination processing (Z2227) is executed, the during-reach holding effect setting processing (Z2228) is executed. In the reach-reach effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 261), when a change of the special symbol to be the reach display mode is performed, the game is held during the reach display mode in which a game is held so as to accumulate the reserved balls during the reach display mode. A process for executing an effect (one of special pending effects) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 262, a description will be given of the at-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the during-reach pending effect setting process (Z2228).

  In the during-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 262), it is first determined whether or not the reach is changing (Z2321). If it is determined that the reach is not fluctuating (Z2321: No), this processing ends. If the reach is being changed (Z2321: Yes), it is determined whether the change is in the normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the mode is not the normal mode (Z2322: No), the present process ends. If the change is in the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2323). That is, it is determined whether or not the game is in a normal state in which a special holding effect is not executed. When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 or more (Z2323: No), this processing ends. Here, when the special effect status is 1 or more, it is in a state where another special holding effect is being executed, and therefore, the determination of Z2323 is executed to further prevent the holding effects from overlapping. . When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the process is executed by the during-reach effect effect lottery table 222m (see FIG. 237 (a)) based on the number of reserved balls and the value of the effect counter 223h. Acquisition of the effect is acquired (Z2324). Here, in the during-reach effect drawing lottery table 222m, a determination value of the effect counter 223h is set for the current number of retained balls, and it is determined based on the determination value whether or not the during-reach reservation effect can be executed.

  By the process of Z2324, it is determined whether or not the during-reach holding effect (execution effect) can be executed (Z2325). If it is determined that the execution effect is not executable (Z2325: No), this processing ends. When it is determined that the execution effect is executable (Z2325: Yes), the hold effect is obtained from the reach start time calculation table 222n (FIG. 237 (b)) based on the change pattern type (change type) of the special symbol. The value of the start timer 223r is set (Z2326), the data indicating the special effect status 2 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2327), and the process ends.

  As described above, according to the during-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228), the variation pattern type (dynamic display mode type) serving as the reach display mode is determined, and no other special holding effect is executed. If so, a lottery for executing a hold effect during reach is executed, and a timing for starting execution of the hold effect during reach by winning the lottery is set. When the game is started, the holding effect during reach is set to be executed more frequently as the number of currently held balls is smaller, so that it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the firing of the game ball during the reach, and the game store side Profit can be increased. In addition, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  Next, returning to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. After the holding effect setting process during reach (Z2228), the holding cover setting process (Z2229) is executed. In this reserved lid setting processing (Z2229), processing necessary for displaying the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub display area Ds is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 263, the holding lid setting process (Z2229) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the hold lid setting process (Z2229).

  In the hold lid setting process (Z2229: refer to FIG. 263), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). That is, it is determined whether a short-term winning effect (short-term winning effect), which is one of special holding effects, is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2341: Yes), the short-time prize holding in the holding cover range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228 (a)) provided in the ROM 222. The reserved cover range value is acquired based on the cover range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229 (a)) (Z2342). A display hold lid command is set based on the value of the hold lid range value acquired in the process of Z2342 (Z2355), and this process ends. As described above, when the value of the special effect status is 1 and the execution of the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212 (a)) is set, the display range of the variable cover pattern P corresponding to the current reserved ball is set. The value (display mode) is selected and set from the short-time prize hold lid cover range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229 (a)), so that the display mode of the variable cover symbol P different from the normal mode (normal mode is held) It is possible to set a display mode in which a rule to be displayed at an interval between a symbol and one reserved symbol is displayed according to a rule to be displayed with two reserved symbols apart.

  Accordingly, if the period required to store one to four reserved balls is within a predetermined period, the variable cover symbol P is displayed according to a different rule from the normal time, so the variable cover symbol P is displayed. From the display mode of P, it can be recognized that the period required for storing the reserved ball is a short period. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to play the game so as to store the reserved ball earlier, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Also, the interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2341, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2341: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343). That is, it is determined whether the execution of the holding effect during the reach is set. When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is determined to be 2 (Z2343: Yes), the reach effect pending cover range selection table 222d5 (see FIG. 228) in the reserved cover range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228). The reserved cover range value is obtained based on FIG. 229 (b) (Z2344). Based on the reserved cover range value acquired in the process of Z2344, a display reserved cover command is set (Z2355), and this process ends. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display hold lid command indicating the hold lid range value acquired in the reach effect hold lid range selection table 222d5, it indicates that it is time to execute the reach hold effect. Upon receiving the notice display command for performing the middle hold notice effect, the variable cover symbol P is variably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the display hold cover command.

  As described above, when the execution of the holding effect during the reach is determined, the mode of changing the display of the variable cover symbol P is set, and the display mode set according to the execution timing of the holding effect during the reach , The variable cover symbol P is variably displayed, so that it is possible to determine by the variable cover symbol P that a special hold effect different from the normal holding effect has been executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the treatment of Z2343 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2343: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2345). . That is, it is determined whether execution of the lucky hold effect, which is one of the special hold effects, is set. In the processing of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 3 (Z2345: Yes), the normal reserved cover range selection table 222d1 (see FIG. 228) in the reserved cover range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228). 228 (b)), a reserved lid range value is obtained (Z2344). After that, the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and this processing ends. As described above, when the execution of the lucky hold effect (see FIGS. 216 (a) and (b)) is set, the display mode (displayed) of the variable cover symbol P is the same as the execution of the hold effect in the normal state. (A display mode in which one reserved symbol is displayed according to the rule of opening one reserved symbol from the last reserved symbol).

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2345: No), it is determined whether the mode is the notice B mode (Z2347). That is, as shown in FIGS. 211 (a) and (b), when the number of the reserved balls is four or more, and the color of the reserved symbol is variable, it is suggested to the player not to allow the reserved balls to enter any further. It is determined whether the holding effect is being executed. In the case of the advance notice B mode (Z2347: Yes), a display indicating the color change of the variable cover pattern P based on the reserved cover color change selection table 222f provided in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 230 (b)). A hold lid command is set (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the color of the reserved symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a notice B that informs the player that the game is to be performed so as to restrict the increase of the reserved balls further. In the state where a game in the mode (the number of reserved balls is four or more) is being played, if more reserved balls are stored, the variable cover symbol P and the variable cover symbol at the position where the displayed reserved symbol overlaps A setting is performed in which the display color of P is changed to a color (for example, green or the like) different from the normal color and displayed. Thereby, it is possible to easily recognize that the player has played the game contrary to the notification mode in which the player is notified to play the game without storing the reserved ball.

  After executing the processing of Z2348, the reserved lid range value is acquired based on the notice B mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228 (d)) (Z2349), and the above-described processing of Z2355 is executed. The process ends. According to the notice B mode hold lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228 (d)), if the hold effect is in the normal mode, such as when there are four hold balls as shown in FIG. A structure in which the variable cover symbol P corresponding to the position of the individual is hidden is displayed according to a special rule such that it is displayed. In this way, in the notice B mode in which a holding effect is given to instruct not to increase the holding balls, the variable lid design P is used to make the player feel as if the four holding balls are at the upper limit. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the upper limit value of the reserved ball is changed according to the display mode of the variable cover symbol P.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2347, when it is determined that the mode is not the notice B mode (Z2347: No), it is determined whether the mode is the notice A mode (Z2350). That is, the number of the reserved balls is four or more, and the color of the reserved symbol is set or changed, and the variable cover symbol P is set to the reserved symbol which is a different rule from the normal mode (normal state). It is determined whether or not a suspended effect for displaying without an interval is being executed.

  If it is determined that the notice A mode has been set (Z2351: Yes), a reserved lid range value is acquired based on the notice A mode reserved lid range selection table 222d2 (see FIG. 228 (c)) (see FIG. 228 (c)). Z2351). After that, the above-described processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2350, when it is determined that the mode is not the notice A mode (Z2350), it is determined whether or not it is during working hours (Z2352). Here, it is determined whether or not the working hours are reduced based on the game state data attached to the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 includes, in addition to the fluctuation type (out-of-reach, hit) data, whether the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (electric support gaming state) or a certain-variable gaming state (high The data indicating whether the game state is the game state with the stochastic power support or the normal game state (the game state without the low probability power support) is also attached and output.

  If it is determined that it is during the time saving (the time saving game state or the probable change game state is set) (Z2352: Yes), it is based on the time saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6 (see FIG. 229 (c)). Then, a reserved lid range value is obtained (Z2353). After that, the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and this processing ends. In addition, during the time reduction (the state where the electric support is provided), unlike the normal game state, in the state where the number of the reserved balls is 0 to 6, the variable lid symbol P is the seventh and the eighth reserved symbols. Is displayed only, and the number of reserved balls becomes seven, so that the variable cover symbol P displayed at the position where the seventh reserved symbol is displayed is not displayed, and the number of reserved balls is eight. As a result, the variable cover symbol P displayed at the position where the eighth reserved symbol is displayed is set to non-display. Thus, during a time-saving period in which there is an electric support in which the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state, the variable cover symbol P is configured to be displayed less than in the normal game state, and in a state where the number of retained balls frequently occurs. This suppresses an increase in the load of display control of the variable lid symbol P.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2352, when it is determined that the time is not reduced (Z2352: No), that is, when it is determined that the holding effect is in the normal mode, the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 (FIG. 228 (b)), the reserved cover range value is acquired (Z2354), the above-described processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. After the holding lid setting processing (Z2229) is executed, the holding character setting processing (Z2230) is executed. In the hold character setting process (Z2230), a process of determining a girl character or the like to be displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 264, the held character setting process (Z2230) executed in the fluctuation pattern receiving process (Z2202; FIG. 260) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing this reserved character setting processing (Z2230).

  In the hold character setting process (Z2230), it is first determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2361). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal mode, which is the normal state, is set as the state of the hold effect. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status is not 0 (Z2361: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 0 (Z2361: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362). Here, in the case where the number of reserved balls has changed from three to four, even if one of the reserved balls has been digested by newly starting to fluctuate, the first entrance port 64 as a starting port is also used. The number of reserved balls was three by entering one of the right second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640 (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter). From the state where the total value of the 223b and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 and the reserved ball number counter 223b are 4 the number of retained balls is four. This is the state that is changing to the state.

  If it is determined that the number of reserved balls has changed from three to four (Z2362: Yes), the contents of the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 and the set pending effect mode Based on the effect counter 223h and the effect counter 223h, a reserved character is selected from the reserved character selection table 222i (see FIG. 232 (b)), a display character command is set (Z2363), and the process ends. As described above, when the number of the reserved balls is four, the character type of the girl is determined by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the set reserved effect mode, and the display is set. . Thereby, the displayed character can be made different depending on the background type and the hold effect mode, and the hold effect can be diversified. Further, in addition to the configuration of the present control example, the type of the character to be determined may be changed according to the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is changing or the change pattern type (for example, super reach). With this configuration, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the result of the hit determination is a hit, a special symbol that is changing or a hit is determined in advance depending on the character type while the character is being held. The player can recognize that the held ball is stored. Also, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the character is displayed in the super reach according to the character type, the character is displayed, and the super reach, which is a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation to the jackpot, is executed. Can be expected at an early stage.

  Also in the present control example, the notice A mode and the notice B mode are set when a fluctuation pattern type (for example, a super reach type) having a high expectation of a big hit by a pre-read determination or a big hit is a result of a previous hit / fail judgment. Since the character of J2 and the character of J3 are displayed, it is possible to make the player expect the execution of the super-reach type and that the result of the hit determination is a big hit.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has not changed from three to four (Z2362: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than four (Z2364). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than four (Z2364: Yes), a display character command for clearing the reserved character is set (Z2365), and this processing ends. In this manner, the character is set to non-display at the timing when the number of reserved balls becomes less than four, so that the decrease in the number of reserved balls can be notified to the player in an easily understandable manner.

  In the processing of Z2364, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is four or more (Z2364: No), it is determined whether or not an over-winning prize has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether or not an over-prize has occurred is determined by determining whether or not an over-prize information command output from the main control device 110 when the start-prize has been exceeded beyond the upper limit of the number of reserved balls has been received. You. If it is determined that an over-winning has occurred (Z2366: Yes), the change is made by the hold character change table 222j based on the contents of the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode and the effect counter 223h. A reserved character is selected, a display character command is set (Z2267), and the process ends. If it is determined in Z2366 that an over-winning prize has not occurred (Z2366: No), the present process ends. As described above, in the present control example, when the over-winning occurs, the character displayed in the character display area C is changed. As is clear from the reserved character change table 222j (see FIG. 233), the change of the character is configured to be determined based on the currently set character. When the J3 character that is likely to be set in the state where the notice A mode or the notice B mode is easily set when the judgment result is the big hit (hit) or the variation pattern type and the expectation of the big hit is high is selected. Is configured so that a character other than J3 is not selected. When the character J2 is selected, or when the character J0 or J1 which is hard to be selected in the notice A mode or the notice B mode is selected, the character J2 or J3 is selected. It is configured to be easy. That is, it is configured to be able to step up to J3, which is set as a high expectation degree in which a large hit or a fluctuation pattern type having a high expectation degree is selected, and the player enjoys the holding effect by generating an over-winning prize. It is configured to be able to. Changing this character corresponds to a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

  Returning to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. After executing the hold character setting process (Z2230), the speech balloon setting process (Z2231) is executed, and this process ends. In the balloon setting process (Z2231), a process of selecting the content of a comment displayed in a balloon from a character displayed in the character display area C is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 265, a speech balloon setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the balloon setting processing (Z2231).

  In the balloon setting process (Z2231), it is first determined whether 1 is set as the value of the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2381). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term winning hold effect has been set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2381: Yes), the short-term winning balloon selection in the balloon selection table 222k (see FIG. 234 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 is selected. The content of the balloon is acquired based on the table 222k4 (see FIG. 235 (a)) (Z2382). A balloon command for display is set based on the content of the balloon acquired after performing the processing of Z2382 (Z2394), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2381 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2381: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383). ). That is, it is determined whether the holding effect during the reach is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383: Yes), the contents of the speech are acquired based on the reach effect speech balloon selection table 222k5 (see FIG. 235 (b)) (Z2384), and The process is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2383, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2383: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385). . That is, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect has been set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385: Yes), the content of the speech balloon is acquired based on the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6 (see FIG. 236 (a)) (Z2386), and the above-described processing of Z2394 is performed. Is executed, and the present process ends.

  When it is determined in the process of Z287 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2385: No), it is determined whether or not the advance notice B mode is set (Z2387). If it is determined that the notice B mode has been set (Z287: Yes), the content of the speech balloon is acquired based on the notice B speech balloon selection table 222k3 (see FIG. 234 (d)) (Z2388), and the above-described Z2394 is set. Is executed, and the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of Z287 that the advance notice B mode is not set (Z287: No), it is determined whether the advance notice A mode is set (Z2389). When it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2389: Yes), the content of the speech balloon is acquired based on the notice A speech selection table 222k2 (see FIG. 234 (c)) (Z2390), and the above-described Z2394 is set. Is executed, and the present process ends.

  In the process of Z2389, when it is determined that the notice A mode is not set (Z2389: No), it is determined whether or not the middle hours (hours-saving game state or the probable change game state) is set (Z2391). If it is determined that the time reduction is set (Z2391), the content of the balloon is acquired based on the time reduction balloon selection table 222k7 (see FIG. 236 (b)) (Z2392), and the processing of Z2394 described above is performed. Execute and end this processing.

  If it is determined in the processing of Z2391 that the time reduction is not set (Z2391: No), the content of the speech balloon is acquired based on the normal speech balloon selection table 222k1 (see FIG. 234 (b)) (Z2393), The above-described processing of Z2394 is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, since the control is performed so that the comment having the corresponding content is selected for each of the holding effect modes, it is possible to display the comment content corresponding to the holding effect mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 266, a winning command reception process (Z2209), which is one of the command determination processes (Z2113: see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the winning command receiving process (Z2209). The winning command receiving process (Z2209) is executed in the command determining process (see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the winning command reception processing (Z2209), first, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in a winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, based on the variation type of the received command and the acquired value of the effect counter 223h, a pending change value is acquired from the pending change selection table 222b (FIG. 227 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2402). .

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the suspension notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). That is, it is determined whether the notice A mode or the notice B mode in which the color of the reserved symbol is changed is set. When the value of the suspension notice counter 223g is not 0 (Z2403: No), the process of Z2404 to Z2406 is skipped and the process of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), the hold effect mode is selected from the hold effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 227 (b)) based on the hold change value. Is set (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the pending change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the pending change value is 0 (Z2405: Yes), the process of Z2406 is skipped and the process of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pending change value is not 0 (Z2405: No), the current reserved ball value (the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) is stored in the reserved notice counter 223g. Is set (Z2406).

  When the processing in Z2406 is completed, short-term winning determination processing is executed (Z2407). The details of the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 267. However, it is determined whether it is time to execute the short-term winning holding effect, and if it is the time to execute (the execution condition is satisfied). If so, processing for setting the execution of the short-term winning hold effect is executed. Next, a lucky hold process is executed (Z2408). The details of the lucky hold storage processing (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 268, but it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the lucky hold effect (whether the condition is satisfied). Set execution of lucky hold effect. Next, the above-described holding lid setting processing (Z2409), holding character setting processing (Z2410), and balloon setting processing (Z2411) are executed, and this processing ends. Note that the holding lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 263, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the balloon setting processing (Z2411) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 265, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the short-term winning determination process (Z2407). This short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113.

  In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a certain-variable gaming state or a time-saving gaming state (Z2421). When it is determined that the game state is the certainty-variable game state or the time-saving game state (medium time-saving) (Z2421: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the probability change game state or the time saving game state (Z2421: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2422: No), this processing is ended. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is four (Z2423). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not four (Z2423: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is four (Z2423: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424). When it is determined that the value of the short-time winning timer 223q is 0 (Z2424: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 (Z2425), and this processing ends. As described above, when the period required until four reserved balls are established is less than 5 seconds, the special effect status 1 indicating that the execution of the short-term winning hold effect is set is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the lucky hold storage processing (Z2408). This lucky hold storage processing (Z2408) is executed in the winning command reception processing (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113.

  In the lucky hold storage process (Z2408), first, the lottery result of the prize is acquired from the contents of the prize information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the process of Z2441, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (Z2442). When it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a big hit (2442: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (Z2442: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is four or more (Z2443: No). If it is determined that there are four or more balls (Z2443: Yes), the value of the current number of reserved balls is set to the lucky reserved stored value 223p (Z2444), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current value of the number of retained balls is four or less (Z2443: No), the present process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (Z2114). The variable display setting process (Z2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2501). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2501: No), it is in a state where the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110. Move on to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (Z2501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (Z2502), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is It is obtained from the RAM 223 (Z2503).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to processing in Z2505.

  In the processing of Z2505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2505). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2505: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (Z2505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is It is obtained from the RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (Z2508), and the process proceeds to Z2509.

  In the processing of Z2509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2509). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 270, a short-term winning management process (Z2111), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the short-term winning management process (Z2111). In the short-term prize management process (Z2111), a process of measuring a period until four reserved balls required to determine whether or not to execute the short-term prize holding effect is executed.

  In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), first, it is determined whether the current number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (Z2601: No), the value of the short-time winning timer 223q is decremented by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and the processing shifts to Z2604.

  In the processing of Z2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term winning hold effect has already been set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2605), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2604, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), or in the processing of Z2605, it is determined that the number of reserved balls is more than 4. In this case (Z2605: No), the processing of Z2606 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  As described above, when the short-term winning holding effect has already been set, the special effect status is set to 0 and set to the initial value based on the fact that the number of holding balls is less than four. Not limited to this, the special effect status is set to 0 at the timing when the execution of the short-term winning hold effect is completed (at a timing when the remaining balls have entered up to 4 balls in less than 5 seconds and the remaining period has elapsed). May be configured.

  Next, referring to FIG. 271, the reach pending effect management process (Z2112), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 271 is a flow chart showing the during-reach pending effect start processing (Z2112). In the during-reach holding effect management process (Z2112), a process for determining the execution timing of the during-reach holding effect and setting the display mode of the during-reach holding effect at the execution timing is executed.

  In the during-reach production effect management process (Z2112), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701). That is, it is determined whether the execution of the holding effect during the reach is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2701: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the suspended effect start timer 223r provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702). ). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is 1 or more (Z2702: No), the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is decremented by 1 (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether the value of the hold effect start timer 223r calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). When it is determined that the value of the suspended effect start timer 223r after the calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r after the subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2705: No), the processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is determined to be 2 (Z2705: Yes), a display command for advance notice indicating that a hold effect during reach is to be executed is set (Z2706). After that, this processing ends.

  In the processing of Z2702, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is 0 (Z2702: Yes), the timing (the fluctuation period elapses) at which the fluctuation time (the fluctuation period) of the special symbol being changed ends. Is determined (Z2707). If it is determined that it is the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: Yes), 0 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2708), and then this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2707, when it is determined that it is not the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: No), this process ends. As described above, in the during-reach effect, the special effect status is set to 0 at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the reach fluctuation mode elapses, and the hold effect is initially set to the normal mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 272, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring / production process (Z2107), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (Z2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and the execution of a notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (Z2107: see FIG. 272), first, it is determined whether or not a value larger than 0 is set in the SW effective time counter 223k as the SW (switch) effective time (effective period) (Z2801). ). When it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No), when it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2801: No). Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is decremented by 1 and updated (Z2802). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (Z2805). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z2806). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2806: No), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command to a variation pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the processing of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. This sensor input processing (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2806, when it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2806: Yes), it is determined whether or not the notice effect is being performed (the notice effect is being performed). (Z2809). If it is determined that the notice effect is being performed (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and the notice for display indicating the notice effect determined by lottery is made. The command is set (Z2811). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends.

  Here, the sensor input process (Z2813) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing a sensor input process (Z2813), which is one of the frame button input monitoring / producing processes (Z1307: FIG. 272) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In the sensor input process (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and execution of various effects and the like is set based on the operation.

  In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 273), first, it is determined whether or not the sensor valid time counter 223s is set to a value larger than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is in a valid period. When it is determined that the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No), it is determined whether or not a notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2822). When it is determined that the notice effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor valid time set for the notice effect is set in the sensor valid time counter 223s (Z2823), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2822 that the notice effect display is not set (Z2822: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2821, when it is determined that the sensor valid time counter 223s is a value larger than 0 (Z2821: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s is updated by subtracting the elapsed time (Z2824). ). It is determined whether or not touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether or not the player has performed an operation by bringing his / her hand close to touch sensor 290 (Z2825). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is updated by adding 1 (Z2826), and a display notice corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223t is displayed. A display command is set (Z2827). It is determined whether or not the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit set in the selected touch announcement effect display (Z2828). If it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is reset to 0, which is the initial value (Z2829). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is not the upper limit value (Z2828: No), the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 272, the description will be continued. In the processing of Z2801, if not waiting (Z2801: No), or if it is determined in the processing of Z2802 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2802: No), the SW valid time counter 223k Is determined to be 1 or more (Z2805). If the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 1 or more (Z2805: Yes), the SW valid time counter 223k is decremented (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the notice effect is being executed (the notice effect is being performed) (Z2808). When it is determined that the notice effect is being performed (Z2808: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and the notice for display indicating the notice effect determined by the lottery is made. The command is set (Z2810). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. Since the sensor input process (Z2813) has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. 273, the detailed description is omitted.

  In the process of Z2808, when it is determined that the notice effect is not being performed (Z2808: No), the process of Z2803 and Z2804 described above is executed, and then the process ends. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed in the processing of Z2807 (Z2807: No), the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 is skipped, and the sensor input processing (Z2813) already described with reference to FIG. Is executed and the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2805, when it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2805: No), it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811: Yes), the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time counter 223k based on the set fluctuation pattern (Z2812), and the sensor input processing (Z2813) is performed. Execute and end this processing. In the process of Z2811, when the fluctuation pattern is not set (Z2811: No), the process of Z2812 is skipped, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends. Here, some variation patterns are set with the effect using the frame button 22 and some are not set. If not set, “0” is set in the SW valid time counter 223k. Is done.

<Control processing in display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start

  Here, the boot process (Z3001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 275 is a flowchart illustrating the boot process (Z3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (Z3101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Z3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of Z3102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data of the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (Z3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (Z3104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 275). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) (Z3105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (Z3001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3101 is a boot program for executing boot processing to be processed following the processing of Z3102. May be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of Z3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in Z3101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of Z3102 and Z3102, the processing of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 without performing the processes of Z3101 and Z3102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (Z3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 285A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see Z4602 in FIG. 285 (a)).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)), a simple command is displayed such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 239 is drawn. The determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 276 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued by the main controller 110 by the sound lamp control. When the change pattern command for display is received through the device 113, that is, when a fluctuation pattern command at the time of power-on (not shown) is displayed during the fluctuation effect period, a simple fluctuation effect is performed. Can be. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in Z3005, interruption permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of Z3006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 276 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 276 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 242) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 276 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (Z3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (Z3302) is executed, and then a display setting process (Z3303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (Z3302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the display setting process (Z3303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Z3302) or the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (Z3304). In this task processing, the image is formed based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (Z3303) or the simple display setting processing (Z3309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when receiving a continuous advance command (not shown) from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is also notified of the continuous advance. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (Z3306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (Z3304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (Z3305) are used. 242, and sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of Z3307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command, The stop symbol is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (Z3301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (FIG. 239) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (Z3308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (Z3309) is executed, and the process of Z3304 is executed. Move to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282, details of the above-described command determination processing (Z3302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing (Z3302: FIG. 277), as shown in FIG. 277, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401). (Z3401: No), the command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (Z3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Z3402). The command type of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area is analyzed (Z3403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404). If it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: Yes), the variation pattern command is displayed. The command processing is executed (Z3405), and the processing returns to Z3401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (Z3405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 278 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing (Z3405: FIG. 278 (a)), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z3501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of Z3501, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in fact, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of Z3501 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (Z3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of Z3503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z3504), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (Z3506), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of Z3505, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501 is updated while updating the pointer 233f. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of Z3502. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of Z3504, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of Z3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (Z3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (Z3406). If there is a display variation type command (Z3406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (Z3407), and the process returns to Z3401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (Z3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 278 (b). FIG. 278 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (Z3407: FIG. 278 (b)), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (Z3601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (Z3602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (Z3603). Thereafter, the flow returns to the processing of Z3401 in FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Z3602, the offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process is described. In the above-described task processing (Z3304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by Z3603, and the specified stop is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the process of Z3406, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command (Z3406: No), it is next determined whether or not there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). When it is determined that the display notice display command has been received (Z3408: Yes), a notice effect display process is executed (Z3409). The details of the preview effect display process (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (a), but the degree of expectation to the big hit displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol fluctuation display. And setting a notice display mode for notifying the player of a notice of a big hit or the like.

  Here, the notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (a). FIG. 279 (a) is a flowchart showing the notice effect display processing (Z3409).

  In the notice effect display processing (FIG. 279 (a), Z3409), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z3701). A transfer data table corresponding to the set notice display data table to be displayed at the display timing based on the notice display time indicated by the received notice notice display command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (Z3702).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is counted by a time counter. The pointer is set to 233h (Z3704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3705).

  As described above, the notice display is set based on the display notice display command output from the audio lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if it were different display modes.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the notice display is selected by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. May be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for the advance notice is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table which has already been set may be set to the notice display and overwritten. Good.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the process of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no display notice display command for display (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (Z3410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (Z3410: Yes), a mode switching process is executed (Z3411). The mode switching processing (Z3411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (b), but processing for switching to a display mode corresponding to the background mode is performed based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  Here, the mode switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (b) (Z3411). FIG. 279 (b) is a flowchart showing the mode switching processing (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3801). It is determined whether the special symbol is changing (Z3802). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (Z3802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set to active (Z3803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (Z3802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (Z3804).

  As described above, when the special symbol is changing, the display mode is switched to the display mode of the change pattern corresponding to the background mode. On the other hand, if the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display state in the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

  The processing for changing the background or the like corresponding to the background mode may be configured as follows.

  The back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to on. Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off, the back image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set rear image change flag is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the set rear image determination flag. When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag that has been set at that time is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video) storing the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the rear image. It may be interpreted as a command. When it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command may be turned on or later. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the process of Z3410, when it is determined that there is no display switching command (Z3410: No), it is determined whether there is a display hold lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a display lid command (Z3412: Yes), a lid command processing is executed (Z3413).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 280, the hold lid command processing (Z3413) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing the hold lid command processing (Z3413).

  In the hold lid command processing (Z3413: FIG. 280), first, a display data table for a hold effect of a display effect corresponding to the received hold lid command for display is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. It is added to the table and set (Z3901). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). You. The position to be added is set before the END data.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the hold lid set in Z3901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3902). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set by the processing of Z3901 is turned on, The data table discriminating flags corresponding to the other display data tables for the holding lid are set to ON (Z3903).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the hold lid set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z3904). ), Initialize the pointer 233f to 0, and return to (Z3905) command determination processing.

  When a hold lid command is received, the display mode of the change pattern to be set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold lid command, the set change pattern, and the background mode. To set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode corresponding to the set background mode may be set for the display mode after the addition time. The control load on the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in addition to the set display data table. However, a new display data table may be set.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the process of Z3412, when it is determined that there is no display hold lid command (Z3412: No), it is determined whether there is a display hold character command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a display reserved character command (Z3412: Yes), a reserved character command process is executed (Z3413).

  Here, the hold character command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (b). FIG. 280 (b) is a flowchart showing the suspended character command processing (Z3415).

  In the hold character command processing (Z3413: FIG. 280), first, the display data table for the hold character of the display effect corresponding to the received display hold character command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. It is added to the table and set (Z4001). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). You. The position to be added is set before the END data.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the hold character display data table set in Z4001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4002). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the hold character display data table set by the process of Z4001 is turned on, The data table determination flags corresponding to the other display data tables for reserved characters are set to off (Z4003).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold character display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4001, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z4004). ), Initialize the pointer 233f to 0 (Z4005), and return to the command determination process.

  When the hold character command is received, the display mode of the change pattern set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold character command, the set change pattern, and the background mode. To set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode corresponding to the set background mode may be set for the display mode after the addition time. The control load on the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in addition to the set display data table. However, a new display data table may be set.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the process of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display hold character command (Z3414: No), it is determined whether there is a display balloon command (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a display balloon command (Z3416: Yes), balloon command processing is executed (Z3417).

  Here, the balloon command processing (Z3417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the balloon command processing (Z3417).

  In the balloon command processing (Z3417: FIG. 281), first, a display data table for a balloon for a display effect corresponding to the received balloon command for display is determined and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer. And set (Z4101). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). You. The position to be added is set before the END data.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the balloon display data table set in Z4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4102). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the balloon display data table set by the process of Z4101 is turned on, and The data table determination flag corresponding to the balloon display data table is set to OFF (Z4103).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the balloon display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z4104). , The pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4105), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  When the speech balloon command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern to be set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the speech balloon command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode. , Set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode corresponding to the set background mode may be set for the display mode after the addition time. The control load on the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in addition to the set display data table. However, a new display data table may be set.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of Z3414, when it is determined that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414). If it is (Z3414: Yes), an error command process is executed (Z3415), and the process returns to Z3415.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing (Z3415: FIG. 282), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (Z4202). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of Z4201, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set by the process of Z4202 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in Z4202 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of Z3414 that there is no error command (Z3414: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (Z3416), and the processing returns to Z3401.

  In the processing of Z3401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of Z3402 to Z3416 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of Z3401 to Z3416 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of Z3416 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination processing (Z3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)) is similar to the command determination processing. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 239, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command, are determined from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 278 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 278 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For the command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of Z3501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of Z3502, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284, details of the above-described display setting processing (Z3303), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Z4301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (Z4301: No), In the previously executed command determination processing, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, the processing of Z4302 to Z4304 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of Z4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, the new command flag is set to off (Z4302), and then Z4303 to Z4304. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of Z4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303). If the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (Z4304).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (Z4401).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of Z4401, the error occurrence flag is turned off (Z4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 283. After the warning image setting process (Z4304) or in the process of Z4303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (Z4303: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z4305.

  In Z4305, a pointer update process is executed (Z4305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (Z4501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of Z4501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (Z4502). As a result, if it is End information (Z4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (Z4503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (Z4503: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (Z4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (Z4505), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z4503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (Z4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( Z4506), ends this process, and returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of Z4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (Z4502: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 284, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of Z4306 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (Z4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (Z4308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (Z4308: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (Z4308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (Z4309).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is OFF (Z4309: No), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (Z4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Z4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (Z4314), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Z4315), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of Z4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (Z3304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by Z4315 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z4309, if the confirmed display flag is on instead of off (Z4309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (Z4316). If the demonstration display flag is off (Z4316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the definite display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (Z4317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4318). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (Z4321), and this processing ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt processing.

  In the process of Z4316, if the demonstration display flag is on (Z4316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (Z3309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. 239 is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 285 and FIG. 286, details of the above-described transfer setting process (Z3305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 285 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The processing is executed (Z4602), the transfer setting processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in Z4601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (Z4601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (Z4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 285 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (Z4701). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (Z4701: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (Z4702). In the process of Z4702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of Z4702 (Z4702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (Z4702: Yes), the flow shifts to the process of Z4703. Also, as a result of the processing of Z4701, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (Z4701: No), the processing shifts to the processing of Z4703.

  In the process of Z4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Z4703). If there is any untransferred resident target image data (Z4703: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in Z4703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (Z4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is turned off (Z4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)), the command determination processing is performed instead of the simple command determination processing (see Z3308 in FIG. 7276b) and the simple display setting processing (see Z3309 in FIG. 276 (b)). (See FIGS. 277 to 282) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are performed, so that the normal image drawing is set. Indicates the normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) (see Z4601: No in FIG. 285 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (Z4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (Z4603).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the previously executed display setting process (Z3303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (Z4802). If the obtained information is the transfer data information (Z4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (Z4803), the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4804), and the flow shifts to the processing of Z4805.

  Also, in the processing of Z4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (Z4802: No), the processing of Z4803 and Z4804 is skipped, and the processing shifts to processing of Z4805. In the processing of Z4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (Z4805). If it has been (Z4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4806).

  In the process of Z4806, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237, and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of Z4806 (Z4806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (Z4806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of Z4807. Also, as a result of the processing in Z4805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (Z4805: No), the processing shifts to the processing in Z4807.

  In the processing of Z4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (Z4807). If the transfer start flag is on (Z4807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (Z4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various kinds of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of Z3603 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the processing shifts to the processing of Z4809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: No), this process ends.

  In the processing of Z4809, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). The determination in the process of Z4809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Z4809 (Z4809: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in Z4809, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (Z4810). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in Z4810, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (Z4811), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When the indicated stop type information is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 287, details of the above-described drawing processing (Z3306), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Z3304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information 242 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305) (Z4901). That is, in the process of Z4901, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Z3304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (Z4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of Z4902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (Z4903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed, it is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  Further, in the above control example, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are separately provided, but alternatively, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, the determination as to whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is performed by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 checks the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident Whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused may be confirmed. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether the scanning is in the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 to determine whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since the image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is necessary for the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a main process loop executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can be executed.

  In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not use the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. In a given address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM and each video RAM may be managed. In this manner, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected between the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a can be used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that, even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low readout speed, but by using the configuration described in the above control example of the display control device 114, an image can be displayed at a desired display time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above control example, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but this is not necessarily required. The present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. May be stored as a part of the boot program to be executed. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above control example, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in an internal bus (bus line 240). , A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided therein. May store a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released.

  In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, it is determined whether the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been set in the buffer RAM 234c. Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified for the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b determines that the address is specified in the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected. (Line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above control example, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes or the like may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a possibility that the drawing process is delayed by writing the image data.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One RAM is used for the resident area and the normal area. It may be divided so that the same content as each of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above control example, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described. May be. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above control example, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are not overwritten while the power is turned on and continue to be retained is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 For example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the user, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion. Good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept stored in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave. Also, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer instruction). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read out image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the display main process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before starting the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is checked If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. May be configured. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the MPU 231 starts execution of the display main process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to reduce the time required to recover from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modified example, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be reduced, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently, and may be configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) that exchanges many data signals is provided. The transfer can be efficiently performed without being affected by the data transfer.

  In the above control example, a case has been described where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned (blank period). The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of the image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above control example, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. And the time required for the processing can be reduced.

  In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. can do. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above control example, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on image from the character ROM 234 while displaying the power-on image. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above control example, a case has been described in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying the main image, the reading of the image data from the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case of transferring the image data to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and stored in the normal video RAM 236. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command and the frame button operation command. The case has been described where the back image or the super-reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the operation command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thus, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image or the super reach in accordance with the game state based on the rear image change command or the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the combined data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image data of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 and The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error generation flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error generation flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283). , The warning image setting process (see FIG. 284 (a)) may be executed to immediately display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since the transmission and reception of the error command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are not required, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  In the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. However, instead of the vibration sensor, or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. Is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of the magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command for notifying an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 114 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 upon receiving an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 Alternatively, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and turning on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. Accordingly, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the magnetic field error. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses the 1st symbol in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of the sprite after the change in the sprite are associated with the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for the frame is displayed is defined as one unit. Color information specifying a color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing content in the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image to be displayed in one effect is defined by a display data table, the display data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type to be displayed. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list instead of the sprite to be replaced. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing an image according to the drawing content specified in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be specified together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. When the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. May be configured.

  Accordingly, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing image drawing based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is described has been described.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. In addition, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in data size of the display data table.

  In the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in an additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined not only to include the additional drawing contents but also to include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed in accordance with the additional drawing contents. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed by using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition can be specified. As compared with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified, the load of the processing required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above control example, a case has been described where the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "change start-up", "high-speed change", "announcement effect", "normal reach", and "super reach". After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like. Thus, by making the variable effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above control example, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above control example, a case will be described where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of image for which the drawing process is completed (in the above control example, every 20 milliseconds). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the image for one frame is always displayed at the same time interval (20 millisecond interval). Therefore, the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above control example, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231 and also has the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. Has been described, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be expanded is displayed. May be alternately selected, the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer, and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed and the image information to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above control example, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 transmits the sound display control device 113 via the sound lamp controller 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmation display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a variation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above control example, the demonstration has been described in which the rear image is changed and the third symbol including the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, but the demonstration effect is not necessarily performed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol including a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above control example, after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 first stores the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has been started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is desirably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image can be performed more quickly.

  In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the transfer at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 becomes 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display content at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be specified. The display control device 114 reads out from the character ROM 234 the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Therefore, it is not necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above control example, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above control example, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs a process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to determine whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above control example, the case where only the image data corresponding to “back A” of the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a rear image used in a part of the super reach may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear image of the super reach having high or expected appearance frequency resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In the above control example, the transfer instruction of the image data is defined by the transfer data table or the display data table in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data designated by the character string from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 describes information relating to the required sprite type in the table, and based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. It may control the rollers 237. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back surface C which is the rear image of the “island stage”, but the color tone of the entire image may change with time. Good. In addition, as the back image, not only the one that scrolls and the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears over time instead of such a back image is displayed. It may move or change.

  In the above control example, the main control device 110 uses the information of the various counters (special winning random number counter C1 and special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of the start prize notified to the sound lamp control device 113 in the reserved ball number command. Although the case of including is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and information of various counters (special winning random number counter C1 and special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by another command. You may be notified.

  In the above control example, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which a high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the pattern is displayed. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above control example, a case has been described in which one first ball entry port 64 is provided in the game board 13 in which a special symbol jackpot lottery is started when the ball has entered, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrance holes from which an entrance ball is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started may be arranged on the game board 13. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first entrances, the reserved ball count command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 indicates which first entrance is being held. Information may be included. Also, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when starting the fluctuation may include information indicating the fluctuation effect held by any of the first entrances. Good. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance port, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance indicated in the variation pattern command is reduced by 1, the first entrance is changed. The number of reserved balls can be counted every time.

  In the above control example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), the reserved ball number command is mainly transmitted. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. By this means, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above control example, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passing of the through gate 67 are configured to be suspended up to four times, respectively. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is changed by a number in the part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four by the reserved ball number. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The design may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a direction or a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Here, an outline of the first control example will be described. The game board 13 is provided with a first ball entrance 64, a right second ball entrance 640r, and a second ball entrance 640 as starting ports (ball entry means, starting means). By entering one of the balls, a predetermined lottery probability is reached, and a lottery (determination) is performed. If the lottery result (judgment result) is a win (specific judgment result), a jackpot game (a privilege game that is advantageous to the player) is executed. The jackpot game is set in a plurality of types, and the privilege given to the player is set to be different depending on the type. For example, a difference in the number of jackpot rounds, a hit type in which a high-probability game state (first special game state) is set after a jackpot game, and a time-saving game state after a jackpot game (the profit of the player is smaller than in the first special game state) (A second special game state) is set.

  The result of the determination is that the third symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the first symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. After performing variable display (dynamic display) in a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period), the display is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating the result of determination (determination result) to notify the player of the determination result. . When a game ball enters the starting port during the variable display period, the right to be drawn as a reserved ball in the lottery for the entered ball is stored. Up to four balls can be entered for the first entrance 64 (lottery of the first special symbol) and up to the right second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640 (second special). It is configured such that up to four balls are stored as upper limit values in total for the symbol lottery).

  When the reserved ball is stored, one reserved symbol (identification symbol, identification information) is displayed for one reserved ball. For the reserved ball, before or after the special symbol indicating the lottery result corresponding to the reserved ball is variably displayed, the result of judgment (judgment result) determined at the start of the fluctuation and the fluctuation display mode of the special symbol Preliminary determination in which (variation pattern type) is determined in advance is performed. If the result of the preliminary determination is a specific determination result (for example, a hit or a super reach type is determined), the color of the reserved symbol is displayed in a variable manner (variable to a specific display mode). When the color of the reserved symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a special reserved effect type is set based on the set color or the like. As one of the special holding effects, when the color of the holding symbol changes, the holding is changed by generating an additional holding ball or generating an overflow prize to enter the starting port more than the maximum number of holding balls. A comment display (notice display mode, suggestion mode) indicating the degree of expectation of hitting the ball, the type of the variation pattern to be executed, and the like is displayed (notice A mode). This allows the player to win more game balls in the starting port, thereby increasing the profit of the game store. In addition, by inserting a game ball into the starting port, a comment display is displayed, and it is possible to determine the result of the determination as to whether or not the change is made based on the content of the comment. It can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As one of the special holding effects, a holding effect (notice B mode) is set to execute a game so as not to generate a holding ball from a state where the color of the holding ball is changed. In this holding effect, a variable cover symbol P is displayed in a display area where a holding symbol is displayed, and the position of the holding symbol displayed when the variable cover symbol P is won next to the holding symbol whose color is changed. Is displayed to inform the player that the game is to be performed so that the reserved ball is not generated. Further, a content indicating that the number of reserved balls is not increased by the comment display is also displayed.

  In addition, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four. A total of eight reserved symbols are included in the third symbol display device 81 (display area of the display means). , An area for displaying the reserved symbol is reserved and set in advance. In the area where the reserved symbol is displayed, the pedestal symbol is displayed at the position where the reserved symbol is displayed, and it is indicated that the reserved symbol is displayed even if the reserved symbol is not displayed. It is configured to be identifiable. In the area where the fifth to eighth reserved symbols are displayed, four variable lid symbols P are also displayed at normal times corresponding to the positions where the four reserved symbols are displayed, respectively. The number corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the symbol P so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls can be identified.

  By displaying the variable cover symbol P in this manner, it is determined that the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is eight even if the reserved symbol is not displayed by the numerical information of the variable lid symbol P. can do. Furthermore, the display mode of the variable cover symbol P is also changed by the generation of the hold ball and the display of the hold symbol. In the holding effect of the normal mode at the normal time, the variable cover symbol P is changed to non-display when the number of the holding balls becomes three and the variable cover symbol P displayed at the position where the fifth holding symbol is displayed. After that, similarly, the sixth variable cover pattern P is not displayed with four reserved balls, the seventh variable cover pattern P is not displayed with five reserved balls, and the eighth variable pattern P is displayed with six reserved balls. The variable cover symbol P is changed so that the variable cover symbol P is not displayed, that is, the variable cover symbol P is variably displayed so that two or more reserved symbols are vacant for three or more reserved balls. You. With this configuration, it is possible to show the player that the display area of the reserved symbol is variable depending on the number of the reserved balls.

  In addition, a special holding effect in which the variable rule of the variable cover symbol P is changed or the variable rule is changed depending on the type of change displayed in a variable manner is executed according to the period in which the held ball is generated. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that a special holding effect is being executed according to the variable rule of the variable cover symbol P. Furthermore, the special holding effect is set according to the result of the judgment of the preliminary judgment being held and the change type, and also the result of the judgment of the change of the special symbol displayed in the change and the type of the change being executed. By changing the variable rule of the variable cover symbol P, it is possible to expect a hit or to predict a variation type.

  In the present control example, even if a game ball is fired on the left or right side of the third symbol display device 81, the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, and the second ball entrance 640 (power combination) (The object 640a is in an open state), but is not limited thereto, but is not limited thereto. The route easily enters the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. The arrangement of the nails or the like may be set so as to form a flow path that is easy to ball. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a game in which a lottery is performed only with the second special symbol or a game in which a game ball is prevented from entering the second entrance 640. Furthermore, as an effect, an effect that suggests to the player to make the ball enter the second entrance can be executed.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the first special symbol and the first special symbol are configured to be changed alternately. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the first special symbol has priority. The first control example is different from the first control example in that the fluctuating state and the first special symbol and the first special symbol fluctuate in order depending on the game state. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description is omitted.

  The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 288 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. In the first control example, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are installed inside the sorting device 700, and when the ball enters the opening 710a, the first ball entry is performed by the sorting device 700. Although the ball is configured to be distributed to the mouth 64 and the second ball entrance 640, in the second control example, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are left as they are without installing the distribution device 700. They differ in that they are configured to be installed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Second Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 293. In the second control example, the effect display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is partially changed from the first control example described above, and the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The difference is that the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, the first symbol and the second special symbol are alternately performed for the special symbol for which the variation start is executed. However, in the second control example, the variation is preferentially performed from the second special symbol. The difference is that the execution is performed.

  FIG. 289 (a) and FIG. 289 (b) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of the special symbol change and the continuous effect in the second control example. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 291 (a), when the special symbol fluctuation continues to be performed in the first special symbol, the effect display is a continuous effect as shown in FIG. 291 (b). Execute The continuous production is a period set for a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, the continuous production can be extended based on a winning during the execution of the continuous production.

  FIG. 291 (a) is a diagram showing a state where the third symbol fluctuates during the continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 291 (a), in the second control example, the pedestal symbol m0 during execution is displayed in the small region Ds1 of the sub-display region Ds provided below the third symbol display device 81. In the area Ds2, the first reserved symbol base m1 to the eighth reserved symbol base m8 and the reserved symbols are displayed. Characters G1 to G3 are displayed at the corners of the display area Dm. By executing an effect with a story with these characters G1 to G3, the player can easily recognize that the continuous effect is being executed. Further, even during the continuous production period, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22 by the player. The detailed description of the background mode change during the continuous production period will be described later with reference to FIGS. 290 and 292.

  Next, the flow of the effect when the second special symbol change is executed during the continuous effect will be described. FIGS. 291 (c) and (d) are diagrams illustrating the flow of the effect when the second special symbol change is performed during the continuous effect. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 289 (c), when the second special symbol change is executed during the execution of the first special symbol change, as shown in FIG. 289 (d), the first special symbol change is performed. Is interrupted, and during the interrupted period, a special effect with the second special symbol variation is performed. Next, when the special effect period ends, the continuous effect period in the first special symbol is restarted.

  FIG. 291 (b) is a diagram showing a state where the continuous effect period is interrupted and the third symbol fluctuates during the special effect period. During the special effect period, as shown in FIG. 291 (b), the reserved ball is displayed by being changed to red. In the display area Dm, a shell K1, a shell K2, and a shell K3 are displayed, and are displayed in a display mode having a story. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the special effect execution period is in effect. Further, a white reserved symbol is displayed on the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5, and the white reserved symbol of the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the small area Ds and is a running symbol. Is displayed, the continuous production period interrupted by the special production period is restarted.

  Next, the flow of an effect when the second special symbol change is executed during the continuous effect period will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 (c) and (d). In the second control example, even when the variation is being executed in the first special symbol, if the ball enters the second entrance 640, the execution of the variation in the second special symbol is preferentially performed. As shown in FIG. 289 (c), while the continuous effect in the first special symbol is being executed, if there is a variation execution in the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 289 (d), the first special symbol Is interrupted, and a special effect is executed during the variable execution in the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 291 (b), there is a variation execution in the second special symbol, and when the special effect is started, the number of reserved balls changes color only during the special effect period. I have. In addition, characters K1 to K3 like shells are displayed at the corners of the display area Dm, and an effect with a story is executed. With this configuration, it is easy to understand that the player has entered the special effect period from the continuous effect period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the continuous production in the first special symbol that has been executed is interrupted at the same time as the start of the special production in the second special symbol, and is resumed as soon as the special production period ends. Specifically, the reserved balls of the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 are on standby to execute the interrupted continuous effect period. The variable execution in the running pedestal symbol m0 to the second reserved symbol symbol m2, which is the special rendering period, is completed, and the reserved ball of the third symbol reserved symbol pedestal m3 is moved to the execution pedestal m0. The suspended continuous production period is restarted.

  With reference to FIG. 290, the relationship between the continuous effect and the background display will be described. FIGS. 290 (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the effect display mode during a special symbol change and the flow of background display at that time. As described above, even during the continuous effect period, the background can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22. In the second control example, when changing from the background mode in which the continuous effect is executed to another background mode, the changed normal effect for the background mode is displayed.

  FIG. 292 is a diagram illustrating a display mode when the background is changed during the continuous effect period. As shown in FIG. 292, in the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the change of the third symbol, the sea mode, which was the period of the continuous effect, is set to the mountain mode as the background mode. As described above, in the mountain mode, the normal effect in the mountain mode is displayed instead of the continuous effect. However, when the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed to the sea mode again, the continuous effect for the sea is restored. . In the present second control example, when the sea mode is in the continuous production period, the display area Dmb displays “Executing a continuous production in the sea mode!”, And the player is in the continuous production period in the sea mode. Is configured to be easily recognized. In the display area Dma, "the background changes with the button PUSH" is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize that the background can be changed even when the third symbol is changing.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first control example described above are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 293 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The second control example is different from the first control example in that a continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is added.

  The continuous production execution selection table 222aa is a data table for determining (determining) whether or not to perform a continuous production (FIG. 291 (a)). In the winning information-related processing (see Z2255 in FIG. 300), the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003 in FIG. 300: Yes), and the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off. Is read (Z5004 in FIG. 300: No) (Z5005 in FIG. 300), and is used to determine the execution of the continuous effect (Z5006 in FIG. 96).

  In the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa, the value of one effect counter of the effect counter group 223aa, the current number of pending balls, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time are displayed. Presence or absence of execution of continuous production is specified. Specifically, as the number of currently reserved balls is larger, the continuous effect is more likely to be executed.In addition, the lottery result that the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time is a lottery result indicating a big hit is out of order. Is specified so that a continuous effect is more easily executed than in the case of.

  With this configuration, a continuous effect with a long execution period (the number of special symbol changes to be executed) is easily executed, and when the continuous effect is executed, the player is expected to hit a big hit. Can be increased. Therefore, a game can be played for a long time in a state where the player has increased the expectation for the jackpot, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the continuous effect ends, that is, when the variable effect corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the continuous effect ends (Z5102 in FIG. 301: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value of the number counter 223a is read (Z5104 in FIG. 301), and when it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect again. Also in this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect with reference to the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa (Z5109 in FIG. 301).

  With this configuration, it is possible to execute a continuous effect even on a newly won game ball during the execution of the continuous effect, so that the frequency of the continuous effect can be increased. In addition, since it is possible to make the period in which the continuous production is executed longer than the upper limit number (4) of the special symbol 1, the player can be informed of which reserved symbols the continuous production is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp, and it is possible to provide the player with a fun of predicting the game.

  Note that, in the present control example, the continuous production execution selection table 222aa referred to when determining whether or not to perform the continuous production is defined as described above, but other contents may be defined. For example, a clock means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)) for clocking the current time is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, and the rate at which the continuous effect is executed is changed in accordance with the clock content of the clock means. May be specified.

  In this case, during a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour from 10:00 am), it is preferable that the continuous effect is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. With this configuration, even when the same continuous production is performed, the degree of expectation to the big hit varies depending on the timing (time) at which the continuous production is performed. Can be prevented from getting tired. Further, during the above-mentioned predetermined period, a guide notification means for notifying the player that the continuous effect is executed only when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and a remaining period (or an elapsed period) of the above-mentioned predetermined period. And a period notifying unit for notifying the user. This allows the player to play a game while expecting a continuous effect to be performed.

  Further, there are provided means for determining the content of operation on operation means (for example, the frame button 22) operable by the player, and determination means for determining the launching state (or entering state) of the game ball, and these determining means May be defined so as to change the rate at which the continuous production is executed in association with the determination result of the above, or the above-described plurality of contents may be appropriately combined or each may be used individually.

  Further, in the present control example, a stop command process (see FIG. 3017) using the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a continuous performance in the winning information-related process (see FIG. 300). However, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect. However, when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect by the prize information-related process (see FIG. 300) and the stop command process (see FIG. 301). May be configured to make the selection table referred to different. In this case, for example, the selection table referred to in the stop command processing (see FIG. 301) has a bigger hit of the special symbol in the case where the continuous effect is executed than the selection table referred to in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300). It is preferable to define the contents of the selection table so that the degree of expectation is high. As a result, as the period during which the continuous effects are continuously executed is longer, the degree of expectation of the jackpot can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 293 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the second control example will be described. FIG. 293 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example. In the second control example, the effect counter group 223aa, the continuous effect flag 223ab, the continuous effect flag 223ac, the continuous effect interrupt flag 223ad, and the continuous effect update area 223ae are different from the first control example described above. The difference is that an effect number counter 223af, an effect setting prohibition flag 223ag, a setting prohibition release flag 223ah, a time saving counter 223ai, a change number counter 223j, an operation invalidation flag 223ak, and a state storage area 223az are added. ing.

  The effect counter group 223aa includes a plurality of effect counter means. The effect counter group 223aa is a plurality of counters used for selecting an effect variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), selecting various announcement effects, and the like. Each of the plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa has a range of 0 to 198 obtained from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. Stores a random value. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for generating random numbers is an IC that can operate with an operating clock (for example, 1 MHz) at which at least each of the effect counters can be updated to a different random value and execute determination. Is adopted.

  The values of the plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are executed by the sound lamp control device 113, such as determining the effect variation pattern (fluctuation pattern of the third symbol), whether or not a continuous effect can be performed, and various announcement effect types. This is used when executing various determinations made, and is updated so that each counter value is not synchronized. The plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are configured by 1-byte loop counters that are updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process 2 (see FIG. 298) of the sound ramp control device 113 is executed. (Every 1 msec), the update process is executed so as to have a different value.

  In this control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the value of the effect counter, a plurality of effects are selected in one main process because a plurality of effect counters having different update values are used. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the selected effect from being biased by referring to the same counter value, but for example, a plurality of effects selected in different processes in one main process. If it is desired to synchronize the modes, it may be configured to select the effect mode using the same effect counter.

  In this control example, a plurality of counters having different counter value update patterns are used. For example, a random value is calculated using an update value of one effect counter, and each effect is calculated using the calculated value. May be configured to be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of counters included in the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, for example, of the updated value of the effect counter, the lower 1 digit and the lower 2 digits of the value of the first digit, and the lower 1 digit and the lower value of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the first digit by the value of the second digit It is preferable to calculate such that each value has no regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

  The continuous effect flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the continuous effect is established, and is set to ON when the condition for executing the continuous effect is established. More specifically, in the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 300) of the sound lamp control device 113, when it is determined that a continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), the stop command processing (step S5007 in FIG. 300) of the sound lamp control device 113 In FIG. 301), when it is determined that a continuous effect is to be executed (Z5110 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is turned on (Z5111 in FIG. 300) and the effect setting process (see FIG. 303) in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303). When the continuous effect setting process (Z5306 in FIG. 305) is executed in Z5204 in 304, it is set to OFF (see Z5401 in FIG. 305).

  That is, the continuous production flag 223ab determines whether to execute a continuous production based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main control device 110 when a new game ball enters the first entrance 64. Is determined, and the result of the determination that the continuous effect is to be executed is held until the next time when the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 is set.

  In this control example, in the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 300), it is determined that a continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), and the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008 in FIG. 300). ), The continuous effect is executed when the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed in the set state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to start a continuous effect in the current variable display, and a continuous effect is performed based on the result of the lottery. May be configured to determine the variable display that starts the operation. With this configuration, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first entrance 64 and the timing at which the continuous effect is started are made different (the game ball enters the first entrance 64). After that, a continuous effect can be started with a variable display in which the continuous effect is not executed), thereby making it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous effect.

  Further, in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to the continuous effect. With such a configuration, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first entrance hole 64 and the timing at which the continuous production starts can be brought close to each other. The player can be easily grasped. Therefore, in order to execute a continuous effect, a game ball can be enthusiastically made to enter the first entrance 64 while the special symbol is being changed (during the execution of the change display), and the operation of the game can be enhanced. .

  In the case where the effect corresponding to the running variable display is changed to the continuous effect, the display content or the elapsed time of the running variable display is determined, and the condition for changing the effect (for example, the third symbol display device) is used. Only when the variation display displayed at 81 is a display mode (high-speed variation during which it is difficult for the player to see), the effect corresponding to the variation display being executed is changed to the continuous effect. It is good to configure as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by a sudden change in the effect being executed.

  Further, instead of changing the effect corresponding to the running variable display to a continuous effect, a continuous effect may be added to the effect corresponding to the running variable display and displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide a display area dedicated to the continuous effect. Thereby, even if the continuous effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to suppress the player from being puzzled.

  The continuous effect flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is being executed. Specifically, in the effect setting process (see Z5204 in FIG. 30300) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), the continuous effect setting process (see Z5306 in FIG. 304) is executed, and the display continuous effect command is set. In this case (Z5406 in FIG. 305), it is set to ON (Z5408 in FIG. 305).

  Then, it is referred to in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in FIG. 304) for setting the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (Z5501 in FIG. 306), and further in the stop command process (see FIG. 301). When it is determined that the continuous effect is not continued (Z5106: No in FIG. 301 or Z5110: No), it is set to off (see Z5116 in FIG. 301).

  The continuous production interruption flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the continuous production is suspended, and is set to ON when the continuous production is suspended. Here, the event in which the continuous production is interrupted will be briefly described. In this control example, a continuous effect is performed based on winning information relating to a first special symbol (special symbol 1), which is a special symbol variation that is substantially executed when the gaming state is in a normal state (not a probability changing state or a time saving state). It is configured to run. In the present control example, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be preferentially digested over the first special symbol (special figure 1), and a game is played in the second ball entrance 640a. The game playability (the type of the special symbol change executed) is configured to be different between the probable change state or the time saving state in which the ball easily enters the ball and the normal state.

  In addition, in the present control example, even if the gaming state is the normal state, a part of the case where the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win in order to temporarily facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2). In, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640a and restricting a game ball from entering the second entrance 640a opens for a longer period (2 seconds) than usual (0.2 seconds). It is configured to execute a winning game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, a game ball enters the second entrance 640a during the execution of the continuous effect using the plurality of winning information related to the first special symbol, In some cases, a change (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the first special symbol. When such a situation occurs, the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed, although the continuous effect executed based on the winning information of the first special symbol is executed. However, there is a problem in that the content of the effect being executed is different from the result of the lottery of the special symbol, thereby giving the player distrust.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed during the execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted, and the first special symbol ( It is configured to resume the continuous production that was interrupted when the fluctuation of the special figure 1) is executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation where the effect content being executed is different from the result of the lottery of the special symbol, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted.

  This continuous production interruption flag 223ad is set in the special production setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 304) for setting the production corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, when the continuous production flag 223ac is set to ON. If it is determined (Z5505 in FIG. 306: Yes), it is set to ON (Z5507 in FIG. 306). Then, when the continuous production interruption flag 223ad is set to ON, a “standby” display (in the interruption display mode of FIG. 291 (b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate that the continuous production is suspended. (refer to Z5508 in FIG. 306). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 304), when the target special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (Z5301 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to OFF (Z5304 in FIG. 304). ).

  With this configuration, during the execution of the continuous effect set for the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the variation (lottery) is given priority over the first special symbol (special figure 1). ) Is performed, when the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started, the continuous production is interrupted, and the timing of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed (special figure 2). At the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) changes, the continuous production that has been interrupted can be resumed at the timing of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). , A continuous effect can be executed.

  Further, when the continuous production is interrupted based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the execution of the continuous production, the continuous production is interrupted to the player. , So that the player does not feel uncomfortable when the continuous production ends suddenly, and plays the game while expecting the continuous production to resume. be able to.

  In the continuous effect update area 223ae, when the continuous effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous effect execution period, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous effect execution period, the background of the display screen is set to “sea background”. ”To another background (“ mountain background ”,“ river background ”) is an area for storing data for internally updating the continuous effect.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 87 (a), in the present control example, the continuous effect is performed only when “sea background (sea mode)” is selected as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be executed. The background of the display screen is configured to be variably set by the player operating the frame button 22. For example, a state in which the special symbol change is not executed (standby state) or immediately after the start of the special symbol change ( When the player operates the frame button 22 during the high-speed change, the background of the display screen is changed to “sea background (sea mode)”, “mountain background (mountain mode)” (see FIG. 292), and “river background ( River mode).

  Then, as a variable effect corresponding to the set background, a variable effect dedicated to each background or a variable effect common to a plurality of backgrounds is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the change (lottery) result of the special symbol based on the display mode (background) that can be variably set by the player. , A variety of effects can be provided, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the background of the display screen is variably set during the execution of the variation effect (for example, continuous notice) dedicated to the sea mode in the state where the sea mode is set. Then, a process of rewriting the display data related to the variable effect is executed so that the variable effect corresponding to the background after the variable setting is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Therefore, if the player accidentally operates the frame button 22 during execution of the continuous production and switches the background of the display screen from “sea mode” to “mountain mode”, the display data relating to the continuous production is deleted. Therefore, even if the display screen is switched to the "sea mode" by operating the frame button 22 again, there is a problem that the continuous effect is not executed and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  In order to solve such a problem, in the present control example, the continuous production update area 223ae is provided, and even if the background of the display screen is switched to a mode other than the “sea mode” during the execution of the continuous production, the continuous production update is performed. Is temporarily stored in the continuous production update area 223ae. After the background of the display screen is switched to a mode other than the “sea mode” during execution of the continuous production, the background of the display screen is set to “sea mode” again. When the mode is switched to “mode”, the remaining continuous effects can be executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous effect disappears due to an erroneous operation by the player.

  In the continuous production update area 223ae, in the continuous production setting process (see FIG. 305), after determining the production mode of the continuous production (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 305), it is determined that the background mode is not “sea mode”. In this case (Z5405 in FIG. 305: No), display data relating to the determined effect mode is stored (see Z5409 in FIG. 305).

  Then, in the effect return process (see FIG. 308) of the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 (see FIG. 307), when the background mode is switched to the “sea mode” (Z2871 in FIG. 308: Yes), it is stored. The displayed information is referred to, and a display effect command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 308). After that, when the continuous production ends, information (display data indicating the production mode) stored in the area is deleted (see Z5310 in FIG. 304).

  The effect number counter 223af is a counter for indicating a period during which a continuous effect is executed (the number of times the special figure changes). When it is determined that a continuous effect is to be executed in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 300) (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), the effect number counter 223af is a special symbol 1 hold ball counter 223a corresponding to the received prize command. Is set (Z5010 in FIG. 300). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 304) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), when it is determined that the value of the counter is larger than 0 (Z5305 in FIG. 304: Yes), a continuous effect is set. Is performed (Z5306 in FIG. 304).

  The value of the effect number counter 223af is decremented by one each time the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 305) is executed (Z5407 in FIG. 305). With such a configuration, the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is executed by the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 300), that is, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. A continuous effect can be executed using the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect from the variable display executed in the set state is executed.

  Note that, in the present control example, the continuous production is performed using the above-described period. However, other periods may be set as the period for performing the continuous production. May be performed at the timing when it is determined that the continuous production is performed, and the continuous production may be started by varying the production mode of the variable display being executed, or the first special symbol (Special FIG. 1) in a state where the continuous production flag 223ab is set to ON. The continuous effect may be executed when the number of times of change in ()) is two. In addition, in a state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON, when setting a new display mode of the variable display (when performing the variable display setting process 2), it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous effect. May be provided, and when the execution determining means determines that the continuous effect is to be executed, the continuous effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the continuous production is started, and to provide an unexpected production.

  The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is a flag for preventing a new continuous effect from being set during the execution of the continuous effect, and is set to ON during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed. The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011 in FIG. 300) when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300) (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not to execute a continuous effect (the process of Z5005 to Z5007 in FIG. 300) is skipped in the winning information-related process (see FIG. 300). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a new continuous effect from being set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a new continuous production is started while the player is watching the progress of the continuous production and the player is not satisfied. Then, in the stop command processing (see FIG. 301), when it is determined that the continuous effect has been completed (the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON) (Z5102 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is set to OFF. (Z5103 in FIG. 301).

  In the present control example, the determination as to whether or not to execute a continuous effect is made based on the timing at which a new winning command is received, that is, the timing at which the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 300) is executed. The timing at which the stop command for termination is received, that is, when it is determined that the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON in the stop command processing (Z2259 in FIG. 301) (Yes in Z5102 in FIG. 301). It is configured to run. Therefore, in the stop command process (refer to FIG. 301), it is also set to ON when it is determined that a continuous effect is to be executed (Z5111 in FIG. 301).

  The time-saving counter 223ai is a counter for grasping the number of remaining times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the time-saving state is set when the time-saving state is set as the gaming state. When a status command indicating that the gaming state has shifted to the time saving state is received from the main control device 110, a value (100 in the present control example) corresponding to the set number of time savings is set in the time saving counter 223ai. In the stop command process (see FIG. 301), each time the mid-time saving process (see FIG. 302) is executed when it is determined that the current gaming state is during the time saving operation (Z5101: Yes in FIG. 301). One is subtracted (see Z5151 in FIG. 302).

  Then, in the processing during the working hours (see FIG. 302), it is determined whether the value of the working hours counter 223ai is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 302), and when it is determined to be 0 (Yes in Z5152 in FIG. 302), the fluctuation is reduced. The value of the number-of-times counter 223aj is set to 5.

  The change number counter 223aj is a counter for grasping the change number of the special symbol after the time saving state ends. In this control example, a special effect (see FIG. 291 (b)) is executed when a variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. ing. This is because, in a normal state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second entrance 640, a game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuates. It is for giving a privilege. However, when the gaming state is a time-saving state, that is, a state where a game ball easily enters the second entrance 640 (a state in which the electric auditors product 640a is easily opened), the suspension of the special figure 2 is obtained, and The change of the second special symbol corresponding to the hold (special figure 2 hold) may be executed in the normal state after the end of the working hours. Even in such a case, if the special effect is executed, the special effect frequently occurs after the reduction of working hours, and it is difficult to give a special feeling of the special effect to the player.

  With respect to the above-described problem, in the present control example, the special effect is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol executed within a predetermined period after the end of the working hours. Specifically, a determination process is performed to determine whether the number of times the special symbol has been changed after the end of the working hours has reached a predetermined number of times (five times in the present control example), and has not reached the predetermined number of times (five times). If it is determined that the special effect is not set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation where a special effect frequently occurs after the end of working hours.

  In this control example, the number of times of the special symbol executed after the end of the working hours is changed five times, that is, a value larger than the upper limit (four) of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the special figure 2) is set to the predetermined number of times. Even if the time saving state ends with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being the upper limit, the special effect is executed by the reserved ball of special figure 2 acquired during the time saving state However, a condition other than the above-described control example may be set as a condition under which the special effect is not executed. For example, the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (special figure 2) may be set. A value (for example, 3) smaller than the upper limit (4) may be set as the predetermined number. With this configuration, if the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 reaches the upper limit at the end of the working hours, a special effect will be performed, so that the player is willing to use the reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 It can be stored and the operation of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present control example, a condition using the number of times of the special symbol is set as a condition for not setting the special effect, but other conditions may be set, for example, after the time saving state ends. Measuring means for measuring the elapsed time may be provided, and the fact that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means has not passed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set as a condition for not setting a special effect. By setting the conditions based on the elapsed time in this manner, for example, when the game is ended immediately after the time reduction state ends (the game is played without changing the special symbol after the time reduction state ends and the normal state is reached). Is terminated), it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being restricted for the game played by the next player.

  In addition, game state discriminating means for discriminating a game state at the timing when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is provided, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state by the game state discriminating means. When it is determined that the ball has been hit, the execution of the special effect as a variable display for the incoming ball may be restricted (prohibited).

  When the time-saving counter 223ai determines that the value of the time-saving counter 223ai is 0 in the medium-hour processing (see FIG. 302) (Z5152: Yes in FIG. 302), the variation counter 223aj restricts (prohibits) execution of the special effect. A value indicating the number of times the symbol has changed (5 in this control example) is set (Z5153 in FIG. 302), and the value is decremented by 1 each time the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 99) is executed. Then, in the special effect setting process for setting the special effect (see FIG. 306), the value of the change number counter 223aj is referred to, and when it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502 in FIG. 312: No). The effect mode of the normal effect is set without setting the effect mode of the special effect (Z5510 in FIG. 312).

  The operation invalidation flag 223ak is a flag for indicating a period during which the operation of switching the background of the display screen is invalidated, and is set to ON during the period of invalidating the operation of switching the background of the display screen. In this control example, as described above, the special effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the background of the display screen can be switched during the period in which the special effect is being executed. Not configured. With this configuration, the player erroneously operates the frame button 22 during the period in which the effect (special effect) that is difficult to execute is being executed. Switching of the background of the display screen during execution of the special effect can be suppressed.

  The operation invalidation flag 223ak is set to ON when the special effect setting mode is set in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 306) (Z5504 in FIG. 306), and the first special symbol is set in the effect setting process (FIG. 304). When the fluctuation effect of (Special figure 1) is set (Z5301 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to OFF (Z5302 in FIG. 304). While the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON, the process of changing the background of the display screen (the process of Z2803 to Z2852 in FIG. 307) is performed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 103). Skipped.

  The state storage area 223az is an area for storing state information for indicating the current gaming state based on a state command output from the main control device 110. Specifically, when it is determined in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 299) that the status command has been received (Z2256 in FIG. 299: Yes), the status information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 299). In this control example, the information stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be deleted when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. 10, the main controller 110 outputs a status command for indicating the current game status when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, so that when the power is turned off (power failure). Etc.), the game state can be appropriately determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

<Control processing by main controller in second control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 244) is performed in the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 294), and the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 246) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 247) are performed in the special symbol variation process. The point that the symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 295) is changed to the start winning process (FIG. 248) is changed to the start winning process 2 (FIG. 296), and the prefetch process (FIG. 249) is changed to the prefetch process 2 (FIG. 297). The main difference.

  With reference to FIG. 294, a special symbol variation process 2 (Z154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (Z154). In the special symbol variation process 2 (Z256: FIG. 295) in the second control example, the processes of Z203 to Z214 are replaced with the processes of Z330 to Z340, in contrast to the special symbol variation process (Z104: FIG. 244) in the first control example. The difference is that it has been changed. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (Z256: FIG. 295), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (Z201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (Z201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (Z330).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 1 or more (Z331). When it is determined that the number is 1 or more (Z331: Yes), the value of the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (Z332), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter changed by the calculation is calculated. A pending ball count command indicating the value (N2) of 203e is set (Z333). According to the pending ball number command set here, the command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is executed by the MPU 201 in an external output process (Z1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 258). Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z333, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z265). In the process of Z265, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 2 for starting variable display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z340).

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z331, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (Z331: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (Z335).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (Z336). If it is determined that the number is 1 or more (Z336: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z337), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is subtracted. A reserved ball count command indicating a value is set (Z338). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z338, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z339). In the process of Z339, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 2 for starting variable display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z340). The special symbol change start process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z336, if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is 0 (Z336: No), this process ends.

  Here, the special symbol change start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 295. In the special symbol change start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) in the second control example, the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209: FIG. 246) and the special symbol 2 change start process (214: FIG. 247) in the first control example. The difference is that the processes are performed collectively. The details of the processing are the same as those in the first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 296, the start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. The start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) in the second control example is different from the start control process (Z105: FIG. 248) in the first control example in that the processes of Z308 and Z316 are not executed. The difference lies in that the processing is collectively executed by the processing of Z360. The details of the processing are the same as those in the first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 297, the prefetching process 2 (Z360), which is one of the start winning processes 2 (Z155) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the content of the prefetching process 2 (Z360).

  In the pre-reading process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new winning information (Z361: No), the present process is terminated. When it is determined that there is new winning information (Z361: Yes), the special symbol random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selecting counter C3, and the variation type corresponding to the current winning from the special symbol holding ball storage area. The value of each of the counters CS1 is obtained (Z362). Next, among the determination results specified in the special symbol large hit random number table 202a, a hit determination result corresponding to the value of the obtained special random number counter C1 is obtained (Z363). Next, among the determination results specified in the big hit type selection table 202d, a hit type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2 is obtained (Z364).

  Next, among the determination results specified in the stop type selection table, a stop type determination result corresponding to the obtained value of the stop type selection counter C3 is obtained (Z365). Next, among the determination results specified in the variation pattern selection table 202b, a variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (Z366). Next, the winning determination information including the obtained hit determination result, the hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, the stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and the prize information including the fluctuation type information indicating the fluctuation type determination result The command is set (Z367), and the process ends.

<Control processing by voice lamp control device in second control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, in contrast to the first control example, the frame button input monitoring / production process (Z2107), which is one of the main processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, is performed. The main difference is that the command determination process (Z2113) is changed to the command determination process 2 (Z2152), the variable display setting process (Z2114) is changed to the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) in process 2 (Z2151). It is a difference.

  With reference to FIG. 299, the command determination process 2 (Z2152) in the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination processing 2 (Z2152).

  In the command determination process 2 (Z2152), it is first determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received (Z2201). If it is determined that the received command has been received (Z2201: Yes), the change start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2251), a change pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and this processing ends. I do. Note that the processing of Z2203 to Z2207 is the same processing as in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, when it is determined in the processing of Z2206 that the pending ball number command has not been received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command information has been received (Z2253). When a winning information command is received (Z2253: Yes), winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2254). Next, the winning information-related processing (Z2255) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the winning information-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of Z2253, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (Z2253: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (Z2256). If it is determined that the status command has been received (Z2256: Yes), the status information indicating the gaming status corresponding to the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223az (Z2257), and this processing ends.

  In the process of Z2256, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (Z2256: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (Z2258). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2258: Yes), the stop is performed. Command processing (Z2259) is executed. Details of the stop command processing (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2260), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2258, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2258: No), a process according to another command is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 300, the winning information related processing (Z2255) which is one of the command determination processing 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning information-related processing (Z2255).

  In the winning information related processing (Z2255), first, the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223f (Z5001). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether the read value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003). If it is not 2 or more (Z5003: No), this processing ends.

  In the processing of Z5003, when the read value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004). When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is ON (Z5004: Yes), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is off (Z5004), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is read (Z5505), and execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous effect (Z5007). If the continuous effect is not to be executed (Z5007: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when performing a continuous effect (Z5007: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5009), and the read value of the counter is read. It is set as the value of the effect number counter 223af (Z5010). Next, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011), and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 301, a stop command process (Z2259) which is one of the command determination processes 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command processing (Z2259).

  In the stop command processing (Z2259), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is during working hours (Z5101). When it is determined that the working hours are reduced (Z5101: Yes), the processing during the working hours is reduced (Z5115), and this processing ends. Details of the processing during time saving (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z5101, when it is determined that the time is not reduced (Z5101: No), it is determined whether the setting prohibition release flag 223ah provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z5102). When the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is off (Z5102: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, when the effect prohibition release flag ah is on (Z5102: Yes), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag and the setting prohibition release flag ah are set off (Z5103), and the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball counter 223a is set. Is read (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether or not the read value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that the number is not equal to or more than 2 (Z5105: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z5105, when it is determined that the value of the read counter is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of 2 or more is entered as prize information. Reading is performed from the storage area 223f (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether or not there is jackpot winning information (Z5107). When it is determined that there is no big hit prize (Z5107: No), the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to off (Z5116), and the process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the jackpot winning information is present (Z5107: Yes), the continuous production execution selection table 222aa provided in the ROM 222 is read (Z5108), and the execution of the continuous production is determined (Z5109). After executing the processing of Z5109, it is determined whether it is time to execute a continuous effect (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: No), the processing of Z5116 described above is executed, and this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is a timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5111), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5112). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a corresponding to the jackpot winning is set as the value of the effect number counter 223af (Z5113), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5114), and this processing is performed. finish.

  With reference to FIG. 302, a description will be given of the processing during time reduction (Z5115) which is one of the stop command processing (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing during time saving (Z5115).

  In the processing during time saving (Z5115), first, the value of the time saving counter 223ai provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). When it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: Yes), the value of the variation counter aj is set to 5 (Z5153), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 223ai is greater than 0 in the processing of Z5152 (Z5153: No), the processing of Z5153 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 303, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153), which is one of the main processes 2 (FIG. 298) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). The variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the second control example is different from the variable display setting process (Z2114) in the first control example in that processes Z5204 to Z5208 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of Z5202, the extracted fluctuation pattern is obtained (Z5203). Next, an effect setting process (Z5204) is executed. Details of the effect setting process (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), the data in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207). When it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207: Yes), the value of the change number counter 223aj is decremented by 1 (Z5208). In the process of Z5207, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223aj is 0 (Z5207: No), the process of Z5208 is skipped, and the process proceeds to Z5209.

  The effect setting process (Z5204), which is one of the variable display setting processes 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (Z5204).

  In the effect setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the current variation is a variation in the first special symbol (Z5301). If it is a change in the first special symbol (Z5301: Yes), the operation invalid flag 223ak provided in the RAM 223 is set to OFF (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect suspension flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303). When it is determined that the continuous production interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303: Yes), the continuous production interruption flag 223ad is set to OFF (Z5304). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5303 that the continuous effect suspension flag 223ad is set to off (Z5303: Yes), the processing of Z5304 described above is skipped.

  After executing the processing of Z5304, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect number counter 223af is greater than 0 (Z5305). When it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (Z5305: Yes), the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the value of the effect number counter 223af is 0 in the process of Z5305 (Z5305: No), the variation pattern of the mode without the continuous effect is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off (Z5308: No), the present process is terminated. When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308: Yes), the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is cleared (Z5310), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z5301, when it is determined that the current variation is not the variation in the first special symbol (Z5301: No), the special effect setting process (Z5311) is executed. Details of the special effect setting processing (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 305, the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) which is one of the effect setting processes (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306).

  In the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to off (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect number counter 223af is 1 (Z5402). When it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223af is 1 (Z5402: Yes), a continuous effect final form corresponding to the special symbol lottery result is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, when the value of the effect number counter 223af is other than 1 (Z5402: No), the continuous effect continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the process of Z5405 is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the background mode is currently set to the sea mode (Z5405). When it is determined that the setting is the sea mode (Z5405: Yes), a display continuous production command for indicating the decided production mode is set (Z5406). Next, the value of the production number counter 223af is decremented by 1 (Z5407). ), The continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON (Z5408), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set mode is not the sea mode (Z5405: No), the determined effect mode is stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae (Z5409), and a display information command indicating that the continuous effect is in standby is provided. It is set (Z5410). After that, the processing of Z5407 to Z5408 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 306, the special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the content of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

  In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is during working hours (Z5501). When it is determined that the time is not working (Z5501: No), it is determined whether the value of the change number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502). When it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502: Yes), the special effect production mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery result is set (Z5503), and the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON. (Z5504).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON (Z5505). When it is set to ON (Z5505: Yes), it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5506). If it is set to off (Z5506: No), the continuous effect suspending flag 223ad is set to on (Z5507), and a display suspend command is set (Z5508). Next, a display effect command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (Z5509), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5501 that it is time reduction (Z5501: Yes), or if it is determined in the processing of Z5502 that the value of the fluctuation counter 223aj is not 0 (Z5502: No), The effect form of the normal effect corresponding to the special symbol lottery result is set (Z5510), the processing of Z5509 described above is executed, and this processing ends. Further, in the processing of Z5505, when it is determined that the continuous production flag 223ac is off (Z5505: No), or when it is determined that the continuous production suspension flag 223ad is set to on in the processing of Z5506 (Z5506: Yes), the processing of Z5507 to Z5508 described above is skipped, the processing of Z5509 is executed, and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 307, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (Z2151) in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. FIG. 307 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (Z2151). The second control example is different from the first control example in that the processing of Z2851 and the processing of Z2852 are added to the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (Z2107). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description is omitted.

  In the process of Z2851, it is determined whether or not the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851). When it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is off (Z2851: No), the same processing as that of Z2803 to Z2804 in the first control example is executed, and then the effect return processing (Z2852) is executed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 308, effect return process (Z2852), which is one of frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (Z2151) executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. Will be described. FIG. 308 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect return processing (Z2852).

  In the effect return processing (Z2852), first, it is determined whether the set background mode is the “sea mode” (Z2871). If the background mode is not the “sea mode” (Z2871: No), this processing ends. When it is determined that the background mode is the “sea mode” (Z2871: Yes), the effect mode stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is read (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no storage information (Z2873: No), this processing ends. When it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the stored effect mode is set (Z2874), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 307, the description will be continued. The effect return process (Z2852) is executed, then the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851: Yes), a sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described third control example, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started during the execution of the continuous production, the continuous production under execution is interrupted, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is changed. Was used to restart the continuous production that was interrupted at the start of the change of the first special symbol after the end of the game. As a result, the continuous effect can be executed in response to the change of the first special symbol, and the continuous effect can be enjoyed to the end.

  However, in the configuration of the above-described second control example, if the continuous production is interrupted, the continuous production is always resumed after the elapse of a predetermined period (after the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2). Since it is not possible for a player to be thrilled, it has been required to further enhance the production effect. On the other hand, in the third control example, the interruption is performed based on the game content (the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2) when the continuous production is interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous production. It is configured to determine whether or not to restart the middle continuous effect, and to restart the continuous effect based on the determination result. With this configuration, when the continuous production is interrupted, it is possible to predict whether or not the continuous production will be resumed while enjoying the special production performed as the variable production of the special figure 2. The effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the third control example, the continuous production is easily restarted when the lottery result of the special figure 1 to be subjected to the continuous production is a big hit. This allows the player to play the game while expecting the continuous production to be resumed. In the third control example, the smaller the number of special figure 2 changes (the number of executions of the special effect) executed while the continuous effect is interrupted, the easier it is to restart the continuous effect. Accordingly, when the period from when the continuous production is interrupted to when it is restarted is short, the continuous production can be easily restarted, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, if a long time has elapsed since the continuous production was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous production is out of order, the player is not given unnecessary expectation of the jackpot. In order to do so, it is configured such that continuous production is difficult to resume.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the modification. The third control example is different from the second control example in that a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is added to the RAM 223 of the second control example. Other elements are the same as those in the second control example, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 2 change counter 223ba is a counter for measuring the number of changes of the second special symbol. When the special effect setting process 2 (FIG. 312) sets the effect mode of the special effect, the value of the counter is changed. One is added (Z5551 in FIG. 312), and the value of the counter is referred to in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 311) in the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 310) (Z5602 in FIG. 311). In the processing of Z5602, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602 in FIG. 311: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (FIG. 311). Z5603). On the other hand, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is determined to be 3 or more (Z5602: No in FIG. 311), that is, the second special symbol fluctuation is executed three times or more while the continuous effect is interrupted. If it is determined that there is winning information indicating a jackpot in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol (Z5605 in FIG. 311), and if not (Z5605 in FIG. 311: Yes). Then, the value of the effect number counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 311), and the processing of Z5603 described above is executed.

  That is, in the continuous production return process (see FIG. 311), when the continuous production that has been interrupted is to be restored, the number of times of the special figure 2 executed during the suspension of the continuous production is not less than a predetermined number (three times). Based on the lottery result included in the winning information of the special map 1 at that time, it is determined whether or not the continuous production is to be resumed. If the production result of the continuous production is out of order, the continuous production is resumed. In this case, the value of the number-of-times counter 223af is set to 0, so that the continuous effects are not restarted. In this way, when a long time has elapsed since the continuous production was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous production is out of order, the player is given an unnecessary sense of expectation for the jackpot. In addition to being able to suppress such a situation, it is possible to give an expectation to a jackpot when the continuous production is restarted, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

<Regarding control processing by voice lamp control device in third control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The third control example is different from the second control example in that the contents of the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304), which is one of the variable effect setting processes 2 (Z2153: FIG. 303), are partially changed. Mainly different. Other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect setting process 3 (Z5204), which is one process of the variable display setting executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. The effect setting process 3 (Z5204: FIG. 310) in the third control example is different from the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304) in the second control example in that the process of Z5310 is not executed, and the special effect process (Z5311). ) Is different in that the processing content is changed, and a continuous effect return process (Z5351) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The continuous effect return process (Z5351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect return process (Z5351).

  In the continuous effect return processing (Z5351), first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is read (Z5601). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special figure 2 fluctuation counter is smaller than 3 (Z5602). If it is determined that the value is greater than 3 (Z5602: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 change counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602: No), the winning information corresponding to the special figure 1 stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read. (Z5604). Next, it is determined whether or not the read prize information has a prize (Z5605). If it is determined that there is no winning (Z5605: No), the value of the effect number counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606), and then the above-described processing of Z5603 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5605 that there is a winning (Z5605: Yes), the processing of Z5603 is executed, and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 312, the special effect setting process 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: FIG. 312) in the third control example executes the process of Z5504 in the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the second control example, and then executes the special figure 2 change counter 223ba. The difference is that a process of adding 1 to the value (Z5551) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The fourth control example is different from each of the above-described control examples in that the fourth control example includes an adjustment unit that allows a player to adjust the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

  First, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 313 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 313, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example is different from the first control example in that a volume button 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume is provided. The difference is that other configurations are the same. About the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the real-time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The RTC 292 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and is configured by a real-time clock capable of measuring the current time. The RTC 292 has an input / output port, a device control unit, and a register. The RTC 292 is connected to an RTC power supply. The power supply for the RTC is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 292 which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC 292 even in a power-off state where the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. As the RTC power source 353, for example, a button-type battery is used, and is configured to be able to supply power to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

  An input / output port and a register are connected to the device control unit of the RTC 292. The input / output port is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so as to be able to communicate with each other. The device control unit controls the register to perform various controls such as clocking the current time and writing data.

  The register is a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored or an operation can be performed on the stored data. The register includes at least a clock register and a time information storage area.

  The clock register is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 seconds). It is determined whether or not the time period is the execution period of the time effect based on the timekeeping information measured in the timekeeping register.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the clock register (the clock information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) is stored in the power-on time storage area of the RAM 223 based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on. ) Or the time information stored in the time information storage area is determined. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed, the clock information stored in the time information storage area is stored in the power-on time storage area. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, the value of the clock register (time information corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC 292) is stored in the input time storage area. .

  Thereby, the clerk of the hall turns on the power simultaneously without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 of each pachinko machine 10 during the opening time of the hall, etc., so that the elapsed time since the power on of each pachinko machine 10 is grasped. Can be matched. Therefore, in each of the pachinko machines 10, the execution period of the time effect can be matched. On the other hand, when the power of some of the pachinko machines 10 is cut off during the opening hours of the hall (for example, when an error is cleared), when the power is turned on again, the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the timing information stored in the time information storage area can be stored in the input time storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing of execution of the time effect from being shifted between the pachinko machine 10 whose power is cut off and the other pachinko machines 10.

  Next, a display screen related to volume adjustment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 314 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 314 (b) shows that the game is not performed. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen (customer waiting screen) of the third symbol display device 81 in a standby state, wherein X (a) indicates that a special symbol change is performed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. X (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen during the first special symbol change since the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 314 (a), when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the return processing of the control devices such as the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 ends. A comment “Please wait” notifying the period up to is displayed as the returning display mode S1, and a volume gauge S2 for indicating the currently set volume is displayed. The volume gauge S2 is formed of a horizontally long gauge for visually displaying the current volume, and a set value display for indicating the current volume as a numerical value on the right side of the gauge. In FIG. "1" is displayed, and the shaded area corresponding to the set value "1" is displayed on the gauge. Although details will be described later, in the present control example, when the power is turned on, the set value “1” is set as an initial value of the set value of the volume.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 314 (b), when the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b is pressed while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed, a volume gauge S2 and a volume switching display S3 are displayed. You. The volume switching display S3 includes a “switching” display for indicating that the volume can be switched, a volume reduction display mode S3a for indicating that the volume is decreased when the left volume button 23a is pressed, and a “switch” display mode for pressing the right volume button 23b. And a sound volume increase display mode S3b indicating that the volume is increased. By pressing the left volume button 23a and the right volume button 23b while the volume switching display S3 is displayed, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when performing an illegal act on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, an act of illegally operating the control content of the main control device 110 and aiming at a big hit), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily turned off. Some turn off and cheat. In order to make it easier to find such misconduct, there is a countermeasure for generating a loud sound when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  However, in recent years, there are many pachinko machines 10 that temporarily emit a loud sound as a technique for enhancing the effect of production, and a large volume generated when the power is turned on in a game arcade where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are operating. There was a problem that the store clerk of the game hall overlooked. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to the time when the first special symbol change is completed, the minimum value of the volume setting range which can be variably set by the player is set. Is also configured to output a small sound. With such a configuration, in a gaming machine that emits a loud sound during a normal game, it is possible to create an uncomfortable state compared to the surrounding gaming machines by emitting an unnecessarily small sound, It can be easily discovered by a store clerk at a game arcade.

  Further, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the player cannot adjust the volume from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to when the first special symbol change is completed. It is possible to prevent the player who performed the action from operating the volume button 23 after turning on the power and adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 so as to output the same volume as the surrounding pachinko machine 10.

  Specifically, as shown in X (a), the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. 314 (b) described above is displayed on the customer waiting screen after the power is turned on, and the volume switching display S3 is not displayed. Make up. As described above, although a volume smaller than the set value “1” of the volume is output internally, the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the set value “1” is displayed on the display screen. It is possible to prevent the player who performs the act from seeing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and being perceived as the pachinko machine 10 that has been subjected to countermeasures against fraud.

  Similarly, as shown in X (b), even if the volume button 23 is pressed during the special symbol change in the first rotation after the power is turned on (a state in which a volume smaller than the set value “1” is output). However, the volume switching display S3 is not displayed, and the volume button 23 cannot be operated to change the set value of the volume.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The same elements as those in the above-described respective control examples are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example. Each of the above control examples is different in that a volume button 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) is provided, and is otherwise the same.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 317 (a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 317 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example is greatly different from the ROM of each control example described above in that a sound volume table 222ca is provided. The other elements are the same.

  The volume table 222ca is a data table in which volume setting values that can be set by operating the volume button 23 are defined. Here, the contents of the volume table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 318 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the volume table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 318, in addition to the set values (set values “1” to “4”) that can be set by operating the volume button 23, a predetermined condition after power-on is satisfied in the volume table 222ca. A set value (set value “A”) set when the user is present is defined, and a predetermined set value is set according to the state.

  Specifically, the set value “A” is set until the special symbol change (special figure change) in the first rotation after the power is turned on. When the set value “A” is set, a sound having a loudness of 15 db (decibel) is output. When the set value “1” is set by operating the volume button 23, a sound having a size of 30 db (decibel) is output, and when the set value “2” is set, a sound having a size of 75 db (decibel) is output. When a set value "3" is set, a sound having a size of 85 db (decibel) is output, and when a set value "4" is set, a sound having a size of 95 db (decibel) is set. A sound is output.

  In this control example, the configuration is such that the set value “1” is set as the initial value after the power is turned on. However, the configuration is such that the initial value of the volume is set according to various conditions. For example, a flag that is set to ON only when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is provided, and when the flag is set to ON, the set value “3” is set as an initial value. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the time when the power is turned on is determined, and a different set value is set as an initial value based on the determination result.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the third control example, a set volume storage area 223ca, a volume operation invalid flag 223cb, and a volume change standby flag 223cc are added to the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example described above. They differ in the point. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The set volume storage area 223ca is an area for storing (storing) the currently set volume, and is set in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 320) of the startup process 4 (see FIG. 319). The stored setting values are stored (Z6003, Z6004 in FIG. 320). Further, the set value set in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) of the main process 4 (see FIG. 321) of the audio lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 322).

  The volume operation invalid flag 223cb is a flag for indicating a period in which the change of the volume (change of the set value) based on the operation of the volume button 23 is invalidated, and the change of the volume (the set value Change) is set to ON during a period in which the change is invalidated. The volume operation invalid flag 223cb is determined when the RTC clock time is determined to be during business hours (for example, 10:00 am to 10:00 pm) in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 116) (Z6002 in FIG. 320). Yes is set to ON (Z6005 in FIG. 320), and is referred to in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) (Z6107 in FIG. 322). If it is determined in the process of Z6107 that the setting is on (see Z6107 in FIG. 322), the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 314 (a)) without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 314 (b)). ) Is set (Z6110 in FIG. 322). Then, it is turned off in the volume-related processing (see FIG. 324) executed in the stop command processing 4 (FIG. 323) (Z5122 in FIG. 324). That is, when the special symbol change is stopped and the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON, it is set to OFF.

  The volume change standby flag 223cc is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to ON when the volume can be adjusted. Things. In the third control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to first press the volume button 23 to display the volume switching display S3 on the third symbol display device 81. The volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (left volume button 23a or right volume button 23b) while the volume switching display S3 is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed when the volume button 23 is pressed by mistake during a game.

  If the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing the power-on operation in a state where the RAM clear switch 122 is operated (pressed state) when the power is turned on, the maximum operation setting is performed. The sound effect indicating that the RAM has been cleared may be output at a sound volume or at a sound volume higher than the maximum sound volume set by the operation. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent improper execution of improperly executing RAM clear and aiming at a random number value.

  Further, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the sound of the game is output at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by the operation until one change at the time of power-on is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed at a volume lower than the operation-set minimum volume, a sound such as BGM or a sound effect (effect sound) is output, and the third symbol display device 81 sets the volume. May be displayed, and the sound volume is maintained and output until the player operates the volume button 23. With such a configuration, when the game is started at the time of opening the game store after the power is turned on, the sound is output by the previous player's volume setting (volume setting of the previous day), and the large volume is output. Can be suppressed. Further, by setting the volume to be lower than the minimum volume, the player can be made aware of the fact that the volume is low and harming the player, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23. You can notice that it is configured. It should be noted that the volume may be switched to a volume lower than the minimum and the volume setting screen may be displayed by switching to the demo screen irrespective of when the power is turned on. Further, after the game is started (the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), during the period in which the volume setting smaller than the minimum volume is continued without operating the volume button 23, the changing special symbol is changed. Depending on the winning lottery result and the lottery result (pre-read result), which is stored and held, the display color (volume design and volume button (volume up by right operation, volume down by left operation) pattern) on the volume setting screen can be changed. It may be configured to notify the degree of expectation of winning. With this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game with a quiet volume until the fluctuation of the expected degree is high or the storage of the hold is performed.

<Control processing by voice lamp control device in fourth control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The fourth control example is different from the first control example in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added to the start-up process, a volume setting process (Z2171) is added to the main process, and a sound editing / output process (Z2109) is performed. The main difference is that the processing is added, and that the volume-related processing (Z5120) is added to the stop command processing, which is one of the command determination processings.

  With reference to FIG. 319, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 319) in the fourth control example is different from the start-up process (FIG. 275) in the first control example in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 320, an initial volume setting (Z2051) which is one of the start-up processes (FIG. 319) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial volume setting (Z2051).

  In the initial sound volume setting, first, the calculation time of the RTC is read (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether the business hours are currently open (Z6002). If it is determined that it is not during business hours (Z6002: No), the set value 2 is read from the volume table 222ca provided in the ROM 222, and stored in the set volume storage area 223ca provided in the RAM 223 (Z6003). This processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during business hours (Z6004), the set value 1 is read from the volume table 222ca, stored in the set volume storage area 223ca (Z6004), and the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set on. (Z6005), this process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 321, main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing 4. The main process (FIG. 321) in the fourth control example is different from the main process (FIG. 258) in the second control example in that a volume setting process (Z2171) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the volume setting process (Z2171), which is one of the main processes 4 (FIG. 321) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the content of the volume setting process (Z2171).

  In the volume setting process (Z2171), it is first determined whether or not the volume button has been operated (Z6101). If it is determined that the volume button has not been operated (Z6101), this processing ends. When the volume button is operated (Z6101: Yes), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z6102). When it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6102: Yes), a set value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222ca (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command for displaying a volume gauge corresponding to the read set value is set (Z6104). Next, an audio setting command for indicating the read set value is set (Z6105), the read set value is stored in the set sound volume storage area 223ca (Z6106), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z6102, when it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to off (Z6102: No), it is determined whether the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to on (Z6107). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to off (Z6107: No), a display volume change command for indicating a volume gauge and an adjustment display is set (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6109), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6107, if the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON (Z6107: Yes), a display volume command for indicating a volume gauge is set (Z6110), and this processing ends.

  Referring to FIG. 323, stop command processing 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop command processing 4 (Z2259). Stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example is different from the stop command processing (FIG. 301) in the second control example in that a sound volume-related processing (Z5120) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 324, the volume related processing (Z5120), which is one of the stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing the content of the volume-related processing (Z5120).

  In the sound volume-related processing (Z5120), first, it is determined whether the sound volume operation invalid flag 223cb provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z5152). If it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON (Z5121: Yes), the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to OFF (Z5122), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z5121, if it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag is off (Z5121: No), the processing of Z5122 is not executed, and this processing ends.

<About the fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth control example, a control process regarding the operation of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 5) provided in the operation device 300 (see FIG. 5) will be described. Only the differences from the first control example will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be omitted.

  In the fifth control example, mainly when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the initial operation of the tilting device 310 and the error processing at the time of the initial operation, and the control processing and the error in the operation of the tilting device 310 during the normal game. The processing will be described.

  With reference to FIGS. 325 (a) and (b), a display mode of an abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. FIG. 325 (a) shows an initial operation at power-on (tilt initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 342) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 110) when the tilt operation timer 223db of the tilt device 310 described later is set to 0 ( Even if the initial operation period to reach the origin position after the initial operation is reached, if not detected at the origin position, an abnormality notification display mode (error) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (Display).

  As shown in FIG. 325 (a), based on the fact that the tilting device 310 has not been moved to the origin position by the origin sensor of the operating device 300 even after the operation period in which the initial operation of the tilting device 310 ends. The text "Button return error A Please call a staff member" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to inform an employee of the hall that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. . In this control example, at the time of the initial operation, if the tilting device 310 is not moved to the origin position at the timing when the initial operation period ends, an error display as shown in FIG. I have. In addition, although details will be described later, a normal game that may not be able to perform a normal operation predetermined in a stage or the like cannot be performed by preventing a player from performing an action such as pressing down the operation of the tilting device 310 with a hand or the like. In the meantime, even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, an error is not immediately displayed, but a predetermined specific condition (for example, four times by operating the tilting device 310 every three fluctuations of the special symbol) In the case where an abnormality is continuously detected until the abnormality is detected by the operation of the tilting device 310), an error is notified so that the progress of the game is not a mechanical abnormality. It is configured to be able to suppress the problem of hindering regardless.

  It should be noted that the error display at the time of the initial operation is a mechanical (including control-related) abnormality by providing a display that can be identified as “button return error A” as shown in FIG. Is configured to be easily determined.

  As shown in FIG. 325 (b), after operating the tilting device 310 in a game effect during a normal game (during the game after the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is completed), the tilting device 310 is returned to the origin position. When performing the operation to move, if the movement (movement) to the origin position is not detected by the origin sensor even during the period to complete the movement to the origin position, an error is not immediately displayed and an error occurs internally. Is set to a status indicating the state where the symbol is detected, and thereafter, an operation of moving to the origin position is performed every three changes of the special symbol, and if it can be moved to the origin position for four consecutive times, the third symbol display device In the main display area 81, the character "button return error B please call the attendant" is displayed to inform the player and the hall employee that the tilting device 310 has an abnormality. Over display is executed.

  Here, by displaying a character "button return error B" different from that at the time of the initial operation, it is configured such that it is possible to easily recognize an abnormality during the normal game. As described above, in the present control example, during the normal game, the error display is performed by executing the error display in consideration of the fact that the player is playing a game that hinders the operation of the tilting operation 310. The system is configured so that infrequently executed problems can be suppressed. In addition, when an error display is performed during a normal game and it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the tilting device 310, the player is performing a game method that hinders the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long time. Therefore, the error operation of the tilting device 310 can be prevented at an early stage by the hall employee or the like confirming the game method.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 326 to FIG. 328, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 310, the change of the special symbol, and the touch sensor effect will be described. FIG. 326 shows a period in which the tilting device 310 performs an operation effect when the variation of the normal reach A is performed as the variation pattern of the special symbol (third symbol), and the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position (origin). FIG. 9 is a timing chart in an example in which detection is not performed by the origin sensor even during a period in which the return is completed.

  When the fluctuation display of the normal reach A (the fluctuation time (fluctuation period) of 30,000 ms) is determined, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the determination value “0-149” set in the operation effect selection table 222da described later. And if the value matches the acquired value of the effect counter 223h, a tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 (see FIG. 333 (a)) described later is determined. The tilting operation scenario A table 222 (refer to FIG. 333 (a)) indicates a position where the tilting device 310 is lowered to the position shown in FIG. Then, an operation of repeating the highest position (see FIG. 32) at intervals of 0.5 seconds is executed, and then an operation of descending to the original position shown in FIG. 22 is executed (set).

  When the out-of-normal reach A is executed, the third symbol is in the reach display mode (the third symbol in the left symbol column and the right symbol column is the same type of symbol) 18 seconds after the start of the change of the special symbol (T1). (Temporary stop (stop)). In the reach display mode, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 for indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 20 seconds after the start of the change of the special symbol. Here, it is described later that the tilting operation 320 is pressed and the frame button 22 is pressed for 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the start of the change of the special symbol. An operation valid period (T5) is set in which the detection is determined to be valid when detected by the detection sensor 324.

  As shown in FIGS. 326 and 333 (a), after 18 seconds (18000 ms) from the start of the fluctuation of the normal reach deviation A (T1), the drive motor 342 moves backward 210 (clockwise in FIG. 22). By the step rotation, the disk cam 344 rotates clockwise 210 degrees from the origin position (the position in FIG. 22) and moves to the cam removal position shown in FIG. 30 (operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 333 (a))). ). Thereafter, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (3000 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 333 (a))). After the stop period of 3 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 30), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 20 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to release the unlock position. (See FIG. 32) (see operation pointer 3 (FIG. 333) (a)).

  Here, when moving from the cam release position to the lock release position, as described above in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the release member 346 moves downward (counterclockwise). By the rotation, the rotating claw member 347 is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the locking (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotating claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is rotated by the torsion spring 315. It is raised by the urging force of. In this case, the driving operation of the voice coil motor 352 also provides the assistance in the front-rear direction to the tilting device 320, so that the ascending force is increased and the ascending speed is improved. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is on standby (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 333 (a))). Thereafter, the drive motor 342 is driven forward by 50 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32), so that the disk cam 344 rotates counterclockwise by 50 degrees and moves downward by 50 degrees from the highest position (see FIG. 32). It is moved to the pivoted lowering position (see FIG. 33) (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 333 (a))). Then, after 0.5 seconds, the drive motor 342 is driven again in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 33) by 50 steps, whereby the disk cam 344 is rotated clockwise by 50 degrees, and the tilting device 320 is again rotated. It is moved to the highest position (see FIG. 32) (operation pointer 6 (see FIG. 333 (a))).

  Thereafter, after 0.5 seconds again, the tilting device 320 is driven from the highest position to the swinging down position (the operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 333 (a))), and 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device is moved from the swinging down position to the swinging down position. The tilting device 320 is driven to the raised position (the operation pointer 8 (see FIG. 333 (a))). Thereafter, the drive motor 342 is stopped for one second (the operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 333 (a))). When the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 ends, the return operation process after the effect (Z2911: FIG. 340) is executed, and the drive is performed based on the origin detection operation A table 222d3 described later (see FIG. 334 (a)). When the motor 342 is driven in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 32), the disc cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise and the tilting device 320 is driven in a direction to descend to the origin position. Is transmitted.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 326, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed so as not to descend to the player at the highest position. In such a case, as described in the first embodiment, the movable clutch 343c is separated from the transmission gear 343b and the transmission gear 343b idles, so that the drive motor 342 is driven. Also, the disk cam 344 is configured not to rotate.

  Here, the detection sensor 324 detects that the drive motor 342 is at the origin position even after the tilting operation timer 223db (1900 ms) set in the origin detection operation A table 222db3 (see FIG. 334 (a)) elapses. If not, the tilting operation status is set to “4” as data indicating an abnormality of the tilting device 310 which will be described later (an abnormal state which is not a state of notifying the outside).

  As described above, even when the tilting device 320 is held by the player and the like, the drive motor 342 (the transmission gear 343b) may not be returned from the highest position to the original position by the configuration of the movable clutch 343c. By causing the motor to idle, damage to the drive motor 342, the transmission gear 343b, and the like can be suppressed. Further, the configuration is such that it is possible to determine from the tilting operation status that an abnormality has occurred in the home position return operation, so that an abnormal state can be internally identified.

  Next, referring to FIG. 327, when an effect in which the tilting device 310 moves up (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 326) is executed, even if the origin detecting operation period (for example, 1900 ms) elapses, the origin sensor is moved. The control executed after the tilting operation status is set to "4" without turning on the power is described. FIG. 327 shows that when the tilting operation status is set to “4”, a retry operation for returning the tilting device 310 to the origin position is executed every time three special symbol (special figure) fluctuations are executed. It is a timing chart in the case of being performed.

  When the tilting operation status is set to “4”, a retry operation in which the drive motor 342 is operated so as to move the tilting device 310 to the origin position every three fluctuations of the special symbol is executed as shown in FIG. Is done. In this case, the origin sensor must be turned on by four consecutive retry operations (four retry operations for every three changes) while maintaining the tilt operation status value at "4" until the origin sensor is detected. 325 (b) is executed.

  As a result, even when an effect of raising the tilting device 310 is performed and the origin detecting operation of the tilting device 310 is performed, the player performs a game such as holding the tilting device 310 so as to hinder the operation, and the origin position is determined. Even if an abnormality occurs that does not move to, the retry operation is not performed immediately as in the case of the abnormality during the initial operation, and the retry operation is performed every time the special symbol is changed a specified number of times (three times). And if it is still determined that it is not possible to continuously move to the origin position, an error is displayed, so that errors are frequently displayed due to mischief etc. A busy trouble can be suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 328, when the tilting operation status is set to “4”, and when the announcement effect using the touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the touch sensor 290 is turned on. Control in the case where the origin detection operation (retry operation) is executed based on the changed timing will be described. FIG. 328 is a timing chart showing the operation of the tilting device 310 executed when an effect using the touch sensor 290 is executed. The change of the special symbol starts, the notice effect in which the operation of the touch sensor 290 is valid is selected, the validity period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 290. When the operation is performed and the touch sensor 290 determines that the touch sensor 290 has been turned on, the drive motor 342 of the tilting device 310 is driven to perform the origin detection operation. FIG. 328 shows a case where the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on, and the tilting operation status is set to “0”. On the other hand, if the origin sensor is not turned on even after the elapse of the origin detection period (for example, 3600 ms), the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped, and the tilting operation status is maintained at “4”. . As a result, the retry operation is continuously performed every three changes, and control for eliminating the abnormality of the tilting device 310 can be performed.

  Usually, the player operates the firing handle with the right hand, and operates the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 290 with the left hand. When the player is playing a game while holding the tilting device 310 so that the tilting device 310 does not return to the origin position, it is conceivable that the player holds the tilting device 310 with the left hand. By performing the origin detecting operation of the tilting device 310, the origin detecting operation is executed in a state where the holding of the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In this control example, the origin detection operation is performed at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on. However, only when the touch sensor 290 is turned on while the touch sensor of the firing handle is turned on. The origin detection operation may be configured to be executed, and the origin detection operation may be performed in a state where the holding of the player is released more reliably. The present invention is not limited to the touch sensor 290, but may be a frame button 290, or a third symbol display device 81 may be used to execute a notice effect using both hands (for example, a character display such as "Raise both hands"). Alternatively, an effect of causing a mobile phone or the like to read a three-dimensional code or the like may be executed, and the origin detection operation may be executed during that period. An effect of notifying that both hands are used by voice may be naturally used.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 334. FIG. 329 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. In the fifth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Since the tilting device 310 has the same configuration as that already described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 85, the detailed description is omitted.

  The drive motor 342 is formed of a stepping motor, and is driven so that when the tilting device 310 is at the lower limit position, the tilting device 310 is released from being locked to prevent the tilting device 310 from rising at the lower limit position. When the lock is released, the vibration force of the later-described voice coil motor 352, which is driven in synchronization with the drive motor 342, in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is assisted and rises to the highest position by the urging force of the spring. .

  On the other hand, in a state where the tilting member 310 is located at the highest position, the tilting device 310 is moved downward by rotating the drive motor 342 in a reverse rotation to the case where the drive motor 342 is raised, and is moved to the origin position. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, the bottom plate 311a is locked by the rotating claw member 347 (see FIG. 22), and the tilting device 310 is prevented from rising.

  The detection sensor 324 is configured by the transmission type detection sensor already described with reference to FIG. 13, is configured by the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the tilting device 310 illustrated in FIG. , The left detection sensor 324L detects the left detection piece 311gL (ON state), and the right detection sensor 324R does not detect the right detection piece 311gR (OFF state). Thus, it is possible to detect that the tilting device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. Further, when the tilting device 310 is further pressed by the player in the lower limit position, the right detection sensor 324R detects the right detection piece 311gR (ON state), and both the left detection sensor 324L are turned ON. , The tilt device 310 can be determined to be operated by the player at the lower limit position.

  Accordingly, the tilting device 310 can be used in the effect of being pressed (operated) by the player not only when the tilting device 310 is moved to the highest position but also when it is restricted at the lowest position. It can be used for various effects. For example, if the effect of tilting device 310 rising and pressing is set to have a high probability of being executed during the change of the special symbol whose hit / failure determination result is a hit, the degree of expectation of the hit / failure determination result by tilting device 310 is increased. Can be represented.

  The voice coil motor 352 is disposed on the back side of the tilting device 310, and when driven, repeats vibration from the back side direction to the front side direction of the tilting device 310. This is for performing an effect that allows the player to feel vibration when the player touches the tilting device 310. Further, when the tilting device 310 rises, the lifting force is increased by the biasing force of the spring against gravity, but the lifting force is weakened by the weight of the tilting device 310. However, the voice coil motor 352 is driven when it is raised. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the lifting force is applied by the vibration from the voice coil motor 352 and the lifting force is weakened by its own weight.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first control example described above are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 330A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. The fifth control example is different from the first control example in that an operation effect selection table 222da, a tilt operation scenario table db, an origin detection operation A table 222dcc, an origin detection operation B table 222dd, and a tilt initial operation table 222de are added. doing.

  The operation effect selection table 222da is a table for selecting operation data (operation contents) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 332 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect selection table 222da. In the operation effect selection table 222da, a determination value of the effect counter 223h that determines whether or not to execute the operation effect using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability according to the variation type of the special symbol is set. The type of the tilt motion scenario is set for the determination value for executing the operation effect. The tilting operation scenario includes an operation effect start time (operation effect start period) serving as a timer value for determining a trigger to start an operation effect of the tilting device 310 as the special symbol change time elapses, and a tilting device 310. The operation validity start time (operation validity), which is a timer value of the tilting operation timer 223db for setting the operation time (operation period) of the tilting operation, and the timer value for determining the start time (start period) when the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid A start period) and an operation valid end time (operation valid end period) serving as a timer value for determining that the period in which the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid are ended. That is, based on the operation data selected from the operation effect selection table 222da, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if so, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310 and the game A valid period (T5) for validating the operation when the user presses the button is set.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is “Normal reach jackpot A” or “Normal reach A”, it is determined whether to acquire the value of the effect counter 223h and execute the operation effect. When it is determined from the effect selection table 222da that the operation effect is to be executed (when the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is any one of “0 to 149”), the operation scenario of the tilting device 320 is as follows. A tilting operation scenario A table 222bd1 to be described later is selected, 8800 ms is set in the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) (Z2923 in FIG. 341), 18000 ms is set in the operation effect start time (T1), and the operation effective start time (T3 ) Is set to 23300 ms, and the operation valid end time (T4) is set to 26800 ms. .

  When the variation pattern of the special symbol is “super reach jackpot A” or “super reach off A”, it is determined whether to acquire the value of the effect counter 223h and execute the operation effect. When it is determined from the selection table 222da that the operation effect is to be executed (when the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is any one of “0 to 149”), a tilt described later as an operation scenario of the tilt device is performed. The operation scenario B table 222bd2 is selected, the tilt operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 7900 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 341), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 38000 ms, and the operation effective start time (T3) is 41500 ms. Is set, and 45900 ms is set as the operation effective end time (T4). As described above, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period during which the operation is valid are set in advance in accordance with the type of change of the special symbol, and the operation is performed as time elapses.

  The tilting operation scenario table 222db includes the origin detecting operation tables A and B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the type of the tilting operation scenario and the tilting operation scenario selected in the operation effect selection table 222da. A data table for setting has been set.

  FIG. 332 (b) is a diagram showing a configuration of the tilting operation scenario table 222db. The tilt operation scenario table 222db includes a tilt operation scenario A table 222db1, a tilt operation scenario B table 222db2, an origin detection operation A table 222db3, and an origin detection operation B table 222db4.

  The tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is a table in which the operation contents in the tilting operation scenario A are defined, and can be selected when the variation pattern type is out of the normal reach A or per the normal reach A, and when the tilting device 310 is movable. Is stored. As described above, the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is set by the lottery of the operation effect selection table 222da at the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 333 (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1. When the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered after the change of the special symbol is started, the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is started.

  As for the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1, the operation content corresponding to the operation pointer is read out during the required time corresponding to the elapse of the tilting operation timer 223db in order from the operation pointer "1" (Z2953 in FIG. 343). Then, the defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes “10” (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

  Specifically, when the operation effect start time is triggered (18000 ms) after the start of the change of the special symbol, the operation data in which the operation pointer is “1” (210 steps during 2100 ms in the backward direction) The release member 346 is rotated clockwise by the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344, and the second overhang portion 344c3 is positioned above the releasing member 34 (see FIG. 30). (That is, the operation of moving the second protrusion 344c3 to the upper portion of the release member 34 (see FIG. 30) without operating the rotating claw member 347), and the cam is removed. Next, a standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is “2” (stopped for 3000 ms). The operation data with the operation pointer being “3” (movable in the forward rotation direction for 20 steps during 200 ms) is executed, and the unlocking operation (when the second overhang portion 344 c 3 rotates the release member 346 downward). Then, the disk cam 344 is moved to the unlocked position by rotating the rotary claw member 347 to release the locking with the tilting device 320, and the tilting device 320 starts to rise.

  Next, the operation data of which the operation pointer is "4" (stop for 500 ms) is executed, the ascending wait is performed, and the operation data of which the operation pointer is "5" (for 50 ms, 50 steps can be moved in the forward direction). ) Is executed, the operation pointer is set to the position shown in FIG. 33, the operation data with the operation pointer being "6" (movable in the backward direction by 50 steps during 500 ms) is executed, and the tilting operation to the position shown in FIG. 32 is executed. The operation data of which the operation pointer is “7” (movable in the forward direction by 50 steps during 500 ms) is executed again to the position shown in FIG. 33, and the operation data with the operation pointer of “8” (50 steps during 500 ms) (Movable in the backward direction) is executed, and the position shown in FIG. 33 is again obtained. The operation that is repeated twice from the operation pointers “4” to “8” is used as a fluttering operation, and the operation data with the operation pointer “9” (for 1000 ms) Is stopped), the operation is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 32, the operation pointer is set to "10", and the operation ends.

  As described above, the operation of the tilting device 320 performed in accordance with the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is such that the tilting device 320 is moved from the state of the origin to the highest position, and then the tilting device 320 is moved to the highest position. After performing the raising operation, an operation of returning to the origin position is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 326, when the tilting device 320 is pressed down and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts ascending, the detection is regarded as valid. The judgment is made, a specific announcement effect (for example, an effect for notifying the degree of expectation of winning, etc.) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 27 also provide a sound effect according to the announcement effect. And the lamp lighting mode is turned on. When the tilting device 320 is pressed down by the player before the elapse of the operation validity period (T5) of 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts ascending, the tilting device 320 detects the origin. Before the return operation by the operation A table 222db3 is performed, if the tilting device 320 is moved to the origin position by a pressing operation and locked by the rotating claw member 347 and held at the origin position, the origin detection is performed. The operation based on the operation A table 222db3 is executed, and the disk cam 344 is moved to the initial position (origin position).

  If the transmission gear 343b idles while being held by the player at the position where the tilting device 320 is raised or the like, the left detection sensor 353L is turned on to determine the initial position, and the position of the disc cam 344 is determined. Is returned to the home position.

  The tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is a table in which the operation content in the tilting operation scenario B is defined, and stores the operation data when the tilting device 310 is movable when the variation pattern type is Super Reach A. As described above, the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222da at the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 333 (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2. When the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered after the change of the special symbol is started, the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is started.

  The tilt motion scenario B table 222db2 reads out the motion content corresponding to the motion pointer from the motion pointer in order from "1" for a required time corresponding to the elapse of the time of the tilt motion timer 223db (Z2953 in FIG. 343). The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes “11” (tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

  Specifically, when the operation effect start time is triggered (38000 ms) after the start of the change of the special symbol, the operation data in which the operation pointer is “1” (50 steps in the forward direction during 500 ms) Is executed), the lock is released, the operation data of the operation pointer “2” (stopped during 3000 ms) is executed, the standby is performed, and the operation data of the operation pointer “3” is executed (200 ms 20 steps are performed in the forward direction, the operation pointer is "4", the operation data is "4" (for 20 ms, the 20 steps are backwards), and the operation pointer is "5". During the 200 ms, 20 steps are performed in the forward direction (movable in the forward direction), and the operation data with the operation pointer “6” (in the 200 ms, 20 steps are moved in the backward direction) is executed. Is "7" operation data (movable 20 steps forward in 200 ms), and the operation pointer is "8" operation data (moves 20 steps backward in 200 ms) Then, using the three repetitive operations of the operation pointers “3” to “8” as the motion, the operation data of the operation pointer “9” (movable in the forward direction by 120 steps for 1200 ms) is executed. 38, the operation data with the operation pointer of "10" (stop for 2000 ms) is executed, the operation is stopped at the position of FIG. 38, the operation pointer becomes "11", and the operation ends. .

  With this configuration, the tilting device 310 performs a fluttering operation during the reach effect, prompts the player to perform an operation, and changes the fueling operation in accordance with the variation type. In addition, by stopping the rising height (length) at different points, interest in the operation is generated, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In the present control example, the type of the tilting operation scenario is set in correspondence with the type of the fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured such that the determination value of the effect counter 223h is distributed and set, so that the selectivity is changed and set in accordance with the result of the determination as to whether the result is correct or not. With such a configuration, for example, when the hit / failure determination result is a hit, the tilt motion scenario in which the probability of being selected is set to be higher than that in the case of a miss is set, and the player is notified of the hit / failure determination result. Can be expected to win.

  In addition, as shown in the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, a tilting operation scenario type is set in which, after performing the tilting operation at the start of the operation, the tilting operation scenario is not moved up to the highest position but moved to the origin position. Is also good. With such a configuration, for example, the tilting operation scenario B is set to be easily selected when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit. By setting it so that it can be easily selected, the fan operation can be performed, so that the expectation of the jackpot can be increased.

  The origin detection operation A table 222db3 stores the tilting device 310 in the original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting operation scenario A. Operation data is stored.

  FIG. 334 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data with the operation pointer being “1” until the operation pointer becomes “2” (tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

  Specifically, the operation data in which the operation pointer is “1” (movable in the forward direction by 190 steps during 1900 ms) is executed, the operation pointer becomes “2”, and the operation ends.

  The origin detecting operation A table 222db3 indicates that the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the period in which the operation is valid, and the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). Alternatively, when the detection sensor 324 has not detected the origin (Z2961: No), 1900 ms is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223db based on the origin detecting operation A table 222db3, and 3 is set in the tilting status 223da. By performing (Z2959), the operation content of the origin detection operation A table 222db3 is read (Z2974) until the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 in the return operation processing after production (FIG. 344, Z2911), and the origin detection is performed. Is present (Z2971: Yes) or the tilting operation timer 223db is set to 0 That (Z2973: No) until, homing operation is performed.

  The origin detecting operation B table 222db4 stores the tilting device 310 at the original position (origin) when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting operation scenario B. Operation data is stored.

  FIG. 334 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db4. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data with the operation pointer being “1” until the operation pointer becomes “2” (tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

  Specifically, the operation data in which the operation pointer is “1” (movable in the forward direction by 190 steps during 1900 ms) is executed, the operation pointer becomes “2”, and the operation ends.

  The origin detecting operation B table 222db4 indicates that the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table has been completed, the player has operated the tilting device 310 during the valid operation period, and the tilting operation flag has been turned on (Z2957: Yes). Or when the detection sensor 324 has not detected the origin (Z2961: No). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222db4, 1900 ms is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223db, and 3 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2959). Until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0, the operation content of the origin detection operation B table 222db3 is read (Z2974), and the origin is detected (Z2971: Yes), or the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No). ), The home return operation is performed.

  The retry operation table 222dc stores operation data for repeatedly performing the home position detection when the home position detection operation is not performed after the tilting device 310 performs the tilt operation scenario and the home position detection is not performed. Have been.

  FIG. 334 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the retry operation table 222dc. The retry operation table 222dc indicates whether the operation pointer becomes “2” (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0) in order from the operation data of which the operation pointer is “1”, similarly to the operation of the above-described tilt operation scenario table. The process is performed until the origin is detected (Z2989: Yes).

  Specifically, the retry operation table 222dc ends when the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No) in the above-described origin detecting operation, sets 4 to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2975), In the retry operation process (Z2913) executed by setting 3 to the detection variation counter 223dc (Z2976) and setting 4 to the detection check counter 223dd (Z2977), the variation start timing (Z2981: Yes) of the special symbol is set. When the detection check counter 223dd is 1 or more (Z2982: Yes), and when the detection variation counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983), and 0 (Z2984: No), a retry is performed based on the contents of the retry operation table. Operating time (900 ms) Set between 223db is (Z2985), the detection check counter 223Dd 1 is subtracted (Z2986), the value after the subtraction is 1 or more: If (Z2987 Yes), sets the detection variation counter 223dc to 3 (Z2988). When the detection sensor 324 is not at the origin position (Z21989: No), when the tilt operation timer 223db is not 0 (Z2990: Yes), the corresponding operation content is read out (Z2991), and the retry operation is performed by the tilt operation timer. The process is performed until 223db becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 becomes the origin position (Z2989: Yes). As shown in FIG. 327, the above operation is set once every three times of the special symbol change, and is performed up to four times if the origin is not detected.

  The tilting initial operation table 222dd stores operation data for performing an initial operation setting of the tilting device 310 when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 334 (d) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting initial motion table 222dd. In the tilting initial motion table 222dd, similarly to the motion of the tilting motion scenario table described above, the motion pointer becomes “2” in order from the motion data of which the motion pointer is “1”, and the tilting motion timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: Yes). Or until the origin is detected (Z2933: Yes).

  Specifically, in the startup process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, if the contents of the RAM are normal (Z2205: Yes), the operation time (7200 ms) is determined based on the tilt initial operation table 222dd. ) Is set in the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2061), and the operation is started by setting the tilting operation status to 1 (Z2062).

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 331 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third control example. In the second control example, the tilting operation status 223da, the tilting operation timer 223db, the detection variation counter 223dc, the detection check counter 223dd, the tilting operation flag 223de, and the pressing advance notice are effective compared to the first control example described above. The difference is that a timer 223df is added.

  The tilting operation status 223da stores information for determining the operation state of the tilting device 310. The tilting operation status 223da is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is set in the startup process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, and the initial operation state is set.

  As the tilting operation status 223da, a process to be executed is determined according to the value of the tilting operation status 223da in the tilting device control process (Z2891), which is executed in the frame button input monitoring / producing process 3 (Z2161). . Specifically, when the value of the tilting operation status 223d is “0” (Z2904: Yes), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the tilting operation is in a standby state waiting for an operation start. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is “1” (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the tilting operation is in the course of the initial operation after the power is turned on. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is “2” (Z2908: Yes), the operation effecting process (Z2909) is executed, and the tilting operation is in the state of the operation effecting during the special symbol change. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is “3” (Z2910: Yes), a return operation process after the effect (Z2911) is executed, and the tilting operation is a return operation after the scenario operation.

  If the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "4" (Z2912: Yes), a retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and the tilting operation is in the process of performing a retry operation for detecting the origin. If the value of the tilting operation status 223d is other than that (Z2912: No), the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "5", and the execution in this process is terminated. This is an error state when the origin cannot be detected when the operation is performed. If the error state occurs, the tilting operation does not change until the power is turned on again.

  In the operation effect setting process (Z2905: FIG. 341), as described above, when the operation effect start time is triggered after the start of the change of the special symbol (Z2921: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2. The setting is made (Z2922), and the tilting operation is in the state of the operation effect during the special symbol changing operation.

  In the tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 342), when the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 in the initial operation (Z2933: Yes), 0 is set when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2933: Yes). Then, the tilting operation is in a standby state, and when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2933: No), 5 is set and an error state is set.

  In the operation effecting process (Z2909: FIG. 343), the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No), and when the tilting operation flag is off (Z2957: No), the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected ( (Z2961: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and the tilting operation enters a standby state.

  In the return operation process after production (Z2911: FIG. 344), when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2971: Yes), 0 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2972), and the tilting operation is in a standby state. To end.

  If there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No), and if the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set to the tilting operation status 223da, and the tilting operation is executing a retry operation. Becomes

  In the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 345), if the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected after the start of the change of the special symbol (Z2981: No) (Z2989: Yes), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972). ), The tilting operation is in a standby state, and when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2989: No), when the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: Yes), 5 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2992: Yes). Z2994), and the tilting operation is in an error state.

  The tilting operation timer 223db is a timer for counting the operation of the tilting device 310. When the power is turned on, the tilt operation timer 223db has an initial operation time set (Z2061). Each time the main process (FIG. 336) is executed, it is incremented by one and repeatedly updated.

  In the standby state when the value of the tilting operation status is “0”, an operation time according to the tilting operation scenario table is set (Z2923). When the tilting operation status is “2”, the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No) and the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes) when the tilting operation timer is set to “2”. The time of the origin detection operation is set based on the detection operation table. When the value of the tilting operation status is “4”, during the execution of the retry operation, the retry operation time is set based on the contents of the retry operation table 222dc (Z2985).

  The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is a counter that counts the number of fluctuations during the retry operation performed when the tilting device 310 does not detect the origin in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection variation counter 223dc tilts when the origin sensor of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2971: No) in the post-effect return operation process (Z2911) executed when the value 223da of the tilt operation status is “3”. When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 3 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in the retry operation.

  During the retry operation, if the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2982: Yes) at the special symbol change start timing (Z2981: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation remains, and the following determination processing is performed. Do. First, the detection variation counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983). If the subtraction result is 0 (Z2984: No), it is determined that the retry operation has been performed, and the tilt operation timer of the tilt operation timer is determined based on the contents of the retry operation table. After the setting (Z2985), if the result of subtracting 1 from the detection check counter 223dd (Z2986) is not 0 (Z2987: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (up to 4 times). , The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988).

  The detection check counter 223dd is a counter that counts the number of retry operations performed when the tilting device 310 does not detect the origin in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection check counter 223dd, when the origin return operation process (Z2911) executed when the value of the tilting operation status 223da is "3", when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2971: No), tilts. When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in the retry operation. Therefore, the retry operation is performed up to four times unless the origin is detected.

  The tilting operation flag 223de indicates that when the tilting operation scenario A or the tilting operation scenario B is being executed, the tilting device 320 is pressed down by the player during the operation valid period and is moved to the origin position, and the rotating claw member is rotated. 347 is a flag indicating that the lock is performed. The tilting operation flag 223de is detected by the detection switch 324 when the tilting device 320 is pressed down during the operation validity period by the process of Z2956 in the operation effecting process (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Is set to on when On the other hand, after the tilting operation flag 223de is determined to be on by the processing of Z2957, the tilting operation status is set to 3, and after the home position return operation is performed, the tilting operation status is set to off (see Z2960).

  When the tilting device 320 is not raised (ie, when the tilting device 320 is held by the rotating claw member 347 at the origin position), the pressing notice effective timer 223df detects that the tilting device 320 has been pressed as a staging switch. This is a timer for determining a valid period for effectively determining the detection of the switch 324. When the fluctuating pattern is determined, the press advance notice valid timer 223df determines the advance notice when the tilting device 320 is used as an effect switch. Data corresponding to a determined validity period is stored. When data corresponding to the validity period is set in the press notification validity timer 223df (Z2877: refer to FIG. 337), the cam removing operation is performed. Thus, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 may be executed due to the operation sound of the cam removal operation, the vibration transmitted to the player from the pachinko machine 10, and the like. Further, the press notification effective timer 223df is updated by decrementing by one by the press Z2873 (see FIG. 337).

<Control processing by main controller in fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 335 to 345, control processing by the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The fifth control example is different from the first control example in that a part of the start-up processing (FIG. 335) and a part of the main processing (FIG. 336) are added, and the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 272) has been changed to frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), and sensor input processing (Z2813: FIG. 273) has been changed to sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338). Retry processing during touch input (Z2860) : Tilting device control processing (Z2891: FIG. 340), operation effect setting processing (FIG. 341), tilt initial operation processing (Z2907: FIG. 342), operation effecting processing (Z2909: FIG. 343), return operation after effect The processing (Z2911: FIG. 344) and the retry operation processing (Z2913: FIG. 345) are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 335, the start-up process (FIG. 335) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 335) in the fifth control example is different from the start-up process (FIG. 257) in the first control example in that processes Z2061 to Z2062 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the start-up process (FIG. 335) in the fifth control example, after executing the process of Z2012 or the process of Z2013, the tilting initial operation table 222de provided in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 334 (d)). Based on this, the tilt operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and a main process (FIG. 336) described later is executed.

  Since the tilting operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the tilting device 320 is executed by tilting initial operation processing (Z2907: FIG. 342) described later when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the initial operation is executed, and the game can be started in a state where the game is moved to the origin position. Although illustration is omitted, the disk cam 344 is operated by the initial operation, and the step counter and the like are set to the initial values based on the left detection sensor 353L being turned on. Control can be performed stably.

  With reference to FIG. 336, the main processing (FIG. 336) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. In the main process (FIG. 336) in the fifth control example, the frame button input monitoring / production process (Z2107) is compared with the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (Z2161) in contrast to the main processing (FIG. 258) in the first control example. ). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 337, frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337) which is one of the main processing (FIG. 336) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. explain. FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161).

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), first, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is currently changing the special symbol for which the execution of the press notice is being determined (the press notice is being set). (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether the execution of the press notice has been determined. When it is determined that the pressing advance notice is being set (Z2881: Yes), it is determined whether the pressing advance notice is valid (Z2882). That is, it is determined whether or not the pressing advance notice is being executed, and it is determined whether or not the pressing advance notice valid timer 223df is a value larger than 0. When it is determined that the pressing notice effective period is in progress (Z2882: Yes), the pressing notice effective timer 223df provided in the RAM 223 is updated by subtracting 1 (Z2883). Next, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player, and it is determined whether the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). If it is determined that the tilting device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: Yes), the display pressing advance notice mode command is set (Z2885), and the flow shifts to the process of Z2890. In the processing of Z2881, if the advance notice is not being executed (Z2881: No), or if it is determined that the button is not pressed by the player in the processing of Z2884 (Z2884: No). , Skip other processing and shift to the processing of Z2890.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2882, when it is determined that it is not during the press notice effective period (Z2882: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the press notice effective period which is the start timing of executing the press notice ( Z2886). The start timing of the press notification is determined by a start timer (not shown) set at the start of the change of the special symbol and determined by the value of the start timer (when the start timer is updated to a specific value “0”).

  If it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period (Z2886: Yes), the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) defined as the value of the press notice valid timer 223df is set, and the cam removal operation is performed for 2100 ms. The reverse rotation operation of the drive motor 342 is set (Z2887). With such a configuration, the cam removal operation is always performed even when the tilting device 320 is pressed down and the lifting operation is not performed, so that the player can be expected to perform the upward effect.

  If it is not the start timing of the press notice effective period (Z2886: No), the process of Z2887 is skipped and the process of Z2888 is executed. Next, it is determined whether or not the press notice effective period has ended (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the press notice effective period timer 223df is 0. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the press-notification effective period (Z2888: Yes), the value of the press-notification effective timer 223df is reset, and a rewind operation of 1500 ms is set as the home position return operation (Z2889). On the other hand, in the process of Z2888, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the valid period (Z2888: No), the process of Z2889 is skipped and the process of the sensor input process 2 (Z2890) is executed.

  Details of the sensor input process 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the tilting device control processing (Z2891) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the tilting device control processing (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the sensor input process 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in the fifth control example, the processes of Z2826 to Z2829 are not executed with respect to the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 273) in the first control example. The difference is that a process (Z2860) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 339, the retry processing during touch input (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the content of the retry processing during touch input (Z2860).

  In the retry processing during touch input (Z2860: FIG. 339), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2861: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2861: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is larger than 0 (Z2862). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2862: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2862: Yes), it is determined whether the detection sensor detects the origin (Z2863). When it is determined that the detection is not the origin detection (Z2863: No), the drive motor is set to the reversing direction one step later (Z2864), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the detection sensor determines that the origin is detected (Z2863: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2865), and the process ends.

  The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilting device control processing (Z2891).

  In the tilting device control processing (Z2891: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2901). When it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2901: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is decremented by one. In the process of Z2901, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2901: No), the process of Z2902 is skipped and the process of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904), an operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, if the tilting operation status indicating the home return abnormality of the tilting device 320 is “4”, the retry operation of the home return is performed. By performing a retry operation for returning to the original position at a timing with a high probability that both hands are used (one hand operates the firing handle and the other hand operates the touch sensor 290), the tilting device 320 can be easily returned to the original position. Can be.

  Here, the operation effect setting process (Z2905), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (Z2905).

  In the operation effect setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether or not the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921). If it is determined that the operation time production start time has not been reached (Z2921: No), this processing is ended. If it is determined that the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, based on the tilting operation scenario table 222db provided in the ROM 222, the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is set (Z2923), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to OFF (Z2924), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 0 (Z2904: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906: Yes), a tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and this process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 342, the tilting initial operation process (Z2907), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilting initial operation process (Z2907).

  In the tilting initial operation process (Z2907), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2931). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2391: Yes), the operation contents of the tilting initial operation table 222de are read (Z2932: Yes), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2931, when it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: No), the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2933). When it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933: Yes), 0 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2934), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2933: No), the tilting operation status is set to 5 (Z2935). Next, a tilt error A command is set as a display error command (Z2936), and this processing ends.

  In this manner, unlike during the game, an error is displayed immediately (abnormal processing) in the initial return operation in the initial operation executed when the power is turned on, so that the malfunction of the tilting device 320 can be found early. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2906, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 1 (Z2906: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908: Yes), an operation effecting process (Z2909) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 343, the operation effecting process (Z2909), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effecting process (Z2909).

  In the operation effecting process (Z2909), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2951). When it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2951: Yes), it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223de provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to on (Z2952: Yes), the present process ends. When it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2952: No), the operation content corresponding to the tilt operation scenario table 222db is read (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether the operation is valid (Z2945). If it is determined that it is not during the operation validity period (Z2954: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the operation is valid (Z2954: Yes), it is determined whether or not a press is detected (Z2955). If it is determined that there is no press detection (Z2955), this processing ends. When it is determined that the press is detected (Z2955: Yes), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2956), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2951, if it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No), it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957). If it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the origin detection operation B table 222dd provided in the ROM 222 ( Z2958). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to OFF (Z2960), and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2957 that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2957: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2961: No), the processing of Z2958 to Z2960 described above is executed, and this processing ends. If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2861: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2908, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 2 (Z2908: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910: Yes), a return operation process after effect (Z2911) is executed, and the present process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 344, the effect return operation process (Z2911), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the return operation process after effect (Z2911).

  In the return operation process after effect (Z2911), first, it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971). If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2971, if it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2971: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2973). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2973: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222dd is read (Z2974), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2973 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2975). Next, 3 is set to the detection fluctuation counter 223dc provided in the RAM 223 (Z2976), and 4 is set to the detection check counter 223dd (Z2977), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2910, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 3 (Z2910: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912: Yes), a retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2912, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2912), the present process is terminated as it is.

  With reference to FIG. 345, the retry operation process (Z2913), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the content of the retry operation process (Z2913).

  In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981). If it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2982). When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2982: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2982: Yes), the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc changed by the calculation is larger than 0 (Z2984). When it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is larger than 0 (Z2984: Yes), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222dc provided in the ROM 222. (Z2985), the value of the detection check counter 223dd is decremented by 1 (Z2986). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2987). When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2987: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223dd sets the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc to 3, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2981, if it is determined that the timing is not the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989). When it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2989: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2990). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2990: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222dc is read (Z2991), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in Z2990, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2990: No), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2992). When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2992: Yes), this processing ends. When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: No), a tilt error B command is set as a display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 (Z2994), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2989, when it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is cleared (Z2995), and this processing ends.

  Note that, in the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in this control example, if the player presses or presses the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, even if the unlocking operation is performed, the rotating claw member 347 can be used immediately. As a result, the tilting device 320 is locked and a problem that the tilting device 320 is not lifted occurs. As a countermeasure, the unlocking operation is performed by setting the number of movable steps to 10 (forward rotation; required time: 100 ms) as the operation data of the operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 333 (a)) which is the unlocking operation. 31 is maintained at the position shown in FIG. 31, and the tilting device 320 can be configured to rise at the timing when the hand is released by configuring so as not to perform the tilting operation.

  Further, as another method, when the tilting operation status A is performed or the unlocking operation is performed, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the detection switch 324 or the upper surface of the tilting device 320 is pressed. Arrange the touch sensor and determine whether the touch sensor is sounding on. If it is on (if pressed), wait without unlocking and wait until it is off Thus, the unlocking operation may be performed at the timing of turning off. Further, when it is determined that the tilting device 320 is pressed or that the player is touching, the hand is released from the tilting device 320 by a display notification or a sound (the obstacle to the upward movement by the player is released). May be notified.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 to 370. In the first control example, when the jackpot A in which the probability of the success / failure determination is set to a low probability (electric support is given up to 100 times) after the jackpot game is executed, the odd-numbered symbol is displayed in the form of even-numbered symbols, Although it is reported that the jackpot is the jackpot A, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot A is executed, if the holding ball to be the jackpot is stored in the holding ball, the jackpot executed first is executed. The stop symbol of A, the effect during the jackpot, etc. are shown as if it is the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2, and the effect as if the high-probability game state (probable changing game state) is set even after the jackpot game. It differs from the first control example in that it is executed. Further, in the sixth control example, even when the third symbol of the even number symbol indicating the jackpot A is displayed, the jackpot type in which the probability change game state of the jackpot B1 or B2 is actually set during the jackpot game. Are set in advance, and at the start of the jackpot game, the type of the promotion effect is determined by lottery, and the promotion effect to be executed thereafter is determined based on the execution contents of the promotion effect (for example, whether or not the promotion is performed). This is different from the first control example in that the effect type is switched and set. The detailed description of the same points as in the first control example is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 346, an example of a special symbol stop display mode of the result of the hit / failure determination of the jackpot A in this control example will be described. FIG. 346 (a) shows that the prefetch result (preliminary determination result) of the reserved symbol h1 stored as the first reserved ball is the jackpot A, and the reserved symbol h2 of the reserved ball displayed as the third ball is shown. This is an example showing a case where the pre-read result is also the jackpot A. In this case, when the change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h1 is executed, normally, the odd symbols are displayed at the start of the change, but the odd symbols are displayed at the start of the change. It is switched and displayed. That is, the same stop symbol as that in the case of the change of the special symbol that is the big hit B1 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 346 (b), it is suggested that the jackpot game is executed in a short time, such as "Super jackpot! Expect the next!", And a probable changing game state is set. The notification as if it is a jackpot is executed. Thereby, in practice, even when the jackpot A is executed, the holding ball that becomes the jackpot A is stored, so that even when the jackpot A is executed, an effect as if the jackpot B1 was executed is executed. Thus, it is possible to make the player feel that the rate at which the jackpot B1 is executed is higher than the design value, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  With reference to FIG. 347 (a), a description will be given of an effect mode in which the special symbol is changed in the time-saving game state (game state with low-probability electric support) after the jackpot game in the example shown in FIG. 346. FIG. 347 (a) shows a state in which the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed in a state where the holding ball that becomes the jackpot A is stored (holding symbol h2). It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 347 (a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the character “super time” is displayed when the game is in the probable change game state despite the time reduction game state. Is displayed, and the character "Big hit expectation UP" is displayed, and a display mode suggesting that the expectation is high is not actually set to be high, but is displayed. In this way, a false notification different from the actual one is given to the player, thereby suppressing a problem that significantly impairs the reliability of the player. As described above, the notification substantially approximating the certainty-changing game state can also be referred to as a pseudo notification mode.

  FIG. 347 (b) is an example showing a stop display mode of a special symbol corresponding to the held symbol h2 held in FIG. 347 (a). The reserved symbol h2 is the result of the hit determination of the jackpot A, and the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot (any one of the jackpot A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C) is not stored in the reserved ball. In the same manner as in the above, the stop display is performed at the even-numbered symbols, and a notification indicating the big hit A is executed.

  FIG. 348 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving game state set after the big hit game of the big hit A in the example shown in FIG. 347 (b) is executed. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode according to the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 348 (a), the display form of the time reduction gaming state is that the character “CHANCE (100 times)” is displayed, the fluctuation of the special symbol is changed 100 times, and the time is reduced. It is notified that the game is being set. Further, each time the special symbol is changed once, the number (the number of times) is reduced by one and displayed.

  FIG. 348 (b) shows a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the jackpot game in the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2 is executed. As a display mode indicating that the probable change game state is set, the characters “during super time (probable change)” are displayed, and the player is notified that the game state is the probable change game state.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode is only partially different between the case where the time saving game state is set in a state in which the holding ball that becomes a big hit is stored and the case where the probability change game state is set. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the same character (for example, only during super time) may be displayed. Further, the game state is notified by the background color without displaying characters, and the time-varying game state is set in a state in which the probability-changed game state is set and the holding ball that is a big hit is stored. , An approximate color (for example, a red background color (probable change game state), or a pink background color (a time-saving game state in a state in which a reserved ball with a big hit is stored)). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the time-saving game state is as if the player is in the certain-change game state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 349 to FIG. 350, the promotion effect executed during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 349 (a) is an example of a display mode of an opening effect performed when a big hit game is started. When the big hit game is started, the characters "big hit! Start!" Are displayed and the player is notified that the big hit game has started until the specific winning opening 65a is opened.

  FIG. 349 (b) is a view showing an example of a display mode in an over-winning promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. The over-prize promotion effect is to finish one round by winning 10 balls in the specific winning opening 65a in one round. Based on the fact that 10 game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a, This is an effect in which a promotion effect in which information on the jackpot type is notified based on the fact that the game ball has further won the specific winning opening 65a until the opening / closing door 65b is changed to the closed state is executed.

  In the over-winning promotion effect, the characters "Put a ball in the attacker and get the key !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a game ball is put in the specific winning opening 65a (corresponding to the attacker) to insert the game ball. A display indicating that a symbol is displayed (given to the player) is displayed. Furthermore, the character "Treasure box chance !!" is displayed when 11 keys are accumulated, so that when 11 keys are accumulated, the promotion effect indicated by "Treasure box chance !!" (over-winning promotion effect) is executed. Is notified to the player. Since one key is configured to be displayed each time a winning is made in the specific winning opening 65a, at the timing when 11 keys are displayed, one over-winning has occurred. Therefore, when an over-prize is generated, “treasure box chance!” Is executed. Here, "treasure box chance!" Means that when a treasure box is vacant and a treasure is in the display, the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot B2 or the above-mentioned holding ball with the jackpot is stored. It is reported that the jackpot A is in a state where the player is in the state (promotion). When no treasure is displayed in the treasure box, the type of the jackpot game being executed is not notified. If the reserved ball that is a jackpot is not stored and the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot A, the effect of notifying that the promotion has been made is not executed. However, based on the fact that the reserved ball that becomes a big hit during the big hit game is stored, a display mode (a treasure display in a treasure box) that informs of the promotion is displayed. You may.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 350, an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the promotion effect during the round, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. FIG. 350 (a) shows that, when the promotion effect during the round is selected, when a specific round (fifth round in this control example) is reached, during the round game, the user is lucky if the “promotion chance! Is displayed, the promotion effect is executed during the round, and it is suggested (notified) that information on the jackpot game type is notified by pressing the frame button 22. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 350 (b), the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot B2 or the jackpot in the state where the above-mentioned reserved ball with the jackpot is stored. In the case of A, a display mode in which the school of fish swims from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is notified that the high-probability game state of “probable GET !!” is set after the big hit game. Is done. Note that, in the case of the jackpot A in the state where the above-mentioned holding ball serving as the jackpot is stored, the character “Sure-change GET !!” is notified to the player as if the certain-change game state is set. Is displayed.

  Next, an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in an ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 350 (a) is executed after the jackpot game ends (after the 16 jackpot rounds have ended (the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a in the 16th round (10 balls winning or 30 seconds have elapsed))). It is an example of a display mode in a normal ending effect indicating the end of a big hit game.

  On the other hand, FIG. 351 (b) is an example of a display mode in an ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. When the ending promotion effect is selected, the jackpot game has ended (the jackpot round of 16 rounds has ended (the closing condition of the specific winning port 65a in the 16th round (10 balls winning or 30 seconds have elapsed) is satisfied)). Later, during the period in which the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game to be executed is being executed, the characters “LUCY !! Super Chance Time !!” are displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 moves from left to right. A special display mode in which a school of fish (a school of fish) swims is displayed (an effect mode different from that in normal times). Is displayed, suggesting that is set.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Control Example>
Next, control processing by the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 352 to 353.

  With reference to FIG. 352 (a), the ROM of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The sixth control example is different from the first control example in that a promotion lottery table 222df is added to the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The contents of the promotion lottery table 222df will be described with reference to FIG. 352 (b). FIG. 352 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the promotion lottery table 222df. The promotion lottery table 222df determines, based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired based on the fact that the over-winning to the specific winning opening 65a has occurred during the round, whether or not to notify that the promotion has been made as the over-winning promotion effect. It is a lottery table for the. Specifically, when the jackpot game type being executed is the jackpot B2, or when the pseudo-probable change flag 223dm indicating that the jackpot A is to be performed is indicated to the player as the jackpot B2 has been executed, If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “0 to 59”, a promotion effect (in this control example, a treasure is displayed in a treasure chest) indicating that the promotion has been performed is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 353, the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 353 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. In the sixth control example, as compared to the first control example, a winning change flag 223dg, a stop symbol replacement flag 223dh, a large winning counter 223di, a promoted flag 223dj, a promoted effect type storage area 223dk, and a pseudo probability change flag 223dm are respectively provided. They differ in that they are added. A detailed description of the same configuration as that of the first control example will be omitted.

  The winning change flag 223dg is a flag for determining that the change of the special symbol which becomes the big hit A is executed in a state where the big hitting reserved ball is not stored. When the hit change flag 223dg is ON, if the change display of the special symbol can be replaced at the timing when the reserved ball that becomes the big hit by the winning command is newly stored, it is possible to replace the odd symbol. The process of switching to the symbol is executed. Thereby, even if the special symbol changes to the jackpot A, the player can be made to think as if it is the jackpot B1.

  The stop symbol replacement flag 223dh wins a replacement lottery executed with a predetermined probability if a special symbol that becomes a jackpot A is started and if a reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is already stored. This is a flag for instructing to switch the stop symbol to the odd-numbered double symbol. Based on the fact that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is ON, when the change of the special symbol starts, it is switched to the odd symbol and set.

  The special winning counter 223dj is a counter for counting the number of winning in the specific winning opening 65a during one round of the big hit game.

  The promoted flag 223dj is a flag indicating that a promoted performance (a performance in which treasure is displayed from a treasure box) has been performed in an over-winning promotion performance performed during a jackpot game. With this flag, it is possible to suppress a problem that the promoted effect is executed again even after the promoted effect is executed.

  The promotion effect type storage area 223dk is a storage area in which, when the jackpot game is executed, the type of the promotion effect executed during the jackpot game is determined, and the determined promotion effect type data is stored.

  The pseudo probability change flag 223dm stops the special symbol stop symbol at an odd number of symbols when the special symbol which becomes the jackpot A is started to change and the jackpot holding ball is already stored. This is a flag indicating that the player has failed in the replacement lottery controlled to be displayed. The promotion effect is executed during the big hit game, or the effect (see FIG. 347 (a)) is executed as if the time-saving game state set after the big hit game is set to the game state.

<Control processing by main controller in sixth control example>
With reference to FIG. 354, control processing by the main control device in the sixth control example will be described. The sixth control example is different from the first control example in that the jackpot control process (Z1004: FIG. 256) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 354, the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described. The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004) in the sixth control example is different from the jackpot control process (Z1006: FIG. 256) in the first control example in that processes of Z1120 and Z1121 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and therefore, are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of Z1110, if it is not the timing of the jackpot end (Z1110: No), it is determined whether or not there is a ball in the special winning opening (Z1120). If there is a ball entry (Z1120: Yes), a ball entry command is set (Z1121), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of Z1120 that there is no incoming ball (Z1120: No), the present process is terminated. With this ball entry command, the sound lamp control device 113 can also determine the number of game balls that have won the specific prize port 65a during the round, and can also determine an over prize.

<Control processing by voice lamp control device in sixth control example>
With reference to FIGS. 354 to 366, control processing by the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. In the sixth control example, the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259) is executed in the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 356), and the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 260) is performed in the variation control mode. Processing 2 (Z2240: FIG. 355), winning command reception processing (Z2209: FIG. 266), winning command reception processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 358), and variable display setting processing (Z2114: FIG. 269), variable display setting processing 2 (Z2114). 365), the frame button input monitoring / producing process (Z2107: FIG. 272) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / producing process 4 (Z2107: FIG. 366), the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357), Stop symbol change processing (Z2460: FIG. 359), jackpot-related command reception processing (Z2280: FIG. 359), openin Processing (Z2282: Figure 360), a special winning ball entrance processing (Z2284: Figure 362), round processing (Z2286: Figure 363), ending the process: are different in that you have added the (Z2288 Figure 364). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The command determination process 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Z2113). Command determination processing 3 (Z2113) in the sixth control example is different from command determination processing (Z2113) in the first control example in that processing of Z2279 and Z2280 is added and processing of Z2240 and Z2270 is changed. Is different.

  In the process of Z2208, when it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received from the main control device 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control device 110 ( Z2279). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command receiving process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: No), a process according to another command is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 355, a description will be given of the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 355) which is one of the command determination processes 2 (see FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the content of the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in the sixth control example is different from the variation pattern reception process in the first control example in that processes of Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After executing the processing of Z2226, it is determined whether there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430). Here, the game state is configured to be output from the main control device 110 by being attached to the fluctuation pattern command. As the game state, a game state without a low-probability electric support (normal game state), a probable change game state (with an electric support), and a time reduction game state (a game state with a low-probability electric support) are set. When it is determined that there is a change in the game state (Z2430: Yes), the corresponding game state is set in the background mode storage area 223i, a display state command is set (Z2431), and the process of Z2227 is executed. . On the other hand, in the processing of Z2430, when there is no change in the gaming state (Z2430: No), the processing of Z2431 is not executed, and the processing directly shifts to the processing of Z2227.

  Referring to FIG. 357, a stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357) which is one of the fluctuation pattern receiving processes 2 (FIG. 356) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol switching process (Z2450).

  In the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357), first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the big hit A (Z2451). If it is determined that the change is not a change in the jackpot A (Z2451: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current variation is the variation of the big hit A (Z2451: Yes), it is determined whether there is another hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452). When it is determined that there is another hit (Z2452: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the replacement lottery is executed (Z2453).

  After executing the processing of Z2453, it is determined whether or not the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454). If it is determined that the substitute lottery has not been won (Z2454: No), the pseudo probable change flag 223dm provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2455), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454: Yes), the stop symbol switching flag is set to ON (Z2456), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2452, when it is determined that there is no other hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452: No), the hit change flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2457), and this processing ends. .

  In this way, at the time of starting the change of the special symbol which becomes the jackpot A, if the reserved ball which becomes the jackpot is stored, a lottery (determination) as to whether or not the stop symbol is replaced is executed. If the judgment is made, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh indicating that the symbol replacement is performed is set to ON. On the other hand, if the replacement lottery is lost, the stop display is performed at the even number, the jackpot game is started, the promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, or is the probability changing game state after the jackpot game? A special notification such as

  With reference to FIG. 358, a winning command receiving process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 358) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. The winning command receiving process 2 (Z2270) in the sixth control example is different from the winning command receiving process (Z2209: FIG. 266) in the first control example in that a stop symbol changing process (Z2460) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 359, the stop symbol changing process (Z2470) which is one of the winning command receiving process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. I do. FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol change process (Z2470).

  In the stop symbol change process (Z2460: FIG. 359), first, it is determined whether or not the hitting variation flag 223dg provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2461). If it is determined that the hit change flag 223dg is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2461: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit change flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2461: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a big hit (Z2462). If it is determined that the received winning information command is not a jackpot (Z2642: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning information command is a big hit (Z2462: Yes), the pseudo probability change flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2463). After executing the processing of Z2463, it is determined that the period is the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that the period is the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: Yes), a display symbol replacement command is set (Z2465), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2464 that the current period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: No), the process of Z2465 is not performed, and the process ends.

  As described above, at the time when the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is started to change, even if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is not stored, the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot during the subsequent change (during the change) is newly added. When the special symbol is in the high-speed fluctuation period, the replacement of the stopped symbol (replacement to the odd-numbered symbol) is executed. As described above, since replacement is performed only during the high-speed fluctuation period, replacement without discomfort can be performed.

  Note that even when the high-speed fluctuation period has ended, control may be performed so that the stop symbol is replaced by performing an effect such as slippage.

  Referring to FIG. 360, a jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280: FIG. 360) which is one of the command determination processes 3 (Z2113: FIG. 356) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. ) Will be described. FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280).

  In the jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280: FIG. 360), it is first determined whether an opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (Z2281: Yes), an opening process (Z2282) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, referring to FIG. 361, an opening process (Z2282: FIG. 360) which is one of the jackpot-related command reception processes (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. 361) will be described. FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

  In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 361), first, the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired in the process of Z2291, the promotion effect type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222df provided in the ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, an opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, a display opening command corresponding to the opening effect set in the processing of Z2293 is set (Z2294), and the flow shifts to the processing of Z2295.

  After executing the processing of Z2294, it is determined whether or not the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2295). When it is determined that the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2295: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296). When it is determined that there is a big hit (Z2296: Yes), the game state is set to the big hit (Z2297), a display state command is set (Z2300), and this processing ends. In the process of Z2295, if it is determined that Z2295 is off (Z2295: No), the process of Z2296 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2297. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2296, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296: No), the pseudo probability change flag 223dm is set to off (Z2298), and the game state is changed to the pseudo probability change flag 223dm. The game is set to the jackpot game in the off state (Z2299), the above-described processing of Z2300 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the processing of Z2281 that the opening command has not been received (Z2281: No), it is determined whether or not the incoming ball command has been received (Z2283). When it is determined that the ball entry command has been received (Z2283: Yes), the special winning ball entry process (Z2284) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, referring to FIG. 362, a special winning prize ball process (Z2280: FIG. 360) which is one of the jackpot-related command reception processes (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. Z2284) will be described. FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing the content of the special winning winning ball processing (Z2284).

  In the special winning winning ball processing (Z2284: FIG. 362), first, the value of the special winning counter 223di provided in the RAM 223 is incremented by 1 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2312). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not over-winning (Z2312: No), a large win command for display indicating the value of the large winning counter 223di is set (Z2313), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2312: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the large winning counter 223di is greater than 10 (Z2314). When it is determined that the value of the special winning counter 223di is smaller than 10 (Z2314: No), a display special winning command indicating the value of the special winning counter 223di corresponding to the over-winning effect is set (Z2315). This processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special winning counter 223di is larger than 10 (Z2314: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained, and the promotion lottery table 222df is obtained based on the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm or the jackpot type. The promotion lottery is executed (Z2316).

  After executing the processing of Z2316, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect has been won (Z2317). When it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: Yes), a large win command for display indicating the value of the special winning counter 223di and the winning of the promotion effect is set (Z2318), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: No), a display special winning command for indicating a deviation from the value of the special winning counter 223di and the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and this processing is performed. finish.

  Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of Z2283 that the incoming ball command has not been received (Z2283: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z2285). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z2285: Yes), the round processing (Z2286) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 363, a round process (Z2286) which is one of the jackpot-related command reception processes (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round processing (Z2286).

  In the round processing (Z2286: FIG. 363), first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect type is over-winning (Z2331). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not over-winning (Z2331: No), it is determined whether the promotion effect type is ending (Z2332). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not the ending (Z2332: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). When it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: Yes), a round command for display corresponding to the jackpot type or the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set (Z2334), and the SW effective time counter 223k corresponding to the round effect is set. Is set (Z2335), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2331 that the promoted effect type is over-winning (Z2331: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of Z2332 that the promoted effect type is ending, (Z2332) : Yes), or when it is determined that the number of rounds is not 12R in the processing of Z2333 (Z2333: No), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this processing ends. .

  Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2285, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z2285: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (Z2287). If an ending command has been received (Z2288: Yes), an ending process (Z2288) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the ending process (Z2288) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z2287, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (Z2287: No), a process according to another command is executed (Z2289), and this process ends.

  Referring to FIG. 364, an ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364) which is one of the jackpot-related command receiving processes (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

  In the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364), first, it is determined whether the type of the promotion effect is ending (Z2371). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not ending (Z2371: No), it is determined whether the promotion completed flag 223dj provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2372). When it is determined that the promoted flag 223dj is set to OFF (Z2372: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is the jackpot B2 (Z2373). If the current jackpot type is jackpot B2 (Z2373: Yes), a display ending command indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2373 that the jackpot type is other than the jackpot B2 (Z2373: No), it is determined whether the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374). If the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to off (Z2374: No), the display ending command corresponding to the current big hit type is set (Z2376). If it is determined in the process of Z2372 that the promoted flag 223dj is set to ON (Z2372: Yes), the process of Z2376 described above is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2374 that the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374: Yes), the above-described processing of Z2375 is executed. After executing the processing of Z2375 or the processing of Z2376, the game state is set at the end of the big hit (Z2377), the display state command is set (Z2378), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, the type of the promotion effect is determined at the execution timing of the big hit game. Then, when the over-winning promotion promotion has been determined, it is determined whether or not the content promoted by the over-winning promotion promotion has been notified during the jackpot game, and if not performed, the ending promotion performance or the promotion during the round is performed. The process of switching to is executed.

  Thus, even if the over-winning promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect can be executed by switching to a different promotion effect even when the frequency of entering the ball into the specific winning opening 65a is low.

  With reference to FIG. 365, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114). In the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) in the sixth control example, the processes in Z2508 and Z2509 are not executed with respect to the variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269) in the first control example, and the processes in Z2511 to Z2515 are performed. It is different in that has been added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After executing the process of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511). If it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to OFF (Z2511: No), the extracted stop type is set as it is (Z2512), and a display stop type command is set (Z2513). This processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2511, when it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511: Yes), a stop type in which an odd-numbered big hit symbol is set as a stop symbol is set (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to OFF (Z2515), the above-described processing of Z2513 is executed, and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 366, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 366) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 366 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (Z2107). The frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (Z2107) in the sixth control example does not execute the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 with respect to the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 272) in the first control example. , Z2830, Z2831, and Z2840. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  In the processing of Z2807, when it is determined that the frame button has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect setting is being performed (Z2830). When it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and a sensor input process is executed (Z2813). After executing the sensor input processing, other SW processing is executed (Z2840), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2830 that the effect is not being set (Z2830: No), the processing of Z2803 to 2804 described above is executed, and the sensor input processing (Z2813) and other SW processing (Z2840) Is executed, and the present process ends.

<Control processing by display control device in sixth control example>
Next, control processing by the display control device 114 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The sixth control example is different from the first control example in that the command determination processing (Z3302: FIG. 277) is changed to the command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367). The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the content of the command determination process 2 (Z3302). The command determination process 2 (Z3302) in the sixth control example is different from the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 277) in the first control example in that processes Z3430 to Z3435 are added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of Z3408, when it is determined that there is no display notice display command for display (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430). When it is determined that there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430: Yes), a symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) is executed.

  Here, the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 368 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431).

  In the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431), first, the stop type table of the odd-numbered big hit symbol is replaced and set (Z3441). Next, a stop symbol is set by comparing the stop type table with the stop symbol counter (Z3442). Next, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the set stop symbol is set to ON (Z3443), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 367, the description will be continued. In the processing of Z3430, when it is determined that there is no display symbol replacement command (Z3430: No), it is determined whether there is a display state command (Z3432). When it is determined that there is a display state command (Z3432: Yes), a game state setting process (Z3433) is executed.

  Here, the game state setting processing (Z3433) will be described with reference to FIG. 368 (b). FIG. 368 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state setting process (Z3433).

  In the game state setting process (Z3433), first, the game state indicated by the command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3451). Next, in the process of Z3451, the background color corresponding to the gaming state set in the background mode storage area 223i is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 367, the description will be continued. In the process of Z3432, when it is determined that there is no display status command (Z3432: No), it is determined whether there is a display jackpot-related command (Z3434). When it is determined that there is a jackpot-related command for display (Z3434: Yes), a jackpot-related display process (Z3435) is executed.

  Here, the jackpot-related display processing (Z3435) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related display processing (Z3435).

  In the jackpot-related display processing (Z3435), first, it is determined whether a display opening command has been received (Z3461). If it is determined that the display opening command has been received (Z3461: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display special winning command has not been received (Z3461: No), it is determined whether the display special winning command has been received (Z3463). When it is determined that the display special winning command has been received (Z3463: Yes), the special winning process (Z3464) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the special winning process (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z3463, when it is determined that the display special winning command has not been received (Z3463: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (Z3465). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z3465: Yes), a display data table for round display corresponding to the number of rounds of the command is set, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3465, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z3465: No), it is determined whether or not the display promotion round command has been received (Z3467). When it is determined that the display promotion round command has been received (Z3467: Yes), the display data table of the promotion round effect of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3467 that the display promotion round command has not been received (Z3467: No), it is determined whether the display ending command has been received (Z3469). When it is determined that the display ending command has been received (Z3469: Yes), the display data table of the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3469, when it is determined that the display ending command has not been received (Z3469: No), a process according to another command is executed (Z3471), and this process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 370, the big prize winning process (Z3464: FIG. 370), which is one of the processes of the jackpot-related display process (Z3435: FIG. 369), will be described. FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing the content of the special winning process (Z3464).

  In the big win processing (Z3364), first, in the processing of Z3463 of the big hit related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 369), it is determined whether or not the received big win command for display has been won in the promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z3480: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the winning number indicated by the received command and the winning effect is set (Z3481), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z3480: No), it is determined whether the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482). If it is determined that the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482: Yes), a display data table of the number of winnings indicated by the command and an over-winning prize corresponding to the outgoing effect is set (Z3483), and this processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3482 that the received command is not out of the promotion effect (Z3482: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484). If it is determined that the received command is a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484: Yes), an over-winning display data table corresponding to the number of winnings indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of Z3484, when it is determined that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484: No), it is determined whether the winning number indicated by the received command number is greater than 10 (S3484: No). Z3486: No). When it is determined that the winning number is greater than 10 (Z3486: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal over-winning effect is set (Z3487), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3486 that the number of winnings indicated by the number of received commands is less than 10 (Z3486), the processing is terminated as it is.

<Seventh control example>
Next, a seventh control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, a winning opening that triggers a lottery (change) based on the first special symbol, and a lottery based on the second special symbol whose lottery result is more likely to be a lottery result advantageous to the player than the first special symbol In addition to the sorting device 700 that alternately wins a ball with a winning opening that triggers (fluctuation), as a result of the determination as to whether or not the second special symbol ordinary symbol is a winning, the electric accessory 640a is selected when the winning is won for a long time. It was configured to open for a long time (2 seconds) to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. When a normal symbol is won for a long time, the effect is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 so that the player wins a ball in the second winning port 640. It was configured to allow the player to play the game (see FIG. 207).

  Further, in the second control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640, and during the normal state. When the change of the second special symbol is started, a special effect (see FIG. 291 (b)) is executed to provide the player with a special feeling. Furthermore, in the second control example, a special effect is not executed for a predetermined period (five fluctuations of the special symbol) from the end of the time saving state, even if the normal state is set as the gaming state. Was configured. Thus, when a predetermined number (up to four) of reserved balls of the second special symbol is secured (with the reserved second special symbol secured during the time saving state), the process is executed when the time saving state ends. The special effect described above is not executed in the second special symbol change. Thereby, the special feeling of the special effect can be maintained.

  On the other hand, in the seventh control example, when a lottery is won for a long time as a result of the lottery of the normal symbol, the game is performed by using the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result. The first control example is different from the first control example in that an effect (a long-time open effect) indicating that a winning has been achieved for a long time in a normal symbol lottery is performed for a player.

  Further, the present embodiment is different from the first control example in that the effect of the long opening effect is made different depending on the timing of winning for a long time as a result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols. Note that detailed descriptions of the same points as those in the above-described control examples are omitted.

  The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 371 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 371, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example causes the ball to flow down to the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80 with respect to the first control example described above. When performing a game for playing (left-handed game), a character simulating a “fish” is formed on the surface of the game board 13 (or forms the surface of the game board 13) as a guide display mode ZR1 as a guide of the position at which the ball is fired. When the member to be formed is an acrylic resin having high transparency, it is decorated (arranged) on the game board 13) so that the player can easily visually recognize the guide display mode ZR1.

  In addition, when performing a game (right-handed game) for causing a ball to flow down to the right region (right region) of the variable display device unit 80, “turtle” is used as a guide display mode ZR2 as a guide for a position at which the ball is fired. Is embellished (arranged) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 when a member forming the surface of the game board 13 is a highly permeable acrylic resin). Is configured such that the guide display mode ZR1 can be easily visually recognized.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp where on the game board 13 the right-handed game or the left-handed game can be executed by firing the ball. Further, by decorating a character (fish, turtle) for guiding a right-handed game or a left-handed game on the surface of the game board 13, a game direction is provided to the player on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the case of performing an effect (guidance effect) for guiding a (right-handed game or left-handed game), it is possible to execute an effect that is easily visually comprehensible to a player.

  In addition, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example has an area where the second winning opening 640 can be won when the left-handed game is performed with respect to the above-described first control example (electrically powered accessory). If the opening 640a is in the opening operation, the regulating nail ZK1 is implanted so that the ratio of the ball flowing down the second winning opening 640) decreases. On the other hand, the difference is that nails are implanted so that the ratio of balls passing through the opening 710 of the sorting device 700 is reduced when a right-handed game is performed. With this configuration, the distribution device 700 is aimed, a left-handed game (first game) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed (lottery), and the second winning opening 640 is aimed at. A right-handed game (second game) in which only 2 special symbols are changed (lottery) can be provided to the player.

  As in the first control example described above, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is in a state in which it is difficult to open, so that the player is inevitable. When the left-handed game is played and the time saving state is set, the player is inevitably performed the right-handed game because the electric accessory 640a is easily opened. In addition, for example, even when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, if the number of retained balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit (four), the right-handed game is performed any further. Even if it is not possible to acquire the reservation of the special symbol (the right to draw (change) the special symbol), it is possible to perform a left-handed game and also perform a game of acquiring the reserved ball of the first special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 372 (a), a description will be given of an effect mode displayed during normal symbol fluctuation in a case where the normal symbol is won for a long time in the seventh control example. FIG. 372 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode (long opening effect) of the third symbol display device 81 during the change of the ordinary symbol won for a long time. Note that the same elements as those in the above-described first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 372 (a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, an effect (long opening effect) indicating that the symbol has been won for a long period of time for the ordinary symbol is "Opening soon". Are displayed, and an opening target mode Za2 imitating the electric accessory 640a to be opened and a guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "turtle" indicating the game direction instructed by the player are displayed. This allows the player to visually and easily understand that the right-handed game is to be performed since the electric accessory 640a is opened.

  When the long opening effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. In the seventh control example, when the long opening effect is executed, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. However, instead of this configuration, for example, the currently executed A determining means for determining whether the special symbol variation lottery result is a lottery result (big hit, small hit, etc.) advantageous to the player, and a long opening effect and a third symbol based on the determination result of the determining means. Priority display determining means for determining which of the variable effects is to be displayed with priority, and display control means for controlling the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on the determination result of the priority display determining means. May be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to preferentially display the effect display for indicating a game result that is advantageous to the player, and thus it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the example described above, the effect determined to be displayed with priority (priority effect) is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm, and the effect determined to be not displayed with priority (non-priority effect) is displayed. It may be displayed in the reduced display area Za3. In addition, for example, a plurality of reduced display areas are prepared in different areas, and non-priority effects are determined according to the game result indicated by the effect determined as the non-priority effect. You may comprise so that the magnitude | size of the area | region which displays an effect may be changed. Further, the effect display on the side determined as the non-priority effect may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the above-described example, the configuration is shown in which the display area of each effect (variable effect, long open effect) is made variable based on the result of the lottery of the changing special symbol and the result of the lottery of the changing normal symbol. In addition to the above, for example, a reserved ball number discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, three) is provided. The display area of the long opening effect may be configured to be variable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 372 (b), a description will be given of an effect mode of a normal symbol during a long time game (during long opening). FIG. 372 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode (effect during long opening) of the third symbol display device 81 during a long time winning. Note that the same elements as those in the above-described first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 372 (b), the character “OPEN” indicating that the long opening is currently being performed is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm, and the opening target imitating the electric accessory 640a that is performing the opening operation is displayed. The mode Za2 is displayed in a display mode indicating the open state. Further, similarly to FIG. 372 (a), a guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "turtle" indicating a game direction instructed by the player is displayed, and a third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3.

  Next, a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the long opening effect is restricted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 373 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where the long opening effect is restricted among display modes of the third symbol display device 81 during a long time winning. Note that the same elements as those in the above-described first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, in the seventh control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the long opening effect described above with reference to FIG. 372 (a) is configured to be executed, and the normal state (the second state) is performed. In a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 640), when the ball is likely to win in the second winning port 640 (when a normal symbol is won for a long time), a state advantageous to the player (first). It is configured to surely notify the player of a change (a state in which the second special symbol is more likely to be a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the special symbol (a state where the lottery is easily performed)).

  In such a configuration, in the normal state immediately after the time saving state ends, for example, in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit (four), the normal symbol The long opening effect described above is also executed when winning for a long time. In this manner, in the state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol is at the upper limit, a new reserved ball is obtained even if the electric accessory 640a is long opened and a plurality of balls are won at the second entrance 640. And there is a problem that it is not possible to provide a special feeling of a long opening effect to a player.

  Therefore, in the seventh control example, the above-described predetermined period (the period until the special symbol is changed five times) from the end of the time saving state is described above, even if the normal symbol is won for a long time. It is configured such that the long opening effect is not executed (the effect during the long opening effect restriction is executed). Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the long opening effect has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 373, in the state where the long opening effect is restricted, the long opening effect shown in FIG. 372 (a) is not executed, and the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is performed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. Is displayed. Then, a guidance display mode Za1 imitating "fish" indicating a right-handed game is displayed as a game direction instructed to the player. As described above, even when a normal symbol is won for a long time in a state in which the normal state is set as the gaming state, the timing is set for a predetermined period (the number of special symbol changes is five times after the time saving state ends). If it is within the period until the execution, the long opening effect is prevented from being executed, so that it is possible to surely suppress providing a meaningless long opening effect to the player. it can. Also, immediately after finishing the time-saving state in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is the main, the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is executed excessively by acquiring a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol again. Can be suppressed.

  In the present control example, in order to suppress the execution of the long opening effect when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (four), a period during which the long opening effect is restricted (a restriction period) is set. After the time saving state ends, the period until the change of the special symbol is executed five times is set. However, other than that, for example, a predetermined time after the time saving state ends, that is, the change of the special symbol continues. It may be a period until the time required to execute five times elapses. In addition, during the above-described restriction period, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, two or less), the above-mentioned restriction period is cleared and the long opening effect is executed. May be configured.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the long opening effect is configured to be restricted within a predetermined period after the end of the working hours, but the long opening effect may be restricted by other conditions. If the special symbol change that is being executed wins the jackpot, or if the continuous effect is set so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol changes, or special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) The long opening effect may be restricted when it is determined, for example, that the winning ball in which the winning ball wins win information is included.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Control Example>
Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. The seventh control example is different from the second control example in that a long opening effect flag 223e1 is added. Other configurations are the same as those in the second control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Since the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example are the same, the various control processes related to the payout of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example are the same as those of the first control example described above. Is the same as On the other hand, various control processes (control example of the sound lamp control device 113) related to the effect of the seventh control example are the same as the second control example except for the above-described points. Therefore, the same parts as those in the first control example regarding the various control processes related to payouts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. And the description is omitted.

  Since the variation counter 223aj has been described in the second control example, a detailed description thereof will be omitted, but when the time saving state ends, a predetermined value (5) is set, and the variation display of the third symbol is performed. This is a counter that is decremented by one when it is set (when a special symbol is changed). In the seventh control example, the long opening effect is not executed until the value of the change number counter 223aj becomes 0.

  The long opening effect flag 223e1 is a flag for indicating that the long opening effect is being executed, and when set to ON, indicates that the long opening effect is being executed. This long opening effect flag 223e1 is for a case where a long-time opening command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and when it is determined that the fluctuation number counter 223aj is not 0 (Z2904 in FIG. 377: No). Is set to on (see Z2907 in FIG. 377), and is set to off when a long term end command for a normal symbol is received (Z2911 in FIG. 377).

<Control processing by main controller in seventh control example>
Next, control processing by the main control device in the seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example is different from the first control example in that the ordinary symbol variation process (Z106: see FIG. 250) is changed to the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (Z171: see FIG. 375). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 375, a description will be given of the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example. The ordinary symbol variation process 2 (Z171) in the seventh control example is different from the ordinary symbol variation process (Z106: see FIG. 250) in the first control example in that processes Z451 to Z453 are added. . Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and therefore, are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 375, when the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (Z171) is executed, the same processes of Z401 and Z402 as in the first control example are executed, and it is determined that the ordinary symbol is not being varied in the process of Z402. If this is the case (Z402: No), it is determined whether the long-time release flag 203i is set to ON (Z451). As described above in the first control example, this long-time opening flag 203i is set when the normal symbol is determined to have been won for a long time in the normal symbol change start process (Z408: FIG. 251) (Z426: Yes). , Is set to ON (Z428).

  In the process of Z451, when it is determined that the long-time release flag 203i is set to ON (Z451: Yes), the long-time release flag 203i is set to OFF (Z403), and a long-time end command is set. (Z452), and proceeds to the process of Z404. On the other hand, in the process of Z451, when it is determined that the long-time release flag 203i is not on (is off) (Z451: No), the process of Z403 and Z452 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z404. Then, the same processing of Z404 to Z409 as in the above-described first control example is executed, and this processing ends.

  That is, as described above, the long-time opening flag 203i is a flag that is set to be on from the timing when the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol won for a long time is started to the time when the long-time winning is finished.

  In the processing of Z402, when it is determined that the current symbol is changing normally (Z402: Yes), the processing of Z410 to Z413 at the same position as the above-described first control example is executed. A middle command is set (Z453), and this process ends. The long-time hit command set in Z453 is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (FIG. 255) of the main control device 110. The voice lamp control device 113, which has received the long hitting command, creates a display command for indicating to the player that the current time is a long hit (long open), and transmits the command to the display control device 114. I do. Then, the display control device 114 displays an effect display indicating that the long opening is being performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 372 (b)).

<Regarding control processing by voice lamp control device in seventh control example>
With reference to FIG. 376 and FIG. 377, control processing by the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example is different from the second control example in that the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) is changed to the command determination process 4 (Z2181: FIG. 376), and the long opening effect process (Z2272) is performed. The difference is in the added points. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The command determination process 4 (Z2181) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (Z2181). Command determination processing 4 (Z2181) in the seventh control example is different from command determination processing 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) in the second control example in that processing of Z2271 to Z2277 is added.

  Here, when the command determination processing 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processing of Z2201 to Z2209 as the command determination processing 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) of the second control example is performed. If it is determined in the processing of Z2208 that the special symbol winning command has not been received (Z2208: No), then it is determined whether or not a long-time hit related command has been received (Z2271), and it has been determined that it has been received. (Z2208: Yes), a long opening effect process described later is executed (Z2272), and this process ends. In the long opening effect process (Z2272), a process for setting a display mode of an effect to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a normal symbol is won for a long time is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2271, if it is determined that the long-time hit related command has not been received (Z2271: No), the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) of the second control example described above and Z2256 to Z2260 are executed. The same processing of Z2273 to Z2277 is executed, and this processing ends. That is, in the present control example, the main control device 110 is configured to receive a command set based on the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol, and a predetermined command (the fact that the main unit 110 wins for a long time in the lottery of the ordinary symbol). (Command shown), an effect for notifying the player of the fact can be set. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  Next, the contents of the long opening effect process (Z2272) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long opening effect process (Z2272). This long opening effect processing (Z2272) is for executing processing for setting an effect state of a long opening effect when a normal symbol is won for a long time, and the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state). Or, an effect mode is set according to the operation state of the ordinary symbol (during a fluctuation or a hit game) within a predetermined period after the end of the time saving state.

  When the long opening effect process (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the long-time hit related command received this time is a long-time hit opening command (Z2901). This long-time opening command is a command that is set when a normal symbol is won for a long time in a normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 251) of the main controller 110. If it is determined in the processing of Z2901 that the command is a long-time release command (Z2901: Yes), the current gaming state is extracted from the state storage area 223az (Z2902). Then, it is determined whether or not the extracted game state is during the time reduction (the time reduction state is set) (Z2903). If it is determined that the time is during the time reduction (Z2903: Yes), the long opening effect is executed. Since this is not the period, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2903, when it is determined that it is not during the working hours reduction (in the normal state) (Z2903: No), it is next determined whether or not the fluctuation count counter 223aj is larger than 0 (whether it is 1 or more) ( Z2904). Since the detailed description is given in the above-described second control example, a brief description will be given. However, when the final change in which the time saving state is set is stopped and displayed, the change number counter 223aj is set to a predetermined number (5 ) Is set, and the value is decremented by 1 every time the fluctuation display setting process is executed, and is a period from the end of the time saving state to the execution of a predetermined number of times of the fluctuation of the special symbol (5 times) Is a counter that is referred to in order to determine the value.

  In the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223aj is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2904: No), that is, at least five changes of the special symbol are executed after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that the game is in the normal state as the game state, it is a period in which the long opening effect can be executed, and the display long effect command is set (Z2906). Then, the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2907), and this processing ends.

  Here, the set display long rendering command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 258) of the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the display long effect command, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating the long opening effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 372 (a)).

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223aj is larger than 0 (Z2904: Yes), that is, in the state where the change of the special symbol has not been performed five times since the time saving state ends. If it is determined that there is, in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, it is a period in which the long opening effect cannot be executed, so the display left-handed long effect command is set (Z2905). The process ends.

  Here, the set display left-handed long rendering command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 258) of the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the display long effect command, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating that the long opening effect is being restricted on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 373).

  In the processing of Z2901, if it is determined that the long-time hit related command received this time is not a long-time hit release command (Z2901: No), then it is determined whether a long time hitting middle command has been received (Z2908). . The long-time hit command is set after the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory in the ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (Z171: FIG. 375) of the main controller 110, and during the long-time hit game This command indicates that there is.

  In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that the long-time hit command has been received (Z2908: Yes), it is then determined whether the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909), and the long opening effect flag is determined. If it is determined that 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909: Yes), a display long release command is set (Z2910), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2909, if it is determined that the long opening effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Z2909: No), the process of Z2910 is skipped and the process ends. .

  Here, the processing of Z2909 will be described. In the seventh control example, similarly to the first control example described above, the winning lottery is performed at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol (the timing at which the normal symbol fluctuation start process is executed), and the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning is won. Is determined so as to determine the operation mode (whether or not a long release is performed), and a release command per long time is set at that timing. Then, after the change time of the ordinary symbol (the minimum is 3 seconds and the maximum is 30 seconds) has elapsed since the setting of the open command per long time, the stop display of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is set, and then the electric symbol is displayed. The operation control of the accessory 640a is started.

  Therefore, a time lag of at least 3 seconds and a maximum of 30 seconds occurs between the reception of the long time release command and the long time per hour command. When the value of 223aj is greater than 0, a long-time opening command is set, and thereafter, there is a possibility that a long-time winning command is received at the timing when the value of the fluctuation counter 223aj is 0.

  In the seventh control example, in such a state, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed in accordance with the long opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, in the processing when the long opening command is received in the process when the long opening effect is received. In a state where the opening effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON, the display long opening command is not set even if the long hitting command is received. With this configuration, for example, the effect of the display mode based on the display left-handed long effect command (see FIG. 373) suddenly changes to the display mode based on the display long open command (FIG. 372 (b)). (See Reference) and giving the player an uncomfortable feeling can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 377, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that the long-time hit command has not been received (Z2908: No), it is next determined whether a long-time hit command has been received (Z2911). If it is determined that the command has been received (Z2911: Yes), the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to OFF (Z1912), a long opening end command for display is set (Z1913), and this processing ends.

  In the process of Z2208, when it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received from the main control device 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control device 110 ( Z2279). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command receiving process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: No), a process according to another command is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

<Control processing by display control device in seventh control example>
Next, control processing by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The seventh control example is different from the sixth control example in that command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) is changed to command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 378). The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 378) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing the content of the command determination process 3 (Z3321). Command determination processing 3 (Z3321) in the seventh control example is different from command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) in the sixth control example in that processing of Z3441 to Z3442 is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of Z3408, when it is determined that there is no display notice display command for display (Z3408: No), the process of Z3441 is executed. In the processing of Z3441, if it is determined that there is no display long release related command (Z3441: No), it is determined whether there is a display state command (Z3432). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a display long opening related command (Z3441: Yes), the long opening related processing (Z3442) is executed.

  In the long opening effect process (FIG. 379, Z3442), first, a display data table for a long opening effect corresponding to the received long opening effect command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the long opening effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z6202).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (Z6203), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is obtained. The time counter 233h is set (Z6204), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

  As described above, in the seventh control example, in the case where the normal state (a state in which the lottery (change) of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol per long time is set. Upon winning, a long open effect is executed during the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, the electric accessory 640a is opened to the player for a long time, and the game in which the second winning port 640 receives a ball can be reliably performed.

  Further, in the seventh control example, even when the normal state is set as the game state, the predetermined period after the end of the time saving period in which there is a high possibility that many reserved balls of the second special symbol are obtained in the normal state. If it is within, the execution of the long opening effect described above is restricted. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the quality of the privilege (the privilege for easily securing the reserved ball of the second special symbol) to be given to the player when the long opening effect is executed.

  In the present control example, in order to suppress the execution of the long opening effect when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (four), a period during which the long opening effect is restricted (a restriction period) is set. After the time saving state ends, the period until the change of the special symbol is executed five times is set. However, other than that, for example, a predetermined time after the time saving state ends, that is, the change of the special symbol continues. It may be a period until the time required to execute five times elapses. In addition, during the above-described restriction period, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, two or less), the above-mentioned restriction period is cleared and the long opening effect is executed. May be configured.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the long opening effect is configured to be restricted within a predetermined period after the end of the working hours, but the long opening effect may be restricted by other conditions. If the special symbol change that is being executed wins the jackpot, or if the continuous effect is set so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol changes, or special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) The long opening effect may be restricted when it is determined, for example, that the winning ball in which the winning ball wins win information is included.

  Specifically, for example, in the process of Z2903 in the long opening effect process (see FIG. 377), after determining Z2903: No, a process of determining whether or not the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON is provided. If it is determined that the effect flag 223ac is set to ON, the present process may be terminated without performing the long opening effect. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect without losing the priority order with respect to other effects to be executed.

  Further, in the seventh control example, different game methods are displayed on the display screen when the long opening effect is restricted and when the long opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the long opening effect is executed, the second winning device 640 is caused to perform a right-handed game to win a ball, and when the long opening effect is restricted, the distribution device 700 is used. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set so as to perform a left-handed game in order to win a ball. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (large), the first winning port 64 and the right second winning port 640 are aimed by the left-handed game, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small. Can play a game aiming at the second winning opening 640 by a right-handed game.

  In the seventh control example, the game board 13 is set so that the ease of the ball flowing down to the sorting device 700 and the second winning opening 640 is made different between the right-handed game and the left-handed game. The configuration is not limited to this. For example, by shooting a weak ball in a left-handed game, the ball can easily reach the second winning opening 640, and a stronger left-handed game is performed. Thus, the game board 13 may be configured so that the ball can easily reach the distribution device 700. As a result, the game result can be greatly changed by slightly changing the operation of the firing device, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the seventh control example, the configuration based on the control content of the main control device 110 in the above-described first control example is described, but the control of the main control device 110 used in the above-described first control example is described. The present invention is not limited to the content, and may be used for a control content of the main control device 110 of the second control example, that is, a type of gaming machine that executes a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol in preference to the first special symbol. good.

  In addition, at the end of the gaming state with electric support (a gaming state with low-probability electric support (time-saving gaming state) or with high-probability electric support (probable change gaming state)), a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) of reserved balls are provided. An effect that prohibits (does not execute) the effect of a normal symbol for a long time, or prompts the player to enter a game ball into the first entrance 64, on condition that it is stored for the second special symbol. And may be configured to be executed. With this configuration, even when the game is switched to the normal game state, if the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is small, it can be configured such that the effect of the normal symbol per long time is executed, (2) It is possible to suppress a problem of depriving a prize of winning a special symbol.

  Further, in the present control example, when switching to the normal gaming state, the effect of the normal symbol per long time is not performed until the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (5 times in the present embodiment), or the normal symbol is not changed. Is configured to switch to a different effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more) regardless of the game state, the normal symbol It may be configured not to perform a winning effect, or to switch to an effect different from a normal effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to perform an advantageous game in accordance with the state of the game. Further, as a condition for not performing an effect for a long time for a normal symbol, or for switching to an effect different from the normal time, a specific variation pattern is executed irrespective of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (for example, , A jackpot fluctuation pattern or a super-reach fluctuation pattern). In addition, time information from the RTC may be acquired, and the condition may be set as a switching condition if a specific time is about to close (for example, 5 minutes before). The conditions for switching may be set in combination with the conditions given in this control example.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine of a type different from the above control example. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and is not provided with a handle for launching a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Also, the configuration of each of the above embodiments may be configured to be combined or implemented in whole or in part.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (point where the player pushes in from the back to the front)
In an operating device having an operating means pressed by a player, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and in a position in which the operating means is protruded from the player with respect to the first state. And an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side of the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being directed to the side.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the effect is performed in a manner that enhances the expectation of a big hit for the player at the advanced position, the player can easily operate the operating means at the advanced position with a large acceleration. However, it was necessary to design the operating means to have a high strength. In this case, there is a problem in that the operation means becomes heavier as a whole, and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is set to the direction from the back side to the near side for the player, so that the straight up and down linear movement is performed. In this case, the part that cannot be operated is generated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means, so that the momentum of the pushing can be released.

  In addition, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulder and elbow from the player's playing position, it is difficult to apply a force in the forward direction, so the force exerted by the player on the operating means should be naturally reduced. Can be.

  In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft disposed on the back side of the player, configured to be capable of tilting up and down around the shaft, and having the operation means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, wherein the tilting means arranges the operation means in a direction opposite to a player in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured to rotate, and the operation means is arranged in the second state in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent the user from performing an operation of hitting the operation means.

  In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with the position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be pushed easily, so that a new pushing operation method with less pushing acceleration can be provided. In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

  With a new pushing operation method, for example, the outer side of the little finger of the left hand is placed near the axle bar, and the thumb side is turned to the operating means from the state where the hand is placed near the operating means with the palm rising up and down Examples include a method of operating in a manner of tilting down, a method of placing the tip of the middle finger near the shaft bar, and a method of operating in a manner of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state where the palm is arranged in a posture facing the operating means Is done.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means is set to a vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, since the pushing operation direction of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, the operability in the first state is ensured while the second operation is performed. It is possible to prevent destruction by the pushing operation in the state.

  In the gaming machine A3, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is automatically operable, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the gaming machine A4 acts in a direction in which it does not act in the opposite direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

  For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the driving unit from being subjected to a high load due to being pulled by the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button.

  In the gaming machine A4, it is possible to form a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and further comprises a maintenance means operated by the driving means, and the driving means is provided with an eccentric part through an eccentric portion. A rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of changing a phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in a maintained state; In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintenance state is released is changed. In both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation is performed. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is maintained in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. With this configuration, it is possible to change the movement width of the operation device by the urging unit. Therefore, a plurality of operation modes by the urging means can be configured.

In the gaming machine A5, in the maintenance state, the maintenance unit is configured to be movable in the biasing direction of the biasing unit, and the moving speed of the maintenance unit is increased or decreased in accordance with the rotation speed of the rotating unit. A gaming machine A6 configured such that the operation means moves following the movement of the maintenance means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force was only caused by the urging force, so that the mode of movement was limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode in which the operation means moves following the maintenance means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting unit is provided inside the operation device and irradiates light to a player, and the light emitting means is disposed in the second state as compared with the first state. However, from the viewpoint of a player, the area of the operation means is reduced, and the irradiation range of light emitted by the light emitting means is enlarged.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is illuminated by the light emitting means in the player's viewpoint compared to the first state. The area of the operation means is reduced as the irradiation range of the light is enlarged, so that the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to push the operation means unless aiming. In this manner, the power of the player during the operation can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operating means moves toward and away from the display means between the display means and the display means to change the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means. Gaming machine A8, which is a feature.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operating means moves toward and away from the display means between the display means and the light emitting means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to view the image on the display means.

<Characteristic B group> (The point where the repulsion during normal operation is small while responding to repeated hits is possible)
In an operation device having an operation means capable of allowing a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, a second state in which a movable range of operation to the terminal position is wider than the first state and the first state.
And a biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. The first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state is provided. A gaming machine B1 comprising, in a gaming machine, a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving an operating means from a first state to a second state in accordance with an operation of a player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
No. 8). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by a spring, and the operating means is automatically operated by a drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operating means is slow, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform a continuous hit operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the urging force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. 2
By returning the operating means by the driving means, the return can be accelerated, so that the player can enjoy the continuous tapping operation.

The gaming machine B1 includes a continuous hit determination unit that determines whether or not a continuous hit operation is performed based on a sensor detection value of a stroke operation unit within a predetermined time, and controls the second drive unit based on a detection value of the continuous hit determination unit. A gaming machine B2, which determines whether to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, it is determined whether or not to drive the second drive unit based on the detection value of the continuous hit determination unit. Therefore, the player does not perform the continuous hit operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press operation). The second driving means operates until the operation is performed), thereby preventing the player from feeling the load of pushing his hand back.

In the gaming machine B2, an end detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the end position, and determining whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A position difference detecting means for detecting, and a moving direction judging means for judging a moving direction of the operating means based on a time relationship between a detected value of the end detecting means and a detected value of the position difference detecting means; The gaming machine B3, wherein the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the direction of return is the direction of returning to the first state from the pushing end.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction to return to the first state from the pushing end, that is, the player's hand Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separating, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a form synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, the second driving device operates in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and it is possible to suppress the high load on the player's hand.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is constituted by a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Gaming machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a driving force for moving the operation means can be generated by effectively utilizing the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation unit is provided, and the second drive unit elastically supports the drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. Supporting means, wherein the supporting means increases the driving force for moving the operating means from the first state position to the second state position as the operating means approaches the end position. The gaming machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight abuts on the support frame in a state where the operation means is disposed at the terminal position, and generates a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force of the second driving unit is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting unit and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By separately generating the driving force and the driving force, the driving force applied to the operation means can be adjusted while the rotation of the driving motor is maintained. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the control can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and contacts the support frame based on the operation means being disposed at the end position. A gaming machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means. Accordingly, since the support means supporting the drive motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (a direction approaching the operation means), the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Characteristic C group> (Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration directing device)
A detecting sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operating means, the detecting sensor comprising a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring a speed of the operating means from a detection interval of the detecting sensor, and measuring means for the measuring means Threshold determining means for determining whether or not the measurement value measured by the control means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and repulsion means for generating a driving force directed in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, the threshold determining means When the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means increases as compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Gaming machine C1 characterized by the following.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
No. 8). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when it is emphasized that the player can operate lightly, the operation resistance is lowered, and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. Although the operation speed can be reduced to reduce the possibility of the operation means being damaged, the force required for the operation of the player increases, and there is a problem that the operation of the operation means becomes a burden for a weak player. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determining unit determines whether the speed of the operating unit is equal to or higher than the threshold, and when the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsive unit is increased. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and to reduce the speed of the operating means only when necessary. Therefore, the resilience means can improve operability and prevent destruction.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion unit includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force directed in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation unit, and the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value. The control for pushing out the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed, and before the operation means is arranged at a position where the voice coil motor can come into contact with the voice coil motor,
A gaming machine C2 wherein the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled, and the operating means can be decelerated, and the operating means is arranged at a position where the operating means can contact the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, it is possible to suppress an impact generated between the operation unit and the voice coil motor.

In the gaming machine C3, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are in contact with each other in the gaming machine C1 or C2, control is performed to increase a current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are in contact with each other, the control to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor is performed, so that the operation means is improved. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operation means while suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact between the control unit and the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operation means by spring elasticity. .

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity. Therefore, even when the moving speed of the operating means is high, the driving force is not delayed. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion unit compares the value measured by the threshold determination unit with a value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold when the value measured by the threshold determination unit is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold. A game machine C5, wherein a movable area of an end of the repulsion means and an end opposite to a side in contact with the operation means is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the rebounding means, which is the end opposite to the side in contact with the operating means, is reduced, so that the operation of the operating means is reduced. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased.

<Characteristic D group> (Driving means is prevented from being damaged by interrupting the transmission of driving force by the clutch)
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, Releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, wherein the releasing means reduces the driving force when a load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine D1 for canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing unit is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving unit and the operating unit via the transmitting unit becomes equal to or more than a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means while the operating means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disabled), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. it can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving unit is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, A gaming machine D2 characterized in that release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is being performed in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be released depending on the operation direction of the driving unit,
If the operating means is operated by the player when driving the driving means in an operation direction in which transmission of the driving force cannot be released, a large load may be applied to the driving means. For this reason, the degree of freedom of the effect at the time of effecting by operating the operation means is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the locking member for locking the button is moved in the releasing direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, the button operation can be made in two modes (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but in both cases, the drive force must be interrupted.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. In addition, the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means can be improved.

As a method of canceling the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting the operation direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is, for example, a meaning excluding a circumferential direction when the driving unit rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or may move in the radial direction.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, there is provided an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state where the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means comprises a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. Are provided respectively, and are provided with engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force in a state where they are in mesh with each other, and the engaging teeth are such that both surfaces opposed to the operating direction of the driving means are separated from the contact surface. A gaming machine D3 comprising a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in such a manner that the distance from the contact surface decreases.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means engages the driving force in a state in which the releasing means is engaged with the pressing surface which is pressed. On the other hand, since the transmission means is provided with the engagement teeth which are inclined in such a manner that both surfaces opposed to the operation direction of the drive means are tapered so as to be away from the contact surface, the transmission means is moved from the drive means by the engagement of the engagement teeth. The driving force can be released.

Further, between the drive means and the transmission means, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, the urging force is applied in the operation direction of the drive means via the engagement teeth. Load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving unit between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

Note that the size of the engaging portion of the engaging teeth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the release state, the resistance does not disappear completely and the resistance is restored periodically. Thus, when the player releases his / her hand, the button can be started to be operated within a short time.

In other words, when the button is driven "as an effect" and the player is holding the button,
One phase of button operation has passed. If the player releases his hand on the way and moves from the end of the one phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes longer,
The player started moving because the load on the player was released. "

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his / her hand and the load is released. This makes it possible to produce a feeling that the player has begun to move because the load on the player has been released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, an engagement surface between the transmission unit and the release unit is:
A gaming machine D4 formed of sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means early.
That is, when there is a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means approach and separate from each other at the tip of the engagement surface, the transmission means and the release means abut on the plane, and the transmission of the release means is performed. It is possible to suppress the stop of the movement along the direction approaching or moving away from the means. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation of the operation means can be started early.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operation unit is different between the case where the drive unit is continuously operated in the forward direction and the case where the drive unit is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, release of the driving force transmission is not limited to any one of the operation modes while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operation means. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, the operation mode of the operation unit is such that when the drive unit operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the drive unit for a predetermined period from the start of the operation is Similarly, the gaming machine D6 has a different operation after a lapse of the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means, the operating mode in the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is the same. Since the operation after the elapse of the predetermined period is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation means.

Here, by linking the difference in the operation mode of the operation unit with information that is beneficial to the player, such as a jackpot expectation, the player can operate the operation unit for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation unit changes. You can watch over.

Also, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the driving means, if the operation direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be. However, usually, the driving means is hidden from the player, and since the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and Can watch the operation of the operating means.

<Feature E group> (Change the position of the projection of the cam based on the rotation of the cam)
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, A first means for operating the operation means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, wherein the first means suppresses a position of the operation means from changing from the first position; Urging means for urging the operating means in the direction from the first position to the second position, and operating means moving from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means End means for variably forming a movement end of the game machine, wherein the first means suppresses a change in position of the operation means by engaging with the operation means, One of the means Releasing means for applying a load for releasing engagement with the means to the first means, wherein the release of the engagement by the release load means and the change of the moving end of the operating means in the end means are single. Machine E characterized by the driving means of
One.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operation means operated by a cam and fixed at a first position is fixed, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the operation means is extended by the urging force of the urging means. There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging operation can be changed by the terminating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement amount of the overhang operation of the operating means is changed according to the phase of the cam at the time of unlocking, the phase of the cam at the time of unlocking is variously changed. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing have been operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required, and the arrangement space for the driving means is increased.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. Thus, the driving means for changing the end position of the operating means by the terminating means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used in common, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

The gaming machine E2, wherein the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be caused based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. Thus, the number of detectors such as position sensors for detecting the state of the release load unit can be reduced, and the number of components can be reduced.

In addition, as a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is constituted by a cam and the release load means is constituted by a projection which rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle of the cam and the projection, In the case where the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, the synchronization between the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection is desynchronized, and in other phases, the method of synchronizing the rotation of the cam with the rotation of the projection,
Is exemplified.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is provided by a load given from the first means.
A gaming machine E3 operably disposed with respect to the transmission means, wherein the operation of the release load means switches whether or not the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably disposed on the transmission means by a load from the first means, and the release load means operates by the operation of the release load means. It is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate synchronously, so that the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission unit includes a first rotating member that rotates, the operation unit is supported eccentrically with respect to a rotation axis of the first rotation member, and the release load unit is configured to rotate the second rotation member. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but have different rotation periods, so that the second rotating means A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by contacting the first means with the phase.

According to this configuration, since the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operation means is maintained at the first position, and the operation means moves toward the second position, a plurality of types of end positions can be prepared. ,
You can expand the range of production. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position from the first position and an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with a similar configuration.

<Feature F group> (Vibration device supported by soft case)
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position, the operating means, and a second position to which the operating means reaches when the player performs an operation from the first position. And a receiving means arranged so as to be able to contact the vibrating part, wherein the operating means is arranged at the first position. Then, while the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which the vibrating portion cannot be brought into contact with the receiving device, when the operating device is disposed at the second position, the vibrating portion can be brought into contact with the receiving device. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with operating means operable by a player and vibration means for transmitting vibration to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not, when the vibrating means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or when the effect is transmitted to the player touching the frame of the gaming machine, the vibration is transmitted immediately after operating the operating means,
It is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. For this reason, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation in which the operating means is released at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). In some embodiments, the start of the vibration may not be ready before the hand is released, and the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating section contacts the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged at the first position or operated by the player and arranged at the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating section is continuously vibrated, the vibration can be made to be felt by the player only when the player operates the operation means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pushing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the operation mode of the player, Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, in the separated state, the vibration means is disposed so as to protrude into an occupied area occupied when the operation means is disposed at the second position, and the operation means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 changes to the contact state when the vibration means is moved out of the occupied area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the state changes from the separated state to the contact state. It is possible to change the contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating part,
The intensity of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, an effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation intensity of the player can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibration means without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the positioning of the receiving means can be performed while suppressing the vibration of the vibration means from being transmitted to the receiving means by the supporting means. Thereby, the receiving means and the vibration means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of the vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibration means during the vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating section and the receiving means abut. That is, when the vibrating part moves in the direction approaching the receiving means due to the expansion and contraction of the supporting means, it is possible to give momentum.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means has a deformation resistance along an operation direction of the operation means,
A gaming machine F5 characterized in that the resistance is reduced as compared with the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operation direction of the operation means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to a difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be set finely. it can.

Thus, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating part and the receiving means can be made different. .

In addition, as a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the support means is formed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending a rubber leg along the operation direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibratory means In the case of a rubber member, a method of manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a support means, and a rail for guiding the operating means to operate in the direction along the operation direction. And a coil spring for urging the vibrating means along the operation direction of the operating means.

In the gaming machine F3, a portion where the vibrating portion contacts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but is transmitted to the player via the receiving means which is separate from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration unit from being transmitted to the drive unit via the operation unit and the transmission unit, so that it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the drive unit. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

Further, since the vibration can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hands of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent a player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

In addition, as a receiving means, for example, a portion of the frame of the gaming machine, a portion near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, or an edge portion of a glass frame, etc. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a housing part that partially surrounds the operation unit, and the like.

<Characteristic G group> (One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part)
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and A driving unit that generates a driving force to be driven; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the operation unit, wherein the transmission unit includes a deforming unit that is elastically deformed by an overload. Gaming machine G1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means operable by a player, a driving means for generating a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting a driving force from the driving means to the operating means, There is a gaming machine provided with (for example, refer to JP-A-2014-144218).
. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operating means is held and fixed by the player, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means, a connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means,
There is a problem that a load is accumulated in a connecting portion between the transmission means and the driving means, and there is a possibility that these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, and the driving means and the transmission means The load applied to the connection portion with the connection can be reduced.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member rotatably supported, and the deformed portion forms a connection portion with a rotation shaft of the cam member. A gaming machine G2 wherein a fixing force is generated.

According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion functions as a portion that performs elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission unit, and a role as a portion that generates a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft.
Is provided. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a projecting portion projecting in parallel with a rotation axis, and the projecting portion and the operating means are connected to each other. The gaming machine G3, wherein the rotating shaft is inclined.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it is difficult to form the cam member and the protruding portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deforming portion is such that the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to the cam member, so that the projecting portion is attached to the cam member. The cam member can be easily formed of a single member as compared with a case where the cam member is slid, and the members can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the deformable portion to elastic deformation is compared with the rotational axis of the cam member in a first rotational direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line connecting the rotational axis and the protruding portion. A gaming machine characterized in that a deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which a straight line perpendicular to both a straight line connecting the convex portion and an extending direction of the rotating shaft is used as an axis. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G3, by changing the deformation resistance of the deformed portion in each direction, the state after the deformed portion is elastically deformed in the rotation axis direction is better. Compared to the state before the elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. Accordingly, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member is going to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means is reduced by the elastic deformation of the deformable portion. can do.

In the gaming machine G3 or G4, a friction member is provided at a predetermined distance in a direction parallel to a rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deformable portion. The gaming machine G5, wherein the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformable portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Abut on each other, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 comprising, in any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, detecting means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is displaced in an inclined manner with respect to an axis.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detecting means for detecting the displacement deviation becomes shorter, but as the arrangement interval of the detecting means becomes smaller, the configuration of the detecting means becomes more complicated and expensive. Therefore, there has been a problem that it is difficult to adopt a configuration that is inexpensive and detects the occurrence of overload early.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether at least a part of the cam member is displaced inclining with respect to the axis. Thus, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without driving the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. Thus, when an overload occurs, the load applied to the driving unit can be reduced.

<Characteristic H group>
In a gaming machine having a foul ball passage through which a foul ball that flows down toward the launching device among the game balls fired to the game area can pass, the foul ball passage allows the flowing down game ball to pass therethrough. A gaming machine H1 comprising one-way obstruction means for obstructing the progress of an object flowing backward.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an illegal act is performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball with the thread connected into the game area There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (for example, JP-A-2015-02).
No. 4179). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the yarn is pressed against the thread cutting teeth at the time of firing and the yarn is cut by the tension generated at that time, when the firing intensity of the game ball is weak, the game ball can not be cut completely without the yarn being cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
For this reason, for example, an illegal tool with game balls connected to both ends of the yarn is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the yarn is fired at a low firing intensity to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side While holding one of the game balls, the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread is driven into the game area, so that the thread can be removed from the guide path and the ball can be passed through the foul ball passage. A game ball can be connected to the other game ball by a thread, so that a load is externally applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball disposed in the game area. There is a problem that there is a possibility that an illegal profit can be obtained by manipulating the computer.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the one-way obstruction means can be used even when a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the yarn guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed. However, by hindering the movement of the yarn in the backward flow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illegal profit.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage includes a bent portion that bends a flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the yarn guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed with the bent portion, so that the yarn can be cut early.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion includes a load means on the inner corner side of the bending, which applies a load to the object flowing backward without applying a load to the flowing game ball.
.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to an object flowing backward (for example, a thread-like member) by the load unit.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is disposed in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the concave portion, the collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. Can be prevented.

In the gaming machine H3 or H4, a gaming machine H5 is provided with regulating means for regulating movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage is regulated by the regulating means. When a load is generated, the load applied to the member on the yarn can be prevented from being weakened by deforming the load means outward of the foul ball passage.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a payout ball is a portion for discharging a game ball paid out from a payout device, the receiving plate being a plate in which a foul ball arrives first on the front side of the front door. The gaming machine H6, wherein the ball discharge portion is disposed above a discharge-side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the game ball dispensed from the dispensing device is configured to pass before the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage so that the game ball can pass through the foul ball passage. When an illegal act of applying a load to the other game ball using the yarn guided to the game area is performed, the payout game ball is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the yarn. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of a payout ball discharging portion, which is a portion for discharging game balls paid out from the payout device, to a receiving plate, which is a plate where a foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided. The gaming machine H7, wherein the lower end of the outlet side outlet of the foul ball passage is lower than the lower end.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other gaming ball using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage was performed. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the paid out game balls.

<Characteristic I group> (Structure of the board holding surface)
A game device used during a game, and a receiving device that is open on one side that is opposite to the game device and that can receive the game device from the one side, the receiving device includes the game device. The game device is provided with a state changing unit that can be changed from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to an available state, which is a state in which the gaming unit can be used. A gaming machine I1 comprising: a proximity unit that approaches the gaming unit from the one side.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board can be rotated in the rotation direction parallel to the front of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame, and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, JP-A-2005-230420). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the gaming board is pushed into the position of use, so if the pushing of the gaming board is halfway, the pushing is performed again. It is necessary to perform such a repetitive operation, and there is a problem that the operation efficiency may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means includes the proximity means which is close to the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into the use state, the pressing of the game board can be prevented. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means abuts the game board and applies pushing force,
This has the effect that the game board can be pushed to the position in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side according to a state change to an unusable state in which the gaming means is disabled. .

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) in accordance with the state change of the gaming means to the unusable state. There is an effect that the work efficiency of the work can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing unit is configured to make the gaming unit unusable so that the unusable state occurs, and the proximity unit retreats outside the gaming unit. Gaming machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removing operation of the gaming means can be improved, and the game efficiency can be improved. Since the operation is performed when the means is disabled, the work efficiency can be further improved.

The gaming machine I4 according to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the state changing unit includes a contact unit that receives a load from the gaming unit when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, the state changing means changes to the usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means. Therefore, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means allows the state changing means to be used as a series of flows. State can be changed.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported on one side of the receiving means as a shaft, and is configured to be received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means includes the receiving means. A gaming machine I5, which is disposed on the other side of the game machine.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, using the width of the gaming means,
The load can be efficiently applied to the contact means via the game means.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means is such that the state changing means disables the gaming means. A gaming machine I6, comprising: a closing restricting portion for preventing the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means determines whether or not the gaming means can be used depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It can be determined whether or not to perform. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means keeps the unusable state.

<Characteristic J group> (Piano wire goto prevention with inverted cup and harness band)
A game means used during the game, and a receiving means which is open on one side which is opposite to the game means and which can receive the game means from the one side, the receiving means includes the game means and A gaming machine J1 comprising: arranging means arranged on a path communicated with the outside, wherein the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from outside at a plurality of places.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraudulent act of inserting a piano wire from a rotation axis side of a front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No.
26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient because there is only one anti-fraud unit.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, the arranging means is arranged on the path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, thereby preventing fraud. Can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the arranging unit includes a first unit that suppresses entry of a member from outside at a first location, and a second unit that inhibits entry of a member from outside at a second location.
A gaming machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of a member from outside by a different method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J1, the method of arranging means for suppressing the entry of a member from outside differs between the first location and the second location. As compared with the case where the number is increased, the entry of the member from the outside can be further suppressed.

It should be noted that the method for suppressing the entry from outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by closing a route, or a method of detecting improper activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means includes an intrusion restricting portion formed in a cup shape opened outward of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further entering.

In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting an electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the path from the outside to the gaming means on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion. Gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J3, when a fraud that penetrates the entry restricting portion due to high heat occurs, a change (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat is detected to detect an external influence. The effect of suppressing the entry of the member can be easily generated.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arranging means may include a member that has entered from the outside,
A gaming machine J5 comprising a cancellation means for guiding to a cancellation area far from the game means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, since the member entering from the outside is guided by the arranging means to the elimination area far from the gaming means, the entry of the member entering from the outside is prevented. Even if the degree is increased, it is possible to prevent a member entering from outside from reaching the game means.

<Characteristic K group> (five-piece decorative plate structure. Including fraud prevention)
A first unit and a second unit, which are arranged to face each other along the first direction and have at least one side connected thereto, and are disposed between the first unit and the second unit along the first direction; A connecting means for connecting the first means and the second means, and a connecting direction of the connecting part is set to a second direction intersecting the first direction. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that:

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a first unit and a second unit that are arranged to face each other and are connected at at least one side, and are disposed between the first unit and the second unit along a first direction. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing. When the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied to the first means. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by the three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction crossing the first direction, the third means is provided in the first direction. Therefore, the load applied from the vehicle can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the gaming machine K1, the connecting portion is disposed apart from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is provided a connected means connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that the gaming machine K3 is connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in an approaching third direction and fitting them together.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is provided connected means connected to the other side of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. Are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the first means oriented in a direction intersecting the third direction Resistance to the disassembly of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed outward.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitted portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
Thus, even if a wrongdo occurs in which the fitting portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled, the detection of the wrongdoing can be hastened.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening direction is the same as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

In one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, a light irradiating unit that irradiates light toward the first unit or the second unit and is fixed to the connected unit, and one of the first unit or the second unit. And a light guide means fixed to the member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation means into the inside thereof.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means and the second means from being displaced from the light guide means.

In the gaming machine K6, an abutting means is provided for abutting a surface in a region where the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means face each other.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine K6, the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained at a distance corresponding to the dimension of the contact means. Can be.
This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by receiving a load in the facing direction. Can be.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from being changed even when a load is applied in the facing direction when the first means or the second means is illegally disassembled. can do.

<Characteristic L group> (Point L utilizing curved light guide means. The point is not reached)
A light guiding means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of light passing through the inside, and a projected means to which light passing through the light guiding means is disposed opposite to the light guiding means, and The gaming machine L1, wherein the projection target device includes a concave facing portion disposed to face the concave portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion disposed to face the convex portion of the light guiding means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end face to the surface (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-265573). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, it is necessary to change the intensity of incident light in order to partially change the intensity of surface-emitted light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection target means includes the concave facing part and the convex facing part, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave facing part and the convex facing part. With the department,
The light emission intensity of the projection target can be changed.

In the gaming machine L1, the projection target means is configured such that the concave-facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex-facing portion is made of a material that transmits less light than the concave-facing portion. Gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the intensity of light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened, so that the light emitted from the light guide means is converged at the concave facing portion. The effect of the effect by the light can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, there is provided opposite projection means which is disposed on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guiding means interposed therebetween, and which projects light passing through the light guiding means. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light guide facing the concave portion and a portion of the light guide facing the convex portion are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L2, the portion of the opposite projection unit that is arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide unit and the portion that is arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide unit are light. Since the transmissivity is formed from substantially the same material, the same light is incident on the light guide means, so that the light is visually recognized through the projected means and the light is visually recognized through the opposite projection means. And can be different.

<Characteristic M group> (bass reflex speaker arrangement structure)
A first means and a second means which are arranged opposite to each other and are fixed to each other, and constitute the internal space in a fixed state; an acoustic means which is arranged in a state where at least a part thereof enters the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are provided at both left and right ends of a front frame, and which performs effects by sound output from the speakers (for example, JP-A-2016-1).
No. 6088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling to the rear side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine, and is sent out of the gaming machine.
There is a problem that the effect of giving a low tone is easily performed, but the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left and right width of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, a bending path is formed in the internal space of the first means and the second means by the bending means. By releasing the right and left widths, the vibration wave can be made to travel at an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means has a rib shape from at least one of the first means or the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2 comprising: a protruding portion protruding from the first means, the protruding tip of the protruding portion being in contact with the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in a direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. Abuts with each other to prevent the occurrence of a gap between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluid such as the vibration wave from passing through the gap in the bending path.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, an opening is provided to connect the internal space to the outside, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being closed by a game machine.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, The wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passage member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

The gaming machine M4, wherein in the gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed closer to the acoustic means than the projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the protruding portion and disconnected. be able to.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and the second means is fastened and fixed, and an effect means arranged below the support fastening means and performing an effect accompanying a game A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the production means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the production means from below, so that the support fastening means can be weighted without pressing the space used for production. Things can be adopted.

<Characteristic N group> (movable unit, reverse rotating flower. Petal that stops halfway)
A base member, a first displacement unit that is displaceably supported by the base member, a driving unit that applies a driving force to the first displacement unit, and a following state in which the first displacement unit is displaced in a displacement direction. A second switchable state in a non-following state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction.
And a displacing means, wherein at least the second displacing means is in a following state, the third displacing means being displaced in a direction opposite to the displacing direction of the second displacing means by a driving force of the driving means. A gaming machine N1 comprising:

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the extension / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means is extended / contracted, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means when performing the operation (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacing means expands and contracts, the direction of displacement of the first displacing means and the second displacing means is the same, so that a slow effect is produced, and the effect of the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means,
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the speed of the second displacement means felt by the player as a bodily sensation, as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

In the gaming machine N1, a resistance means for generating a resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means is provided, and the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Gaming machine N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the action of the resistance means causes the second displacement means to follow the first displacement means in a following state and a non-following state deviating from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of the mode of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing the state of the second displacement means using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is provided so as to be visible from the front surface.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible, so that the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and the player can visually recognize the resistance means. It can be shared with the function as the effect device.

In the gaming machine N4, a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member is provided, and the shaft means rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially and rotatably. Gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N4, the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the shaft means functioning as the rotation axis of the resistance means are fixed to the base member. As the posture of any one of the second displacement means and the resistance means changes, the posture of the other members or means also changes, so that the displacement resistance is prevented from rising excessively. Can be.

<Characteristic O group> (Utilization of shell buttons and punch holes. The point is not reached)
In a gaming machine including a first means and a housing means configured to house the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: an opening; and a second opening that is opened with a width equal to or greater than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include operating means operable by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a foreign object is inserted into a gap between the upper plate and the operation means, the foreign object remains inside and may cause a malfunction. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 has the second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the housing means and the first means, so that foreign matter is stored through the second opening. It can be easily removed outside the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where foreign matter remains inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the accommodating unit includes a support unit that supports the first unit, and the second opening is disposed on the opposite side of the support unit with the first unit therebetween. Gaming machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the support portion.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, before the water reaches the low water resistant portion, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured to have a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A gaming machine O4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
Since the opening has a shape based on the shape of the solid object in the different direction, the solid object can be easily removed through the second opening.

The gaming machine O5, wherein in any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is disposed closer to a player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially closed at the second opening. Can be done. This allows the player to be aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, so that the possibility of the solid object remaining remaining can be reduced. .

<Feature P group> (G2 notice control)
Determining means for performing the determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means being stopped and displayed In this case, in a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, an effect executing means for executing an effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; Determining means for determining that the specific effect is to be executed by the effect executing means for dynamic display of the identification information continuously, and determining that the specific effect is to be executed by the determining means; And a suspending means for suspending the execution of the specific effect until the return condition is satisfied, based on the establishment of the specific condition.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, a special effect is performed for a plurality of continuous variable effects, and a series of effects using a plurality of variable effects is provided to a player, so that the entertainment of the game is provided. (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541) has been proposed. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., by executing a plurality of continuous variable effects, if an informational effect or the like to be executed occurs irregularly during that time, the execution is delayed, etc. There is a possibility that a problem that the contents are difficult to understand may occur. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to easily understand the contents of a game.

  According to the gaming machine P1, even when the determination unit determines that the specific effect is to be executed for each of the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times, the specific effect is based on the establishment of the specific condition. Is interrupted until the return condition is satisfied, so that even if the execution of a specific effect has been determined, the execution can be interrupted to perform necessary control, etc. Easy games can be provided. In addition, the execution of the specific effect is resumed when the return condition is satisfied, so that the player can be notified that the specific effect has not been completed in the middle of the process, providing an easy-to-understand effect to the player. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine P1, operating means operable by the player, switching means capable of switching and setting the setting when the operating means is operated, and the setting based on the setting set by the switching means A game machine P2, comprising: a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when starting the dynamic display of the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting, so that the game is played. It is possible to change the dynamic display mode by the operation of the player, and it is possible to enrich the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed, and to suppress the player from getting tired of the game early. There is.

  In the gaming machine P2, the specific condition is satisfied when the setting is switched by the switching unit when the execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining unit. Gaming machine P3.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P2, when the setting is switched by the player, a specific effect is interrupted, and the dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is changed. It is possible to start, and even if the player switches the setting, the specific effect is similarly executed, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that it is difficult to recognize that the setting has been switched.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, a ball-in means for allowing a game ball to enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the ball-in means, and an acquisition means for the information And a storage unit for storing the information acquired by the storage unit, wherein the determination unit performs the determination based on the information stored in the storage unit. P4.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the game ball whose information is obtained by the game ball entering the ball entry means is allowed to enter the ball entry means. There is an effect that interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P4, the ball entry means includes at least a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the acquisition means includes the first ball entry means The first information can be acquired when a game ball enters the second ball, and the second information can be acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. The means dynamically displays first identification information for indicating a result of the determination when the first information is determined by the determination means, and when the second information is determined by the determination means, Is for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a result of the determination, wherein the determination unit preferentially determines the second information over the first information stored in the storage unit. And the specific condition is executed a plurality of times continuously. The second identification information is dynamically displayed in a state where execution of the specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information. Gaming machine P6.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P4, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information executed plural times continuously, the second ball entry is performed. Even if a ball enters the means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed with priority, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize the start.

  In the gaming machine P7, when the first ball entry means is in the first game state, the game ball is configured to enter the ball more easily than the second ball entry means, and the second ball entry means is A gaming machine P8 characterized in that it is configured to be easier to enter the ball than the first entering means when it is in a second gaming state different from the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P7, when the game is in the first game state, the first identification information continuously moves because the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means. This has the effect of making it easier to display the target, making it easier to execute a specific effect many times, and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic Q group> (G production)
Determining means for performing the determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means being stopped and displayed In this case, in a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, a specific effect of executing a specific effect with respect to a plurality of consecutive dynamic displays of the identification information is provided. A gaming machine Q1 comprising: an effect executing means.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . (Patent Document: JP 2010-057441 A). In this kind of pachinko machine and the like, it has been required to further improve the interest in the game. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine B1, even in the case of dynamic display of identification information that does not result in a specific determination, there is an effect that the identification information of a plurality of times can be shown as one dynamic display, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  In the gaming machine Q1, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means, based on the satisfaction of a specific condition, interruption means for interrupting the execution of the specific effect until a return condition is satisfied, A gaming machine Q2 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the execution of the specific effect is suspended until the return condition is established based on the establishment of the specific condition, so that the player can know that the specific condition has been established. There is an effect that it can be easily shown. In addition, when the return condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect is returned, so that the specific effect ends in the middle, the content of the effect becomes incomplete, and it is possible to suppress a problem that confuses the player. effective.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, operating means operable by a player, switching means capable of switching and setting when the operating means is operated, and the setting set by the switching means A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when starting the dynamic display of the identification information based on the game machine Q3.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operation means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. In addition, the dynamic display mode can be changed by the operation of the player, the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed can be abundant, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine Q3, the specific condition is satisfied when the setting is switched by the switching unit when the specific effect is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q3, when the setting is switched by the player, the specific effect is interrupted, and the dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is changed. It is possible to start, and even if the player switches the setting, the specific effect is similarly executed, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that it is difficult to recognize that the setting has been switched.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, ball-in means capable of entering a game ball, acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the ball-in means, and acquisition means thereof And a storage means for storing the information obtained by the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a game ball whose information is obtained by the game ball being entered into the ball entry means is allowed to enter the ball entry means. There is an effect that interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine Q6, characterized in that the gaming machine Q5 has a preliminary determination means for performing a determination before the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q5, the preliminary determination is performed by the preliminary determination means, so that the determination result can be identified before the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is.

  In the gaming machine Q5 or Q6, the entering means includes at least a first entering means and a second entering means different from the first entering means, and the obtaining means includes: The first information can be acquired when a game ball enters the ball means, and the second information can be acquired when a game ball enters the second ball means. When the first information is determined by the determination means, the dynamic display means dynamically displays first identification information for indicating a result of the determination, and the second information is determined by the determination means. In this case, the second identification information for indicating the determination result is dynamically displayed, and the specific condition is that the second identification information is dynamically displayed after the first identification information is dynamically displayed. Gaming machine Q7, which is established when target display is performed.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B5 or B6, if a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is executed a plurality of times in succession, the second effect Even if a ball enters the ball entry means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so the dynamic display of the second identification information is prioritized. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the game has been started.

  In the gaming machine Q7, a launching means capable of varying a firing force based on an operation of a player to launch a game ball, and a gaming ball fired at a first firing force by the launching means can flow down. The first flow path and a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path are configured to be difficult to flow, and a game ball fired at a second firing force different from the first firing force is configured to flow down. And a second flow path, wherein the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball, and wherein the second ball entry means, A gaming machine Q8, wherein gaming balls flowing down the second flow path are arranged at positions where they can enter.

  According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q7, there is an effect that the player can intentionally satisfy the specific condition easily by adjusting the firing force of the game ball.

<Characteristic R group> (If special figure 2 remains after the end of working hours, do not shift to charge effect until 5 changes)
First ball entry means in which game balls can always enter, and second ball entry means which can be changed into a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which the game balls are more difficult to enter than the first state; Acquisition means capable of acquiring first information when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and acquiring second information when a game ball enters the second ball entry means; A storage unit in which the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition unit are stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage unit Means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, and when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means Bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player , A determination means for determining whether a specific condition for changing the second ball entry means from the second state to the first state is satisfied, and an effect for indicating a determination result by the determination means. Is performed, and when the determination unit determines that the specific condition is satisfied, a production determination unit that can determine a specific production as the production performed by the production unit; A gaming machine R1 comprising: prohibition means for prohibiting execution of a specific effect by the effect determination unit when a condition is satisfied.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In a pachinko machine or the like of this type, when a special period in which entering the starting port is easier than usual is set, an effect is issued in advance or during the period that the special period will be executed. (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229733). When there is a high possibility that a large number of pending balls have been generated, for example, immediately after the state where it becomes easy to enter the ball into the starting port has ended, by performing the notification, the notification that is not advantageous to the player is performed. As a result, there is a possibility that a problem that the interest of the game is reduced may occur. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine R1, the execution of the specific effect indicating that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means by the satisfaction of the prohibition condition is not performed. It is possible to execute an effect in accordance with the needs of the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine R1, state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is more easily changed from the second state to the first state than in a normal state, The prohibition condition is a condition in which a first condition that is satisfied based on the setting of the normal state from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting unit is set as at least one condition. A gaming machine R2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, the first condition based on the termination of the special state in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entry means as the prohibition condition is set as the fulfillment condition. Since a large amount of second information is stored, a specific effect is executed during a period in which the profit for the player is low even when the game ball is thrown into the second ball entry means, thereby suppressing a problem of lowering the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine R2, when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting unit, a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored in the storage unit. The gaming machine R3, wherein the second condition that is satisfied is set as at least one condition.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, when the special state is completed, the second information is increased by providing a condition that a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored. The prohibition condition is satisfied only in the state in which the second information is stored, and the effect that the specific effect is not executed and the profit of the player is impaired can be suppressed even though the number of stored second information is small. .

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the determination unit is configured to change the second ball entry unit to the first state during the first period for a first period, and the determination result is longer than the first period. During the second period, it is configured to be able to determine a specific second determination result that is changed to the first state, and the effect determination unit is configured to perform the determination based on the determination of the specific second determination result. A gaming machine R4 characterized by determining an effect.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, it is possible to notify that the period is more advantageous to the player by executing the specific effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. is there.

<Feature S group> (Volume control)
In a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means. As a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means, a sound output means capable of outputting sound and a volume output by the sound output means can be set based on an operation from outside the gaming machine. Volume setting means, a first state in which the sound is output from the audio output means based on the volume set by the volume setting means, and the sound having a predetermined volume regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means. An output control unit that switches between a second state in which sound is output from the output unit, and a power cutoff state in which power supply for operating the game machine is cut off, and power supply to the game machine is performed. Gaming machine S1, and wherein the in case of a start has been restored condition, those having an initial setting means for setting the second state.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine and the like, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of variably setting a volume of a sound effect or a sound output as an effect by a player's operation, setting of a game store, etc. JP 2011-200511 A). In this type of gaming machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of more suitable volume control. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably controlling a sound volume.

  According to the gaming machine S1, when the power is turned on, the second state of outputting at a predetermined volume is set regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means. And there is an effect that suitable volume control can be executed.

  In the gaming machine S1, the second state is a state in which a sound volume is set so as to be lower than the lowest sound volume set by the sound volume setting means.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, in the second state, the volume is set to be lower than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means. There is an effect that the noise of the game store can be reduced. In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the output control means continuously sets the second state until the execution of one effect is completed by the effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the second state is continuously set until the execution of the first effect is completed, so that the power supply is provided during the period when the effect is not being executed. Even if the power is turned on, it is possible to recognize that the effect is executed after the power is turned on, based on the volume of one effect executed later.

  In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, when turning on the power to the gaming machine, an initial state setting means for setting the state of the gaming machine to an initial state on condition that a predetermined operation is performed from the outside. The gaming machine S4, wherein the audio output means outputs a predetermined notification sound at a maximum volume when the initial state is set.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the fact that the game machine has been initialized can be confirmed by the notification sound, and when the gaming machine is incorrectly initialized. This has the effect that fraud can be found early.

<Characteristic T group> (Hold symbol display area variable control)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and an identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, in the gaming machine having the bonus game execution unit stored in the storage unit before being determined by the determination unit. For each piece of information, a symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol, and a display mode of an area in which the symbol is displayed on the symbol display means is changed according to the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means. That the symbol display area varying means and, wherein the one having a game machine T1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting port during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the right to perform the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information, and the number of the retained ball information is (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541) has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, the display area in which the reserved ball information is displayed is difficult to understand in a state where the reserved ball information is not displayed. Was sought. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and aims to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine T1, the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed according to the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, the display mode of the display area in which the symbol is displayed is stored. There is an effect that it is possible to easily recognize the number of pieces of information and provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine T1, the symbol display means displays area information indicating an area in which the symbol is displayed, even when the symbol is not displayed, and the symbol display area changing means. Is a gaming machine T2 characterized in that the area information is variably displayed.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1, the area information is variably displayed according to the number of stored information, so that the area information corresponding to the number of symbols to be displayed is displayed. This has the effect of being easy to understand.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the symbol display means displays identification information capable of identifying an upper limit number of the information that can be stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1 or T2, there is an effect that the upper limit number can be recognized by the identification information and a game can be prevented from being performed so that the acquisition condition is satisfied beyond the upper limit number. .

  The gaming machine T4, wherein in the gaming machine T3, the identification information is set to be non-display when the symbol that is the upper limit number is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T3, the identification information is not displayed when the upper limit number of symbols is displayed, so that the display of the symbols is prevented from being hindered. This has the effect that the symbols can be easily identified.

  In any of the gaming machines T1 to T4, a period determining means for determining a period in which a predetermined number of the acquisition conditions are satisfied, and a display mode of an area in which the symbol is displayed based on the period determined by the period determining means. A gaming machine T5 comprising: a rule changing means for changing a display rule to be changed.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T4, the display rule for changing the display mode of the area in which the symbols are displayed is changed depending on the period until a predetermined number of acquisition conditions are satisfied. Therefore, the period in which the acquisition condition is satisfied can be recognized according to the manner in which the display mode is changed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T5, the symbol display area changing means displays the first display mode until the symbols are displayed in the first number, and the symbol display area changing means increases the first display mode by exceeding the first number. A gaming machine T6 characterized in that the gaming machine T6 is configured to change the display to a second display mode different from that of the first display mode.

  According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T5, the first display mode is displayed until the first number is displayed. It is possible to increase the willingness to establish and to enhance the interest of the game.

<Feature U group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and an identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, in the gaming machine having the bonus game execution unit stored in the storage unit before being determined by the determination unit. A symbol display unit for displaying a symbol corresponding to each piece of information; and a display mode for changing a display mode displayed on the symbol display unit based on a period during which the information is acquired by the acquisition unit by a predetermined number. Gaming machine U1, characterized in that those having a variable means.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting port during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the right to perform the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information, and the number of the retained ball information is (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541) has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player gets tired of the game early. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine U1, the display mode displayed on the symbol display means is variable depending on the period until the predetermined number of information is obtained, so that the player is also interested in the period until the predetermined number of information is obtained. And the effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine U2, wherein the display mode changing means changes a display mode in a display area where the symbols are displayed based on the period.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U1, the display mode of the display area in which the symbols are displayed is changed based on the period. There is an effect that it can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the display area in which the symbol is displayed in the symbol display means has a suggestion mode indicating that the symbol is an area in which the symbol is displayed even in a period in which the symbol is not displayed. A gaming machine U3, which is set for display.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the suggestion mode is displayed even in a period in which no symbols are displayed, so that it is possible to promptly confirm that information has been acquired. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine U3, the display mode changing means changes the suggestion mode corresponding to the period.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U3, the suggestion mode is changed in accordance with the period required for storing the predetermined number of information, so that the frequency at which the information is stored in the suggestion mode Is effective.

  In the gaming machine U3 or U4, the suggestion mode is displayed by being regularly changed based on the number of the displayed symbols, and the display mode variable unit is displayed based on the period. A gaming machine U5 variably displayed in a special suggestion mode different from the suggestion mode corresponding to the number of symbols in the game machine U5.

  According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U3 or U4, the frequency of acquiring information can be confirmed by the special suggestion mode, and the information mode varies irregularly and sometimes irregularly. There is an effect that a game can be performed while enjoying the situation.

<Feature V group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and an identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the information before being determined by the determination means is stored in the storage means in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine V1 having an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the storage of a number or more.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting port during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the right to perform the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information, and the number of the retained ball information is (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541) has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player gets tired of the game early. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine V1, a specific effect is executed by storing a predetermined number or more of information in the storage means, so that not only the determination result but also the number of stored information can be of interest. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine V1, a preliminary determination unit that performs a determination before the information stored by the storage unit is determined by the determination unit; A gaming machine V2 comprising: an effect determination unit capable of determining a type of the specific effect based on a determination result.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V1, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the result of the preliminary determination, so that the identification information is stored before the specific effect is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to suggest the determination result of the information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on period information corresponding to a period until a predetermined number of the information is stored by the storage means, wherein the type of the specific effect is determined. .

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the period information corresponding to the period until the predetermined number of information is stored in the storage means. There is an effect that the frequency at which information is stored by the effect can be identified.

  In any one of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the game machine has history information storage means for storing game history information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the specific effect is provided by the history information stored in the history information storage means. The type of the specific effect is determined based on the game machine V4.

  According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the history information of the game, so that the type of the specific effect is variable by continuing the game. This makes it possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continuously executed until the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage unit becomes equal to or less than a specific number. .

  According to the gaming machine V5, in any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continued until the number becomes equal to or less than the specific number, so that the player is prevented from playing the game so that the stored information does not become equal to or less than the specific number. There is an effect that can be motivated.

  In any of the gaming machines V1 to V5, for each piece of the information stored in the storage unit before being determined by the determination unit, a symbol display unit that displays a corresponding symbol, and stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine V6, comprising: symbol display area changing means for changing a display mode of an area in which the symbol is displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the number of pieces of the information.

  According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V5, the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed corresponding to the number of stored information, so that the information is stored. There is an effect that the number can be easily identified.

<Feature W group> (Lucky number)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and an identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, in the gaming machine having the bonus game execution unit stored in the storage unit before being determined by the determination unit. For each piece of information, a symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol, and when the information is stored in the storage means, the symbol display means is stored in the storage means at the time when the information is stored. Number information storage means for storing number information corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored before the determination by the determination means, and executing a specific effect based on the number information stored in the number information storage means A gaming machine W1 comprising:

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting port during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the right to perform the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information, and the number of the retained ball information is (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541) has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player gets tired of the game early. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine W1, when the information is stored, the number information corresponding to the number of information stored at the time when the information is stored is stored for the stored information, and the identification based on the number information is performed. Since the effect is executed, there is an effect that the interest when the information is stored can be further improved.

  The gaming machine W2, wherein in the gaming machine W1, the specific effect is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine W1, the specific effect is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific determination result, so that the specific determination result is determined. It is possible to make the player interested in the number information at the time when the played information is stored, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine W2, the specific effect is executed in a mode indicating an area in which the symbol corresponding to the number information stored for the information determined as the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine W3 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W2, it is possible to confirm the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific determination result last time by the specific effect when the symbol is displayed. There is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of a symbol being displayed in an area indicated by a specific effect.

  The gaming machine W4, wherein any of the gaming machines W1 to W3 is provided with a suggestion corresponding to the number information to the symbol.

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the design is provided with a suggestion mode corresponding to the number information, so when the number of pieces of information before being determined increases or decreases. Also, there is an effect that the number information at the time of storage can be recognized by the suggestion mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, a type determining unit that determines a type of the special bonus game executed by the special bonus game executing unit, and the number information of the specific effect when the special bonus game is executed. Notification means for notifying suggestion information indicating type information corresponding to the type of the privilege game executed based on the fact that the information is stored in the number of storages corresponding to Gaming machine W5.

  According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the suggestion information indicating the type of the bonus game being executed by storing information up to the storage number corresponding to the specific effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to play a game such that information is stored even during the privilege game, and it is possible to increase the efficiency of the game.

  The gaming machine W6, wherein the type of the privilege game is configured to be difficult to identify from the identification information for indicating the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W5, the type of the privilege game is configured to be difficult to identify from the identification information, so that the value that the suggestion information is notified can be increased. is there.

<Group X> (Derivation of charge production)
First ball entry means in which game balls can always enter, and second ball entry means which can be changed into a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which the game balls are more difficult to enter than the first state; Acquisition means capable of acquiring first information when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and acquiring second information when a game ball enters the second ball entry means; A storage unit in which the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition unit are stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage unit Means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, and when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means Bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player , A determination means for determining whether a specific condition for changing the second ball entry means from the second state to the second state is satisfied, and an effect for indicating a determination result by the determination means. And an effect determining means capable of determining a specific effect as an effect to be executed by the effecting means when the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the determining means. A gaming machine X1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, a movable member such as a wing-shaped member that restricts the ball from entering the starting port, and releases the restriction when the opening condition is satisfied and changes the ball so that the game ball can easily enter the ball. (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Publication No. 2011-229733) has proposed a gaming machine in which is attached to a starting port. In the above-described pachinko machines and the like, even if the opening condition is simply satisfied and the movable member moves, there is a possibility that a problem may occur that the player gets tired of the game. The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine X1, the player can easily determine that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific effect, and play the game not only with the specific determination result but also expecting the specific effect to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine X2, further comprising a prohibition unit for prohibiting the effect determination unit from determining a specific effect when the avoidance condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X1, the determination of the specific effect is prohibited by the establishment of the avoidance condition, so that the execution of the specific effect unnecessarily can be suppressed. effective.

  State setting means which can set a special state in which the second ball entry means is more easily changed from the second state to the first state than the normal state in the gaming machine X1 or X2; Wherein the avoidance condition sets at least one condition based on the setting of the normal state from the state where the special state is set by the state setting unit. Gaming machine X3.

  According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X1 or X2, at the timing when the special state is set to the normal state, there is a high possibility that a large amount of the second information is stored in the storage means. Has the effect that the problem of excessively entering the second ball entry means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine X3, the avoidance condition may be that the second information is stored in the storage unit when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting unit. A gaming machine X4 set as at least one condition.

  According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X3, there is an effect that a problem that the second information is excessively stored can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, a launching means capable of varying a firing force based on an operation of a player to fire a game ball, and a game ball fired by the firing means with a first firing force A first flow path configured to be able to flow down, and a game ball fired at a second firing force different from the first firing force, wherein a game ball flowing down the first flow path is configured to be difficult to flow down. A second flow path configured to be able to flow down, wherein the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where game balls flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball; The ball means is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the game ball flows down to the first flow path. A gaming machine X5 for notifying a player of suggestion information suggesting that a game be performed.

  According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the suggestion information for causing the gaming ball to flow down to the first flow path is notified, so that the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that a player enters a game ball into the second ball entry means changed to the first state.

<Group Y> (button pop-out control)
Operating means having an operating surface operable by a player, moving means for moving the operating surface of the operating means, and operation control means for controlling the operation of the moving means, The moving means is configured to be capable of executing a first operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means in a first movement mode and a second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means in a second movement mode different from the first movement mode. The movement control means executes the first operation when a first condition is satisfied, and executes the second operation when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine Y1 for controlling the operation of the gaming machine Y1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . This type of pachinko machine or the like is provided with operating means such as switches that can be operated by the player, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operating means can be changed, or the type of background can be changed. There has been proposed a gaming machine configured to be switchable (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that a player simply gets tired of playing a game by simply operating the operating means. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, since the operation surface of the operation means can be moved in different movement modes by the operation control means, the player can be watched by the operation means. Therefore, the effect of using the operation means can be enhanced, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Y1, the moving means moves the operation surface of the operation means from a predetermined initial position to a specific operation position.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, since the operation control means can change the movement mode until the operation surface of the operation means is moved to a specific operation position, the game can be performed even when the operation surface of the operation means moves. People can be interested.

  In the gaming machine Y2, the moving unit moves the operation surface of the operation unit such that a moving period in the second operation is longer than a moving period in the first operation. Gaming machine Y3.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, the moving period can be varied according to the control content of the operation control means, so that the player can be more interested in the process of moving the operation surface of the operation means.

  In the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the moving unit includes a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving an operation surface of the operation unit, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the operation unit. The operation control means performs a plurality of drive controls on the drive means, and varies the operation content of the moving means in accordance with the content of the drive control to be performed. A gaming machine Y4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine Y4, the operation content of the moving means can be made different by making the content of the drive control to the driving means different. Therefore, the control content of the operation control means can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine Y4, the driving unit generates the driving force by a rotation operation, and the operation control unit performs a first driving control for rotating the driving unit in a first direction as the plurality of driving controls. And a second drive control for rotating in a second direction different from the first direction, and the moving unit is configured to execute the second drive control when the first drive control is executed by the control unit. A gaming machine Y5 that performs one operation and executes the second operation when the second drive control is executed.

  According to the gaming machine Y5, since the moving means performs different operations by rotating the driving means in different directions, it is possible to easily change the movement mode of moving the operation surface of the operating means.

  The gaming machine Y6, further comprising a speed varying means capable of varying the rotation speed of the driving means.

  According to the gaming machine Y6, since the rotation speed is changed by the speed changing means, the movement mode of moving the operation surface of the operation means can be easily diversified, and the effect of the effect using the operation means can be improved. Can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine Y6, the second movement mode is to move an operation surface of the operation means to the specific operation position in accordance with a rotation speed of the drive means changed by the speed change means. Gaming machine Y7 characterized by the following.

  Discriminating means for executing discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied in the gaming machines Y1 to Y7; And a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect for indicating that the judgment result of the judgment means is the predetermined judgment result, wherein the moving means operates as the suggestion effect. The game machine Y8, wherein the operation control means determines the content of the operation control in accordance with the result of the determination by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine Y8, it is possible to suggest the determination result of the determination unit by the movement mode of the operation surface of the operation unit to be executed. Become. Therefore, the effect of the effect using the operation means can be enhanced.

<Characteristic Z group>
Operating means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player when predetermined operating conditions are satisfied; condition determining means for determining whether predetermined moving conditions are satisfied; and the predetermined movement by the condition determining means. Moving means capable of moving the operation surface of the operating means from the storage position to the protruding position when the condition is satisfied; movement control means for controlling the moving means; And an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the operation of the operation device, wherein the moving means comprises: a first operation for moving an operation surface of the operating means to the protruding position; And a second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position, and the movement control means is configured to perform the predetermined operation by the operation means, Yo When said effect is feasible, the gaming machine is characterized in that to perform said first operation Z1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . This type of pachinko machine or the like is provided with operating means such as switches that can be operated by the player, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operating means can be changed, or the type of background can be changed. There has been proposed a gaming machine configured to be switchable (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that a player simply gets tired of playing a game by simply operating the operating means. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine Z1, since the movement control means causes the movement means to perform the first operation regardless of whether or not to move the operation surface of the operation means, the movement means operates the movement of the operation surface of the operation means. By grasping whether or not it is possible, it is possible to prevent the player from being detected in advance, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, there is an effect that the player can expect the player to perform the second operation by performing the first operation.

  In the gaming machine Z1, the moving means includes a driving means for generating a driving force for moving an operation surface of the operating means by a rotation operation, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. Wherein the movement control means comprises: a first drive control for rotating the drive means in a first direction as the plurality of movement controls; and a rotation in a second direction different from the first direction. A second drive control to be performed, wherein the moving means executes the first operation when the first drive control is executed by the movement control means, and executes the second drive control. A gaming machine Z2 that executes the second operation when the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Z1, the operating surface of the operating unit can be configured not to move even when the driving unit is driven, and the position of the driving unit can be adjusted according to the state. Has the effect that it can be changed without moving it.

  In the gaming machine Z2, the gaming machine Z2 has a regulation state that can be changed between a regulation state for regulating movement of the operation surface of the operation means by the movement means and a release state for releasing the regulation. The first operation performed by the moving unit in response to the operation is to change the regulating unit to the release state, and the second operation is to move the operation surface of the operation unit to the projecting position. A gaming machine Z3, which is an operation.

  According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Z2, the operation of the moving means is restricted by the regulating means. Then, the moving means is operated so as to change the state of the regulating means in accordance with the control content executed by the operation control means. Therefore, even if the moving means is operated, it is possible to reliably control whether or not the operation surface of the operating means moves.

  In the gaming machine Z3, the transmitting means is a rotating member rotatable in synchronization with the rotating operation of the driving means, and an operating member connected to the operating means and on which the rotating operation of the rotating member acts. And the rotation member has a protrusion that can be brought into contact with the operation member, and the regulating unit rotates the drive unit in the first direction to move the protrusion to the operation member. The gaming machine Z4 is configured to change to the release state by being brought into contact with the game machine Z4.

  In the gaming machine Z4, the regulating means does not change to the released state when the driving means is rotated in the second direction to bring the protrusion into contact with the operating member. Gaming machine Z5.

  In the gaming machine Z5, the position at which the projecting portion stops is the same between when the first drive control is executed by the operation control means and when the second drive control is executed. Gaming machine Z6.

  Discriminating means for executing a discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied in the gaming machines Z1 to Z6; And a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect for indicating that the judgment result of the judgment means is the predetermined judgment result, wherein the predetermined movement condition is determined in accordance with the judgment result of the judgment means. Is a gaming machine Z7.

<Characteristic α group> (Overwinning at the time of big hit)
Determining means capable of executing the determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the counterpart obtaining means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means; When displayed, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game, a first privilege game in which a first privilege advantageous to a player is provided as the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, A second privilege game in which a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given; and a determining means capable of determining any of the second privilege game. Is executed, the information processing apparatus has type determining means for determining a notification type for notifying the player of notification information for notifying the type information of the executed privilege game from a plurality of types. Play with Machine α1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. (Patent Document: JP 2010-057441 A). In this type of gaming machine, there has been a demand for further enhancing the interest in the game. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine α1, when the privilege game is being executed, the notification type for suggesting the type of the bonus game is determined from a plurality of types. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine α1, a variable ball-in means that can be changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter easily than the open state, and the privilege game from the closed state Variable control means for performing an open game in which the variable ball-in means is varied until a predetermined number of game balls in the open state enter the variable ball-in means, and the notification type exceeds the predetermined number. A gaming machine α2 including at least a first notification type for notifying the notification information based on a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means.

  According to the gaming machine α2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine α1, the value of having the variable ball entry means allow more than a predetermined number of game balls to enter can be increased, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

  In the gaming machine α2, the bonus game is to execute the opening game a plurality of times, and when the first notification type is determined, based on that the opening game has been executed a predetermined number of times, A gaming machine α3 having a notification type switching means for switching to another notification type.

  According to the gaming machine α3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine α2, even when the first notification type is determined, the switching to another notification type is performed during the privilege game, so that the number of game balls exceeding a predetermined number is obtained. There is an effect that it is possible to switch so that the notification information is notified even when it is difficult to enter the ball.

  In the gaming machine α3, the notification type switching means switches to the other notification type on condition that the specific notification information is not notified in the first notification type. α4.

  According to the gaming machine α4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine α3, the notification type is switched on the condition that the specific notification information is not notified, so that there is an effect that a problem in which the notification is duplicated can be suppressed. .

<Characteristic β group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and an identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, in a game machine having a bonus game execution unit based on the information stored in the storage unit. The pre-determination execution means for performing the determination at the time, and the information determined as the specific determination result by the pre-determination execution means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means are stored. If so, the gaming machine β1, characterized in that those having a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. (Patent Document: JP 2010-057441 A). In this type of gaming machine, there has been a demand for further enhancing the interest in the game. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine β1, when the bonus game is executed, if it is further determined that the bonus game is to be executed thereafter, the specific effect is executed, so that the specific effect is executed. There is an effect that the player can be expected to improve the interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine β1, in the bonus game, the probability that the specific determination result is determined by the player to be the first bonus game in which the normal gaming state is set after execution and the specific determination result after execution is higher than in the normal gaming state. A second privilege game in which a special game state is set is at least set, and the specific effect is configured to indicate that the special game state is set. Gaming machine β2.

  In the gaming machine β2, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode as a stop display mode indicating that the second privilege game is executed, and the first privilege game is executed. In the case where the identification information is dynamically displayed, a stop display switching unit capable of performing stop display in the specific stop display mode if the information determined as the specific determination result is stored. A gaming machine β3 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine β, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine β2, even when the first privilege game is executed, it is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, so that it is as if the second privilege game is executed. There is an effect that can be made to think.

  In the gaming machine β3, the stop display switching means stores the information determined to be the specific determination result when the identification information indicating that the first privilege game is to be executed is dynamically displayed. And switching to the specific stop display mode based on that the information determined to be the specific determination result is stored during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. Gaming machine β4.

  According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β3, the stop mode is switched even after the dynamic display is started, so that the effect of being able to increase the chances of being displayed in the specific stop mode can be increased. is there.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P8, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R4, S1 to S4, T1 to T6, U1 to U5, V1 to V6, W1 to W6, X1 to X4, Y1 to Y8, Z1 to Z7, α1 to α4, β1 to β4, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P8, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R4, S1 to S4, T1 to T6, U1 to U5, V1 to V6, W1 to W6, X1 to X4, Y1 to In any of Y8, Z1 to Z7, α1 to α4, and β1 to β4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P8, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R4, S1 to S4, T1 to T6, U1 to U5, V1 to V6, W1 to W6, X1 to X4, Y1 to The gaming machine γ3 according to any one of Y8, Z1 to Z7, α1 to α4, and β1 to β4, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
114 display control device (dynamic display means)
203a Special symbol 1 holding ball storage area (storage means)
203b Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (storage means)
Z255, Z275 Determination means Z307, Z314 Acquisition means Z1004 Bonus game execution means Z2106 Symbol display means Z2111 Display mode variable means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. .

  In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting port during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the right to perform the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information, and the number of the retained ball information is Is displayed on the display means.

JP 2010-057441 A

  However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage unit in which the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored, Determining means for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means on the display means for a predetermined period of time A bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit; and a determination by the determination unit. wherein the symbol display means capable of displaying on said display means the symbols corresponding to each of the information stored in the storage means before being an area where the pattern on the symbol display unit is displayed A symbol display area changing unit that changes a display mode, wherein the symbol display unit displays area information indicating that the symbol is displayed even when the symbol is not displayed. The symbol display area variable means is configured to change and display the area information where the symbol is not displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the information in the storage means. There is .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage unit configured to store the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a storage unit configured to store the information in the storage unit. Determining means for performing a determination based on the information, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period, and the display means the previous identification information for indicating the specific result of judgment is to be determined and benefits game execution means capable of implementing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when it is stopped and displayed by the determination means a symbol display means capable of displaying the symbols corresponding to the display means, respectively, the display mode of the area where the symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit variable of the information stored in the storage means And a symbol display area changing unit, wherein the symbol display unit displays area information indicating that the symbol is displayed even if the symbol is not displayed. The symbol display area changing means changes and displays the area information in which the symbol is not displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the information in the storage means .

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6 (a). 7A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device. 14A is a front view of the tilting device, FIG. 14B is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a diagram illustrating XIVc− in FIG. 14A. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in XIVc line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. FIG. 17A is a front view of the driving device, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the driving device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 18. (A) And (b) is a front view of a release member and a rotating claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. (A) is a side view of a slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of a release member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a release member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in a 5th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member along the line LIXb-FIXb in FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is FIG. 59 (a). 10 is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the vibrating apparatus in the LXa-LXa line of FIG.59 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in (a) of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a), (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the arrow LXVIIb direction of FIG. 67 (a). It is. (A) is a sectional view of the operation device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in (a) of FIG. 6, and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of an arrow LXVIIIb in (a) of FIG. It is. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive in a 6th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member, and a 2nd transmission member of a left disk cam. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74A is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a partial side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of an engaging member, (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the arrow LXXVIIb direction of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disc cam, and (f) is a front view of the right disc cam. FIG. 78 is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along a line corresponding to a line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) in which the back pack was opened to the inner frame with the inner frame opened to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame, and opened (deployed) the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where the front frame was removed. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window of the front frame are exploded and shown. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window of the front frame are exploded and shown. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a binding movable member in which a released state and a fixed state of the binding movable member are illustrated side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95 (a). (A) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a), and (c) is a schematic drawing of the binding movable member and the harness. FIG. 96D is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the image, and FIG. 96D is a schematic top view of FIG. 96C. (A) And (b) is a top view schematic diagram of a front frame, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and a harness which schematically illustrate a binding movable member and a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a 1st bending area. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a back exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a side view schematic diagram of a light guide member, (b) is sectional drawing of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a). It is a partial rear view of a right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper frame member. It is an exploded back perspective view of an upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of (a) of FIG. 124, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of (a) of FIG. FIG. 124D is a top view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. FIG. 124A is a partial cross-sectional view of a front assembly, a rear assembly, an upper frame member, a main body frame, and an upper plate member along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124A, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of a front assembly, a rear assembly, an upper frame member, a main body frame, and an upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support device, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support device. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support device, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a board support device. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board surface support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board surface support apparatus. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) And (b) is an exploded front perspective view of a ball launching unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of a ball launching unit showing a state of sending out a ball by a ball feeder in a time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of a ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member, showing the relationship between the yarn and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 4 is a partial front view of a ball launch unit, an inner rail, and an outer rail after a ball is launched. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a production operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a production operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 153 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat member, and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal, a flat member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) And (b) is a back perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center axis rotation device and a loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of a back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back board, a side substrate, and a 2nd effect member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide board, and a 2nd effect member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. (A) And (b) is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fit device in a twelfth embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operating device. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operating device. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of a twelfth embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in a 13th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along the line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of an inner frame in a 14th embodiment in a line corresponding to a CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of Drawing 86. (A) is a partial back view of the front frame in a 15th embodiment, (b) and (c) are back views of a fraud detecting device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIb in FIG. 206 (a). It is a partial expansion perspective view of a light guide member, and (c) is a partial expansion perspective view of a light guide member which typically shows the downward concave part provided in the light guide member in area CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIe of FIG. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a partial enlarged front view of a distribution apparatus. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which three reserved balls are set while the third symbol is changing, and (b) is a diagram in which four reserved balls are set while the third symbol is changing. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display mode in which a character J0 appears from a display area C. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four reserved balls are set during the fluctuation of the third symbol and the recommended value without vacancy does not increase, and (b) shows a state from the state of FIG. 6 (a). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls further increases and exceeds a recommended value. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls increases in a short period, and (b) shows that the character J0 in the display area C indicates the optimal number of reserved balls according to the state. It is a figure showing a display mode in the case. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when a character J1 is displayed in the display area C while the third symbol fluctuates, and (b) changes to a reserved ball while the third symbol fluctuates. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display mode when a character J2 is further displayed in a display area C. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum number, and (b) is a display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C has changed when an over-win has been achieved. FIG. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode at the time of making a player accumulate up to six ball | balls during reach, and (b) is a figure which accumulates up to six ball | balls, and the pattern arrangement | sequence changes It is a figure showing a display mode in the case of having performed. (A) is a figure showing the display mode of the lucky display of the previous jackpot hold, (b) shows the display mode when the player presses the button after the number of hold balls has accumulated to six FIG. (A) is a figure showing a display mode of an effect during a long opening, and (b) is a view showing a display mode of a floating effect of a long opening winning. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an outline of various counters in a first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing one example of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ordinary random number table in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the special figure 1 big hit type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the special figure 2 big hit type selection table in the 1st control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a normal variation pattern selection table that is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table for time reduction which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the winning command table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the content of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a content of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the hold change selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the hold effect mode selection table in the first control example. . (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the reserved lid range selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the normal reserved lid range selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the notice A mode hold lid range selection table in the first control example, and (d) is the notice B mode hold lid range in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the selection table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-time winning holding lid cover selection table in the first control example; FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a reserved lid command selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a reserved lid color change selection table in the first control example. It is. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the lucky hold command table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a background mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a reserved character selection table in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the hold character change table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the speech balloon selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal speech balloon selection table in the first control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a notice A balloon selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a notice B balloon selection table in the first control example. It is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term winning balloon table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a reach-rendering balloon table in the first control example. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the lucky hold | mouth balloon selection table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the at-reach effect lottery table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the reach start time calculation table in the first control example. FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky hold lottery table in the first control example. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable execution determination process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 change start processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol change start process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by the MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lucky display determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hold | maintenance attraction effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the holding | maintenance lid setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hold | maintenance character setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the blowing lid setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the short-term winning determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lucky hold | maintenance storage process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the short-term winning management process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hold | maintenance attraction effect management process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a sensor input process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a mode switching process. (A) is a flowchart showing a hold lid command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a suspended character display process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a balloon display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the flow of the special design fluctuation | variation and a continuous effect in 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship between continuous production and background display in the 2nd example of control. (A) is a display mode showing a display screen during a continuous effect in the second control example, and (b) is a display mode showing a display screen during a special effect in the second control example. It is a display mode showing the background change during the continuous production in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the content of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the content of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation processing 2 which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart which showed starting winning processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 2nd example of control. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the prize information related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the stop command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process during the time saving which is performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the effect return process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically some content of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the effect setting process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous effect return process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special effect setting process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display screen when power is turned on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen when power is turned on in the fourth control example. (A) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen after power-on in a fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a fluctuating game screen of the first rotation after power-on in the fourth control example. . It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 4th example of control. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the content of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the content of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a volume table in a fourth control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a start-up process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an initial volume setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a volume setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a stop command process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the volume related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 4th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a storage error A screen at the time of power-on in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage error B screen at the time of a game operation in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. 6 is a timing chart when a retry operation is performed in the tilting device. It is a timing chart when a touch sensor is detected in the tilting device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically some ROM contents of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically some ROM contents of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an operation effect selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting operation scenario table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilt operation scenario A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilt operation scenario B table in the fifth control example. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an origin detection operation A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an origin detection B table in the fifth control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting initial operation table in the fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor input process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the retry process during the touch input performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which showed tilting device control processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the operation effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the tilting initial operation process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process during operation effect performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the return operation process after production performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a retry operation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode during the change of the third symbol in which the retained ball has a jackpot A fluctuation, and (b) is a diagram in which the retained ball is further changed from the state of FIG. 346 (a). It is the figure which showed the display mode when one is digested and it becomes jackpot A. 346 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode during super time in which one more reserve ball is digested from the state of FIG. 346 (b), and FIG. 347 (a) ) Is a diagram showing a display mode in a case where one more is digested from the state of FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of a chance, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode during a probability change. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode when a big hit was started, and (b) is a figure which showed the display mode of the effect of the 1st big hit. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when notifying that there is a button effect during a big hit, and (b) is a diagram in which a button is pressed from the state of FIG. 350 (a). It is the figure which showed the display mode at the time of alert | reporting to the player that the certainty change was provided. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot has ended, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot has ended and the probability change mode has been entered. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the promotion lottery table in the sixth control example. FIG. It is the model which showed typically some content of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop symbol switching process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the stop symbol change process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command receiving process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flow chart which showed opening processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 6th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the big winning prize ball processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a round process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a sixth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing stop symbol replacement processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart showing a game state setting process to be performed. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit related display processing performed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the big prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the sixth control example. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (A) is a figure showing the display mode during the effect when the long open is won in the seventh control example, and (b) is a view showing the display mode in the case of the long open effect in the seventh control example. FIG. It is a figure showing the display mode during long opening effect regulation in the 7th example of control. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically some content of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the long opening effect process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a seventh control example. It is the flowchart which showed the long open related process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in the 7th control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIGS. 1 to 4
4, as a first embodiment, the present invention relates to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”).
An embodiment will be described in the case where the present invention is applied to (10). FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12.
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the front side of the front side with the side provided with the shaft as the opening and closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, a front view (
Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable on the front side with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. ing. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is, for example, a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2)
(See Reference), the stage is changed, or the content of the effect of the super reach is changed, and the like, the operation is performed by the player.

Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminated parts 29 to 3 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs around the periphery of the window 14 c.
3 are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. Further, a front view of the front frame 14 (FIG. 1)
In the upper left portion, a display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs, is provided.

Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 1
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the ball 0, lending of a ball is performed according to the operation. Done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. Return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof. I have. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 that are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

A touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a is provided inside the operation handle 51, and a firing stop switch 51 for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation.
and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of turning operation (turning position) of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view,
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 330, a through Gate 67,
The variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable display unit 8
Numerals 0 are provided in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 is connected to the inner frame 12 through the window 14 c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1).
It can be seen from the front side of. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is formed.
An arcuate inner rail 61 made of a band-shaped metal plate is erected at an inner position of the outer rail 62 similarly to the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided on the front of the game board 13).
(Area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 61 (FIG. 2)
A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the game board 13 to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B determine whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second symbol.
It is configured so that it can be used properly depending on whether or not the winning opening 640 has been won. In particular,
When the ball has won the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while, on the other hand,
When the ball has won the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. Note that a plurality of L
The ED is configured such that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and various combinations of the emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B include:
As a stop symbol after the end of the change, not only is it determined whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot,
If it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds after a 15-round jackpot,
A transition to the low-probability state, and a predetermined number of times of change (for example, 100 times of change) is a jackpot in which the time saving state is set.

The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, the state of the game that is neither probable change nor time reduction (
This is a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability increases.

During probable changes or during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the second winning port 64
The time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared to the normal time. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the second winning opening 640 is not changed.
At least one of the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per one time may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640.
Triggered by a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variation display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display in, and passing of a ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second symbol. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640.
Are configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time.
Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second
The lighting of the symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Also, the through gate 67
Is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Also, the first symbol display device 37A
, 37B indicate the number of balls to be held, so that the second symbol holding lamp may not be lit.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is the first.
This is indicated by a symbol display device 37B.

Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment,
Although the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same, Is different from the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is paid to the second winning port 640, for example, a prize paid out when a ball is paid to the first winning port 64. The number of balls may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the second winning port 640 may be set to five.

The second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State) and the ball is the second winning opening 6
It is in a state where it is easy to win 40.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probability change and during the working hours,
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, “○” is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (expanded) is increased. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”).
), It is more advantageous for the player to obtain a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery by winning a prize in the first winning port 64 and to aim for a jackpot.

On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 so that the second winning opening 64 is formed.
Since the electric accessory 640a attached to 0 is likely to be in an open state and easily wins in the second winning opening 640, the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640. It is better to shoot a ball (so-called “right-handed”), pass through the through gate 67 to open the motorized accessory, and aim for a 15R sure-change big hit by winning in the second winning opening 640. This is advantageous for the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, the pachinko machine 10 may aim at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handing” or the second winning opening 640 by “left-handing”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball in accordance with the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Need to be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way of hitting the ball can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol and Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state,
The specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position may be the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. The present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out-opening 71 is provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
Are stored in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Substrate box 100-10
Reference numeral 4 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and is used to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102,
When the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 11
2 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. Some RAM 203
And various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 causes a jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of the display on the 7A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device is executed.

Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. Work area where values are stored (
Work area). The RAM 203 retains data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.
The configuration is such that all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (FIG. 255), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (FIG. 254). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (FIG. 253) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205
The payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing drive on the front side with the lower side of the open / close plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205.

The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a power supply device 1.
The MPU 201 is connected to a signal output from various switches 208 and an R signal output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erasure signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has M
A stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the PU 211 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like are stored. have. The RAM 213 stores the pachinko machine 10
Even after the power is turned off, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 so that data can be held (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also supplies a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 1
11, but not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the ball is directed by the main control device 110.
a. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (
On the condition that the operation handle 51 is not operated), the firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. .

The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation Display control device 114 such as display) and notice effect
This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in the above. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 22
5, a main controller 110, a display controller 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to each other. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the sound lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, a sound corresponding to the display content is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and is also associated with the display content. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113,
Is to control the display such as the fluctuation effect of the third symbol in. The display control device 11
4 transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be matched.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with the RAM erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 is provided with an AC 2 supplied from the outside.
A voltage of 4 volts is taken in, and various switches such as various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
9 volts for driving solenoids, motors, etc., 5 volts for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and generate these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltage. A necessary voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
This is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminals 201 and 201 of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when the voltage becomes less than 22 volts, the power failure (
It is determined that power interruption or power interruption has occurred, and the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be normally executed and completed.

The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG.
Reference numeral 00 denotes a central portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in a front view (that is, a central portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed into the player, and is provided in a region defined by a housing recess 17 a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Will be arranged. A signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) by the player performing the tilting (rotating) operation of the tilting device 310.

A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the finger of the hand can enter without difficulty. Thereby, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in a manner in which the fingertip is arranged on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player grips the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the operation of the tilting device 310 is often performed with the left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

FIG. 6A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6B is a view of VI of FIG. 6A.
FIG. 7A is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line b-VIb, and FIG.
0 is a partial front view, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along a line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A.

6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. FIG. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in a first state (an initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the up-down direction. In FIG. 7, the tilting device 310 is shifted from the first state. A state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and rearward by being raised around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be able to automatically operate between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is, for example, a specific display (for example, a display of “press a button”) on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
Is performed by the player when appears.

Here, for example, when the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by a method of vigorously dropping the hand downward, such as when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the near side depending on the degree of tilting. This is an aspect in which the hand is shifted and the palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing a pushing operation by a method of dropping his hand vigorously downward.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1, The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform the operation by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to make the method of dropping the hand vigorously downward. Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged can be reduced.

The difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the viewpoint of the player will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand that pushes and operates the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is reduced in area from the viewpoint of the player to such a degree that the operation surface 312a1 is visually recognizable in the first state while being invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed outside the player's viewpoint). Thereby, the first
The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protective lens member 31
1i is configured such that the area of the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) disposed inside the operation device 300 is gradually increased.
The difference in the amount of light (the degree of light and darkness) of light that can be visually recognized by the player in the first state and the second state is increased, and the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state. .

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side of the little finger near the shaft 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm with the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating the wrist about the axis), With the palm integrated with the operation surface 312a1, the tilting device 310 can be pushed in and operated comfortably.

Accordingly, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to let the hand drop vigorously downward.
Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG.
Is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported on a shaft 314 in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at a rear end.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that applies a direct impact to the tilting device 310, and detection sensors 324L and 32 that detect a pressing operation from the first state.
4R are disposed outside the lower frame member 320 surrounding the tilting device 310 from below.

As described above, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for providing the driving force outside the lower frame member 320, the area inside the lower frame member 320 is largely used, and the tilting is performed. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. This allows
A large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG.
FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR <b> 1 disposed at left and right ends at a rear end (a rear end in FIG. 12), and the tilting device 310. A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and that defines a pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. A large opening in the center with a recessed portion disposed facing the lower frame member 320 and fastened to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320 Tilt device 3 with
The driving force is applied to the tilting device 310 via an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the second frame 10 in the second state, and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and constitutes a tilting device 310 and a link mechanism. A driving device 340 for transmitting the power, and a protective cover device 3 fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protecting the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from the left and right and the rear.
50 mainly.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321. Part 3 composed of a plate-like member arranged horizontally at the upper end on the back side
22, a lower bearing portion 323 which is a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322 and receives the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 from below, and a lower portion of the bottom plate portion 321. Left detection sensor 324L and right detection sensor 324R arranged in a pair on the left and right sides
And an opening 325 that is an opening formed by cutting a portion disposed below the horizontal portion 322 at a center position in the left-right direction of the bottom plate portion 321.

The bottom plate portion 321 contacts the tilting device 310 to determine the end of movement of the tilting device 310 and has a plurality of openings through which the portion of the tilting device 310 is connected to the bottom plate portion 3.
21.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a formed at the front center portion, a detection hole 321b formed along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and an opening 325.
And an insertion hole 321c that is formed symmetrically on the left and right sides.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a position in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed to have a size that allows the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass therethrough. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 extends below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be given to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is provided with a detection piece 311gL, 311 protruding from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
gR is a through hole configured to be insertable. Detection piece 31 protruding from detection hole 321b
By disposing 1 gL and 311 gR in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the driving device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a plane for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, and extends upward from the upper surface thereof and has a U-shaped cross section having an open portion on the near side. The locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler-type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are connected to the bottom plate 32 of the lower frame member 320.
It is arranged at a position where the separation distance (position of the detection groove) from 1 is equal on the left and right.

Further, the photocoupler-type sensor includes a light projecting unit for projecting light and a light receiving unit for receiving light from the light projecting unit, and gaps (slits, detecting grooves) into which a detecting part can be inserted. Means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341 f of the driving device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

On the other hand, as for the vertical width, the driving device 340 has a configuration in which the LED device 341f is arranged so as to protrude toward the upper front side (see FIG. 17B).
The drive device 340 is pushed up after passing through the LED device 341.
f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the rotating claw member 34 can be moved from the LED device 341f.
The vertical width of the opening 325 can be reduced as compared with the vertical width including up to seven.

The upper frame member 330 is opposed to the opening 331 that is an opening having a size to be hooked by the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. And an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed in a semicircular shape whose lower side is opened and which supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured so as to be vertically dividable and covered in three directions except the near side, and is fixed to a lower end portion of the driving device 340 and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340. A voice coil motor 352 supported on the bottom plate and disposed on the front side and having a vibrating surface directed obliquely upward and upward; a left detection sensor 353L which is a detection sensor having a detection groove above the bottom plate of the main body cover 351; And a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 illustrates a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R disposed on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center can be visually recognized.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the vibration surface of the voice coil motor 352 is
The bottom plate 321 is disposed substantially parallel to the bottom plate 321. Thus, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes the projecting protrusion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler-type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340. Disk cam 344L, 3 of drive device 340
44R are arranged in such a manner as to be arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L, 353R.
The detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disc cams 344L and 344R are connected to the detection sensors 353L and 353L.
It is possible to detect whether or not the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase by detecting whether or not the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection groove of the 53R.

In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 have the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L and 353L are provided.
There are two types of specific phases that can be detected by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 (a
14) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is FIG. XIVc)
It is sectional drawing of the inclination apparatus 310 in the -XIVc line. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, the tilting device 310 is configured such that a case main body 311 composed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and having upper and lower openings, and an upper opening of the case main body 311 is covered. A lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 fastened to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and a state sandwiched between the rear ends of the case body 311 and the lid 312. , A torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314, and the case body 311 at the rear end of the case body 311 and the lid 312.
A ring-shaped ring member BR1 for fixing the lid 11 and the lid 312 inseparably is mainly provided.

The case body 311 includes a bottom plate 311a that is inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened at the center of the bottom plate 311a, and left and right sides of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending from the flange projecting downward along the edge of the shaft toward the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d having a semicircular cross section supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And an insertion groove 311e, which is a groove arranged at a position where both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-like portion 311f formed in a hook shape and locking a central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A left detection piece 311gL and a right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending in a pair on the left and right below the bottom plate 311a, and a predetermined amount from the front end of the bottom plate 311a toward the front. An extension portion 311h to be provided and a protective lens member 311i which is disposed above the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and is formed of a light transmitting material. And a protruding projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the center in the left-right direction at the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player, the bottom plate 311a
It is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the surface 20 in a plane.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is provided in the guide hole 3 of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the driving device 340.
It is a cylindrical member inserted through 45b, and has a role as a portion for transmitting a driving force to and from the driving device 340.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions that are inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. Is longer than the right detection piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL about the shaft 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22), the pushing end (see FIG. 22). 23), the left detection piece 311gL is extended as compared with the right detection piece 311gR so that the rotation angle becomes the rotation angle of the tilting device 310).

The extended portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 10), extends to a position where it is locked by the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330. It is configured in an embodiment.

The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from above (FIG. 14A).
(See FIG. 14 (c)) together with the curved shape when viewed in the left-right direction, so that the load when the player pushes the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow).
Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging protrusion 311j is formed so as to protrude at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate 311a, and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320.
Is pushed in, (see FIG. 29), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321 a, and the tip protrudes below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 31
2b is fixed to the top plate member 312a, and the LED device 34 in the first state (see FIG. 6).
And a cylindrical member 312c formed of a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding 1f.

In the first state (see FIG. 6), the cylindrical member 312 c emits light emitted from the LED device 341 f toward the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 6) while improving the strength of the lid 312 by rigidity in the axial direction. While being held inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such a limitation is released and the light is emitted from the LED device 341f in a wide range.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light transmissive material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has an extended end formed of a shape matching the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. And a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape at the center.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right torsion portions, and has two arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the torsion portion, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of torsion portions. , Is provided.

Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 (a)
FIG. 17B is a front view of the driving device 340, FIG. 17B is a side view of the driving device 340 when viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving device 340. It is.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, a driving device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a driving motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft 343 for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (non-rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft 343).
Left disk cam 344L, right disk cam 344R) and the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344.
Release member 346 that is pivotally supported by the arm member 345 that is pivotally supported by the shaft member 341c of the main body member 341 and that comes into contact with the first overhang portion 344c1 and the second overhang portion 344c3 of the disk cam 344 in the rotational direction. A rotating claw member 347 that is coaxially supported with the releasing member 346 and that relatively moves with the rotation of the releasing member 346; and a coil spring that generates a biasing force in a direction in which the rotating claw member 347 falls down. A first spring SP1 which is a spring member of
And a second spring SP2, which is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction to separate the rotating pawl member 6 and the rotating claw member 347 from each other.

The main body member 341 is bent rearward on the left and right sides and formed in a U-shape in a top view.
41a, a shaft support hole 341b drilled at the same position of a plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a facing the same and supporting the disk cam 344, and an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. A shaft portion 341c protruding in the left-right direction at a position shifted from the shaft support hole 341b to the front side in an aspect having the extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c; A lighting support portion 341 extending from the housing portion 341a toward the front upper direction.
e, and an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and having an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f is a triangular member on an upper surface thereof, and a portion for refracting light (
(A part that refracts light). Thereby, the light of the LED device 341f can be evenly irradiated upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 is provided inside the motor housing 341a in a U-shape.
1a is provided with a fixing member 342a fastened and fixed.

The fixing member 342a supports the rotation gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotation gear.

The arm member 345 is bored in one end at a perfect circular shape, and is bored in a shaft support hole 345a supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344, and at the other end in a rectangular shape. And a guide hole 345b through which the shaft 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a is in contact with the shaft 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310. It is formed at a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft bar 343. The transmission shaft bar 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which disk cams 344 (refer to FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and a driving motor 342 supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
A transmission gear 343b meshing with the rotating gear of the above, a movable clutch 343c capable of switching whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by axial movement, and a movable clutch 343c And a coil spring 343d that presses the transmission gear 343b against the transmission gear 343b.

The cylindrical member 343a has a D-shaped fixing portion 3 for fixing the disc cam 344 to both ends thereof.
43a1 and 343a2, the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center side than the left fixing portion 343a1. Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is
43c is formed to have such a length that it can move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when it moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b includes a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted,
A clutch portion 343b2 in which unevenness is formed along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the axis from a surface facing the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
43c1 and a clutch portion 343c2 formed with irregularities along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the axis from the surface facing the transmission gear 343b and configured to be able to engage with the clutch portion 343b2. .

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have an apex angle of about 100.
It is composed of a convex part and a concave part having a mountain shape of °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the relative rotation of the movable clutch 343c with respect to the cylindrical member 343a becomes impossible, so that the clutch portion 343b of the transmission gear 343b.
2 and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b causes the cylindrical member 34 to move through the movable clutch 343c.
3a. Thus, by rotating the drive motor 342, the disc cam 3
44 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

Note that the movable clutch 343c normally operates the transmission gear 3 by the urging force of the coil spring 343d.
The clutch portion 343b2, 343c2 is arranged at a position close to 43b, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2, 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3
It is configured to be movable in a manner to separate from the transmission gear 343b along 43a2.

The disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. In the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R are substantially mirror-shaped, and the difference is that the detection hole 3 is different.
Since only the positions of 44eL and 344eR are described, only the left disk cam 344L will be described, and the description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

FIG. 20A is a side view of the left disk cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the left disk cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb of FIG. is there. Note that FIGS. 20A and 20B show a state where the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having portions projecting from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is located at the center of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a protruding in a cylindrical shape inward, a circular rib 344b protruding inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a circular rib 344b outside the circular rib 344b. A rib having a height lower than that of the circular rib 344b is protruded inward, and 2
An engagement rib 344c having a portion projecting radially outward at a location; and a circular rib 344b.
Between the arm member 3 and the engaging rib 344c.
It mainly includes a connection pin 344d connected to the P.45 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL formed near the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is disposed at a position forming an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the others are configured by mirroring the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

The center shaft portion 344a has a cross section D whose inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19).
It has a shape in which the outer periphery is internally fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular-diameter rib 344b is protruded to a position where it can abut on the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disk cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thus, misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c projects radially outward at a position shifted by 80 ° in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is provided. From the overhang portion 344c1, the first retraction portion 344c2, and the first overhang portion 344c1 that withdraw from the first overhang portion 344c1 radially inward at a position shifted by an angle θ1 (the angle θ1 = 50 ° in the present embodiment). At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (the angle θ2 = 150 ° in the present embodiment), a second overhang portion 344c3 that overhangs radially outward again, and the second overhang portion 344c
And a second retracting portion 344c4 that retracts radially inward at a position shifted by an angle θ3 (in the present embodiment, the angle θ3 = 20 °).

In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connection pin 344d is disposed at a position where the distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state is the longest (see FIG. 22). That is, the connection pin 344d is provided on the opposite side of the shaft 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the center shaft 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

FIGS. 21A and 21B are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. Note that FIG. 21A illustrates a large angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21B illustrates the release member 346. In contrast, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 has rotated to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

The state in which the release member 346 is rotated by being in contact with the disc cam 344 is in a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position between the guide slots 347b). (See FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 346a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). A projection pin 346b projecting in the thickness direction in an arc shape about the center axis of the shaft support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and a shaft support hole 346a. And an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting at the maximum diameter.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the engaging portion 346d engages with the engaging rib 34 of the disc cam 344.
4c (see FIG. 20). In the present embodiment, the engagement portion 346
Since the outer periphery of d is curved, the contact with the engagement rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed from a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. Along the guide pin 346b of the release member 346, the guide slot 347b is drilled so as to be able to guide the guide pin 346b (the guide pin 346b has a size including the movement locus of the protrusion pin 346b inside), and the second spring SP2.
The end of the first spring (see FIG. 18), the insertion hole 347c through which the end of the first spring is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347d projecting downward in a hook shape at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). And a pull-down hole 347e drilled so as to allow insertion.

In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21A, the release member 346 is disposed at the end position in the backward rotation direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 21A) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the downward direction is applied to the engagement portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate integrally in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engagement portion 346d rotates in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the pushing direction is applied to 346d, only the release member 346 is rotated until the small angle state shown in FIG. 21B is reached, and the posture of the rotating claw member 347 can be maintained.

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example in a case where a player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

FIGS. 22 to 24 show the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
FIG. Note that FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state illustrated in FIG. 23 shows a state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. FIGS. 22 to 24 show an example of a player's hand that performs a continuous tapping operation on the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives a biasing force in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate 311 a is connected to the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotating claw member 347.
Is hooked on. Thereby, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is connected to the right detection sensor 32.
It is arranged in front of the 4R detection groove (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an operation of pushing the tilting device 310, the tilting device 31
0 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 3
11gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is continuously hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval at which the player repeatedly hits the torsion spring 31.
5 cannot be returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, and the player may feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. However, in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 is moved against the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) that pushes down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342. Therefore, there have been problems that the product cost increases and space cannot be saved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibrating operation is provided at a position facing the protruding projection 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. You.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 31 can be moved without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315.
The return operation of 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player long-presses the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 is driven. Since an unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times that the right detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated. By driving the motor 352, the load of returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hit operation can be improved. This allows
The player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (a tilting operation) from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 3
0 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.

Note that FIG. 25 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG.
25 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25 and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 has changed. In FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 has been moved from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 28 shows a state in which the rotary claw member 347 has rotated only in the forward rotation direction and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 has returned.
29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 performs a reciprocating rotation operation. In FIG. 29, a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state in FIG. 28 is shown, and in FIG. 30, a circle from the state shown in FIG. When the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount, the engagement rib 34 is rotated.
The state where the second overhang portion 344c3 of 4c has reached the second initial state in which the second overhang portion 344c3 is in contact with the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated. 28, the tilting device 3 in the state of FIG.
The position of 10 is shown by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand that pushes and operates the tilting device 310 is shown by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312
The upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside 2c. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be ensured to be large. Accordingly, the cylindrical member 312c has an effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and an effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disc cam 344 is moved forward (in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state. Direction, the first protrusion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, and the release member 346 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotating claw member 347 is rotated in the backward rotation direction to a position where it is disengaged from the bottom plate 311a of the tilting device 310.

The change in the posture of the release member 346 is determined by the first retraction portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 34.
Since the disk cam 344 is rotated until the disk cam 344 faces 6d, the tilting device 310 rises by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the state of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (end position farther from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the operation of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the upward operation of the tilting device 310 has an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27),
When the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, the releasing member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are caused to rotate forward by the urging force of the first spring SP1 (counterclockwise in FIG. 27). (Rotational direction), and the rotating claw member 347 returns to a state where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (a state shown in FIG. 25). At this time, the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction to increase the angle (upper angle in FIG. 27) between the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347, and thus the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the cover 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area in which the protection lens member 311i can be visually recognized from the player's viewpoint is the tilting device 31 in the first state.
0, so that the light of the LED device 341f is directed in the front direction (the direction toward the player).
Can also be irradiated. Therefore, when the posture of the tilting device 310 changes, the LED device 3
The traveling direction of the light emitted from 41f can be changed, and the effect of producing light can be improved.

In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and subsequently, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction by the same amount. FIG.
28 (clockwise), the angle D1 shown in FIG.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down in the range of. Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting above the upper frame member 331 changes corresponding to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is
Since it is arranged on the front side of 41f (the left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 28). Can be.

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in a direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c Moves only in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. Accordingly, when the player performs the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate 311 a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotary claw member 347, thereby The member 347 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and subsequently the tilting device 310 is pushed in, whereby the bottom plate portion 311a is turned into the hook-shaped portion 347d.
, The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

Accordingly, the player moves the tilting device 310 shown in FIG.
After the player depresses 0, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases his / her hand.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). Thus, after performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 to the final end, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to a player who keeps putting the hand on the tilting device 310.

That is, the purpose is to generate a driving force that assists the raising of the tilting device 310 with the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 24), and to perform a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 disposed at the pushing end position. Can be used for

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases his / her hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower frame member 320.
Is buried in the lower surface of the voice coil motor 352, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only in a state where the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end.

Therefore, in comparison with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pressed and operated, it is determined whether or not the vibration by the voice coil motor 352 occurs at the pressing end.
Only the player who pushed and operated the tilting device 310 can be grasped.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in such a case, the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to produce a vibration effect when the jackpot is determined, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 Can be improved as a prefetch means.
Thereby, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, the disc cam 344 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the second overhang portion 344c1.
By rotating the disk cam 344 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) by a predetermined amount until the disk drive contacts the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, the drive device 340 can be set to the second initial state. .

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotation direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhang portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhang portion 344c3 comes into contact with the engagement rib 344c.

In addition, from the state of FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and after the first protrusion 344c1 of the engagement rib 344c passes through the engagement portion 346d, the reverse rotation is performed. In this way, the driving device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is moved in the forward rotation direction while maintaining the posture of the rotating claw member 347 (FIG. 29).
(Counterclockwise).

Next, referring to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, the case where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (moving up) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( (Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down through the second state (a tilting operation).

FIGS. 31 to 34 show the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
FIG. In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is moved forward from the state shown in FIG.
FIG. 32 shows a state in which the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 31) by rotating the release cam 346 in the counterclockwise direction.
Is rotated by a predetermined amount, and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state.
2 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is reciprocatingly rotated from the state shown in FIG.
3 shows a state where the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position.
In FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by imaginary lines,
In FIG. 34, an example of the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotating claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting is performed. The device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves the disc cam 344 via the arm member 345. Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disc cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the engagement between the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 is released), the posture of the disc cam 344 is changed. 310 can be arranged in the second state (from the first initial state, the disc cam 344 is set at 180 °).
(Rotated posture). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 moves upward at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the state change is obstructed by the disk cam 344 (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating by a predetermined angle at a slow speed, and it takes a long time until the tilting device 310 enters the second state.

As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and subsequently, the disc cam 344 is moved backward by the same amount (counterclockwise). FIG.
By repeating the operation of rotating the lens D2 clockwise), the angle D2 shown in FIG.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down in the range of. Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, in response to the operation in which the tilting device 310 repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D2, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting above the upper frame member 331 changes. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is
Since it is arranged on the front side of 41f (the left side in FIG. 33), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33). Can be.

That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the up-down operation shown in FIG.
The two types of up-and-down motions (lifting motions) shown in FIG. 33 can be performed immediately after the restriction of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342 can be created.

Thereby, compared to the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in expectation of a big hit), and the tilting device 310
Of the player can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only a load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311
c only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated to lift the shaft 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. Accordingly, when the player performs the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of reaching the state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the bottom plate 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and then pushing the tilting device 310. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

Accordingly, the player moves the tilting device 310 shown in FIG.
After the player releases his hand after depressing 0 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310
Can be maintained in the first state.

Next, referring to FIGS. 35 to 37, after the player performs the pushing operation, the rotating claw member 3
An operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by 47 will be described. With this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of up-and-down operations (tilting operations) of the tilting device 310 or to continuously perform one of the operations.

FIGS. 35 to 37 show the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
FIG. In FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is moved in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG.
FIG. 36 shows a state in which the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) by rotating the release cam 346 in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 35). FIG. 37 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) to a position where the disk cam 344 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, and FIG. The disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
The state where the left side detection sensor 353L of 50 is in the ON state is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging on the tilting device 310 from above is shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retraction portion 344c4 of the engagement rib 344c is engaged with the engagement portion of the release member 346. 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 changes when the engagement rib 344 c pushes up the release member 346, but the projection pin 346 b of the release member 346 moves in the space of the guide elongated hole 347 b of the rotary claw member 347. The rotation pawl member 347 is shown in FIG.
The posture shown in FIG.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to release the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the rotating claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the tilting device 310 being lifted can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and the rotating cam 344 is subsequently rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in FIG. 7, the driving device 340 can be in the second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but it is necessary to go through the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the up-and-down operation (tilting operation) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2 as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of keeping his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if a special display such as “long press” is not displayed. is there.

This is, for example, an operation that occurs due to forgetting to release the hand that pressed and operated the tilting device 310 to concentrate on the production. In this case, the tilting device 310 is lifted even if the restriction by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for vertically moving (tilting operation) the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2,
The posture of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is useless, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the left detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 (FIG.
5) is maintained in the ON state (while the tilting device 310 is tilted to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not reversely rotated, and as shown in FIG. In the first initial state of the driving device 340 in which the left detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) is turned on, the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the driving of the driving motor 342 is stopped).

In the state shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, since the tilting device 310 does not perform the ascending operation due to the player's hand being placed above the tilting device 310, in this case, the state shown in FIG.
The change up to the state shown in FIG. 7 occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, the player's hand continues to be placed above the tilting device 310, and the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (up to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, when the left detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) maintains the ON state, the circle is left as it is. Rather than rotating the plate cam 344, the plate cam 344 may be immediately rotated in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the driving device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and unnecessary load is not applied to the driving device 340, so that the life of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a device for preventing the destruction of the driving device 340 will be described. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. In FIG. 38, the tilting device 310 is in a state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state.
The hands of the player holding and fixing are illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 39, the illustration of the upper member of the main body cover 351 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grips and fixes the tilting device 310, the arm member 34
Since the movement of the disk cam 344 is restricted, the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, the drive motor 342
A high load occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may fail.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate freely with respect to the transmission shaft bar 343a for fixing the disc cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from breaking down.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disc cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portion 343b is rotated.
2, 343c2, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. Thus, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can idle. Thereby, the drive motor 3
42 can be prevented from breaking down.

When the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 passes through the first state if the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °).
When the left side detection sensor 324L of the 20 is not turned on (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player has intentionally performed an unnecessary operation of holding and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped, for example, by notifying by displaying it on the third symbol display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation.

This makes it possible to select a case where the player has intentionally performed an erroneous operation, to notify only to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the drive motor 342 early,
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor deviates from the initial phase of the disc cam 344, which has the same phase as the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the occurrence of the phase shift, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left detection sensor 353L of the protection cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting that the driving device 340 has entered the state, it can be specified that the driving device 340 has entered the first initial state, and the control of the driving motor 352 is resumed with that state as the initial position (the driving motor 342 is controlled by the driving device 340). Even if a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c by resetting the initial phase), control is performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are re-aligned. It can be performed.

With this, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342
It is possible to prevent a deviation between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, it is possible to perform an effect by appropriately operating the tilting device 310.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle around the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

FIGS. 40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 40, the disc cam 3 is moved from the state shown in FIG.
FIG. 41 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been further rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW from the state shown in FIG. 40. In FIG. 42, the disc cam 344 is moved backward (in the direction of arrow CW) from the state shown in FIG.
FIG. 43 shows a state where the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the arrow CW direction from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 31
0 stands up to the second state via the first state shown in FIG. On the other hand, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 3, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG.

This is due not only to the fact that the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as going from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG.
Is rotated in the arrow CW direction, this is because the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is not released even if the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the releasing member 346 from below. In this case, the releasing member 346 is lifted by the engaging rib 344c, and the rotating claw is rotated. Member 3
No load in the direction of pushing up 47 occurs. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's viewpoint, FIG. 38 to FIG. 40 and FIG.
Up to the first state shown in FIG. 4, both seem to be the same operation, and the movement after the first state is different from that of FIG. 41 or FIG.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state is determined by the drive motor 342.
(See FIG. 39). However, due to the difference in the change in the drive sound due to the change in the number of revolutions of the drive motor 342, the player notices the mode of the control being performed, and the effect to be executed from now on. There is a risk that the player will be grasped and lose interest of the player. Also, the tilting device 3
When the operation of suddenly stopping the motor 10 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves toward the first state from the state shown in FIG.
Is different only in its direction, so that it is difficult for a player to grasp the rotation direction in the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves to the first state when the degree of expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, it is confirmed whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state.
Since the player can grasp the change in the degree of expectation of the effect, the player is informed that the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. The movement of the tilting device 310 can be watched.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the driving motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. The device 340 can be prevented from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) suddenly in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the drive motor 3
42 can be eliminated, and the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, a case where the tilting device 310 performs an up / down operation without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player performs an operation of pushing down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 44, the disk cam 3 is moved from the first initial state of the driving device 340 (see FIG. 25).
FIG. 44 shows a state in which the reference numeral 44 has been rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 44).
The disc cam 344 has an angle at which the overhang portion 344c1 does not pass through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346.
The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhang portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2 are engaged with the engagement portion of the release member 346. By rotating the disc cam 344 reciprocally while maintaining the positional relationship that does not pass through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can reciprocate up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 changes in the backward rotation direction (
44 (clockwise direction in FIG. 44), the tilting device 31 is maintained in a state shown in FIG.
When the player moves up and down, even if the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 do not engage, and the player releases the hand to release the tilting device 310.
Moves upward from the first state (the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotating claw member 347 is engaged with the tilting device 310), and an operation mode in which the vertical motion is continued can be implemented. .

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, a difference in the effect is provided between the above-described first operation mode and the second operation mode and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a different meaning from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. The user can know whether the user has been moving up or down in the third operation mode.

The difference in the effect is that the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). Is performed) when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even after releasing the hand after pushing the tilting device 310). If the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since an opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Although the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up in the first embodiment has been described, the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment has the When the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 23
48 is configured to perform a sliding operation. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 45A is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 according to the second embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 5 (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a side view of the release member 2346.

FIGS. 46A and 46B are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking operation of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. .

In FIG. 46 (a), the rotating plate member 2347 has the second spring S
FIG. 46B shows a state in which the rotation plate member 2347 rotates to the end position against the release member 2346 against the urging force of the second spring SP2. The small angle state is illustrated. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated by being in contact with the disk cam 344 is in a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the convex pin 3).
46b is located at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b) (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a shaft portion 341c (
As the functional members pivotally supported by the releasing member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47), the rotating member 2347 is provided on the opposite side of the releasing member 2346 with the rotating plate member 2347 interposed therebetween. And a slide claw member 2348 configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of FIG. In the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed in a shape curved so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and a forward end at an upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b projecting in the shape of a hook (to the left in FIG. 45) and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to overlap in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper of FIG. 47A). A reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the bending portion 2348a, and a protruding pin 2348d protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c are mainly provided. Prepare.

The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to a length slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is
In a state of being fitted inside the 347f, it is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is provided on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is used for a bottom plate 2311 of a tilting device 2310 described later.
This is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force to be attracted to a.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion for reinforcing the slide claw member 2348.

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member inserted into the functional long hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is formed of a metal rod inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. Release member 234
6 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, and the protruding pin 2348d
The slide claw member 2348 is slid by being pushed by the side surface of 46e.

The rotating plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c,
In addition to the pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the sliding operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a support elongated hole 2347g into which the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end of the rotary plate member 2347. The side surfaces of the pair of plate-like portions facing each other are such that the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated forward (see FIG. 46 (counterclockwise), the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47).
Is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered at.

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). The projecting pin 2348 is provided in the supporting long hole 2347g.
When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved in a state where d is inserted, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and it is possible to prevent the slide claw member 2348 from wobbling. it can.

The release member 2346 includes a functional support hole 2346e that is a long hole formed in the thickness direction, in addition to the shaft support hole 346a, the projection pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engagement portion 346d. .

The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length formed by a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. A hole 2346e1, a second long hole 2346e2 extending from one end of the first long hole 2346e in a direction inclined in a direction opposite to the shaft support hole 346a,
Mainly equipped.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 moves to the rail portion 234.
It slides along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 keeps the moving speed of the protruding pin 2348d without time delay for the movement of the releasing member 2346. Reflected on speed.

That is, when the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 is quickly slid, while when the rotation speed of the release member 2346 is reduced, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 is also reduced.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along the arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional long hole 2346e is directed in a straight line direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, a force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the release member 2346 causes the slide claw member 2 to rotate.
Although the 347 may slide, the slide claw member 2347 does not slide when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled in the large angle state. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the slide claw member 2348 is engaged with the tilting device 2310, so that the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising.

FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in a time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 47, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is connected to the release member 234.
48. FIG. 48 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. 47 to engage the release member 2346. 49 shows a state in which the portion 346d is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG.
2 shows a state restored by the urging force.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet 2311a1 and the hook 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310 is pressed.
Since the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released by the change in the posture of 10, the tilting device 2310 does not apply a large load to the slide claw member 2348.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet part 2311a1 and the hook-shaped part 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, when the release member 2346 operates quickly, the operation of the tilting device 2310 also becomes quick.

Accordingly, the slide claw member 2348 is caused to slide at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction by the urging force of the torsion spring 315, thereby causing the slide claw member 2348 to rotate backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a different speed from the upward movement when the restriction of the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is released by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the releasing member 2346 is released, the releasing member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 returns to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the operation mode increases, the association between the operation mode and the jackpot expectation degree makes it easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of prefetching. Attention can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-like portion 234 of the slide claw member 2348 is raised.
8b and the magnet 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 by magnetic attraction.
Therefore, by securing a large magnetic force, the load applied to the tilting device 2310 can be increased as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315.

That is, normally, when the player places his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 and the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. (Even if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, FIG.
In the state shown in (1), the tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner of lifting the player's hand.

Thereby, when the tilting device 2310 is raised, a difference can be provided in the load in the rising direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing a hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in the load with the degree of expectation of the jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading. Can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player. However, the operating device 3300 in the third embodiment is described. Is configured so that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or in the state of being pushed by the player. You. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right detecting piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate 311a of the case main body 3311 and the left detecting piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). A left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position perpendicular to the axis and at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane disposed at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR,
The extension length is shorter than the left detection piece 311 gL in the first embodiment.

FIGS. 51A and 51B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. FIG.
1A, the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51B, the tilting device 331 is in the first state.
A state in which 0 is being pushed is shown. Also, FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b)
In order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are indicated by solid lines. In addition, a portion where each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R overlaps with each of the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51A, when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3
311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, and the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is connected to the left detecting sensor 324L.
While the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).
.

By detecting a change in the state of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing, it is in the state of being pushed. , Or in the state of returning.

That is, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing. The left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

FIGS. 52A and 52B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. FIG.
FIG. 2A shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, and FIG.
FIG. 2B illustrates a state where the tilting device 3310 is moving from the end of the pushing to the first state. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R overlap the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), in a state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detecting sensor 324L and the right detecting piece 311 is inserted.
11gR is inserted through the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the ON state).

As shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state arranged at the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detecting sensor 324L. The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing. Sensor 324L is ON and right detection sensor 324R is ON
By detecting that the state has changed from the state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the state of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 and the tilting device 3
When an auxiliary load for raising the 310 is applied, the voice coil motor 352 is tilted during the upward movement of the tilting device 3310, rather than the voice coil motor 352 colliding with the tilting device 3310 during the downward movement of the tilting device 3310. Colliding the device 3310 can provide a load that effectively raises the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in operation, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 310 after pushing the tilting device 3310 from the first state is operated.
The ascending speed of 310 decreases. In this case, even if the player performs a continuous tapping operation on the tilting device 3310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the hand of the player, and the continuous tapping operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 effectively, the tilting device 3310 can be compared with a case where the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the tilting device 3310
Can be performed comfortably.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where the tilting device 310 is pressed by the player. However, the operating device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is described. Is a mode in which the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 during the change from the second state to the first state is detected, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed based on the detection result. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is protruded in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding protrusion 311j of the case main body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This is a part for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

FIGS. 54A and 54B are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating a pressing operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 54A, the tilting device 431 is used.
0 is the second state, and in FIG. 54B, the tilting device 4310 is shifted from the state shown in FIG.
Is pressed, and the front detection piece 4311k passes downward through the lower detection sensor 4321e. In FIGS. 54A and 54B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54A and 54B, the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e at the front side of the bottom plate 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are sensors of a photocoupler type, and are disposed in such a manner that the detection grooves are oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass therethrough. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on a circular orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing down the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k is set to the upper detection sensor 4
321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e in order. By detecting the interval of the passage timing, the magnitude of the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be determined, and whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

Here, in the case where the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which the acceleration can be applied is long). The upper limit of the operation speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no deceleration means, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 robust as a safety measure when the player pushes with full power, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the pushing end may be built in, and the tilting device 4310 may be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who decides to perform the pushing operation gently, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it is easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 may not be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the intervals of the timings of switching between the ON state and the OFF state, a strong reaction force is applied to the tilting device 4310 until it is not necessary. Can be prevented.

That is, for example, when the interval between the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned off. If the driving is not performed and the above-described timing interval is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

Accordingly, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is low, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated with a small force. Pushing operation can be performed.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, the tilting device 4310
Not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the pushing end can be applied as the reaction force against Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG.
The voice coil motor 352 is driven before the movable member 11j extends below the lower frame member 4320, and the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310. You.

As a result, the tilting device 4310 is pushed while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out.
The impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the voice coil motor 352 and the voice coil motor 352 collide.

FIGS. 55A and 55B are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. FIG.
5A illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55B illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end.

In FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the lower frame member 4 is provided for easy understanding.
The outer shapes of the upper frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines,
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 35
2 is shown by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second state at a high speed, the projecting protrusion of the tilting device 4310 is in a state in which the tilting device 4310 is reaching the pushing end from the first state. The set portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are in contact with each other.

When the tilting device 4310 is pushed in, the direction in which the projecting protrusion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352. The force of the pushing operation can be consumed by moving the button. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be applied, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction like a disk brake, but has a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force. Therefore, damage to members is suppressed, and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), since the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 have already contacted each other, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Accordingly, the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 contact each other is suppressed, and the deceleration of the tilting device 4310 from the first state to the pushing end is suppressed. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55B, when the tilting device 4310 is disposed at the pushing end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction, and stops descending. Therefore, it is unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55B, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). This allows
After the tilting device 4310 is pushed to the end and pushed, the effect of transmitting vibration to a player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310 can be performed.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of performing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 disposed at the pushing end position.

Next, an operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the tilting device 31 is rotated by vibrating the voice coil motor 352.
Although the case where vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes in 0 has been described, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is configured such that the lower frame member 5320 has the weight member 5 arranged at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric.
A drive motor 5411 for rotating the drive motor 412 is provided, and vibration is transmitted to a player touching the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, differences between the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment.
FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the operation device 5300 is different from the operation device 300 in the first embodiment in that the lower frame member 320 is a lower frame member 5320 and the driving device 340 is different from the operation device 300 in the first embodiment.
Is a driving device 5340, and the voice coil motor 35
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

A vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411 is provided on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch is provided on the drive device 5340. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412.
410, a transmission device 5410, a flexible member 5420 which accommodates the drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410 and is made of a flexible material, and a bottomed plate having an open upper surface. And the lower frame member 53.
And a housing member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the main body 20.

The transmission device 5410 includes a driving motor 5411 formed of a rotating electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a rotation shaft of the driving motor 5411 pivotally supporting a portion corresponding to a pivot. And mainly comprising.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of right and left fixed portions 5411a formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on which the shaft projects.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra, and is eccentrically supported by the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is changed, and the drive motor 5411 is configured to vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 includes a main body 5421 having a cylindrical container shape having a bottom on the side opposite to the side where the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction of the drive motor 5411, and a main body 5421 in an assembled state. The left and right sides of the main body 5421 are connected to a pair of rib-shaped legs 5422 protruding in the form of a rib, and the left and right rib-shaped legs 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body 5421. Attitude maintaining section 5423 in which fixing section 5411a is embedded
And a pair of protruding legs 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body 5421 in a pair.

The main body 5421 has the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411 and has a container-shaped depth. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body 5421, the axial end face of the drive motor 5411 and the open end face of the main body 5421 are formed on the same plane. In this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-shaped legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the left and right rib-shaped legs 5422 are provided by the posture maintaining portions 5423 on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is greater than that of the lower rib-shaped leg 5422.

Since the protruding leg portion 5424 is protruded in a columnar shape, the load can be easily concentrated on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Accordingly, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the flexible member 54 with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 is changed.
The resolution of the degree of deformation 20 can be made fine.

In the assembled state, the housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and a weight member 5 adjacent to the first housing portion 5431.
The second storage portion 5432 in which the first storage portion 412 is stored, the first storage portion 5431 and the second storage portion 5
And a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of 432.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is adjusted until the lower rib-shaped leg 5422 reaches the bottom.
When the load applied during insertion is released (assembly load released state), the projection leg portion 5424 is set to have a depth that projects from the upper surface.

The depth of the second storage portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 to apply the flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembly load state), the depth is set so as to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

The concave groove 5433 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth dimension slightly extended below the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in an assembly load state. You.

FIG. 59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59 (a). )
FIG. 60 is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. In FIG. 59A, a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Also,
In FIG. 59 (a), when the tilting device 310 is set to the first state, the first region S51, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310, and the player is pushed three times from the first state into the player. An end area S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed at the end position, is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), a protruding leg portion 5424 is protruded in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as a rotation axis. Therefore, the tilting device 310
The maximum amount of deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change (see FIG. 56) can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodation portion 5432 in the assembly load release state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the protruding legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extending direction. Therefore, the protruding legs 5424 can be evenly pushed right and left on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, so that it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right (when tilting left and right on the sheet of FIG. 59B) at the time of pressing. Thus, the protruding leg 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of FIG. 59 (b).

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 is
And a pair of through holes 5321d formed so as to be able to insert thereinto. Since the width of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding leg 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is protruded. When pressed against the leg 5424, deformation of the projecting leg 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.
Accordingly, the deformation of the shape of the projecting leg 5424 is suppressed, and the main body 5421 together with the projecting leg 5424 is suppressed.
Can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

FIGS. 60A and 60B are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59A. Note that FIG. 60A shows the assembly load released state, and FIG.
At 0 (b), the assembly load state after the protruding leg 5424 is pushed inward of the first accommodation portion 5431 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59A). Illustrated. The outer shapes of the second housing portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, the vibration device 540 is changed from the assembly load released state.
When a load is applied to the lower leg 0424 and the assembly load state is reached, the protruding leg 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg 5
As the 422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60B, the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force for pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the end position, the tilting device 310 is pushed. It is possible to reduce the impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57).
Further, since the load is based on the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38) is used. The lifting speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is reduced. In this case, even if the player performs the continuous tapping operation of the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the hand of the player, and the continuous tapping operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 effectively, the tilting device 310 can be used as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 moves upward only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 60A, in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not abut on the inner wall of the second storage portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even when the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in the assembly load released state, no vibration occurs due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the minute vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and the accommodation member 543.
Transmission to 0 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the main body 542 of the flexible member 5420 in the assembly load state.
1 is configured in such a manner that the upper and lower protruding legs 5424 and the lower rib-shaped legs 5422 are allowed to be displaced up and down by deformation.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg 5422 is slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be reduced, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

The main body 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg 54
22 extend in the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body 5421 and are arranged in a pair on the left and right at uniform intervals from the center axis to the right and left. The radially outer end of the 5422 is deformed in such a manner as to move right and left outward (in which the resistance is smaller at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg 5422) (see FIG. 60B).
In this case, since the projecting direction of the rib-shaped leg 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg 5422 can act in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second housing portion 5432 collide with each other is reduced by the lower rib-like leg portion 54 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421.
22 can partially absorb the elastic force. Thus, the displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

FIGS. 61A and 61B are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59A.

61 (a) and 61 (b) illustrate an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) illustrates a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation axis. In (b), a state where the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed below the rotation axis is illustrated. FIG.
In FIG. 1 (a) and FIG. 61 (b), the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player, and the terminal region S52 is pressed.
The state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state of occupying is illustrated.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is placed on the upper side in the assembly load state, the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is moved to a position where the distance from the lower bottom of the second storage portion 5432 becomes the distance Q1. The axis is arranged. Note that, in the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is a distance equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in an assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412
2 (rubs). Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared to the assembly load released state, so that different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

The contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 causes the weight member 5412 as a repulsive force.
Is generated upward (FIG. 61 (b) upward). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 move close to and away from each other in the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is changed in the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ). By this repulsive force, the flexible member 5 and the drive motor 5411 supporting the weight member 5412
Since the 420 moves upward, the force by which the flexible member 5420 pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) back upward (in the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310) can be reinforced.

As described above, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is applied to the flexible member 542.
By adjusting the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 by configuring a combination of a force that is generated as an elastic recovery force of zero and a force that is generated by abutment between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. be able to.

That is, after the tilting device 310 starts to contact the protruding leg portion 5424, the terminal region S52 (FIG. 59).
(A), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is generated as a force to push the tilting device 310 back, and after the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the weight member 5412 is reached.
The repulsive force between the second storage portion 5432 and the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes the tilting device 310 back. Accordingly, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the termination region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made lighter and the impact during the pushing operation can be reduced satisfactorily. This adjustment can be performed while the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is maintained. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is used due to the difference in detection timing. ) Is determined to be higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 is used to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320.
It is desired that the load on the tilting device 310 be increased. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than the specific speed, the weight member 5412 is previously operated so as to be in the downward (see FIG. 61B) posture.

Thus, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 is determined by the rotation shaft of the second housing portion 543.
2 can be raised upward from the lower end of the inner wall by a radius Ra. Thereby, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 is The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pressed down by the same amount by the tilting device 310, the compression size of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A). By doing so, it is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, the contact of the member occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the transmission device 5410 and the tilting device 310. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player pushing the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the transmission range of the vibration can be widened. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum of the pushing or a part of the side of the hand can be used. Vibration can be transmitted to the player via the. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation where the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the player tilts the device 310 (see FIG. 56).
Only when the vibration device 5400 forms the assembly load state by pushing the
Vibration is generated when the 412 and the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed, and the pushing operation of the player is detected. The vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the player.

That is, in the case where the player performs the pushing operation in a mode in which the player releases his / her hand immediately after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 (the mode of pushing in a pulse), the vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 is pushed in. In such a case, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated until the player releases his / her hand (the start of the vibration cannot be made in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the tilting device 310 is pressed, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance and the vibration is ready to be generated, so that the vibration can be transmitted simultaneously with the pressing of the tilting device 310. Thereby, the player can experience the effect by the vibration.

In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing portion 5431. Therefore, the drive motor 5411
Even if is driven, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

Accordingly, the state where vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The drive device 5340 is different from the drive device 340 in the first embodiment in a disk cam 5344 and a transmission shaft 5343. Other components are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed at the center of a pair of disk cams 5344 composed of a left disk cam 5344L and a right disk cam 5344R.

FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Note that the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 534
Since 4L has a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arms A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft 5343 are arranged at the connection portion with the transmission shaft 5343. It is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R is moved from the disk portion to the circular rib 344 at the center position.
a support cylinder portion P1 extending in a tubular shape to the side where b is disposed, and an axially symmetrical elongated hole shape extending along the axial direction of the support cylinder portion P1 to a position approximately half the extension distance. A long hole recess C1 recessed from the disc portion, and an axial end of the support tubular portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1 extend toward the disc portion along the axial direction. And a pair of holding arm portions A1.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as a region recessed in the long hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a remaining without being recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged with the elongated hole concave portion C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to do.

The long hole concave portion C1 is formed so that the shape of the concave cross section is slightly longer than the width of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is in a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the long hole concave portion C1 (
(Longitudinal direction).

Further, the opposing surfaces of the long hole concave portion C1 are configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed in an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. Thereby, the columnar member 5
343a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

The holding arm portion A1 is formed from a surface of a pair of arm portions facing each other,
An engagement protrusion A1a is provided to protrude in a direction approaching the partner's arm. Engagement protrusion A1a
Engages with the distal end of the cylindrical member 5343a at the time of connection with the transmission shaft 5343 to prevent the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disk cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engaging projection A1a is the engaging groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
4 is formed from a shape that matches the arc shape. As a result, as compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface, the radial overlapping length in the state where the engaging projection A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 (FIG. 65) (B) the length in the left-right direction).

The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (a long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connection pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is concave along the axis near the axis. (A side surface on the opening side of C1) and a surface position.

Thereby, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (the lower side in FIG. 63B) with respect to the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65B). reference). Therefore, as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a outside the concave surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63B), the length of the cylindrical member 5343a projecting from the concave surface portion C2 is set to be longer.
It can be shortened by the thickness of the e-ring (see FIG. 65 (b)).

Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (space required for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction of the right disk cam 5344R (direction parallel to the surface). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the recessed area (radial area) of the recessed surface portion C2.
Thus, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 shows the transmission shaft 5343.
It is a front exploded perspective view of. The difference between the transmission shaft 5343 and the transmission shaft 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fitting groove 5343a3 formed by a fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof and a fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in front view.
The clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixed portion 5343a1 with the groove interposed therebetween.
When the disk cam 5344 is fitted until the fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning in the axial direction 4 and the e-ring fitted to the fitting groove 5343a3 are reached, the engaging protrusion of the holding arm portion A1 is formed. And an engagement groove 5343a4, which is a groove with which the portion A1a is engaged. In addition, the fitting groove 5343a3 is disposed outside the pair of plates in which the shaft support holes 341b are formed in the left-right direction in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion where the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

Before the e-ring is fitted, the column is formed before the e-ring is fitted because a mechanism in which the e-ring is later fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a portion where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a is formed by the e-ring. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

In a state where the diameter is uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, whereby the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b by the e-ring. And the axial displacement of the disc cam 5344 can be prevented by the e-ring.

With the above-described configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343, the disk cam 5344 is provided.
Can be assembled to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch. That is, when assembling the disc cam 5344 to the transmission shaft 5343, the column member 5343a is connected to the end of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on which the engaging projection A1a is provided. From the opposite end, engage groove 5
343a4 to the position where the engagement projection A1a fits. At this time, the engagement groove 5343a4
Before the engagement protrusion A1a is inserted to the position where the engagement protrusion A1a fits, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a can expand the distance between each other. In this manner, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed. Thereafter, when the distal end of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging protrusion A1a, the engaging protrusion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. Thus, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 functions not only in one-touch assembly but also in this embodiment as a structure for preventing destruction. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

FIG. 65A is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65B is a right disk cam 53 along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG.
FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65A. FIG. 66A is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the right disk cam 5344R in the XVIb-LXVIb line.

FIG. 66 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player applies an overload to the unloaded right disk cam 5344R shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extending distal end portion of the support tubular portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging projection A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extending distal end portion of the support tubular portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the elongated hole concave portion C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the columnar member 5343a to the axial falling displacement is reduced. On the other hand,
As shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connection pin 344d are connected,
Since the cylindrical member 5343a and the right circular cam 5344R are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the right circular cam 5344R, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a to the axial falling displacement increases.

Therefore, when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R by the player forcibly pressing (pulling up) the tilting device 310 (the displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). Is applied, the direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the columnar member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of low resistance,
As shown in (a) and FIG. 66 (b), when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R,
On the plane parallel to the plane of the disk portion, the disk portion is axially deformed with the support shaft r1 connecting the connection pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 as the center. As a result, the position of the distal end of the connecting pin 344d is greater along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R than in the position shown in FIG.
Displace.

FIG. 67A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 67B is a diagram illustrating the operation when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 146 is a partial rear view of the device 5300. 67 (b), the illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are illustrated. In FIG. 67 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft 5343R is shown by a solid line, and the shaft is overloaded due to overload. The outline in the state shown is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 67 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is illustrated, and the state near the connection pin 344d is illustrated in an enlarged manner. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disc cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay on the spot and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load occurs, the right disk cam 5344R can perform the above-described shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be reduced.

In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the manner of connection with the arm member 345 due to the shaft falling deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67A, when the outer periphery of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd by the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62),
The shaft support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connecting pin 344d are displaced,
In order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in an axially inclined state.

Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67 (a) due to the shaft falling deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the protruding tip side are right circular. The position is shifted along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This displacement is caused by the right disk cam 534.
Since the displacement between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of 4R can be partially absorbed, the drive motor 342 (
In the case where (see FIG. 62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disk cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other by the axial deformation of the disk cam 5344. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped and fixed. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates backward (in the direction of the arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but is repelled by the second spring. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, since the rotating claw member 347 is stopped by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stopped,
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed down by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 is repelled in the direction. Is the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347.
Act on. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 abuts against the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disc cam 5344, the first member does not depend on the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344.
Of the elastic force of either the spring SP1 or the second spring SP2, the disc cam 5344
The elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344 can be increased.
Thereby, the load applied to the disk cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased,
Since the consumption of the driving force of the driving motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
5 can be reduced irrespective of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344.

In the present embodiment, since the right disk cam 5344R is formed to have a line-symmetrical shape with respect to a straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). The right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed irrespective of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the displacement direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). Shaft can be deformed by resistance.

FIG. 68A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 68B is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 146 is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 68B, illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted. In FIG. 68 (a), in order to facilitate understanding,
The outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft bar 5343 is shown by a solid line, and the outer shape of the right-hand cam 5344R that is overloaded and the shaft is tilted is shown by an imaginary line.

FIG. 68A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and falls down by the angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. Is shown of the player's hand gripping.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the player holds the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not, the right disk cam 5344.
The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the R axis falling, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

Note that the items described as the right disk cam 5344R also apply to the left disk cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, and an overload occurs. When,
The right disk cam 5344R performs a tilting operation in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of the tilting operation in the axial direction, the occurrence of overload can be noticed at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, the drive motor 34
2 is driven during one rotation of the right disk cam 344R, the detection hole 3 of the right disk cam 344R is rotated.
Although 44eR passes through the right detection sensor 353R, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate.
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right detection sensor 353R and the input to the right detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, by the time the overload is detected, the right circular cam 3
There is a problem that the detection of overload is delayed because a time period for rotating the 44R by a predetermined angle is required.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disc cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 66 (b)), the overload occurs. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a detection method, for example, the engagement rib 34 is provided between the support tubular portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c.
A method using the notification device E1 fixed to 4c is illustrated (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 66A).
.

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input unit, and is disposed in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arms A1 intersects with the engagement rib 344c. In addition, the input section is disposed in a manner to protrude toward the support cylinder P1. In a no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65 (b)), and in an overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder P1 are formed in contact with each other (see FIG. 65). 66 (b)). Thus, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, an operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connection pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344, the engagement rib 344c are formed of separate members, and are configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, differences between the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, since the right disk cam 6344R is formed by mirroring the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will not be described.

As shown in FIG. 69, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disk cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d, similar to the first embodiment.
And a disc member 6344L1 provided with a detection hole 344eL and supported by the column member 343a.
And a ring member 6344L2 that is rotatably supported coaxially with the disk member 6344L1 and relatively rotates with the disk member 6344L1.

The disk member 6344L1 has the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment disposed at the center position of the disk portion, and is annularly and axially spaced apart from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in a radially outward direction. An annular rib 6344f protruding along is provided.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring main body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. And receiving gear teeth 6344i disposed radially outward in the thickened portion.

The annular main body 6344g is formed such that its inner peripheral diameter is larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b. In the assembled state, the annular main body 6344g is externally fitted to the circular rib 344b, so that the central shaft portion 344a is formed. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable about.

Note that the end surface of the annular body 6344g on the side of the disk member 6344L1 in the axial direction is the annular rib 63.
44f. As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the surface of the disk member 634 is reduced.
The contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the contact is made with 4L1. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i are meshed with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Accordingly, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In the present embodiment, the rotation speed of the ring member 6344L2 is set to
(While the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times, the disk member 63
The number of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the number of receiving gear teeth 6344i are set in such a manner that the 44L1 makes one rotation).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft bar 343, and is an auxiliary column member 6348 arranged in a posture parallel to the column member 343a.
a and the second fixed to the auxiliary column member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b and the ring member 63 fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348
And a reduction transmission gear 6348c meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the 44L2.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, a description will be given of how the tilting device 310 is lifted up from the first state of the tilting device 310 by a plurality of types after the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released.

FIGS. 71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 6300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 71 illustrates a state similar to the state illustrated in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344R2 has rotated one rotation in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) from the state illustrated in FIG. (A state in which the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by 1/3 in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) while the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by more than one rotation and then reversed by that amount). Is illustrated. In FIG. 73, FIG.
The state where the ring member 6344L2 has rotated by a predetermined angle in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) from the state shown in FIG.

Here, from the state shown in FIG. 71, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is actuated by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operating device 300 according to the first embodiment, the reaching position when the tilting device 310 is lifted instantaneously (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is the second state. It was limited to the position where it was arranged (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relatively, the connecting pin 344d, which is a support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c are provided. Of the tilting device 31 can be changed.
It is possible to increase the types of arrival positions of 0.

That is, when the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG.
10 instantaneously rises due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state where it is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state (see FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) releases the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 71 and the releasing from the state shown in FIG. 72 by the rotating claw member 347. Without waiting for the rotation of 344)
And the position at which it reaches can be changed.

Accordingly, for example, when the gaming machine is configured in such a manner that the degree of expectation of the effect is changed by a difference in height at which the tilting device 310 instantly rises and reaches from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, there is no limitation on whether to increase the degree of expectation of the tilting device 310 ascending or to increase the degree of expectation of the type where the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is lower.

However, by keeping the rising position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation is maximized, the expectation is improved. Can be associated with the magnitude of the amount of displacement by which the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, the player can be motivated to confirm to which position the tilting device 310 is raised, so that the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can be encouraged to do so. Therefore, the tilting device 3
Regardless of the ten production modes, it is possible to suppress a game method in which the tilting device 310 is randomly operated.

Next, an operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 includes a disc member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are provided on separate members, and the separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they can be relatively rotated. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as the above-described embodiments,
The description is omitted. First, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 74A is a front view of a right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, and FIG.
(B) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and (a) of FIG.
FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right circular cam 7344R taken along the line XVa-LXXVa.
FIG. 74 is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74 (a). Note that the right disk cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, and a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R is a disk member 7344R having a central shaft portion 344a through which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in an assembled state.
1 and a ring member 73 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1.
44R2 and an engaging member 7 having an engaging portion 7630 which is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and which fits into the equally-divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2.
344R3.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center,
A detection hole 344eR is provided in a portion extending in a flange shape radially outward from the edge of the cup.
And the engagement rib 344c is partially omitted (the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first
This is a member having a shape (the space between the drawing portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in a surface state in an assembled state, and is a first circular recessed portion 7 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
410, a second circular concave portion 7420 which is a circular concave portion having a diameter smaller than the first circular concave portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and a first overhang portion 344c1 and a first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 that is formed in the radial direction therebetween, and a radially outer side from the back side surface (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) of the second circular recessed portion 7420 near the insertion hole 7430. And a fixing projection 7440 that is provided in a protruding manner.

The insertion hole 7430 is inserted from an intermediate position between the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2.
The first elongated hole 7431 which is an elongated rectangular elongated portion along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at the shifted position, and the end of the first elongated hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1. A second elongated hole 74 which is a rectangular elongated hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1.
32 and the second elongated hole 743 with the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 on the first elongated hole 7431 side as a fulcrum.
And a return portion 7433 that extends to the 32nd side.

The size of the second long hole 7432 in the width direction (short direction) is smaller than the size of the first long hole 7431 in the width direction (short direction), and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. direction(
(Shorter direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 75 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is inserted into the second long hole 743.
2 so as to be movable outward.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and has a sufficient height to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (a)
FIG. 76 is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG.
76 (c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 is
A ring-shaped plate portion 7510 having a ring-shaped plate shape on which the 44d is protruded, and the ring-shaped plate portion 7510
And a thick portion 7520 that extends in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion and has a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the depth of the first circular recess 7410 and an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner diameter of the first circular recess 7410. You. Thus, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the resistance of the relative rotation from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to reach (not interfere with) the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75 (a)). Is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recess 7420. This prevents the resistance of the relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from being excessive while enabling the engaging member 7344R3 to be able to operate in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 75A) in the assembled state. can do.

The thick portion 7520 has a deformed through hole 7521 formed in the axial direction, and a concave portion formed in the deformed through hole 7521 radially outward at regular intervals in the circumferential direction (in the present embodiment, equally divided into 5). And an equidistant concave portion 7522 to be provided.

The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is different from a shape that is disposed radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3 described later is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. Be composed.

FIG. 77A is a front view of the engagement member 7344R3, and FIG.
) Is a side view of the engagement member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)), the engaging member 7344R3 is located outside the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 arranged on the side and the rear end portion of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 (FIG. 77 (
b) An extending portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the right end portion, and an engagement extending from the leading end of the extending portion 7620 in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 77B). Mainly includes a portion 7630 and a coil spring CS1 formed of a coil spring disposed on the side of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 facing the engaging portion 7630.

The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611 that is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the distal end of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extending portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state,
When the coil spring CS1 is pushed inward in the radial direction in opposition to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip has an extension length projecting inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction slightly smaller than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends in the assembled state with a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

As will be described later, the engagement member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

Referring to FIG. 78, a method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described. FIG. 78 (a)
Is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is an arrow LXX of FIG. 78 (a).
FIG. 78 (c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (d) is an arrow LXXVIII of FIG. 78 (c) when viewed from the direction VIIIb.
FIG. 78 (e) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the d direction, and FIG.
FIG. 78 (f) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e).

In FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 78 (c) and FIG.
FIG. 78 (e) and FIG. 78 (f) show a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the 344R1, and in FIG. 78 (e) and FIG. 78 (f), the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344 are attached to the disk member 7344R1.
The state where R3 is inserted is shown. Also, in order to facilitate understanding, FIG.
In FIG. 78 (d) and FIG. 78 (f), the illustration of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 is omitted.

As a method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engagement member 734 is inserted into the first long hole 7431.
The engaging portion 7630 of 4R3 is inserted (see FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b)). As described above, the width dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the width dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the engaging portion 7 is moved in the depth direction of FIG.
The engaging member 7344R3 is slid to the position where the position of the fixing protrusion 7440 coincides with the position of the fixing member 7344.

At the position after this movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the displacement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 78 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 is suppressed. The member 7344R3 can be held immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

In addition, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first long hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven out of the second long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the direction in which the second elongated hole 7432 extends, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved by the elastic recovery force to the second position. It enters inside the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

In a state in which the second elongated hole 7432 is inserted inward, the tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extending portion 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, and the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (See FIG. 78 (d)), so that the movement of the extension 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. Thereby, the engagement member 73
Since the movement of 44R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the position of engagement member 7344R3 from shifting during operation.

After the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disk member 7344R1, the engaging member 734
While the 4R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1, the disk member 734 is pressed.
The ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of 4R1. When the load is released from the engagement member 7344R3, the engagement portion 7630 moves in the radially outward direction D7 by the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. By this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally-divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. In addition,
The right disk cam 7344L has a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

Next, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that in FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347 are used.
The disk cam 7344 is shown as a center, and other unnecessary parts are not shown.

The rotating claw member 7347 of this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the length of the guide slot 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes, the projecting pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement.

The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80A) of the main body portion is cut obliquely in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

In FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80 (b) and FIG. 81, the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79 (a)). Are illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 79 (a), the release member 7346 has an engagement member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R.
FIG. 79 (b) shows a state in which the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), and FIG. 80 (b) shows a state in which the release member 7346 starts rotating.
(A) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 and is pushed to the end, and in M6-2 (b), the disk member 73 is changed from the state shown in FIG.
FIG. 81 shows a state in which the right disc cam 7344R is rotated in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG. 80B, and the engaging member 7344R3 is moved from the release member 7 in FIG.
The state after separation from 346 is shown. It should be noted that FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG.
(A) and FIG. 80 (b) show a state in which the release member 7346 has reached the end of a range in which it can rotate relative to the rotating claw member 7347 (a small angle state).

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in a state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contacting, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward,
The state of projecting outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79 (b), a release member 734 is provided on the outermost diameter side surface of the engagement member 7344R3.
In a state where the engaging portion 346d of No. 6 is in contact, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 are in a small angle state.

In the present embodiment, when the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320, the small angle state of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 is formed. Inner peripheral surface and first overhang portion 344c1 of engagement rib 344c and first retracting portion 3
The disc cam 7344 is arranged in a positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 in a state where the disc cam 7344 is in contact with the cam 4444 (see FIG. 80A).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the rotation of the disc cam 7344 causes the release member 7346 to rotate toward the small angle state, and when it becomes impossible to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member 7346 is released. From 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disk cam 7344.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backward rotation direction cannot be continued. The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80A). In this pushed-in state, the engagement portion 7630 is disposed radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the modified through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, and as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 734 changes from the state shown in FIG.
Even if 4R1 is rotated, ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to this difference in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 is moved to the one equally-divided recessed portion 75 originally disposed.
22, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the engagement member 73
Since the contact between 44R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes outward in the radial direction, and the engaging portion 7630 is again housed in the equally recessed portion 7522. In this process, one equally recessed portion 7522 in which the engagement portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted.

That is, by passing the process shown in FIG. 79A to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the engagement rib 344c and the arrangement of the connection pin 344d provided on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into concave portions 7522. Can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval of the concave portions (72 degrees).

Referring to FIG. 82, when disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, engagement member 73
The operation of 44R3 will be described. 82 (a), 82 (b), 83 (a) and 8
FIG. 3B is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are illustrated as centers, and other unnecessary parts are not illustrated.

FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b) show how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) in chronological order. In FIG. 82 (a), the release member 734
82 and a state immediately before the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R comes into contact with the engaging member 7344R3. In FIG. 82 (b), the lowering starts by the engagement member 7344R3 abutting against the release member 7346 from above. FIG. 83 (a) illustrates a state where the disc cam 7344 further rotates in the forward rotation direction from the state illustrated in FIG. 82 (b), and FIG. 83 (b) illustrates a state where the release member 7346 is The state after the engagement member 7344R is separated is shown.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates forward, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 rotate backward (FIG. 82 (a)). When rotating in the (circumferential direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 734 are controlled by the elastic force of the first spring SP1.
7 can only be loaded in the forward direction.

Therefore, there is no load enough to push the engagement member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engagement member 7344R3 is in contact with the release member 7346 from when it comes into contact with the release member 7346 until it separates.
R3 maintains a state of projecting outward in the radial direction. Therefore, when rotating the disc cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, the relative rotation of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented.

By changing the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344 from these configurations, the disk member 7
Whether or not the relative rotation between the 344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be switched. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which the relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width as in the first embodiment, Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction in which the relative rotation occurs (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81).

In the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 for relatively rotating the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84).
In this state, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated.

Thereby, a state in which the player is not noticed (a state in which the tilting device 310 stops) is
It can be used as a state for changing the relative posture of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 at a position that is not visible to the player.

With reference to FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, a description will be given of a plurality of types of modes in which the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state according to the present embodiment. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of operation device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B by releasing the rotation claw member 347 (disc cam 7344).
FIG. 85 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship capable of being displaced (without rotating).
FIG. 79 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 has been rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by one of the equally-spaced recesses 7522 through the process described in FIG. 79, and FIG. 84 and FIG.
In both cases, the state where the second overhang portion 344c3 is in contact with the engagement portion 346d is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the rotating claw member 347 is shifted from the first state.
By releasing the fixation by, the movement range in which the tilting device 310 moves immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2) can be changed.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted rearward and downward from the position shown in FIG. It moves to a state where it sinks below the two states.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 3 is moved from the first state.
The position at which 10 reaches immediately by the ascent operation (without rotation of the disc cam 7344) can be changed. Thus, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the power of the operation device 7300 as the effect device can be improved.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described. However, the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes the cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the pachinko machine 8010.
, The vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction. Also, the definition of this direction is shown in FIG.
The same applies to the description with reference to the drawings prior to No. 6.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (unfolded) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. Inner frame 1
FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state opened (deployed) with respect to FIG.
90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed). FIG. It is a front view of machine 8010. In FIG. 90, the reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed with a wooden plate as an upper side and a lower side and aluminum plate as a left and right side. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game arcade by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island facilities. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has a support structure (a hinge 18 and the like) and a locking structure of the inner frame 12 of the outer frame 11. The member may be provided in a game arcade.

As shown in FIG. 89, a front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12. The left side is a rotation base end side (opening / closing base side) and the right side is a rotation tip side in front view. (Opening / closing front end side) so as to be rotatable forward.

As shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening and closing base side) and the right side is the rotation when viewed from the front. It is rotatable rearward as a moving tip side (opening / closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are locked to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. And a function to lock the front frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 12. In these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, an unlocking operation is performed by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed at the front of the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, each is released.

The front frame 14 is rotatably mounted on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57, 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and these front door mounting brackets 57, 58 (the metal fitting 57 is a columnar portion, and the metal fitting 58 is a shaft). The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the inner frame 12 with a metal plate having a hole.

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front side end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 above the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the rear side. It is pivotally supported by a pivot support plate portion 12e having a fitting concave portion 12e1 (see FIG. 126) which is recessed to have a fitable size. The front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped cylindrical shape projecting upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which cylinders having different diameters are vertically connected, the diameter of the upper cylinder is smaller than that of the upper cylinder). (A small shape) is axially supported by being externally fitted to the support pin 19a.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. Various members (illuminated parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) are provided on the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.
And the unit (the operation device 300, the operation handle 51, and the like) are fastened and fixed to form the front frame 14.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window 14c having an opening smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in a front view (see FIG. 86). This window 1
4c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, so that the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, game board 1
3 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89).

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 has a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than the window 14c and having transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) for integrating the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And The fixed frame is made of transparent glass 16a made of synthetic resin.
, 16b, the glass unit 16 is formed as an integrated double-layer glass by bonding the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a, 16b to a fixed frame.

In addition, the glass unit 16 is formed to be colorless and transparent by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, the game area may be formed not colored and transparent but colored and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illuminated parts 8029 to 8033 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window part 14 c in the front frame 14. These illuminated parts 8029-8
In 033, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach, or the like. In addition, the illumination unit 8030 on the upper side of the window 14c incorporates a light emitting unit that lights up when a predetermined error occurs, such as a shortage of payout balls, and a light emitting unit that lights up during payout of a prize ball.

In addition, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member made of punching metal) that covers a speaker assembly 450 that outputs a sound effect or the like according to a game state is provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window 14c. . As shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are swelled toward the near side below the window 14c, and are vertically arranged side by side.

The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them toward the ball firing unit 112a while aligning them in a line. In addition, lower plate 50
Has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the rear side surface of the lower plate 50.

In addition, it is not necessary to provide a portion for storing game balls at a plurality of locations separately in the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is used as a single storage portion. Is also good.

An operation device 300 that is manually operated by the players is provided on the near side of the upper plate 17 (the storage area for the game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to a player's operation is performed on a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. This operation device 300 may be provided in another part such as around the lower plate 50 other than the upper plate 17,
It may be provided at a plurality of locations, or may be a push-button switch as an operation method, and may be configured to be capable of inputting information by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicating with the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicating with the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( FIG. 92).

A payout ball receiving portion 143 that projects rearward and is opened upward is formed at an upper corner portion (a corner portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) of the passage forming unit 140, and the payout ball receiving portion 143 is formed. 143 is divided into right and left by a partition wall 144, thereby forming a passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, respectively.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion that forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul ball received in foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and is then discharged to lower plate 50. The foul ball passage 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

In addition, the foul ball passage 145 joins with a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which unfired balls flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 are guided by a ball removal operation by the player. It is formed as follows.

On the back side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to upper right and left corners, and bulge to the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the electric decoration portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the internal substrates and one end of the electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14 are provided. An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is provided, and the electronic board and the connector are covered by multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

In a portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring passage groove 14h communicated to the left and right electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032, and the electric decoration portions 8031 and An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are pulled out rearward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. It is.

Therefore, when the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is applied to the illumination unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the near side in FIG. 89). A connector of a conductive wiring or a connector having one end connected to the internal substrates of the illumination portions 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic substrate 14i.

The multi-functional cover members 171 attached to the front end of the front frame 14 are disposed as a pair on the upper and lower sides of the inner frame 12 at the front end of rotation.
0 (refer to FIG. 126), it is in a positional relationship facing the front and rear, and can be in contact with each other depending on the situation. The details will be described later.

On the rear side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member formed of a resin material and having an open front side is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame. A long cover member 173 that accommodates wiring in a space is mounted from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a configuration in which the cross-sectional area decreases as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation front end side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a that forms the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring, An upper wall portion 173b, which is disposed in parallel with the lower side of the front frame 14 and is disposed above the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides in plane with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140. It is composed of a shape.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion which is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and the lower wall portion 173a and the upper An upwardly extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upwardly extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that an end portion connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

In other words, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (a wave shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave) while the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall portion 173c. It protrudes to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, a change in the wiring position (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed can be absorbed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

On the back side of the front frame 14, an upwardly extending wall portion 173 c of the long cover member 173 (the front frame 14).
Of the body frame 14a and a vertically long plate portion at the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 and formed of a resin material. And an inverted cup portion 178 that opens downward and has a reverse cup shape.

The reverse cup portion 178 is, for example, a portion for improperly pushing and expanding the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from near the lower hinge 18, and entering the game area to take measures against cheating. It is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the inverted cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed from a resin material,
It is possible to take countermeasures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the end of the piano wire. That is, when the piano wire whose tip is heated enters and is pressed against the inverted cup portion 178, the heat is applied to the inverted cup portion 178.
Can be melted and passed through the inverted cup portion 178 in the same manner as the long cover member 173.
Will also melt. When the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wire accommodated in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burned out. , Making it easier to detect fraud.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is formed in a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and abuts (closes) to each other in plane. Further, since the normal of the lower surface of the inverted cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the inverted cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. When the inverted cup portion 178 is melted, the long cover 173 can be melted with a high probability, so that fraudulent acts can be easily found.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted from the gap forcedly opened to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the distal end thereof becomes a wall portion. 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire proceeds in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 (
(It proceeds in the left-right direction), so that the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

Also, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force given to a person who commits wrongdoing through the piano wire from increasing, for example, the lower wall portion By arranging the detection device for detecting the entry of the piano wire in the space below the 173a, it is possible for the person who commits the wrongdoing to find the wrongdoing before fleeing and to easily secure the person who does the wrongdoing. .

In other words, even if the piano wire is guided into the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the wrongdoing cannot determine it, so that he or she thinks that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, the window 14c).
Through the front end of the piano wire (until the end of the piano wire can be seen from the front side), allowing the wrongdoer to do it naturally (without suspicion that the piano wire has not been inserted correctly). . Therefore, it is possible for the person who commits the misconduct to notice that the misconduct has been found, and to prolong the time required to escape.

Note that the detection device may be a device constituted by a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be provided on the locking mechanism 20RK or on the rear side of the operation handle 51. In the case where the detection device is provided on the operation handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally provided on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the entry of the piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball firing unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided at the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a includes an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball struck by the launching solenoid 701 formed by an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A firing rail 730 that guides the game ball so that it is emitted toward the region between
And a ball feeder 720.

The ball feeder 720 transmits the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) to the firing rail 730.
Supply one by one on top. In this case, the supplied game balls are arranged on a projecting path of a plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. Then, the input of an electric signal to the firing solenoid 701 causes the plunger 702 to move the firing rail 7.
The player moves toward a game ball on the game 30 and the game ball is launched toward a game area. Note that the electric actuator of the ball firing unit 112a is not limited to the firing solenoid 701, and a firing motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball firing unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the firing rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. Has been established. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates in a front-rear direction through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover this through hole from the front side. Fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a body-side upper dish passage portion 161 and a body-side lower dish passage portion 162. The main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 are
A passage is internally formed such that one end is opened toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with a through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end is opened downward. Is changed by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction). In this configuration,
The ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame 1
The payout ball receiving portion 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the fourth unit 4 enters. A front door-side upper plate passage portion 141 is disposed below the main body-side upper plate passage portion 161, and a front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 is disposed below the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the upper dish passage portion 161 on the main body side is provided on the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160.
A shutter 163 is provided for regulating the outflow of the game ball from the lower plate passage 162 on the main body side. The shutter 163 has a blocking position for narrowing the exit portions of both passages and blocking outflow of the game ball,
It is provided so as to be switchable to both positions of an allowance position allowing the outflow of the game ball.

An urging member (a coil spring or the like) for urging the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12, the urging member is attached. The shutter 163 is kept at the blocking position by the force. Thereby, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state where the game balls are stored in the main body-side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls fall down is avoided. I have.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14 resists the shutter 163 against the above-described biasing force. Is pushed back to the allowable position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. In the board 167, the places where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided and the places where the connector CN3 is provided are configured by separate boards. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are connected to the main controller 1
While the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113 while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, the connector CN3 is intended to prevent malfunction by using a different board. by.

With reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, a portion of the front frame 14 below the window 14c will be described. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded and shown. FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are exploded and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window 14c of the front frame 14,
c, on the front side of the upper plate 17, diagonally above and to the right of the lower plate 50, and at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, the operation device 300 is disposed.
A cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the cover.

The cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship to cover the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and has a width substantially equal to the width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right ends of the cover 370 are disposed vertically below the electric decorations 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The cover cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 at least by fastening portions 370a formed at the left and right ends, and has a body bending portion 371 configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project toward the front side. The main body curved portion 371 is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right central portions and the left and right end portions toward the sides closer to each other in the width direction. Hanging portion 372 configured in a V-shape, a main body curved portion 371 and a hanging portion 3
A light-transmitting portion 373 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and fixed to at least one of the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372; and a main body curved portion 371 The left flat support 374 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end, the right flat support 375 formed as a flat on the upper surface of the right end of the main body curved portion 371, and the right flat support 375 from the rear side. And a supporting groove 376 (a tapered shape) in which the width of the recess is increased toward the back side.

The main body curved portion 371 has a front side edge portion having a rounded curved shape, and has a rear side edge portion in a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17, and the upper plate in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). 1
7, and a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300, which is provided continuously with the rear left edge 371a and abuts on the front side edge of the operation device 300. A rear middle edge portion 371b abutting on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and the rear middle edge portion 371b
1b, a rear right edge 371c which is provided on the opposite side of the rear left edge 371a and has a shape matching the front side edge of the ball letting operation unit 40 and which comes into contact with the ball letting operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state. Mainly equipped.

The hanging portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body bending portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported, and which is a right corner cover 38 disposed at the right corner of the front frame 14.
This is a part that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by being formed into a shape that does not create a gap between the operation device 300 and the right corner cover 380 (a shape where contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). Note that the hanging portion 372 is located at a position on the front side with respect to the recessed portion 15a described later,
A screw inserted from below into the bottom plate on which the 5a is formed is screwed into the bottom plate on which the recess 15a is formed.

The light transmitting portion 373 is a portion that can transmit the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and can produce an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. In addition, in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 is arranged close to the lower frame member 320.

In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is arbitrarily determined. In the present embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, light is emitted upward (disposed on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e).
Six LEDs irradiate light downward (disposed on the lower surface of the lighting support part 341e)
Are arranged respectively.

Light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in the LED device 341f passes through different numbers of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the light transmitting unit 373. I do. On the other hand, tilting device 3
When 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310, and then passes through the light transmitting portion 373. .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting unit 373 is smaller than when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Then, the case where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is stronger. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control to change the amount of light), and in accordance with the state change of the tilting device 310. An effect of changing the amount of light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 can be performed.

Further, as another effect control method, it is possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, in accordance with the change of the tilting device 310 from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the light amount is increased (in a stepwise manner) while the tilting device 310 is changed to the first state. By controlling the light amount to change slightly (in a stepwise manner) in accordance with the change from the first state to the second state, light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 373 due to the change in the state of the tilting device 310 is controlled. Can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

The left side flat support portion 374 contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8031 vertically in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. . This can suppress the downward displacement of the illuminated part 8031.

In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the right-side flat support portion 375 vertically contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side flat support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. . Accordingly, the downward displacement of the electric decoration 8032 can be suppressed.

Although details will be described later, the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 are formed by the upper panel unit 40.
When the upper panel unit 400 abuts on the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400 and is displaced downward,
An upward reaction force is generated from 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400. for that reason,
According to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illuminated portion 8031, the illuminated portion 8032, and the cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the vehicle can be widely distributed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end of the illuminated portion 8032 entering from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electric decoration portion 8032 is in a state of entering the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032 and the front end of the right side flat support portion 375. And the position match.

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electric decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. A separate fixing part for fastening the cover 370 and the illuminated part 8032 to each other can be dispensed with.

Below the window 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is provided on the main frame 14a at the back of the main frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) disposed on the front side of the main frame 14a). The passage forming unit 140 is disposed on the body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the body frame 14a) on the rear side of the plate member 14d. The main body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) with the main body frame 14a interposed therebetween. The main body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member (a member constituting the upper plate 17 or the like) disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin penetrates the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire or a piano wire having a heated end is pressed and melted), the front frame is not affected. It functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed, and it is possible to prevent the illustrated wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the open front side is a passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box part 151 fitted to the fitting part 140, and a flat plate-like plate part 152 that covers the back surface of the lower side of the foul ball passage part 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

Since the fitting box 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145, the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the foul ball passage are formed. Not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the 145,
Even when the wire is penetrated in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction, the illustrated wire is
It is possible to prevent entry beyond 40.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back of the foul ball passage 145 and the ball emptying passage 147, a wire exemplified in the passage forming unit 140 is pressed to the right of the lower plate 50 to form a through hole. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized member from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. As a case where such a situation occurs, for example, a wire is pressed against a place where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness before and after the operation device 300 is reduced (a place obliquely above the rear of the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a case where a through hole is opened and the illustrated wire enters is illustrated.

Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation portion rear member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the rear side, and the operation portion rear member 155 has the cylinder lock 20 disposed in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The upper and lower positions are fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the size in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of the left and right long plate member. A through hole 156 formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can penetrate therethrough;
A pair of insertion holes 157, which are bored above and below the 56 and through which screws for fastening and fixing the operation unit rear member 155 to the main body frame 14a, and a portion (left end) which is overlapped on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 are vertically Mainly includes a pair of connecting insertion holes 158 that are formed in parallel with each other, and an opening / closing restricting portion 159 that protrudes rearward from the through hole 156 at the rotation base end side.

The connection insertion hole 158 is formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140.
48 is arranged so as to coincide with the front-back direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is located at a position where the connecting portion 148 coincides with the upper connecting hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
58 is inserted into the connecting through-hole 158 at a position that coincides in the front-rear direction with the protruding portion 148a projecting rearward in a columnar shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of 58. And a screw-in portion 148b formed as a hole into which a screw can be screwed.

With this configuration, when the operation unit rear member 155 is overlapped on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the projecting portion 148a is passed through the upper connection insertion hole 158 so that the passage forming unit 140 and the operation unit rear surface are connected. By aligning the screw with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connecting through hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operation unit rear member 1 can be easily formed.
55 can be fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140.

An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end of the operation portion rear member 155 in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed and the lower edge thereof at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c that extends rearward from a plate that forms the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 so as to divide the region. 148c is
In an assembled state (see FIG. 89), it is formed in an L-shape that can be brought into contact with the wall 158 a in up, down, left, and right directions.

Therefore, in order to align the operation unit rear member 155 with the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connection insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is vertically moved with respect to the extension wall portion 148c. The right and left surfaces make it possible to quickly and easily adjust the position and posture of the operation unit rear member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140.

The opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is disposed in front of and behind the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86).
Under predetermined conditions, the front frame 1 is brought into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13 so that
4 has an effect of restricting the closed state.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that extends toward the rear side of the operation portion rear member 155 and is formed of a synthetic resin. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is harder to bend than when it is formed into a flat plate with the same thickness, and the amount of material required while securing rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open part. Can be reduced. Therefore, the same thickness as the thickness of the other part of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength depends on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low and the strength of the part formed as thin as possible) (Thickness), the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the formability.

The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as rigidity can be secured and the shape can be maintained, and is not limited to a U-shape. For example, as compared with a flat cross section, a cross section of a curved (wave) shape, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wavy cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used.

Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear member 155,
a may be bent to extend from the rear side to the rear side, or may be composed of a metal part extending rearward from another member fixed to the rear side of the main body frame 14a. However, as in this embodiment,
Forming the opening / closing restricting portion 159 from a synthetic resin prevents the plate surface support device 600 from being chipped or dented when it comes into contact with the plate surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed from a metal member. can do. Thereby, the worker who changes the state of the board support device 600 and attaches or detaches the game board 13 can reduce the risk of being injured by touching a chip or a dent formed in the board support device 600.

Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is disposed on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, the cylinder lock further disposed on the rotation distal end side. It is possible to ensure a long interval between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at the location 20. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are locked by mistake when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. it can.

As a path through which a foreign substance such as a wire enters, for example, a path passing through a gap in the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the rear surface of the main body frame 14a even when following the gap of the operation device 300.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying power to the operation device 300 is provided at the right end position of the long cover member 173 in the front and rear direction of the body frame 14a.
a1 (see FIG. 103), the harness HN3 is connected to the protective cover device 350 (
It is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower right corner of the outer peripheral wall of FIG. 57).

Thus, even if a foreign matter such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the substantially case-shaped operation device 300. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign substances such as wires from entering the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

In addition, as the foreign matter that enters the operation device 300, a liquid is considered. For example, a player who feels bad about the game result may pour drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. that time,
The operation device 300 at an affordable position tends to be a prey to which drinking water can be poured, and when no countermeasures are taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 1)
3) may break down.

Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like, but as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it is configured to be separable and independent, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

In addition, on the bottom plate upper surface of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300), a concave portion 15a is formed in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recess 15a is configured as a deep recess.
It is not a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed in some places (for example, see FIG. 13,
The transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the clearances).
The concave portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the liquid that falls below the operation device 300.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is disposed near the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17B), and further, is connected to wiring. Since the portion is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the illumination support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), the liquid such as drinking water is supplied to the drive motor 3
42, it is possible to prevent failure.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the up-down direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that liquid such as drinking water may be splashed. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, the failure of the voice coil motor 352 can be prevented.

With the above-described configuration, even if a player such as drinking water is splashed on the return player, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the player touches the upper surface of the operation device 300 and touches the touched portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from squeezing the business hours.

Below the window 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that FIGS. 93 to 9
FIG. 6 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 have been removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG.

FIG. 93 (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93 (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93 (b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The bundling movable member 180 is a member that is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and that binds the harnesses HN <b> 1 to HN <b> 3 extending leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall 173 c.

In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) is used.
The harness HN2 connected to the ball letting operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) is guided to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board, and is bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, each of the illumination units 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (FIG. 86)
) Is connected (collected) to a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173, and a bundle of extension harnesses HN is connected from the relay board.
3 moves to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm 182 pivotally supported, and one side surface of the movable arm 182 in the direction of rotation along the lower edge of the movable arm 182 (the side facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93A). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from the side opposite to
93 is a U-shaped portion disposed on the other side surface (the side surface opposite to the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93 (a)) in the turning direction, and can lock the binding arm portion 183. A pair of locking portions 184
And a temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from a lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 at a position (intermediate position) between the pair of binding arm portions 183 and having an opening.

Note that while the binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm 183, the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (high rigidity) than the binding arm 183.

The main body portion 181 has a fixed portion 181a having a cross section formed in a substantially horseshoe shape on the upper side and having a through hole in the center and having a through hole in the center, and protrudes from the lower left and right corners of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of rotation preventing protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate stopper extending downward from the lower edge of the front end of the fixed portion 181a and having its extended end curved close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, and a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a.
(See FIG. 96 (a)), and a cylindrical fastening portion which is a portion disposed above the support plate portion 181d and whose outer shape is formed in a cylindrical shape whose diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened. 181e,
Mainly equipped.

The plate member 14d includes, at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, a hole group 14d1 including a through-hole arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of rotation preventing portions 181b.

When a screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to a corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, a pair of rotation preventing protrusions 181b are fitted into corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and to prevent the binding member 180 of the binding movable member 180 from being fixed.
The attitude with respect to d can be determined.

The intermediate stopper 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between the plate members 14d.
In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping downward by reducing the distance between the extension end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, and the center is located on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the circle to be arranged, a region for accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 (the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 18) while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation.
1c) can secure a large cross-sectional area.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane for guiding the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and has a cylindrical fastening portion 181.
As for e, its outer peripheral surface is fitted inside the base end side portion of the movable arm 182, and pivotally supports the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion that is smoothly connected to a plane OS1 that is offset from a shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with a base end portion supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. 182a, and a thin plate portion 182b having a long and thin shape that is continuously provided on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivot position.

The base end portion 182a has left and right ends (a portion where a straight line connected to an axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and a rear end portion (the end with the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion externally fitted to the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. The approaching portion) extends in the rotational direction from the side wall. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the same side, and the distance between the side walls becomes gradually shorter as approaching the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

Therefore, the rigidity of the base end portion 182a is maintained higher than that of the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on circumstances. .

Since a pair of the binding arm portions 183 have the same shape, only one will be described, and the other description will be omitted. The bundling arm 183 has small width portions 183a formed near the distal end with a width equal to the width of the root and large width portions 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a alternately at equal intervals. It is formed. In a fixed state, the binding arm 183 is inserted from below into a through-hole formed between the locking arm 184 and the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 93B).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm 183 is formed to be slightly larger in thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, since the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in a fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B), a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm 183.

The locking portion 184 has a large opening 184a formed on the movable arm 182 side and the large opening 1
A small opening 184b formed on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 with the opening 84a therebetween and having a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a is mainly provided (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass through without being close to the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass. The large width portion 183b has a size that cannot pass (is locked).

According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm 183 is to be moved relative to the locking portion 184, the binding arm 183 is disposed on the side of the large opening 184a (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 becomes smaller). ,
When the binding arm 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging it on the small opening 184b side. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole at the center thereof, through which the binding band can be inserted. Even if the binding arm portion 183 is broken due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bound.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is the XCIVb of FIG. 94 (a).
FIG. 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing a lower left corner of the front frame 14 along the line −XCIVb, and FIG. a) XCV
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the front frame 14 in the b-XCVb line.

94 (a) and 94 (b) show a state where the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 ( b)
A state in which the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically long metal portion constituting the left portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range) is illustrated. .

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 has an axis (parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14).
It is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees around a vertical axis). This angle is usually used in view of the situation of installation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the amusement shop (a situation where the pachinko machine 8010 is juxtaposed on the left and right and if it is rotated by 90 degrees or more, it may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010) In this case, the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14 is sufficiently larger.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not elastically deform and can be rotated with respect to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no movable arm 182, the possibility of the movable arm 182 being degraded due to elastic deformation and broken can be reduced.

Next, the manner of supporting the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Harness HN1 to HN
3 is supported by the binding movable member 180, so that the arrangement is defined. For example, the 3 can be prevented from being erroneously pinched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and disconnected.

FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). FIG. 96 (c) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

96 (a) and 96 (b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. You. That is, since the horizontal line of the intermediate stopper 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c is the same, the horizontal line is extended from the upper extending wall 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally, and can be supported by the intermediate stopper 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c in the vicinity of the cylindrical fastening part 181e, which is the pivot position of the movable arm 182, the upper extending wall 173c sandwiching the intermediate stopper 181c.
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the side opposite to
2 can be made. Thereby, FIG. 96 (b) and FIG. 96 (d)
As shown in ()), the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, which can prevent extreme bending deformation.

In addition, by disposing the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
The area surrounded by 3 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Accordingly, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b) schematically show the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN which schematically illustrate the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
3 is a schematic top view of FIG. Note that FIG. 97 (a) illustrates one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97 (b) illustrates the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the center axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically illustrated. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and supported by the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is also similar to the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 about the rotation center point P57. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b),
When the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 rotates about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, the inner frame 12
The opening and closing of the thin plate portion 182b is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 9).
6 (b) and FIG. 96 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the bundling movable member 180 are connected to the front frame 14 regardless of the open / close state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12.
A vertically long metal part (FIG. 96 (d), which constitutes the left part of the body frame 14a of FIG.
(The portion where the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 contacts). That is, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are forcibly circumvented so that the harness HN
It is possible to prevent the curved portions of 1 to HN3 from approaching the turning front end of the front frame 14.

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from hindering the work of the worker during the work performed by opening and closing the front frame 14, and to prevent the harness HN when the front frame 14 is closed.
It is possible to improve the fit of N1 to HN3 (fit that is curved only once at the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed vertically above the inverted cup 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 91). The intermediate stopper 181c disposed vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3. For example, the tip of a wire or a piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the inverted cup portion 178. In addition, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which a wire enters between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when a wire is pressed against the lower surface of the inverted cup portion 178 to melt and penetrate the wire and advance the wire toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the inverted cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. Harness H in which the tip of the heated wire is supported by intermediate stopper 181c
It is pressed against N1 to HN3. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out, and conduction is disabled.

When the electrical continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, an error signal is output and an alarm is sounded (an error screen is displayed), thereby making it possible to quickly detect a fraud. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who performs wrongdoing from gaining wrongful profit.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 burns out, the ball can be fired even when the operation handle 51 is rotated. Disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from the time the fraud is committed to the time the fraud is discovered (it is possible to detect the fraud early).

In this case, a wire is entered into the game area, and after the game area is manipulated (for example, after bending a nail to make it easy to win illegally), the ball is placed in the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. , It is possible to prevent a person who commits an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball from firing a ball, thereby preventing improper profit from being given. That is, it is impossible to perform a specific wrongdoing.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burned out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is used. 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Therefore, anyone who commits wrongdoing,
Because of the possibility that the user may not be able to collect the bills and the remaining balance of the card inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his / her misconduct, the act of deterring fraud is exerted. be able to.

Further, in order to eliminate the possibility that it is impossible to collect the bills and the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) and perform fraud, the card unit (ball lending unit) Even though the balance of the unit is 0 yen, the cheating is performed without leaving the seat, so that the gaming machine shop can easily notice the fraud.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is disconnected, the card unit (ball lending unit) (
In a gaming machine store that outputs a disconnection error (CR error) (not shown), the disconnection error (C
R error), it is possible to easily grasp the possibility of fraud.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
0 and the outline of the ball guide opening 53 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide openings 53 are arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145. In the present embodiment, the front door side lower plate passage 1
The lower end of the ball guide opening 53 occupies an area about 2/3 of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53 at the left part of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145 has the remaining part at the right part of the ball guide opening 53. Partition plate 53a so as to occupy a region (a region of about 1/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53).
Partitioned by.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50. S-shaped paths SL1, S in which the extending direction is directed (switched) at least once to both the left and right sides.
L2.

The S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. Thereby, the window 14c (see FIG. 86)
While ensuring a large vertical dimension of the lower plate 50, the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased, so that a larger vertical dimension of the game area and the effect area can be ensured, and the lower plate 50 (and its Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the upstream side, the stress of ball replenishment given to the player (stress due to the need to replenish the ball from a thousand boxes when the ball for the lower plate is exhausted is lost, etc.) ) Can be configured.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2, respectively, as regions whose extending directions are bent in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. With features. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region in which the left and right of the characteristic portion are reversed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1. And a region NEa2.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NE disposed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 such that the left and right of the characteristic portion are reversed.
b2. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending area NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending area NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, a side wall Na disposed on the opposite side to the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. A ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting with the extending direction of the side wall Na, and extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and approaching the side wall Na toward the extending end. And the adjacent walls Nc,
Nb and Nc extend from the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The near wall Nc has a surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb and is formed to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface for a sphere. On the other hand, a surface Nc2 opposite to the surface Nc1 (a surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (a wire or a small-diameter metal represented by a piano wire). This function will be described later. The distance of the gap Nin between the adjacent wall Nc and the side wall Na at the extended lower end is the wire H.
M is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter).

As shown in FIG. 99, due to the shape of the first bending area NEa1, the wire HM inserted incorrectly
Can be prevented from entering deeper. In other words, as shown in FIG. 99, the front door side lower plate passage portion 14 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance is used as an entry route of the wire HM inserted illegally.
In this case, the person who commits the wrongdoing is the wire H
M advances while being pressed against the side wall of the lower door passage portion 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 by the wrongdoer, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1. Even in this case, since the wire HM advances rightward through the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. Will be. That is, a pair of bending regions NEa1,
By arranging the NEa2 to be reversed left and right, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without leaking.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when the wire HM enters the gap Nin. In addition, the tip position of the wire HM at each timing is illustrated by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is illustrated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. Here, when the wire HM is caught (sandwiched), further progress of the wire HM can be prevented, and furthermore, the wire HM can be prevented from being held, and fraudulent acts can be quickly found. it can.

On the other hand, even when the wire HM does not catch and moves further, if the wire HM projects from the gap Nin, the wire HM projects further in a posture in which the tip faces downward.
Is advanced, the tip of the wire HM advances downward. Therefore, the wire HM
The dispensing device 133 arranged upstream of the dispensing ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146
Can be prevented from reaching the game area arranged on the upstream side of the game.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) to cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an incorrect payout ball, or allowing the wire HM to reach the game area and causing the electric accessory 64 to reach the game area.
For example, by forcibly opening a movable device such as 0a (see FIG. 2) and making it easy to win illegally, it is possible to prevent an illegal payout ball from being obtained and a person who commits an illegal act to obtain an illegal profit. .

Returning to FIG. 98, the description will be continued. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of a portion downstream from the merging region CE where the ball ball passage portion 147 joins is approximately twice as large as the diameter of the ball (in this embodiment, twice or more). Thus, when the sphere flowing down the ball passage 147 is disposed in the merging area CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage 145 enters the merging flow path CE (the balls simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two spheres are arranged vertically, the possibility that the spheres are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in a portion downstream from the merging region CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and connecting the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2 up and down. The width of the passage 145a is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere.
The rear side bottom plate portion of 40 protrudes toward the front side as it goes downward.

In a region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the rear bottom plate portion of the passage formation unit 140 is located at the same position as the upstream end of the passage portion 145a, and in a region downstream of the passage portion 145a, The rear bottom plate portion is located at the downstream end of the passage portion 145a and the surface position.

In other words, the foul ball passage portion 145 is located in the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a.
The front-rear width is set to be larger than the downstream area of 5a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 145 has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the ball downstream of the passage 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to be slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, the foul ball passage 145
In the case where the ball stays at the same time, the number of balls that can stay can be increased because a plurality of balls can be arranged at different positions in the upstream and downstream directions of the passage portion 145, and the center of the ball in the front-rear direction can be increased. It is possible to prevent the two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time, since they are prevented from being lined up (slightly shifting left and right and up and down).

In other words, the approach of the ball to the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. Thereby, even when two or more foul balls continuously flow into the foul ball passage portion 145, the foul balls can be prevented from reaching the merging region CE at the same time. The possibility of being interposed between the upper and lower walls can be reduced.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow lower surface of the ball is directed rightward. Plate portion 146a that is inclined downwardly and the foul ball receiving portion 1 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a.
And a passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate portion 146a.
And a curved guide plate portion 146c which extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the forty to the back side, and which curves upward in a direction in which the extension direction is toward the back side.

While the ball is guided along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side), the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b causes the foul ball receiving portion 1 to operate.
The passage position of the ball passing through the front side through 46 can be brought closer to the right side of foul ball receiving portion 146. In other words, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be.

Thereby, the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be finished before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (since the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While the width of 145 is set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed in a range (for example, the passage portion 145a) that forms the S-shaped path SL2.
), The passage width is set to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), so that it is possible to prevent an illegal tool having a larger outer shape from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 100 and 101 show a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illuminated portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be long in the left and right directions, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032. In this lower support structure, the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400 has, like the support groove 376 of the cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side to the front side. (See FIG. 118), and fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 fit into the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 50
0 is concatenated.

Accordingly, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 need not be directly fastened and fixed, but can be connected and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. Note that, based on the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling the upper panel unit 400 to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order of fastening the upper panel unit 400 after fastening the right panel unit 500. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 which are divided into right and left are respectively replaced with left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. The heavy plate units 500R, 5R
00L can be prevented from being separated from side to side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (the fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIGS. 102 and 103, the main body frame 14a is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a.
The upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the front panel unit 400 and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are shown as being disassembled from the main frame 14a.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between the upper frame member 410 and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and the concave portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 12).
1 and FIG. 122).

The fastening portion 14e1 has a through-hole through which a screw is inserted from the back side thereof, and fastens the screw passing through the through-hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, thereby forming the upper frame. It is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 104, the body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the main frame 14a by screws inserted from the rear side into insertion holes formed in the main frame 14a, is disassembled from the main frame 14a, and the upper panel unit 400 and the upper side plate member 14e are shown. In addition, the illustration of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 is omitted, while the cover 370 is illustrated for reference.

In the actual assembling procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main frame 14a. In the right panel unit 500, the right side wall portion forms the right side edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

FIG. 105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510.
FIGS. 108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 shows a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are superimposed in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate unit 50R.
It mainly includes a vertically long plate-shaped support plate portion 510 to which 0L and 500R are fastened and fixed and which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate unit 500 is inserted into the support plate 510 by screws inserted from the rear side to the front side.
L, 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate 510, and in this state, the support plate 510 is
4a is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted from the back side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending the extension portion 511a in a plate shape from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side, and is in an assembled state. (FIG. 86
), A fixed plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511a contacts the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, a board member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511, A plurality of cover side through holes 513 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and the lens side through holes 514. And a pin support hole 515 formed in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b in which the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side in a shape overlapping with the substrate member 512 in a front view, and the base member 511b comes into contact with the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

The base 511b is in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and the heavy plate units 500L and 500R.
(See FIG. 115 (b)), so that the heavy plate units 500L and 50L can be contacted.
It is possible to suppress the 0R from falling in the left-right direction. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixing plate 511, the extending portion 51 is larger than the base portion 511b.
1a is shifted to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extension portion 511 is formed.
a, the outer cover member 560 contacts the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction on the front side of FIG.
On the left side surface of the support plate portion 510, the rear side end portion of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the left side surface of the support plate portion 510 by being formed as a surface substantially at the same position as the side surface of the base portion 511b. The inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 contacts the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row that is curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. . In other words, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes are parallel to each other toward the light guide member 540 from directly behind the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak. The light enters the light guide 540 and exits from any of the surfaces of the light guide member 540, and the ingress and egress of light and the path thereof will be described later.

The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 527 provided on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting a screw fastened to the rear fastening portion 527 from the rear side. When the screw is fastened to the back fastening portion 527, the inner cover member 520 is attached to the support plate portion 51.
Fixed to 0.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 556 provided on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw fastened to the rear fastening portion 556 from the rear side. When the screw is fastened to the back fastening portion 556, the outer lens member 550 is connected to the support plate portion 51.
Fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin support hole 515 has a left-right width slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, and a vertical width set to be approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined.

That is, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced up and down with respect to the support plate portion 510 in a fastening preparation state where the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut on the support plate portion 510 from the front side (projections 566). (In the case where the position is displaced up and down by about the same diameter as the above), the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. Thereby, the protrusion 566 is formed.
Is inserted into the pin support hole 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L,
By moving the 500R up and down by the position shift, the position shift can be eliminated and the fastening and fixing can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L is provided with a window 14c (FIG. 86).
Inner cover member 520 which forms the right edge of
And an inner lens member 530 that is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmissive colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R is provided with a light guide member 540 that is disposed to face the left heavy plate unit 500L.
An outer lens member 550 that is made of a light-transmissive white resin material and has a front end facing the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction and a front end facing the front-rear direction, and the outer lens member The light guide member 54 is disposed on the right side of the light guide 550 and is formed of a resin material that does not transmit light.
And an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 show the heavy plate unit 50.
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L and 500R. Note that FIG. 110 is a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side, and five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Is exploded and shown.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed at an upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening portion 523 provided at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560; a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521;
A plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and formed to be longer than the short fastening portions 525; The outer cover member 560 is a cylindrical portion that is inserted through the lens member 530, and the inner cover member 520
A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the support plate 510 are screwed, and a plurality of back fastening portions which are provided on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 from the back side are screwed. 527
And mainly comprising.

The main body plate portion 521 has a front-side end portion 521a having a corrugated shape, and a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front-side end portion 521a and the back-side base portion 521b at a short width portion (a portion closer to the back side) of the corrugation. Is provided.

The rear side base 521b is a base 511 of the support plate 510 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86).
(b) an inner side surface 521b1 which comes into contact with (conforms with) the left side surface.

The connection plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion that is disposed so as to be inclined leftward toward the back side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connection plate portion 521c.

In this embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged so that the intervals increase in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 are made different from each other, and the effect of the light is produced by the openings 524.
Everything can be different.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-rear direction, and is recessed in the left outer surface in the left-right direction. And a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a that is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b that is recessed in the left outer side in the left-right direction. That is, screws are inserted into the outer cover member 560 at two locations at the upper end and at one location at the lower end, and are fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the support groove 376 of the cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are provided in parallel at four locations at the top and bottom, and in the assembled state, the inner lens member 530.
Functions as a window for viewing Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape that protrudes rightward with the connecting plate 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is arranged so as to be recessed to the right from the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at a boundary between the rear side base 521b and the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion is the design shape in the present embodiment, the inner cover member 52.
The surface of 0 (left side surface) corresponds to the portion protruding leftward (see FIG. 111). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b has a design-like shape and is concavely curved rightward between the above-described boundary portions.
That is, the surface of the rear side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates left and right as it goes up and down.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the design surface side. In the case where the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a concavity, which is liable to be a dead space, is formed on the reverse surface of the design-shaped overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dead space can be effectively utilized by disposing the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, and the space on the back surface side (the inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 is provided. Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 is formed in a vertically long plate-like main body plate portion 5.
The front end 531 a of the inner cover member 520 has a corrugated shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end 521 a of the inner cover member 520.

The front side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is formed in the front-rear direction at a switching position in the front-rear direction of a curve forming a wave shape. And a support hole 531 through which the projecting portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c.

The support hole 531b is formed in a front portion of the front end 531a in a wave shape, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back side. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b is fixed.
Even if a load is applied near 31b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in a wave-like rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the support hole 531c can contact the light guide member 540 is provided on the rear side. . That is, the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is enhanced by the inclined rib portion 532, so that the support hole
Even if a load is applied in the vicinity of 31c, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531c from being deformed or displaced.

In addition, the main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d that is formed in the left and right direction and has a size that allows the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted, at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through-hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and a pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 that vertically connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.
b).

The upper and lower plate portions 532a extend so as to fill a gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a. That is,
Like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that extends leftward toward the back side, and therefore has a shape in which the left and right widths become longer toward the back side (the front end is a front end in top view). Triangular shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhang portion 533 that extends leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhang portion 533 includes, on the side opposite to the overhanging side, a light scattering portion 533a that is provided in a wavy shape and that has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has a concave portion for changing the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 512a disposed on the rear side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a lattice pattern on both left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512 a to the rear end of the light guide member 540 is changed to the left and right directions through the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. You. The light guide member 540 is hot-bent to a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and has a width in the thickness direction from an end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to a front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512 a
) Is a processed part for changing the light from The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is depressed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512a to form the light guide member 5.
The light is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of 40.

In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is formed by forming a template having a pattern in which a conical portion having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of a bottom circle of about 1 mm is dispersedly arranged in a grid at about 3 mm intervals. It is formed by pressing (hot pressing) the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that has reached the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion, and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but preferably has transparency, and is preferably an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, or an amorphous olefin resin. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
Acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound). Among them, particularly, by using an acrylic resin, the light guide member 540 has a high average luminance and a small decrease in the luminance distribution.
Can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the thickness of the light guide member 540 at the LED 512a side end is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the heat bending process is improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed in a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end is slightly displaced to the rear side from the front side end 531a of the inner lens member 530, and the right and left sides are formed. Is also formed from a wavy shape.

The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. For the degree of the wave shape,
Although there is no particular limitation, the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm
It is preferred that: By using such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of imparting three-dimensional freedom while maintaining good mechanical properties with little distortion after hot bending. .

The details of the wavy shape waving right and left will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the inner cover member 520 will be described.
Is located to the left at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c, and located to the right at a position between positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portions 521c (located away from the inner cover member 520). It has a wave shape.

As described above, the wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot bending a base material having a concave portion. As a method of the thermal bending process of the present invention, a concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (female mold) which are curved while being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + a heating temperature of 10 to 40 ° C.
This is done by pressing the base material into a mold having a male mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin is mainly composed of an acrylic resin, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferable that the heat treatment be performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

At this time, the heating temperature of the base material is equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material at the time of heating to a deflection temperature under load of + 40 ° C. or lower and a melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is maintained, and the light source light before and after the heat bending process is performed. Fluctuating angle can be suppressed. Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and unevenness in luminance distribution in the light guide plate. In addition, by setting such heating temperature conditions, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 that constitutes the light guide plate, and the main body plate portion 5.
41 mainly extending from the upper and lower ends of the outer cover member 41 and through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted.

The light guide member 540 includes a fastening portion 542 and a concave portion 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526.
In other positions, it has no portion penetrating in the left-right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is formed of a single plate without a hole at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the effect of the light through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. Inner fitting 5
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes into which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and project rightward in a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553, and pass through the outer cover member. An overhang portion 554 that can be viewed, a plurality of through holes 555 into which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a support plate portion that protrudes from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and is provided from the back side. And a plurality of rear fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 is formed such that the shape of the front and rear end portions follows the shape of the front and rear end portions of the light guide member 540. That is, the outer lens member 550 extends leftward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551, and the front side end portion 551a that forms a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. The light guide member 540 has a corrugated shape and is slightly displaced to the front side with respect to the front end of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front end of the light guide member 540 and the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. You.

The front end 551a is located at a position where the curve forming the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction.
A plurality of protrusions 551b are provided protruding toward the front side and fitted in the support holes 531b and 531c in an assembled state (see FIG. 86).

On the surface of the front end 551a on the side opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540,
A number of bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) bulging in a semicircular shape in a side view are formed vertically. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, The light emission at the front end face can be a strip-shaped light emission mode that extends vertically.

The insertion hole 553 is provided in a concave deep portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhang portion 554. Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, a rear fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550, and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the screw arrangement). it can). Thereby, the area (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) facing the player can be enlarged.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 on the side facing the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member is provided. 5
The surface 40 and the main body plate portion 551 abut on each other (see FIG. 114B).

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in a direction in which the light guide member 540 is disposed to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LED 512a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate 510,
It is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced, and it is possible to cause light from the LED 512a to enter the light guide member 540 with high accuracy.

The outer cover member 560 includes a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a receiving surface at an upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561 that can receive the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520. In addition, a plurality of screws having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and an elongated hole formed in an oval shape with a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. An upper fastening portion 562 having a screw receiving portion 562a, and a receiving surface at a lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561 which can receive the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520;
A lower fastening part having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening part 523a and an elongated hole shape having a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and having a screw receiving part 563a through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. Part 563 and the long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520 at the front end of the main body plate portion 561.
26, which is formed to have a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526, a horizontal elongated shape longer than the vertical width, and formed from the opposite side. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 into which screws are inserted, an opening 565 formed to have an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhang portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a projecting rear surface from the main body plate portion 561. And a plurality of protrusions 566 to be provided.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is
The left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the 70 (see FIG. 92) are formed as grooves to be fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 by fitting the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the right panel unit 500 has a shape protruding to the front side by the cover 370. Thus, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the overhang 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted.
It is formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhang portion 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 can be narrowed, so that an unauthorized act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

Referring to FIGS. 112 and 113, left heavy plate unit 500L and right heavy plate unit 500
The method of assembling R will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a).

In addition, FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) show a state in which the protruding portions 551b are arranged on the back side of the support holes 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) show the protruding portions. Part 55
The state where 1b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are brought into contact in the left-right direction (FIG. 11).
2 (b)), the left heavy plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the protrusions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

Thus, at the front end on the front side of the right panel unit 500, the protrusions 551b, 551 are provided.
By adopting a configuration in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting c through the support holes 531b, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 on the front side is improved. be able to.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front side end (
The number of screws that are arranged on the front side of the light guide member 540 and that fasten and fix the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R can be reduced, whereby light is blocked by the screws. Since the area can be reduced, light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 can be easily visually recognized as a strip extending in the vertical direction.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening portions) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 on the front side is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously introduced at the time of fastening. When a load is applied to the light member 540, the light guide member 540 is provided.
Can be reduced. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be disposed near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered front end) can be expanded. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being visually interrupted near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L are connected. And the light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R,
Surfaces that are parallel to each other are formed along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship where they can abut against each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the left heavy plate unit 500L.
Functions as a guide surface (guide) for moving the right panel unit 500R in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R, so that the right panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, the right panel unit 500 is attached to the support plate 510 by the left heavy plate unit 5.
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled by fastening and fixing, respectively. At least two kinds of procedures can be considered for the assembling procedure.

The first procedure is a method in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R are fastened and fixed to each other and then fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. The second procedure is a method in which the right heavy board unit 500R is fastened. Is fixed to the support plate portion 510 alone, and then the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted through the support holes 531b.
In this method, the left heavy plate unit 500L is fastened and fixed to the right heavy plate unit 500R and the support plate 510, respectively. These two procedures can be similarly employed when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

As described above, since assembly and disassembly can be performed in two different procedures, the operator performing maintenance or the like can use the right panel unit 50 in either procedure depending on the location of the part that needs to be replaced.
It is possible to select whether to disassemble and assemble 0, and to shorten the working time.

In either case, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are required to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R.
Need to slide each other in the plane direction. Protrusions 551b, 551c and support holes 531b
This is because it is necessary to release the engagement with the. When sliding the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R in the plane direction, at least one of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

As described above, the configuration in which the protrusions 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b are fitted is such that the right panel unit 500 is pryed open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and the right panel unit 500 is disassembled. It helps prevent illegal acts that enter the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the machine 500.

That is, in the case where the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, by removing the screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled, and an illegal act can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and unless the screws are removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104), By making it difficult to disassemble the heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from outside the pachinko machine 8010. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that enters the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the effect will be described. FIG. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . Note that in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c),
The illustration of the support plate 510 is omitted.

Light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 is applied to the light guide member 540 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is moved right and left by the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape waving in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114 (b)), light is condensed on the side forming the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thus, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (the right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 is closer to the outer lens member 550 at a position corresponding to the uppermost one of the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted to is diffused and can be used for production.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode of light production (condensed or diffused) performed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as a boundary. The effect can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of producing light is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, but various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region, or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, it is possible to make the mode of producing light on both the left and right sides different. .

The light guide member 540 always has a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, for the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also set to the second opening from the top in correspondence with the vertical width being increased as the opening 524 goes upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
> R2) Similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2> R3).

Accordingly, even when the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 does not change, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit light condensed for each of the openings 524 is different. The amount of light to be emitted can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the amount of visible light can be larger in the upper opening 524 than in the lower opening 524.

Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the lowermost opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4１R1) and the center of the concave surface. The normal coming out is slightly inclined upward. Therefore, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the upper and lower openings 524 can be strengthened, and the effect of light can be sharpened. At the same time, the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 is directed to the player's eyes. The light can be emitted upward.

As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as a length connecting the middle point of the upper side and the middle point of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 opposed to the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 opposed to the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the radius of curvature R3. The width of the opening 524 facing the upper and lower portions is a vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R4 is the upper and lower width W4.

In the present embodiment, the upper and lower widths W1 to W4 are formed such that the lower opening 524 of each opening 524 is reduced (W1>W2>W3> W4). That is, in the curvature radii R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the upper and lower widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. Thereby, a portion where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, the radius of curvature R
1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524. On the other hand, in a place where the degree of light collection is strong (for example, a part with a radius of curvature R3). The vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1, so that light is not excessively incident on the opening 524. Therefore, with the configuration of the present embodiment, the light emission mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center point of each of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114 (b) is a point corresponding to the focal point of light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and each of the upper and lower widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. Is arranged at a substantially intermediate position.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in a region KE at the boundary between the openings 524. Here, the region KE is a band-like region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent opening 524. That is, as shown in FIG.
The upper end of E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 located adjacent above it, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 located below it. Therefore, the LED 512 is located in the area KE.
The light irradiated in the front-rear direction from a is viewed from the left side of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 114 (c)).
), The vehicle proceeds in a state hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the area KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is
Therefore, even if the light collecting action is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small.

On the other hand, in the region KE, the light guide member 54 is formed to have a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface.
Since the shape of 0 can be formed from a curved shape having no corners and concentration of stress can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

In addition, by forming a convex shape to the left in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed to the right, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance of the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. .

For example, the LED 512a that causes light to enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5a
By turning on 12a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without any gap. At this time, since the right side shape of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE has a concave shape, light emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the region KE crosses the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being viewed dark in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, which is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the overhang portion 554 (FIG. 106)
) Can be sharpened.

Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary between the openings 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, a corresponding portion (a portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a band shape. Can be done.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shorter than the upper and lower portions thereof (the distance from the LED 512a is shorter). Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end even if the light amount is weak. The effect may be performed using the light that reaches the front end.

That is, although it cannot be visually recognized through the connecting plate portion 521c, the front end 5
31a (see FIG. 105), a light effect that can be visually recognized (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared, and the jackpot expectation degree of the effect is set to be high, so that the position of the player's eyes can be adjusted. , Can be moved further away from the game board 13 than the front side end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree of fatigue of the eyes of the player can be reduced, and the player can play a long game without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, and is visually recognized by the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Accordingly, a clerk who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and does not visually recognize the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 and visually recognizes the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

As a result, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed while the cheating player is not aware of it, so that the cheating player can escape. Can be prevented.

Note that, by inverting the left and right shapes of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player, and may not be visible to the clerk.

FIG. 115A is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG.
It is a sectional view of light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line of (a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that tapers gradually from the end face (thickness: about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The front end of the light guide member 540 (LED 512)
The part farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm in order to maintain mechanical strength, and the left and right widths are reduced at the same gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed with the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end face of the portion of the inner lens member 530 opposed to the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is compared with the end face of the portion opposed to the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111).
Since the distance from the end face on the 12a side becomes longer, the width is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is vertically sandwiched between the portions near the support hole 531b and is disposed at a position depressed to the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the support hole 531b
Due to the shadow created by the nearby portion, the portion near the support hole 531c is more easily visually recognized as dark than the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a portion of the light guide member 54 opposed to the support hole 531b is arranged.
Since the width (thickness) of the end surface of the light guide member 540 in the portion arranged to face the support hole 531c is larger than that of the end surface of the support hole 531c, the light emitted from the LED 512a is received. Thus, a large area of the light emitting surface can be secured.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any one of the LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light that is visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c is reduced.
The amount of light visually recognized in the vicinity of 1b can be increased, and the difference in distance in the front-rear direction and the degree of darkening due to shadow can be reduced. Thereby, the front end 531 of the inner lens member 530 is formed.
With “a” as the foreground, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform over the top and bottom (the difference in strength is small).

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 is visible. In FIG. 116, an example of a path (a traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. Spreads and proceeds to the outside.

Conversely, light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved. Therefore, the LED 51 that generates light incident on the light guide member 540
While the arrangement of 2a is fixed, the light emission mode (coarse, dense, light and dark) can be changed on both surfaces of the light guide member 540. In other words, the light can be visually recognized by the player in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Further, light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is
By being curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b), 0 is bent not to the side but to the player side (see the arrow of the imaginary line in FIG. 115 (b). The line arrow
An example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540 is shown). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, thereby improving the effect of the light emission effect.

Returning to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, the description will be continued. The upper panel unit 400 includes the upper side plate member 14.
e and fitting grooves 522b, 562b arranged at the lower right end at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 (see FIGS. 108 and 109).
And is supported from below, and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14.

FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410 An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410; a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e; ,
Mainly equipped. Note that illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted in FIGS. 117 and 118 (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit in which a decoration indicating a model name or the like is provided on the front side surface, and L
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is included. By the included LED emitting light,
Performs light effects.

The illumination unit 401 includes a main body 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on a rear outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending in a horizontally elongated plate shape from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion protruding from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side above the plate-like portion 404 to form a cylindrical inner side. A tubular portion 405 having a shape formed by penetrating the wavy wall portion 403; and a plurality of fastening portions 406 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly comprising.

The main body 402 is formed in a box shape such that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open side, and a space is formed inside. In addition, the included LED is arranged on the electronic board,
The electronic board is fixed to the main body 402.

The wavy wall portion 403 is easily engaged with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine an assembling position in the left-right direction.
It is a part that improves the workability of the assembling of No. 01.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. In addition, on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, a horizontally long groove shape which vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed in a concave shape.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring, which passes the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED included in the main body 402 is provided to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by screws being fastened to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side frame member 410e and the upper side plate member 14e, so that access to the inside is prevented. It is formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG.
0 is an exploded rear perspective view. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410
A main body member 411 to which the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a lower edge plate member formed of a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411 and fastened and fixed from the rear side along the lower edge of the main body member 411 420, a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and a front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411. And the left corner support member 430L fastened and fixed to the main body member 411, and the main body member 411 is fitted from the back side to a position protruding to the front side from the opening 414, and is pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back side. And a lens member 440 that is restricted from falling to the back side and constitutes the electric decoration 8033.

The main body member 411 is a left and right long member having openings formed on both left and right sides for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and the speaker cover 27 being disposed so as to cover the opening. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 which is opposed to the tubular portion 405 of the electric decoration unit 401 is smaller than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. A support through-hole 413 formed to penetrate with a slightly larger inner shape;
And an opening 414 penetratingly formed in the upper right corner in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electric decoration unit 401. Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the electric decoration unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 can be easily performed.

The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted into the support through hole 413 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86).
Thus, the wiring projecting through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the electric decoration unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. Thus, the other end of the wiring can be prevented from being detached.

The support through-hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted.
Thereby, the support through-hole 413 can be used for positioning the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be viewed in a front view. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) has an LED 14 at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
e2 is provided, and the emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape in a top view on the back side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower right end face, and a recessed groove 417 from the back side at the lower left end face. A supported groove 418 to be formed, a fastening portion 419 that is disposed at a position symmetrical to the left and right near the upper end portion, and is formed so that a screw can be screwed therein, and a second portion that is formed so that a screw can be screwed at a position closer to the top and bottom. And a fastening portion 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the lower edge front end). Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitted state (FIG. 86).
), A load (such as weight) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end of the electric decoration 8031, and the fitted state (
In FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 40 is formed via the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed.
The load (weight and the like) given from 0 can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is provided at a position where a screw inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape from a position where the screw does not reach the tip from the base. And an enlarged rib 419a to be provided.

As described later, the enlarged rib 419a connects the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. (See FIG. 125 (a)), which will be described in detail later.

In the present embodiment, the ribs 419a having the same shape are arranged at three locations around the fastening part 419 at intervals of 120 ° along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening part 419.

The second fastening portion 419 b (see FIG. 118) is provided at the lower position of the main body member 411 with the fastening portion 14 e 1 of the upper side plate member 14 e (see FIG. 100) and the concave portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450.
2, 482 (see FIG. 122), and at a position above the main body member 411, at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450. Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view at a lower front side edge of the main body member 421, After extending from the upper edge of the corrugated wall portion 422 to the front side, it extends upward from the extending end thereof, and has a cross section L
An L-shaped extending portion 423 formed in a character shape, and a plurality of L-shaped extending portions 423 disposed at equal distances left and right from the left and right central positions (upper end positions of the curved shape) of the main body plate portion 421 and vertically penetrated. And an opening 424 constituted by a small-diameter through-hole.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and back contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extending portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the location where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut vertically can be increased, and the strength can be improved.

The opening 424 is connected to the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
1 is an opening through which a vibration wave (sound) output from the back side of the speaker assembly 450 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 is transmitted (emitted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 that are circular openings through which vibration generated toward the front side passes in the speaker assembly 450.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through-hole 430R2 formed in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 430R2
The light applied to the lens member 440 through the opening 414 is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

FIG. 121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are jointly fastened to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connection holes 469. The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper plate member 14e. Note that the speaker assembly 450 is a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 45 having a substantially symmetrical shape.
0L, the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the speaker assembly 4 will be described.
Description of 50L is omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device for converting an electric signal into an audible sound wave so that the sound can be heard, and a speaker 451 inserted through the through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451. A front assembly 460 fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape substantially matching the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in a front view,
The rear assembly 48 which forms a space between the front assembly 460 and the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).
0 is mainly provided.

The speaker 451 is connected to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460.
The speaker 451 is attached to the speaker 451 and produces an effect sound in connection with the game.
Through which a speaker connection line 453 (for example, an electric wire composed of a copper wire and a covering portion covering the copper wire) is drilled in the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 102). 102, the terminal connector of the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (FIG. 102).
(See FIG. 4) to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

A front cover of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass through. And this protective cover 4
The speaker 451 covered with 54 is mounted on the front assembly 460 in a state where the front surface is aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is scattered. It is possible to reproduce and output high quality sound without any delay. Further, the front cover of the speaker 451 can be suitably protected by the protective cover 454 without deteriorating the sound quality.

The front-side assembly 460 is a left-right elongated cup-shaped main body 46 having an open back side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the upper and lower widths, and a back surface of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462. An extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower edges of the main body 461 from the upper and lower sides to the outside in the vertical direction;
A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end to the front side, a light passing through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner of the main body 461 in the front-rear direction, and a speaker 451 on the right side of the main body 461. , A plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending in a rib shape from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the rear side, and the rear assembly 480. A plurality of fastening portions 468 to which the set screws are fastened and fixed, a connection hole 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted, and a distal end side main body. And a front recess 471 recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the portion 461T.

The main body 461 includes, as regions divided in the left-right direction, a base-side main body 461B disposed on the side where the through-hole 466 is formed, and a center in the left-right direction of the base-side main body 461B (see FIG.
(1 left), and a main body 461T connected to the center in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 121) of the intermediate main body 461M. The base body 461B, the intermediate body 461M, and the tip body 461T have a continuous space formed between the base body 461B, the middle body 461M, and the rear body 480.

The main body 461 includes a rear side wall 461H formed as a wall surrounding substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in a front view. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion that is not turned inside (an edge portion where a flange or the like is not formed inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Is done.

The extension plate 463 has a through hole 463a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 463
a from the back side of the main body frame 14a, the joint fastening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1
4e, and is inserted into the joint fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the rear assembly 480.
And through the through hole 463a, and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

In other words, the speaker assembly 450R is configured such that the screws inserted into the through holes 463a through the upper side plate member 14e from the rear side of the main body frame 14a are screwed into the main body member 411, so that the extension plate 463 is so tight that the screws are tightened. Pressed against rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material interposed therebetween). Thereby, the sound effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recess width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 passing through the wiring passage concave portion 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sound effect from being lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes, thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem. In FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is shown so as to be visible.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the wiring passage concave portion 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. Thereby, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passing through hole 465 is provided for the LED 14e disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 is a through-hole through which light emitted from the lens 2 toward the lens member 440 passes.

The passage forming rib 467 abuts the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap in front and rear, and bends a plurality of times into a space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480.
(See FIG. 123). This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed to have a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (ie, slightly protrudes from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 includes a main body 48 that is formed in a cup shape having a long left and right side and an open front side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the upper and lower widths, and a back surface of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482. An extension plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower edges of the main body 481 from the upper and lower sides to the outer side in the vertical width;
The wiring pressing protrusion 484 protruding toward the front side of the main body 481, the light passing through hole 485 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body 481, and the cup-shaped bottom plate (back side plate) of the main body 481 A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape to the front side;
68, a plurality of through holes 488 formed as through holes into which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the front-rear direction, and front to rear sides at positions corresponding to the front recessed portions 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. And a rear recess 491 recessed toward the main body.

The main body part 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer periphery of the main body part 481 at a position moved inward by the thickness of the main body part 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. Front side wall portion 48 formed from a shape fitted inside the rear side wall portion 461H
1H.

The speaker assembly 450R is provided with a double wall fitted on the rear side wall 461H and the front side wall 481H on the entire outer periphery, so that air can be prevented from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the sound effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary protrusions that protrude to the front side beyond the wire pressing protrusion 484 at a position sandwiching the wiring pressing protrusion 484 on the left and right with an interval capable of passing through the speaker connection line 453. 481Ha.

The auxiliary protrusion 481Ha is a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being shifted when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha have a tapered shape that expands to the left and right toward the front side (front end side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 45 is formed.
Even if 3 comes off from the wiring passage concave portion 464 and shifts right and left, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembling. In the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 in a front view, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle. The recessed portion is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 483
a from the back side of the main body frame 14a, the joint fastening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1
4e, and is inserted through the joint fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102).
0, and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

In other words, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the rear side of the main body frame 14a by the screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, so that the screw is tightened. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex part 484 is provided along the upper edge of the rear side plate of the main body part 481 and is formed to have a width to be fitted into the wiring passing concave part 464, and has a depth greater than the depth of the wiring passing concave part 464. The speaker connection line 453 is provided with a projecting length slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covering portion of the covering portion of the speaker connecting line 453.

That is, the speaker connection line 4 is inserted into the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion 464.
By passing through 53, the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 is compressed, and a gap is generated between the speaker connection line 453 and the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion 464. Can be prevented. As a result, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the sound effect is reduced due to sound leakage from an opening through which the sound passes.

The light passing through hole 485 is provided for the LED 14e disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 is a through-hole through which light emitted from the lens 2 toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passage through-hole 485 is formed from a circular opening having a size surrounding one LED. The light-passing through-hole 465 is a through-hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light-passing through-hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape increases toward the front side, and is assembled (see FIG. 100). ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming rib 487 is formed at the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, abuts each other without any gap in front and rear, and is formed in a plurality of spaces formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. These are ribs forming a curved passage (see FIG. 123) that bends twice. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, and is connected to the front side wall portion 481H.
Are formed at the front and rear ends and the surface position. That is, the rear side end of the passage forming rib 487 is
1 is connected to the rear side plate. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed such that a front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and at that time, a compression force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, a compressive force toward the rear side is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the compressive force causes the passage forming rib 4
67 and 487 close the gap therebetween while being elastically deformed in the front-rear direction (FIG. 124 (b)).
reference).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is low and the passage-forming rib 487 may bend right and left, the compressive force does not work well, and the gap may not be able to be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is reduced by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (further, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), (Strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be.

The rear recess 491 is formed in a shape that is inverted from the front recess 471 in the front-rear direction, and forms an opening in cooperation with the front recess 471. The opening is formed so as to surround the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly outward from the outer shape). It is arranged at a position surrounding the outer shape.

FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is the rear assembly 48.
0 is a front view. In FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), in order to facilitate understanding,
The speaker connection line 453 is shown by imaginary lines, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 that are arranged to face each other are shown with the opposing surfaces facing toward the front of the drawing. That is, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are obtained by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the center of the paper surface. Can be matched. That is, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e can be brought into contact with the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the base body 46 of the front assembly 460 is provided inside the speaker assembly 450.
An acoustic room is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, with the acoustic chamber as a base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path of the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 extends toward the distal end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and alternately move up and down toward the left side. Rib portions 467a, 467b arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment)
, 467c, 467d, and 467e.

By forming the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the ribs 467 can be assembled.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, and each rib portion 487a,
Wiring can be prevented from being sandwiched between the wirings 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

Each of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body 461 and the rear side wall 461H, so that each of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d.
, 467e can enhance the rigidity of the main body 461.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e form a bent passage for passing the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451 is used.
In this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels while avoiding the passage-forming ribs 467, while the vibration wave generated from the vibration proceeds linearly.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is applied to the left side (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is arranged on the L side and is closest to the left and right direction (for example, the rib portion 467b) is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (the arrow L and U directions).

On the other hand, after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws is disposed on the left side (arrow L side) and is closest to the rib portion (for example, in the left-right direction). When the rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (the direction of the arrow L, D).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4
When the 67e is arranged alternately up and down, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent up and down, and the traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws is secured longer than the left and right width of the space. can do.

Thereby, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed by the pair of concave portions 471, 491, and suppress the generation of the standing wave due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 467 is performed by the concave portions 462 and 463b.
Can also be caused. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted to the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 disposed immediately near the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). (Directions of arrows L and U).

Therefore, the concave portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect obtained at the time of assembly.

As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming rib 487 is provided with the wiring pressing convex portion 4 for holding down the wiring.
The ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, and 4 are formed on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to 84 and are arranged at a plurality of positions (five in this embodiment) alternately up and down toward the left side.
87d and 487e.

Since the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e are connected to the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H, the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d.
, 487e can enhance the rigidity of the main body 481.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the front assembly 4
The ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of the 60 are formed in a shape that matches in the front-rear direction, and are opposed to each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).

The operation of each of the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e is similar to the operation of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 487 is performed by the concave portions 482 and 483b.
Can also be caused. That is, the vibration wave Ws is moved to the upper left between the concave portion 482 disposed immediately adjacent to the rear concave portion 491 and the concave portion 483b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). Direction (arrows L and U). Therefore, the concave portion 48
2,483b also has an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect obtained at the time of assembly.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced in vertical width as the distance from the speaker 451 is increased, and is once narrowed at a position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are vertically arranged. Further, the vertical width is increased at once at a position further away from the speaker 451, and thereafter communicates with the opening formed by the concave portions 471, 491. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the speaker 451
Is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, so that the vibration wave Ws (voice) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is
In order to find an exit, the vehicle advances to the tip side main body 461T, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. Tip side main body 4
The vibration wave Ws (sound) reaching 61T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420 in this order, and then the speaker set. The sound is emitted outside the three-dimensional body 450R (outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the rear part of the speaker 451 is formed by the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and the recess 47.
The sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is directly connected to the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening and the opening 424 (refer to FIG. 120) formed by the first and the 491. It is possible to reproduce and output with high sound quality without being stuck.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase, and converts the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 into the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451. It is possible to emit sound from the opening formed by the above. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 450 does not cancel out by the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it is possible to amplify the heavy bass. This allows
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can perform an effect full of presence,
It is possible to enhance the interest and excitement of the player for the game.

In this embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is disposed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the bass output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is transmitted to the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). Thereby, the effect of the game by the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side can be appropriately provided to the player playing the game on the front side of the front frame 14.

Tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) is performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450,
This can be performed by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
The path of the vibration wave Ws is defined as a path that avoids each of the 0 rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e. Therefore, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by individually setting the arrangement of the ribs 7d and 467e and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e and the length of the vertical extension.

In the present embodiment, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 4
67d, 467e and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487 of the rear assembly 480.
In addition to the above objects, d and 487e are disposed at portions where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 can be reinforced. The front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be prevented from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed.

Further, in the assembled state, the extension plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 125A).
7c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screws being screwed into the fastening portions 468, the extension plates 463, 48 are provided.
A screw is screwed into a fastening portion 419 that is inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a of the third and third rib portions 467c and 4c when the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed.
87c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other to form the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48.
0 can be prevented. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
The front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by 7d.

In addition, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to upper ends of the concave portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portions 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e are aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is connected to the upper side plate member. Before the speaker assembly 45e is fastened and fixed, the speaker assembly 45
The 0 concave portions 462 and 482 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, the concave portion 462
, 482, an upward load is applied from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

For this reason, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. In the present embodiment, since the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462 and 482, the recessed portion is formed from the fastening portion 14e1. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482, and to improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482.

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is considered. It can be easily suppressed.

In such an illegal act, a wire, a piano wire or the like is illegally penetrated into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 includes the front recess 471. In addition to the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 is formed in a closed box shape. The gap between the openings formed by the wiring pressing projections 484 is closed by the speaker connection lines 453. Therefore, when wires, piano wires, and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly is passed through an opening other than the portion into which the wire has entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of wire, piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 through the upper side plate member 14e and extending the tip from 450.

In addition, since the through-hole formed as an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes through the upper side plate member 14e is disposed near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speaker 451, a wire or a piano wire is provided. For example, the distance between the front recess 471 and the opening formed by the rear recess 491 where the speaker and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 can be increased.

Therefore, even when such misconduct is performed, the success rate of the misconduct can be reduced, and it is easy to prevent the occurrence of the wrongful profit.

FIG. 124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a). FIG. 124 (a) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is the arrow CXXI in FIG. 124 (a).
FIG. 14 is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the Vd direction. FIG. 124 (a)
124) and FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, whereas the speaker connection line 453 is not illustrated in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c). .

As shown enlarged in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (the lower surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that is inclined inward toward the rear side. The outer side surface 481Ho of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 124 (b)
The upper surface) has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the rear side and has an inner surface 461H.
It is shaped to fit with i in the assembled state. Thereby, the work efficiency of the operation of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front end of the rib 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib 487c before the assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib 487c receives a compressive load from the rib 467c and is elastically deformed. Since a compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c due to the restoring force generated by the elastic deformation, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed so as to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the contacting rib portions.

As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body 461M has a shorter front-to-rear dimension than the base main body 461B and the distal main body 461T. Therefore, the tip side main body 46
As compared with 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass in the intermediate main body 461M can be reduced (narrowed). Thereby, the sound effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the distal end side main body portion 461 </ b> T disposed above the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 is inside the intermediate main body portion 461 </ b> M. It is largely secured in such a manner as to bulge in the front-rear direction compared to the space. Thereby, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal-side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal-side main body portion 461T and released at a low speed. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved, for example, it is possible to make the bass sound easier to hear by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125 (a) shows the front assembly 46 along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124 (a).
0, rear assembly 480, upper frame member 410, main body frame 14a, and upper side plate member 14e. FIG. 125 (b) is a front assembly 460 along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is a partial sectional view of the side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e.

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is provided with a through hole 463a,
483a is fastened and fixed to fastening portion 419, so that front assembly 460 is formed.
, The rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are sandwiched between the main assembly frame 14a and the main assembly frame 14a.
That is, by disposing the enlarged rib 419a at a surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , The front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at a position below the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is placed at a position above the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the concave portions 462 and 482 of 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (pass through the recessed portions 462, 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), so that the front assembly 460 is formed.
The upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e are configured to be fastened and fixed without the intermediary of the rear assembly 480.

The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is attached to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

In the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is provided inside the concave portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the rear side is provided inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is
482 (a portion extending toward the front side is disposed inside).

In the present embodiment, since the left and right separate speakers 451 are provided in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, the other speaker assemblies 450R and 450L on the other side are provided.
It is possible to avoid a collision with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 provided in the 450L, and to reproduce the sound with high quality as a transparent sound without blocking the reproduced sound.

In the present embodiment, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper plate member 14e abut on the upper surface of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125A). In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper plate member 14e protrudes toward the front side at a portion arranged to face the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480, The projecting portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut on each other in the front-rear direction. That is,
The speaker assembly 450 does not abut (stick) on the entire surface of the upper side plate member 14 e, but has a contact state in which the speaker assembly 450 makes line contact particularly at the lower end.

In this case, the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and contacting the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, a portion projecting from the upper plate member 14e and abutting on the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin).
However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be provided, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, and the like. By using these metals, sound can be made thicker.

Further, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (porcelain), etc. are applicable. When these members are used, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Regarding the shape, it may be protruded in a long plate shape, may be protruded in a spike shape, or may be protruded in a rounded dot shape. Further, the present invention is not limited to the case where the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

Note that the arrangement of the portion functioning as the above-described insulator is determined by the speaker assembly 45.
It is not limited to the back surface of the lower end of 0. For example, the back of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the back of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the speaker assembly 4
It may be 50 sides or front.

For example, when it is arranged on the back surface of the upper end, the member functioning as an insulator is formed in a tubular shape, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted. The positioning may be performed by the following. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as the insulator can be eliminated, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function as the insulator by tightening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The sound effect can be adjusted by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (load applied to each other).

At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 can be connected to the screw inserted into the connection hole 469 (see FIG. 123 (a)) or the connection hole 469.
And a screw inserted into a through hole provided at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left and right position where the through hole is disposed, the through hole being provided on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left and right direction and having the same shape as that of FIG. As a result, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from being detached from the upper side plate member 14e.

The upper frame member 410 is fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with respect to the upper frame member 41.
Reference numeral 0 denotes a fastening portion 14e1 (FIG. 1) of the upper side plate member 14e other than the screw inserted into the through hole 483a.
00) is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) to be fastened and fixed. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the load is not applied to the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fastening the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, The upper frame member 410 can be prevented from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (adjusting the fastening condition).

In addition, the same as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above,
The same can be said for the relationship with the main body frame 14a which is connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In addition, FIG.
(B) shows the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed.

First, in order to describe a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a,
12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, a left front support portion 12 a and a left rear support portion 12 b are separated from each other in order to support the left end of the game board 13. Will be arranged.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the left front front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that is inclined rearward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13. A flat surface 12a2 extending leftward and rightward from the left end is formed. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 abut on each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b has an outer shape formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, a front end surface formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a center portion opened in a cup shape. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside and a portion projecting from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in such a manner that the elastic support portion 12b1 projects toward the front side as it goes to the left in a natural length state. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 cooperates with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a,
A tapered shape is formed that expands to the side (rightward) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction. Thereby, the workability at the time of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 by the worker can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIGS. 128 (a) and 128 (b) show the CXXVIIIa-CXXV of FIG. 127 (b).
129 (a) and FIG. 129 (b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the board support apparatus 600 and the game board 13, respectively. It is. In FIGS. 128 and 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 whose left end has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12 is illustrated. 128 (b) and FIG. 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and in FIG. 129 (b), the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding,
Some configurations of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 are omitted from the drawing.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, and the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent.
Is slid between the left front support portion 12a and the left rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated about an axis directed in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the near side is provided. Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 12
Since a1 is formed, a range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other.
Can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the left end portion of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a
The game board 13 is rotated so as to be close to the inner frame 12 about the back side edge of the game board 1 and the contact position between the front face of the game board 13). In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted by the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
2c. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction with an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 90).
The guide rib 1 supports the game board 13 from below and has a front upper end portion cut as an inclined surface.
A plurality of 2c1 are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in a top view. Each time, the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1, so that the game board 13 can ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side so that the rotation of the game board 13 can proceed without delay. . Therefore, the workability of the operation of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game store. This prevents the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rear inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation.
The workability when assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved without depending on the rear inclination of 013.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at the same inclination angle as the rear inclination at the time of setting the game store. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 rides
The inclined surface of 2c1 can be made horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 arranged vertically and released in a later-described state, and the rear face of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the released state, the board supporting device 600 is configured such that the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 (the portion disposed on the front side from the position where the game board 13 is fixed) are provided on the game board 13.
, The workability of assembling the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 to the rear side, a load is applied to the claw member 640 after the rotation via the game board 13, and the board support device 60
0 changes to a fixed state described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, the game board 13
When the is fixed, the upper and lower board support devices 600 change their states almost simultaneously.

In addition, the game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c, and the vertical position is regulated. FIG. 129 (a
As shown in FIG. 129 and FIG. 129 (b), the board supporting device 600 does not contact the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board supporting apparatus 600 (the game board 13 is It is not pushed up by the support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Accordingly, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably detached with the state change of the board supporting device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 is pushed to the back side, the game board 13 is rotating with the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum.
The force required to apply a load to zero can be reduced by the long width of the game board 13, and even a weak operator can attach the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the game board 13 has its left end portion set to the left front support portion 12a.
And two upper and lower portions by the left end rear support portion 12b (see FIG. 126).
When the right end of the game board 13 is insufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in a fixed state), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. Even if there is, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed by the reaction to push the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12 to close it. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board supporting device 600 from being changed by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 to close the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

When the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by a support portion 12a.
, 12b, the right end is fixed by the board supporting device 600, and the lower end is restricted in the vertical position by the support bottom 12c.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13
Is connected to various members provided on the game board 13 and wiring connected to various devices, and is supported by the game board 13 so as to be changeable in a plane direction of the game board 13. A floating connector 13a and a receiving connector 12d which is provided on the inner frame 12 near the lower board support device 600 and to which wiring connected to the control board unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back surface are provided. They are connected in the direction of rotation of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d are arranged in a posture inclined in such a manner that the connection direction is directed in a direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 is provided with a board supporting device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower members are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. In addition, since the pair of upper and lower board supporting devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, one board supporting device 600 will be described, and description of the other board supporting device 600 will be omitted.

130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board supporting device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front perspective of the board supporting device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. Note that FIG.
(A) and FIG. 130 (b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the game board 1 using the board support device 600.
3 illustrates a release state in which the fixing of 3 is released. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board supporting device 600. As shown in FIG. 132 and FIG.
Reference numeral 0 denotes a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in a top view, a pre-rotation claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted through and fixed to the frame member 610, and its rotation. A regulating front claw member 630 rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 which is disposed on the front side of the front claw member 620 and inserted through and fixed to the front claw member 620; The post-rotation claw member 6 rotatably supported by the third shaft member P63 inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620
And 40 mainly.

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are disposed to face left and right. A pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line in the plate portion 611a, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612; , On the rear side of the support hole 612, along an arc centered on the support hole 612.
11a, an arcuate recess 614 recessed from below, and a plate 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612.
A rod-shaped regulating rod 615 inserted and fixed to the inner frame 1a is screwed into the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). And a pair of fixing plates 616 that are fastened and fixed to the main body.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
Is formed as a columnar metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the base end side of the insertion, inserted into the support hole 612, and then pressed at the end at the insertion end to form the support hole 612.
Fixed to The fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same as those of the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P.
63 is the same, and the description is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 is a main body plate portion 621 in which a sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 which are formed in a straight line through the plate portion 621a opposed to the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the front upper corner of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed;
and a pair of support holes 624 which are formed in a straight line on the rear side of the hole a and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, at the same time, the pre-regulation claw member 63
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the 0 supported hole 632, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624.
At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.
Is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is disposed to face left and right, and is a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front and rear direction.
And a pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view with an extended portion 621a2 extending vertically from the front end of the long portion 621a1, and an upper edge of the plate portion 621a is connected. A connecting plate portion 621b to be fixed; a rear-side extension plate 621c extending downward from the rear end of the connecting plate portion 621b by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b; Part 621a
2, a hanging back plate portion 621d extending perpendicular to the plate portion 621a toward the opposite plate portion 621a, and a hanging back plate portion 621d extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d. And a front-side extension plate 621e that extends inclining to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be perpendicular to each other.

The rear-side extension plate 621c is arranged so that the lower surface thereof can contact the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate 611 (see FIG. 134A). By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb is moved to the main body plate portion 611.
Begin to abut.

Thus, when the worker starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the operation is completed, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, while the force required at the start of pushing is reduced, the momentum of the rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in an assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back of the hanging back plate 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction to bring the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the hanging back plate 621d close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction to separate the lower end of the claw member 640 from the rear side wall of the main body plate 611 after the rotation.

The pre-regulation claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate 631 formed by bending the sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle to form a letter shape in a side view, and is disposed to face left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 which are formed in a straight line in the plate portion 631a to be formed, and which are supported by the second shaft member P62, and inclined forward from the lower end portion of the front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 633 that is extended by extension, and a curved surface 634 that is curved as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion that is arranged to face the front frame 14, and
Is the portion that comes closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when is set to the release state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), and thereby restricts a free posture change of the pre-regulating claw member 630.

The post-rotation claw member 640 is a body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the body plate portion 641 and is disposed to face left and right. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b connecting the pair of supported holes 642 and the pair of plates 641a, which are formed in a straight line through the plate 641a and connected to the third shaft member P63. And an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a part that contacts the back side of the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-back position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in an unlocked state (see FIG. 129 (a)), the inclined extension plate 643 has a tilt angle that makes contact with the back surface of the game board 13. It is formed.

FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the process in which the board supporting device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in time series. Further, FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135
In (b), the arrangement of the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged close to the board supporting device 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board supporting device 600 are shown by imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 134 (a), the released state of the board supporting device 600 is shown, and in FIG. 135 (b),
The fixed state of the board support device 600 is shown in each figure. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed immediately behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). Thus, the simple operation of pushing the claw member 640 after rotation to the rear side via the game board 13 causes the claw member 640 after rotation to rotate too much about the first shaft member P61 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61). Accordingly, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state after the rotation.

Here, the biasing force in the direction approaching the hanging back plate portion 621d is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 by the torsion spring NBa as described above. Therefore, when other external force does not act, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand,
When the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 abuts on the restriction bar 615, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is restricted.

That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the claw member 6 before rotation is rotated.
20, the front side on which the extending portion 621a2 is disposed is tilted, while the front side of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises in a manner separated from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulating rod 615 is located on the front side of the curved surface 634, and the second shaft member P
While contacting the resistance portion 634a that intersects the circle centered at 62 (from FIG.
Until 5 (a)), the front-side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises with the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is disposed to face the regulating rod 615,
When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction around the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 side of the inclined extension plate 633. The distal end portion is disposed close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (from FIG. 135 (a) to FIG. 135).
(B)).

The angle range in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and moves (from FIG. 134A to FIG. 135A
In the range ()), even if a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 in a direction in which the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted, the operation is performed by the downward load. At this time, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 becomes a posture change in the direction facing the downward load (posture change in the rising direction), so that the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the pre-regulation claw member against the downward load. The posture change of 630 is regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 is in contact with the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is regulated by the game board 13 while the game board 13 is not pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630, so that the pre-rotation claw member 620 is formed.
Can be prevented from rotating. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 provided on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship in which the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the inclined extension plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connection plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), the game board 13 abuts on the back surface of the rear-side extension board 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt), the rear-side extension board is used. 621c
Between the game board 13 and the game board 13. Thereby, the game board 1 in the state of FIG.
3 can be prevented from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139) described below applies a load to the game board 13,
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side due to the reaction.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in a state where the board surface supporting device 600 is released and the front claw member 620 is rotated by a load from the front frame 14, the front frame 14 is disposed on the front frame 14. Depending on the state of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630, the case where the board supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state, the case where the board supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state, and is stable at a halfway angle May occur.

The board supporting device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle, and in this state, the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89)
Can be closed, the distance between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 becomes short, which may hinder the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 due to a load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multi-function disposed on the front frame 14 is adopted. When the cover member 171 contacts the pre-regulation claw member 630, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, it is possible to remind the clerk who has performed the operation of closing the front frame 14 that the board support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

If the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board support device 600 is fixed, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the pre-regulation claw Depending on the state of the contact of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the case where the board supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state and the case where the board supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stabilized at a halfway angle occur (only, The board supporting device 600 reaches a fixed state).

For this reason, in this embodiment, when the front frame 14 is set to the closed position, the multifunctional cover member 171 extends to a position where the multifunctional cover member 171 can come into contact with the pre-regulation claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the restriction bar 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear side extension plate 621 c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13. There is no.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the front end of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. I have.

Thereby, when the game board 13 is arranged at the position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the clerk pushes the game board 13 slightly less, and the game board 13
The case where the front frame 14 is not closed until the case where the front frame 14 is stably installed is resolved. In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 is
When a load is applied to the panel support device 600, the load can change the board supporting device 600 to a fixed state.

Accordingly, the workability of the operation of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged on the board support device 600 in the released state such that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact with each other (FIG. 1).
34 (a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the back side. That is, the pawl member 640 after the rotation is displaced by the game board 13, and the pawl member 620 before the rotation is accordingly rotated, thereby changing the board surface support device 600 to the fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the state of the board supporting device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 abut in the front-rear direction. In this state, the game board 13
Is moved (tilted) to the front side while moving (tilting) while pushing down the hanging back plate portion 621d. Therefore, the torsion spring NBb provided to the pawl member 620 before rotation via the claw member 640 after rotation. Is applied as resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the game board 13
Can be suppressed from moving (tilting) near the upper end of the front side.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is arranged to face the restriction rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates, the first shaft member P61 is centered. The non-resistance portion 634b abuts on the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the circular arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

Thereby, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b),
The possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves forward (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is connected to the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG.
135 (b), a curved surface is formed in which the radius centered on the second shaft member P62 gradually increases toward the portion contacting the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b).

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed rearward by the multifunctional cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), and the pre-rotation claw member 620 is rotated, so that the second shaft member P62 is rotated.
Is displaced, the non-resistance portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are separated for a moment. Therefore, the resistance given to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the regulation bar 615 is reduced for a moment, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is vigorously brought close to the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. The state changes to the state shown in FIG.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 135B, the dimensional relationship is such that the multi-function cover member 171 is separated from the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Also, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position immediately before the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 can be moved to the front claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. , And then the board support device 600 can be fixed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, in a state in which the back side surface of the rear side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 (For example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the board is to be replaced, the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed). Thus, the working efficiency of the worker can be improved.

When the board supporting device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633 is used.
To the upper front side to rotate the pre-regulation claw member 630 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 6
15 is not in contact with), it is possible to rotate the pre-regulation claw member 630 with a light force,
By continuing the rotation as it is, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released in a state where the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed to the front side by the displaced rotating claw member 640 (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is released.

Further, as shown in FIG. 129 (a) and FIG. 134 (a), in the released state,
3 is in contact with the lower surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. This can eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 falls to the front side when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

Note that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can perform an operation of switching between a released state and a fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to the state change of the board support apparatus 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support apparatus 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are shifted up and down. In addition, there is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 64 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released.
0 does not match. In other words, as shown in FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), compared to the amount by which the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced, the pre-rotation claw member 6 supporting the game board 13 is displaced.
20 and the amount by which the claw member 640 is displaced after rotation is smaller.

Accordingly, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (a degree that the pre-regulation claw member 630 is restricted from being returned by the restriction bar 615), Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front and rear positions of the game board 13 at the positions supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

In addition, the same effect is produced because the post-rotation claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation claw member 620. That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the release state (FIG. 13)
4 (a), the post-rotation claw member 640 can be displaced in a direction to increase the angle between the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBb. It is said.

Therefore, the amount of displacement of the game board 13 pushed out by the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed as compared with the amount of displacement of the claw member 620 before rotation, so that the game board at a position supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be suppressed. 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. Thereby, the game board 1
3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, a relationship between the board supporting device 600 disposed below and the front frame 14 will be described. FIGS. 136 to 139 show the CXXXVI- of FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine 8010 in the CXXXVI line. 136 to 139 show the front frame 14 in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14.

In FIG. 136, the released state of the board supporting device 600 is shown, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board supporting apparatus 600 is shown, and in FIG. 138, the board supporting apparatus 600 is shifted from the released state to the fixed state by a predetermined angle (about 25 °). 139) The rotated state is shown in FIG. 139 in a state immediately before the board supporting device 600 is fixed, and the thickness of the game board 13 supported by the board supporting device 600 is shown by imaginary lines. Is done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the board supporting device 600 and the opening / closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, FIGS.
138 and 139 are indicated by imaginary lines in FIG. 138 and FIG. 139.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board support device 600 is released, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing control unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board supporting device 600, the game board 13
The front frame 14 is allowed to be closed in a state in which the front frame 14 is removed, but in a state in which the game board 13 is arranged, the closing of the front frame 14 is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board supporting device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the board supporting device 600 is avoided. . In addition, since the game board 13 is disposed on the back side as compared with the disposition of the board support device 600 in the released state, interference between the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing control unit 159 is provided. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board supporting device 600, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed state by a predetermined angle, the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (FIG. 1).
38), the open / close restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a rearward load to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is performed by the action of the regulating rod 615. (Fig. 138 clockwise) and the rotation direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (Fig. 138).
The direction opposite to the counterclockwise direction makes the reaction force excessive, so that it is difficult with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 138, the closing of the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, in the state where the game board 13 is provided, the front lower end of the game board 13 may abut on the rear side extension plate 621c in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139) when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before the fixed state, the opening / closing control unit 159 And the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes.

Further, in this state, when it is intended to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a rearward load to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is performed by the action of the regulating rod 615. The direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the claw member 630 before regulation (FIG. 13)
(8 counterclockwise direction) does not become the opposite direction, and it is easy to push in with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 135 (a)).

Accordingly, in the state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the claw member 630 before regulation is pushed through the opening / closing regulating section 159, and the board supporting device 600
Can be fixed, so that the front frame 14 can be closed.

FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member that closes the back of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball firing unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b).
Is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a. FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143 (a) illustrates a state where the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) illustrates a state where the ball receiving member 731 is reversed after being disassembled. . That is, in FIG. 143 (b),
The back side of only the ball receiving member 731 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a includes a base member 710 formed of metal or die-cast, and a base member 711 centered on the right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. A closed state in which the front of the base member 710 is partially covered (see FIG. 142A) and an open state in which the front of the base member 710 is opened (see FIG.
a) A ball feeder 720 having a cover member 721 which is rotatably supported between (a) and (b).
And mainly comprising.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721, is locked by a hook or the like that elastically deforms to the base member 710, is provided on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of a synthetic resin or the like. In order to regulate the attitude of the firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, the firing rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 hit by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731 A fastening portion 716 in which a screw that is cylindrically protruded toward the front side and that fastens and fixes the ball receiving member 731 is screwed into an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges straightly from the base member 710 to the front side; , And a plurality of positioning projections 719.

The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 into which the bar-shaped portion 722 is inserted at the right corner, and a locking portion 7 formed to be able to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction.
13, a protruding portion 714 protruding toward the front side in the vicinity of the right side of the locking portion 713, and opposed to the suction force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142A). And a defect determination convex portion 715 that is protruded.

The protrusion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A), and is located on the left side of the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. An opposing plane 714a formed opposite to the side surface 724c and formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and an inclined surface that is opposite to the opposing plane 714a and that is inclined rightward toward the back side. And a surface 714b.

When the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination convex portion 715 does not abut on the attraction force generation solenoid 741, but loosens the attraction force generation solenoid 741 ( In a state of being floated from the cover member 721, the cover member 721 is formed at a protruding height which abuts and restricts rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening force of the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosened, and to form a case in which the cover member 721 cannot be closed so that the sales force is applied to the clerk. It can be noticed that the fastening of the generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before the malfunction of the ball firing unit 112a occurs, repair (fixing the suction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed beforehand.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported by the base member 711,
Switching controlled to change the state between a restricted state in which the ball P8 entering the inside of the cover member 721 flows down and a permitted state in which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) is allowed to flow down to the firing rail 730. And an apparatus 740.

The cover member 721 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material into a cup shape with the back side (the front side in the drawing in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) opened, and a pair of loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. , A hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the right and left opposite sides of the bar portion 722, and a ball P at a position displaced toward the bar portion 722 from the hook portion 723.
8 (see FIG. 144) is disposed in such a manner that the ball passage opening 724 is sized to be able to pass through and is drilled in the front-rear direction, and projects slightly upward from the lower edge of the inner end of the ball passage opening 724. A cutting metal member 725, and a shaft rod portion 72 that supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.
6 is mainly provided.

The switching device 740 includes a suction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member having one end loosely fitted to the shaft bar portion 726.
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its attitude depending on whether or not a magnetic force is generated, and a sheet metal member that is locked on the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 A metal plate 743, a guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the ball guide arm member 742, is disposed below the ball passage opening 724, and is inclined downwardly away from the ball passage opening 724, and upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744. The ball P8 is extended by an interval capable of accommodating the ball P8.
And a regulating projection 745 projecting toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane perpendicular to the plane 6.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided, and the falling plate portion 724 that is inclined downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotational radial direction.
a, a rib portion 724b which is disposed above the flow-down plate portion 724a and is extended downward in a rib shape from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724, and the inclined front end surface descends and slopes toward the back side;
A left inner side surface 724 connected to the left end of the falling plate portion 724a and having a surface formed along the vertical direction.
c). With these configurations, the sphere P8 that has flowed into the sphere passage opening 724 flows downward and to the right.

When the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A), the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b, and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, the ball P8
Flows down in such a manner as to be separated from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction.
While arranging in such a manner as to protrude inside the ball passage opening 724, it is possible to prevent the ball P8 from hitting the cutting metal member 725.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member extending from the intermediate position of the base member 710 so as to incline upward toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, a ball P8 (FIG. 14)
4) is disposed at an interval shorter than the diameter of the ball receiving member 731.

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 and the long direction are parallel and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. Through hole 731a formed as a long hole along the direction and for passing the fastening screw
Like the bulging portion 716a, the bulging portion 716a is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction), and has a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and the bulging portion 716a. A regulating groove 731b formed with a groove depth slightly larger than the protruding height.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716, the ball receiving member 731 is swollen by the bulging portion 71.
6a can be slid along the straight line in which the sphere P8 bulges, and thereby the sphere P8 (FIG. 14)
4) (the distance from the plunger 702). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing intensity of the ball P 81 (the operation handle 51
(See FIG. 86) can be easily adjusted.
In addition, since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the attitude of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and extends diagonally upward and to the left; Mounting plate portions 730b and 730c hanging from front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a;
Ob and 730c are attached to the base member 710 with screws inserted into a plurality of (two in this embodiment) attachment holes 732.

Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c, and a sound or a vibration generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball is provided. Is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and is provided with a ball P8 (see FIG. 146 (b)).
)) To guide the ball P8 upward by contacting the front and rear two places on the peripheral surface thereof.

FIG. 144 (a) to FIG. 144 (c) are front views of the sphere launching unit 112a showing a sphere sending state by the sphere feeding device 720 in a time series. 144 (a) to FIG.
In (c), the illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

144 (a), the switching device 740 is in the regulated state (the state in which the supply of power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity), as shown in FIG. 144 (a). In the case of, the regulating protrusion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, and abuts on the game ball P <b> 8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which power is supplied to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protrusion 745. Retreats above the sphere, and the regulation of the downward flow of the sphere P8 is released, whereby the sphere P8 flows above the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the ball P <b> 8 abuts on the front side wall of the base member 711, whereby further downward flow is regulated, and the ball P <b> 8 stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), when the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, the ball P8 riding on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not contact the front side wall of the base member 711. Is done. Thus, the ball P8 is guided to the rear side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744, and is guided to the firing rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the firing rail 730 one by one. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a ball stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725 a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 is inserted and a falling plate portion 724 a. A lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and a notch with a sharp acute end formed between the lower blade portion 725b and the same plate as the base plate of the lower blade portion 725b. Blade section 72 extending from
5c.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip is inclined more rearward than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side protrudes above the falling plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the base end (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the base end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape in a front view.

The cut between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to the ball. Then, referring to FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, the sphere P
A description will be given of how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the yarn 8 and is advanced.

FIG. 146 (a) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG.
FIG. 147 (a) is a front view of the sphere launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front view of the sphere launching unit 112a when viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb at 46 (a). FIG. 148 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the yarn Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG.
It is a partial front view of 12a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62. 146 and FIG.
In FIG. 7, illustration of some components of the ball firing unit 112a is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the sphere P guided to the firing rail 730
8 stays in contact with the left lower edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)), and from this state, a current flows through the firing solenoid 701 and the plunger 702 vigorously projects. Then, a firing force is applied to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the firing rail 730 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

Here, the ball P8 is struck while one end of the thread Y8 is fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. It has been known that the player can loosen the ball P8 to repeatedly detect the ball P8 at the winning opening.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 is configured to be cut using the momentum of the firing of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is arranged at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the falling plate portion 724a in such a manner that the yarn Y8 is moved closer to the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the firing rail 730 passes under the falling plate portion 724a.
When the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the rolling ball P8, the middle portion of the yarn Y8 moves along the upper surface of the falling plate portion 724a, so that the upper edge of the yarn Y8 protruding above the falling plate portion 724a. It enters under the portion 725c, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

While the player holds the end (the other end) on the near side of the thread Y8, a load accompanying the firing of the ball P8 is applied to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). Thus, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

When the firing strength of the ball P8 is low, there is a possibility that the yarn Y8 is not cut due to insufficient tensile force, but in this case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area, It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the yarn Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of an improper act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the rendering operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit 1000. The main difference between the gaming board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the gaming board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operation device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. Are substantially the same.

In the upper frame portion of the center frame 86, a rendering operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is provided. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and an advance / retreat operation unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100.

The reciprocating operation unit 900 raises and lowers the petal operating device 800 up and down by the driving force of the driving motor 921 (the reciprocating operation, that is, the operation of moving inward of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the third operation). The operation includes at least one of an operation of retreating to the outside of the display area of the symbol display device 81), and a petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other end is connected to the other end. Of the arm gear 9 and the end of the arm gear 9
A driving arm 910 that rotates by transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 921 via the driving motor 24, and a driving motor 92 that generates a driving force for driving the driving arm 910.
1, a transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 921 to the driving arm member 910, and sliding in the left and right direction in conjunction with the turning operation of the driving arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930, a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal operation device on the right and left opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910. And a driven arm member 950 in the form of a long plate that connects the driven members 800 to each other.

Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 shows the petal operating device 80.
0 is a front view, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. In FIG. 154, the supporting substrate 801 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

The petal operating device 800 is configured such that a member such as a petal 802 is supported on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is disposed on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the drawing. And a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position on the right side of the upper end in the central body portion of the supporting base material 801, and a driving shaft of the central motor 804 is moved forward through a small gap formed in the supporting base material 801. A first gear 804 </ b> G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

An opening 8 is provided at a position slightly lower left of the center motor 804 in the center body portion of the support base material 801.
01P is pierced, disposed to the right of the opening 801P, and extended rearward into a pair of cylinders.
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, a detection arc plate 88 of a loose fitting device 880 described later is used.
Donut-shaped recess 801D recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass
(See FIG. 152) is formed.

The center motor 804 of the supporting substrate 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the center motor 804 is fixed.
Below this, an oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long, generally elliptical area in the center and cover the peripheral area from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion forming an upper end region, and a substantially U-shaped lower portion forming a region below the upper portion.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 has a shape that slightly extends up and down as a whole, but since the petal operation device 800 is arranged to be movable up and down as described later,
The operating space can be reduced by forming the support base 801 into a vertically long shape rather than a left and right long shape.

At this time, the center motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively concentrically arranged so as to be overlapped with the position of the opening 801P as will be described later.
Since it is linked to (links to) G, it can be placed at any position on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G as long as they do not interfere with each other. They are arranged on the right side via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a slightly inclined position toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an interval between the supporting base material 801 and the driving arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the supporting base material 801 from being increased, and the driving base arm member 910 is connected to the supporting base material 801 via the driving arm member 910. Thus, the driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the supporting base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In FIGS. 155 and 156, the support base 801 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin molded to imitate the shape of one of five petals separated from each other, which constitute a flower of a hibiscus in a flowering state as a whole. And a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back side.

FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arc-shaped front shape that extends in the radial direction in the arrangement state, and has a shape that gradually swells forward from the center to the outer periphery (FIG. 15).
4).

Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the periphery thereof has an irregular shape when viewed from the front. The five petals 802 are not strictly identical in shape to each other, but are slightly similar in unevenness and the like, but are formed in approximately the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge is formed so that the specific color (red) is dark without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape and has a screw hole inside at two locations, that is, the vicinity of the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and the radial center portion. I have.

The petals 802 are located behind the rear side 802a arranged on the rounded tip side (counterclockwise side in front view, right side in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where they are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803.
The front side portion 802b arranged from 2a to the tip sharp side (clockwise in front view, left side in FIG. 157 (a) on the paper) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side 802b is closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side 802a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one side, and the rear side 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other side. Petals 802 are arranged so as to gather toward the same center with the tip on the inner peripheral side.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced back and forth, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802 at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175).
b can be superimposed on the front and back, so that the difference (size difference) in the shape of the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) is remarkable. be able to.

The five petals 802 have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear surface having a circular opening S1 at the center as a whole in the arrangement state (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat member 803 is provided with the five petals 8 described above.
02, each of which is a long plate-shaped resin member separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending in a substantially rectangular shape from the center to the outer peripheral side in the arrangement state, and further has an outer peripheral edge portion extending forward.

Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arrangement state (near the inner circumference).
, A pair of screw-in portions 803S that extend rearward in a cylindrical shape and have screw holes inside are integrally formed at positions separated in the circumferential direction (the short direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portions 803S are formed so as to be located substantially on both side walls in the circumferential direction (transverse direction) of each flat plate member 803. Further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along portions on both side walls of the flat plate member 803. Slide ribs 803a, which are perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extend rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape, extend to both sides along a surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw portion 803S. Thus, it is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the threaded portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has screw insertion holes inside at two locations corresponding to the screw-in portions 802S of the petals 802, respectively.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat member 803 has a corresponding screw-in portion 8 of the corresponding petal 802.
02S is abutted from the front, and a screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is fixed to the corresponding petal 802.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are appropriately referred to. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slit member 810 is disposed behind the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-like member having a similar front shape in which five similar shaped portions are annularly continuous, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the center. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

156 will be described again. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape at the front and rear at two adjacent locations among five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and at the middle one of the three locations except the two locations. A threaded portion 813S having a screw hole inside the extension is integrally formed, and a positioning boss 81 is formed from the leading edge of a portion where the threaded portion 813S is not formed among the above-mentioned five places.
3a is extended. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of the bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both-side slits 815. Each of the center slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, in the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 toward the outside, that is, in the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the center slit 81
Reference numeral 4 extends along a direction D12 inclined at an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in the case of the pachinko machine 8010) in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

Both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight space therebetween.

In this manner, a set of three slits, the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals). Each end of the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a circular shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost double-sided slit 815 in the set of these three slits, that is, of the four corners of the three slits, the two corners on the small diameter side are the two-sided slits. It has a substantially rectangular shape in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (a rectangular cut is formed). The rectangular extension (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803 a of the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to a side end of a flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both-side slits 815 are formed, and has a smaller outer diameter than the outer peripheral ends of the center slit 814 and both-side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Has an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

Thereby, the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 are formed is enhanced by the arc plate 816. Therefore, the center slit 814 and both side slits 81
Deformation of the flat plate on which 5 is formed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG.
Since each set of the pair extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the five sets of the central slits 814 and the both-side slits 815 are shifted inward by that amount. , The slit members 81 are also arranged densely.
0 is compact.

In other words, if five sets of the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed in the circular opening 811
Is formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, rather than being arranged so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11. In this case, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, a slide member 820 is arranged in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. Slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 157, reference numeral 20 denotes a resin member having a long plate-like front shape. The thickness is reduced at both ends of the slide member 820, and the tip is formed into a semicircular shape in front view. Extending portion, a central portion which is bulged out of the rendering portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 formed in the extending portion, and a front surface extending from the center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 protruding from the side and inserted through the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 fixed so as to penetrate back and forth in a manner protruding from the center of the slide member 820 to the rear side. .

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged so that the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersects the long direction at right angles. And both side slits 815.

On the other hand, a central slit 814 and both-side slits 815 of the slit member 810 include:
The screw portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted from the front side. When fully fitted, the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the screw-in portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is separated from the flat plate member 8 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
03 is fixed to the rear side. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the center slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the slit 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

Thereby, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the center slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 810. At this time, the flat plate member 803 is
The slide rib 803a regulates the slide rib 803a so as to slide in a fixed outward position without rotating around the center 22.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the center motor 804, and FIG.
(A) and FIG. 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. In FIG. 161 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. Note that FIG.
In the description of FIG. 0 and FIG. 161, FIG. 155 and FIG.

As described above, the rotating plate 830 is disposed from the rear side on the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed on the front side, with a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831, and formed around the peripheral wall.

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall
The rotating plate 830 is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 so as to extend along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to close in a loop shape elongated in a front view.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a small gap of play. The ridge corner at the extended end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be angled.

The guide rail 832 is located at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 at a position in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall.
It extends in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front along a substantially intermediate direction between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831, and then forms an arc toward the clockwise direction in the front view further than the intermediate direction. While being curved, it extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 175 (a)).

The end of the guide rail 832 on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, the peripheral wall of the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the center end is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall of the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end protrudes forward from the front end of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are equally spaced from the pivot opening 831. It extends so as to spiral from the periphery to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830 </ b> G that extends rearward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in a peripheral wall shape and has teeth on the outer periphery is integrally formed on the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830. The second gear 830G is disposed so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is driven to rotate by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 projecting rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174 (c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five places as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is not linear but linear. As a result, the pivotal opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, so that the rotating plate 830 is smoothly pivotably supported.

As shown in FIG. 161 (a), a second gear 830G is further provided on the rear side of the second gear 830G.
A third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically, and is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

At the center of the third gear 810G, a circular pivot opening 810a is formed.
0a, screw insertion holes 810b are provided at positions corresponding to the three screw insertion portions 813S of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156) at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a. Each positioning hole 810c is drilled.

The third gear 810G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is disposed on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810.
In contrast, positioning is performed by inserting positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) into positioning hole 810c, and inserting a screw (not shown) through screw insertion hole 810b into screw insertion portion 813S (FIG. 1).
(See 56).

As a result, the slit member 810 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G, and is braked by the oil damper 805. Is held on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotating device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the center shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut out along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852. And a flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to increase the diameter at the front end, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen portion 856 penetrating the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, a front screw portion 857 having screw holes therein at two places on the left and right sides of the lumen portion 856, and a side from the front screw portion 857 to the lumen portion 856 side. A holding portion 858, which is formed in a shape having a counterbore at a deviated position toward the rear side, and two support protrusions 859 extending slightly short forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. . The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

The inner peripheral surface of the lumen 856 extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing portions, extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft 852, and A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. A rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from the rear screw portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, an LED board 861 is provided in front of the central shaft member 851.
Is arranged. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate slightly smaller in diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED substrate 861 at positions corresponding to the front screw-in portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted and positioned in the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861, and a screw is inserted through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED substrate 861.
The LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 by being screwed into the front screw-in portion 857 of the central shaft member 851.

An insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the center shaft member 851 in a size that allows the screw-in portion 869 of the center decoration member 868 to be fitted inside.

As shown in FIG. 162, the front surface of the LED substrate 861 faces forward at one location at the center and at many locations arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles multiplexed (doubled) around the one location. LE
D865 are arranged and fixed, respectively, so as to emit light forward.

In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, laterally oriented LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is supposed to. Note that the horizontal LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED board 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the front LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is disposed and fixed rearward.

On the front side of the LED board 861, a center decoration member 868 is arranged. Central decorative member 868
Is made of a resin material that has a specific color (yellow) but is almost transparent, extends from the long plate-like base to the back side in a columnar shape, and has a screw hole at the center where a screw can be screwed. And a pair of screw-in portions 869 to be provided.

The screw portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861. LE
The insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861 is provided in the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the D substrate 861 interposed therebetween.
Is screwed into the screw-in portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855, whereby the center decoration member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. Thus, the center decoration member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED board 861.

The loose fitting device 880 has a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. And a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member. A main body cylindrical member 883 which is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and which is loosely and rotatably fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 883S extending in a front and rear cylindrical shape and internally having a screw hole at two of the four locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the leading edge of the formed and the above-mentioned four places where the screw-in portion 883S is not formed.

At four positions corresponding to the screw-in portions 883S and the positioning bosses 883a, the main body cylindrical member 8 is formed.
83 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with the same protrusion length as the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a in the outer diameter direction in the shape of a rib and at the same time in the axial direction. Extending over the sliding rib 88
3b is formed.

A decorative member 884 formed on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED substrate 861 and covering the LED substrate 861 from the front side in an assembled state (see FIG. 149), and the decorative member 884 is externally mounted. A rear cover 886 which is fastened and fixed in the vicinity of the diameter and has a bottomed cup shape in which the outer peripheral side rises to the front side from the fastened portion and abuts against the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the rear side and is fastened and fixed. , Are arranged.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated on its front and back surfaces (yellow in the present pachinko machine 8010), whereby the side surface is mirror-finished. Therefore, for example, light emission can be performed by reflecting the light of the horizontal LED 866 disposed on the back side of the LED board 861 near the outer periphery.

The decorative member 884 is a member that performs light emission by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 provided on the LED substrate 861, and has a hibiscus flower shape, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light transmissive resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. In addition, an opening 885 is formed in a central portion with a size that allows the center decoration member 868 to be inserted.

The main body cylindrical member 883 thus configured is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G disposed behind the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As shown in FIG. 161 (a), a fourth gear 880G slightly smaller in diameter than the third gear 810G and larger in diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed to the rear side of the third gear 810G.
A pair of intermediate gears 808 rotatably supported by the support base material 801 and meshing with each other are meshed with each other.

One of the intermediate gears 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with one of the gears meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is connected to the intermediate gear 8
08 and rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

At the center of the fourth gear 880G, a circular pivot opening 880a is formed, and the pivot opening 88a is formed.
Around 0a, a screw insertion hole 880b is formed at a position corresponding to the two screw insertion portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883, and a positioning hole 880c is formed at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. I have.

The fourth gear 880G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and has a positioning boss with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) is inserted into the positioning hole 880c to perform positioning, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 880b into the screw insertion portion 883S (FIG. 16).
3) and fixed.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off, and the slit is formed. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d that extends to the rear side in an arc shape around the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. As the detection arc plate 880d, plates of the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 154), the detection arc plate 880d is in the donut-shaped recess 80.
1D (see FIG. 152), and is detected by a photocoupler type detection sensor 801C that is provided so as to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. That is, in the present embodiment, no matter which posture the fourth gear 880G starts rotating, the detection arc plate 88
The rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (center angle 72 °) can be detected (minimum angle 7).
2 ° can be detected, and rotation of 72 ° or more can be ensured by the detection).

The assembly of the center shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED board 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, the rear ends of the shaft portions 852 project slightly rearward from the pivotal openings 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is attached to the support base 801.
(Refer to FIG. 152). The rear insertion portion 853 of the support base 801 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) of the support base 801 and positioned there. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base 801 by being inserted into the insertion hole and fixed with screws.

At this time, a wire is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wire is led backward through the inner cavity 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801 </ b> P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward with respect to the support base material 801, and as shown in FIG. 154, the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.
The rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted to the outside, and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 is fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 8.
12 is attached so as to fit outside.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 has eight places along the circumferential direction, and the threaded portions 883S,
Since it is locally bulged by the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b, the slit 810 comes into linear contact with the inner peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is smoothly and rotatably supported.

FIG. 164 shows the petal operation device 800, the driving arm member 910 and the driven arm member 95.
0 is a rear perspective view, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. The petal operating device 800 vertically moves up and down (moves forward and backward) when a vertical load is applied from the driving arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIGS.
2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member fastened and fixed to the deepest portion inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and at the lower left corner in front view. A support pillar 1110 protruding in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear housing 1120 in which a plurality of gears are recessed above the support pillar 1110 so as to be able to be housed from the front side, Rail fixing portion 1130 disposed on the rail, and the rail fixing portion 1130
And a support slot 1140 formed as a slot that is inclined downward as it approaches the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910,
In the vicinity of the outer periphery at the front end, a pair of left and right holes, which are screw holes 1111 formed so as to allow screws to be screwed therein, and a pair of upper and lower front surfaces on the same surface as the leading edge of the screw portion 1111 And a positioning boss 1112 extending to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is formed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in the shape of a letter when viewed from the rear. A rotation shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by the shaft 1110; a connection protrusion 912 projecting in a stepped cylindrical shape on the front side at a position near one end of the long body member; A transmission elongated hole 913 that is formed in a linear elongated shape from the bending point of the long main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the petal operation device 800 is supported at the other end of the long main body member. And a support portion 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 includes an inner fitting protrusion 925 that is fitted in the transmission elongated hole 913, and a flange 926 that protrudes radially outward to a position where the detection sensor 1162 detects the rotation of the arm gear 924. In conjunction therewith, the support column 1110 rotates about an axis.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a concave portion for accommodating the gear of the transmission means 920, and is composed of three circular concave portions that are connected to each other while slightly intersecting with each other. The first storage portion 1121 and the second storage portion 11 connected to the first storage portion 1121
22 and a third housing portion 112 in which an arm gear 924 which is disposed directly opposite to the first housing portion 1121 with the second housing portion 1122 interposed therebetween and which is fitted to the drive side arm member 910 is housed.
3 is mainly provided.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and slidably supported up and down. It has an insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on a line.
The posture of the petal operating device 800 is maintained constant by the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R.

The support slot 1140 is a slot that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined and disposed so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° as viewed from the front. An extension wall 1141 is provided to extend to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven arm member 950 is formed of a long rod-shaped main body member formed substantially in a straight line in a rear view, and is provided with a columnar projection at one end to the rear side. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 slidably supported by the support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted into the supported projection 951, and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported projection 951 in a state in which the collar is internally fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. Thus, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported projection 951, and the outer diameter is
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side substrate 1000S, and the second effect member 940. FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive-side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. is there.

The slide plate 930 is supported by the side base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported long holes 931 formed in the front and rear direction in a long hole shape extending left and right. It is connected to the connection protrusion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by a base end side long hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction and formed in a vertically extending elongated hole shape provided on the left end side, and provided on the right end side. And is connected to the second effect member 940 through a front-end side insertion hole 933 that is formed in the front-rear direction.

The base-side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stop portion 932a formed along a locus at which the connection protrusion 912 rotates at the upper end around the support column 1110, and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. And a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a columnar portion disposed in a substantially triangular shape on the front side on the left side of the back plate 1100 when viewed from the front, and has a threaded portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed at the tip. A plate-like member fastened and fixed to the supporting column 1150 having a fixing plate 1001S, which is disposed at a position corresponding to the supporting column 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. And a support protrusion 1002S protruding rearward in a columnar shape in a positional relationship (three places) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931 and a circular hole in the front-rear direction at the right corner in front view. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S that is concavely formed in the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Concentric with Ridge 1005S which is projectingly provided on the front side along the arc shape
And mainly comprising.

The support projection 1002S is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed from the tip of the support projection 1002S.
The support plate 1002S is arranged in a gap between the support protruding portion 1002S and a screw for preventing the slide plate 930 from being slidably moved. You.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc concave portion 1004S and the convex ridge portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotation operation of the second effect member 940. Part. The protruding ridge portion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is at a regular position, but is formed at a protruding height at which the second directing member 940 can abut if it is displaced or bent from the regular position. Is done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body that is formed in such a manner that a lower end portion is bifurcated and an upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the pivoted support post 941, and is located on the rear side at the right corner in front view. A shaft-supported column portion 941 that is formed in a columnar shape and supported by a shaft support hole 1003S with a collar interposed therebetween, and an auxiliary protrusion that is disposed adjacent to the shaft-supported column portion 941 and protrudes rearward in a columnar shape. Part 942,
Mainly equipped.

The pivoted support portion 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed at the tip. An entrance 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). The supported shaft portion 941 has a shaft support hole 1003 with the collar interposed therebetween.
When a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 941a in a state where a disk-shaped lid member 945 having a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is arranged at the distal end in a state of being inserted into the S, the lid member 94 is screwed.
5 plays a role of retaining. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the front end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin-made collar is fastened and fixed at the front end, thereby preventing the slide plate 930 from falling off. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are linked with each other by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal-side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the circular concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the circular concave portion 1004S. Thus, even if the second effect member 940 is likely to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 contacts the arcuate concave portion 1004S and resistance is generated, so that bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. The rear plate 1100 includes three screwing portions 1161 configured to be capable of screwing screws when fastening a plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921,
A detection sensor 1162 that detects a flange portion 926 that protrudes radially outward from the arm gear 924 within a predetermined angle range, and a collar that guides a coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 are rotatably mounted on a shaft. A shaft support 1163 to be supported, a cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the substrate cover 1000C below and to the right of the support elongated hole 1140, and the substrate cover 10 arranged close to the cover support portion 1164.
It mainly includes a wiring stopper 1165 hidden from the front in 00C and a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes screw-in portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use,
Even if the portion that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 in front view is missing,
The displacement of the second effect member 940 can be regulated by the screw-in portion 1006S.

As described above, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fixedly fastened to each of the side base material 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are stacked and arranged back and forth and fastened to each other. 1000C, side substrate 1000S and back plate 11
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. Accordingly, even when a heavy device such as the petal operating device 800 is moved up and down by rotating the driving side arm member 910, the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S are easily suppressed. Can be.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the up / down operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. FIGS. 168, 170, and 172 show the petal operation device 800, the advance / retreat operation unit 900, and the back plate. FIG. 169, FIG.
71 and 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

168 and 169 show a state in which the driving arm member 910 is arranged at the upper end side of the movement range, and in FIGS. 170 and 171, the connecting protrusion 912 (see FIG. 164) of the driving arm member 910. ) Is shown at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 is shown.
Is shown at the lower end of the movement range.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the driving side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the driving side arm member 910 is fitted into the inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151), and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, the inner fitting protrusion 9
Since only 25 is displaced and a range in which the driving arm member 910 maintains its posture (a range in which it rotates idly) is generated, the resistance of the driving motor 921 at the time of starting can be reduced.

170 and 171, the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained while the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared to the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive-side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are linked to each other, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized as linked. Can be done.

Here, by moving the second production member 940 in a manner that the second production member 940 projects toward the position where the petal operation device 800 was originally arranged, the second production member 940 becomes as if the second production member 940 is the petal operation device 8.
00 can be visually recognized as operating.

Next, the collecting and rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central shaft rotating device 850. 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 175 (b) is the petal operating device 8
FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (b)
Fig. 176 (c) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, Fig. 176 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 without the central shaft rotating device 850, and Fig. 176 (d) is a slit member. FIG. 810 is a front view of the rotating plate 830.

177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 177 (b) is the petal operating device 8
FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (b)
178 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 without the central shaft rotating device 850, and FIG. 178 (d) is a slit member. FIG. 810 is a front view of the rotating plate 830.

FIG. 179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 179 (b) is the petal operating device 8
FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operating device 800 is lowered by the elevating operation and is at the lowest position, the petal operating device 800 moves from the initial position (assembly position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to FIGS. 176 and 177.
178, a widening operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, and a rotation operation (second operation) is performed at the fully open position. The operation (third operation) can be performed to return to the initial position (convergence position).

In the initial position (assembly position), as shown in FIG.
The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 157) is located at the center slit 81 of the slit member 810.
4 is located at the inner end (end on the side of the circular opening 811), and as shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are most concentrated toward the central decoration member 868 at the center. Position, and is in a collective state that constitutes a flowering hibiscus flower as a whole.

When the petal 802 is at the initial position (assembly position) as described above, the first
When the gear 804G is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c), the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)) interlocks with the rotation, so that the rotating plate 83 is rotated.
0 is rotationally driven clockwise in rear view as indicated by an arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 with a small frictional resistance at the pivot opening 831 so that the rotation plate 830 can easily move around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, via the third gear 810G as described above. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotating plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, first, the rotating plate 8
Only 30 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is kept stopped (see FIGS. 176 and 177).

When the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates counterclockwise in front view as shown by an arrow A11 on the front side thereof,
Accordingly, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in a direction in which the slide pin 823 is pushed outward in the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, the sliding pin 823 moves as shown in FIG.
Since the slide pin 823 is regulated by the center slit 814, the slide pin 823 moves linearly from the inner end to the outside along the center slit 814.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that a slight torque is also applied to the slit member 810. However, the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds the torque, and accordingly, With the slit member 810 held in a stopped state, the slide pin 823 is rotated by the rotation of the rotating plate 830 to move the center slit 8.
It will move linearly outward along 14.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start an expanding operation in which the petals 802 expand radially outward from the gathering position. In this expanding operation, the slit member 8
As described above, since the center slit 814 of the ten extends along the direction D12 inclined at an angle θ11 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. Although a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward, on the other hand, the movement speed of the slide pin 823 becomes relatively high due to the inclination.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as described above, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotating plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the operation of expanding the petals 802 can be performed more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively small as compared with the above-described case, Assuming that the moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and further, for example, assuming that the center slit 814 is inclined clockwise in the front view with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed decreases. Any reduction is even more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise as viewed from the front along the direction D15 between the tangent and the normal to the pivot opening 831 from the center end as shown in FIG. Thereafter, it extends outwardly while being curved in an arc toward the clockwise direction in a front view more than the direction D15, and extends so as to spirally spread outward as a whole with the five guide rails 832. .

As the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in the front view, the slide pin 82
3, the moving speed becomes slower. Further, the guide rail 832
Is more curved toward the clockwise direction in the front view than the direction D15, the more the slide pin 823
, And the movement speed is more remarkable.

That is, in the case of the center slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by tilting the slide pin 823 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in front view and further bending it in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, a groove is formed by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, when a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. For this reason, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced while the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is reduced at the expense of the movement speed.

On the other hand, in the case of the center slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of departure. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. Is configured.

As described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced by the guide rail 832 to prevent a problem such as deviation, thereby ensuring the reliability of power transmission.
In FIG. 14, the role sharing is performed by increasing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the slide pin 823 is
Upon reaching the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement in FIG. 4 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 radially expand to the fully open position and become fully open, and the expanding operation ends.

In this fully opened state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move so as to be radially separated, so that the petals 802 can be continuously viewed outside the decorative member 884 in a front view. 802 is arranged. Thereby, as compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), the decorative member 884 is visually recognized integrally like a hibiscus flower which is one size larger (FIG. 178 (b)).

As described above, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the center slit 814, and cannot move outward any more, the slide pin 823 will be thereafter moved.
Is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814, so that the rotating plate 830 cannot further rotate in the same direction as before with a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805.
Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state after the end of the expanding operation can be maintained.

After the end of the expanding operation, the rotational power in the same direction as that from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotating plate 830. When the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 starts to rotate counterclockwise in front view as indicated by an arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830 by completely removing the braking by the oil damper 805. Thus, after the expanding operation, the petals 802 rotate counterclockwise in a front view in a fully opened state as shown by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

At this time, if the rotation power is continuously applied to the rotating plate 830 without stopping the central motor 804 after the expanding operation, the rotating operation is immediately continued so as to continue from the expanding operation to the rotating operation. Can be migrated.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a front view in the fully opened state as shown by an arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise as viewed from the front) as indicated by an arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position 84 is large, the rotation speed of the petals 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

After the above rotation operation is completed, the first gear 804G is moved by the central motor 804 to the contrary,
When rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as indicated by arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), first, only the rotating plate 830 is rotated while the slit member 810 is stopped by the oil damper 805 while being stopped. As shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 2B, the motor is driven to rotate clockwise in rear view, whereby an assembling operation in a direction opposite to the above-described expanding operation is performed.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement of the center slit 814, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement. Then, they gather to return to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, return to the gathering state, and end the gathering operation.

Thereafter, the central motor 804 may be stopped to terminate the operation of the petal operation device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. It is operated again, and the first gear 804 is further driven by the central motor 804.
When G is rotated clockwise in rear view as indicated by arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), petals 802
However, as shown by an arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b), it rotates clockwise in the front view in the assembled state.

When the petals 802 rotate clockwise in a front view in an assembled state as shown by an arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is turned in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in front view) as shown by an arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). To rotate. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position 84 is large, the rotation speed of the petals 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 from the gathering operation to the rotation operation as described above,
The transition may be made after a pause and a pause, or the transition may be made immediately so as to continue without interruption.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operating device 800 is rotating.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described. The unit 9140 has a cut-out 9145 formed in the wall forming the foul ball passage 9145.
b is formed, and the sheet metal member 9150 extends along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment in that the inner configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145, the lower end portion and the front The vertical positional relationship of the lower end of the door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front end to the back of the passage forming unit 9140 in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . The sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of areas including the concave end of the S-shaped path SL2,
The depth of the recess is substantially equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that protrudes rearward from the plate member 14 d (see FIG. 91), and faces upward from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand loads.

The thin plate blade portion 9153 allows the yarn Y8 to pass through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the yarn Y8, thereby illegally operating the ball inside the game area and obtaining an illegal profit. And is arranged for cutting the yarn Y8 passed through the foul ball passage 9145. Here, possible misconduct will be described.

148 will be described again. As described above, the ball firing unit 112a of the eighth embodiment
Is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by using the force of the ball to be fired. If the force of the fire is weak, the yarn Y8 is cut. The ball could be fired without it.

On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, and is discharged to the lower plate 50 via the foul ball passage portion 145. Therefore, there is no possibility that the ball directly enters the game area.

On the other hand, for example, when the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the yarn Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P fixed to one end of the yarn Y8
8 in a state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, and the yarn Y9
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is disposed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701). Even if it is punched out, the yarn Y8 is not cut into the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is hit vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 fired in advance is in the foul ball passage 1
It passes through 45, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the person who commits the wrongdoing can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2) and the like, and an improper profit can be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when performing a wrongdoing using the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, the thin plate blade 145 is formed in the foul ball passage 145 through which the yarn Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

In other words, when the wrongdoer pulls the yarn Y8, the yarn Y8 rubs against the thin blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the yarn Y8 and cutting the yarn Y8 at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145 exposing the thin plate blade portion 9153
b is formed on the side closer to the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, so that the thread Y8 is arranged inside the notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled. The thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance to an upward load by abutting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This prevents the thin blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin blade portion 9153 when the yarn Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, the thin plate blade portion 915 is formed from the yarn Y8.
Most of the load applied to 3 can be used to damage yarn Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b, At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. This can prevent the thin blade portion 9153 from breaking or chipping due to the collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end of the foul ball passage 9145 is disposed below the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the dispensed ball. That is, since the person who commits the wrongdoing is afraid of finding the wrongdoing, the ball P
After grasping the ball 8, the ball P8 is moved close to the body (eg,
(For example, in a pants pocket), and it is easy to perform an illegal act of pulling or loosening the thread 8. In this case, the state where the yarn Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (contacts the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 extends through a position about the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the prize ball is paid out, the lower plate 5 is moved from the lower end of the lower door passage portion 9142 on the front door side.
When the ball discharged to 0 hits the lower plate 50 and bounces off, it hits on the yarn Y8 disposed on the front side of the ball guide opening 53 or hits the yarn Y8 while lowering the lower plate 50 (FIG. 1). (See FIG. 2) to the right and flow down through the bottom opening disposed behind the ball release lever 52. That is, by disposing the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate portion is formed. Passage 9
The ball discharged from 142 to the lower plate 50 comes into contact with the yarn Y8, so that the possibility of damaging the yarn Y8 can be increased, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

Thirdly, on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, a right inclined surface 9142a is formed which is inclined downward toward the right. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it easier to give a rightward speed to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the front door side lower plate passage 9142.

As a result, the thread Y8 is discharged before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 decreases.
You can aim the ball towards. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly impart a rightward (facing to the ball ball passage portion 9145 side) velocity component to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower plate 50. It is possible to increase the percentage of balls that step on the yarn Y8 or hit the yarn Y8.

Fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 9142 is provided with the ball guide opening 5.
3 occupies an area of about の of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage 9145 has a remaining area (right and left of the ball guide opening 53) at the right part of the ball guide opening 53. (A region of about 1/3 of the width dimension), and a rising regulation step portion 9053a is formed at the boundary.

As shown in FIG. 180, the climbing regulation step portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, and a foul disposed on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion that connects to the left end (left end) of the lower bottom near the exit of the spherical passage 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding regulation step portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms the front door side lower plate passage 91.
42 and foul ball passage 9145 are communicated. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door-side lower plate passage 9142 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the yarn Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the riding restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.
Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the ball rolling on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and abutting on the climbing regulation step portion 9053a from climbing to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the riding restriction step portion 9053a allows the ball to pass in the left-right direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts the ball in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment is described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. With reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, differences from the eighth embodiment will be described.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. 184 illustrates a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed obliquely from the upper right, FIG. 185 illustrates a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed obliquely from the upper left, and FIG. The state seen from diagonally below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage 10145.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is formed by a notch 10 that is recessed from the front end to the back side of the passage forming unit 10140 in the upper curved inside portion of the S-shaped path SL2.
145c. The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side so as to cover below the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of areas including the concave end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the depth of the concave is approximately the same as twice (diameter) the radius Ra (see FIG. 180) of the sphere. You. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole formed in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d for guiding the ball to the passage portion 145a. The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. Auxiliary projection 1 protruding from the back side to the back side
4d2. The auxiliary projection 14d2 is shown by imaginary lines in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is not shown in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 in the front-rear direction is spherical. The radius Ra is about P8. Therefore, the foul ball passage 101
Since it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down 45 from colliding with the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 from breaking or chipping due to the collision with the ball P8. Thus, the durability of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the rear side as it goes toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-back width) of the gap on the back side of the protrusion 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is determined by the width of the passage portion 14.
It becomes wider as it is closer to 5a. Thereby, the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is
It becomes easy to enter the gap on the back side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, which is the gap where the 0153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the rear side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a portion forming a bifurcated blade portion, the first thin plate blade portion 10153
Is extended leftward from the right end of the front side edge slightly upward. As a result, between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, an acute concave portion 1015 in which the concave deep portion has an acute angle.
5 are formed.

The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members provided for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8, similarly to the thin blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute angle concave portion 10155 is disposed on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the back side edge of the notch 10145c. Thus, when the yarn Y8 enters the back side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, the yarn Y8 enters the acute angle recess 10155, and the yarn Y8
Can be easily damaged.

Since the second thin blade portion 10154 disposed on the front side is disposed on the upper side as compared with the first thin blade portion 10153, the yarn Y8 which is pulled obliquely downward on the front side by a wrongdoer. Can easily enter the deep part of the acute angle recess 10155.

A plate-shaped portion continuously provided to the right of the thin plate blades 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate 10145d.
And is configured to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage 10145.

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are disposed facing left and right opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in left and right opposite directions. You. That is, at these two points, the yarn Y8 is pulled in the left and right opposite directions.

For example, a person who commits a wrongdoing releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand and tries to avoid the discovery of the wrongdoing by the ball P8 flowing backward through the foul ball passage 10145 and being discharged through the game area. According to the present embodiment, a load in the left-right opposite direction is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 at the lower end side extended end of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays.

This causes the ball P8 and the yarn Y8 to stay inside the foul ball passage 10145, and the yarn Y
By prolonging the time during which the 8 is exposed to the game area, it is possible to expedite the detection of fraud.

Note that an adhesive member (such as glue or trim) may be provided at a deep portion of the acute angle recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute angle recess 10155. In this case, even if the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 coming to the wrongdoer's hand is cut, the yarn is adhered to the sticky member provided in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is moved to the game area. , And is kept in place, so that it is possible to expedite the detection of fraud using the yarn Y8.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) having a low firing intensity and not reaching the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50 has been described. A receiving foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is disposed at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is formed of a resin material so as to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A tip member 206 that is formed and disposed in close proximity to the ball firing unit 112a
2a, and a guide member 2062b formed near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 of a flowable width between the ball and the tip member 2062a.

A foul ball passage 2062c is formed downstream of the gap V11 and communicates with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the main body upper dish passage portion 161. Foul ball passage 2
062c is formed to have a width slightly larger than a width that allows one ball to pass through the furnishing, and a spare for the ball preventing member 68 is disposed above it.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the main body-side upper dish passage 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body-side lower dish passage 162 is provided in the above-described embodiment. The formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied to the upper plate 17 exclusively via the main unit upper plate passage 161. When the ball on the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) arranged to protrude inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the dispensing device is turned on. It is configured such that the payout of the ball from 133 stops.

That is, in the present embodiment, the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c is also dispensed by the payout device 133 (
The ball paid out from FIG. 87 is also supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, as described above, the balls are adhered to both ends of the yarn Y8, and one ball is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c to thereby form the yarn Y8.
When thinking of fraudulent acts that let the person enter the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c,
The action of damaging the yarn Y8 by hitting the dispensing ball to the yarn Y8 can be generated without depending on the degree of accumulation of the balls on the upper plate 17. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily cut at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball preventing member 68 disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and is shown side by side as a rear perspective view. In the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 is appropriately referred to.

The return ball preventing member 68 is temporarily fixed to the game board 13 with a metal long screw B11 in such a manner that the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b supporting the tilting gate member 68a is arranged on the near side.

Specifically, on the back side of the return ball preventing member 68, the guide member 2062b is hollow. A support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity so as to protrude cylindrically from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b, and has a threaded groove formed therein for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A closing plate 2062b4 for closing the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the front end of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2.
In the state where b1 is in contact, a long screw B11 is inserted into a through-hole previously drilled as a mounting hole in the base member 68b1 and a through-hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 with its position aligned with the through-hole. Is inserted and screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 in this state, whereby the return ball preventing member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

Note that the closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface, which are the side that contacts the guide member 2062b, match the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is
It is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of 62b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that the surface of the guide member 2062b, which constitutes the outer frame of the game area, descends and falls as it approaches the tip member 2062a. That is, the gradient increasing unit 206
The straight line L11 extending toward the distal end member 2062a along the 2d surface is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) of the distal end member 2062a that constitutes the outer frame of the game area (in this embodiment, the diameter of the sphere is (About 1/3 lower side) and intersects the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when a ball is fired toward the game area, the gradient increasing unit 20
62d is retracted from the path of the sphere, and it is possible to avoid collision of the sphere with the lower end portion of the gradient increasing portion 2062d. On the other hand, when the ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d. And it is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball firing unit 112a side.

The front side surface 2062d1 of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is between the obstruction plate 2062b4 and
The cut 206 having a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and allowing the thread to enter (about 2 [mm] in this embodiment).
It is recessed to the rear side to the position where 2b1 can be formed. The location where the cut 2062b1 is formed is a location where the path of the ball driven into the game area and the foul ball path 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

In the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view, on the front side than the side surface 2062d1,
A cutout 2062b3 for a semicircle is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. The notch 2062b is provided for exposing the long screw B11.

As described above, since the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cuts 2062b1 are formed, similarly to the method described in the ninth or tenth embodiment, The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 during fraudulent acts performed through the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, due to the arrangement of the cuts 2062b1, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 disposed deep in the cuts 2062b1 when receiving a load that pulls both ends (FIG. 190 (
a)). In this state, the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, so that the thread Y8 is rubbed with the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, the cut 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. This can prevent the cut 2062b1 from being arranged at the position where the shot ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically below the center of the ball), so that the cut 2062b1 collides with the shot ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the sphere from being affected.

In addition, the person who performs the wrongdoing performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the yarn Y8 that protrudes toward the player (the ball P8 is fixed). (See FIG. 182) to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area, so that near the gap V11 close to the player, the yarn Y8 is shifted toward the front. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c near the front side, the yarn Y8 can be easily inserted into the cut 2062c as compared with the case where the cut 2062c is arranged near the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 provided with a detection unit projecting downward is provided in a cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with a load extremely weaker than a load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. For this reason, the possibility that the button-type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a.
N-OFF can be switched.

FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190A, the weight 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68 is shown.
A state where the weight 68a2 side is inclined to the foul ball passage 2062c side by the weight of 2 is shown. In FIG. 190 (b), the weight 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the gate member 68a is pushed up.
The state where the opening / closing portion 68a1 side is inclined to the foul ball passage 2062c side is illustrated. Also,
In FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used in the misconduct is shown for reference, and the button-type switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190 (b), the button-type switch SW11 is turned on. It is shown that it is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball preventing member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and provides enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows off under its own weight. Even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting of the opening / closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state returns to the state shown in FIG.
This is because it is possible to return to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) by the timing at which the ball is guided to 62c (the shortest after 0.6 seconds).

On the other hand, for an object that does not flow away like a sphere, for example, an object that progresses while filling a passage such as an endoscope, the return ball prevention member 68 has a large resistance. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraud.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is caused to travel through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball, to reach the inside of the game area, and to try to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, The nail (not shown) implanted in the game board 13 is bent, the ball is gripped and put into a winning opening, the tip of the device is used as a guide plate to the winning opening, or a laser is emitted from the tip. Cheating nails).

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that enters illegally is shown by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, when the distal end of the device such as the endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball, in the present embodiment, the distal end is moved while rejecting the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is displaced by the distal end of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), it is connected to the distal end of the endoscope. The insertion portion (elongated flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a
2 will be maintained in a state of being pushed up. Therefore, it is difficult to repel the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from moving further.

Here, in the case where the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is destroyed and enters the inside, the fraud cannot be prevented as it is. On the other hand, in this case, the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, so that the button-type switch SW1 is maintained.
By performing control so that an alarm is sounded when 1 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time, fraudulent acts can be found early.

Further, when the button-type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned OFF.
Since N is set (see FIG. 190 (a)), the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.
On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, the state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

The member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c does not need to be the return ball preventing member 68, and may be another movable member. However, as in the present embodiment, the return ball preventing member 68
When the return ball preventing member 68 provided on the game board 13 is broken or bent due to long-term use, the replacement can be performed early. As a result, as compared with a case where the replacement member of the return ball preventing member 68 is simply purchased as an option, it is possible to play a role of preventing fraud before replacement, and it is possible to eliminate the trouble of searching for a storage location forgotten. The effect described above can be obtained. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball preventing member 68. For example, a configuration in which the gate member 68a is supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be provided) may be used.

In addition, whether or not the above-described effect of preventing the illegal action is exhibited when the return ball preventing member 68 is broken or bent and replaced is determined by the degree of breakage of the return ball preventing member 68. , The fraudster does not know if the exchange has taken place, and
Even if it has been replaced, the degree of damage is not known, so that the deterrence of fraud can be maintained.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only at the gathering position or the fully opened position has been described. However, the petal operating device 2800 according to the twelfth embodiment can perform the rotating operation even at the expanding position. It is configured in an embodiment. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 192
As shown in the figure, the rear cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 is different from the configuration of the rear cover 886 in the eighth embodiment in that the flange 2 extends radially outward from the rear end outer edge.
887 and a regulating portion 2888 projecting rearward from the extending end of the flange portion 2887. The loose fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment is different from the loose fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
The only difference is that the rear cover 2886 is different from that of the rear cover 80 in comparison with the first embodiment.

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 is protruded to a position where it can contact the front side portion 802b but cannot contact the rear side portion 802a.

In the present embodiment, a case is described in which a single flange portion 2887 and a single regulating portion 2888 are arranged, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886.
Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the regulating portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIG.
4 (a) and FIG. 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. 193 and 194 illustrate the operation example of the petal operating device 2800 in chronological order, and include FIGS. 193 (a) and 194 (a), FIGS. 193 (b) and 194 (b).
The state at the same time is shown in FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and in the same cross-section, a pair of screw-in portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803.
S is viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), a pair of screw insertion portions 2803S arranged inside the both-side slits 815 are provided on opposite sides with the screw insertion portion 803H as a center. An inclined surface 2803T that is inclined in a manner away from 2803S is provided.

The inclined surface 2803T is approximately 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
It is formed inclined. The action of the regulating section 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 193 (a) and FIG. 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( When the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in front view), the restricting portion 2888 abuts on the front side portion 802b of the petal 802, and the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888.

If the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise in front view) while the petal 802 is receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888, the petal 802 receives the load. In order to change the posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in a normal posture illustrated in FIG. 194A (a posture in which the longitudinal direction is oriented in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815). From the center slit 814 as shown in FIG.
In addition, the posture can be changed to the inclined posture inclining with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. Petal 8
In 02, the posture changes as much as possible.

As described above, the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 changes, so that
While the load from 88 is received, the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), since the slide member 2820 has only the small width slide rib 803a abutting on both side slits 815, the frictional resistance is suppressed,
The slide member 2820 can be smoothly moved in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 has the slide rib 803a with the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 280 with the inner inner wall with respect to the slits 815 on both sides.
Since the 3Ts are respectively brought into contact (pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than the width of the slide rib 803a, the frictional resistance is significantly increased. In addition, since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-side slits 815 in both short-side directions of the both-side slits 815, frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. .

Therefore, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 in the longitudinal direction is increased, so that the sliding members 28
20 without reaching the ends of the slits 814 and 815,
156 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the normal posture and the inclination in the inclined posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 and the movement resistance.

In this case, the slit member 810 starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) by breaking off the braking by the oil damper 805. That is, from the state shown in FIG.
Start rotating counterclockwise in front view. This direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 moves away from the regulating portion 2888, so that the load applied to the petal 802 from the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800. In FIG. 195, FIG.
The state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated in the expanding position. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in front view) to the direction of rotation of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is applied to the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156).
Since the braking force is higher than the braking force of FIG. 156, the petal 802 can be rotated in both the forward and reverse directions while maintaining the expanding position.

FIGS. 196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. 196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 show the petals 802 moving from the expanding position to the gathering position in chronological order.

In FIG. 196 (a), from the state shown in FIG. 195, the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG.
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the posture of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 is returned to the normal posture.

Further, when the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) is higher than the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 from the slide pin 823. The rotation operation of 802 stops, and the petals 802 slide and move toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically perform the operation of rotating the petals 802 at the expanding position and then returning the petals 802 to the gathering position.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where the petal 802 contacts the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view). If so, contact between the front side portion 802b and the regulating portion 2888 can be avoided, so that the petals 802 can be moved to the fully open position and rotated at the fully open position in this embodiment.

Further, the arrangement of the restricting portion 2888 may be such that the petal 802 does not come into contact with the petal 802 at the gathering position or the fully opened position, or the petal 802 which rotates at the fully opened position.
By slightly changing the posture, it is possible to slip through the restricting portion 2888 and set a position where the load can be passed, thereby preventing the restricting portion 2888 from obstructing rotation of the petal 802 in the fully open position. it can.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the rear cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, the petals 802 can be provided.
When the flower expands, it can be used as a mark as to whether it passes through a position close to the star-shaped pattern or a position far from the star-shaped pattern. It is possible to cause a difference between performing the rotation operation and performing the rotation operation halfway.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. The pattern of the pattern can function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

Note that the restricting portion 2888 may be provided at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the viewpoint of design, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 abutting on the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing the posture may be used as an effect (for example, an effect indicating the magnitude of the expected jackpot). In this case, it is possible to change the meaning content to be transmitted to the player, depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (while flickering) while causing a slight change in posture by contacting the regulating portion 2888. .

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts on the regulating portion 2888 is the tip position,
If the contact position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion of the petals 802 when the posture changes is changed. Therefore, even when the restricting portion 2888 is configured to be fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes posture can be changed in a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199.
In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates and rotates with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanding position is described. However, the petal operation device according to another example of the twelfth embodiment is described. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 independently rotates according to the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partial enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 illustrate, in chronological order, an operation example of the petal operation device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise in front view from the state illustrated in FIG. 198 (a). Also,
In FIG. 198 (a), FIG. 198 (b), FIG. 199 (a), and FIG.
The arrangement and shape of the zero guide rail 832 is shown in phantom lines.

When the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since the rotation of the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 together with the rotation exceeds the applied resistance is the same as in the twelfth embodiment, the description is omitted here.

In addition, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross-section.

Here, when rotating the rotating plate 830 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, since the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 is With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). In the present embodiment, additional concave portions 3814a, 3815a, 3815 are provided on the side for receiving the slide member 2820 thus displaced.
b is formed.

That is, the difference between the slit member 3810 and the slit member 810 is that the center slit 814 is formed on the clockwise wall of the central slit 814 in the wall extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814.
A central recessed portion 3814a recessed in a manner to widen the width of the center slit 815 and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 disposed on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 in the front view, and the clockwise side in the front view. A clockwise recessed portion 3815a that is recessed in the wall portion of the slit so as to widen the width of the slit 815 in the lateral direction, and a radial direction of the slit 815 that is disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. Of the wall extending along the front side, the wall on the clockwise side in front view has slits 81 on both sides.
5 is mainly provided with a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed so as to widen the width in the short direction.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the clockwise concave portion 3815a is
The third slide rib 803a is disposed to face.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central concave portion 3814a is
19 from the position facing the guide pin 822 of FIG.
8 (a) lower side).

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recess depth greater than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a radial length longer than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

The counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is in the state shown in FIG.
03 from the position opposed to the inclined surface 2803T of the slit member 3810 on the rotation center side (
198 (a) (on the lower side).

The counterclockwise concave portion 3815b has a concave depth greater than the clockwise concave portion 3815a, and a radial length longer than the central concave portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise in front view will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG.
When starts rotating clockwise in front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction in FIG. 198 (a) (the direction in which the rightmost slide rib 803a enters the clockwise concave portion 3815a) (FIG. 198 (b)).

Accordingly, the contact between the flat plate member 2803 and the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the slits 815 on both sides is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in a front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are brought into contact with the clockwise concave portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member). 138 (a) and 199 (b) with the fulcrum as a fulcrum between the F.3810 and the F.3810.
)reference).

Note that the center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b have a deeper depth than the clockwise concave portion 3815a, so that the above-described slide member 2820 and flat plate member 28 are provided.
03, the contact between the guide pin 822 and the central concave portion 3814a, and the screw-in portion 280
The contact between the 3S and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is avoided.

Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a clockwise depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not abut the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A surrounding recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is lower than the resistance applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. . Accordingly, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate together.

As shown in FIG. 199 (b), when the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwing portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) reach a posture in which the posture is orthogonal to the front view. When the slide rib 803a at the center in the radial direction accommodated in the slits 815 on the clockwise side abuts on the wall of the slits 815 on both sides, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be viewed from the front with the abutting portions as fulcrums. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise concave portion 3815a
Moves to the counterclockwise side in a front view from the concave base end of the clockwise concave portion 3815a.

That is, a state in which the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 194).
(See (a)), so that the rotating plate 830 is continuously rotated clockwise in front view, so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved to the radial center side.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) is reached, the rotation of the rotating plate 830 causes the slit member 3810 to rotate along with the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotating direction. And the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

This allows the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 to perform operations that cannot be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation involved in rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 194 (b)). )), Until the changed posture is restored,
193 (see FIG. 193 (a)) which is fastened and fixed to the plate member 2803 (rotational operation that rotates with the slit member 3810) intervenes (FIGS. 195 and 196).
(A) and FIG. 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation associated with rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 198 ( a)), and by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise as viewed from the front, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199 (b)).
. In other words, the rotation operation (rotational operation that rotates along with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. Can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expanding operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 198 (a)), rotating plate 830 in any state (phase or posture)
By rotating clockwise from the front, the slide member 2820 and the plate member 2803 are assembled from the position of the plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture). The movement can be started toward the position.
Thus, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG.
93 (a)) is rotated (see FIG. 195) during the expansion (see FIG. 198 (a)), and then the arrangement of the petals 802 at the time of the gathering operation toward the gathering position (see FIG. 197) varies. The operation of the petal operation device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described.
A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed to penetrate through the curved wall portion 8326. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202 (a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202 (b) illustrates the tilting device 310 in the second state. A state in the middle of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment is different from the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments in that the lower frame member 8300
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the 320 has not been described, and the other configurations have been almost described in the operating devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments.
Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other components will be described with some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is disposed to face the protection lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially oval shape at the left and right center positions. The first through hole 8326a and the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321 has an oblong rectangular cross-sectional shape as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b formed along the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes formed at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in front view. And a through hole 8326c.

The through holes 8326a to 8326c are provided for the purpose of facilitating the passage of the liquid such as the drinking water described above and the purpose of facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. And a through hole having: The coin-shaped foreign object may be used, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is in the way to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or the tilting device 310 and the upper frame may be meaningless by the player of interest. Member 33
It may be fitted in the gaps V13 and V14 between 0.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 that is configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310.
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smoother, but the gap V13
, V14 are more likely to be inserted.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the ring member BR1 (
(See FIG. 14B). In other words, the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end. It is configured to be easily shifted (deformed) from side to side near the front end. Note that the positional deviation (deformation) includes, for example, positional deviation utilizing rattling caused by the sum of design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and positional deviation caused by slightly deforming each member. (Deformation).

Therefore, in normal use, the clearance V13 between the upper frame member 330 on the left and right sides of the tilting device 310
However, even if the clearance V13 is designed not to be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a one-yen coin), the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the left and right (for example, left). In this case, the gap V13 formed on the other side (for example, on the right side) is provided by the tilting device 310 during normal use.
A gap V1 having a size obtained by adding a gap V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 on each of the left and right sides.
3, which is large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign matter.

That is, the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be equal to or less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the right and left, a coin-shaped foreign matter may be inserted.

In addition, the gap V14 between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also determined using the play near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310.
If the load is shifted (deformed) by applying a load facing the rear side to the gap 10, the gap V14 can be easily enlarged, so that a coin-shaped foreign matter can be inserted into the gap V14.

In the present embodiment, a left or right gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is provided.
Alternatively, if the tilting device 310 tilts while the coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted in the gap V14 in the front-rear direction, the coin-shaped foreign matter may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 202 (a) and FIG. 202 (b), when the left and right walls of the tilting device 310 are configured so as to be narrowed inward toward the left and right toward the center in the vertical direction, the tilting device 310 easily fits the fingers of the player. While a good operational feeling can be created, the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202A) projects outward from above the constriction of the case main body 311. , A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320, so that the lower frame member 8320 can easily enter.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operation resistance becomes excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem may occur in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the light transmittance of the protective lens member 311i may be deteriorated, which may hinder the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign matter is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be executed with the operation device 8300, so that the clearance V13,
It is desirable to remove the coin-like foreign matter as soon as it is detected that a coin-like foreign matter has been inserted into the V14. However, in a state where the through-hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, the operation device 300 is used to remove the coin-like foreign matter. It needed to be disassembled.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

FIG. 203A is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG.
3A is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb, and FIG.
FIG. 03 (c) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, and FIG.
)) Is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 along a CCIIId-CCIIId line,
FIG. 203E is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 taken along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203A.

The first through hole 8326a has the same center in the left-right direction as the center in the left-right direction of the vibration device 5400, and is formed with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the (vibration device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 58)). You. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left and right central positions of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. The liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is connected to the extension 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state (FIG. 12).
(See FIG. 2). Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V14 rides on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (to the left and right when viewed in the vertical direction in the second state). Tilting device 3 because it is curved toward
In the first state of 10, an inclination D81 that inclines downward and toward the left and right center, and an inclining device 310
The coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through-hole 8326a along the inclination D82 which is inclined downward toward the front side due to the inclination (see FIG. 201).

This makes it possible to minimize the required size of the first through hole 8326a while facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter, thereby maintaining the design flexibility of the lower frame member 8320. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be more easily ensured as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly expanded right and left.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is determined by the tilting device 310 in the first state.
The portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) has a size equal to or larger than the size of the target object assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign matter. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 [m].
m].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell 313a is an LED device 341f.
(See FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, the spherical shell 31
Except for 3a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 connected to the left and right and up and down of the spherical shell 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (the mirror-finished members are fixed). Light that has passed through the spherical shell 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, since the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that reduces the amount of light, the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through-hole 8326a is partially closed, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is equal to the coin-shaped amount. Is weaker than when no foreign matter is present (a coin-like foreign matter is shadowed). That is, it is possible to easily recognize that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains in the lower frame member 8320 by using the light amount and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as clues. Member 832
The possibility of remaining at zero can be reduced. Note that this effect is achieved by the first through hole 832.
This is not limited to the case where it is visually recognized through 6a, and the same applies to the case where it is visually recognized through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

The second through-hole 8326b allows the coin-shaped foreign matter that has fallen on the bottom plate
It is configured as a through hole that can be discharged in a direction along the surface of the first surface. Therefore, in this embodiment, the left and right widths of the second through hole 8326 are set to about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is set to a size capable of discharging the largest coin-like foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin). Is formed with a width in the normal direction of about 2 [mm].

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged near the left and right centers of the bottom plate 321, the second through holes 8326 b can be easily formed even after the coin-shaped foreign matter slides down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate 321. In addition, coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed.

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibration device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be used for discharging outward beforehand.

The center axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (FIG. 20).
3 (a)), it is formed as a through hole through which coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 can be removed in an upright state (posture).

That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be formed in a size capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign matter when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is about 30 [mm] when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

When removing the coin-like foreign matter, the cover 370 is removed and the operation device 830 is removed.
0 is exposed only when viewed from the front (see FIG. 92), and the operator can access through holes 8326a to 8326c.
Can be accessed. The covering cover 370 is connected to the fastening portion 3 of the main body bending portion 371.
70a (see FIG. 91) is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with screws inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed with screws inserted vertically. Therefore, if the screws are removed with the front frame 14 opened (see FIG. 89), the cover 370 can be easily removed. Therefore, the working time can be reduced.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operation device 8300.

Note that the harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector 8353 that is opened to the right outside at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203 (b)).
. In each of the above embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even in the unlikely event that a coin-shaped foreign matter cannot be taken out, it is easy to operate by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if the replacement of the normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which the coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be promptly replaced with the normal operation device 8300.

Thus, even if a normal operation is not performed due to the coin-shaped foreign matter entering the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promptly restarted.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the case where no load is applied from the front frame 14 when the board supporting device 600 is fixed is described, the board supporting device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment is arranged so as to be able to abut on the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged in such a manner as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via the front-rear displacement member 2652. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 204 (
FIG. 204A illustrates a state in which the front frame 14 is open to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted). In FIG. 204B, the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12. The state is illustrated. In FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified, and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment includes a load transmitting device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmitting device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 disposed so as to be vertically displaceable on a front side of a plate portion (plate portion disposed on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 which is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12; The vertical displacement member 2651
A longitudinally displaceable member 2652, which is disposed so as to be in contact with the lower end of the frame and is supported so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction, a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the longitudinally displaceable member 2652,
52 is a portion which is displaceably sandwiched between the front and rear at two places and fixed to the plate portion 611a, and which comes into contact with the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653 to face the front and rear displacement member 2652 toward the front side. An urging member 2655 such as a coil spring for applying an urging force toward
Is provided.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state in which it is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state in which it is separated. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), it retracts from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), it comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb, The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 at the lower position is located at a position where a slight gap is provided between the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The longitudinal displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)), and by being pushed by the front frame 14 and being pushed backward. At the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that is inclined downward toward the distal end is formed at the rear distal end of the longitudinal displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a is moved from the vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position, to the longitudinal displacement member 262.
Reference numeral 52 denotes an inclined surface that is continuously connected to a vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where it is disposed at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652 a is provided at a position in front of the longitudinal
Is the lower position, and the inclination angle and the formation range are set so that the upper and lower displacement members 2651 are located at the upper position at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is disposed at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed by the thickness in the front-rear direction to the side where the load becomes large. be able to.

Thereby, the load which the claw member 640 after rotation applies to the game board 13 from the back side can be increased, and the state in which the game board 13 abuts on the hanging back plate portion 621d of the claw member 620 before rotation can be easily maintained. The distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board supporting device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board supporting device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of the fixing, the board supporting device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses and fixes the board against the hanging back plate portion 621d.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, a spring having a lower elastic coefficient than the spring used in the eighth embodiment is used as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Can be reduced, the degree of freedom of the operator's choice, and
Workability can be improved.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
In the case where the inverted cup portion 178 is melted with a heated piano wire and the intrusion enters the interior as it is, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are spread over the inverted cup portion 178, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are drawn.
Has been described to detect burnout due to a heated piano wire, and to detect fraud early. However, the fraud detecting device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment uses the case where the inverted cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire. In addition, it is configured to detect the heat and prevent burnout of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

FIG. 205A is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG.
(B) and FIG. 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. FIG. 205 (
FIG. 20B shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in the reduced shape, and FIG.
FIG. 5 (c) shows a state in which it has returned to the tensile shape (the stored shape) due to the application of heat. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is not
A cross-sectional view is shown at an intermediate position between the front and the back of 281.

The fraud detecting device 2280 is configured in a box shape having an opening on the rear side and the lower side, and
A main body box portion 2281 which is mounted on the rear side of the main body box portion 2281 so as to cover a rear side opening of the main body box portion 2281;
1 and a back cover member 2282, a space is formed.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner, and has an inverted cup portion 217.
8, an extending portion 2283 in contact with the left surface of the wall portion 2178 a, a narrowing portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner, and near the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowing portion 2284. A protrusion 2285 protruding upward from the front and a concave portion recessed from the rear side on the left side wall of the main body box 2281, one end of which protrudes outside the main body box 2281, and the other end is protruded from the main body box 2281. A first conductive portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281;
1 is housed in a concave portion formed from the back side in the right side wall portion, one end of which protrudes outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left and right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and has the first conduction A second conductive portion 2287 formed to have a length capable of contacting the upper surface of the portion 2286, a torsion spring SP15 for generating an urging force for pressing the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286,
A shape memory spring 2288 that rides on the upper surface of the constricted portion 2284, is supported by the protruding portion 2285, and is disposed below the second conducting portion 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287, one ends of separate wirings are respectively connected to portions protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other ends of the wirings are connected to the main control device. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 come into contact and become conductive (see FIG. 205 (b)), the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205 ( c) cuts off the conduction,
Control is performed so that an error signal is output using the disconnection as an input.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a warning is output at a high volume from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. The game is controlled so that it is impossible to play the game.

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detecting device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire can be used as it is on the long cover 173. Penetration can be prevented.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and proceeds further, is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 disposed at the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has a characteristic of maintaining a deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to a previously stored shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 is used.
, The transformation temperature is set to a temperature (about 80 °) about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to a transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2286 are connected. The conduction with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of wrongdoing can be achieved.

An extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2282 in a vertically long shape and drilled in the front-rear direction. Overhang. When the temperature returns to the low-temperature state after the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tension state, the operator presses down the extending portion 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205B). ) Again. That is, even after a fraudulent activity is discovered, the device can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the concave portion formed in the light guide member 540 has a uniform shape, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted to both surfaces has been described. The right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment includes a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upwardly concave shape formed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically illustrating the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206C schematically illustrates a downward concave portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIc of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206 (d) is a light guide schematically showing the downward concave portion 2543d provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light member 2540, and FIG. 206 (e) shows an upward concave portion 254 recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). The e is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically. In FIG. 206A, the illustration of the support plate 510 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206A, the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape that extends straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) provided on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically vertically in accordance with the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Although concave portions are formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment, in the present embodiment, the concave portions 254 are formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530.
3 can be changed.

That is, a region CCVIb disposed above and on the side of the inner lens member 530 and a region CCVIb disposed above and on the side of the outer lens member 550 with reference to the bottom of the curvature of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between c, a region CCVId located below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and a region CCVIe located below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the area CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The upward concave portion 2543b is arranged such that flat surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged), and a curved surface is arranged on the upper side and the rear side. Is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
Is hardly reflected at this position in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543b refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light to the outer lens member 550 side. The emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a direction inclined upward as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 206 (c), in the area CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The downward concave portion 2543c is formed by placing a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and in a posture in which curved surfaces are disposed on the lower side and the back side. Is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
Is hardly reflected at this position in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543c refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light to the inner lens member 530 side. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 206 (d), in the area CCVId, a downward concave portion 2543d formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The downward concave portion 2543d is formed by placing a flat surface on the upper side and on the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and having a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. Is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
Is hardly reflected at this position in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543d refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the effect of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 206 (e), in the area CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The upward concave portion 2543e has a hot press in a posture in which flat surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. Is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
Is hardly reflected at this position in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543e refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in a region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (the inclination angle with respect to the bottom is 45 ° and the diameter of the bottom circle is approximately (1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the inner lens member 5
Light emitted to 30 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206A, the light travels toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction of collecting light, and travels toward the outer lens member 550 in the direction of spreading light. Can be done. In other words, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is possible to provide a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted from both surfaces thereof.
The effect of the light emission effect can be improved while suppressing the left and right width of 0.

As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be covered by gravity, the torsion spring 3
15 can be made unnecessary.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the pushing end has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, an effect of “button that cannot be pushed” can be performed. it can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the operation end (the end of the overhang operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap occurs between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the generation of the impact sound of the collision with the lower frame member 320 during the operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and to notice that the state of the “button that cannot be pushed” is not obtained until the tilting device 310 is pushed. it can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connection pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be formed of a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disk cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, so that the engaging rib 344c is rotated forward in this state. Immediately after changing the attitude of the rotary claw member 347, the degree of ascending of the tilting device 310 can be changed. Therefore, the operating state of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 can be formed more than in the first embodiment.

In addition, the operation state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (the ascending end can be sequentially switched). Thus, it is possible to perform an effect in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched while suppressing the deterioration of the driving motor 342 by operating the driving motor 342 in one direction.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 that applies a driving force to the tilting device 310
Is described based on the operation speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of the operation, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of the operation. For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (
During the lowering operation), the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and immediately before the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end and immediately starts moving upward. Alternatively, the rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started. In this case, while the tilting device 310 is continuously pressed, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be increased. .

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage member 543 is attached to the tilting device 310.
0 may be fixed and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside. Tilt device 31
When fixing the housing member 5430 to the bottom plate portion 5321, for example,
When the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end, the protruding leg 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate 5321 so that the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400 is reduced. May be changed to switch whether or not the weight member 5412 can contact the housing member 5430.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or more, the flexible member 5420 is operated. Can be increased, and a state in which the weight member 5412 contacts the housing member 5430 can be formed. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at a high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. Can increase the variation of the production.

For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, a message such as "press a button" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press a button. By performing a display such as "Large chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilting device 310) in a specified manner is determined as a condition for transmitting vibration to the player.
It is possible to increase the player's willingness to operate the button (tilting device 310) in a specified manner, and to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be inverted from the degree of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310 in magnitude. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is low, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 may be increased, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can contact each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition that the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 is transmitted to the player, and the player is encouraged to reduce the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do.
Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from pushing the tilting device 310 with brute force, and it is possible to prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 with brute force.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibration device 5400 is arranged to be able to abut on the housing member 5430 in a state where the tilting device 310 is not pushed in,
The weight member 5412 may be formed in such a manner that the weight member 5412 can be arranged so as not to be in contact with the housing member 5430 on condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of movement. In this case, the tilting device 31
In the state where 0 is not operated, vibration can be transmitted to the player and the effect can be lively,
The player changes the production mode in a way that stops the vibration when pushed in, so that the surroundings are hard to notice (
(A difference in expectation) can be recognized, so that a premier feeling that only the player playing this machine, except for the surrounding players, can feel the change in the production mode Can be.

In addition, as a variation of the effect, when the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so as not to be in contact with each other when the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, the weight member 5
It is desired to generate both the case where the 412 and the housing member 5430 are in a position where they can be continuously contacted. This can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused by a difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, the disk cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the axis of the disk cam 5344 so that the disk cam 5344 is deformed.
Although the case where the frictional force is generated by the contact between the release member 44 and the release member 346 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is drilled partially projects in the direction approaching the disk cam 5344, and is configured to abut when the disk cam 5344 is axially deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a movable portion, a large frictional force is generated between the disk cam 5344 and the disk cam 5344 as compared with the case where the disk cam 5344 abuts on the operable release member 346. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut on the front frame 14, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the upper or lower panel support device 600 may be configured to be able to contact the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board supporting device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board supporting device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600, the game board 13
Although the case where the vertical position does not change has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front side, and the front end portion is the board surface support device 60 in the released state.
0 may be arranged below the upper surface of the rear side extension plate 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is put on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear-side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom, 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be reduced as compared with the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or may be a combination of bent back and forth and left and right. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
Immediately behind 3, it is preferable to form a long path before and after because the ball can be discharged smoothly. In addition, since the range of the foul ball passage 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed by making the path bend back and forth, it is possible to prevent the launch path from interfering with the foul ball passage 145. Can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
The position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, light reaching the player through the opening 524 is viewed faintly. In addition, the light guide member 540 does not need to bend vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straightly extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the path that bends up and down is formed by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of up, down, left, and right.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary projection 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi form a rear side wall portion 461H.
May be separated from each other by a diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the speaker. in this case,
Since the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, a load in a direction in which the speaker connection line 453 is pulled out of the speaker assembly 450 is applied to the speaker connection line 453 due to the resistance of the sandwiching. Speaker connection line 4
53 can be prevented from coming off the speaker 451.

The auxiliary protrusion 481Ha contacts the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H in the thickness direction within a range of a protrusion length corresponding to the depth of the wiring passage recess 464, and further protrudes therefrom. In the range of the length, a step may be provided in the middle so as to be separated from the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the range in which the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H form a double wall is sufficiently ensured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be held while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, in the case where the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base body 461B and the tip body 461T correspond to the speaker room, and the intermediate body 461M corresponds to the duct. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body 461M in the front-rear direction to be equal to that of the base main body 461B and the distal main body 461T, the base main body 461B and the intermediate main body 461M are expanded.
A large speaker room may be configured jointly with the M and the tip side main body 461T.

In addition, the description has been made assuming that the base-side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the distal-side main body portion 461T, but the magnitude relationship may be reversed or the same volume may be used. Speaker 45
The arrangement of 1 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be the center in the left and right direction, or may be the position between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, each of the rib portions 467a to 467a-4
Of the 67e, 487a to 487e, the adjacent rib portion is in the left-right direction (the direction connecting the base body portion 461B and the distal body portion 461T, the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491). Although the case where they do not overlap in the direction (direction intersecting with the direction) is described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rib portions adjacent to each other (for example, the rib portions 467d and 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, since the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze, for example, the front concave portion 47
By inserting a thin metal wire such as a piano wire through an opening formed by the first and rear recessed portions 491 and making the tip of the wire into the game area difficult, it is possible to prolong the time required for the illegal action, It is possible to suppress cheating. In this regard, the suppression of fraudulent acts includes suppression of fraudulent acts and gaining fraudulent profits through fraudulent acts (successful fraudulent acts).
And the like.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 is the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830.
G and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 may be configured to mesh with each other. in this case,
Since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be linked with each other, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operating device 800 but also during the expanding operation and the assembling operation. it can. Accordingly, the sliding operation of the petal 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed simultaneously, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the rotation plate 830 expands and contracts with the rotation thereof or a configuration in which the rotation plate 830 rotates about an axis different from the rotation axis may be used.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides by the operation of the drive-side arm member 910 has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal operating device 800 is connected to the tip of the second effecting member 940 so that the second effecting member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operating device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing control unit 159 when the board surface support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state will be described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit rear member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to abut against each other in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing control unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board supporting device 600 is fixed, but the upper board supporting device 600 is not fixed, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game The game board 13 disposed to face the operation unit back member 155 in accordance with the right side of the board 13 being tilted to the front side.
Is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 can interfere with each other. Thus, it is possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board supporting device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board supporting device arranged above the inner frame 12 is fixed. 6
Whether or not 00 is in a fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 which are arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board arranged above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, it is possible to restrict the front frame 14 from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. This makes it possible to remove the function of determining the state of the board supporting device 600 installed above the inner frame 12 from the multifunctional cover member 171, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171. it can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where the multifunctional cover member 171 does not come into contact with the board supporting device 600 regardless of the state of the board supporting device 600 (
(Chamfering). In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of a synthetic resin collides with the metal board support device 600, and
Since the possibility of damage to the multifunctional cover member 171 can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover) for a long time.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case will be described in which the right panel unit 500 in which light applied to the end face of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is disposed on the right end and front side of the front frame 14. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, the right panel unit 500 is configured to be switchable between a state where one surface is arranged on the front side and a case where the other surface is arranged on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). The configuration in which the right panel unit 500 rotates about a suitable axis) can switch the mode of light applied to the center frame 86. Further, the mode of light applied to the center frame 86 and the center frame 86
The effect can be diversified by switching the correspondence with the mobile character that moves inwardly.

That is, for example, out of the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is placed in a state where one surface is arranged on the front side, Consider switching between the case where it is arranged on the front side and the case where it is arranged. Inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged opposite to the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the position near the end) emits light, while the outer side of the outer cover member 560 side emits light. When the surface faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory that is arranged to face over the wide area of the opening 565 (in a wider area than the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the movable character can be switched.

In this case, for example, the moving effect can be operated in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion, so that the effect can be improved. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory, the surface of the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524, while the surface on the moving accessory side. At the timing of turning, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) in a direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. Thus, switching to change the position where light is emitted in accordance with the movement of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a for light emission control.

In the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is collected (the brightness is increased, the light amount is increased, and clear light emission is performed), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is emitted. Diffuse (lower brightness, lower light intensity, faint light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emission target (liquid crystal or moving object)
Can be changed.

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a position in which the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the moving object or the liquid crystal). In this case, the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a position arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), so that the moving role object and the liquid crystal have a beam shape (
Light can be emitted in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving role and the liquid crystal while irradiating light having a narrow width. Accordingly, it is possible to emit light in a wide range at a position distant from the moving role and the liquid crystal while emitting only the details of the moving role and the liquid crystal.

In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 are provided.
Although the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the above has been described, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as a configuration in which the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the yarn Y8, the configuration is vulnerable to the extent that the broken portion falls, and the detection sensor is disposed at a position where the broken portion passes when falling. Is also good. In this case, by detecting that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, by issuing an alarm and controlling to forcibly stop the launching of the ball, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts early, and It is possible to minimize the profit (loss of the gaming machine hall) obtained by the person who commits the wrongdoing.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations for improving the frictional force may be added. For example, the frictional force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be used to form a resin. The operating resistance may be improved by cutting into the slit member 810.

Also, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in a posture inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, a wall portion of both side slits 815 arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T includes:
A concave portion may be formed to such an extent that the inclined surface 2803T can enter. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance due to the inclined surface 2803T entering the concave portion.

In the above-described sixteenth embodiment, the case where the traveling direction of light is changed to the direction of collecting light or the direction of spreading light by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540 is described. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 depends on each area CCVIb.
Since the direction of inclination is upward in all of CCVIe, it is possible to make it easier for light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking to select a machine to play. Thereby, the pachinko machine 8010 can improve the effect of attracting customers.

Also, for example, regions CCVIc and CCV that are regions that emit light to the inner lens member 530
A downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in Ie, and an upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions where light is emitted to the outer lens member 550. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined in the upward direction. While the light can be made to easily travel toward the height of the line of sight of the person who is walking, the light traveling toward the player and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform an effect of illuminating the balls stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the balls look brilliant. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player playing the game while improving the effect of attracting pachinko machines 8010.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example,
Once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly called a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) is used to increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, besides pachinko machines, areachi, sparrow balls, slot machines,
The game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The change display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or
After a lapse of a predetermined time, the change display of the identification information is stopped and definitely displayed, and a predetermined game value is given to the player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of game media.

In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, a symbol change is started due to an operation of an operation lever,
For example, due to the operation of the stop button or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a predetermined game value is provided to the player on condition that the final symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol. Is generated, and a large number of balls are paid out to the lower saucer to the player. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, the configuration is partially changed from the above-described embodiments, and the control example will be described. The same configuration as the above-described embodiments will be described in detail. Is omitted.

  FIG. 207 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the game board 13 in the first control example has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, and a rail 76. , 77, a general entrance 63, a second entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, a distribution device 700, and the like, and the periphery thereof is formed by the inner frame 4 ( (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with a thin plate material, and is formed so that various structures provided on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof cannot be seen by a player. The general entrance 63, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like. Although details will be described later, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter and a right second ball entrance 640r are provided inside the distribution device 700. The ball that has entered the opening 710a is sorted by the sorting device 700 to one of the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r (see FIG. 208).

  The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is provided inside the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear sides. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 218) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 207) of the inner rail 76 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. At the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right portion in FIG. 207), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37a and 37b each including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 207). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 218), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the first control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b determine whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r. It is configured to be used properly according to. Specifically, when the ball has won the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated, while the ball is in the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance. When the player wins 640r, the first symbol display device 37b operates.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate in a lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change, during a time saving operation, or during a normal operation, or to indicate in a lighting state whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is changing. In addition to indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probable jackpot (jackpot A, C) or a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot (jackpot B) by a lighting state, indicating the number of reserved balls by a lighting state, A seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r has a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot types determined here, there are prepared 16R time reduction 100 times jackpot (jackpot A), 16R probability odd symbol jackpot (jackpot B1), 16R probability variable even symbol jackpot (jackpot B2), 2R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C). ing. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the change is completed, but also indicate a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot. .

  Here, the “16R time reduction 100 times jackpot” (jackpot A) means that the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the same even-numbered symbol to notify that it is a jackpot, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 After the jackpot game of the round, the game shifts to the low probability state, and during a predetermined number of times of change (for example, 100 times of change), it is a big hit in which the time is reduced. The "16R odd odd jackpot" (jackpot B1) indicates that the third symbol is a jackpot by being stopped and displayed at the end of the same odd symbol, and thereafter the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. This is a probable jackpot in which the state shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot and the electric jackpot state is reached until the next jackpot game is executed. The "16R probable odd symbol big hit" (big hit B2) means that the third symbol is finally stopped and displayed at the same even number symbol to inform that it is a big hit, and thereafter the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds After the jackpot, the game is shifted to the high probability state (until the next jackpot game is executed), and until the next jackpot game is executed, it is a probability changing jackpot that is in the electric support state. The "2R probable big hit" (big hit C) means that the third symbol is finally displayed as a specific symbol combination (chance eye), and then the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after two rounds of big hits. (Until the next jackpot game is executed) It is a probability change jackpot. In the case of the big hit C, the power support state is not set after the big hit game.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The “electric support state” in the “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the lottery probability of the second symbol is set high and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is set short. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. 640 refers to a game state in which a ball is likely to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability increases).

  During the power change during the probability change (during the power support game state) and during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. It will be changed and a longer time will be set compared to normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second entrance 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  It is to be noted that, during the electric power support and the time reduction during the probability change, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, 1 A change may be made in which the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time is increased from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit. At least one of the number of times to perform the change may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per one time are not determined. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

  In the gaming area, a plurality of general entrances 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is triggered by a winning (starting winning) of one of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r. Triggered by a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variation display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display in, and passing of a ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second symbol.

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86. In addition, the center frame 86 protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third symbol display device 81 to prevent game balls from abutting against the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, whereas the The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (a second symbol (see FIG. 207)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is moved. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during power support or during time saving during the probability change than during the normal game state. In this way, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during power saving and during working hours during the probability change, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, during the electric support during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. In the case where the ball is likely to win at the entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is attached to the game board in the area on both sides of the variable display unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured to be able to pass a part of the ball flowing down the game board 13 among the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and is also lit by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, but may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution device 700 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins (enters) through the opening 710a to the sorting device 700, the entered ball is alternately distributed to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. Can be When a ball wins (enters) the first entrance port 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. Due to this, a jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 218), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a. Further, when the ball wins the right second entrance 640r, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, as in the case of the right second entrance 640r. When the second entrance switch is turned on, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 238) performs a jackpot lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

  On the other hand, below the distribution device 700 in front view, a second ball entrance 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins at the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 238), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b. Normally, the second entrance 640 prevents the game ball from entering (it is difficult to enter) by restricting the entry of the game ball in a state where the left and right electric auditors 640a formed in a wing shape are upright. ) Configuration, and when a normal symbol described below is hit, the electric accessory 640a is rotated outward by about 45 degrees as an opening operation in a fixed operation pattern to form an inverted eight-shape. The game balls are guided to the second entrance 640 so that the game balls can easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r are each provided with five balls as prize balls when the ball wins, and the second entrance 640 receives two balls. It is also one of the winning holes paid out as balls. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance port 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance port 640, and the right Although the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640r is configured to be different, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance. The number of awarded balls paid out when a ball wins at 640 and the number of awarded balls paid out when a ball wins at the second right entrance 640r may be configured as the same number.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol during the electric support during the probability change and during the working hours is higher than that during the normal period, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter. In the display, the symbol “○” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily win the second entrance 640 can be created during probable change or during working hours, as compared with normal times.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640, so that the ball basically enters the opening 710a. When a ball is entered and the entered ball is sorted to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r, a jackpot lottery is executed.

  On the other hand, during power support or during working hours during the probability change, the ball is passed through the left or right through gate 67, so that the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since it is in a state where it is easy to win the ball entrance 640, the ball that entered the opening 710a is sorted to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r, and the second entrance A jackpot lottery associated with entering the mouth 640 is also easily executed. Therefore, the chance of the jackpot lottery increases during the normal game, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a game state according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the power is being supported during the probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation). Can change the way the ball is fired. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to any of the first entry port 64, the second entry port 640, and the right second entry port 640r becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (variation). After the time has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to become a big symbol stop symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the big jackpot. , A jackpot occurrence is indicated. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the distribution device 700 in a front view. For example, it may be to the left of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the entrances 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 640r is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. Out port 66 is arranged below distribution device 700.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 238). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 238). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (FIG. 255), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (FIG. 254). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (FIG. 253) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37a, 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the touch sensor 290, the setting switch 291, the RTC 292, the firing sensor 293, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. I have.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 238). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, power outage signal SG1 is output to main controller 110 and payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the distribution device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a partially enlarged front view of the distribution device 700. As shown in FIG. 208, the distribution device 700 is disposed below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13. A through-hole formed in the game board 13 accommodates therein a flow path portion through which a game ball entering the opening 710a flows down and a flow path portion through which a game ball entering the second entrance port 640 flows down. The base member of the distribution device 700 is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side.

  The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described opening 710a located at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a located below the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a. A through-hole (not shown) located on both sides in the left-right direction and formed in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole (not shown) located below the through-hole and formed in the front-rear direction. It is formed mainly in preparation.

  The distribution member 760 is formed in a box-shaped body with a front side opened while being formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view. The distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to be inclined downward from the substantially central position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. The left and right ends of the sorting member 760 are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

  The distributing member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from the central position in the left-right direction toward the left and right sides when viewed from the front, a distributing member 762 disposed at the center of the mutual inclined surfaces 761, and a distributing member 762. And a throwing hole formed above the main body.

  The distributing member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and is inserted into three annular projections 762a protruding outward at an interval of 90 degrees around the axis from the outer edge thereof and inside the annular shape. And a shaft portion 762b.

  The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around the axis, is formed in a columnar shape, and is inserted inside the ring of the distribution member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the interposed member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is rotatably disposed around the shaft portion 762b.

  The projection 762a is a projection for alternately allocating the ball to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball passing through the opening 710a is thrown, and the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is located. A ball is sent to the opposite side in the left-right direction. That is, the ball thrown from the opening 710a can be thrown in the left-right direction by the projection 762a at the center. The projections 762a projecting from both ends regulate the displacement of the distribution member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is positioned by the weight applied when the ball passes (the distribution member 762). The rotation of the distribution member 762 is regulated by the contact between the tip end surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the protrusion 762a at the center, the guided ball collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed down. As a result, the projection 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the projection 762a displaced downward abuts on the inclined surface to regulate the displacement.

  The inclined surface is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter, referred to as a “third ball-sending path KR3”) on which the balls distributed to the left and right by the above-mentioned distribution member 762 roll and are thrown. It is formed to be inclined downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and are sent (rolled) to the lower end of the inclined surface 761.

  At the end on the descending side of the inclined surface 761, the side surface on the back side is formed so as to incline in the direction approaching the interposed member so as to increase the thickness toward the front as it goes toward the end. As a result, the ball rolled on the inclined surface 761 and fed to the end thereof is transferred to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r of the interposition member disposed in front of the sorting member 760. Can be sent to More specifically, the ball that has been distributed to the left side in front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (enters) the first ball entrance 64. On the other hand, the ball that has been distributed to the right side in front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (enters) the right second ball entrance 640r.

  The interposed member is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the variable winning device 65 described above at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a first ball entrance 64 penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side, and a right side. The first ball entrance 640r and the right second entrance 640r penetrated in the front-rear direction.

  The first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r are respectively formed on the front sides of the left and right ends of the sorting member 760, and are formed on the back side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the spaces at the left and right ends of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r. Therefore, a path for passing a ball rolling on the upper surface of the inclined surface 761 of the above-described sorting member 760 through the first ball entrance 64 and into the through hole of the winning member 730 and a right second ball entrance 640r And a path for sending the ball to the through hole of the winning member 730 can be formed.

  The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the opening 710a is sent to the sorting member 760 and sent to the third throwing path KR3 in one of the left and right directions by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball thrown to the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the ball inside the first entrance 64 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side is thrown. The ball is sent to the fourth throwing route KR4. Here, a game ball that has entered the first entrance 64 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that a game ball has entered the first entrance 64.

  On the other hand, when the ball thrown on the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the right second entrance 640r of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. Is thrown to the fourth throwing route KR4 inside. Here, the game ball that has entered the second entrance 640 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second entrance 640r.

  In this manner, the game balls that have entered the opening 710a are alternately distributed to the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640 by the distribution member 762. It is possible to allow a game ball to enter the right second entry port 640r to uniformly generate a reserved ball. Thereby, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be generated evenly, and the number of one reserved ball becomes the upper limit, and the overflow that is not stored as the reserved ball can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not change at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. With this configuration, the lottery of more games is executed in a short time and the determination result can be displayed, so that the game can be played more efficiently.

  The third symbol is composed of main symbols of numbers from “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit B1”, one of the odd symbols “1, 3, 4, 7, 9” of the main symbols is stopped and displayed in a double-row pattern. A variable display is performed. In addition, in the case of “big hit A” or “big hit B2”, a fluctuation display is performed in which any of the main symbols of even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” is aligned. In addition, in the case of the jackpot C, the chances formed by the combination of “341” are displayed. The combination of the chances is not selected when the lottery result is out of order. In the present embodiment, the chance eyes are configured to be displayed in a specific combination of the third symbols. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and special symbols (for example, gold fish symbols) different from the normal third symbols of 0 to 9 are provided. ) May be displayed in one or a plurality of combinations, or characters such as “chance” may be displayed and notified.

  Next, the effect display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 217. As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper two-thirds are the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform a variable display. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which, when the holding ball held in the main display area Dm is changed and displayed (dynamic display), a held symbol to be changed is moved and displayed. is there. The reserved symbol moved to the execution display area is displayed as a symbol larger than the reserved symbol so that it can be identified that the corresponding special symbol is being changed. In addition, when the fluctuation is performed, the color of the symbol is changed or the pattern of the symbol is changed to indicate the lottery result of the changing special symbol.

  The small area Ds2 is a reserve that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, the right second entrance 640r, and the second entrance 640. This is an area for displaying the number of balls and a preview effect image. In the small area Ds2, a character display area C in which a preview effect image of the character is displayed when the number of the reserved balls reaches a predetermined number or more is set.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of the variable display, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the center portion, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbol are displayed so as to be visible, so that a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, the running pedestal symbol m0 indicating that the reserved ball corresponding to the running special symbol is moved and displayed is displayed in the small area Ds1, and FIG. 210 ( When the change of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is executed as shown in a), a round symbol is displayed. In addition, among the reserved symbols (circle symbols) displayed in the small area Ds2, the circle symbol displayed on the leftmost side indicating that the most reserved order is first is hidden, and thereafter, the small symbol is displayed. A round symbol having a larger diameter than the reserved symbol is displayed in Ds1. In this case, the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 moves to the position where the leftmost reserved symbol, which has been hidden, is displayed, and then the retained symbol displayed successively moves and is displayed. Is done. When the reserved symbol moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as the symbol being executed, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol to be started to change, the selected changing pattern, and the like. Then, the color and the symbol of the symbol being executed are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed and the selected change pattern based on the symbol being executed displayed in the small area Ds1. Can enhance the interest of the people. Note that the symbol being executed displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color and the pattern at the start of the change, but also the effect of changing the special symbol during the period of the change is performed. For example, the timing at which the third symbol switches from the high-speed fluctuation to the low-speed fluctuation, and the reach display mode (a display mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped at the same symbol and the middle symbol is scroll-displayed) are used. It is executed at a timing or a timing at which a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (b), in the small area Ds2, a first reserved symbol pedestal m1 indicating that the reserved symbol indicating that the reserved order is the reserved order in which the variation order is the earliest is displayed. It is displayed on the left end. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal m1, a second reserved symbol pedestal m2 indicating that the reserved order is the second, a third reserved symbol pedestal m3 indicating that the reserved order is the third, the reserved order Is a fourth pedestal m4 for a reserved symbol, indicating that the pendant is the fifth, a pedestal m5 for a reserved symbol, indicating that the pendant is the fifth, and a pedestal for the sixth reserved symbol, indicating that the reserved order is the sixth. m6, a seventh reserved symbol pedestal m7 indicating that the reserved order is the seventh, and an eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 indicating that the reserved order is the eighth, in a state where the reserved symbol is not displayed. Is also displayed.

  When the predetermined number of reserved symbols is not displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol base m5 to the eighth reserved symbol base m8, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed. The reserved number suggestion symbol P has a variable lid shape on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5, on which a character "5" indicating that the reserved order is the fifth is displayed. Similarly, the character “6” is displayed on the upper part of the sixth reserved symbol pedestal m6, indicating that the reserved order is the sixth, and the reserved order is seven on the upper part of the seventh reserved symbol pedestal m7. The variable lid shape in which the character of "7" indicating that the order is the eighth is displayed, and the character of "8" indicating that the order of the reservation is the eighth is displayed on the upper part of the eighth reserved symbol base m8. It consists of symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (b), when the reserved number is 0, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is straddled over the area from the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8. It is configured so that the player can recognize that the maximum number of reserved items is eight in total for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four pieces are set for the first special symbol and a maximum of four pieces are set for the second special symbol. In this control example, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Thus, the configuration may be such that the occurrence of overflow is suppressed.

  A character display pedestal C1 is displayed on the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 to indicate that it is an area where a notice character is displayed. With this configuration, even when the notice character is not displayed, the player can check the area where the character is displayed in advance, and can easily play the game.

  As shown in FIG. 210 (a), when the third symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed in the main area Dm (during the variance display period of the special symbol), the first entrance 64 or the right. When game balls enter the second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640, if the number of reserves corresponding to the entered special symbol is less than the maximum value, the upper part of the pedestal display corresponding to the reserve order. Will display the hold symbol. FIG. 210 (a) shows a display of a reserved symbol when the number of reserved symbols is three.

  As shown in FIG. 210 (a), until the number of reserved balls is three, the reserved number suggesting symbol P is displayed in the display area where the fifth to eighth reserved symbols are displayed. . Further, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), when the number of holdings becomes four, the variable cover symbol for displaying the fifth holding of the holding number suggesting symbol P is hidden and variably displayed. . With this configuration, when the reserved symbol is displayed up to the vicinity of the variable lid symbol, the symbol is not displayed, and the problem of the player misunderstanding the variable lid symbol as the reserved symbol and misunderstanding the actual number of reserved balls is suppressed. it can. Further, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), when the number of the reserved balls becomes four, not only the variable cover pattern in the display area of the fifth reserved ball is hidden but also the girl display It is configured to display a character design.

  Note that the character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment display suggesting the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls by a balloon, and provides the player with the maximum number of reserved balls. The number of remaining items can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls becomes seven, the character "one more" is displayed in the comment display, and when one more reserved ball is stored, the upper limit number of reserved balls is displayed. This indicates that the eight reserved balls are in the stored state. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the number up to the upper limit of the number of reserves, and in the state where the number of reserves is the upper limit, the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, right By entering one of the second entrances 640r (the entrance corresponding to the special symbol which is not the upper limit of the suspension), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the overflow that is not retained and stored.

  In the present control example, when a game ball enters the opening 710a of the sorting device 700, the distressed game ball is alternately changed by the sorting member 762 of the sorting device 700 to the first entrance 64 (first One special symbol) and the right second entrance 640r (corresponding to the second special symbol). Thereby, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be easily alternately and uniformly stored. Thereby, even when the number of retained balls of the entirety (including the first special symbol and the second special symbol) becomes seven, the player can play the game into the opening 710a without worrying about overflow. The game can be continued so that the ball enters.

  Further, when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit value, the character “MAX” indicating that the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit value is displayed, and although the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit value, the player However, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball continues to be fired and the overflow of the reserved ball occurs.

  In FIG. 211 (a), the fourth retained ball is stored, and the reserved ball is determined by the pre-reading process (Z320: see FIG. 249) in the start winning process (Z105) of FIG. The information on the selected variation pattern type is output as a winning command to the audio lamp control device 113, and based on the information, for example, when it is determined that there are various types of jackpots or missed super reach, the player The display style of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the white reserved pattern is changed to red) as an effect to give the expectation to the jackpot, and is displayed. Display it as it is without displaying it. Further, an effect is displayed in which the girl is displayed in the character display area C and the character "as is" is displayed, suggesting that the number of reserved items is not further increased. Here, when the fifth reserved ball is stored, the character “OVER” is displayed as a balloon from the girl in the character display area C as shown in FIG. You will be notified as if it overflowed. As a result, the player can be given an expectation that the fourth holding ball will be displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to prevent the player from firing and consuming the game ball) needlessly.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (a), when the number of 0 reserved balls is stored up to 4 in a short period (for example, 5 seconds), at the timing when the fourth reserved ball is stored, The fifth and sixth variable lid designs P of the pending number suggestion symbol P are hidden, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the word "early" is displayed. A notification indicating that the reserved number suggesting symbol P is specially displayed variably because of its shortness is executed. Here, normally, when the number of the retained balls is four, the variable cover symbol of the retained number suggesting symbol P is not displayed at the fifth position, but within five seconds, the number of the retained balls is zero. By increasing the number to four, a special display rule is displayed in which the fifth and sixth variable cover symbols are displayed as non-display. With this configuration, the effect to be executed can be varied depending on the increase period of the number of reserved balls or the interval at which the reserved balls are stored, and it is determined that the number of reserved balls has exceeded a predetermined number in a short period of time. Can be easily recognized. Further, in the present control example, the display mode of the variable cover symbol P is configured to be different from the normal mode. However, the display mode of the variable cover symbol P is not changed. (The color, pattern, and shape of the reserved symbol can be changed).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212 (b), a variable display example of the variable cover symbol P in the time-saving gaming state will be described. In the time-saving gaming state (the probability of determining whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol is high), unlike the normal game state (the probability of determining whether the symbol is a symbol is low), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, FIG. As shown in (5), the fifth (m5) and sixth (m6) variable cover symbols P are not displayed. Then, the character of the girl is displayed, and a character that informs the player to play the game so as to memorize up to the sixth reserved ball “insert up to 6” by a balloon is displayed. In the time-saving gaming state, the probability of determining whether or not a normal symbol is accepted is set to a high probability, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is also set to a short time, so that the ordinary electric accessory (electric support) 640a is easily set to the open state, It becomes easier for game balls to enter the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. Therefore, during the time reduction game, the overflow of the reserved ball tends to occur. Therefore, during the time reduction game, unlike the normal game, many variable cover symbols P are not displayed, and the upper limit value of the reserved ball is 8 By prompting the player to play the game so that the number of the balls becomes six, which is smaller than the number of the balls, it is possible to play the game so as to suppress the state where the reserved ball is stored up to the upper limit value and the overflow is likely to occur. it can. In the time-saving game state, the seventh (m7) variable cover symbol P is not displayed when the number of the reserved balls reaches the fifth, and the eighth (m8) variable lid symbol when the number of the reserved balls reaches the seventh. P is hidden.

  In the present control example, during the time saving game, the seventh variable cover symbol P is not displayed when the number of the reserved balls reaches the fifth ball. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The eye and the eighth variable lid symbol P may be configured to be maintained in the displayed state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game to generate six or more reserved balls.

  When the fourth ball is stored, the sixth and seventh variable lid designs are hidden according to the content of the winning command, and the girl is prompted to increase the number of balls to the sixth ball. May be displayed so as to indicate “insert up to 6”. In this way, by informing the player of the type of the jackpot game (probable change or regular hit) in advance as a benefit by putting up to 6, the player's willingness to accumulate reserved balls in the player Can be increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 213 (a) and 213 (b), the configuration is such that the type of the girl displayed in the character display area C is changed according to the pre-read result of the reserved ball (information indicated by the winning command) in which the stored type is stored. Have been. The example shown in FIG. 214 (a) is an example in which a girl character which is normally displayed when the number of reserved balls becomes four is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 213 (b), four characters are displayed. An example in which a special girl character different from the normal one is selected and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result of the look-ahead result is a specific result when the eye holding ball is stored is shown. I have. Here, the specific result is a result of winning in a lottery that determines a type of girl different from the normal time, and if the pre-read result is a jackpot or out of super reach, the winning probability is set high. . With this configuration, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation of a jackpot based on the character type of the girl displayed to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, with reference to FIGS. 214 (a) and (b), a description will be given of a display mode in a case where the number of reserved items reaches the maximum value and an over-win is made thereafter. FIG. 214 (a) shows that when the reserved number is stored up to the upper limit, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is indicated by a balloon comment that the retained number is the upper limit. Is displayed. Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is changed to the character J2. Is displayed, and the character "Overflow" indicating that overflow has occurred is displayed. In this way, when an overflow occurs, the occurrence of the overflow can be suppressed by notifying the player of the occurrence of the overflow in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the present control example, the character type is variably displayed for the purpose of suppressing the overflow. However, when the purpose is to increase the profit on the game store side, the character to be displayed is generated by causing the overflow. Depending on the type of the comment and the content of the comment, it is determined whether the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed, the pre-read result of the stored ball (whether the result of the determination), and the current game state (normal game state or positive change game state) ) May be configured to be notified. With this configuration, by playing a game while generating an overflow, the player can enjoy various effects, and can generate an overflow that is disadvantageous to the player.

  With reference to FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b), a description will be given of a display mode in a case where the during-reach holding effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 215 (a), when a variation pattern (various types of normal reach and various types of super reach) which is a reach display mode is performed, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in FIG. 262) is performed. When it is determined that the special hold effect is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 215, when the reach display mode is set, the display mode of the reach-in-reach hold effect is set. When the hold effect during the reach is executed, the fifth and sixth variable cover symbols P are hidden, the girl character J1 is displayed, and “save up to 6” in the speech balloon comment, regardless of the number of held balls. Is displayed to indicate to the player that six reserve balls are to be accumulated during the reach fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 215 (b), when up to six reserved balls are actually stored during the reach display, the reach symbol of the even symbol "6" becomes the odd symbol "7" which is a symbol type that is advantageous to the player. Variable and displayed. Further, the character "well done" is displayed in a balloon from the girl character J1, and the color of the sixth reserved symbol is changed (for example, from blue to red) and displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the emission of the game ball and play the game even during the reach, thereby increasing the profit on the game store side.

  In this control example, the example in which the reach symbol is changed when the number of reserved balls reaches the designated number (six) has been described. In some cases, instead of changing the reach symbol to an odd symbol, the main display area Dm displays an effect of swimming the fish from right to left, etc., and the degree of expectation of the jackpot is determined by the number and color of the fish. It is configured to give a notice or to provide an advance notice display that suggests the result of the validity determination such as “congratulations”.

  The display mode in the lucky hold effect will be described with reference to FIGS. When a specific change (a change won in the preliminary lottery to execute a lucky hold effect) is executed. If a previous hit was made, the number of the hold balls corresponding to the change is stored. 216, a mark symbol n6 as shown in FIG. 216 (a) is displayed on the variable lid symbol P corresponding to the number of retained balls, and corresponds to the mark symbol n6 "Aim for 6" from the girl character J1 in the character display area C. The notification that prompts the player to accumulate the reserved balls up to the reserved number is executed. As shown in FIG. 216 (b), when up to six pending balls are stored during the lucky pending effect, the characters “well done” are displayed, and when the frame button 22 is pressed, the main display area Dm is displayed. In addition, a character (preliminary display mode) indicating that a probable change jackpot is to be given to a special symbol in the course of change, "Confirmed change" is displayed.

  In this way, it is configured to notify up to the jackpot type when the jackpot game is made. In this control example, the present effect is configured to be executed when the jackpot is a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The type may be determined, the type may be reported, and a big hit may be expected.

  In addition, the lucky hold effect is such that when a hold ball stored in the variable lid pattern P (5 to 8 holds) is a hit, the number of the hold balls is stored, and the lucky hold is performed when the next big hit change is executed. It is configured to be displayed as a pending number. With this configuration, when the previous jackpot has occurred, the player can be made aware of the number of stored holds, and a state in which the number of holds is stored as much as possible is set to a lucky hold. A game can be played so that the effect is easily executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), the reserved symbol has a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls at the time of winning (the total value of the number of reserved first and second special symbols) (the number of reserved at the time of winning: FIG. 216 is displayed. When the reserved symbol is exhausted (the change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol is started), the number of held at the time of winning is slid and moved (variable) to the reserved symbol display area in which the order of variation is one smaller. Even if it is displayed, it is displayed with the same number. With this configuration, even when the change starts, the number of suspensions at the time of winning in the change can be confirmed.

  In the case of a jackpot game, the number of holds at the time of winning the jackpot game executed in the effects (opening effect, round effect, ending effect, etc.) during the jackpot game is displayed and notified by a number, a symbol, or the like. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 (a) and (b), a long-time hit (a hit game in which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state for a longer period of time than a normal hit) which is one of the hit types of the ordinary symbol A description will be given of a display mode of a hold effect when the long open effect in ()) is executed. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when a normal symbol is won for a long time and a long-time winning game is started, a comment “Opening” is displayed in the main display area Dm. This display informs the player that the long-period game is being executed, and the first ball entrance 64 or the right second entrance without firing the game ball during the long-period game which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a problem that a chance that a game ball enters the ball opening 640r is missed. Also, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r during the long game, the reserved symbol corresponding to the entry is a black color different from the normal one. It will be displayed as a pending symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to distinguish between a reserved ball stored during a long-time game and a reserved ball stored during other periods.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (b), when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol stored during the long hit game is started, the scroll display of the third symbol is started in synchronization with the start of the scroll display. , The treasure chest symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the words "Large chance if the treasure chest opens!" Are displayed, and the effect of opening the treasure chest during the change of the third symbol is performed. It is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is highly expected to be a big hit.

  With such a configuration, when a long hit of a normal symbol is executed, the effect of the reserved ball is changed, and a special effect is also performed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball. By performing a long hit, the effect of the game can be varied greatly, and a game with a fresh taste can be provided.

  Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 variably displays by displaying a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed as the ball passes through the through gate 67, and stops after the variance ends. As the symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown in a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable display in which a symbol of “○” and a symbol of “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit is displayed. Done. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”), the pachinko machine 10 operates the electric accessory 640a for a predetermined time (opens). As a result, the configuration is such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  It should be noted that, as in the present control example, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the plurality of lamps on and off in the second symbol display device 83, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is not limited to the maximum number of four balls as in the case of the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r, but is three or less, or The number may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  The sorting device 700 is disposed below the variable display device unit 80. Inside the sorting device 700, the game balls that have entered the opening 710a are alternately sorted by the sorting member 762, and the balls are distributed. Are provided with a first entrance 64 and a right second entrance 640r. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r, a first entrance switch and a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. When the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch are turned on, the main controller 110 performs a lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. This is indicated by the LED 37a of one symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r are also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls when the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are respectively entered is the same. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Good. For example, a prize for the right second entrance 640r as four prize balls when entering the first entrance 640r as three prize balls when entering the first entrance opening 64. The number of balls may be set to be larger than the number of prize balls for the first entrance 64.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated a number of times (for example, 16 times (16 rounds in the case of the big hit A)) set for the type of the big hit game to be executed. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 218). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 218). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  The special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed in order to select the special random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type. A special hit type counter C2 to be used, a stop type selection counter C3 for determining a special symbol stop type (reach hit type, out-of-reach (out-length A, out-of-short A), out-of-reach type), variation pattern selection , And an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1. Further, a random number counter C4 is used for lottery of ordinary symbols, and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting an initial value of the random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 255). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a including four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved ball of the first special symbol, and a reserved ball of the second special symbol. And a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a change type counter are provided in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, the same value is stored in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of entering the right second entrance 640r.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the ordinary winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The special random number counter C1 is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 957), and reaches 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 957 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 957). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 255).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1, for example, is periodically updated (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the special symbol big hit random number is set by a special symbol big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 221 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot when the value of the random number matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a higher probability of being a special symbol jackpot than the low probability. And the number of random hits included in each of them is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. Note that the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability special symbols and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability special symbols (see FIG. 221 (a)) are provided. Are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and is incremented by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , Reaches a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), and then returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. At the timing, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is deviated. If the random number is, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a special symbol big hit, the first symbol display device 37 is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. . In the present embodiment, four types of jackpot types are set such as “jackpot A”, “jackpot B1”, “jackpot B2”, and “jackpot C”, and “jackpot A”, One of “big hit B1”, “big hit B2”, and “big hit C” is determined. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The special random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. In the special winning random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are three random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random numbers “0 to 2” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability. 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 958, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 3, so the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “3/958”.

  On the other hand, at the time of the high probability of the special symbol, there are 27 random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value “0 to 26” is stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for the high probability. . As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 958, and the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 27. Therefore, the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “27/958”.

  In this embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, and the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability Therefore, a random number value for each jackpot is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be predicted, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 222 (a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type includes a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the first special symbol. A special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2 which is referred to in correspondence with the 2 special symbol lottery is set.

  The special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1 indicates that when the change of the first special symbol stops, the lottery result in the change is a big hit, the special symbol set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area. A determination value for matching (determining) with the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored in association with the big hit type.

  FIG. 222 (b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is “0 to 39”, the big hit type is “big hit A”. When the value was “40 to 75”, the jackpot type was “big hit B1”, and when the value was “76 to 79”, the jackpot type was “big hit B2” and “80 to 99”. In the case of the big hit type, “big hit C” is set.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that four types of hits (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, and big hit C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Have been.

  In addition, the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the change of the second special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the change is a big hit. A determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored in association with the big hit type.

  FIG. 222 (c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2, the big hit type when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is “0 to 39” is “big hit A”. When the value was “40 to 87”, the jackpot type was “big hit B1”, and when the value was “88 to 91”, the jackpot type was “big hit B2” and “92 to 99”. In the case of the big hit type, “big hit C” is set.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that four types of hits (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, and big hit C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Have been. Further, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type selected when the determination result is a big hit is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player is provided with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It can be interested in which of the lotteries is being executed. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability change jackpot to which the probability change is given to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same (60%), the probability variation ratio is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to suppress a problem in which the probability variation rate is not constant as a whole. In addition, since the selection ratio of the big hit C in the second special symbol is set lower, the probability that the 16R certain change big hit is selected is set higher than that of the first special symbol, so that it is configured to be advantageous to the player. I have.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). By the above-described stop type selection counter C3 and variation type counter CS1, rough display modes such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach are determined. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 and the detailed The symbol variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 255) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 220b) storing a random value for determining the variation time of the symbol variation from the values (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the main control device 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b includes a normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 used in a gaming state (normal gaming state) when the probability of determining whether or not the symbol is normal is low. And a time-saving variation pattern table 202b2 used in the game state (high-probability game state or time-saving game state) when the probability of determining whether or not the symbol is normal is high. In addition, as will be described in more detail later in the description of the selection of the variation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 determines whether the hit / fail judgment result, the number of pending balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the content of the rough variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time are determined, and a variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 to 224, a description will be given of the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern. FIG. 223 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the special symbol lottery results, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter are set for each of the variation patterns. The value with CS1 is assigned. In addition, when the result of the hit determination is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined in accordance with the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d based on the acquired value of the special hit counter C2). Is set. Further, when the result of the determination is incorrect, a variation pattern is set for each of the number of retained balls (one to four or five to eight) at the start of the variation.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, when the hit determination result is a hit, when the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls). If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of “0 to 50”, the normal reach jackpot A (variation) No1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “51 to 250”, the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 100”, and the variation is selected. The super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is “101 to 159”, and the super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “160 to 198”. Selected.

  When the jackpot type is “jackpot B1” or “jackpot B2”, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is set to “0” for 1 to 8 pieces (that is, regardless of the number of held balls). 60 ", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No1) is selected for the value" 0 to 198 "of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “61 to 250”, the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 100”, and the variation is selected. The super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is “101 to 159”, and the super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “160 to 198”. Selected.

  When the jackpot type is “big hit C”, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of “0 to 250” for 1 to 8 pieces of holding (that is, regardless of the number of holding balls). , The super reach jackpot D (fluctuation No. 5) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 “0 to 100”, and the super reach for the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “101 to 198”. Big hit E (fluctuation No. 6) is selected.

  As described above, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, a variation pattern that is a normal reach or a super reach having a long variation time is selected regardless of the number of holdings. Therefore, by executing a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, it is possible to make the player expect that the result of the hit determination is a big hit.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is incorrect, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of “0 to 209” for one to four reserved balls, the change type counter is If the deviation length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of CS1 “0 to 198” and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 239”, the variation type counter CS1 When the value of the normal reach A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value “0 to 198” and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “240 to 245”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is When the super-reach outlier A (variation No. 9) is selected for “0 to 198” and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “246 to 250”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “ Super reach out B (fluctuation No.10) is selected for the ～198 ".

  If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of retained balls of 5 to 8, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "210 to 239", the value of the change type counter CS1 is "0" to "198". When the normal reach A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “240 to 245”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is superimposed on “0 to 198”. When the out-of-reach A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “246 to 250”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is superimposed on “0 to 198”. Chihazure B (fluctuation No.10) is selected.

  As described above, when the result of the determination is incorrect, the change pattern is set to be easy to select when the number of reserved balls is small (when the number is 1 to 4) and the change time is long. By allowing a game ball to enter the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r, a reserved ball is likely to be generated, and a period in which the change of the special symbol is stopped occurs (the lottery game is not performed). It is configured such that a trouble that the player gets tired of the game due to the occurrence of the period) can be suppressed. Also, when the number of reserved balls is large, the selection rate of normal reach or super reach is set to be low, and when the number of reserved balls is large, the variation of normal reach or super reach is executed, so that the player determines whether the ball is hit or not. Can be expected to win.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 224, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time-saving variation pattern table 202b2. In the time-saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are set for each of the variation patterns. Is assigned. In addition, when the result of the hit determination is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined in accordance with the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d based on the acquired value of the special hit counter C2). Is set. Further, when the result of the determination is incorrect, a variation pattern is set for each of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation (one or two or three to eight).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 224, when the hit determination result is a hit, when the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls). If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of “0 to 90”, the normal reach jackpot A (variation) No1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of “91 to 250”, the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 100”, and the variation The super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is “101 to 159”, and the super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “160 to 198”. Selected.

  When the jackpot type is “jackpot B1” or “jackpot B2”, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is set to “0” for 1 to 8 pieces (that is, regardless of the number of held balls). In the case of any of "100", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No1) is selected for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “101 to 250”, the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 100”, and the variation is selected. The super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is “101 to 159”, and the super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “160 to 198”. Selected.

  When the jackpot type is “big hit C”, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of “0 to 250” for 1 to 8 pieces of holding (that is, regardless of the number of holding balls). , The super reach jackpot D (fluctuation No. 5) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 “0 to 100”, and the super reach for the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “101 to 198”. Big hit E (fluctuation No. 6) is selected.

  As described above, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, a variation pattern that is a normal reach or a super reach having a long variation time is selected regardless of the number of holdings. Therefore, by executing a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, it is possible to make the player expect that the result of the hit determination is a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the result of determination is incorrect, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of “0 to 209” for one or two reserved balls, the change type counter is When the deviation length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of CS1 “0 to 198” and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 229”, the variation type counter CS1 If the value is "0 to 198" and normal deviation A (variation No. 8) is selected, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is If the super reach A (variation No. 9) is selected for “0 to 198” and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “240 to 250”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “ Super reach out B (fluctuation No.10) is selected for the ～198 ".

  When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 199" for the number of retained balls of 3 to 8, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "198". If the normal reach A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “200 to 229”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is superimposed on “0 to 198”. When the out-of-reach A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “230 to 239”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is superimposed on “0 to 198”. Chihazure B (fluctuation No.10) is selected.

  Here, the variation time (variation period) in the variation pattern of the deviation short B is set to 2000 ms (2 seconds), and is configured to be shorter than the variation time that can be selected in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. I have. As a result, when the result of the determination is incorrect and the number of reserved balls is three or more, the short symbol B is selected with a high probability, so that the special symbols can be changed more frequently in a short time. In addition, it is possible to easily shorten the period until the jackpot is determined (the period between the jackpots), thereby increasing the efficiency of the game.

  The ordinary random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the ordinary random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a normal symbol hit is set by a normal random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device. If the value of the random number matches the winning set in the normal winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. Further, the ordinary random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) is used for the low probability of the ordinary symbol (the period in which the ordinary symbol is in the normal state) and the probability that the ordinary symbol is hit from the low probability. There are two types, one for high-probability times (a period in which the symbol is usually in a time-saving state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Further, as the hit type of the normal symbol, a normal hit and a long hit are set, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set respectively.

  Here, in the normal winning of the normal symbol, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), in the big hitting gaming state, the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is operated to the open state in the open time of 0.2 second is executed once. It is a hit. In addition, during the working hours, during the probable change period, the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time hit is a time when the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state in the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed during the probable change period and the opening operation during the long period are set to be the same during the normal working hours, but the invention is not limited thereto. Opening operation. Specifically, for example, the operation to be in the open state may be performed once for three seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ball enter the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r at the time of hitting for a long time, and the fluctuation in the second special symbol during the normal game. The display can be easily executed, and the change display of the second special symbol in which a notice notice with a fresh taste or the like is displayed allows the player to enjoy a change in the game effect.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), when the value of the acquired ordinary hit random number counter C4 is one of 5 to 6 at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, the normal symbol of the ordinary symbol is obtained. Is determined. Also, if it is one of 7 to 8, it is determined that it is a normal symbol long time hit. On the other hand, if the value of the obtained ordinary random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, it is determined that the ordinary symbol is the ordinary winning. In addition, at the time of the high probability of the normal symbol, the configuration was such that the long hit of the normal symbol was not set. However, at the time of the high probability of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is the same as the long hit. The hit is substantially the same as the long hit.

  In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency at which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency of entering the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of the game ball by the player and increase the profit on the game store side. On the other hand, during the short working hours and the probable change period in which the probability is high, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640a to operate can be given with a probability of “1 / 1.2”, and the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance is provided. The opportunity to enter the 640r can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball by the player and set a gaming state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game with a high probability of playing the game, and can play the game for a longer time.

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained ordinary random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 8”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) , A symbol “○” is displayed. If the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is “5 to 6”, the electric accessory 640a is opened (opening operation) for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” as a normal hit. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol hits, but the opening is performed. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened. If the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is “21 to 28”, the right second entrance 640r is opened for “2 seconds × 2 times” as a long hit.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in the normal random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 221 (c)). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. If the value of the obtained ordinary random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stopped symbol (the second symbol). The symbol “○” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened “2 seconds × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the right second entrance 640 r Since the opening period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 times → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the right second entrance 640r is opened only for “2 seconds × 2 times” when a normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the ordinary random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243). Are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 255).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 218, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 219, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 255), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 254). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 220 (a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221), the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 221 (b)), In addition to the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 222 (a) to (c)), a winning command table 202e is set. Although omitted in the present control example, the ROM 202 stores, in addition to the above, various data necessary for the game, programs, and the like.

  FIG. 225 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the winning command table 202e. In the winning command table 202e, in the look-ahead process (S320: FIG. 249) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a determination result such as a variation pattern in which a stored ball is selected at the start of variation is determined. It is a table for determining a winning command corresponding to a result. As shown in FIG. 225, when the lottery result in the pre-reading is a big hit, a winning command corresponding to the determined big hit type and the selected variation pattern type is determined. As a result, not only the variation pattern type and the hit / failure determination result but also the jackpot type can be notified by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. When the lottery result is out of order, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. In the winning command table 202e, the same winning command “C100” is set in the winning command table 202e as any of the variation pattern types of outlier length A, outlier short A, and outlier short B.

  As shown in FIG. 220 (b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, open count counter 203g, long time open flag 203i, time reduction counter 203j, change execution It has a flag 203k, a probability change flag 203m, a big hit flag 203n, a fluctuation order storage area 203p, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. Also, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores an ordinary winning random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is obtained at the timing when the ball passes through the right or left through gate 67, and the obtained data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). ) Are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) in the vacant areas indicated by ()). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the order of winning is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prize stored in the other reserved areas is the same as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the counter value increases to a maximum value of 4. One is added (see Z404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see Z205 in FIG. 33).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N of times of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see Z206 in FIG. 33 and Z405 in FIG. 35). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the retained balls based on winning in the right second entrance 640r, and the other configuration is the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls in the variable display retained in 110 itself. As a result, the number of balls to be changed, which is managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is retained in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even in the case where the actual deviated display shows a deviation from the held ball count, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f counts up to four times the number of waiting balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of retained balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4 ( (See Z504 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see Z406 in FIG. 250).

  When the ball passes through the right or left through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of changing display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is obtained. Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (Z505 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the right or left through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (FIG. Z503 of No. 252: No).

  The opening number counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times the electric accessory 64c is opened. The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

  The long-time release flag 203i is a flag indicating that a long time is being hit. The long time release flag 203i is set to ON in the process of Z429 in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 251) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, in the process of Z403 in the normal symbol variation process (Z106: FIG. 250), when the variation of the ordinary symbol is newly started (after the long-time winning game is executed, the variation of the next ordinary symbol is started. Off).

  The time reduction counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203j during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and a special symbol jackpot is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Is done. In other words, when the special symbol hits, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is newly set regardless of the value of the time reduction counter 203j.

  The change execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether to execute the change of the first special symbol or the change of the second special symbol. In the present control example, the change is started according to the order in which the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r are entered (the order in which they are stored and held). Here, when the change of the special symbol is stopped and the change of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, the change execution determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (Z204: FIG. 245). Thus, it is determined whether the next variation stored is the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the pending data based on the pending storage order data stored in the later-described variation order storage area 203p. Then, the corresponding variation execution flag 203k is set to ON according to the determination result (Z245, Z247 in FIG. 245).

  The probability change flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current game state is the probability change game state. This probability change flag 203m is determined when the jackpot game being executed is other than the jackpot A in the process of Z1113 in the jackpot control process (Z1104: FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 ( Z1111: No), it is set to ON. In the special symbol variation process (Z104: FIG. 244) performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the process is set to off when the variation display of the special symbol that is a big hit is stopped.

  The big hit flag 203n is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a big hit game. The big hit flag 203n is set to ON when the start of the big hit game is set in the process of Z221 of the special symbol change process (Z104: FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the big hit control process (Z256: FIG. 256) of Z1114 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the big hit game end timing comes, it is set to off.

  The fluctuation order storage area 203p is an area in which, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second right entrance 640r and is stored as a reserved ball, the reserved order is stored. In the present control example, the change of the special symbol is configured to be executed in the order in which the special symbol is stored, and one of the special symbols is not executed with priority. Further, in the present control example, since the sorting device 700 is configured to be alternately assigned to the first entry port 64 and the right second entry port 640r, the change is started in the order in which the entries are stored. Therefore, even in the fluctuation of the special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed alternately, and only one of the retaining balls is digested, so that the retaining ball of the special symbol is used. The problem of overflow can be suppressed.

  In the other memory area 203z, necessary flags, counters, storage data, and the like in other control processes executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but the details are omitted.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a change pattern selection table 222a, a hold change selection table 222b, a hold effect mode selection table 222c, a hold lid range selection table 222d, and a hold lid command selection. Table 222e, hold lid color change selection table 222f, lucky hold command table 222g, background mode selection table 222h, hold character selection table 222i, hold character change table 222j, speech balloon selection table 222k, reach effect lottery table 222m, reach start time A calculation table 222n and a lucky hold lottery table 222p are stored.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on a variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are respectively set corresponding to the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command. One fluctuation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

  The pending change selection table 222b determines whether or not to display the pending symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 variably based on the received winning command, and is required for an effect to be executed according to the content of the change. 9 is a selection table for acquiring a suitable pending change value.

  FIG. 227 (a) schematically shows the contents of the pending change selection table 222b. In the hold change selection table 222b, the value of the effect counter 223h is assigned to the type of the received winning command, and the display for changing the hold symbol of the sub display area Ds with respect to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. The mode (see FIG. 211A) and the pending change value are set. The details of the acquired hold change value will be described later in a hold effect mode selection table 222c.

  Specifically, when the winning command type is out of order, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 180”, the display mode of the reserved symbol is not changed from the normal reserved symbol. Is determined, and the pending change value obtains 0. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “181 to 198”, the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed from a white circle symbol (a normal reserved symbol display mode) to a blue circle symbol (change A). And the pending change value gets 1.

  If the winning command type is out of normal reach, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", no change is determined, and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is any of "51 to 100", the change A is determined and the pending change value acquires 1. In the case of any of “101 to 198”, it is determined that the white circle symbol is changed to the green circle symbol and displayed, and “2” is acquired as the pending change value.

  If the winning command type is out of super reach, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 30”, no change is determined, and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is any of “31 to 90”, the change A is determined and the pending change value acquires 1. If it is any of “91 to 198”, the change B is determined, and the pending change value acquires 2.

  When the winning command type is the normal reach jackpot, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “0 to 20”, it is determined that there is no change, and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is any of "21 to 90", the change A is determined and the pending change value acquires 1. If it is any of “91 to 198”, the change B is determined, and the pending change value acquires 2.

  When the winning command type is the super reach jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “0 to 10”, it is determined that there is no change, and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is any of "11 to 100", the change A is determined and the pending change value acquires 1. If it is any of “101 to 189”, the change B is determined, and 2 is acquired as the pending change value. In the case of any one of “190 to 198”, it is determined that the white circle symbol is changed to the red circle symbol and displayed, and 3 is acquired as the pending change value.

  In this way, by receiving the winning command, the color of the reserved symbol is changed and displayed according to the content thereof, so that not only the special symbol in the variable display but also the reserved symbol displayed is retained and stored. It is possible to predict the success / failure determination result corresponding to the held symbol. In addition, the player can be notified in advance that the reach display mode will be achieved when the display is variably displayed in the change B. Therefore, even if the special symbol is not changed, the hold storage may be performed. For example, it is possible to make the player expect that the change will be started, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game even if the change of the special symbol that is lost during the change is executed. Furthermore, by setting a hold change value for each reach type, it is possible to develop a reach effect via a different execution effect even for the same hold change, and a player with an unexpected effect It is possible to attract.

  The holding effect mode selection table 222c is a table for selecting a plurality of modes prepared according to the holding change displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  FIG. 227 (b) schematically shows the contents of the hold effect mode selection table 222c. In the hold effect mode selection table 222c, the hold effect mode is set according to the value (range) of the hold change value acquired in the hold change selection table 222b (see Z2404 in FIG. 266). Specifically, when the hold change value is “0”, the normal mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. The normal mode is a state in which all the holding symbols being displayed are not changed (state), and when the number of the holding balls becomes four or more, the distance between the holding symbol and the display range of the variable cover symbol P is one. This mode is variably displayed (see FIG. 210B).

  If the pending change value is any of “1-2”, the preliminary effect A mode is determined (selected) as the pending effect mode. The notice A mode is a state in which any change (any of change A to change C) is set to the held symbol being displayed (state), and when the number of held balls becomes four or more, the held symbol is held. This is a hold effect mode in which the display range of the symbol and the variable cover symbol P is displayed without an interval (see FIG. 211 (a)). Note that, strictly speaking, FIG. 211 (a) is not a display mode representing the notice A mode, but an example of a display mode of a hold effect mode of a notice B mode described later. In the notice A mode, the content of the displayed comment in the state of FIG. In the notice A mode, when a reserved ball is generated after the reserved symbol whose color has been changed and the reserved symbol is displayed, one variable cover symbol P is not displayed accordingly (for example, the state of FIG. 211 (a)). Is increased (occurs) by one, so that the variable cover symbol P with the character 5 is hidden), and the comment indicating the degree of expectation to the jackpot for the symbol with the variable color is changed. The display is performed by a balloon. As described above, in the notice A mode, after the color of the reserved symbol is changed, in order to cause the game to be performed so as to generate the reserved ball, every time the reserved ball is generated, the big hit against the variable reserved ball is performed. It is configured to notify the degree of expectation.

  When the suspension change value is “3”, the preliminary effect B mode is determined as the suspension effect mode. The notice B mode is a case where the reserved symbol being displayed changes, and when the number of reserved balls becomes 4 or more, any change (change A , Change B, change C) is set (state), and when the number of reserved balls becomes four or more, there is no space between the display range of the reserved symbol and the variable cover symbol P. (See FIG. 211 (a)) or a mode in which a reserved symbol is displayed on the display range of the variable lid symbol P (see FIG. 211 (b)).

  With such a configuration, the display range of the variable cover symbol P can be variously changed not only by changing the color of the reserved symbol but also by increasing or decreasing the number of reserved balls. The pleasure of playing can be expanded, and it is possible to attract players. Also, unlike the notice A mode, this is a hold effect in which the player performs a game so as not to generate a hold ball any more, and the player interrupts the game (the operation of firing the game ball) to change the color. The expectation can be increased by focusing on the start of the change (dynamic display) of the special symbol corresponding to the held symbol. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The reserved cover range selection table 222d includes a plurality of data tables for acquiring a reserved cover range value required for setting the display range of the variable cover symbol P displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. Is set.

  Here, a special effect performed during the normal mode will be described. In the normal mode, as special effects, a short-term winning effect, a hold effect during a reach, and a lucky hold effect are provided.

  The short-term winning effect is an effect that is executed when the required time from the state where the number of reserved balls is 0 to the number of retained balls and becomes 1 to 4 is less than 5 seconds, and is normal. In the mode, the interval between the reserved cover symbol P and the reserved symbol is set to be one reserved ball (the reserved cover symbol P is variably displayed), but in the short-term winning effect, FIG. And the number of the reserved cover symbols P is variably displayed so that the interval between the reserved cover symbols P and the reserved symbol becomes two, and a girl character J0 indicating that it is a short-term prize production is displayed. This is a production in which the comment "Early" is displayed. In the short-term prize production, when the game state is the normal state, no other special production is executed (the value of the special production status storage area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of reserved balls has changed from 0 to 1 or more. In this case, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 when the number of reserved balls becomes four before the short-time prize timer 223q for measuring the elapsed time has elapsed 5 seconds (see Z2425 in FIG. 267). ) To start the execution (see FIG. 212 (a)), and when the short-time prize timer 223q has passed 5 seconds, set the special effect status storage area to 0 (see Z2606 in FIG. 270) and end the execution. It is.

  The “reach pending effect” is an effect that sets a notice display mode that prompts the player to play a game so as to accumulate a predetermined number (for example, six in FIG. 215 (a)) during the reach fluctuation. . In this reach pending effect, when the variation type is reach, whether or not to execute is determined based on a reach effect lottery table 222m described later, and when the execution is permitted, a reach start time calculation described later is calculated. The value of the hold effect start timer 223r set based on the variation type by the table 222n becomes 0 after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, and another special effect is executed at the timing when the reach effect starts. If not (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the execution is started by setting the special effect status storage area to 2 (see Z2327 in FIG. 262) (see FIG. 215 (a)). This is an effect that ends when the fluctuation ends.

  The lucky holding effect is to store the number of holdings when the holding ball (holding symbol) is stored (displayed), and when a jackpot (specific determination result) occurs, the holding ball that has become the jackpot is A predetermined mark symbol (see FIG. 216 (a)) is displayed in a reserved symbol display area corresponding to the number of retained tokens at the time of entering the entrance, so that the reserved balls can be stored up to the marked symbol. This is an effect of displaying a notice display mode that prompts a player to play a game. When the reserved symbols are stored up to the mark symbol, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), pressing the frame button 22 causes the player to enter the current gaming state (probable changing gaming state (special gaming state) or low probability gaming state). An effect of notifying the state (normal game state) is executed. In the lucky hold effect, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and when the winning determination is made in the past, the value of the number of held balls is determined. Is stored when the lucky hold storage value 223p is stored. When the lucky hold storage value 223p is stored, the possibility of execution is determined based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p described later. The execution is started (see FIG. 216 (a)) by setting the value of the special effect status storage area 223n to 3 (see Z2307 in FIG. 261), and ends when the next change starts.

  As described above, even during the normal mode in which there is no change in the hold, the hold effect related to the hold symbol is displayed in the time interval of the start winning, the number of the held balls in the reach change, and the result of the winning / failing determination based on the past start winning. Various effects can be provided depending on the stored contents and the effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 228 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the reserved lid range selection table 222d. The reserved cover range selection table 222d includes a normal reserved cover range selection table 222d1, a notice A mode reserved cover range selection table 222d2, a preliminary B mode reserved cover range selection table 222d3, a short-time winning reserved cover range selection table 222d4, and a reach effect. A holding lid range selection table 222d5 and a time reduction holding lid range selection table 222d6 are provided.

  The normal reserved cover range selection table 222d1 is a table used to acquire a reserved cover range value when the reserved effect mode is the normal mode. FIG. 228 (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal hold lid range selection table 222d1. In the normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1, a reserved lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of retained balls. In the normal mode, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the game state is the normal state (low-probability game state (the jackpot probability is low probability and the non- In the game state), a reserved lid range value is acquired (see Z2354 in FIG. 263), and a lucky pending effect is produced (the value of the special production status storage area 223n is 3), and a reserved lid range value is acquired (FIG. 263). Z2346).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is “0 to 3”, 4 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “4”, 3 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “3”, 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “2”, 1 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “1”, 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “0”, 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

  The notice A mode hold lid range selection table 222d2 is a table used to acquire a hold lid range value when the hold effect mode is the notice A mode. FIG. 228 (c) schematically shows the contents of the notice A mode hold lid range selection table 222d2. In the preliminary A mode hold lid range selection table 222d2, a hold lid range value is acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2351 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is “0 to 3”, 4 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “4”, 4 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “3”, 3 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “2”, 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “1”, 1 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “0”, 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

  The notice B mode hold lid range selection table 222d3 is a table used to acquire a hold lid range value when the hold effect mode is the notice B mode.

  FIG. 228 (d) schematically shows the contents of the notice B mode hold lid range selection table 222d3. In the preliminary B mode retaining lid range selection table 222d3, a retaining lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of retained balls and the value (range) of the retaining preliminary counter (see Z2349 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is “0 to 4”, and when the value of the pending notice counter is “0 to 4”, 4 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is “5 to 8”, when the value of the reserved notice counter is “1 to 4”, the reserved cover range value is 4 and the value of the reserved notice counter is “5”. In the case of, when the hold lid range value is 3 and the value of the hold advance notice counter is "6", the hold lid range value is 2 and when the value of the hold advance notice counter is "7", As the reserved lid range value, 1 is acquired, and when the value of the reserved advance notice counter is “8”, 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

  The short winning prize holding lid range selection table 222d4 (FIG. 229 (a)) is a table used to acquire a holding lid range value when executing a short prize winning effect. FIG. 229 (a) schematically shows the contents of the short-time prize holding lid range selection table 222d4. In the short-time prize holding lid range selection table 222d4, a holding lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2342 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is “4”, 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “5”, 1 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “6 to 8”, 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

  The reach effect pending lid range selection table 222d5 is a table used to acquire the reserved lid range value in the case of the reach pending effect. FIG. 229 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reach effect pending lid range selection table 222d5. In the reach effect pending lid range selection table 222d5, a retained lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of retained balls (see Z2344 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is “0 to 8”, 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

  The special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the special effect is not in the normal mode and the game state is the time reduction state (the value of the counter during the time reduction is not 0). 7) is a table used to acquire the hold lid range value in FIG.

  FIG. 229 (c) schematically shows the contents of the time-saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6. In the time-saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6, a reserved lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of retained balls (see Z2353 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is “0 to 6”, 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “7”, 1 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is “8”, 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

  With such a configuration, the display range of the variable cover symbol P to be displayed is variously changed in accordance with the hold determination switched according to the determination of the winning at the time of the start winning or the variation type, thereby providing the player with It is possible to express a production effect that enhances participation.

  The reserved lid command selection table 222e sets the display range of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved lid range value acquired in the reserved lid range selection table 222d. Is a table used to select a command for performing the operation.

  FIG. 230 (a) schematically shows the contents of the hold lid command selection table 222e. The reserved cover command selection table 222e sets a reserved cover command to be transmitted to the display control device for the reserved cover range value (range) acquired by the reserved cover range selection table 222d.

  Specifically, when the reserved lid range value is “0”, the reserved lid command is determined to be BF00, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is the shortest display (see FIG. 214 (a)). When the reserved cover range value is “1”, the reserved cover command is determined to be BF01, and the display range of the variable cover symbol P is 1 (only the reserved 8 area). When the reserved lid range value is “2”, the reserved lid command is determined to be BF02, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 2 (the area of reserved 7 to 8 (see FIG. 212 (a))). When the reserved lid range value is “3”, the reserved lid command is determined to be BF03, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 3 (the area of reserved 6 to 8 (see FIG. 213 (a))). When the reserved cover range value is “4”, the reserved cover command is determined to be BF04, and the display range of the variable cover symbol P is 4 (the area of reserved 5 to 8 (see FIG. 211A)).

  The setting of the holding lid command is performed in the holding lid setting processing (Z2229) executed in the winning command receiving processing (Z2209) at the time of starting winning, and is executed in the fluctuation pattern receiving processing (Z2202) at the start of fluctuation. This is performed in the holding lid setting process (Z2229). Therefore, the display of the variable lid symbol P can be changed by setting the display reserved lid command based on the retained lid range value (see Z2355 in FIG. 263) every time the number of retained balls changes.

  The reserved lid color change selection table 222f indicates the designated number (in the example shown in FIG. 211 (a), when the advance notice effect indicating that the reserved number shown in FIG. 4 is a data table for determining a reserved cover symbol P corresponding to an area where the reserved symbol is displayed, when a reserved ball is generated exceeding (4 pieces). The reserved lid pattern P determined in the reserved lid color change selection table 222f is normally (normally, a black frame, the inside is transparent white, and a number indicating the number of reserved corresponding to the reserved display area is displayed inside. Displayed in a different manner from the specified color (the internal color is green with transparency). In the reserved lid color change selection table 222f, the secondary display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the reserved advance notice counter 223g for recognizing the display position of the reserved colored symbol to be described later and the current number of retained balls. It is a table for selecting a command for setting a range of a color change of a reserved cover symbol P displayed in an area Ds.

  FIG. 230 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the hold lid color change selection table 222f. When the hold effect mode is the notice B mode, the hold lid color change selection table 222f specifies a color change range for the value (range) of the hold notice counter 223g and the value (range) of the number of held balls. In accordance with the change range, a hold lid command for changing the display range of the variable lid symbol P from a normal white display mode to green (see FIG. 211 (b)) is set (see Z2348 in FIG. 263). I do.

  Specifically, when the value of the hold notice counter 223g is any of “0 to 4”, and when the value of the number of held balls is any of “0 to 4”, the hold lid command is No setting, no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the reserved cover command is determined to be BF10, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is five. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the reserved cover command is determined to be BF11, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 6. When the value of the number of reserved balls is “7”, the reserved cover command is determined to be BF12, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the reserved cover command is determined to be BF13, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 8.

  When the value of the suspension notice counter 223g is "5", when the value of the number of retained balls is "5", the reserved lid command is not set, and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is “5”, the reserved cover command is determined to be BF20, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is six.

  When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the reserved cover command is determined to be BF21, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is “7”, the reserved cover command is determined to be BF22, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 8.

  When the value of the suspension notice counter 223g is "6", and when the value of the number of retained balls is "6", the reserved lid command is not set, and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of retained balls is “7”, the BF30 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of retained balls is seven. When the value of the number of reserved balls is “8”, the reserved cover command is determined to be BF31, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of reserved balls is 7 to 8.

  When the value of the suspension notice counter 223g is “7”, and when the value of the number of retained balls is “7”, the reserved lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of retained balls is “8”, the BF 40 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is specified in an area where the number of retained balls is eight.

  When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "8", and when the value of the number of held balls is "8", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range.

  As described above, by changing the display mode in an area different from the reserved symbol that is changed by the determination of the winning / non-prize determination result in the previous winning (pre-reading determination), attention to the player can be further increased. At the same time, the player can freely determine the degree to which the number of reserved balls is to be increased depending on whether or not to stop launching, so that it is possible to enjoy a wide variety of reserved symbol modes and later fluctuation announcement effects.

  The lucky hold command table 222g is a table for selecting a command for changing the display mode of the variable cover symbol P displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of target hold balls.

  FIG. 231 schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold command table 222g. In the lucky hold command table 222g, when the lucky hold effect is being produced, the area of the target number of held balls is stored by the lucky hold storage value 223p, and the display hold lid command is set based on the value (FIG. 261). Z2306).

  More specifically, when the lucky hold storage value 223p is 5, the hold cover command FB50 is determined, and the area of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 6, the hold lid command FB51 is determined, and the area of the variable lid pattern P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle (see FIG. 216 (a)). When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 7, the hold lid command FB52 is determined, and the area of the variable lid symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 8, the hold lid command FB53 is determined, and the area is changed so that the area 8 of the variable lid symbol P is surrounded by a circle.

  In this way, by notifying the number of reserved balls whose winning / failure determination result has become a big hit in the previous start winning prize, the interest of the game is raised, and when the number of reserved balls is small (less than 5), the player is notified to the player. It is possible to encourage the player to win a prize, and an effect that improves operation can be realized.

  The background mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting a background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the background mode storage area 223i. FIG. 232 (a) schematically shows the contents of the background mode selection table 222h. In the background mode selection table 222h, the background mode is selected for the value of the background mode storage area 223i.

  Specifically, when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 0, the background A (sea background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 1, the background B (mountain background) is determined. When the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 2, the background C (river background) is determined. When the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 3, the background D (city background) is determined. .

  The hold character selection table 222i displays the contents (type) of the hold character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the background, the hold effect mode, and the effect counter 223h. This is a table for selecting (determining) the contents.

  FIG. 232 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reserved character selection table 222i. The hold character selection table 222i stores the hold character for the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode stored in the hold effect mode storage area 223m, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. Are set (see Z2363 in FIG. 264). The reserved characters are J0, a girl with short hair (see FIG. 210 (b)), J1 is a girl with tied hair (see FIG. 213 (a)), and J2 is a girl with long hair (see FIG. 213 (b)). ), An image that a player can easily identify like a blonde girl with long hair (not shown) is prepared.

  Specifically, when the background mode is “background A”, when the suspended effect mode is “normal mode”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 150”, J0 (see FIG. 210 (b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “151 to 189”, J1 (see FIG. 213 (a)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 213 (b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the pending effect mode is the "advance notice A mode" or the "advance notice B mode", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “100 to 199”, J2 is determined as the reserved character.

  When the background mode is any one of “background B”, “background C”, and “background D”, and when the pending effect mode is “normal mode”, the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 150”. If it is either one, J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “151 to 189”, J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character. When the pending effect mode is the "advance notice A mode" or the "advance notice B mode", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “100 to 199”, J3 is determined as the reserved character.

  In this way, by determining each of the hold characters having a high degree of expectation according to the difference between the hold effect mode and the background changed from the start winning, the display mode of the hold effect having a high expectation degree is maintained without impairing the atmosphere of the background effect. It becomes possible. In addition, the player can recognize a notice with a high degree of expectation, in addition to a change in the held symbol and a change in the held character.

  In addition, the number of fluctuations executed as the game is performed, the number of jackpots, the number of executions of the super reach, and a symbol or a character to which a point displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the game production is obtained. May be configured to store the history information such as the number of points obtained by the above, and change the character to be selected in consideration of the history information. With this configuration, the selected character can be changed as the game is played, and the problem that the player gets tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In addition, an RTC (real-time clock) may be provided to change the character selected based on the date and time information. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the character to be selected with the lapse of time since the introduction of the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to suppress a problem of getting tired of the game.

  The hold character change table 222j stores the contents of the hold character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 with the background, the hold effect mode, the current hold character, and the effect counter 223h. It is a table for selecting based on the.

  FIG. 233 schematically shows the contents of the pending character change table 222j. The hold character selection table 222i includes the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode stored in the hold effect mode storage area 223m, the current hold character in the display mode, and the value of the effect counter 223h. For (range), the content of the pending character to be changed is set. The change of the reserved character is selected when the winning prize is started when the reserved ball number is the upper limit value and the winning is over (Z2366: Yes), and the display character command is set (see Z2267 in FIG. 264). . If the selected character is different from the currently displayed character, the character is changed (variable). If the selected character is the same as the currently displayed character, the changed character is changed. (Variable) does not occur.

  Specifically, when the background mode is “background A”, when the hold effect mode is “normal mode”, when the current hold character is “J0”, the value of the effect counter 223h is “ If it is any of "0 to 180", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “181 to 189”, J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 214 (b)) is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is “J1”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 190”, J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “191 to 189”, J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is “J2”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 199”, J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the pending production mode is either "Advance notice A" or "Advance notice B", when the current pending character is "J0", when the value of the production counter 223h is any of "0 to 80" Has no change since J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "81 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is “J1”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 90”, J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “91 to 199”, J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is “J2”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 199”, J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

  When the background mode is any one of “background B”, “background C”, and “background D”, when the hold effect mode is “normal mode”, when the current hold character is “J0”, If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "151 to 199", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. If the current reserved character is “J1”, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 170”, J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “171 to 199”, J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. If the current reserved character is “J3”, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 199”, J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the pending production mode is any of "Advance notice A" and "Advance notice B", when the current pending character is "J0", the value of the production counter 223h is any of "0 to 50" Has no change since J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "51 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is “J1”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 70”, J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “71 to 199”, J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. If the current reserved character is “J3”, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 199”, J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

  As described above, by changing the reserved character by the over prize, the player can have a means of confirming the pass / fail result within the current number of reserved balls by the over prize, thereby increasing interest in the game. it can. In addition, as for the held character to be changed, a character having a higher expectation is set after the change than before the change, and when the hold effect mode is not in the normal mode, the change ratio of the held character is set to be higher. Therefore, when there is a change in the pending production mode, the player can have a means of knowing the result of the pass / fail judgment through the means for intentionally generating an over-winning prize, thereby providing a playability that enhances operation. Becomes

  In the speech balloon selection table 222k, a plurality of data tables for setting speech balloon (comment) content (see FIG. 211A) displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are set.

  FIG. 234 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the balloon selection table 222k. The speech balloon selection table 222k includes a normal speech balloon selection table 222k1, a preview A speech balloon selection table 222k2, a preview B speech balloon selection table 222k3, a short-time prize speech balloon selection table 222k4, a reach production speech balloon selection table 222k5, a lucky hold speech balloon selection table 222k6, A time-saving balloon selection table 222k7 is provided. The set balloon content is the content of the comment display issued by the reserved character in the character display area C.

  The normal balloon selection table 222k1 indicates that the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 210 (b)), and the game state is the normal state. , A table used to acquire the contents of a speech balloon.

  FIG. 234 (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal speech balloon selection table 222k1. In the normal balloon selection table 222k1, the content of the balloon is obtained for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2393 in FIG. 265).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of “0 to 4”, the balloon content is not acquired (see FIG. 210 (b)), and the value of the number of reserved balls is “5”. In this case, the balloon content is YES, and if the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", two more balloon contents are acquired, and if the value of the reserved ball number is "7", One more balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is “8”, the balloon content is MAX (see FIG. 214A).

  The notice A speech balloon selection table 222k2 is a table used for acquiring speech balloon contents when the suspended effect mode is the notice A mode (see FIG. 211A).

  FIG. 234 (c) schematically shows the contents of the notice A balloon selection table 222k2. In the notice A speech balloon selection table 222k2, speech balloon contents are acquired (see Z2390 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the result of the winning information command.

  Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of “0 to 3”, the balloon content is not acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is “4”, the result of the hit / fail determination is In the case of a hit, a throb is acquired as the content of the balloon, and in the case of a miss, a throb is acquired as the content of the balloon. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", if the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit, the balloon content is obtained as expected, and if it is off, the expected ball is obtained. If the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", and if the result of the hit determination is a hit, the balloon content is 70% expected? Is acquired and the content of the balloon is expected to be 60%? Is obtained. If the value of the number of reserved balls is “7”, and if the result of the hit determination is a hit, the balloon content is expected to be 80%? Is acquired, and if it is off, the balloon content is 70% expected? Is obtained. If the value of the number of retained balls is “8”, and if the result of the hit determination is a hit, the content of the balloon is intensely heated! In the event that is missed, what happens is the balloon content! Is obtained.

  Although configured in this manner, the notice A balloon selection table 222k2 refers to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h in addition to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the determination result of the winning information command to determine the content of the balloon. It may be further provided to produce an effect expressing various feelings of expectation.

  The notice B speech balloon selection table 222k3 is a table used for acquiring speech balloon contents when the suspended effect mode is the notice B mode (see FIG. 211B).

  FIG. 234 (d) schematically shows the contents of the notice B balloon selection table 222k3. In the notice B speech balloon selection table 222k3, speech balloon contents are acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the reserved effect counter (see Z2388 in FIG. 265).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of “0 to 4”, the content of the balloon is acquired as it is (see FIG. 211A), and the value of the number of reserved balls is “5”. In the case of, if the value of the hold effect counter is any of "0 to 4", OVER (see FIG. 211 (b)) is obtained as the balloon content, and the value of the hold effect counter is "5". In this case, STOP is acquired for the balloon content, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is “6”, when the value of the reserved effect counter is any of “0 to 5”, the balloon content is OVER. If the value of the hold effect counter is acquired and the value of the hold effect counter is “6”, the balloon content is STOP, and if the value of the number of hold balls is “7”, the value of the hold effect counter is “0 to 6”. In either case, OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon, and the There the case of "7", balloon contents STOP is determined, if the value of the pending cell count is "8", balloon contents MAX is obtained.

  With this configuration, it is possible to recognize a winning when a change in the reserved symbol with a high degree of expectation occurs by the content of the balloon, and to continue launching more than the current value of the reserved ball number to reduce the reserved ball number. It is possible to notify the player of the determination as to whether or not to increase the number, and to suppress the occurrence of useless launching, thereby enabling the player to play the game efficiently. In addition, even when a change in the reserved symbol having a high degree of expectation occurs, the setting of the content of the speech balloon may be changed so that the launching is continued.

  The short-term prize balloon selection table 222k4 is a table used to acquire balloon content in the case of a short-term prize (see FIG. 212 (a)).

  FIG. 235 (a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning speech balloon selection table 222k4. In the short-term prize speech balloon selection table 222k4, speech balloon contents are acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2382 in FIG. 265).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is “4”, the content of the balloon is fast! (See FIG. 212 (a)), and when the value of the number of reserved balls is “5”, the balloon content is very fast! Is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is “6”, the balloon content is super fast! Is acquired, and when the value of the number of pending balls is “7”, the content of the speech balloon is sound speed! ! Is acquired, and when the value of the number of pending balls is “8”, the speech balloon content is fast! ! ! Is obtained.

  With this configuration, the start winning prize interval is short, and the degree of increase in the number of reserved balls can be recognized by the player by the balloon of the reserved character, and the effect can be enhanced.

  The reach effect-in-progress balloon selection table 222k5 is a table used to acquire balloon content when a reach performance is in progress (see FIG. 215 (a)).

  FIG. 235 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reach-effect-in-progress balloon selection table 222k5. In the reach effect speech balloon selection table 222k5, speech content is acquired (Z2384 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the pending effect counter and the value (range) of the number of retained balls.

  Specifically, when the value of the pending effect counter is “0”, and when the value of the number of retained balls is any of “0 to 4”, the balloon content is stored up to 6! (Refer to FIG. 215 (a)). In the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired. In the case of "6", OK is acquired for the balloon content, and "7 to 8". In the case of any one of the above, the balloon content is obtained as OVER, and when the value of the pending effect counter 223h is “other than 0”, when the value of the number of pending balls is any of “0 to 4”, , Up to 6 balloons! In the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the well-acquired balloon content (see FIG. 215 (b)) is acquired, and "7" is acquired. In the case of any one of ".about.-8", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

  By configuring in this way, by changing the balloon of the hold character during the reach effect, it is possible to prompt launch when the number of reserved balls is small, and in the reach effect during the hold effect, By changing it, the game can be played without getting bored.

  The lucky hold speech balloon selection table 222k6 is a table used to acquire the content of a speech balloon during a lucky hold effect (see FIG. 216 (a)).

  FIG. 236 (a) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6. In the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6, a value corresponding to the hold ball value is set as the lucky hold ball number (see Z2684 of Z268), and the lucky hold storage value 223p , The value of the number of retained balls (range), and the value of the retained change value (range), the content of the balloon is acquired (Z2386 in FIG. 265).

  Specifically, when the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is “5”, when the value of the number of hold balls is any of “0 to 4”, the hold change value is “0 to 3”. In either case, the target of the balloon content is set at 5, and if the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", if the pending change value is "0", the content of the balloon is OK, If the pending change value is any one of "1-2", GOOD is acquired as the balloon content, and if the pending change value is "3", the balloon content has been acquired well, but the number of retained balls is obtained. Is any of "6 to 8", and if the pending change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

  When the value of the lucky pending storage value 223p is “6”, when the value of the number of pending balls is any of “0 to 5”, and when the pending change value is any of “0 to 3”, Aiming at 6, the balloon content is obtained (see FIG. 216 (a)), and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", when the pending change value is "0", the content of the balloon is OK. Acquired, if the pending change value is any of “1-2”, GOOD is determined as the balloon content, and if the pending change value is “3”, the balloon content has been well acquired, When the value of the number of retained balls is any of “7 to 8”, and when the retained change value is any of “0 to 3”, OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

  When the value of the lucky pending storage value 223p is “7”, when the value of the number of pending balls is any of “0 to 6”, and when the pending change value is any of “0 to 3”, Aiming at 7 is obtained for the content of the balloon, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is “7”, when the reserved change value is “0”, the content of the balloon is OK and the reserved change value is “ In the case of any one of “1” and “2”, GOOD is acquired as the content of the balloon, and when the pending change value is “3”, the content of the balloon is acquired well, but the value of the number of retained balls is “8”. In the case of "", if the pending change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

  When the value of the lucky pending storage value 223p is “8”, when the value of the pending ball number is any of “0 to 7”, and when the pending change value is any of “0 to 3”, If the value of the number of reserved balls is "8" and the pending change value is "0", "OK" is acquired for the balloon content and the reserved change value is " In the case of any one of “1” and “2”, GOOD is acquired as the content of the balloon, and when the pending change value is “3”, the content of the balloon is acquired although it has been performed well.

  Thus, by changing the content of the balloon depending on the difference in the number of lucky reserved balls, the player can enjoy the game by aiming at the number of reserved balls to be won. If the lottery result of the lottery result within the range of 5 to 8 holdings is determined as a winning or losing judgment result of the number of the holding balls started and won in this way, the display mode of the lucky holding can be updated without getting tired. The game can be continued.

  The time-saving speech balloon selection table 222k6 indicates that the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode, and the gaming state is the time-saving state (the value of the counter during time-saving is not 0). This is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon.

  FIG. 236 (b) schematically shows a time-saving balloon selection table 222k7. In the time-saving balloon selection table 222k7, the content of the balloon is obtained for the value (range) of the number of retained balls (Z2392 in FIG. 265).

  Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is any of “0 to 5”, the balloon content is entered up to 6 (see FIG. 212 (b)), and the number of reserved balls is “6 to 7”. In either case, OK is obtained for the balloon content.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the optimum number of reserved balls during working hours, and the player can grasp the transition state of the number of reserved balls based on the notification mode. If the situation of the optimal number of reserved balls can be maintained, fluctuations will be interrupted and it will be in a standby state, and the situation of inefficient time will be avoided. It can be used as a criterion for efficiently playing a game.

  The in-reach effect lottery table 222m is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the on-hold display effect in reach displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 215 (a)).

  FIG. 237 (a) schematically shows the contents of the during-reach effect lottery table 222m. In the during-reach effect lottery table 222m, whether or not to execute the during-reach hold effect is determined based on the value (range) of the number of retained balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. (Refer to Z2324 in FIG. 262) Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of “0 to 3”, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 99”, the reach is in progress. The display of the hold effect is not performed, and in the case of “100 to 199”, the display of the hold effect during the reach is possible. When the value of the number of retained balls is any of “4 to 5”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 140”, the display of the retained effect during reach is not performed, and “141 to 199” is not performed. In this case, it is possible to display the pending effect during the reach. If the value of the number of retained balls is any of “6 to 8”, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 199”, the display of the in-reach retained effect is not performed. As described above, by setting a high ratio of displaying the holding effect during reach when the number of holding balls is small, an effect that prompts the player to accumulate the holding when the number of holdings is small is executed.

  The reach start time calculation table 222n indicates a reach pattern in a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) of a reach display mode to be executed (a display mode in which symbols in left and right symbol columns are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the same third symbol). It is a data table for discriminating the start time (start period) which starts the holding effect during reach in the time (period) used as a display mode. In the reach start time calculation table 222n, a hold effect start timer is selected based on the execution availability of the hold effect (see FIG. 215 (a)) acquired by the reach effect lottery table 222m and the variation type.

  FIG. 237 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reach start time calculation table 222n. The reach start time calculation table 222n sets a hold effect start timer based on the variation type when it is determined that the hold effect can be executed during the reach obtained by the reach effect lottery table 222m (FIG. 262). Z2326).

  Specifically, when the variation type is the normal reach jackpot A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, and when the change type is the super reach jackpot A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, When the variation type is the super reach jackpot B, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms. When the change type is the super reach jackpot C, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 ms, and the change type is super. In the case of the reach jackpot D, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 ms. When the variation type is the super reach jackpot E, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 20000 ms and the variation type is out of the normal reach A. In the case, the hold production start timer is 10,000m There is determined, if the change type is normal reach out B are pending effect start timer is determined 10000ms, when the variation type is normal reach out C is pending effect start timer 10000ms is determined.

  The lucky hold lottery table 222p acquires the execution availability of the lucky hold effect (see FIG. 216 (a)) based on the number of held balls and the effect counter 223h. FIG. 237 (c) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold lottery table 222p. In the lucky hold lottery table 222p, whether or not the lucky hold effect can be executed is acquired for the value of the number of held balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h (see Z2304 in FIG. 261).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is any of “0 to 2”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 99”, the lucky pending effect is executed. Is not performed, and when it is any of “100 to 199”, the lucky hold effect can be executed. When the value of the number of retained balls is any of “3 to 4”, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 189”, the lucky pending effect is not performed, and “ 190 to 199 ", a lucky hold effect can be executed. When the value of the number of retained balls is any of “5 to 8”, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 199”, the execution of the lucky pending effect is not performed. In this way, by setting the ratio of performing the lucky hold effect high when the number of held balls is small, an effect that prompts the player to accumulate the hold when the number of held balls is small is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. Winning information storage area 223f, hold notice counter 223g, effect counter 223h, background mode storage area 223i, SW effective time counter 223k, hold effect mode storage area 223m, special effect status storage area 223n, lucky hold storage value 223p, short term win At least a timer 223q, a hold effect start timer 223r, a sensor valid time counter 223s, a touch counter 223t, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). A counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waits) of the special design fluctuating effect up to four times for each special symbol type. The number of pending balls when a winning information command is received or when a fluctuating pattern command is received Update according to the increase / decrease timing.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. A counter that counts up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of waits) of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main controller 110 for each type of special symbol, when a winning information command is received, It is updated in accordance with the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and controls the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get value. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and outputs the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, the main control device 110 detects the start winning and adds the number of balls to be retained in the variable display, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and subtracts the number of reserved balls. In this case, a ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b corresponding to the command (see Z2207 in FIG. 259). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

  The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 reserved The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is The value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2221 in FIG. 260), and the third symbol is set. It is turned off when the variable display is set on the display device 81 (see Z2502 in FIG. 269). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (Z2102) of the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2204 in FIG. 2590), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. Off (see Z2506 in FIG. 269). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a winning start for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special random number counter C1 acquired in accordance with the start winning, From the values of the special hit type counter C2 and the change type counter CS1, various types of information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, change pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is drawn. The main control device 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and receives the prize information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information has four areas (the first area to the first area to 640) corresponding to the type of the entrance (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) which detected the entrance. Of the vacant areas in the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  In the first control example, the main control device 110 is based on various information (whether or not, a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, a variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to a winning start is drawn. Although a configuration for setting the winning information command and notifying the audio lamp control device 113 is used, other configurations may be used.

  For example, when a start winning is generated, the various information predicted corresponding to the starting winning includes various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. And a setting means for setting a prize information command. When the prize information command is received, various information (prize information) already stored in the prize information storage area 223f and the received prize information command are included. It is also possible to provide a determining means for determining whether or not various information (winning information) matches. Thus, it is possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

  Further, in the first control example, a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set when a new start winning is generated and is notified to the audio lamp control device 113. The notification timing is not limited to the above-described timing (the timing at which the prize information command is set). For example, a storage unit for temporarily storing the prize information command is provided. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game condition is variable (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, when the big hit game starts or ends, or the like), or the special symbol starts to change (or At the time of (stop), a configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (a so-called look-ahead effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

  In the present control example, based on the respective winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, as a pre-reading effect, setting of an effect mode such as changing a display color of a reserved symbol is performed. As described above, by executing various effects (pre-reading effects) based on the respective winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can be given to each of the reserved balls before the start of the variable display. It can give you a big win. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

  When the change of the reserved color of the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, the reserved notice counter 223g changes the reserved number (the display position of the reserved symbol whose reserved color has been changed due to the digestion of the reserved ball). This is a counter for determining the position of the reserved symbol whose display color has been changed. The hold notice counter 223g determines that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 in the winning command receiving process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) executed when the special symbol winning command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In some cases (Z2403: YES), when the pending change value acquired from the variation type of the received special symbol winning command is other than 0 (Z2405: No), there is a change in the pending symbol (see FIG. 211 (a)). ) Is set to the reserved ball value (see Z2406 in FIG. 266). For example, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), when the value of the number of reserved balls at the time of the start winning is four, the reserved notice counter 223g is set to four. The set suspension notice counter 223g is decremented by one each time the special symbol changes, and the subtracted value is 0 in the change pattern receiving process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) executed at the start of the change. In this case (Z2225: YES), the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode by setting the hold change value to 0 and clearing the hold effect mode storage area (Z2226).

  The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting various effects. Each time the main processing is executed, one is added in the range of 0 to 198 and repeatedly updated. More specifically, the selection tables for various effects selected using the effect counter 223h include a hold change selection table 222b, a hold character selection table 222i (hold character), a hold character change table 222j (hold character), and during reach. There are an effect lottery table 222m (executability of holding effect during reach) and a lucky holding lottery table 222p (execution of lucky effect), and various effects are selected according to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h.

  In addition, when performing these selections, the update range is set to a prime number (199) in order to avoid synchronization of the update cycle of the effect counter 223h with other counters and timer values. We do not bias the selection results.

  The background mode storage area 223i is a storage area that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and stores numerical values necessary for determining the background mode. Regarding the switching of the background display mode, in the frame button input monitoring / production process (Z2107), it is determined whether or not a standby state in which a demonstration screen is displayed (Z2801), and it is determined that the standby state is established (Z2801: Yes). , It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802: Yes), the content of the background mode storage area 223i is set by adding 1 (Z2804). Then, the display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804), and when the display switching command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. As the background image, different background images that can be recognized by the player are prepared, for example, the background A is the sea, the background B is the mountain, the background C is the river, and the background D is the city.

  The SW valid time counter 223k is a counter for counting the valid time (valid period) in which the operation can be performed in an effect that occurs when the special button is pressed while the special symbol is changing. In the SW effective time counter 223k, when the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No) in the frame button input monitoring / producing process (Z2107), a fluctuation pattern accompanying the press of the frame button 22 is displayed. When it is set (Z2803: Yes), the SW effective time is set (Z2804) based on the set fluctuation pattern. If the set SW effective time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2802), and if the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), the SW If the value of the valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2806: Yes), and if a notice effect is being performed (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is reset (set to 0), and a display notice display command is displayed. Is set (Z2811), and a predetermined effect is executed.

  The hold effect mode storage area 223m stores information for discriminating a plurality of hold advance notice modes prepared according to a change in hold when executing a notice effect on a hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is remembered.

  In the holding effect mode storage area 223m, the holding notice counter 223g is set to 0 in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) executed when the special symbol winning command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In this case (Z2403: Yes), the holding effect mode is set (Z2404) based on the value (range) of the holding change value obtained for the variation type of the received special symbol winning command. As described above, if the hold change value is “0”, the normal effect mode is set as the hold effect mode, if the hold change value is “1-2”, the advance notice A mode is set, and if the hold change value is “3”, For example, the notice B mode is set.

  The content of the hold effect mode storage area 223m is the value of the hold notice counter 223g, which is decremented by 1 each time the change of the special symbol starts in the change pattern receiving process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol. Becomes 0 (Z2225: YES), the hold effect change mode is changed to the normal mode by setting the hold change value to 0 and clearing the hold effect mode storage area 223m (Z2226).

  The special effect status storage area 223n stores information for determining the contents of the special effect executed when the suspended effect mode is the normal mode. As described above, the special effects include a short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212 (a)), a hold effect during reach (see FIG. 215 (a)), and a lucky hold effect (see FIG. 216 (a)). Yes, a special effect is executed according to a change in the special effect status storage area 223n. The special effect status is a status (state data) for indicating (determining) the type of the held effect being executed.

  In the short-term prize production, in the short-term prize determination process (Z2407) executed when a prize command is received, when the game state is the normal state (Z2421: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0. Yes (Z2422: Yes), the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is 4 (Z2423: Yes), and the short-time prize timer counts the time (5 seconds) generated when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is 0 Is not 0 (Z2424: Yes), 1 is set to the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2425), and the short-term winning effect starts to be executed. On the other hand, during the short-term prize production, in the short-term prize management process (Z2111), when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes) and the short-term prize timer is 0 (Z2605: Yes), Then, the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2606), and the short-term winning effect ends.

  In the reach pending effect, in the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern receiving process (Z2202) executed at the start of the special symbol variation, the variation type of the special symbol is reach variation. If (Z2321: Yes), the hold effect mode is in the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and if the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the reach effect effect lottery table 222m is used. When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2325: Yes), the holding effect start timer 223r is set based on the variation type (Z2326), and the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 2 (Z2327). After a lapse of time, the holding effect start timer is set in the holding effect management process during reach (Z2112). If 23r becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), in announcement display setting command (Z2706) Succoth performing pending effect in reach, hold demonstration in reach begins execution. While the reach-in-reach effect is being executed, the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2708) at the special symbol change end timing (Z2707: Yes), and the reach-in-reach effect is ended.

  If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227), the lucky hold effect is in the normal mode (Z2302: Yes), Is 0 (Z2303: Yes), and when the result of the execution effect drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p is permitted (Z2305: Yes), 3 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n. (Z2307), and the lucky hold effect starts to be executed. During the execution of the lucky hold effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) at the start of the next fluctuation after the effect is started (Z2308: Yes), The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky hold effect ends.

  The lucky hold storage value 223p is determined when the winning / non-winning result of the winning information command output at the time of starting winning is determined to be a big hit (pre-reading is determined). Is a storage area where the value of the number of reserved balls is stored. The lucky hold storage value 223p is determined in the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) executed in the prize command receiving process (Z2209) executed at the time of the start winning when the lottery result of the prize is a big hit (Z2442: Yes) If the value of the number of reserved balls is 5 or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the number of reserved balls is set to the lucky reserved stored value 223p (Z2444). In addition, as described above, when the hold effect mode is set to the lucky hold effect, a display hold lid command is set based on the lucky hold storage value 223p (see Z2306 in FIG. 261), and the lucky hold effect is displayed. (See FIG. 216 (a)).

  The short-time winning timer 223q is a timer for counting the elapsed time from when the value of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes 0 or more to 1 or more, when the value becomes 4 or more. When the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the short-time winning timer 223q sets a timer value of 5 seconds. The winning timer 223q is decremented by one (Z2602). As described above, when the suspended effect mode is the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212 (a)), the short-time winning effect is displayed until the short-time winning timer 223q becomes 0. As described above, by performing the short-term prize production with the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term prize timer 223q, the shorter (earlier) the period until four prizes are, the longer the execution period of the short-term prize production becomes, and the player Can recognize the speed of the period required to win four prizes.

  Note that the short-term prize production may be configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after four prizes are won. This has the effect that the player can easily recognize that four prizes have been won within 5 seconds.

  The hold effect start timer 223r is a timer for counting the timing at which the reach effect (see FIG. 215 (a)), which is an effect relating to the hold symbol, is executed during the reach change of the special symbol.

  The hold effect start timer 223r determines that the special symbol change type is reach change in the reach-in-reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the change pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the special symbol change. In some cases (Z2321: Yes), the pending effect mode is the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the in-reach effect drawing lottery table 222m. When it is determined that the acquired execution effect is possible (Z2325: Yes), the timer value is set by the reach start time calculation table 222n (Z2326).

  When the timer value is set to the hold effect start timer 223r, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 in the reach effect control process (Z2112) until execution of the hold effect in reach is started ( If the pending effect start timer 223r is not 0 (Z2701: Yes), 1 is subtracted from it (Z2702: No). Further, as described above, when the value of the timer after the subtraction becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), no other special effects are performed, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes). ) Is set (Z2706) for the advance notice display command for performing the holding effect during the reach, the execution of the holding effect during the reach starts.

  The sensor valid time counter 223 s is a counter that counts the time when the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. When the sensor valid time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No) in the sensor input processing (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), the sensor valid time counter 223s is notified. When the effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor valid time set in the notice effect is set in the sensor valid time counter 223s (Z2823). If the set sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0, it is decremented (Z2824), during which the detection of the touch sensor is valid. When the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: Yes), and the value obtained by adding 1 (Z2826) to the touch counter 223t reaches the upper limit value. (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2809).

  The touch counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times that the detection of the touch sensor 290 is on during the period in which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. When the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / producing process (Z2107), the touch counter 223t activates the touch sensor 290. When it is on (Z2825: Yes), 1 is added (Z2826), and when the added value is the upper limit (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2829).

  The other memory area 223z is an area in which various data, flags, counters, and the like in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are set or stored.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 259) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Directing). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, an initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) executed after the boot process by the boot program (see Z3001 in FIG. 275) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 242) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and generates one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236 b and a second frame buffer 236 c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 274).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 239). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “○” at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “x” at the same position as the symbol “○” are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", an image indicating it is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if it is "special symbol loss", an image indicating it is stopped for the variable effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts a game while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b, and images indicating “O” and “X” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance 64 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 238, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 209) numbered “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the fluctuating effect on the first symbol display device 37 after the entry to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry port 640r or the second entry port 640 has occurred. Instead, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Accordingly, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but displays the character in the resident video RAM 235. By reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving an error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in each of the sub-areas is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, for example, a variable effect, a round effect A display data table corresponding to an ending effect and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, a stop symbol indicating the departure is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol, and the ball enters the second entrance. When the ball entrance 640 easily enters, the prize balls increase. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain the expectation that a special symbol jackpot can be obtained without the player. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that a game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for designating an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. When the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is displayed with a smaller size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table.

  If the MPU 231 specifies to display any of the backgrounds (the sea, the beach, the background of the preparation period, and the background dedicated to the time effect) corresponding to the background mode, the MPU 231 determines whether The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time elapses.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 240) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is used to add An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 242) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effects defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  Note that if all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 241 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 241 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 241, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 243) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 243, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 239 on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , In the main processing (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 (see Z3005 in FIG. 274). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see Z4705 in FIG. 285 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 276 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 276 (b), Z3309). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see Z4601 in FIG. 285 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 285 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 242) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 242) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 242) that describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (Z3303 in FIG. 283) ), A pointer update process (see Z4305 in FIG. 284 (b)) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 242), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 242, the back image used for the image of one frame and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 276 (b Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see Z4307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 286). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see Z4810 in FIG. 286). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 287).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see Z4902 in FIG. 287).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 243 to 256. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 243 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the counter value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. In the corresponding buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (299 in this embodiment, respectively). , 99, 239) are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (Z104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) of the first entrance 64 (Z105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 244 to 256.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (Z107). The details of the ordinary symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (Z108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (Z109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 290, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the special symbol variation process (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (Z104). The special symbol change process (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (Z201). Here, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203n is on. If it is on, it is determined that a big hit is being made. During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (Z201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display is retained in the special symbol) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are acquired (Z203). . After acquiring the values of the respective counters, a fluctuation execution determination process is executed (Z204). The details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 245. In the variation execution determination process (Z204), a process of determining a special symbol in the next order of variation is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination processing (Z204) is the special figure 1 (first special symbol) (Z205), and the variation execution in the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is performed. If so, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (Z206), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set ( Z207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (Z1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z208). In the process of Z208, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z209). The special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209), a process such as selection of a change pattern (change period) necessary for starting the change of the first special symbol is executed.

  In the process of Z205, when it is determined that the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (Z205: No), the special figure 2 (the second special (Z210). It should be noted that this process is not performed unless the variation of the special figure 2 is executed (Z210: No), that is, the reserved ball is not stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, if the variation is executed in the special figure 2 (Z210: Yes), the same processing as the above-described processing for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is performed for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2.

  Specifically, the value of the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (Z211), and the reserved ball indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation. A number command is set (Z212). According to the pending ball number command set here, the command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is executed by the MPU 201 in an external output process (Z1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 258). Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (Z213). In the process of Z213, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 2 variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z214). The special symbol 2 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (Z215: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z216), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z215, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (Z215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) described later with reference to FIG. 246 or a special symbol 2 change start process (Z214) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A special symbol lottery is held. More specifically, it is determined whether or not a special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the special random number counter C1. If the big hit is the first special symbol, it is determined according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C are determined. It is determined whether the hit is a jackpot B1, a jackpot B2, or a jackpot C.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. When the big hit C occurs, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the processing of Z217 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (Z218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (Z218: Yes), a jackpot start is set (Z219), the probability change flag 203m is turned off, and the value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to 0 (Z220). After that, the big hit flag 203n is set to ON (Z221), a stop command is set (Z224), and the process ends. That is, during the jackpot game, a low-probability gaming state is set, the electric support gaming state (time-saving gaming state) is also released, and a non-electric supporting gaming state is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (Z218: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 1 or more (Z222), and the value of the time reduction counter 203j is determined. Is greater than or equal to 1 (Z222: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203j is decremented by 1 (Z223), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203j during time saving is 0 (Z222: No), the processing of Z223 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, the variable execution determination processing (Z204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination processing (Z204). This variation execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and includes the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is determined based on the values of the various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether to execute.

  In the variation execution determination process, first, the variation execution flag 203k is turned off (value is set to “0”) to initialize (Z241), and the data of the variation order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is obtained. (Z242). Next, the data in the fluctuation order storage area 203p is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether or not the data of the execution area is the special figure 1 (Z244). If the data of the execution area is the special figure 1 (Z244: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to the variable execution in the special figure 1 (Z245), and this processing ends.

  In the process of Z244, if the data of the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 1 (Z244: No), it is determined whether the data of the execution area is the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z246). (Z246: Yes), the variation execution flag 203k is set to variation execution in Tokujin Figure 2 (Z247), and this process ends. In the process of Z246, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z246: No), the process ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209). This special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is executed in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol departure” is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in step (1).

  In the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209), first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (Z251). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is currently in the probable change period (high probability game state) (Z252). The determination as to whether or not the period is the probable change period is performed by determining whether or not the probable change flag 203m is on. The probability change flag 203m is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the big hit game.

  When it is determined that the probable change is being performed (Z252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, and the processing shifts to Z253. In the process of Z253, based on the value of the special random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221 (a)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained. It is acquired (Z253). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. As described above, 27 random numbers of “0 to 26” are set as the random numbers of the special symbols in the probability change game state (special game state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the values of these are set. If the winning random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the processing shifts to Z255.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z252 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal gaming state (Z252: No), the processing of Z254 is executed. In the process of Z254, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z251 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special random number counter C1 is compared with the random number of 978 stored in the special symbol large random number table 202a one by one. In the normal game state (low-probability game state), three random numbers of “0 to 2” are set as the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number of these hits are set. If the numerical values match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the processing shifts to Z255.

  In the process of Z255, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of Z253 or Z254 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the acquired special random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a) (Z255), and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (Z255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z251. , The display mode at the time of the big hit is set (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202d1, and the special type big hit (big hit) A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C) determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 39”, it is determined to be the big hit A (16R big hit, 100 time savings), and if it is in the range of “40 to 75”. , Is determined to be a jackpot B1 (16R probable odd symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of “76 to 79”, it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probable odd symbol jackpot) and is in the range of “80 to 99”. If there is, it is determined that it is the jackpot C (see FIG. 222 (b)).

  In the process of Z256, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are set as stop types.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined based on the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z257). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of Z257, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big symbol in the third symbol display device 81 until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is the jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 50”, it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of “51 to 250”, Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

  In the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuating display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuating time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode and the out-of-reach display mode as long as the change time is the same, even in the out-of-reach display mode. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, “outside (for a long time)”, “outside (for a short time)”, “outside normal reach” various types, “outside super reach” various types, and “outside special reach” various types are defined. ing. As the fluctuation patterns of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C, various “normal reach” and various “super reach” are defined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z255 that the special symbol has been removed (Z255: No), the display mode at the time of the removal is set (Z258). In the process of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. , A fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is checked, and the normal reach, super The variation time of the symbol variation such as reach is determined.

  When the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is set (Z260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of Z275 or the process of Z259 is set (Z261). When the processing of Z261 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol change processing (Z104).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the special symbol 2 change start process (Z214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 change start process (Z214). This special symbol 2 change start process (Z214) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is executed in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol departure” is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in step (1).

  In the special symbol 2 change start process (Z214), similar to the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209), the special symbol 2 stored first in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b acquired by the process of Z271. The values of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are obtained (Z271).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is currently in the probable change period (high probability game state) (Z272). When it is determined that the game state is in the probable change period (Z272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 displays the special symbol. Since it is in the probable change state, the flow shifts to the processing of Z273. In the process of Z273, based on the value of the special random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z271 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol big hit is obtained (Z273). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. As described above, 27 random numbers of “0 to 26” are set as the random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the special hit random number counter C <b> 1 matches the random number values of these hits. In this case, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the flow shifts to Z275.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probable change state in the process of Z272 (Z272: No), the process of Z274 is executed. In the process of Z274, based on the value of the special random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z271 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol big hit is obtained (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special random number counter C1 is compared with the random number of 978 stored in the special symbol large random number table 202a one by one. Three random numbers of "0 to 2" are set as the random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the special random number counter C1 matches the random number value of the special symbol, the special symbol is determined. Is determined to be a jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the flow shifts to Z275.

  In the processing of Z275, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of Z273 or Z274 is a special symbol jackpot (Z275). If it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot of the special symbol (Z275: Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271 (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2, and the four types of special symbol big hits (big hits) are compared. A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C) determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 39”, it is determined to be the big hit A (16R big hit, 100 time savings), and if it is in the range of “40 to 87”. , It is determined to be a jackpot B1 (16R probability variable odd symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of "88 to 91", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variable even symbol symbol jackpot), and to the range of "92 to 99". If there is, it is determined that it is the jackpot C (see FIG. 222 (c)).

  In the process of Z276, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are set as stop types.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined based on the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big symbol in the third symbol display device 81 until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is the jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 50”, it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of “51 to 250”, Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

  In the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuating display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuating time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode and the out-of-reach display mode as long as the change time is the same, even in the out-of-reach display mode. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, “outside (for a long time)”, “outside (for a short time)”, “outside normal reach” various types, “outside super reach” various types, and “outside special reach” various types are defined. ing. As the fluctuation patterns of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C, various “normal reach” and various “super reach” are defined.

  In the process of Z275, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (Z275: No), the display mode when the special symbol is out is set (Z278). In the process of Z278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviated symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. , A fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is confirmed, and the normal reach, super The variation time of the symbol variation such as reach is determined.

  When the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is set (Z280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of Z277 or the process of Z279 is set (Z281). When the processing in Z281 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (Z105). This start winning process (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64. This is a process for executing a pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol based on the holding process of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process (Z105: refer to FIG. 248) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (Z301). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (Z301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is changed) is acquired (Z302). ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (Z303).

  Then, whether there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (Z301: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (Z303: No), an over-winning information command is set (Z304), and the process shifts to Z309. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (Z301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (Z303: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (Z305). Then, a reserved ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z306).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (Z1001) of a main process (see FIG. 255) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of Z306, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the above-described timer interrupt processing Z103. Is stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (Z307). In the process of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is set as the first area. Next, the special figure 1 is set at the bottom of the fluctuation order storage area 203p (Z308), and the pre-reading process (Z320) is executed. The prefetch processing (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, as for Z309 to Z316, for each of the processing of Z301 to Z320 described above, the processing corresponding to winning in the first entrance 64 was awarded to the right second entrance 640r or the second entrance 640. The same processing is performed only by changing to the processing for the matter, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that when a game ball wins at the right second entrance 640r or the second entrance 640, even if the value is stored as a reserved ball, the respective values of the special random number counter C1 and the special collision type counter C2 are not changed. The acquired special symbol 2 is stored in the empty reserved area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the special special random number counter C1 and the special special hit counter for the second special symbol based on the entry into the right second entrance 640r or the second entrance 640 are similar to the first special symbol. By acquiring the values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type selection counter CS1, a lottery can be executed using a common random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The winning probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

  After executing the processing of Z308 or the processing of Z316, the prefetch processing (Z320) is executed. The details of the prefetching process (Z320) will be described with reference to FIG. 249 as described above. Based on the values of the various counters obtained for the incoming ball, a process of determining in advance each lottery result executed at the start of the change is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is selected based on the incoming ball, but may be selected at the start of the change. With such a configuration, a storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of the fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the respective counters, a part of the counters (for example, only the change type counter CS1) may be obtained at the start of the change. With this configuration, it is possible to acquire a counter related to the hit / fail judgment at the time of entering the ball, and to obtain a counter irrelevant to the hit / fail judgment at a later time. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the look-ahead process (Z320), which is one of the start winning processes (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (Z320).

  In the pre-reading process (Z320), first, based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1, a determination is made as to whether or not the change has started (Z351). In this hit / fail determination, the same processing as the processing of Z255 in the special symbol 1 change start processing (Z209: see FIG. 246) and the processing of Z275 in the special symbol 2 change start processing (Z214: see FIG. 247) are executed. . In addition, this determination as to whether or not to win is made at the time of starting / stopping determination (determination) (Z255 in the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209: see FIG. 246), and Z275 in the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214: see FIG. 247)). ) Corresponds to the preliminary right / wrong determination (prior determination) executed prior to (i). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the processing of Z351 is a hit (also referred to as a specific determination result) (Z352). When it is determined that the determination result is a hit (Z352: Yes), the variation pattern type is acquired from the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 (determination). (Z353). Next, a winning information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e based on the obtained variation pattern type (Z354), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z352 that the hit / fail judgment result is out of range (Z352: No), the variation pattern is selected from the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and variation type counter CS1. The type is acquired (Z355). Next, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a winning information command is set out of the winning command table 202e (Z356), and the process ends.

  As described above, before the start of the change, the result of the pass / fail determination in advance is output as a winning command to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the holding ball is established. It is possible to recognize the result of the determination of the success or failure and the hit type in advance. Therefore, based on the winning command, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the player of a notification of the result of the determination as to whether or not the ball is to be held in advance. Effects such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of the determination as to whether the ball is in the holding ball or not). Further, since one winning command is output to the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the ordinary symbol variation process (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation processing (Z106). The normal symbol variation process (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a hit with an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (Z401). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening / closing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (Z401: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (Z401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (Z402: No), the long-time release flag 203i is set to OFF (Z403), and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of changing display in the normal symbol is held). Is obtained (Z404). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (Z405). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 0 (Z405: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (Z405: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (Z406).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (Z407). In the process of Z407, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is obtained (Z408).

  Next, a normal symbol variation start process is executed (Z409), and this process ends. The normal symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 251. However, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is correct, and based on the result of the determination, the variable period (variable time or variable time) of the normal symbol is determined. (Dynamic display time) is determined, and if the result of the hit determination is a hit, a process of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (the operation pattern of the per-figure game) corresponding to the hit type is performed. Execute.

  In the process of Z402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z410). The fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand by the processing of Z437 or the processing of Z438 in FIG. 251 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z410, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Z410: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (Z410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z411). In the process of Z411, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of Z427 or the process of Z431 in FIG. 251, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display. The device 83 is set so as to be stopped (lighted up). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of Z435 in FIG. 251, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). When the stop display is set by the process of Z411, when the second symbol display updating process (see Z1007) of the main process (see FIG. 255) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of Z427, the process of Z431, or the process of Z435 in FIG. In the present control example, the symbol “○” is configured to be lit and displayed even in the case of a long-time hit and a normal hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured to perform “◎” for a long time and “○” for a normal time).

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (Z412). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (Z412: Yes), the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (Z413), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing in Z412, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see Z1005) of the main process (see FIG. 255) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of Z430 or the processing of Z434 in FIG. 251 are completed. Since the opening operation data of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the hit type of the ordinary symbol is set in the ordinary symbol change start process (Z408: see FIG. 251) described later, the hit type of the ordinary symbol is set in Z413. Is configured to set the opening / closing control corresponding to. On the other hand, in the process of Z412, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (Z412: No), the process of Z413 is skipped and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 251, the ordinary symbol change start process (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation start processing (Z408). This normal symbol change start process (Z408) is a process for starting the normal symbol change executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 251) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243). This is the process to be executed.

  It is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (Z421). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (Z421: Yes), the processing shifts to Z424. In the process of Z421, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (Z421: No), it is determined whether or not it is in the probability change or the time reduction (Z422). If neither the positive change nor the time saving is being performed (Z422: No), the process proceeds to Z424.

  If it is probable or time saving (Z422: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, the normal hit acquired in the processing of Z407 in FIG. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)), a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (Z423). Specifically, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the ordinary random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 221 (c)).

  In the process of Z424, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 acquired in the process of Z407 in FIG. Based on the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)), a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (Z424). Specifically, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the ordinary random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 221 (c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 6”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 7 to 239”. , It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 221 (c)).

  In the present embodiment, during a special symbol big hit, it is configured such that a lottery of a normal symbol is hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (ie, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. The reason is that a ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a is prevented from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second entrance 640, even if it is possible to prevent a ball from entering the second entrance 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, Many balls enter the entrance 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 becomes maximum (four times).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of Z423 or Z424 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (Z425). It is determined whether the hit type of the ordinary symbol is a long time hit (Z426). The hit type of the ordinary symbol is determined by comparing the value of the ordinary hit type counter acquired when passing through the through gate 67 (not shown) with a preset determination value. In the present control example, the value of the ordinary hit type counter is repeatedly updated within the range of 0 to 198 at the timing synchronized with the other special hit type counter C2. If it is any of "0 to 3", it is determined to be a long hit, and if it is any of "4 to 198", it is determined to be a normal hit.

  When it is determined that the type of the normal symbol hit is a long hit (Z426: Yes), a display mode for a long hit is set (Z427). In the process of Z427, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol “O” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time start command is set (Z428), and the long-time release flag 203i is turned on (Z429). Then, the processing shifts to the processing of Z430.

  In the process of Z426, when it is determined that the type of the normal symbol hit is the normal hit (Z426: No), the display mode at the time of the normal hit is set (Z431). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change or the time reduction is being performed (Z432). Then, if it is during the probability change or during the working hours reduction (Z432: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (Z433). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (Z433: Yes), the process proceeds to Z434. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of Z433, if the special symbol is not during the jackpot (Z433: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to two seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to two. The process is set (Z430), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the process of Z430, 2 is set to the number-of-opening times counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the opening time counter 203h.

  In the process of Z432, when neither the probability change nor the time saving is in progress (Z432: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z434. In the processing of Z432, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. At 0.2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (Z434), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the process of Z434, 1 is set to the number-of-opening times counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set to the opening time counter 203h.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z425 that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (Z425: No), the display mode at the time of the out-of-design is set (Z435). In the process of Z435, it is set so that the symbol “x” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the processing shifts to Z436.

  In the process of Z436, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (Z436). If the probability is changing (Z436: Yes), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z437). Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, if the probability change is not in progress in the process of Z436 (Z436: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and this process ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening per long time are the same operation as in the case where a normal symbol hits in a state of constant change and time saving, but not limited thereto. It may be configured to set.

  Next, a through gate passage process (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (Z107). This through gate passage processing (Z107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 243), and it is determined whether or not a ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (Z502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (Z503).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (Z503). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503: Yes), the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (Z504). Then, the value of the ordinary winning random number counter C4 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. This is stored in the area (Z505), and this processing ends. In the process of Z505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (Z801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 254, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (Z902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 208) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (Z904). If it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the process proceeds to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on (Z904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information has been stored in the RAM 203 (Z905). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to Z913 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (Z907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to Z913 in such a case. As will be described later in the processing of Z1014 in FIG. 255, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Z913). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process (Z914, Z915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203 is also performed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of Z911.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (Z905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( Z907: Yes), and transmits a status command based on the long-time release flag 203i (Z908). Next, while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (Z909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (Z910), and the process proceeds to Z911. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of Z911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of the Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (Z1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of Z101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243) is determined. Send a prize ball command. Further, the command for transmitting the number of reserved balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 244) and the start winning process (see FIG. 248) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process and the pre-reading process (see FIG. 249) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). The details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric auditors product opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control of the electric auditors accessory 640a is set by the process of Z412 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 250), the opening / closing control of the electric auditors accessory 640a is started.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 246) is changed by the process of Z257 or Z259, or the special symbol 2 change start process (see FIG. 247) is changed by the process of Z277 or the process of Z279. When the pattern is set, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation display according to the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process (Z1006), the process of Z257 or Z259 of the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 246), or the process of Z277 of the special symbol 2 change start process (see FIG. 247) or When the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the processing of Z279 ends, the fluctuation display executed on the first symbol display device 37 ends, and Z256 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 246) starts. Or the processing of Z258, or the special symbol 2 change start process (see FIG. 247), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of Z276 or Z278. Stop display (lit display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process (Z1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of Z437 or the process of Z438 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 251), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Also, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of Z410 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 250), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of Z427 or the process of Z431 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 251). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the processing shifts to Z1001, and the above-described processing after Z1001 is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (Z1009: No), until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (Z1010, Z1011).

  First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of Z1002 (Z1011).

  Here, the execution time of each processing of Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, and thus the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1) are repeated. , The initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of Z1008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 253 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after Z1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). And transmits it (Z1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (Z1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of Z1008 is performed when a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in Z1001 to Z1007 ends, or when one cycle of processing of Z1010 and Z1011 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from Z1001. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of Z1001 as in the case where the processing is initialized in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (Z901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from Z1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (Z1004). The jackpot control process (Z1004) is executed in the main process (FIG. 255). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects corresponding to the jackpot and a special winning opening (large jackpot) are performed. This is a process for releasing or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 256), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (Z1101). The process of Z219 of the special symbol change process (FIG. 244) is executed to set the start of the special symbol jackpot, and when the special symbol jackpot starts (Z1101: Yes), the opening command is set ( Z1115), this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started (Z1101: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (Z1102). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of Z1102, if the special symbol is not in the big hit (Z1102: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z1102, if the special symbol is in a big hit (Z1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103). If it is a start timing of a new round (Z1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is released (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (Z1105). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The set round number command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z1103, if it is not the timing of starting a new number of rounds (Z1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of Z1106, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (Z1107), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (Z1106: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (Z1108). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the processing of Z1108, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108: Yes), the ending command is set (Z1109), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, if it is not the ending start timing (Z1108: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the jackpot end (Z1110). The jackpot end timing is a timing at which a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that the timing has not reached the jackpot end (Z1110: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z1110 that it is the timing to end the jackpot (Z1110: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is the jackpot A in the processing of Z1111 (Z1111). If the current jackpot type is the jackpot A (Z1111: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203j is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the big hit flag 203n is set to off (Z1114), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is not the jackpot A (Z1111: No), the probability change flag 203m is set on (Z1113), and then the jackpot flag 203n is set off (Z1114). The process ends.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 257, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing of the Z2118 (see FIG. 258). ) Is determined (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 258, upon receiving a power-off command from main controller 110 (see Z2115 in FIG. 258), sound lamp control device 113 executes power-off processing in Z2118. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of Z2118 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is OFF (Z2002: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply of the Z2118 is turned off. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of Z2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: Yes), the process proceeds to Z2004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: No), the process proceeds to Z2008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z2003: Yes), and the flow shifts to Z2004. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after a momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of Z2118 is completed, or is reset only to MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the processing is started by the application, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: No), and the process proceeds to Z2208.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (Z2002: Yes), the start-up processing of this time is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing of Z1318, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process shifts to Z2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of Z2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (Z2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (Z2006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (Z2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of Z2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Z2118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 258). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Z2118 is executed. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process of the Z2118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (Z2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (Z2010). The permission is set (Z2011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of Z2008 with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up processing of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, and the processing of Z2008 is performed via the processing from Z2004 to Z2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: No), Z2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to Z2010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (Z2010), and interrupt permission is set. Then (Z2011), the process proceeds to the main process. Thereafter, it is determined whether a status command has been received from main controller 110 (Z2012). This status command indicates whether or not a normal symbol is being hit for a long time based on the long-time release flag 203i in the Z908 process of the startup process (see FIG. 254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Command. If it is determined in the processing of Z2012 that the status command has been received (Z2012: Yes), the long-time open flag 203i is set based on the received status command, and this processing ends (Z2013). . Here, if the received status command indicates that the vehicle is hitting for a long time, the long-time release flag 203i is turned on. Set to off.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the command that can determine whether or not the symbol has been hit for a long time is output from the main control device 110, so that the sound lamp control device 113 can also determine the state. Can be.

  The reason why the clearing process of Z2009 is skipped is that when the process from Z2004 to the process of Z2008 is performed via the process of Z2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of Z2004. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the processing of this time Z2101 was executed (Z2101). If not (Z2101: No), the processing shifts to the processing of Z2113 without performing the processing of Z2102 to Z2112. In the process of Z2101, whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly determined by Z2102 to Z2112, which is a process related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , Z2113, the variable display setting process of Z2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of Z2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the processing of Z2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z2103 to Z2114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2102). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of Z2108 described later (Z2103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (Z2104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to Z2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of Z2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a display control command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (Z2107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (Z2108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in Z2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (Z2110), and the flow shifts to the processing in Z2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of Z2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing in Z2110 ends, short-term winning management processing is executed (Z2111). The short-term prize management process (Z2111) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 270. ) Is performed.

  After executing the short-term prize management process (Z2111), the process of the in-reach pending effect management process (Z2112) is executed. The details of the during-reach pending effect management process (Z2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 271, but during the period in which the variation mode of the third symbol (special symbol) is the reach display mode, a predetermined number of held balls is set. A process of setting a specific effect (notification effect) for notifying the player that a game is to be accumulated so as to accumulate the game is executed.

  When the processing of Z2112 ends, a command determination processing is executed (Z2113). This command determination processing (Z2113) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After executing the command determination processing (Z2113), the variable display setting processing is executed (Z2114). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of Z2115 (Z2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power-off process is executed (Z2118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (Z2119), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of Z2115 (Z2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (Z2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z2116: No), the process returns to Z2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z2116: Yes), the processing is performed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and analyzed. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). If a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201: Yes), a variation pattern reception process is executed (Z2202), and this process ends. The details of the variation pattern reception processing (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (Z2203). When the stop type command is received (Z2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and the process is terminated. .

  In the processing of Z2203, if the stop type command has not been received (Z2203: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received (Z2206). When the reserved ball number command is received (Z2206: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (Z2207). After that, the process ends. Here, the reserved ball number corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the reserved ball number corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Is stored.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2206, when the command of the number of reserved balls is not received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command of the special symbol is received (Z2208). If a special symbol winning command is received (Z2208: Yes), a winning command receiving process is started (Z2209), and this process is ended. The details of the winning command receiving process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 266. Is performed, and a setting process for executing each holding effect determined to be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2208, when a special symbol winning command is not received (Z2208: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing ends.

  Here, the variation pattern reception processing (Z2202), which is one of the command determination processing (Z2113: FIG. 259), will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern reception processing. In the variation pattern receiving process (Z2113), a variation pattern (production mode) of a detailed special symbol, a preview display mode, a display mode of a hold announcement, and the like are set based on the received variation pattern command.

  In the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 260), first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and a variation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). Thereafter, a display notice display command is set in the fluctuation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the hold notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by one (Z2224). Here, the display announcement display command is a command for instructing to display various announcement effects determined based on the fluctuation pattern (for example, a comment announcement or a mini-character announcement suggesting a result of the determination of success or failure).

  When the processing in Z2224 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the suspension notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225). If it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225), the hold change value is set to 0 and the hold effect mode storage area 223m is cleared (Z2226). If the value of the suspension notice counter 223g is 1 or more (Z2225: No), the process of Z2226 is skipped, and the process shifts to the process of Z2227. Next, a lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed. With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), even when an effect of changing the color of the reserved ball based on the result of the pre-reading determination is performed, the value of the reserved advance counter 223g is used to determine the reserved ball. The display position is changed according to the digestion, and after the change of the special symbol corresponding to the holding ball with the changed holding ball color is started, the change is stopped and the display becomes non-display, the holding change value Can also be set to 0, which is the initial value. Therefore, even when the color of the ball is changed, the order in which the variable display of the ball is started can be correctly notified to the player.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 261, the lucky display determination processing (Z2227) executed in the fluctuation pattern reception processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the lucky display determination processing (Z2227). In the lucky display determination process (Z2227), a process of determining the number of reserved balls at the time of winning in the past jackpot and setting display of a mark symbol (retained effect) in a display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls is performed. Execute.

  In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 261), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2301). That is, it is determined whether or not the game is in a normal state in which a special holding effect is not executed. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), it is determined whether the mode is the normal mode (Z2302). If it is not in the normal mode (Z2302: No), this processing ends. In the process of Z2302, when it is determined that the normal mode is being performed (Z2302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2303). When it is determined that the lucky hold storage value 223p is 0 (Z2303: Yes), the present process is terminated. Here, when the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is 0, it indicates that the number of hold balls at the time of winning a special symbol determined as a big hit is not stored.

  When it is determined that the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is 1 or more (Z2303), whether or not the effect is possible is determined based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p provided in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 237 (c)). It is acquired (Z2304). Here, in the lucky hold lottery table 222p, a process of acquiring the value of the effect counter 223h to determine whether or not to execute the lucky hold effect based on the determination value of the effect counter 223h set corresponding to the current number of held balls. Is executed.

  Based on the processing in Z2304, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect (executable effect) is executable (Z2305). When it is not possible (Z2305: No), this processing is ended as it is. If it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: Yes), a display lid cover command is set from the lucky hold command table 222g (FIG. 231) based on the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p (Z2306). ). Next, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (Z2307), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2301 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2301: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308). . That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky hold effect has been executed in the previous change. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is cleared (0 is set as an initial value) (Z2309), and this processing is performed. To end. In the processing of Z2309, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2308: No), the processing is terminated as it is. As described above, the lucky hold effect is set at the start of the change, and is ended when the special effect status is set to the initial value at the start of the next change. In the present control example, the lucky hold effect is an effect that is executed during a period in which the special symbol is changed once, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is configured to be executed in a period in which a plurality of changes are executed. You may. The number of changes of the special symbol to be executed at the start of the lucky hold effect may be determined, and the change may be performed when the change of the number of times is executed. May be set to end when the end lottery is won, or to end the production when all the reserved balls are exhausted or when the demonstration display is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. After the lucky display determination processing (Z2227) is executed, the during-reach holding effect setting processing (Z2228) is executed. In the reach-reach effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 261), when a change of the special symbol to be the reach display mode is performed, the game is held during the reach display mode in which a game is held so as to accumulate the reserved balls during the reach display mode. A process for executing an effect (one of special pending effects) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 262, a description will be given of the at-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the during-reach pending effect setting process (Z2228).

  In the during-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 262), it is first determined whether or not the reach is changing (Z2321). If it is determined that the reach is not fluctuating (Z2321: No), this processing ends. If the reach is being changed (Z2321: Yes), it is determined whether the change is in the normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the mode is not the normal mode (Z2322: No), the present process ends. If the change is in the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2323). That is, it is determined whether or not the game is in a normal state in which a special holding effect is not executed. When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 or more (Z2323: No), this processing ends. Here, when the special effect status is 1 or more, it is in a state where another special holding effect is being executed, and therefore, the determination of Z2323 is executed to further prevent the holding effects from overlapping. . When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the process is executed by the during-reach effect effect lottery table 222m (see FIG. 237 (a)) based on the number of reserved balls and the value of the effect counter 223h. Acquisition of the effect is acquired (Z2324). Here, in the during-reach effect drawing lottery table 222m, a determination value of the effect counter 223h is set for the current number of retained balls, and it is determined based on the determination value whether or not the during-reach reservation effect can be executed.

  By the process of Z2324, it is determined whether or not the during-reach holding effect (execution effect) can be executed (Z2325). If it is determined that the execution effect is not executable (Z2325: No), this processing ends. When it is determined that the execution effect is executable (Z2325: Yes), the hold effect is obtained from the reach start time calculation table 222n (FIG. 237 (b)) based on the change pattern type (change type) of the special symbol. The value of the start timer 223r is set (Z2326), the data indicating the special effect status 2 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2327), and the process ends.

  As described above, according to the during-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228), the variation pattern type (dynamic display mode type) serving as the reach display mode is determined, and no other special holding effect is executed. If so, a lottery for executing a hold effect during reach is executed, and a timing for starting execution of the hold effect during reach by winning the lottery is set. When the game is started, the holding effect during reach is set to be executed more frequently as the number of currently held balls is smaller, so that it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the firing of the game ball during the reach, and the game store side Profit can be increased. In addition, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  Next, returning to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. After the holding effect setting process during reach (Z2228), the holding cover setting process (Z2229) is executed. In this reserved lid setting processing (Z2229), processing necessary for displaying the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub display area Ds is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 263, the holding lid setting process (Z2229) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the hold lid setting process (Z2229).

  In the hold lid setting process (Z2229: refer to FIG. 263), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). That is, it is determined whether a short-term winning effect (short-term winning effect), which is one of special holding effects, is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2341: Yes), the short-time prize holding in the holding cover range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228 (a)) provided in the ROM 222. The reserved cover range value is acquired based on the cover range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229 (a)) (Z2342). A display hold lid command is set based on the value of the hold lid range value acquired in the process of Z2342 (Z2355), and this process ends. As described above, when the value of the special effect status is 1 and the execution of the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212 (a)) is set, the display range of the variable cover pattern P corresponding to the current reserved ball is set. The value (display mode) is selected and set from the short-time prize hold lid cover range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229 (a)), so that the display mode of the variable cover symbol P different from the normal mode (normal mode is held) It is possible to set a display mode in which a rule to be displayed at an interval between a symbol and one reserved symbol is displayed according to a rule to be displayed with two reserved symbols apart.

  Accordingly, if the period required to store one to four reserved balls is within a predetermined period, the variable cover symbol P is displayed according to a different rule from the normal time, so the variable cover symbol P is displayed. From the display mode of P, it can be recognized that the period required for storing the reserved ball is a short period. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to play the game so as to store the reserved ball earlier, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Also, the interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2341, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2341: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343). That is, it is determined whether the execution of the holding effect during the reach is set. When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is determined to be 2 (Z2343: Yes), the reach effect pending cover range selection table 222d5 (see FIG. 228) in the reserved cover range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228). The reserved cover range value is obtained based on FIG. 229 (b) (Z2344). Based on the reserved cover range value acquired in the process of Z2344, a display reserved cover command is set (Z2355), and this process ends. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display hold lid command indicating the hold lid range value acquired in the reach effect hold lid range selection table 222d5, it indicates that it is time to execute the reach hold effect. Upon receiving the notice display command for performing the middle hold notice effect, the variable cover symbol P is variably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the display hold cover command.

  As described above, when the execution of the holding effect during the reach is determined, the mode of changing the display of the variable cover symbol P is set, and the display mode set according to the execution timing of the holding effect during the reach , The variable cover symbol P is variably displayed, so that it is possible to determine by the variable cover symbol P that a special hold effect different from the normal holding effect has been executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the treatment of Z2343 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2343: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2345). . That is, it is determined whether execution of the lucky hold effect, which is one of the special hold effects, is set. In the processing of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 3 (Z2345: Yes), the normal reserved cover range selection table 222d1 (see FIG. 228) in the reserved cover range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228). 228 (b)), a reserved lid range value is obtained (Z2344). After that, the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and this processing ends. As described above, when the execution of the lucky hold effect (see FIGS. 216 (a) and (b)) is set, the display mode (displayed) of the variable cover symbol P is the same as the execution of the hold effect in the normal state. (A display mode in which one reserved symbol is displayed according to the rule of opening one reserved symbol from the last reserved symbol).

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2345: No), it is determined whether the mode is the notice B mode (Z2347). That is, as shown in FIGS. 211 (a) and (b), when the number of the reserved balls is four or more, and the color of the reserved symbol is variable, it is suggested to the player not to allow the reserved balls to enter any further. It is determined whether the holding effect is being executed. In the case of the advance notice B mode (Z2347: Yes), a display indicating the color change of the variable cover pattern P based on the reserved cover color change selection table 222f provided in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 230 (b)). A hold lid command is set (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the color of the reserved symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a notice B that informs the player that the game is to be performed so as to restrict the increase of the reserved balls further. In the state where a game in the mode (the number of reserved balls is four or more) is being played, if more reserved balls are stored, the variable cover symbol P and the variable cover symbol at the position where the displayed reserved symbol overlaps A setting is performed in which the display color of P is changed to a color (for example, green or the like) different from the normal color and displayed. Thereby, it is possible to easily recognize that the player has played the game contrary to the notification mode in which the player is notified to play the game without storing the reserved ball.

  After executing the processing of Z2348, the reserved lid range value is acquired based on the notice B mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228 (d)) (Z2349), and the above-described processing of Z2355 is executed. The process ends. According to the notice B mode hold lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228 (d)), if the hold effect is in the normal mode, such as when there are four hold balls as shown in FIG. A structure in which the variable cover symbol P corresponding to the position of the individual is hidden is displayed according to a special rule such that it is displayed. In this way, in the notice B mode in which a holding effect is given to instruct not to increase the holding balls, the variable lid design P is used to make the player feel as if the four holding balls are at the upper limit. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the upper limit value of the reserved ball is changed according to the display mode of the variable cover symbol P.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2347, when it is determined that the mode is not the notice B mode (Z2347: No), it is determined whether the mode is the notice A mode (Z2350). That is, the number of the reserved balls is four or more, and the color of the reserved symbol is set or changed, and the variable cover symbol P is set to the reserved symbol which is a different rule from the normal mode (normal state). It is determined whether or not a suspended effect for displaying without an interval is being executed.

  If it is determined that the notice A mode has been set (Z2351: Yes), a reserved lid range value is acquired based on the notice A mode reserved lid range selection table 222d2 (see FIG. 228 (c)) (see FIG. 228 (c)). Z2351). After that, the above-described processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2350, when it is determined that the mode is not the notice A mode (Z2350), it is determined whether or not it is during working hours (Z2352). Here, it is determined whether or not the working hours are reduced based on the game state data attached to the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 includes, in addition to the fluctuation type (out-of-reach, hit) data, whether the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (electric support gaming state) or a certain-variable gaming state (high The data indicating whether the game state is the game state with the stochastic power support or the normal game state (the game state without the low probability power support) is also attached and output.

  If it is determined that it is during the time saving (the time saving game state or the probable change game state is set) (Z2352: Yes), it is based on the time saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6 (see FIG. 229 (c)). Then, a reserved lid range value is obtained (Z2353). After that, the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and this processing ends. In addition, during the time reduction (the state where the electric support is provided), unlike the normal game state, in the state where the number of the reserved balls is 0 to 6, the variable lid symbol P is the seventh and the eighth reserved symbols. Is displayed only, and the number of reserved balls becomes seven, so that the variable cover symbol P displayed at the position where the seventh reserved symbol is displayed is not displayed, and the number of reserved balls is eight. As a result, the variable cover symbol P displayed at the position where the eighth reserved symbol is displayed is set to non-display. Thus, during a time-saving period in which there is an electric support in which the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state, the variable cover symbol P is configured to be displayed less than in the normal game state, and in a state where the number of retained balls frequently occurs. This suppresses an increase in the load of display control of the variable lid symbol P.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2352, when it is determined that the time is not reduced (Z2352: No), that is, when it is determined that the holding effect is in the normal mode, the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 (FIG. 228 (b)), the reserved cover range value is acquired (Z2354), the above-described processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. After the holding lid setting processing (Z2229) is executed, the holding character setting processing (Z2230) is executed. In the hold character setting process (Z2230), a process of determining a girl character or the like to be displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 264, the held character setting process (Z2230) executed in the fluctuation pattern receiving process (Z2202; FIG. 260) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing this reserved character setting processing (Z2230).

  In the hold character setting process (Z2230), it is first determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2361). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal mode, which is the normal state, is set as the state of the hold effect. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status is not 0 (Z2361: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 0 (Z2361: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362). Here, in the case where the number of reserved balls has changed from three to four, even if one of the reserved balls has been digested by newly starting to fluctuate, the first entrance port 64 as a starting port is also used. The number of reserved balls was three by entering one of the right second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640 (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter). From the state where the total value of the 223b and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 and the reserved ball number counter 223b are 4 the number of retained balls is four. This is the state that is changing to the state.

  If it is determined that the number of reserved balls has changed from three to four (Z2362: Yes), the contents of the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 and the set pending effect mode Based on the effect counter 223h and the effect counter 223h, a reserved character is selected from the reserved character selection table 222i (see FIG. 232 (b)), a display character command is set (Z2363), and the process ends. As described above, when the number of the reserved balls is four, the character type of the girl is determined by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the set reserved effect mode, and the display is set. . Thereby, the displayed character can be made different depending on the background type and the hold effect mode, and the hold effect can be diversified. Further, in addition to the configuration of the present control example, the type of the character to be determined may be changed according to the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is changing or the change pattern type (for example, super reach). With this configuration, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the result of the hit determination is a hit, a special symbol that is changing or a hit is determined in advance depending on the character type while the character is being held. The player can recognize that the held ball is stored. Also, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the character is displayed in the super reach according to the character type, the character is displayed, and the super reach, which is a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation to the jackpot, is executed. Can be expected at an early stage.

  Also in the present control example, the notice A mode and the notice B mode are set when a fluctuation pattern type (for example, a super reach type) having a high expectation of a big hit by a pre-read determination or a big hit is a result of a previous hit / fail judgment. Since the character of J2 and the character of J3 are displayed, it is possible to make the player expect the execution of the super-reach type and that the result of the hit determination is a big hit.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has not changed from three to four (Z2362: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than four (Z2364). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than four (Z2364: Yes), a display character command for clearing the reserved character is set (Z2365), and this processing ends. In this manner, the character is set to non-display at the timing when the number of reserved balls becomes less than four, so that the decrease in the number of reserved balls can be notified to the player in an easily understandable manner.

  In the processing of Z2364, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is four or more (Z2364: No), it is determined whether or not an over-winning prize has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether or not an over-prize has occurred is determined by determining whether or not an over-prize information command output from the main control device 110 when the start-prize has been exceeded beyond the upper limit of the number of reserved balls has been received. You. If it is determined that an over-winning has occurred (Z2366: Yes), the change is made by the hold character change table 222j based on the contents of the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode and the effect counter 223h. A reserved character is selected, a display character command is set (Z2267), and the process ends. If it is determined in Z2366 that an over-winning prize has not occurred (Z2366: No), the present process ends. As described above, in the present control example, when the over-winning occurs, the character displayed in the character display area C is changed. As is clear from the reserved character change table 222j (see FIG. 233), the change of the character is configured to be determined based on the currently set character. When the J3 character that is likely to be set in the state where the notice A mode or the notice B mode is easily set when the judgment result is the big hit (hit) or the variation pattern type and the expectation of the big hit is high is selected. Is configured so that a character other than J3 is not selected. When the character J2 is selected, or when the character J0 or J1 which is hard to be selected in the notice A mode or the notice B mode is selected, the character J2 or J3 is selected. It is configured to be easy. That is, it is configured to be able to step up to J3, which is set as a high expectation degree in which a large hit or a fluctuation pattern type having a high expectation degree is selected, and the player enjoys the holding effect by generating an over-winning prize. It is configured to be able to. Changing this character corresponds to a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

  Returning to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. After executing the hold character setting process (Z2230), the speech balloon setting process (Z2231) is executed, and this process ends. In the balloon setting process (Z2231), a process of selecting the content of a comment displayed in a balloon from a character displayed in the character display area C is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 265, a speech balloon setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the balloon setting processing (Z2231).

  In the balloon setting process (Z2231), it is first determined whether 1 is set as the value of the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2381). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term winning hold effect has been set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2381: Yes), the short-term winning balloon selection in the balloon selection table 222k (see FIG. 234 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 is selected. The content of the balloon is acquired based on the table 222k4 (see FIG. 235 (a)) (Z2382). A balloon command for display is set based on the content of the balloon acquired after performing the processing of Z2382 (Z2394), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2381 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2381: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383). ). That is, it is determined whether the holding effect during the reach is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383: Yes), the contents of the speech are acquired based on the reach effect speech balloon selection table 222k5 (see FIG. 235 (b)) (Z2384), and The process is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2383, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2383: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385). . That is, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect has been set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385: Yes), the content of the speech balloon is acquired based on the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6 (see FIG. 236 (a)) (Z2386), and the above-described processing of Z2394 is performed. Is executed, and the present process ends.

  When it is determined in the process of Z287 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2385: No), it is determined whether or not the advance notice B mode is set (Z2387). If it is determined that the notice B mode has been set (Z287: Yes), the content of the speech balloon is acquired based on the notice B speech balloon selection table 222k3 (see FIG. 234 (d)) (Z2388), and the above-described Z2394 is set. Is executed, and the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of Z287 that the advance notice B mode is not set (Z287: No), it is determined whether the advance notice A mode is set (Z2389). When it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2389: Yes), the content of the speech balloon is acquired based on the notice A speech selection table 222k2 (see FIG. 234 (c)) (Z2390), and the above-described Z2394 is set. Is executed, and the present process ends.

  In the process of Z2389, when it is determined that the notice A mode is not set (Z2389: No), it is determined whether or not the middle hours (hours-saving game state or the probable change game state) is set (Z2391). If it is determined that the time reduction is set (Z2391), the content of the balloon is acquired based on the time reduction balloon selection table 222k7 (see FIG. 236 (b)) (Z2392), and the processing of Z2394 described above is performed. Execute and end this processing.

  If it is determined in the processing of Z2391 that the time reduction is not set (Z2391: No), the content of the speech balloon is acquired based on the normal speech balloon selection table 222k1 (see FIG. 234 (b)) (Z2393), The above-described processing of Z2394 is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, since the control is performed so that the comment having the corresponding content is selected for each of the holding effect modes, it is possible to display the comment content corresponding to the holding effect mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 266, a winning command reception process (Z2209), which is one of the command determination processes (Z2113: see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the winning command receiving process (Z2209). The winning command receiving process (Z2209) is executed in the command determining process (see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the winning command reception processing (Z2209), first, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in a winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, based on the variation type of the received command and the acquired value of the effect counter 223h, a pending change value is acquired from the pending change selection table 222b (FIG. 227 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2402). .

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the suspension notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). That is, it is determined whether the notice A mode or the notice B mode in which the color of the reserved symbol is changed is set. When the value of the suspension notice counter 223g is not 0 (Z2403: No), the process of Z2404 to Z2406 is skipped and the process of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), the hold effect mode is selected from the hold effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 227 (b)) based on the hold change value. Is set (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the pending change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the pending change value is 0 (Z2405: Yes), the process of Z2406 is skipped and the process of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pending change value is not 0 (Z2405: No), the current reserved ball value (the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) is stored in the reserved notice counter 223g. Is set (Z2406).

  When the processing in Z2406 is completed, short-term winning determination processing is executed (Z2407). The details of the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 267. However, it is determined whether it is time to execute the short-term winning holding effect, and if it is the time to execute (the execution condition is satisfied). If so, processing for setting the execution of the short-term winning hold effect is executed. Next, a lucky hold process is executed (Z2408). The details of the lucky hold storage processing (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 268, but it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the lucky hold effect (whether the condition is satisfied). Set execution of lucky hold effect. Next, the above-described holding lid setting processing (Z2409), holding character setting processing (Z2410), and balloon setting processing (Z2411) are executed, and this processing ends. Note that the holding lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 263, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the balloon setting processing (Z2411) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 265, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the short-term winning determination process (Z2407). This short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113.

  In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a certain-variable gaming state or a time-saving gaming state (Z2421). When it is determined that the game state is the certainty-variable game state or the time-saving game state (medium time-saving) (Z2421: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the probability change game state or the time saving game state (Z2421: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2422: No), this processing is ended. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is four (Z2423). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not four (Z2423: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is four (Z2423: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424). When it is determined that the value of the short-time winning timer 223q is 0 (Z2424: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 (Z2425), and this processing ends. As described above, when the period required until four reserved balls are established is less than 5 seconds, the special effect status 1 indicating that the execution of the short-term winning hold effect is set is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the lucky hold storage processing (Z2408). This lucky hold storage processing (Z2408) is executed in the winning command reception processing (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113.

  In the lucky hold storage process (Z2408), first, the lottery result of the prize is acquired from the contents of the prize information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the process of Z2441, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (Z2442). When it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a big hit (2442: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (Z2442: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is four or more (Z2443: No). If it is determined that there are four or more balls (Z2443: Yes), the value of the current number of reserved balls is set to the lucky reserved stored value 223p (Z2444), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current value of the number of retained balls is four or less (Z2443: No), the present process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (Z2114). The variable display setting process (Z2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2501). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2501: No), it is in a state where the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110. Move on to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (Z2501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (Z2502), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is It is obtained from the RAM 223 (Z2503).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to processing in Z2505.

  In the processing of Z2505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2505). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2505: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (Z2505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is It is obtained from the RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (Z2508), and the process proceeds to Z2509.

  In the processing of Z2509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2509). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 270, a short-term winning management process (Z2111), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the short-term winning management process (Z2111). In the short-term prize management process (Z2111), a process of measuring a period until four reserved balls required to determine whether or not to execute the short-term prize holding effect is executed.

  In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), first, it is determined whether the current number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (Z2601: No), the value of the short-time winning timer 223q is decremented by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and the processing shifts to Z2604.

  In the processing of Z2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term winning hold effect has already been set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2605), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2604, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), or in the processing of Z2605, it is determined that the number of reserved balls is more than 4. In this case (Z2605: No), the processing of Z2606 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  As described above, when the short-term winning holding effect has already been set, the special effect status is set to 0 and set to the initial value based on the fact that the number of holding balls is less than four. Not limited to this, the special effect status is set to 0 at the timing when the execution of the short-term winning hold effect is completed (at a timing when the remaining balls have entered up to 4 balls in less than 5 seconds and the remaining period has elapsed). May be configured.

  Next, referring to FIG. 271, the reach pending effect management process (Z2112), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 271 is a flow chart showing the during-reach pending effect start processing (Z2112). In the during-reach holding effect management process (Z2112), a process for determining the execution timing of the during-reach holding effect and setting the display mode of the during-reach holding effect at the execution timing is executed.

  In the during-reach production effect management process (Z2112), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701). That is, it is determined whether the execution of the holding effect during the reach is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2701: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the suspended effect start timer 223r provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702). ). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is 1 or more (Z2702: No), the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is decremented by 1 (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether the value of the hold effect start timer 223r calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). When it is determined that the value of the suspended effect start timer 223r after the calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r after the subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2705: No), the processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is determined to be 2 (Z2705: Yes), a display command for advance notice indicating that a hold effect during reach is to be executed is set (Z2706). After that, this processing ends.

  In the processing of Z2702, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is 0 (Z2702: Yes), the timing (the fluctuation period elapses) at which the fluctuation time (the fluctuation period) of the special symbol being changed ends. Is determined (Z2707). If it is determined that it is the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: Yes), 0 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2708), and then this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2707, when it is determined that it is not the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: No), this process ends. As described above, in the during-reach effect, the special effect status is set to 0 at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the reach fluctuation mode elapses, and the hold effect is initially set to the normal mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 272, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring / production process (Z2107), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (Z2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and the execution of a notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (Z2107: see FIG. 272), first, it is determined whether or not a value larger than 0 is set in the SW effective time counter 223k as the SW (switch) effective time (effective period) (Z2801). ). When it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No), when it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2801: No). Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is decremented by 1 and updated (Z2802). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (Z2805). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z2806). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2806: No), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command to a variation pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the processing of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. This sensor input processing (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2806, when it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2806: Yes), it is determined whether or not the notice effect is being performed (the notice effect is being performed). (Z2809). If it is determined that the notice effect is being performed (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and the notice for display indicating the notice effect determined by lottery is made. The command is set (Z2811). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends.

  Here, the sensor input process (Z2813) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing a sensor input process (Z2813), which is one of the frame button input monitoring / producing processes (Z1307: FIG. 272) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In the sensor input process (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and execution of various effects and the like is set based on the operation.

  In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 273), first, it is determined whether or not the sensor valid time counter 223s is set to a value larger than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is in a valid period. When it is determined that the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No), it is determined whether or not a notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2822). When it is determined that the notice effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor valid time set for the notice effect is set in the sensor valid time counter 223s (Z2823), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2822 that the notice effect display is not set (Z2822: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2821, when it is determined that the sensor valid time counter 223s is a value larger than 0 (Z2821: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s is updated by subtracting the elapsed time (Z2824). ). It is determined whether or not touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether or not the player has performed an operation by bringing his / her hand close to touch sensor 290 (Z2825). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is updated by adding 1 (Z2826), and a display notice corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223t is displayed. A display command is set (Z2827). It is determined whether or not the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit set in the selected touch announcement effect display (Z2828). If it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is reset to 0, which is the initial value (Z2829). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is not the upper limit value (Z2828: No), the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 272, the description will be continued. In the processing of Z2801, if not waiting (Z2801: No), or if it is determined in the processing of Z2802 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2802: No), the SW valid time counter 223k Is determined to be 1 or more (Z2805). If the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 1 or more (Z2805: Yes), the SW valid time counter 223k is decremented (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the notice effect is being executed (the notice effect is being performed) (Z2808). When it is determined that the notice effect is being performed (Z2808: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and the notice for display indicating the notice effect determined by the lottery is made. The command is set (Z2810). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. Since the sensor input process (Z2813) has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. 273, the detailed description is omitted.

  In the process of Z2808, when it is determined that the notice effect is not being performed (Z2808: No), the process of Z2803 and Z2804 described above is executed, and then the process ends. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed in the processing of Z2807 (Z2807: No), the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 is skipped, and the sensor input processing (Z2813) already described with reference to FIG. Is executed and the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2805, when it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2805: No), it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811: Yes), the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time counter 223k based on the set fluctuation pattern (Z2812), and the sensor input processing (Z2813) is performed. Execute and end this processing. In the process of Z2811, when the fluctuation pattern is not set (Z2811: No), the process of Z2812 is skipped, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends. Here, some variation patterns are set with the effect using the frame button 22 and some are not set. If not set, “0” is set in the SW valid time counter 223k. Is done.

<Control processing in display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start

  Here, the boot process (Z3001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 275 is a flowchart illustrating the boot process (Z3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (Z3101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Z3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of Z3102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data of the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (Z3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (Z3104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 275). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) (Z3105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (Z3001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3101 is a boot program for executing boot processing to be processed following the processing of Z3102. May be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of Z3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in Z3101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of Z3102 and Z3102, the processing of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 without performing the processes of Z3101 and Z3102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (Z3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 285A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see Z4602 in FIG. 285 (a)).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)), a simple command is displayed such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 239 is drawn. The determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 276 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued by the main controller 110 by the sound lamp control. When the change pattern command for display is received through the device 113, that is, when a fluctuation pattern command at the time of power-on (not shown) is displayed during the fluctuation effect period, a simple fluctuation effect is performed. Can be. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in Z3005, interruption permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of Z3006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 276 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 276 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 242) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 276 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (Z3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (Z3302) is executed, and then a display setting process (Z3303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (Z3302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the display setting process (Z3303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Z3302) or the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (Z3304). In this task processing, the image is formed based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (Z3303) or the simple display setting processing (Z3309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when receiving a continuous advance command (not shown) from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is also notified of the continuous advance. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (Z3306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (Z3304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (Z3305) are used. 242, and sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of Z3307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command, The stop symbol is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (Z3301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (FIG. 239) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (Z3308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (Z3309) is executed, and the process of Z3304 is executed. Move to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282, details of the above-described command determination processing (Z3302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing (Z3302: FIG. 277), as shown in FIG. 277, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401). (Z3401: No), the command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (Z3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Z3402). The command type of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area is analyzed (Z3403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404). If it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: Yes), the variation pattern command is displayed. The command processing is executed (Z3405), and the processing returns to Z3401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (Z3405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 278 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing (Z3405: FIG. 278 (a)), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z3501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of Z3501, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in fact, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of Z3501 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (Z3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of Z3503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z3504), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (Z3506), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of Z3505, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501 is updated while updating the pointer 233f. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of Z3502. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of Z3504, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of Z3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (Z3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (Z3406). If there is a display variation type command (Z3406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (Z3407), and the process returns to Z3401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (Z3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 278 (b). FIG. 278 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (Z3407: FIG. 278 (b)), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (Z3601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (Z3602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (Z3603). Thereafter, the flow returns to the processing of Z3401 in FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Z3602, the offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process is described. In the above-described task processing (Z3304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by Z3603, and the specified stop is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the process of Z3406, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command (Z3406: No), it is next determined whether or not there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). When it is determined that the display notice display command has been received (Z3408: Yes), a notice effect display process is executed (Z3409). The details of the preview effect display process (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (a), but the degree of expectation to the big hit displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol fluctuation display. And setting a notice display mode for notifying the player of a notice of a big hit or the like.

  Here, the notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (a). FIG. 279 (a) is a flowchart showing the notice effect display processing (Z3409).

  In the notice effect display processing (FIG. 279 (a), Z3409), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z3701). A transfer data table corresponding to the set notice display data table to be displayed at the display timing based on the notice display time indicated by the received notice notice display command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (Z3702).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is counted by a time counter. The pointer is set to 233h (Z3704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3705).

  As described above, the notice display is set based on the display notice display command output from the audio lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if it were different display modes.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the notice display is selected by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. May be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for the advance notice is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table which has already been set may be set to the notice display and overwritten. Good.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the process of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no display notice display command for display (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (Z3410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (Z3410: Yes), a mode switching process is executed (Z3411). The mode switching processing (Z3411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (b), but processing for switching to a display mode corresponding to the background mode is performed based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  Here, the mode switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (b) (Z3411). FIG. 279 (b) is a flowchart showing the mode switching processing (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3801). It is determined whether the special symbol is changing (Z3802). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (Z3802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set to active (Z3803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (Z3802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (Z3804).

  As described above, when the special symbol is changing, the display mode is switched to the display mode of the change pattern corresponding to the background mode. On the other hand, if the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display state in the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

  The processing for changing the background or the like corresponding to the background mode may be configured as follows.

  The back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to on. Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off, the back image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set rear image change flag is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the set rear image determination flag. When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag that has been set at that time is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video) storing the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the rear image. It may be interpreted as a command. When it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command may be turned on or later. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the process of Z3410, when it is determined that there is no display switching command (Z3410: No), it is determined whether there is a display hold lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a display lid command (Z3412: Yes), a lid command processing is executed (Z3413).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 280, the hold lid command processing (Z3413) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing the hold lid command processing (Z3413).

  In the hold lid command processing (Z3413: FIG. 280), first, a display data table for a hold effect of a display effect corresponding to the received hold lid command for display is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. It is added to the table and set (Z3901). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). You. The position to be added is set before the END data.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the hold lid set in Z3901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3902). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set by the processing of Z3901 is turned on, The data table discriminating flags corresponding to the other display data tables for the holding lid are set to ON (Z3903).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the hold lid set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z3904). ), Initialize the pointer 233f to 0, and return to (Z3905) command determination processing.

  When a hold lid command is received, the display mode of the change pattern to be set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold lid command, the set change pattern, and the background mode. To set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode corresponding to the set background mode may be set for the display mode after the addition time. The control load on the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in addition to the set display data table. However, a new display data table may be set.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the process of Z3412, when it is determined that there is no display hold lid command (Z3412: No), it is determined whether there is a display hold character command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a display reserved character command (Z3412: Yes), a reserved character command process is executed (Z3413).

  Here, the hold character command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (b). FIG. 280 (b) is a flowchart showing the suspended character command processing (Z3415).

  In the hold character command processing (Z3413: FIG. 280), first, the display data table for the hold character of the display effect corresponding to the received display hold character command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. It is added to the table and set (Z4001). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). You. The position to be added is set before the END data.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the hold character display data table set in Z4001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4002). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the hold character display data table set by the process of Z4001 is turned on, The data table determination flags corresponding to the other display data tables for reserved characters are set to off (Z4003).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold character display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4001, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z4004). ), Initialize the pointer 233f to 0 (Z4005), and return to the command determination process.

  When the hold character command is received, the display mode of the change pattern set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold character command, the set change pattern, and the background mode. To set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode corresponding to the set background mode may be set for the display mode after the addition time. The control load on the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in addition to the set display data table. However, a new display data table may be set.

  Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the process of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display hold character command (Z3414: No), it is determined whether there is a display balloon command (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a display balloon command (Z3416: Yes), balloon command processing is executed (Z3417).

  Here, the balloon command processing (Z3417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the balloon command processing (Z3417).

  In the balloon command processing (Z3417: FIG. 281), first, a display data table for a balloon for a display effect corresponding to the received balloon command for display is determined and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer. And set (Z4101). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). You. The position to be added is set before the END data.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the balloon display data table set in Z4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4102). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the balloon display data table set by the process of Z4101 is turned on, and The data table determination flag corresponding to the balloon display data table is set to OFF (Z4103).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the balloon display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z4104). , The pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4105), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  When the speech balloon command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern to be set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the speech balloon command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode. , Set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode corresponding to the set background mode may be set for the display mode after the addition time. The control load on the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in addition to the set display data table. However, a new display data table may be set.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of Z3414, when it is determined that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414). If it is (Z3414: Yes), an error command process is executed (Z3415), and the process returns to Z3415.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing (Z3415: FIG. 282), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (Z4202). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of Z4201, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set by the process of Z4202 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in Z4202 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of Z3414 that there is no error command (Z3414: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (Z3416), and the processing returns to Z3401.

  In the processing of Z3401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of Z3402 to Z3416 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of Z3401 to Z3416 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of Z3416 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination processing (Z3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)) is similar to the command determination processing. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 239, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command, are determined from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 278 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 278 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For the command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of Z3501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of Z3502, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284, details of the above-described display setting processing (Z3303), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Z4301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (Z4301: No), In the previously executed command determination processing, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, the processing of Z4302 to Z4304 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of Z4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, the new command flag is set to off (Z4302), and then Z4303 to Z4304. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of Z4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303). If the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (Z4304).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (Z4401).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of Z4401, the error occurrence flag is turned off (Z4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 283. After the warning image setting process (Z4304) or in the process of Z4303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (Z4303: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z4305.

  In Z4305, a pointer update process is executed (Z4305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (Z4501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of Z4501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (Z4502). As a result, if it is End information (Z4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (Z4503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (Z4503: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (Z4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (Z4505), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z4503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (Z4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( Z4506), ends this process, and returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of Z4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (Z4502: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 284, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of Z4306 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (Z4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (Z4308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (Z4308: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (Z4308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (Z4309).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is OFF (Z4309: No), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (Z4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Z4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (Z4314), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Z4315), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of Z4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (Z3304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by Z4315 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z4309, if the confirmed display flag is on instead of off (Z4309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (Z4316). If the demonstration display flag is off (Z4316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the definite display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (Z4317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4318). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (Z4321), and this processing ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt processing.

  In the process of Z4316, if the demonstration display flag is on (Z4316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (Z3309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. 239 is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 285 and FIG. 286, details of the above-described transfer setting process (Z3305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 285 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The processing is executed (Z4602), the transfer setting processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in Z4601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (Z4601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (Z4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 285 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (Z4701). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (Z4701: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (Z4702). In the process of Z4702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of Z4702 (Z4702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (Z4702: Yes), the flow shifts to the process of Z4703. Also, as a result of the processing of Z4701, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (Z4701: No), the processing shifts to the processing of Z4703.

  In the process of Z4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Z4703). If there is any untransferred resident target image data (Z4703: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in Z4703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (Z4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is turned off (Z4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)), the command determination processing is performed instead of the simple command determination processing (see Z3308 in FIG. 7276b) and the simple display setting processing (see Z3309 in FIG. 276 (b)). (See FIGS. 277 to 282) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are performed, so that the normal image drawing is set. Indicates the normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) (see Z4601: No in FIG. 285 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (Z4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (Z4603).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the previously executed display setting process (Z3303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (Z4802). If the obtained information is the transfer data information (Z4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (Z4803), the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4804), and the flow shifts to the processing of Z4805.

  Also, in the processing of Z4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (Z4802: No), the processing of Z4803 and Z4804 is skipped, and the processing shifts to processing of Z4805. In the processing of Z4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (Z4805). If it has been (Z4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4806).

  In the process of Z4806, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237, and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of Z4806 (Z4806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (Z4806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of Z4807. Also, as a result of the processing in Z4805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (Z4805: No), the processing shifts to the processing in Z4807.

  In the processing of Z4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (Z4807). If the transfer start flag is on (Z4807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (Z4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various kinds of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of Z3603 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the processing shifts to the processing of Z4809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: No), this process ends.

  In the processing of Z4809, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). The determination in the process of Z4809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Z4809 (Z4809: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in Z4809, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (Z4810). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in Z4810, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (Z4811), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When the indicated stop type information is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 287, details of the above-described drawing processing (Z3306), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Z3304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information 242 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305) (Z4901). That is, in the process of Z4901, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Z3304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (Z4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of Z4902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (Z4903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed, it is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  Further, in the above control example, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are separately provided, but alternatively, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, the determination as to whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is performed by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 checks the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident Whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused may be confirmed. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether the scanning is in the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 to determine whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since the image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is necessary for the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a main process loop executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can be executed.

  In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not use the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. In a given address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM and each video RAM may be managed. In this manner, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected between the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a can be used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that, even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low readout speed, but by using the configuration described in the above control example of the display control device 114, an image can be displayed at a desired display time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above control example, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but this is not necessarily required. The present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. May be stored as a part of the boot program to be executed. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above control example, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in an internal bus (bus line 240). , A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided therein. May store a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released.

  In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, it is determined whether the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been set in the buffer RAM 234c. Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified for the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b determines that the address is specified in the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected. (Line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above control example, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes or the like may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a possibility that the drawing process is delayed by writing the image data.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One RAM is used for the resident area and the normal area. It may be divided so that the same content as each of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above control example, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described. May be. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above control example, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are not overwritten while the power is turned on and continue to be retained is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 For example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the user, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion. Good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept stored in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave. Also, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer instruction). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read out image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the display main process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before starting the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is checked If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. May be configured. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the MPU 231 starts execution of the display main process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to reduce the time required to recover from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modified example, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be reduced, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently, and may be configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) that exchanges many data signals is provided. The transfer can be efficiently performed without being affected by the data transfer.

  In the above control example, a case has been described where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned (blank period). The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of the image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above control example, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. And the time required for the processing can be reduced.

  In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. can do. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above control example, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on image from the character ROM 234 while displaying the power-on image. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above control example, a case has been described in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying the main image, the reading of the image data from the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case of transferring the image data to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and stored in the normal video RAM 236. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command and the frame button operation command. The case has been described where the back image or the super-reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the operation command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thus, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image or the super reach in accordance with the game state based on the rear image change command or the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the combined data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image data of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 and The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error generation flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error generation flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283). , The warning image setting process (see FIG. 284 (a)) may be executed to immediately display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since the transmission and reception of the error command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are not required, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  In the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. However, instead of the vibration sensor, or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. Is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of the magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command for notifying an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 114 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 upon receiving an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 Alternatively, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and turning on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. Accordingly, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the magnetic field error. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses the 1st symbol in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of the sprite after the change in the sprite are associated with the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for the frame is displayed is defined as one unit. Color information specifying a color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing content in the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image to be displayed in one effect is defined by a display data table, the display data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type to be displayed. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list instead of the sprite to be replaced. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing an image according to the drawing content specified in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be specified together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. When the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. May be configured.

  Accordingly, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing image drawing based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is described has been described.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. In addition, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in data size of the display data table.

  In the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in an additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined not only to include the additional drawing contents but also to include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed in accordance with the additional drawing contents. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed by using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition can be specified. As compared with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified, the load of the processing required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above control example, a case has been described where the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "change start-up", "high-speed change", "announcement effect", "normal reach", and "super reach". After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like. Thus, by making the variable effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above control example, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above control example, a case will be described where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of image for which the drawing process is completed (in the above control example, every 20 milliseconds). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the image for one frame is always displayed at the same time interval (20 millisecond interval). Therefore, the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above control example, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231 and also has the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. Has been described, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be expanded is displayed. May be alternately selected, the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer, and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed and the image information to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above control example, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 transmits the sound display control device 113 via the sound lamp controller 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmation display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a variation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above control example, the demonstration has been described in which the rear image is changed and the third symbol including the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, but the demonstration effect is not necessarily performed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol including a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above control example, after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 first stores the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has been started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is desirably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image can be performed more quickly.

  In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the transfer at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 becomes 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display content at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be specified. The display control device 114 reads out from the character ROM 234 the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Therefore, it is not necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above control example, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above control example, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs a process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to determine whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above control example, the case where only the image data corresponding to “back A” of the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a rear image used in a part of the super reach may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear image of the super reach having high or expected appearance frequency resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In the above control example, the transfer instruction of the image data is defined by the transfer data table or the display data table in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data designated by the character string from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 describes information relating to the required sprite type in the table, and based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. It may control the rollers 237. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back surface C which is the rear image of the “island stage”, but the color tone of the entire image may change with time. Good. In addition, as the back image, not only the one that scrolls and the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears over time instead of such a back image is displayed. It may move or change.

  In the above control example, the main control device 110 uses the information of the various counters (special winning random number counter C1 and special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of the start prize notified to the sound lamp control device 113 in the reserved ball number command. Although the case of including is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and information of various counters (special winning random number counter C1 and special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by another command. You may be notified.

  In the above control example, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which a high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the pattern is displayed. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above control example, a case has been described in which one first ball entry port 64 is provided in the game board 13 in which a special symbol jackpot lottery is started when the ball has entered, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrance holes from which an entrance ball is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started may be arranged on the game board 13. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first entrances, the reserved ball count command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 indicates which first entrance is being held. Information may be included. Also, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when starting the fluctuation may include information indicating the fluctuation effect held by any of the first entrances. Good. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance port, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance indicated in the variation pattern command is reduced by 1, the first entrance is changed. The number of reserved balls can be counted every time.

  In the above control example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), the reserved ball number command is mainly transmitted. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. By this means, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above control example, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passing of the through gate 67 are configured to be suspended up to four times, respectively. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is changed by a number in the part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four by the reserved ball number. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The design may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a direction or a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Here, an outline of the first control example will be described. The game board 13 is provided with a first ball entrance 64, a right second ball entrance 640r, and a second ball entrance 640 as starting ports (ball entry means, starting means). By entering one of the balls, a predetermined lottery probability is reached, and a lottery (determination) is performed. If the lottery result (judgment result) is a win (specific judgment result), a jackpot game (a privilege game that is advantageous to the player) is executed. The jackpot game is set in a plurality of types, and the privilege given to the player is set to be different depending on the type. For example, a difference in the number of jackpot rounds, a hit type in which a high-probability game state (first special game state) is set after a jackpot game, and a time-saving game state after a jackpot game (the profit of the player is smaller than in the first special game state) (A second special game state) is set.

  The result of the determination is that the third symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the first symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. After performing variable display (dynamic display) in a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period), the display is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating the result of determination (determination result) to notify the player of the determination result. . When a game ball enters the starting port during the variable display period, the right to be drawn as a reserved ball in the lottery for the entered ball is stored. Up to four balls can be entered for the first entrance 64 (lottery of the first special symbol) and up to the right second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640 (second special). It is configured such that up to four balls are stored as upper limit values in total for the symbol lottery).

  When the reserved ball is stored, one reserved symbol (identification symbol, identification information) is displayed for one reserved ball. For the reserved ball, before or after the special symbol indicating the lottery result corresponding to the reserved ball is variably displayed, the result of judgment (judgment result) determined at the start of the fluctuation and the fluctuation display mode of the special symbol Preliminary determination in which (variation pattern type) is determined in advance is performed. If the result of the preliminary determination is a specific determination result (for example, a hit or a super reach type is determined), the color of the reserved symbol is displayed in a variable manner (variable to a specific display mode). When the color of the reserved symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a special reserved effect type is set based on the set color or the like. As one of the special holding effects, when the color of the holding symbol changes, the holding is changed by generating an additional holding ball or generating an overflow prize to enter the starting port more than the maximum number of holding balls. A comment display (notice display mode, suggestion mode) indicating the degree of expectation of hitting the ball, the type of the variation pattern to be executed, and the like is displayed (notice A mode). This allows the player to win more game balls in the starting port, thereby increasing the profit of the game store. In addition, by inserting a game ball into the starting port, a comment display is displayed, and it is possible to determine the result of the determination as to whether or not the change is made based on the content of the comment. It can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As one of the special holding effects, a holding effect (notice B mode) is set to execute a game so as not to generate a holding ball from a state where the color of the holding ball is changed. In this holding effect, a variable cover symbol P is displayed in a display area where a holding symbol is displayed, and the position of the holding symbol displayed when the variable cover symbol P is won next to the holding symbol whose color is changed. Is displayed to inform the player that the game is to be performed so that the reserved ball is not generated. Further, a content indicating that the number of reserved balls is not increased by the comment display is also displayed.

  In addition, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four. A total of eight reserved symbols are included in the third symbol display device 81 (display area of the display means). , An area for displaying the reserved symbol is reserved and set in advance. In the area where the reserved symbol is displayed, the pedestal symbol is displayed at the position where the reserved symbol is displayed, and it is indicated that the reserved symbol is displayed even if the reserved symbol is not displayed. It is configured to be identifiable. In the area where the fifth to eighth reserved symbols are displayed, four variable lid symbols P are also displayed at normal times corresponding to the positions where the four reserved symbols are displayed, respectively. The number corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the symbol P so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls can be identified.

  By displaying the variable cover symbol P in this manner, it is determined that the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is eight even if the reserved symbol is not displayed by the numerical information of the variable lid symbol P. can do. Furthermore, the display mode of the variable cover symbol P is also changed by the generation of the hold ball and the display of the hold symbol. In the holding effect of the normal mode at the normal time, the variable cover symbol P is changed to non-display when the number of the holding balls becomes three and the variable cover symbol P displayed at the position where the fifth holding symbol is displayed. After that, similarly, the sixth variable cover pattern P is not displayed with four reserved balls, the seventh variable cover pattern P is not displayed with five reserved balls, and the eighth variable pattern P is displayed with six reserved balls. The variable cover symbol P is changed so that the variable cover symbol P is not displayed, that is, the variable cover symbol P is variably displayed so that two or more reserved symbols are vacant for three or more reserved balls. You. With this configuration, it is possible to show the player that the display area of the reserved symbol is variable depending on the number of the reserved balls.

  In addition, a special holding effect in which the variable rule of the variable cover symbol P is changed or the variable rule is changed depending on the type of change displayed in a variable manner is executed according to the period in which the held ball is generated. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that a special holding effect is being executed according to the variable rule of the variable cover symbol P. Furthermore, the special holding effect is set according to the result of the judgment of the preliminary judgment being held and the change type, and also the result of the judgment of the change of the special symbol displayed in the change and the type of the change being executed. By changing the variable rule of the variable cover symbol P, it is possible to expect a hit or to predict a variation type.

  In the present control example, even if a game ball is fired on the left or right side of the third symbol display device 81, the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, and the second ball entrance 640 (power combination) (The object 640a is in an open state), but is not limited thereto, but is not limited thereto. The route easily enters the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. The arrangement of the nails or the like may be set so as to form a flow path that is easy to ball. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a game in which a lottery is performed only with the second special symbol or a game in which a game ball is prevented from entering the second entrance 640. Furthermore, as an effect, an effect that suggests to the player to make the ball enter the second entrance can be executed.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the first special symbol and the first special symbol are configured to be changed alternately. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the first special symbol has priority. The first control example is different from the first control example in that the fluctuating state and the first special symbol and the first special symbol fluctuate in order depending on the game state. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description is omitted.

  The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 288 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. In the first control example, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are installed inside the sorting device 700, and when the ball enters the opening 710a, the first ball entry is performed by the sorting device 700. Although the ball is configured to be distributed to the mouth 64 and the second ball entrance 640, in the second control example, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are left as they are without installing the distribution device 700. They differ in that they are configured to be installed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Second Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 293. In the second control example, the effect display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is partially changed from the first control example described above, and the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The difference is that the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, the first symbol and the second special symbol are alternately performed for the special symbol for which the variation start is executed. However, in the second control example, the variation is preferentially performed from the second special symbol. The difference is that the execution is performed.

  FIG. 289 (a) and FIG. 289 (b) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of the special symbol change and the continuous effect in the second control example. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 291 (a), when the special symbol fluctuation continues to be performed in the first special symbol, the effect display is a continuous effect as shown in FIG. 291 (b). Execute The continuous production is a period set for a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, the continuous production can be extended based on a winning during the execution of the continuous production.

  FIG. 291 (a) is a diagram showing a state where the third symbol fluctuates during the continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 291 (a), in the second control example, the pedestal symbol m0 during execution is displayed in the small region Ds1 of the sub-display region Ds provided below the third symbol display device 81. In the area Ds2, the first reserved symbol base m1 to the eighth reserved symbol base m8 and the reserved symbols are displayed. Characters G1 to G3 are displayed at the corners of the display area Dm. By executing an effect with a story with these characters G1 to G3, the player can easily recognize that the continuous effect is being executed. Further, even during the continuous production period, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22 by the player. The detailed description of the background mode change during the continuous production period will be described later with reference to FIGS. 290 and 292.

  Next, the flow of the effect when the second special symbol change is executed during the continuous effect will be described. FIGS. 291 (c) and (d) are diagrams illustrating the flow of the effect when the second special symbol change is performed during the continuous effect. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 289 (c), when the second special symbol change is executed during the execution of the first special symbol change, as shown in FIG. 289 (d), the first special symbol change is performed. Is interrupted, and during the interrupted period, a special effect with the second special symbol variation is performed. Next, when the special effect period ends, the continuous effect period in the first special symbol is restarted.

  FIG. 291 (b) is a diagram showing a state where the continuous effect period is interrupted and the third symbol fluctuates during the special effect period. During the special effect period, as shown in FIG. 291 (b), the reserved ball is displayed by being changed to red. In the display area Dm, a shell K1, a shell K2, and a shell K3 are displayed, and are displayed in a display mode having a story. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the special effect execution period is in effect. Further, a white reserved symbol is displayed on the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5, and the white reserved symbol of the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the small area Ds and is a running symbol. Is displayed, the continuous production period interrupted by the special production period is restarted.

  Next, the flow of an effect when the second special symbol change is executed during the continuous effect period will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 (c) and (d). In the second control example, even when the variation is being executed in the first special symbol, if the ball enters the second entrance 640, the execution of the variation in the second special symbol is preferentially performed. As shown in FIG. 289 (c), while the continuous effect in the first special symbol is being executed, if there is a variation execution in the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 289 (d), the first special symbol Is interrupted, and a special effect is executed during the variable execution in the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 291 (b), there is a variation execution in the second special symbol, and when the special effect is started, the number of reserved balls changes color only during the special effect period. I have. In addition, characters K1 to K3 like shells are displayed at the corners of the display area Dm, and an effect with a story is executed. With this configuration, it is easy to understand that the player has entered the special effect period from the continuous effect period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the continuous production in the first special symbol that has been executed is interrupted at the same time as the start of the special production in the second special symbol, and is resumed as soon as the special production period ends. Specifically, the reserved balls of the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 are on standby to execute the interrupted continuous effect period. The variable execution in the running pedestal symbol m0 to the second reserved symbol symbol m2, which is the special rendering period, is completed, and the reserved ball of the third symbol reserved symbol pedestal m3 is moved to the execution pedestal m0. The suspended continuous production period is restarted.

  With reference to FIG. 290, the relationship between the continuous effect and the background display will be described. FIGS. 290 (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the effect display mode during a special symbol change and the flow of background display at that time. As described above, even during the continuous effect period, the background can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22. In the second control example, when changing from the background mode in which the continuous effect is executed to another background mode, the changed normal effect for the background mode is displayed.

  FIG. 292 is a diagram illustrating a display mode when the background is changed during the continuous effect period. As shown in FIG. 292, in the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the change of the third symbol, the sea mode, which was the period of the continuous effect, is set to the mountain mode as the background mode. As described above, in the mountain mode, the normal effect in the mountain mode is displayed instead of the continuous effect. However, when the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed to the sea mode again, the continuous effect for the sea is restored. . In the present second control example, when the sea mode is in the continuous production period, the display area Dmb displays “Executing a continuous production in the sea mode!”, And the player is in the continuous production period in the sea mode. Is configured to be easily recognized. In the display area Dma, "the background changes with the button PUSH" is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize that the background can be changed even when the third symbol is changing.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first control example described above are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 293 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The second control example is different from the first control example in that a continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is added.

  The continuous production execution selection table 222aa is a data table for determining (determining) whether or not to perform a continuous production (FIG. 291 (a)). In the winning information-related processing (see Z2255 in FIG. 300), the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003 in FIG. 300: Yes), and the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off. Is read (Z5004 in FIG. 300: No) (Z5005 in FIG. 300), and is used to determine the execution of the continuous effect (Z5006 in FIG. 96).

  In the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa, the value of one effect counter of the effect counter group 223aa, the current number of pending balls, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time are displayed. Presence or absence of execution of continuous production is specified. Specifically, as the number of currently reserved balls is larger, the continuous effect is more likely to be executed.In addition, the lottery result that the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time is a lottery result indicating a big hit is out of order. Is specified so that a continuous effect is more easily executed than in the case of.

  With this configuration, a continuous effect with a long execution period (the number of special symbol changes to be executed) is easily executed, and when the continuous effect is executed, the player is expected to hit a big hit. Can be increased. Therefore, a game can be played for a long time in a state where the player has increased the expectation for the jackpot, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the continuous effect ends, that is, when the variable effect corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the continuous effect ends (Z5102 in FIG. 301: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value of the number counter 223a is read (Z5104 in FIG. 301), and when it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect again. Also in this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect with reference to the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa (Z5109 in FIG. 301).

  With this configuration, it is possible to execute a continuous effect even on a newly won game ball during the execution of the continuous effect, so that the frequency of the continuous effect can be increased. In addition, since it is possible to make the period in which the continuous production is executed longer than the upper limit number (4) of the special symbol 1, the player can be informed of which reserved symbols the continuous production is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp, and it is possible to provide the player with a fun of predicting the game.

  Note that, in the present control example, the continuous production execution selection table 222aa referred to when determining whether or not to perform the continuous production is defined as described above, but other contents may be defined. For example, a clock means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)) for clocking the current time is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, and the rate at which the continuous effect is executed is changed in accordance with the clock content of the clock means. May be specified.

  In this case, during a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour from 10:00 am), it is preferable that the continuous effect is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. With this configuration, even when the same continuous production is performed, the degree of expectation to the big hit varies depending on the timing (time) at which the continuous production is performed. Can be prevented from getting tired. Further, during the above-mentioned predetermined period, a guide notification means for notifying the player that the continuous effect is executed only when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and a remaining period (or an elapsed period) of the above-mentioned predetermined period. And a period notifying unit for notifying the user. This allows the player to play a game while expecting a continuous effect to be performed.

  Further, there are provided means for determining the content of operation on operation means (for example, the frame button 22) operable by the player, and determination means for determining the launching state (or entering state) of the game ball, and these determining means May be defined so as to change the rate at which the continuous production is executed in association with the determination result of the above, or the above-described plurality of contents may be appropriately combined or each may be used individually.

  Further, in the present control example, a stop command process (see FIG. 3017) using the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a continuous performance in the winning information-related process (see FIG. 300). However, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect. However, when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect by the prize information-related process (see FIG. 300) and the stop command process (see FIG. 301). May be configured to make the selection table referred to different. In this case, for example, the selection table referred to in the stop command processing (see FIG. 301) has a bigger hit of the special symbol in the case where the continuous effect is executed than the selection table referred to in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300). It is preferable to define the contents of the selection table so that the degree of expectation is high. As a result, as the period during which the continuous effects are continuously executed is longer, the degree of expectation of the jackpot can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 293 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the second control example will be described. FIG. 293 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example. In the second control example, the effect counter group 223aa, the continuous effect flag 223ab, the continuous effect flag 223ac, the continuous effect interrupt flag 223ad, and the continuous effect update area 223ae are different from the first control example described above. The difference is that an effect number counter 223af, an effect setting prohibition flag 223ag, a setting prohibition release flag 223ah, a time saving counter 223ai, a change number counter 223j, an operation invalidation flag 223ak, and a state storage area 223az are added. ing.

  The effect counter group 223aa includes a plurality of effect counter means. The effect counter group 223aa is a plurality of counters used for selecting an effect variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), selecting various announcement effects, and the like. Each of the plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa has a range of 0 to 198 obtained from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. Stores a random value. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for generating random numbers is an IC that can operate with an operating clock (for example, 1 MHz) at which at least each of the effect counters can be updated to a different random value and execute determination. Is adopted.

  The values of the plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are executed by the sound lamp control device 113, such as determining the effect variation pattern (fluctuation pattern of the third symbol), whether or not a continuous effect can be performed, and various announcement effect types. This is used when executing various determinations made, and is updated so that each counter value is not synchronized. The plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are configured by 1-byte loop counters that are updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process 2 (see FIG. 298) of the sound ramp control device 113 is executed. (Every 1 msec), the update process is executed so as to have a different value.

  In this control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the value of the effect counter, a plurality of effects are selected in one main process because a plurality of effect counters having different update values are used. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the selected effect from being biased by referring to the same counter value, but for example, a plurality of effects selected in different processes in one main process. If it is desired to synchronize the modes, it may be configured to select the effect mode using the same effect counter.

  In this control example, a plurality of counters having different counter value update patterns are used. For example, a random value is calculated using an update value of one effect counter, and each effect is calculated using the calculated value. May be configured to be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of counters included in the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, for example, of the updated value of the effect counter, the lower 1 digit and the lower 2 digits of the value of the first digit, and the lower 1 digit and the lower value of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the first digit by the value of the second digit It is preferable to calculate such that each value has no regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

  The continuous effect flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the continuous effect is established, and is set to ON when the condition for executing the continuous effect is established. More specifically, in the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 300) of the sound lamp control device 113, when it is determined that a continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), the stop command processing (step S5007 in FIG. 300) of the sound lamp control device 113 In FIG. 301), when it is determined that a continuous effect is to be executed (Z5110 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is turned on (Z5111 in FIG. 300) and the effect setting process (see FIG. 303) in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303). When the continuous effect setting process (Z5306 in FIG. 305) is executed in Z5204 in 304, it is set to OFF (see Z5401 in FIG. 305).

  That is, the continuous production flag 223ab determines whether to execute a continuous production based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main control device 110 when a new game ball enters the first entrance 64. Is determined, and the result of the determination that the continuous effect is to be executed is held until the next time when the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 is set.

  In this control example, in the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 300), it is determined that a continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), and the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008 in FIG. 300). ), The continuous effect is executed when the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed in the set state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to start a continuous effect in the current variable display, and a continuous effect is performed based on the result of the lottery. May be configured to determine the variable display that starts the operation. With this configuration, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first entrance 64 and the timing at which the continuous effect is started are made different (the game ball enters the first entrance 64). After that, a continuous effect can be started with a variable display in which the continuous effect is not executed), thereby making it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous effect.

  Further, in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to the continuous effect. With such a configuration, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first entrance hole 64 and the timing at which the continuous production starts can be brought close to each other. The player can be easily grasped. Therefore, in order to execute a continuous effect, a game ball can be enthusiastically made to enter the first entrance 64 while the special symbol is being changed (during the execution of the change display), and the operation of the game can be enhanced. .

  In the case where the effect corresponding to the running variable display is changed to the continuous effect, the display content or the elapsed time of the running variable display is determined, and the condition for changing the effect (for example, the third symbol display device) is used. Only when the variation display displayed at 81 is a display mode (high-speed variation during which it is difficult for the player to see), the effect corresponding to the variation display being executed is changed to the continuous effect. It is good to configure as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by a sudden change in the effect being executed.

  Further, instead of changing the effect corresponding to the running variable display to a continuous effect, a continuous effect may be added to the effect corresponding to the running variable display and displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide a display area dedicated to the continuous effect. Thereby, even if the continuous effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to suppress the player from being puzzled.

  The continuous effect flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is being executed. Specifically, in the effect setting process (see Z5204 in FIG. 30300) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), the continuous effect setting process (see Z5306 in FIG. 304) is executed, and the display continuous effect command is set. In this case (Z5406 in FIG. 305), it is set to ON (Z5408 in FIG. 305).

  Then, it is referred to in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in FIG. 304) for setting the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (Z5501 in FIG. 306), and further in the stop command process (see FIG. 301). When it is determined that the continuous effect is not continued (Z5106: No in FIG. 301 or Z5110: No), it is set to off (see Z5116 in FIG. 301).

  The continuous production interruption flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the continuous production is suspended, and is set to ON when the continuous production is suspended. Here, the event in which the continuous production is interrupted will be briefly described. In this control example, a continuous effect is performed based on winning information relating to a first special symbol (special symbol 1), which is a special symbol variation that is substantially executed when the gaming state is in a normal state (not a probability changing state or a time saving state). It is configured to run. In the present control example, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be preferentially digested over the first special symbol (special figure 1), and a game is played in the second ball entrance 640a. The game playability (the type of the special symbol change executed) is configured to be different between the probable change state or the time saving state in which the ball easily enters the ball and the normal state.

  In addition, in the present control example, even if the gaming state is the normal state, a part of the case where the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win in order to temporarily facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2). In, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640a and restricting a game ball from entering the second entrance 640a opens for a longer period (2 seconds) than usual (0.2 seconds). It is configured to execute a winning game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, a game ball enters the second entrance 640a during the execution of the continuous effect using the plurality of winning information related to the first special symbol, In some cases, a change (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the first special symbol. When such a situation occurs, the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed, although the continuous effect executed based on the winning information of the first special symbol is executed. However, there is a problem in that the content of the effect being executed is different from the result of the lottery of the special symbol, thereby giving the player distrust.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed during the execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted, and the first special symbol ( It is configured to resume the continuous production that was interrupted when the fluctuation of the special figure 1) is executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation where the effect content being executed is different from the result of the lottery of the special symbol, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted.

  This continuous production interruption flag 223ad is set in the special production setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 304) for setting the production corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, when the continuous production flag 223ac is set to ON. If it is determined (Z5505 in FIG. 306: Yes), it is set to ON (Z5507 in FIG. 306). Then, when the continuous production interruption flag 223ad is set to ON, a “standby” display (in the interruption display mode of FIG. 291 (b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate that the continuous production is suspended. (refer to Z5508 in FIG. 306). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 304), when the target special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (Z5301 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to OFF (Z5304 in FIG. 304). ).

  With this configuration, during the execution of the continuous effect set for the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the variation (lottery) is given priority over the first special symbol (special figure 1). ) Is performed, when the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started, the continuous production is interrupted, and the timing of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed (special figure 2). At the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) changes, the continuous production that has been interrupted can be resumed at the timing of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). , A continuous effect can be executed.

  Further, when the continuous production is interrupted based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the execution of the continuous production, the continuous production is interrupted to the player. , So that the player does not feel uncomfortable when the continuous production ends suddenly, and plays the game while expecting the continuous production to resume. be able to.

  In the continuous effect update area 223ae, when the continuous effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous effect execution period, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous effect execution period, the background of the display screen is set to “sea background”. ”To another background (“ mountain background ”,“ river background ”) is an area for storing data for internally updating the continuous effect.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 87 (a), in the present control example, the continuous effect is performed only when “sea background (sea mode)” is selected as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be executed. The background of the display screen is configured to be variably set by the player operating the frame button 22. For example, a state in which the special symbol change is not executed (standby state) or immediately after the start of the special symbol change ( When the player operates the frame button 22 during the high-speed change, the background of the display screen is changed to “sea background (sea mode)”, “mountain background (mountain mode)” (see FIG. 292), and “river background ( River mode).

  Then, as a variable effect corresponding to the set background, a variable effect dedicated to each background or a variable effect common to a plurality of backgrounds is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the change (lottery) result of the special symbol based on the display mode (background) that can be variably set by the player. , A variety of effects can be provided, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the background of the display screen is variably set during the execution of the variation effect (for example, continuous notice) dedicated to the sea mode in the state where the sea mode is set. Then, a process of rewriting the display data related to the variable effect is executed so that the variable effect corresponding to the background after the variable setting is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Therefore, if the player accidentally operates the frame button 22 during execution of the continuous production and switches the background of the display screen from “sea mode” to “mountain mode”, the display data relating to the continuous production is deleted. Therefore, even if the display screen is switched to the "sea mode" by operating the frame button 22 again, there is a problem that the continuous effect is not executed and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  In order to solve such a problem, in the present control example, the continuous production update area 223ae is provided, and even if the background of the display screen is switched to a mode other than the “sea mode” during the execution of the continuous production, the continuous production update is performed. Is temporarily stored in the continuous production update area 223ae. After the background of the display screen is switched to a mode other than the “sea mode” during execution of the continuous production, the background of the display screen is set to “sea mode” again. When the mode is switched to “mode”, the remaining continuous effects can be executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous effect disappears due to an erroneous operation by the player.

  In the continuous production update area 223ae, in the continuous production setting process (see FIG. 305), after determining the production mode of the continuous production (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 305), it is determined that the background mode is not “sea mode”. In this case (Z5405 in FIG. 305: No), display data relating to the determined effect mode is stored (see Z5409 in FIG. 305).

  Then, in the effect return process (see FIG. 308) of the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 (see FIG. 307), when the background mode is switched to the “sea mode” (Z2871 in FIG. 308: Yes), it is stored. The displayed information is referred to, and a display effect command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 308). After that, when the continuous production ends, information (display data indicating the production mode) stored in the area is deleted (see Z5310 in FIG. 304).

  The effect number counter 223af is a counter for indicating a period during which a continuous effect is executed (the number of times the special figure changes). When it is determined that a continuous effect is to be executed in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 300) (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), the effect number counter 223af is a special symbol 1 hold ball counter 223a corresponding to the received prize command. Is set (Z5010 in FIG. 300). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 304) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), when it is determined that the value of the counter is larger than 0 (Z5305 in FIG. 304: Yes), a continuous effect is set. Is performed (Z5306 in FIG. 304).

  The value of the effect number counter 223af is decremented by one each time the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 305) is executed (Z5407 in FIG. 305). With such a configuration, the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is executed by the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 300), that is, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. A continuous effect can be executed using the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect from the variable display executed in the set state is executed.

  Note that, in the present control example, the continuous production is performed using the above-described period. However, other periods may be set as the period for performing the continuous production. May be performed at the timing when it is determined that the continuous production is performed, and the continuous production may be started by varying the production mode of the variable display being executed, or the first special symbol (Special FIG. 1) in a state where the continuous production flag 223ab is set to ON. The continuous effect may be executed when the number of times of change in ()) is two. In addition, in a state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON, when setting a new display mode of the variable display (when performing the variable display setting process 2), it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous effect. May be provided, and when the execution determining means determines that the continuous effect is to be executed, the continuous effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the continuous production is started, and to provide an unexpected production.

  The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is a flag for preventing a new continuous effect from being set during the execution of the continuous effect, and is set to ON during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed. The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011 in FIG. 300) when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300) (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not to execute a continuous effect (the process of Z5005 to Z5007 in FIG. 300) is skipped in the winning information-related process (see FIG. 300). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a new continuous effect from being set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a new continuous production is started while the player is watching the progress of the continuous production and the player is not satisfied. Then, in the stop command processing (see FIG. 301), when it is determined that the continuous effect has been completed (the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON) (Z5102 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is set to OFF. (Z5103 in FIG. 301).

  In the present control example, the determination as to whether or not to execute a continuous effect is made based on the timing at which a new winning command is received, that is, the timing at which the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 300) is executed. The timing at which the stop command for termination is received, that is, when it is determined that the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON in the stop command processing (Z2259 in FIG. 301) (Yes in Z5102 in FIG. 301). It is configured to run. Therefore, in the stop command process (refer to FIG. 301), it is also set to ON when it is determined that a continuous effect is to be executed (Z5111 in FIG. 301).

  The time-saving counter 223ai is a counter for grasping the number of remaining times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the time-saving state is set when the time-saving state is set as the gaming state. When a status command indicating that the gaming state has shifted to the time saving state is received from the main control device 110, a value (100 in the present control example) corresponding to the set number of time savings is set in the time saving counter 223ai. In the stop command process (see FIG. 301), each time the mid-time saving process (see FIG. 302) is executed when it is determined that the current gaming state is during the time saving operation (Z5101: Yes in FIG. 301). One is subtracted (see Z5151 in FIG. 302).

  Then, in the processing during the working hours (see FIG. 302), it is determined whether the value of the working hours counter 223ai is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 302), and when it is determined to be 0 (Yes in Z5152 in FIG. 302), the fluctuation is reduced. The value of the number-of-times counter 223aj is set to 5.

  The change number counter 223aj is a counter for grasping the change number of the special symbol after the time saving state ends. In this control example, a special effect (see FIG. 291 (b)) is executed when a variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. ing. This is because, in a normal state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second entrance 640, a game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuates. It is for giving a privilege. However, when the gaming state is a time-saving state, that is, a state where a game ball easily enters the second entrance 640 (a state in which the electric auditors product 640a is easily opened), the suspension of the special figure 2 is obtained, and The change of the second special symbol corresponding to the hold (special figure 2 hold) may be executed in the normal state after the end of the working hours. Even in such a case, if the special effect is executed, the special effect frequently occurs after the reduction of working hours, and it is difficult to give a special feeling of the special effect to the player.

  With respect to the above-described problem, in the present control example, the special effect is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol executed within a predetermined period after the end of the working hours. Specifically, a determination process is performed to determine whether the number of times the special symbol has been changed after the end of the working hours has reached a predetermined number of times (five times in the present control example), and has not reached the predetermined number of times (five times). If it is determined that the special effect is not set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation where a special effect frequently occurs after the end of working hours.

  In this control example, the number of times of the special symbol executed after the end of the working hours is changed five times, that is, a value larger than the upper limit (four) of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the special figure 2) is set to the predetermined number of times. Even if the time saving state ends with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being the upper limit, the special effect is executed by the reserved ball of special figure 2 acquired during the time saving state However, a condition other than the above-described control example may be set as a condition under which the special effect is not executed. For example, the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (special figure 2) may be set. A value (for example, 3) smaller than the upper limit (4) may be set as the predetermined number. With this configuration, if the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 reaches the upper limit at the end of the working hours, a special effect will be performed, so that the player is willing to use the reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 It can be stored and the operation of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present control example, a condition using the number of times of the special symbol is set as a condition for not setting the special effect, but other conditions may be set, for example, after the time saving state ends. Measuring means for measuring the elapsed time may be provided, and the fact that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means has not passed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set as a condition for not setting a special effect. By setting the conditions based on the elapsed time in this manner, for example, when the game is ended immediately after the time reduction state ends (the game is played without changing the special symbol after the time reduction state ends and the normal state is reached). Is terminated), it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being restricted for the game played by the next player.

  In addition, game state discriminating means for discriminating a game state at the timing when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is provided, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state by the game state discriminating means. When it is determined that the ball has been hit, the execution of the special effect as a variable display for the incoming ball may be restricted (prohibited).

  When the time-saving counter 223ai determines that the value of the time-saving counter 223ai is 0 in the medium-hour processing (see FIG. 302) (Z5152: Yes in FIG. 302), the variation counter 223aj restricts (prohibits) execution of the special effect. A value indicating the number of times the symbol has changed (5 in this control example) is set (Z5153 in FIG. 302), and the value is decremented by 1 each time the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 99) is executed. Then, in the special effect setting process for setting the special effect (see FIG. 306), the value of the change number counter 223aj is referred to, and when it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502 in FIG. 312: No). The effect mode of the normal effect is set without setting the effect mode of the special effect (Z5510 in FIG. 312).

  The operation invalidation flag 223ak is a flag for indicating a period during which the operation of switching the background of the display screen is invalidated, and is set to ON during the period of invalidating the operation of switching the background of the display screen. In this control example, as described above, the special effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the background of the display screen can be switched during the period in which the special effect is being executed. Not configured. With this configuration, the player erroneously operates the frame button 22 during the period in which the effect (special effect) that is difficult to execute is being executed. Switching of the background of the display screen during execution of the special effect can be suppressed.

  The operation invalidation flag 223ak is set to ON when the special effect setting mode is set in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 306) (Z5504 in FIG. 306), and the first special symbol is set in the effect setting process (FIG. 304). When the fluctuation effect of (Special figure 1) is set (Z5301 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to OFF (Z5302 in FIG. 304). While the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON, the process of changing the background of the display screen (the process of Z2803 to Z2852 in FIG. 307) is performed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 103). Skipped.

  The state storage area 223az is an area for storing state information for indicating the current gaming state based on a state command output from the main control device 110. Specifically, when it is determined in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 299) that the status command has been received (Z2256 in FIG. 299: Yes), the status information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 299). In this control example, the information stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be deleted when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. 10, the main controller 110 outputs a status command for indicating the current game status when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, so that when the power is turned off (power failure). Etc.), the game state can be appropriately determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

<Control processing by main controller in second control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 244) is performed in the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 294), and the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 246) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 247) are performed in the special symbol variation process. The point that the symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 295) is changed to the start winning process (FIG. 248) is changed to the start winning process 2 (FIG. 296), and the prefetch process (FIG. 249) is changed to the prefetch process 2 (FIG. 297). The main difference.

  With reference to FIG. 294, a special symbol variation process 2 (Z154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (Z154). In the special symbol variation process 2 (Z256: FIG. 295) in the second control example, the processes of Z203 to Z214 are replaced with the processes of Z330 to Z340, in contrast to the special symbol variation process (Z104: FIG. 244) in the first control example. The difference is that it has been changed. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (Z256: FIG. 295), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (Z201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (Z201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (Z330).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 1 or more (Z331). When it is determined that the number is 1 or more (Z331: Yes), the value of the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (Z332), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter changed by the calculation is calculated. A pending ball count command indicating the value (N2) of 203e is set (Z333). According to the pending ball number command set here, the command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is executed by the MPU 201 in an external output process (Z1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 258). Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z333, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z265). In the process of Z265, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 2 for starting variable display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z340).

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z331, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (Z331: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (Z335).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (Z336). If it is determined that the number is 1 or more (Z336: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z337), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is subtracted. A reserved ball count command indicating a value is set (Z338). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z338, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z339). In the process of Z339, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 2 for starting variable display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z340). The special symbol change start process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z336, if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is 0 (Z336: No), this process ends.

  Here, the special symbol change start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 295. In the special symbol change start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) in the second control example, the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209: FIG. 246) and the special symbol 2 change start process (214: FIG. 247) in the first control example. The difference is that the processes are performed collectively. The details of the processing are the same as those in the first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 296, the start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. The start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) in the second control example is different from the start control process (Z105: FIG. 248) in the first control example in that the processes of Z308 and Z316 are not executed. The difference lies in that the processing is collectively executed by the processing of Z360. The details of the processing are the same as those in the first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 297, the prefetching process 2 (Z360), which is one of the start winning processes 2 (Z155) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the content of the prefetching process 2 (Z360).

  In the pre-reading process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new winning information (Z361: No), the present process is terminated. When it is determined that there is new winning information (Z361: Yes), the special symbol random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selecting counter C3, and the variation type corresponding to the current winning from the special symbol holding ball storage area. The value of each of the counters CS1 is obtained (Z362). Next, among the determination results specified in the special symbol large hit random number table 202a, a hit determination result corresponding to the value of the obtained special random number counter C1 is obtained (Z363). Next, among the determination results specified in the big hit type selection table 202d, a hit type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2 is obtained (Z364).

  Next, among the determination results specified in the stop type selection table, a stop type determination result corresponding to the obtained value of the stop type selection counter C3 is obtained (Z365). Next, among the determination results specified in the variation pattern selection table 202b, a variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (Z366). Next, the winning determination information including the obtained hit determination result, the hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, the stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and the prize information including the fluctuation type information indicating the fluctuation type determination result The command is set (Z367), and the process ends.

<Control processing by voice lamp control device in second control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, in contrast to the first control example, the frame button input monitoring / production process (Z2107), which is one of the main processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, is performed. The main difference is that the command determination process (Z2113) is changed to the command determination process 2 (Z2152), the variable display setting process (Z2114) is changed to the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) in process 2 (Z2151). It is a difference.

  With reference to FIG. 299, the command determination process 2 (Z2152) in the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination processing 2 (Z2152).

  In the command determination process 2 (Z2152), it is first determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received (Z2201). If it is determined that the received command has been received (Z2201: Yes), the change start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2251), a change pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and this processing ends. I do. Note that the processing of Z2203 to Z2207 is the same processing as in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, when it is determined in the processing of Z2206 that the pending ball number command has not been received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command information has been received (Z2253). When a winning information command is received (Z2253: Yes), winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2254). Next, the winning information-related processing (Z2255) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the winning information-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of Z2253, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (Z2253: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (Z2256). If it is determined that the status command has been received (Z2256: Yes), the status information indicating the gaming status corresponding to the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223az (Z2257), and this processing ends.

  In the process of Z2256, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (Z2256: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (Z2258). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2258: Yes), the stop is performed. Command processing (Z2259) is executed. Details of the stop command processing (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2260), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2258, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2258: No), a process according to another command is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 300, the winning information related processing (Z2255) which is one of the command determination processing 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning information-related processing (Z2255).

  In the winning information related processing (Z2255), first, the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223f (Z5001). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether the read value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003). If it is not 2 or more (Z5003: No), this processing ends.

  In the processing of Z5003, when the read value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004). When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is ON (Z5004: Yes), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is off (Z5004), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is read (Z5505), and execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous effect (Z5007). If the continuous effect is not to be executed (Z5007: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when performing a continuous effect (Z5007: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5009), and the read value of the counter is read. It is set as the value of the effect number counter 223af (Z5010). Next, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011), and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 301, a stop command process (Z2259) which is one of the command determination processes 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command processing (Z2259).

  In the stop command processing (Z2259), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is during working hours (Z5101). When it is determined that the working hours are reduced (Z5101: Yes), the processing during the working hours is reduced (Z5115), and this processing ends. Details of the processing during time saving (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z5101, when it is determined that the time is not reduced (Z5101: No), it is determined whether the setting prohibition release flag 223ah provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z5102). When the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is off (Z5102: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, when the effect prohibition release flag ah is on (Z5102: Yes), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag and the setting prohibition release flag ah are set off (Z5103), and the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball counter 223a is set. Is read (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether or not the read value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that the number is not equal to or more than 2 (Z5105: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z5105, when it is determined that the value of the read counter is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of 2 or more is entered as prize information. Reading is performed from the storage area 223f (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether or not there is jackpot winning information (Z5107). When it is determined that there is no big hit prize (Z5107: No), the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to off (Z5116), and the process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the jackpot winning information is present (Z5107: Yes), the continuous production execution selection table 222aa provided in the ROM 222 is read (Z5108), and the execution of the continuous production is determined (Z5109). After executing the processing of Z5109, it is determined whether it is time to execute a continuous effect (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: No), the processing of Z5116 described above is executed, and this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is a timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5111), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5112). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a corresponding to the jackpot winning is set as the value of the effect number counter 223af (Z5113), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5114), and this processing is performed. finish.

  With reference to FIG. 302, a description will be given of the processing during time reduction (Z5115) which is one of the stop command processing (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing during time saving (Z5115).

  In the processing during time saving (Z5115), first, the value of the time saving counter 223ai provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). When it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: Yes), the value of the variation counter aj is set to 5 (Z5153), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 223ai is greater than 0 in the processing of Z5152 (Z5153: No), the processing of Z5153 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 303, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153), which is one of the main processes 2 (FIG. 298) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). The variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the second control example is different from the variable display setting process (Z2114) in the first control example in that processes Z5204 to Z5208 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of Z5202, the extracted fluctuation pattern is obtained (Z5203). Next, an effect setting process (Z5204) is executed. Details of the effect setting process (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), the data in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207). When it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207: Yes), the value of the change number counter 223aj is decremented by 1 (Z5208). In the process of Z5207, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223aj is 0 (Z5207: No), the process of Z5208 is skipped, and the process proceeds to Z5209.

  The effect setting process (Z5204), which is one of the variable display setting processes 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (Z5204).

  In the effect setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the current variation is a variation in the first special symbol (Z5301). If it is a change in the first special symbol (Z5301: Yes), the operation invalid flag 223ak provided in the RAM 223 is set to OFF (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect suspension flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303). When it is determined that the continuous production interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303: Yes), the continuous production interruption flag 223ad is set to OFF (Z5304). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5303 that the continuous effect suspension flag 223ad is set to off (Z5303: Yes), the processing of Z5304 described above is skipped.

  After executing the processing of Z5304, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect number counter 223af is greater than 0 (Z5305). When it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (Z5305: Yes), the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the value of the effect number counter 223af is 0 in the process of Z5305 (Z5305: No), the variation pattern of the mode without the continuous effect is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off (Z5308: No), the present process is terminated. When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308: Yes), the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is cleared (Z5310), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z5301, when it is determined that the current variation is not the variation in the first special symbol (Z5301: No), the special effect setting process (Z5311) is executed. Details of the special effect setting processing (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 305, the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) which is one of the effect setting processes (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306).

  In the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to off (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect number counter 223af is 1 (Z5402). When it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223af is 1 (Z5402: Yes), a continuous effect final form corresponding to the special symbol lottery result is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, when the value of the effect number counter 223af is other than 1 (Z5402: No), the continuous effect continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the process of Z5405 is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the background mode is currently set to the sea mode (Z5405). When it is determined that the setting is the sea mode (Z5405: Yes), a display continuous production command for indicating the decided production mode is set (Z5406). Next, the value of the production number counter 223af is decremented by 1 (Z5407). ), The continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON (Z5408), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set mode is not the sea mode (Z5405: No), the determined effect mode is stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae (Z5409), and a display information command indicating that the continuous effect is in standby is provided. It is set (Z5410). After that, the processing of Z5407 to Z5408 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 306, the special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the content of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

  In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is during working hours (Z5501). When it is determined that the time is not working (Z5501: No), it is determined whether the value of the change number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502). When it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502: Yes), the special effect production mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery result is set (Z5503), and the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON. (Z5504).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON (Z5505). When it is set to ON (Z5505: Yes), it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5506). If it is set to off (Z5506: No), the continuous effect suspending flag 223ad is set to on (Z5507), and a display suspend command is set (Z5508). Next, a display effect command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (Z5509), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5501 that it is time reduction (Z5501: Yes), or if it is determined in the processing of Z5502 that the value of the fluctuation counter 223aj is not 0 (Z5502: No), The effect form of the normal effect corresponding to the special symbol lottery result is set (Z5510), the processing of Z5509 described above is executed, and this processing ends. Further, in the processing of Z5505, when it is determined that the continuous production flag 223ac is off (Z5505: No), or when it is determined that the continuous production suspension flag 223ad is set to on in the processing of Z5506 (Z5506: Yes), the processing of Z5507 to Z5508 described above is skipped, the processing of Z5509 is executed, and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 307, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (Z2151) in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. FIG. 307 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (Z2151). The second control example is different from the first control example in that the processing of Z2851 and the processing of Z2852 are added to the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (Z2107). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description is omitted.

  In the process of Z2851, it is determined whether or not the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851). When it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is off (Z2851: No), the same processing as that of Z2803 to Z2804 in the first control example is executed, and then the effect return processing (Z2852) is executed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 308, effect return process (Z2852), which is one of frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (Z2151) executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. Will be described. FIG. 308 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect return processing (Z2852).

  In the effect return processing (Z2852), first, it is determined whether the set background mode is the “sea mode” (Z2871). If the background mode is not the “sea mode” (Z2871: No), this processing ends. When it is determined that the background mode is the “sea mode” (Z2871: Yes), the effect mode stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is read (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no storage information (Z2873: No), this processing ends. When it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the stored effect mode is set (Z2874), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 307, the description will be continued. The effect return process (Z2852) is executed, then the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851: Yes), a sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described third control example, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started during the execution of the continuous production, the continuous production under execution is interrupted, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is changed. Was used to restart the continuous production that was interrupted at the start of the change of the first special symbol after the end of the game. As a result, the continuous effect can be executed in response to the change of the first special symbol, and the continuous effect can be enjoyed to the end.

  However, in the configuration of the above-described second control example, if the continuous production is interrupted, the continuous production is always resumed after the elapse of a predetermined period (after the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2). Since it is not possible for a player to be thrilled, it has been required to further enhance the production effect. On the other hand, in the third control example, the interruption is performed based on the game content (the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2) when the continuous production is interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous production. It is configured to determine whether or not to restart the middle continuous effect, and to restart the continuous effect based on the determination result. With this configuration, when the continuous production is interrupted, it is possible to predict whether or not the continuous production will be resumed while enjoying the special production performed as the variable production of the special figure 2. The effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the third control example, the continuous production is easily restarted when the lottery result of the special figure 1 to be subjected to the continuous production is a big hit. This allows the player to play the game while expecting the continuous production to be resumed. In the third control example, the smaller the number of special figure 2 changes (the number of executions of the special effect) executed while the continuous effect is interrupted, the easier it is to restart the continuous effect. Accordingly, when the period from when the continuous production is interrupted to when it is restarted is short, the continuous production can be easily restarted, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, if a long time has elapsed since the continuous production was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous production is out of order, the player is not given unnecessary expectation of the jackpot. In order to do so, it is configured such that continuous production is difficult to resume.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the modification. The third control example is different from the second control example in that a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is added to the RAM 223 of the second control example. Other elements are the same as those in the second control example, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 2 change counter 223ba is a counter for measuring the number of changes of the second special symbol. When the special effect setting process 2 (FIG. 312) sets the effect mode of the special effect, the value of the counter is changed. One is added (Z5551 in FIG. 312), and the value of the counter is referred to in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 311) in the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 310) (Z5602 in FIG. 311). In the processing of Z5602, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602 in FIG. 311: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (FIG. 311). Z5603). On the other hand, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is determined to be 3 or more (Z5602: No in FIG. 311), that is, the second special symbol fluctuation is executed three times or more while the continuous effect is interrupted. If it is determined that there is winning information indicating a jackpot in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol (Z5605 in FIG. 311), and if not (Z5605 in FIG. 311: Yes). Then, the value of the effect number counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 311), and the processing of Z5603 described above is executed.

  That is, in the continuous production return process (see FIG. 311), when the continuous production that has been interrupted is to be restored, the number of times of the special figure 2 executed during the suspension of the continuous production is not less than a predetermined number (three times). Based on the lottery result included in the winning information of the special map 1 at that time, it is determined whether or not the continuous production is to be resumed. If the production result of the continuous production is out of order, the continuous production is resumed. In this case, the value of the number-of-times counter 223af is set to 0, so that the continuous effects are not restarted. In this way, when a long time has elapsed since the continuous production was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous production is out of order, the player is given an unnecessary sense of expectation for the jackpot. In addition to being able to suppress such a situation, it is possible to give an expectation to a jackpot when the continuous production is restarted, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

<Regarding control processing by voice lamp control device in third control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The third control example is different from the second control example in that the contents of the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304), which is one of the variable effect setting processes 2 (Z2153: FIG. 303), are partially changed. Mainly different. Other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect setting process 3 (Z5204), which is one process of the variable display setting executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. The effect setting process 3 (Z5204: FIG. 310) in the third control example is different from the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304) in the second control example in that the process of Z5310 is not executed, and the special effect process (Z5311). ) Is different in that the processing content is changed, and a continuous effect return process (Z5351) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The continuous effect return process (Z5351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect return process (Z5351).

  In the continuous effect return processing (Z5351), first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is read (Z5601). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special figure 2 fluctuation counter is smaller than 3 (Z5602). If it is determined that the value is greater than 3 (Z5602: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 change counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602: No), the winning information corresponding to the special figure 1 stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read. (Z5604). Next, it is determined whether or not the read prize information has a prize (Z5605). If it is determined that there is no winning (Z5605: No), the value of the effect number counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606), and then the above-described processing of Z5603 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5605 that there is a winning (Z5605: Yes), the processing of Z5603 is executed, and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 312, the special effect setting process 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: FIG. 312) in the third control example executes the process of Z5504 in the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the second control example, and then executes the special figure 2 change counter 223ba. The difference is that a process of adding 1 to the value (Z5551) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The fourth control example is different from each of the above-described control examples in that the fourth control example includes an adjustment unit that allows a player to adjust the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

  First, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 313 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 313, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example is different from the first control example in that a volume button 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume is provided. The difference is that other configurations are the same. About the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the real-time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The RTC 292 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and is configured by a real-time clock capable of measuring the current time. The RTC 292 has an input / output port, a device control unit, and a register. The RTC 292 is connected to an RTC power supply. The power supply for the RTC is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 292 which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC 292 even in a power-off state where the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. As the RTC power source 353, for example, a button-type battery is used, and is configured to be able to supply power to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

  An input / output port and a register are connected to the device control unit of the RTC 292. The input / output port is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so as to be able to communicate with each other. The device control unit controls the register to perform various controls such as clocking the current time and writing data.

  The register is a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored or an operation can be performed on the stored data. The register includes at least a clock register and a time information storage area.

  The clock register is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 seconds). It is determined whether or not the time period is the execution period of the time effect based on the timekeeping information measured in the timekeeping register.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the clock register (the clock information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) is stored in the power-on time storage area of the RAM 223 based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on. ) Or the time information stored in the time information storage area is determined. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed, the clock information stored in the time information storage area is stored in the power-on time storage area. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, the value of the clock register (time information corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC 292) is stored in the input time storage area. .

  Thereby, the clerk of the hall turns on the power simultaneously without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 of each pachinko machine 10 during the opening time of the hall, etc., so that the elapsed time since the power on of each pachinko machine 10 is grasped. Can be matched. Therefore, in each of the pachinko machines 10, the execution period of the time effect can be matched. On the other hand, when the power of some of the pachinko machines 10 is cut off during the opening hours of the hall (for example, when an error is cleared), when the power is turned on again, the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the timing information stored in the time information storage area can be stored in the input time storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing of execution of the time effect from being shifted between the pachinko machine 10 whose power is cut off and the other pachinko machines 10.

  Next, a display screen related to volume adjustment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 314 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 314 (b) shows that the game is not performed. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen (customer waiting screen) of the third symbol display device 81 in a standby state, wherein X (a) indicates that a special symbol change is performed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. X (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen during the first special symbol change since the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 314 (a), when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the return processing of the control devices such as the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 ends. A comment “Please wait” notifying the period up to is displayed as the returning display mode S1, and a volume gauge S2 for indicating the currently set volume is displayed. The volume gauge S2 is formed of a horizontally long gauge for visually displaying the current volume, and a set value display for indicating the current volume as a numerical value on the right side of the gauge. In FIG. "1" is displayed, and the shaded area corresponding to the set value "1" is displayed on the gauge. Although details will be described later, in the present control example, when the power is turned on, the set value “1” is set as an initial value of the set value of the volume.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 314 (b), when the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b is pressed while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed, a volume gauge S2 and a volume switching display S3 are displayed. You. The volume switching display S3 includes a “switching” display for indicating that the volume can be switched, a volume reduction display mode S3a for indicating that the volume is decreased when the left volume button 23a is pressed, and a “switch” display mode for pressing the right volume button 23b. And a sound volume increase display mode S3b indicating that the volume is increased. By pressing the left volume button 23a and the right volume button 23b while the volume switching display S3 is displayed, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when performing an illegal act on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, an act of illegally operating the control content of the main control device 110 and aiming at a big hit), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily turned off. Some turn off and cheat. In order to make it easier to find such misconduct, there is a countermeasure for generating a loud sound when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  However, in recent years, there are many pachinko machines 10 that temporarily emit a loud sound as a technique for enhancing the effect of production, and a large volume generated when the power is turned on in a game arcade where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are operating. There was a problem that the store clerk of the game hall overlooked. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to the time when the first special symbol change is completed, the minimum value of the volume setting range which can be variably set by the player is set. Is also configured to output a small sound. With such a configuration, in a gaming machine that emits a loud sound during a normal game, it is possible to create an uncomfortable state compared to the surrounding gaming machines by emitting an unnecessarily small sound, It can be easily discovered by a store clerk at a game arcade.

  Further, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the player cannot adjust the volume from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to when the first special symbol change is completed. It is possible to prevent the player who performed the action from operating the volume button 23 after turning on the power and adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 so as to output the same volume as the surrounding pachinko machine 10.

  Specifically, as shown in X (a), the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. 314 (b) described above is displayed on the customer waiting screen after the power is turned on, and the volume switching display S3 is not displayed. Make up. As described above, although a volume smaller than the set value “1” of the volume is output internally, the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the set value “1” is displayed on the display screen. It is possible to prevent the player who performs the act from seeing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and being perceived as the pachinko machine 10 that has been subjected to countermeasures against fraud.

  Similarly, as shown in X (b), even if the volume button 23 is pressed during the special symbol change in the first rotation after the power is turned on (a state in which a volume smaller than the set value “1” is output). However, the volume switching display S3 is not displayed, and the volume button 23 cannot be operated to change the set value of the volume.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The same elements as those in the above-described respective control examples are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example. Each of the above control examples is different in that a volume button 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) is provided, and is otherwise the same.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 317 (a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 317 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example is greatly different from the ROM of each control example described above in that a sound volume table 222ca is provided. The other elements are the same.

  The volume table 222ca is a data table in which volume setting values that can be set by operating the volume button 23 are defined. Here, the contents of the volume table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 318 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the volume table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 318, in addition to the set values (set values “1” to “4”) that can be set by operating the volume button 23, a predetermined condition after power-on is satisfied in the volume table 222ca. A set value (set value “A”) set when the user is present is defined, and a predetermined set value is set according to the state.

  Specifically, the set value “A” is set until the special symbol change (special figure change) in the first rotation after the power is turned on. When the set value “A” is set, a sound having a loudness of 15 db (decibel) is output. When the set value “1” is set by operating the volume button 23, a sound having a size of 30 db (decibel) is output, and when the set value “2” is set, a sound having a size of 75 db (decibel) is output. When a set value "3" is set, a sound having a size of 85 db (decibel) is output, and when a set value "4" is set, a sound having a size of 95 db (decibel) is set. A sound is output.

  In this control example, the configuration is such that the set value “1” is set as the initial value after the power is turned on. However, the configuration is such that the initial value of the volume is set according to various conditions. For example, a flag that is set to ON only when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is provided, and when the flag is set to ON, the set value “3” is set as an initial value. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the time when the power is turned on is determined, and a different set value is set as an initial value based on the determination result.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the third control example, a set volume storage area 223ca, a volume operation invalid flag 223cb, and a volume change standby flag 223cc are added to the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example described above. They differ in the point. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The set volume storage area 223ca is an area for storing (storing) the currently set volume, and is set in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 320) of the startup process 4 (see FIG. 319). The stored setting values are stored (Z6003, Z6004 in FIG. 320). Further, the set value set in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) of the main process 4 (see FIG. 321) of the audio lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 322).

  The volume operation invalid flag 223cb is a flag for indicating a period in which the change of the volume (change of the set value) based on the operation of the volume button 23 is invalidated, and the change of the volume (the set value Change) is set to ON during a period in which the change is invalidated. The volume operation invalid flag 223cb is determined when the RTC clock time is determined to be during business hours (for example, 10:00 am to 10:00 pm) in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 116) (Z6002 in FIG. 320). Yes is set to ON (Z6005 in FIG. 320), and is referred to in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) (Z6107 in FIG. 322). If it is determined in the process of Z6107 that the setting is on (see Z6107 in FIG. 322), the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 314 (a)) without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 314 (b)). ) Is set (Z6110 in FIG. 322). Then, it is turned off in the volume-related processing (see FIG. 324) executed in the stop command processing 4 (FIG. 323) (Z5122 in FIG. 324). That is, when the special symbol change is stopped and the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON, it is set to OFF.

  The volume change standby flag 223cc is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to ON when the volume can be adjusted. Things. In the third control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to first press the volume button 23 to display the volume switching display S3 on the third symbol display device 81. The volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (left volume button 23a or right volume button 23b) while the volume switching display S3 is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed when the volume button 23 is pressed by mistake during a game.

  If the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing the power-on operation in a state where the RAM clear switch 122 is operated (pressed state) when the power is turned on, the maximum operation setting is performed. The sound effect indicating that the RAM has been cleared may be output at a sound volume or at a sound volume higher than the maximum sound volume set by the operation. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent improper execution of improperly executing RAM clear and aiming at a random number value.

  Further, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the sound of the game is output at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by the operation until one change at the time of power-on is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed at a volume lower than the operation-set minimum volume, a sound such as BGM or a sound effect (effect sound) is output, and the third symbol display device 81 sets the volume. May be displayed, and the sound volume is maintained and output until the player operates the volume button 23. With such a configuration, when the game is started at the time of opening the game store after the power is turned on, the sound is output by the previous player's volume setting (volume setting of the previous day), and the large volume is output. Can be suppressed. Further, by setting the volume to be lower than the minimum volume, the player can be made aware of the fact that the volume is low and harming the player, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23. You can notice that it is configured. It should be noted that the volume may be switched to a volume lower than the minimum and the volume setting screen may be displayed by switching to the demo screen irrespective of when the power is turned on. Further, after the game is started (the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), during the period in which the volume setting smaller than the minimum volume is continued without operating the volume button 23, the changing special symbol is changed. Depending on the winning lottery result and the lottery result (pre-read result), which is stored and held, the display color (volume design and volume button (volume up by right operation, volume down by left operation) pattern) on the volume setting screen can be changed. It may be configured to notify the degree of expectation of winning. With this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game with a quiet volume until the fluctuation of the expected degree is high or the storage of the hold is performed.

<Control processing by voice lamp control device in fourth control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The fourth control example is different from the first control example in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added to the start-up process, a volume setting process (Z2171) is added to the main process, and a sound editing / output process (Z2109) is performed. The main difference is that the processing is added, and that the volume-related processing (Z5120) is added to the stop command processing, which is one of the command determination processings.

  With reference to FIG. 319, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 319) in the fourth control example is different from the start-up process (FIG. 275) in the first control example in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 320, an initial volume setting (Z2051) which is one of the start-up processes (FIG. 319) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial volume setting (Z2051).

  In the initial sound volume setting, first, the calculation time of the RTC is read (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether the business hours are currently open (Z6002). If it is determined that it is not during business hours (Z6002: No), the set value 2 is read from the volume table 222ca provided in the ROM 222, and stored in the set volume storage area 223ca provided in the RAM 223 (Z6003). This processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during business hours (Z6004), the set value 1 is read from the volume table 222ca, stored in the set volume storage area 223ca (Z6004), and the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set on. (Z6005), this process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 321, main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing 4. The main process (FIG. 321) in the fourth control example is different from the main process (FIG. 258) in the second control example in that a volume setting process (Z2171) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the volume setting process (Z2171), which is one of the main processes 4 (FIG. 321) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the content of the volume setting process (Z2171).

  In the volume setting process (Z2171), it is first determined whether or not the volume button has been operated (Z6101). If it is determined that the volume button has not been operated (Z6101), this processing ends. When the volume button is operated (Z6101: Yes), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z6102). When it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6102: Yes), a set value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222ca (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command for displaying a volume gauge corresponding to the read set value is set (Z6104). Next, an audio setting command for indicating the read set value is set (Z6105), the read set value is stored in the set sound volume storage area 223ca (Z6106), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z6102, when it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to off (Z6102: No), it is determined whether the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to on (Z6107). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to off (Z6107: No), a display volume change command for indicating a volume gauge and an adjustment display is set (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6109), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6107, if the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON (Z6107: Yes), a display volume command for indicating a volume gauge is set (Z6110), and this processing ends.

  Referring to FIG. 323, stop command processing 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop command processing 4 (Z2259). Stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example is different from the stop command processing (FIG. 301) in the second control example in that a sound volume-related processing (Z5120) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 324, the volume related processing (Z5120), which is one of the stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing the content of the volume-related processing (Z5120).

  In the sound volume-related processing (Z5120), first, it is determined whether the sound volume operation invalid flag 223cb provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z5152). If it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON (Z5121: Yes), the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to OFF (Z5122), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z5121, if it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag is off (Z5121: No), the processing of Z5122 is not executed, and this processing ends.

<About the fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth control example, a control process regarding the operation of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 5) provided in the operation device 300 (see FIG. 5) will be described. Only the differences from the first control example will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be omitted.

  In the fifth control example, mainly when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the initial operation of the tilting device 310 and the error processing at the time of the initial operation, and the control processing and the error in the operation of the tilting device 310 during the normal game. The processing will be described.

  With reference to FIGS. 325 (a) and (b), a display mode of an abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. FIG. 325 (a) shows an initial operation at power-on (tilt initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 342) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 110) when the tilt operation timer 223db of the tilt device 310 described later is set to 0 ( Even if the initial operation period to reach the origin position after the initial operation is reached, if not detected at the origin position, an abnormality notification display mode (error) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (Display).

  As shown in FIG. 325 (a), based on the fact that the tilting device 310 has not been moved to the origin position by the origin sensor of the operating device 300 even after the operation period in which the initial operation of the tilting device 310 ends. The text "Button return error A Please call a staff member" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to inform an employee of the hall that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. . In this control example, at the time of the initial operation, if the tilting device 310 is not moved to the origin position at the timing when the initial operation period ends, an error display as shown in FIG. I have. In addition, although details will be described later, a normal game that may not be able to perform a normal operation predetermined in a stage or the like cannot be performed by preventing a player from performing an action such as pressing down the operation of the tilting device 310 with a hand or the like. In the meantime, even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, an error is not immediately displayed, but a predetermined specific condition (for example, four times by operating the tilting device 310 every three fluctuations of the special symbol) In the case where an abnormality is continuously detected until the abnormality is detected by the operation of the tilting device 310), an error is notified so that the progress of the game is not a mechanical abnormality. It is configured to be able to suppress the problem of hindering regardless.

  It should be noted that the error display at the time of the initial operation is a mechanical (including control-related) abnormality by providing a display that can be identified as “button return error A” as shown in FIG. Is configured to be easily determined.

  As shown in FIG. 325 (b), after operating the tilting device 310 in a game effect during a normal game (during the game after the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is completed), the tilting device 310 is returned to the origin position. When performing the operation to move, if the movement (movement) to the origin position is not detected by the origin sensor even during the period to complete the movement to the origin position, an error is not immediately displayed and an error occurs internally. Is set to a status indicating the state where the symbol is detected, and thereafter, an operation of moving to the origin position is performed every three changes of the special symbol, and if it can be moved to the origin position for four consecutive times, the third symbol display device In the main display area 81, the character "button return error B please call the attendant" is displayed to inform the player and the hall employee that the tilting device 310 has an abnormality. Over display is executed.

  Here, by displaying a character "button return error B" different from that at the time of the initial operation, it is configured such that it is possible to easily recognize an abnormality during the normal game. As described above, in the present control example, during the normal game, the error display is performed by executing the error display in consideration of the fact that the player is playing a game that hinders the operation of the tilting operation 310. The system is configured so that infrequently executed problems can be suppressed. In addition, when an error display is performed during a normal game and it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the tilting device 310, the player is performing a game method that hinders the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long time. Therefore, the error operation of the tilting device 310 can be prevented at an early stage by the hall employee or the like confirming the game method.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 326 to FIG. 328, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 310, the change of the special symbol, and the touch sensor effect will be described. FIG. 326 shows a period in which the tilting device 310 performs an operation effect when the variation of the normal reach A is performed as the variation pattern of the special symbol (third symbol), and the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position (origin). FIG. 9 is a timing chart in an example in which detection is not performed by the origin sensor even during a period in which the return is completed.

  When the fluctuation display of the normal reach A (the fluctuation time (fluctuation period) of 30,000 ms) is determined, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the determination value “0-149” set in the operation effect selection table 222da described later. And if the value matches the acquired value of the effect counter 223h, a tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 (see FIG. 333 (a)) described later is determined. The tilting operation scenario A table 222 (refer to FIG. 333 (a)) indicates a position where the tilting device 310 is lowered to the position shown in FIG. Then, an operation of repeating the highest position (see FIG. 32) at intervals of 0.5 seconds is executed, and then an operation of descending to the original position shown in FIG. 22 is executed (set).

  When the out-of-normal reach A is executed, the third symbol is in the reach display mode (the third symbol in the left symbol column and the right symbol column is the same type of symbol) 18 seconds after the start of the change of the special symbol (T1). (Temporary stop (stop)). In the reach display mode, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 for indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 20 seconds after the start of the change of the special symbol. Here, it is described later that the tilting operation 320 is pressed and the frame button 22 is pressed for 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the start of the change of the special symbol. An operation valid period (T5) is set in which the detection is determined to be valid when detected by the detection sensor 324.

  As shown in FIGS. 326 and 333 (a), after 18 seconds (18000 ms) from the start of the fluctuation of the normal reach deviation A (T1), the drive motor 342 moves backward 210 (clockwise in FIG. 22). By the step rotation, the disk cam 344 rotates clockwise 210 degrees from the origin position (the position in FIG. 22) and moves to the cam removal position shown in FIG. 30 (operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 333 (a))). ). Thereafter, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (3000 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 333 (a))). After the stop period of 3 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 30), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 20 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to release the unlock position. (See FIG. 32) (see operation pointer 3 (FIG. 333) (a)).

  Here, when moving from the cam release position to the lock release position, as described above in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the release member 346 moves downward (counterclockwise). By the rotation, the rotating claw member 347 is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the locking (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotating claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is rotated by the torsion spring 315. It is raised by the urging force of. In this case, the driving operation of the voice coil motor 352 also provides the assistance in the front-rear direction to the tilting device 320, so that the ascending force is increased and the ascending speed is improved. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is on standby (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 333 (a))). Thereafter, the drive motor 342 is driven forward by 50 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32), so that the disk cam 344 rotates counterclockwise by 50 degrees and moves downward by 50 degrees from the highest position (see FIG. 32). It is moved to the pivoted lowering position (see FIG. 33) (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 333 (a))). Then, after 0.5 seconds, the drive motor 342 is driven again in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 33) by 50 steps, whereby the disk cam 344 is rotated clockwise by 50 degrees, and the tilting device 320 is again rotated. It is moved to the highest position (see FIG. 32) (operation pointer 6 (see FIG. 333 (a))).

  Thereafter, after 0.5 seconds again, the tilting device 320 is driven from the highest position to the swinging down position (the operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 333 (a))), and 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device is moved from the swinging down position to the swinging down position. The tilting device 320 is driven to the raised position (the operation pointer 8 (see FIG. 333 (a))). Thereafter, the drive motor 342 is stopped for one second (the operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 333 (a))). When the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 ends, the return operation process after the effect (Z2911: FIG. 340) is executed, and the drive is performed based on the origin detection operation A table 222d3 described later (see FIG. 334 (a)). When the motor 342 is driven in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 32), the disc cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise and the tilting device 320 is driven in a direction to descend to the origin position. Is transmitted.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 326, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed so as not to descend to the player at the highest position. In such a case, as described in the first embodiment, the movable clutch 343c is separated from the transmission gear 343b and the transmission gear 343b idles, so that the drive motor 342 is driven. Also, the disk cam 344 is configured not to rotate.

  Here, the detection sensor 324 detects that the drive motor 342 is at the origin position even after the tilting operation timer 223db (1900 ms) set in the origin detection operation A table 222db3 (see FIG. 334 (a)) elapses. If not, the tilting operation status is set to “4” as data indicating an abnormality of the tilting device 310 which will be described later (an abnormal state which is not a state of notifying the outside).

  As described above, even when the tilting device 320 is held by the player and the like, the drive motor 342 (the transmission gear 343b) may not be returned from the highest position to the original position by the configuration of the movable clutch 343c. By causing the motor to idle, damage to the drive motor 342, the transmission gear 343b, and the like can be suppressed. Further, the configuration is such that it is possible to determine from the tilting operation status that an abnormality has occurred in the home position return operation, so that an abnormal state can be internally identified.

  Next, referring to FIG. 327, when an effect in which the tilting device 310 moves up (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 326) is executed, even if the origin detecting operation period (for example, 1900 ms) elapses, the origin sensor is moved. The control executed after the tilting operation status is set to "4" without turning on the power is described. FIG. 327 shows that when the tilting operation status is set to “4”, a retry operation for returning the tilting device 310 to the origin position is executed every time three special symbol (special figure) fluctuations are executed. It is a timing chart in the case of being performed.

  When the tilting operation status is set to “4”, a retry operation in which the drive motor 342 is operated so as to move the tilting device 310 to the origin position every three fluctuations of the special symbol is executed as shown in FIG. Is done. In this case, the origin sensor must be turned on by four consecutive retry operations (four retry operations for every three changes) while maintaining the tilt operation status value at "4" until the origin sensor is detected. 325 (b) is executed.

  As a result, even when an effect of raising the tilting device 310 is performed and the origin detecting operation of the tilting device 310 is performed, the player performs a game such as holding the tilting device 310 so as to hinder the operation, and the origin position is determined. Even if an abnormality occurs that does not move to, the retry operation is not performed immediately as in the case of the abnormality during the initial operation, and the retry operation is performed every time the special symbol is changed a specified number of times (three times). And if it is still determined that it is not possible to continuously move to the origin position, an error is displayed, so that errors are frequently displayed due to mischief etc. A busy trouble can be suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 328, when the tilting operation status is set to “4”, and when the announcement effect using the touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the touch sensor 290 is turned on. Control in the case where the origin detection operation (retry operation) is executed based on the changed timing will be described. FIG. 328 is a timing chart showing the operation of the tilting device 310 executed when an effect using the touch sensor 290 is executed. The change of the special symbol starts, the notice effect in which the operation of the touch sensor 290 is valid is selected, the validity period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 290. When the operation is performed and the touch sensor 290 determines that the touch sensor 290 has been turned on, the drive motor 342 of the tilting device 310 is driven to perform the origin detection operation. FIG. 328 shows a case where the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on, and the tilting operation status is set to “0”. On the other hand, if the origin sensor is not turned on even after the elapse of the origin detection period (for example, 3600 ms), the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped, and the tilting operation status is maintained at “4”. . As a result, the retry operation is continuously performed every three changes, and control for eliminating the abnormality of the tilting device 310 can be performed.

  Usually, the player operates the firing handle with the right hand, and operates the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 290 with the left hand. When the player is playing a game while holding the tilting device 310 so that the tilting device 310 does not return to the origin position, it is conceivable that the player holds the tilting device 310 with the left hand. By performing the origin detecting operation of the tilting device 310, the origin detecting operation is executed in a state where the holding of the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In this control example, the origin detection operation is performed at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on. However, only when the touch sensor 290 is turned on while the touch sensor of the firing handle is turned on. The origin detection operation may be configured to be executed, and the origin detection operation may be performed in a state where the holding of the player is released more reliably. The present invention is not limited to the touch sensor 290, but may be a frame button 290, or a third symbol display device 81 may be used to execute a notice effect using both hands (for example, a character display such as "Raise both hands"). Alternatively, an effect of causing a mobile phone or the like to read a three-dimensional code or the like may be executed, and the origin detection operation may be executed during that period. An effect of notifying that both hands are used by voice may be naturally used.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 334. FIG. 329 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. In the fifth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Since the tilting device 310 has the same configuration as that already described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 85, the detailed description is omitted.

  The drive motor 342 is formed of a stepping motor, and is driven so that when the tilting device 310 is at the lower limit position, the tilting device 310 is released from being locked to prevent the tilting device 310 from rising at the lower limit position. When the lock is released, the vibration force of the later-described voice coil motor 352, which is driven in synchronization with the drive motor 342, in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is assisted and rises to the highest position by the urging force of the spring. .

  On the other hand, in a state where the tilting member 310 is located at the highest position, the tilting device 310 is moved downward by rotating the drive motor 342 in a reverse rotation to the case where the drive motor 342 is raised, and is moved to the origin position. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, the bottom plate 311a is locked by the rotating claw member 347 (see FIG. 22), and the tilting device 310 is prevented from rising.

  The detection sensor 324 is configured by the transmission type detection sensor already described with reference to FIG. 13, is configured by the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the tilting device 310 illustrated in FIG. , The left detection sensor 324L detects the left detection piece 311gL (ON state), and the right detection sensor 324R does not detect the right detection piece 311gR (OFF state). Thus, it is possible to detect that the tilting device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. Further, when the tilting device 310 is further pressed by the player in the lower limit position, the right detection sensor 324R detects the right detection piece 311gR (ON state), and both the left detection sensor 324L are turned ON. , The tilt device 310 can be determined to be operated by the player at the lower limit position.

  Accordingly, the tilting device 310 can be used in the effect of being pressed (operated) by the player not only when the tilting device 310 is moved to the highest position but also when it is restricted at the lowest position. It can be used for various effects. For example, if the effect of tilting device 310 rising and pressing is set to have a high probability of being executed during the change of the special symbol whose hit / failure determination result is a hit, the degree of expectation of the hit / failure determination result by tilting device 310 is increased. Can be represented.

  The voice coil motor 352 is disposed on the back side of the tilting device 310, and when driven, repeats vibration from the back side direction to the front side direction of the tilting device 310. This is for performing an effect that allows the player to feel vibration when the player touches the tilting device 310. Further, when the tilting device 310 rises, the lifting force is increased by the biasing force of the spring against gravity, but the lifting force is weakened by the weight of the tilting device 310. However, the voice coil motor 352 is driven when it is raised. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the lifting force is applied by the vibration from the voice coil motor 352 and the lifting force is weakened by its own weight.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first control example described above are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 330A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. The fifth control example is different from the first control example in that an operation effect selection table 222da, a tilt operation scenario table db, an origin detection operation A table 222dcc, an origin detection operation B table 222dd, and a tilt initial operation table 222de are added. doing.

  The operation effect selection table 222da is a table for selecting operation data (operation contents) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 332 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect selection table 222da. In the operation effect selection table 222da, a determination value of the effect counter 223h that determines whether or not to execute the operation effect using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability according to the variation type of the special symbol is set. The type of the tilt motion scenario is set for the determination value for executing the operation effect. The tilting operation scenario includes an operation effect start time (operation effect start period) serving as a timer value for determining a trigger to start an operation effect of the tilting device 310 as the special symbol change time elapses, and a tilting device 310. The operation validity start time (operation validity), which is a timer value of the tilting operation timer 223db for setting the operation time (operation period) of the tilting operation, and the timer value for determining the start time (start period) when the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid A start period) and an operation valid end time (operation valid end period) serving as a timer value for determining that the period in which the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid are ended. That is, based on the operation data selected from the operation effect selection table 222da, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if so, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310 and the game A valid period (T5) for validating the operation when the user presses the button is set.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is “Normal reach jackpot A” or “Normal reach A”, it is determined whether to acquire the value of the effect counter 223h and execute the operation effect. When it is determined from the effect selection table 222da that the operation effect is to be executed (when the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is any one of “0 to 149”), the operation scenario of the tilting device 320 is as follows. A tilting operation scenario A table 222bd1 to be described later is selected, 8800 ms is set in the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) (Z2923 in FIG. 341), 18000 ms is set in the operation effect start time (T1), and the operation effective start time (T3 ) Is set to 23300 ms, and the operation valid end time (T4) is set to 26800 ms. .

  When the variation pattern of the special symbol is “super reach jackpot A” or “super reach off A”, it is determined whether to acquire the value of the effect counter 223h and execute the operation effect. When it is determined from the selection table 222da that the operation effect is to be executed (when the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is any one of “0 to 149”), a tilt described later as an operation scenario of the tilt device is performed. The operation scenario B table 222bd2 is selected, the tilt operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 7900 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 341), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 38000 ms, and the operation effective start time (T3) is 41500 ms. Is set, and 45900 ms is set as the operation effective end time (T4). As described above, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period during which the operation is valid are set in advance in accordance with the type of change of the special symbol, and the operation is performed as time elapses.

  The tilting operation scenario table 222db includes the origin detecting operation tables A and B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the type of the tilting operation scenario and the tilting operation scenario selected in the operation effect selection table 222da. A data table for setting has been set.

  FIG. 332 (b) is a diagram showing a configuration of the tilting operation scenario table 222db. The tilt operation scenario table 222db includes a tilt operation scenario A table 222db1, a tilt operation scenario B table 222db2, an origin detection operation A table 222db3, and an origin detection operation B table 222db4.

  The tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is a table in which the operation contents in the tilting operation scenario A are defined, and can be selected when the variation pattern type is out of the normal reach A or per the normal reach A, and when the tilting device 310 is movable. Is stored. As described above, the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is set by the lottery of the operation effect selection table 222da at the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 333 (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1. When the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered after the change of the special symbol is started, the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is started.

  As for the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1, the operation content corresponding to the operation pointer is read out during the required time corresponding to the elapse of the tilting operation timer 223db in order from the operation pointer "1" (Z2953 in FIG. 343). Then, the defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes “10” (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

  Specifically, when the operation effect start time is triggered (18000 ms) after the start of the change of the special symbol, the operation data in which the operation pointer is “1” (210 steps during 2100 ms in the backward direction) The release member 346 is rotated clockwise by the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344, and the second overhang portion 344c3 is positioned above the releasing member 34 (see FIG. 30). (That is, the operation of moving the second protrusion 344c3 to the upper portion of the release member 34 (see FIG. 30) without operating the rotating claw member 347), and the cam is removed. Next, a standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is “2” (stopped for 3000 ms). The operation data with the operation pointer being “3” (movable in the forward rotation direction for 20 steps during 200 ms) is executed, and the unlocking operation (when the second overhang portion 344 c 3 rotates the release member 346 downward). Then, the disk cam 344 is moved to the unlocked position by rotating the rotary claw member 347 to release the locking with the tilting device 320, and the tilting device 320 starts to rise.

  Next, the operation data of which the operation pointer is "4" (stop for 500 ms) is executed, the ascending wait is performed, and the operation data of which the operation pointer is "5" (for 50 ms, 50 steps can be moved in the forward direction). ) Is executed, the operation pointer is set to the position shown in FIG. 33, the operation data with the operation pointer being "6" (movable in the backward direction by 50 steps during 500 ms) is executed, and the tilting operation to the position shown in FIG. 32 is executed. The operation data of which the operation pointer is “7” (movable in the forward direction by 50 steps during 500 ms) is executed again to the position shown in FIG. 33, and the operation data with the operation pointer of “8” (50 steps during 500 ms) (Movable in the backward direction) is executed, and the position shown in FIG. 33 is again obtained. The operation that is repeated twice from the operation pointers “4” to “8” is used as a fluttering operation, and the operation data with the operation pointer “9” (for 1000 ms) Is stopped), the operation is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 32, the operation pointer is set to "10", and the operation ends.

  As described above, the operation of the tilting device 320 performed in accordance with the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is such that the tilting device 320 is moved from the state of the origin to the highest position, and then the tilting device 320 is moved to the highest position. After performing the raising operation, an operation of returning to the origin position is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 326, when the tilting device 320 is pressed down and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts ascending, the detection is regarded as valid. The judgment is made, a specific announcement effect (for example, an effect for notifying the degree of expectation of winning, etc.) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 27 also provide a sound effect according to the announcement effect. And the lamp lighting mode is turned on. When the tilting device 320 is pressed down by the player before the elapse of the operation validity period (T5) of 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts ascending, the tilting device 320 detects the origin. Before the return operation by the operation A table 222db3 is performed, if the tilting device 320 is moved to the origin position by a pressing operation and locked by the rotating claw member 347 and held at the origin position, the origin detection is performed. The operation based on the operation A table 222db3 is executed, and the disk cam 344 is moved to the initial position (origin position).

  If the transmission gear 343b idles while being held by the player at the position where the tilting device 320 is raised or the like, the left detection sensor 353L is turned on to determine the initial position, and the position of the disc cam 344 is determined. Is returned to the home position.

  The tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is a table in which the operation content in the tilting operation scenario B is defined, and stores the operation data when the tilting device 310 is movable when the variation pattern type is Super Reach A. As described above, the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222da at the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 333 (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2. When the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered after the change of the special symbol is started, the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is started.

  The tilt motion scenario B table 222db2 reads out the motion content corresponding to the motion pointer from the motion pointer in order from "1" for a required time corresponding to the elapse of the time of the tilt motion timer 223db (Z2953 in FIG. 343). The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes “11” (tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

  Specifically, when the operation effect start time is triggered (38000 ms) after the start of the change of the special symbol, the operation data in which the operation pointer is “1” (50 steps in the forward direction during 500 ms) Is executed), the lock is released, the operation data of the operation pointer “2” (stopped during 3000 ms) is executed, the standby is performed, and the operation data of the operation pointer “3” is executed (200 ms 20 steps are performed in the forward direction, the operation pointer is "4", the operation data is "4" (for 20 ms, the 20 steps are backwards), and the operation pointer is "5". During the 200 ms, 20 steps are performed in the forward direction (movable in the forward direction), and the operation data with the operation pointer “6” (in the 200 ms, 20 steps are moved in the backward direction) is executed. Is "7" operation data (movable 20 steps forward in 200 ms), and the operation pointer is "8" operation data (moves 20 steps backward in 200 ms) Then, using the three repetitive operations of the operation pointers “3” to “8” as the motion, the operation data of the operation pointer “9” (movable in the forward direction by 120 steps for 1200 ms) is executed. 38, the operation data with the operation pointer of "10" (stop for 2000 ms) is executed, the operation is stopped at the position of FIG. 38, the operation pointer becomes "11", and the operation ends. .

  With this configuration, the tilting device 310 performs a fluttering operation during the reach effect, prompts the player to perform an operation, and changes the fueling operation in accordance with the variation type. In addition, by stopping the rising height (length) at different points, interest in the operation is generated, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In the present control example, the type of the tilting operation scenario is set in correspondence with the type of the fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured such that the determination value of the effect counter 223h is distributed and set, so that the selectivity is changed and set in accordance with the result of the determination as to whether the result is correct or not. With such a configuration, for example, when the hit / failure determination result is a hit, the tilt motion scenario in which the probability of being selected is set to be higher than that in the case of a miss is set, and the player is notified of the hit / failure determination result. Can be expected to win.

  In addition, as shown in the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, a tilting operation scenario type is set in which, after performing the tilting operation at the start of the operation, the tilting operation scenario is not moved up to the highest position but moved to the origin position. Is also good. With such a configuration, for example, the tilting operation scenario B is set to be easily selected when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit. By setting it so that it can be easily selected, the fan operation can be performed, so that the expectation of the jackpot can be increased.

  The origin detection operation A table 222db3 stores the tilting device 310 in the original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting operation scenario A. Operation data is stored.

  FIG. 334 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data with the operation pointer being “1” until the operation pointer becomes “2” (tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

  Specifically, the operation data in which the operation pointer is “1” (movable in the forward direction by 190 steps during 1900 ms) is executed, the operation pointer becomes “2”, and the operation ends.

  The origin detecting operation A table 222db3 indicates that the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the period in which the operation is valid, and the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). Alternatively, when the detection sensor 324 has not detected the origin (Z2961: No), 1900 ms is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223db based on the origin detecting operation A table 222db3, and 3 is set in the tilting status 223da. By performing (Z2959), the operation content of the origin detection operation A table 222db3 is read (Z2974) until the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 in the return operation processing after production (FIG. 344, Z2911), and the origin detection is performed. Is present (Z2971: Yes) or the tilting operation timer 223db is set to 0 That (Z2973: No) until, homing operation is performed.

  The origin detecting operation B table 222db4 stores the tilting device 310 at the original position (origin) when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting operation scenario B. Operation data is stored.

  FIG. 334 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db4. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data with the operation pointer being “1” until the operation pointer becomes “2” (tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

  Specifically, the operation data in which the operation pointer is “1” (movable in the forward direction by 190 steps during 1900 ms) is executed, the operation pointer becomes “2”, and the operation ends.

  The origin detecting operation B table 222db4 indicates that the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table has been completed, the player has operated the tilting device 310 during the valid operation period, and the tilting operation flag has been turned on (Z2957: Yes). Or when the detection sensor 324 has not detected the origin (Z2961: No). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222db4, 1900 ms is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223db, and 3 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2959). Until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0, the operation content of the origin detection operation B table 222db3 is read (Z2974), and the origin is detected (Z2971: Yes), or the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No). ), The home return operation is performed.

  The retry operation table 222dc stores operation data for repeatedly performing the home position detection when the home position detection operation is not performed after the tilting device 310 performs the tilt operation scenario and the home position detection is not performed. Have been.

  FIG. 334 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the retry operation table 222dc. The retry operation table 222dc indicates whether the operation pointer becomes “2” (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0) in order from the operation data of which the operation pointer is “1”, similarly to the operation of the above-described tilt operation scenario table. The process is performed until the origin is detected (Z2989: Yes).

  Specifically, the retry operation table 222dc ends when the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No) in the above-described origin detecting operation, sets 4 to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2975), In the retry operation process (Z2913) executed by setting 3 to the detection variation counter 223dc (Z2976) and setting 4 to the detection check counter 223dd (Z2977), the variation start timing (Z2981: Yes) of the special symbol is set. When the detection check counter 223dd is 1 or more (Z2982: Yes), and when the detection variation counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983), and 0 (Z2984: No), a retry is performed based on the contents of the retry operation table. Operating time (900 ms) Set between 223db is (Z2985), the detection check counter 223Dd 1 is subtracted (Z2986), the value after the subtraction is 1 or more: If (Z2987 Yes), sets the detection variation counter 223dc to 3 (Z2988). When the detection sensor 324 is not at the origin position (Z21989: No), when the tilt operation timer 223db is not 0 (Z2990: Yes), the corresponding operation content is read out (Z2991), and the retry operation is performed by the tilt operation timer. The process is performed until 223db becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 becomes the origin position (Z2989: Yes). As shown in FIG. 327, the above operation is set once every three times of the special symbol change, and is performed up to four times if the origin is not detected.

  The tilting initial operation table 222dd stores operation data for performing an initial operation setting of the tilting device 310 when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 334 (d) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting initial motion table 222dd. In the tilting initial motion table 222dd, similarly to the motion of the tilting motion scenario table described above, the motion pointer becomes “2” in order from the motion data of which the motion pointer is “1”, and the tilting motion timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: Yes). Or until the origin is detected (Z2933: Yes).

  Specifically, in the startup process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, if the contents of the RAM are normal (Z2205: Yes), the operation time (7200 ms) is determined based on the tilt initial operation table 222dd. ) Is set in the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2061), and the operation is started by setting the tilting operation status to 1 (Z2062).

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 331 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third control example. In the second control example, the tilting operation status 223da, the tilting operation timer 223db, the detection variation counter 223dc, the detection check counter 223dd, the tilting operation flag 223de, and the pressing advance notice are effective compared to the first control example described above. The difference is that a timer 223df is added.

  The tilting operation status 223da stores information for determining the operation state of the tilting device 310. The tilting operation status 223da is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is set in the startup process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, and the initial operation state is set.

  As the tilting operation status 223da, a process to be executed is determined according to the value of the tilting operation status 223da in the tilting device control process (Z2891), which is executed in the frame button input monitoring / producing process 3 (Z2161). . Specifically, when the value of the tilting operation status 223d is “0” (Z2904: Yes), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the tilting operation is in a standby state waiting for an operation start. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is “1” (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the tilting operation is in the course of the initial operation after the power is turned on. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is “2” (Z2908: Yes), the operation effecting process (Z2909) is executed, and the tilting operation is in the state of the operation effecting during the special symbol change. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is “3” (Z2910: Yes), a return operation process after the effect (Z2911) is executed, and the tilting operation is a return operation after the scenario operation.

  If the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "4" (Z2912: Yes), a retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and the tilting operation is in the process of performing a retry operation for detecting the origin. If the value of the tilting operation status 223d is other than that (Z2912: No), the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "5", and the execution in this process is terminated. This is an error state when the origin cannot be detected when the operation is performed. If the error state occurs, the tilting operation does not change until the power is turned on again.

  In the operation effect setting process (Z2905: FIG. 341), as described above, when the operation effect start time is triggered after the start of the change of the special symbol (Z2921: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2. The setting is made (Z2922), and the tilting operation is in the state of the operation effect during the special symbol changing operation.

  In the tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 342), when the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 in the initial operation (Z2933: Yes), 0 is set when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2933: Yes). Then, the tilting operation is in a standby state, and when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2933: No), 5 is set and an error state is set.

  In the operation effecting process (Z2909: FIG. 343), the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No), and when the tilting operation flag is off (Z2957: No), the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected ( (Z2961: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and the tilting operation enters a standby state.

  In the return operation process after production (Z2911: FIG. 344), when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2971: Yes), 0 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2972), and the tilting operation is in a standby state. To end.

  If there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No), and if the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set to the tilting operation status 223da, and the tilting operation is executing a retry operation. Becomes

  In the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 345), if the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected after the start of the change of the special symbol (Z2981: No) (Z2989: Yes), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972). ), The tilting operation is in a standby state, and when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2989: No), when the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: Yes), 5 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2992: Yes). Z2994), and the tilting operation is in an error state.

  The tilting operation timer 223db is a timer for counting the operation of the tilting device 310. When the power is turned on, the tilt operation timer 223db has an initial operation time set (Z2061). Each time the main process (FIG. 336) is executed, it is incremented by one and repeatedly updated.

  In the standby state when the value of the tilting operation status is “0”, an operation time according to the tilting operation scenario table is set (Z2923). When the tilting operation status is “2”, the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No) and the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes) when the tilting operation timer is set to “2”. The time of the origin detection operation is set based on the detection operation table. When the value of the tilting operation status is “4”, during the execution of the retry operation, the retry operation time is set based on the contents of the retry operation table 222dc (Z2985).

  The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is a counter that counts the number of fluctuations during the retry operation performed when the tilting device 310 does not detect the origin in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection variation counter 223dc tilts when the origin sensor of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2971: No) in the post-effect return operation process (Z2911) executed when the value 223da of the tilt operation status is “3”. When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 3 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in the retry operation.

  During the retry operation, if the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2982: Yes) at the special symbol change start timing (Z2981: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation remains, and the following determination processing is performed. Do. First, the detection variation counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983). If the subtraction result is 0 (Z2984: No), it is determined that the retry operation has been performed, and the tilt operation timer of the tilt operation timer is determined based on the contents of the retry operation table. After the setting (Z2985), if the result of subtracting 1 from the detection check counter 223dd (Z2986) is not 0 (Z2987: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (up to 4 times). , The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988).

  The detection check counter 223dd is a counter that counts the number of retry operations performed when the tilting device 310 does not detect the origin in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection check counter 223dd, when the origin return operation process (Z2911) executed when the value of the tilting operation status 223da is "3", when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2971: No), tilts. When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in the retry operation. Therefore, the retry operation is performed up to four times unless the origin is detected.

  The tilting operation flag 223de indicates that when the tilting operation scenario A or the tilting operation scenario B is being executed, the tilting device 320 is pressed down by the player during the operation valid period and is moved to the origin position, and the rotating claw member is rotated. 347 is a flag indicating that the lock is performed. The tilting operation flag 223de is detected by the detection switch 324 when the tilting device 320 is pressed down during the operation validity period by the process of Z2956 in the operation effecting process (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Is set to on when On the other hand, after the tilting operation flag 223de is determined to be on by the processing of Z2957, the tilting operation status is set to 3, and after the home position return operation is performed, the tilting operation status is set to off (see Z2960).

  When the tilting device 320 is not raised (ie, when the tilting device 320 is held by the rotating claw member 347 at the origin position), the pressing notice effective timer 223df detects that the tilting device 320 has been pressed as a staging switch. This is a timer for determining a valid period for effectively determining the detection of the switch 324. When the fluctuating pattern is determined, the press advance notice valid timer 223df determines the advance notice when the tilting device 320 is used as an effect switch. Data corresponding to a determined validity period is stored. When data corresponding to the validity period is set in the press notification validity timer 223df (Z2877: refer to FIG. 337), the cam removing operation is performed. Thus, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 may be executed due to the operation sound of the cam removal operation, the vibration transmitted to the player from the pachinko machine 10, and the like. Further, the press notification effective timer 223df is updated by decrementing by one by the press Z2873 (see FIG. 337).

<Control processing by main controller in fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 335 to 345, control processing by the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The fifth control example is different from the first control example in that a part of the start-up processing (FIG. 335) and a part of the main processing (FIG. 336) are added, and the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 272) has been changed to frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), and sensor input processing (Z2813: FIG. 273) has been changed to sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338). Retry processing during touch input (Z2860) : Tilting device control processing (Z2891: FIG. 340), operation effect setting processing (FIG. 341), tilt initial operation processing (Z2907: FIG. 342), operation effecting processing (Z2909: FIG. 343), return operation after effect The processing (Z2911: FIG. 344) and the retry operation processing (Z2913: FIG. 345) are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 335, the start-up process (FIG. 335) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 335) in the fifth control example is different from the start-up process (FIG. 257) in the first control example in that processes Z2061 to Z2062 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the start-up process (FIG. 335) in the fifth control example, after executing the process of Z2012 or the process of Z2013, the tilting initial operation table 222de provided in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 334 (d)). Based on this, the tilt operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and a main process (FIG. 336) described later is executed.

  Since the tilting operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the tilting device 320 is executed by tilting initial operation processing (Z2907: FIG. 342) described later when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the initial operation is executed, and the game can be started in a state where the game is moved to the origin position. Although illustration is omitted, the disk cam 344 is operated by the initial operation, and the step counter and the like are set to the initial values based on the left detection sensor 353L being turned on. Control can be performed stably.

  With reference to FIG. 336, the main processing (FIG. 336) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. In the main process (FIG. 336) in the fifth control example, the frame button input monitoring / production process (Z2107) is compared with the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (Z2161) in contrast to the main processing (FIG. 258) in the first control example. ). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 337, frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337) which is one of the main processing (FIG. 336) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. explain. FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161).

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), first, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is currently changing the special symbol for which the execution of the press notice is being determined (the press notice is being set). (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether the execution of the press notice has been determined. When it is determined that the pressing advance notice is being set (Z2881: Yes), it is determined whether the pressing advance notice is valid (Z2882). That is, it is determined whether or not the pressing advance notice is being executed, and it is determined whether or not the pressing advance notice valid timer 223df is a value larger than 0. When it is determined that the pressing notice effective period is in progress (Z2882: Yes), the pressing notice effective timer 223df provided in the RAM 223 is updated by subtracting 1 (Z2883). Next, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player, and it is determined whether the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). If it is determined that the tilting device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: Yes), the display pressing advance notice mode command is set (Z2885), and the flow shifts to the process of Z2890. In the processing of Z2881, if the advance notice is not being executed (Z2881: No), or if it is determined that the button is not pressed by the player in the processing of Z2884 (Z2884: No). , Skip other processing and shift to the processing of Z2890.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2882, when it is determined that it is not during the press notice effective period (Z2882: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the press notice effective period which is the start timing of executing the press notice ( Z2886). The start timing of the press notification is determined by a start timer (not shown) set at the start of the change of the special symbol and determined by the value of the start timer (when the start timer is updated to a specific value “0”).

  If it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period (Z2886: Yes), the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) defined as the value of the press notice valid timer 223df is set, and the cam removal operation is performed for 2100 ms. The reverse rotation operation of the drive motor 342 is set (Z2887). With such a configuration, the cam removal operation is always performed even when the tilting device 320 is pressed down and the lifting operation is not performed, so that the player can be expected to perform the upward effect.

  If it is not the start timing of the press notice effective period (Z2886: No), the process of Z2887 is skipped and the process of Z2888 is executed. Next, it is determined whether or not the press notice effective period has ended (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the press notice effective period timer 223df is 0. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the press-notification effective period (Z2888: Yes), the value of the press-notification effective timer 223df is reset, and a rewind operation of 1500 ms is set as the home position return operation (Z2889). On the other hand, in the process of Z2888, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the valid period (Z2888: No), the process of Z2889 is skipped and the process of the sensor input process 2 (Z2890) is executed.

  Details of the sensor input process 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the tilting device control processing (Z2891) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the tilting device control processing (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the sensor input process 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in the fifth control example, the processes of Z2826 to Z2829 are not executed with respect to the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 273) in the first control example. The difference is that a process (Z2860) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 339, the retry processing during touch input (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the content of the retry processing during touch input (Z2860).

  In the retry processing during touch input (Z2860: FIG. 339), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2861: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2861: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is larger than 0 (Z2862). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2862: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2862: Yes), it is determined whether the detection sensor detects the origin (Z2863). When it is determined that the detection is not the origin detection (Z2863: No), the drive motor is set to the reversing direction one step later (Z2864), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the detection sensor determines that the origin is detected (Z2863: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2865), and the process ends.

  The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilting device control processing (Z2891).

  In the tilting device control processing (Z2891: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2901). When it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2901: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is decremented by one. In the process of Z2901, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2901: No), the process of Z2902 is skipped and the process of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904), an operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, if the tilting operation status indicating the home return abnormality of the tilting device 320 is “4”, the retry operation of the home return is performed. By performing a retry operation for returning to the original position at a timing with a high probability that both hands are used (one hand operates the firing handle and the other hand operates the touch sensor 290), the tilting device 320 can be easily returned to the original position. Can be.

  Here, the operation effect setting process (Z2905), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (Z2905).

  In the operation effect setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether or not the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921). If it is determined that the operation time production start time has not been reached (Z2921: No), this processing is ended. If it is determined that the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, based on the tilting operation scenario table 222db provided in the ROM 222, the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is set (Z2923), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to OFF (Z2924), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 0 (Z2904: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906: Yes), a tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and this process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 342, the tilting initial operation process (Z2907), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilting initial operation process (Z2907).

  In the tilting initial operation process (Z2907), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2931). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2391: Yes), the operation contents of the tilting initial operation table 222de are read (Z2932: Yes), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2931, when it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: No), the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2933). When it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933: Yes), 0 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2934), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2933: No), the tilting operation status is set to 5 (Z2935). Next, a tilt error A command is set as a display error command (Z2936), and this processing ends.

  In this manner, unlike during the game, an error is displayed immediately (abnormal processing) in the initial return operation in the initial operation executed when the power is turned on, so that the malfunction of the tilting device 320 can be found early. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2906, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 1 (Z2906: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908: Yes), an operation effecting process (Z2909) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 343, the operation effecting process (Z2909), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effecting process (Z2909).

  In the operation effecting process (Z2909), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2951). When it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2951: Yes), it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223de provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to on (Z2952: Yes), the present process ends. When it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2952: No), the operation content corresponding to the tilt operation scenario table 222db is read (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether the operation is valid (Z2945). If it is determined that it is not during the operation validity period (Z2954: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the operation is valid (Z2954: Yes), it is determined whether or not a press is detected (Z2955). If it is determined that there is no press detection (Z2955), this processing ends. When it is determined that the press is detected (Z2955: Yes), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2956), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2951, if it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No), it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957). If it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the origin detection operation B table 222dd provided in the ROM 222 ( Z2958). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to OFF (Z2960), and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2957 that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2957: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2961: No), the processing of Z2958 to Z2960 described above is executed, and this processing ends. If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2861: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2908, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 2 (Z2908: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910: Yes), a return operation process after effect (Z2911) is executed, and the present process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 344, the effect return operation process (Z2911), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the return operation process after effect (Z2911).

  In the return operation process after effect (Z2911), first, it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971). If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2971, if it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2971: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2973). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2973: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222dd is read (Z2974), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2973 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2975). Next, 3 is set to the detection fluctuation counter 223dc provided in the RAM 223 (Z2976), and 4 is set to the detection check counter 223dd (Z2977), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2910, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 3 (Z2910: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912: Yes), a retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2912, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2912), the present process is terminated as it is.

  With reference to FIG. 345, the retry operation process (Z2913), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the content of the retry operation process (Z2913).

  In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981). If it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2982). When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2982: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2982: Yes), the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc changed by the calculation is larger than 0 (Z2984). When it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is larger than 0 (Z2984: Yes), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222dc provided in the ROM 222. (Z2985), the value of the detection check counter 223dd is decremented by 1 (Z2986). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2987). When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2987: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223dd sets the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc to 3, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2981, if it is determined that the timing is not the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989). When it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2989: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2990). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2990: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222dc is read (Z2991), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in Z2990, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2990: No), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2992). When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2992: Yes), this processing ends. When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: No), a tilt error B command is set as a display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 (Z2994), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2989, when it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is cleared (Z2995), and this processing ends.

  Note that, in the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in this control example, if the player presses or presses the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, even if the unlocking operation is performed, the rotating claw member 347 can be used immediately. As a result, the tilting device 320 is locked and a problem that the tilting device 320 is not lifted occurs. As a countermeasure, the unlocking operation is performed by setting the number of movable steps to 10 (forward rotation; required time: 100 ms) as the operation data of the operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 333 (a)) which is the unlocking operation. 31 is maintained at the position shown in FIG. 31, and the tilting device 320 can be configured to rise at the timing when the hand is released by configuring so as not to perform the tilting operation.

  Further, as another method, when the tilting operation status A is performed or the unlocking operation is performed, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the detection switch 324 or the upper surface of the tilting device 320 is pressed. Arrange the touch sensor and determine whether the touch sensor is sounding on. If it is on (if pressed), wait without unlocking and wait until it is off Thus, the unlocking operation may be performed at the timing of turning off. Further, when it is determined that the tilting device 320 is pressed or that the player is touching, the hand is released from the tilting device 320 by a display notification or a sound (the obstacle to the upward movement by the player is released). May be notified.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 to 370. In the first control example, when the jackpot A in which the probability of the success / failure determination is set to a low probability (electric support is given up to 100 times) after the jackpot game is executed, the odd-numbered symbol is displayed in the form of even-numbered symbols, Although it is reported that the jackpot is the jackpot A, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot A is executed, if the holding ball to be the jackpot is stored in the holding ball, the jackpot executed first is executed. The stop symbol of A, the effect during the jackpot, etc. are shown as if it is the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2, and the effect as if the high-probability game state (probable changing game state) is set even after the jackpot game. It differs from the first control example in that it is executed. Further, in the sixth control example, even when the third symbol of the even number symbol indicating the jackpot A is displayed, the jackpot type in which the probability change game state of the jackpot B1 or B2 is actually set during the jackpot game. Are set in advance, and at the start of the jackpot game, the type of the promotion effect is determined by lottery, and the promotion effect to be executed thereafter is determined based on the execution contents of the promotion effect (for example, whether or not the promotion is performed). This is different from the first control example in that the effect type is switched and set. The detailed description of the same points as in the first control example is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 346, an example of a special symbol stop display mode of the result of the hit / failure determination of the jackpot A in this control example will be described. FIG. 346 (a) shows that the prefetch result (preliminary determination result) of the reserved symbol h1 stored as the first reserved ball is the jackpot A, and the reserved symbol h2 of the reserved ball displayed as the third ball is shown. This is an example showing a case where the pre-read result is also the jackpot A. In this case, when the change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h1 is executed, normally, the odd symbols are displayed at the start of the change, but the odd symbols are displayed at the start of the change. It is switched and displayed. That is, the same stop symbol as that in the case of the change of the special symbol that is the big hit B1 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 346 (b), it is suggested that the jackpot game is executed in a short time, such as "Super jackpot! Expect the next!", And a probable changing game state is set. The notification as if it is a jackpot is executed. Thereby, in practice, even when the jackpot A is executed, the holding ball that becomes the jackpot A is stored, so that even when the jackpot A is executed, an effect as if the jackpot B1 was executed is executed. Thus, it is possible to make the player feel that the rate at which the jackpot B1 is executed is higher than the design value, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  With reference to FIG. 347 (a), a description will be given of an effect mode in which the special symbol is changed in the time-saving game state (game state with low-probability electric support) after the jackpot game in the example shown in FIG. 346. FIG. 347 (a) shows a state in which the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed in a state where the holding ball that becomes the jackpot A is stored (holding symbol h2). It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 347 (a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the character “super time” is displayed when the game is in the probable change game state despite the time reduction game state. Is displayed, and the character "Big hit expectation UP" is displayed, and a display mode suggesting that the expectation is high is not actually set to be high, but is displayed. In this way, a false notification different from the actual one is given to the player, thereby suppressing a problem that significantly impairs the reliability of the player. As described above, the notification substantially approximating the certainty-changing game state can also be referred to as a pseudo notification mode.

  FIG. 347 (b) is an example showing a stop display mode of a special symbol corresponding to the held symbol h2 held in FIG. 347 (a). The reserved symbol h2 is the result of the hit determination of the jackpot A, and the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot (any one of the jackpot A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C) is not stored in the reserved ball. In the same manner as in the above, the stop display is performed at the even-numbered symbols, and a notification indicating the big hit A is executed.

  FIG. 348 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving game state set after the big hit game of the big hit A in the example shown in FIG. 347 (b) is executed. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode according to the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 348 (a), the display form of the time reduction gaming state is that the character “CHANCE (100 times)” is displayed, the fluctuation of the special symbol is changed 100 times, and the time is reduced. It is notified that the game is being set. Further, each time the special symbol is changed once, the number (the number of times) is reduced by one and displayed.

  FIG. 348 (b) shows a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the jackpot game in the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2 is executed. As a display mode indicating that the probable change game state is set, the characters “during super time (probable change)” are displayed, and the player is notified that the game state is the probable change game state.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode is only partially different between the case where the time saving game state is set in a state in which the holding ball that becomes a big hit is stored and the case where the probability change game state is set. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the same character (for example, only during super time) may be displayed. Further, the game state is notified by the background color without displaying characters, and the time-varying game state is set in a state in which the probability-changed game state is set and the holding ball that is a big hit is stored. , An approximate color (for example, a red background color (probable change game state), or a pink background color (a time-saving game state in a state in which a reserved ball with a big hit is stored)). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the time-saving game state is as if the player is in the certain-change game state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 349 to FIG. 350, the promotion effect executed during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 349 (a) is an example of a display mode of an opening effect performed when a big hit game is started. When the big hit game is started, the characters "big hit! Start!" Are displayed and the player is notified that the big hit game has started until the specific winning opening 65a is opened.

  FIG. 349 (b) is a view showing an example of a display mode in an over-winning promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. The over-prize promotion effect is to finish one round by winning 10 balls in the specific winning opening 65a in one round. Based on the fact that 10 game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a, This is an effect in which a promotion effect in which information on the jackpot type is notified based on the fact that the game ball has further won the specific winning opening 65a until the opening / closing door 65b is changed to the closed state is executed.

  In the over-winning promotion effect, the characters "Put a ball in the attacker and get the key !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a game ball is put in the specific winning opening 65a (corresponding to the attacker) to insert the game ball. A display indicating that a symbol is displayed (given to the player) is displayed. Furthermore, the character "Treasure box chance !!" is displayed when 11 keys are accumulated, so that when 11 keys are accumulated, the promotion effect indicated by "Treasure box chance !!" (over-winning promotion effect) is executed. Is notified to the player. Since one key is configured to be displayed each time a winning is made in the specific winning opening 65a, at the timing when 11 keys are displayed, one over-winning has occurred. Therefore, when an over-prize is generated, “treasure box chance!” Is executed. Here, "treasure box chance!" Means that when a treasure box is vacant and a treasure is in the display, the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot B2 or the above-mentioned holding ball with the jackpot is stored. It is reported that the jackpot A is in a state where the player is in the state (promotion). When no treasure is displayed in the treasure box, the type of the jackpot game being executed is not notified. If the reserved ball that is a jackpot is not stored and the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot A, the effect of notifying that the promotion has been made is not executed. However, based on the fact that the reserved ball that becomes a big hit during the big hit game is stored, a display mode (a treasure display in a treasure box) that informs of the promotion is displayed. You may.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 350, an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the promotion effect during the round, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. FIG. 350 (a) shows that, when the promotion effect during the round is selected, when a specific round (fifth round in this control example) is reached, during the round game, the user is lucky if the “promotion chance! Is displayed, the promotion effect is executed during the round, and it is suggested (notified) that information on the jackpot game type is notified by pressing the frame button 22. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 350 (b), the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot B2 or the jackpot in the state where the above-mentioned reserved ball with the jackpot is stored. In the case of A, a display mode in which the school of fish swims from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is notified that the high-probability game state of “probable GET !!” is set after the big hit game. Is done. Note that, in the case of the jackpot A in the state where the above-mentioned holding ball serving as the jackpot is stored, the character “Sure-change GET !!” is notified to the player as if the certain-change game state is set. Is displayed.

  Next, an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in an ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 350 (a) is executed after the jackpot game ends (after the 16 jackpot rounds have ended (the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a in the 16th round (10 balls winning or 30 seconds have elapsed))). It is an example of a display mode in a normal ending effect indicating the end of a big hit game.

  On the other hand, FIG. 351 (b) is an example of a display mode in an ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. When the ending promotion effect is selected, the jackpot game has ended (the jackpot round of 16 rounds has ended (the closing condition of the specific winning port 65a in the 16th round (10 balls winning or 30 seconds have elapsed) is satisfied)). Later, during the period in which the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game to be executed is being executed, the characters “LUCY !! Super Chance Time !!” are displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 moves from left to right. A special display mode in which a school of fish (a school of fish) swims is displayed (an effect mode different from that in normal times). Is displayed, suggesting that is set.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Control Example>
Next, control processing by the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 352 to 353.

  With reference to FIG. 352 (a), the ROM of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The sixth control example is different from the first control example in that a promotion lottery table 222df is added to the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The contents of the promotion lottery table 222df will be described with reference to FIG. 352 (b). FIG. 352 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the promotion lottery table 222df. The promotion lottery table 222df determines, based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired based on the fact that the over-winning to the specific winning opening 65a has occurred during the round, whether or not to notify that the promotion has been made as the over-winning promotion effect. It is a lottery table for the. Specifically, when the jackpot game type being executed is the jackpot B2, or when the pseudo-probable change flag 223dm indicating that the jackpot A is to be performed is indicated to the player as the jackpot B2 has been executed, If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “0 to 59”, a promotion effect (in this control example, a treasure is displayed in a treasure chest) indicating that the promotion has been performed is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 353, the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 353 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. In the sixth control example, as compared to the first control example, a winning change flag 223dg, a stop symbol replacement flag 223dh, a large winning counter 223di, a promoted flag 223dj, a promoted effect type storage area 223dk, and a pseudo probability change flag 223dm are respectively provided. They differ in that they are added. A detailed description of the same configuration as that of the first control example will be omitted.

  The winning change flag 223dg is a flag for determining that the change of the special symbol which becomes the big hit A is executed in a state where the big hitting reserved ball is not stored. When the hit change flag 223dg is ON, if the change display of the special symbol can be replaced at the timing when the reserved ball that becomes the big hit by the winning command is newly stored, it is possible to replace the odd symbol. The process of switching to the symbol is executed. Thereby, even if the special symbol changes to the jackpot A, the player can be made to think as if it is the jackpot B1.

  The stop symbol replacement flag 223dh wins a replacement lottery executed with a predetermined probability if a special symbol that becomes a jackpot A is started and if a reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is already stored. This is a flag for instructing to switch the stop symbol to the odd-numbered double symbol. Based on the fact that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is ON, when the change of the special symbol starts, it is switched to the odd symbol and set.

  The special winning counter 223dj is a counter for counting the number of winning in the specific winning opening 65a during one round of the big hit game.

  The promoted flag 223dj is a flag indicating that a promoted performance (a performance in which treasure is displayed from a treasure box) has been performed in an over-winning promotion performance performed during a jackpot game. With this flag, it is possible to suppress a problem that the promoted effect is executed again even after the promoted effect is executed.

  The promotion effect type storage area 223dk is a storage area in which, when the jackpot game is executed, the type of the promotion effect executed during the jackpot game is determined, and the determined promotion effect type data is stored.

  The pseudo probability change flag 223dm stops the special symbol stop symbol at an odd number of symbols when the special symbol which becomes the jackpot A is started to change and the jackpot holding ball is already stored. This is a flag indicating that the player has failed in the replacement lottery controlled to be displayed. The promotion effect is executed during the big hit game, or the effect (see FIG. 347 (a)) is executed as if the time-saving game state set after the big hit game is set to the game state.

<Control processing by main controller in sixth control example>
With reference to FIG. 354, control processing by the main control device in the sixth control example will be described. The sixth control example is different from the first control example in that the jackpot control process (Z1004: FIG. 256) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 354, the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described. The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004) in the sixth control example is different from the jackpot control process (Z1006: FIG. 256) in the first control example in that processes of Z1120 and Z1121 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and therefore, are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of Z1110, if it is not the timing of the jackpot end (Z1110: No), it is determined whether or not there is a ball in the special winning opening (Z1120). If there is a ball entry (Z1120: Yes), a ball entry command is set (Z1121), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of Z1120 that there is no incoming ball (Z1120: No), the present process is terminated. With this ball entry command, the sound lamp control device 113 can also determine the number of game balls that have won the specific prize port 65a during the round, and can also determine an over prize.

<Control processing by voice lamp control device in sixth control example>
With reference to FIGS. 354 to 366, control processing by the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. In the sixth control example, the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259) is executed in the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 356), and the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 260) is performed in the variation control mode. Processing 2 (Z2240: FIG. 355), winning command reception processing (Z2209: FIG. 266), winning command reception processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 358), and variable display setting processing (Z2114: FIG. 269), variable display setting processing 2 (Z2114). 365), the frame button input monitoring / producing process (Z2107: FIG. 272) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / producing process 4 (Z2107: FIG. 366), the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357), Stop symbol change processing (Z2460: FIG. 359), jackpot-related command reception processing (Z2280: FIG. 359), openin Processing (Z2282: Figure 360), a special winning ball entrance processing (Z2284: Figure 362), round processing (Z2286: Figure 363), ending the process: are different in that you have added the (Z2288 Figure 364). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The command determination process 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Z2113). Command determination processing 3 (Z2113) in the sixth control example is different from command determination processing (Z2113) in the first control example in that processing of Z2279 and Z2280 is added and processing of Z2240 and Z2270 is changed. Is different.

  In the process of Z2208, when it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received from the main control device 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control device 110 ( Z2279). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command receiving process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: No), a process according to another command is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 355, a description will be given of the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 355) which is one of the command determination processes 2 (see FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the content of the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in the sixth control example is different from the variation pattern reception process in the first control example in that processes of Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After executing the processing of Z2226, it is determined whether there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430). Here, the game state is configured to be output from the main control device 110 by being attached to the fluctuation pattern command. As the game state, a game state without a low-probability electric support (normal game state), a probable change game state (with an electric support), and a time reduction game state (a game state with a low-probability electric support) are set. When it is determined that there is a change in the game state (Z2430: Yes), the corresponding game state is set in the background mode storage area 223i, a display state command is set (Z2431), and the process of Z2227 is executed. . On the other hand, in the processing of Z2430, when there is no change in the gaming state (Z2430: No), the processing of Z2431 is not executed, and the processing directly shifts to the processing of Z2227.

  Referring to FIG. 357, a stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357) which is one of the fluctuation pattern receiving processes 2 (FIG. 356) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol switching process (Z2450).

  In the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357), first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the big hit A (Z2451). If it is determined that the change is not a change in the jackpot A (Z2451: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current variation is the variation of the big hit A (Z2451: Yes), it is determined whether there is another hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452). When it is determined that there is another hit (Z2452: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the replacement lottery is executed (Z2453).

  After executing the processing of Z2453, it is determined whether or not the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454). If it is determined that the substitute lottery has not been won (Z2454: No), the pseudo probable change flag 223dm provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2455), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454: Yes), the stop symbol switching flag is set to ON (Z2456), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2452, when it is determined that there is no other hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452: No), the hit change flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2457), and this processing ends. .

  In this way, at the time of starting the change of the special symbol which becomes the jackpot A, if the reserved ball which becomes the jackpot is stored, a lottery (determination) as to whether or not the stop symbol is replaced is executed. If the judgment is made, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh indicating that the symbol replacement is performed is set to ON. On the other hand, if the replacement lottery is lost, the stop display is performed at the even number, the jackpot game is started, the promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, or is the probability changing game state after the jackpot game? A special notification such as

  With reference to FIG. 358, a winning command receiving process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 358) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. The winning command receiving process 2 (Z2270) in the sixth control example is different from the winning command receiving process (Z2209: FIG. 266) in the first control example in that a stop symbol changing process (Z2460) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 359, the stop symbol changing process (Z2470) which is one of the winning command receiving process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. I do. FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol change process (Z2470).

  In the stop symbol change process (Z2460: FIG. 359), first, it is determined whether or not the hitting variation flag 223dg provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2461). If it is determined that the hit change flag 223dg is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2461: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit change flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2461: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a big hit (Z2462). If it is determined that the received winning information command is not a jackpot (Z2642: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning information command is a big hit (Z2462: Yes), the pseudo probability change flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2463). After executing the processing of Z2463, it is determined that the period is the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that the period is the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: Yes), a display symbol replacement command is set (Z2465), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2464 that the current period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: No), the process of Z2465 is not performed, and the process ends.

  As described above, at the time when the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is started to change, even if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is not stored, the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot during the subsequent change (during the change) is newly added. When the special symbol is in the high-speed fluctuation period, the replacement of the stopped symbol (replacement to the odd-numbered symbol) is executed. As described above, since replacement is performed only during the high-speed fluctuation period, replacement without discomfort can be performed.

  Note that even when the high-speed fluctuation period has ended, control may be performed so that the stop symbol is replaced by performing an effect such as slippage.

  Referring to FIG. 360, a jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280: FIG. 360) which is one of the command determination processes 3 (Z2113: FIG. 356) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. ) Will be described. FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280).

  In the jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280: FIG. 360), it is first determined whether an opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (Z2281: Yes), an opening process (Z2282) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, referring to FIG. 361, an opening process (Z2282: FIG. 360) which is one of the jackpot-related command reception processes (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. 361) will be described. FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

  In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 361), first, the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired in the process of Z2291, the promotion effect type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222df provided in the ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, an opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, a display opening command corresponding to the opening effect set in the processing of Z2293 is set (Z2294), and the flow shifts to the processing of Z2295.

  After executing the processing of Z2294, it is determined whether or not the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2295). When it is determined that the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2295: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296). When it is determined that there is a big hit (Z2296: Yes), the game state is set to the big hit (Z2297), a display state command is set (Z2300), and this processing ends. In the process of Z2295, if it is determined that Z2295 is off (Z2295: No), the process of Z2296 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2297. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2296, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296: No), the pseudo probability change flag 223dm is set to off (Z2298), and the game state is changed to the pseudo probability change flag 223dm. The game is set to the jackpot game in the off state (Z2299), the above-described processing of Z2300 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the processing of Z2281 that the opening command has not been received (Z2281: No), it is determined whether or not the incoming ball command has been received (Z2283). When it is determined that the ball entry command has been received (Z2283: Yes), the special winning ball entry process (Z2284) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, referring to FIG. 362, a special winning prize ball process (Z2280: FIG. 360) which is one of the jackpot-related command reception processes (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. Z2284) will be described. FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing the content of the special winning winning ball processing (Z2284).

  In the special winning winning ball processing (Z2284: FIG. 362), first, the value of the special winning counter 223di provided in the RAM 223 is incremented by 1 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2312). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not over-winning (Z2312: No), a large win command for display indicating the value of the large winning counter 223di is set (Z2313), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2312: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the large winning counter 223di is greater than 10 (Z2314). When it is determined that the value of the special winning counter 223di is smaller than 10 (Z2314: No), a display special winning command indicating the value of the special winning counter 223di corresponding to the over-winning effect is set (Z2315). This processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special winning counter 223di is larger than 10 (Z2314: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained, and the promotion lottery table 222df is obtained based on the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm or the jackpot type. The promotion lottery is executed (Z2316).

  After executing the processing of Z2316, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect has been won (Z2317). When it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: Yes), a large win command for display indicating the value of the special winning counter 223di and the winning of the promotion effect is set (Z2318), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: No), a display special winning command for indicating a deviation from the value of the special winning counter 223di and the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and this processing is performed. finish.

  Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of Z2283 that the incoming ball command has not been received (Z2283: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z2285). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z2285: Yes), the round processing (Z2286) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 363, a round process (Z2286) which is one of the jackpot-related command reception processes (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round processing (Z2286).

  In the round processing (Z2286: FIG. 363), first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect type is over-winning (Z2331). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not over-winning (Z2331: No), it is determined whether the promotion effect type is ending (Z2332). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not the ending (Z2332: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). When it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: Yes), a round command for display corresponding to the jackpot type or the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set (Z2334), and the SW effective time counter 223k corresponding to the round effect is set. Is set (Z2335), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2331 that the promoted effect type is over-winning (Z2331: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of Z2332 that the promoted effect type is ending, (Z2332) : Yes), or when it is determined that the number of rounds is not 12R in the processing of Z2333 (Z2333: No), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this processing ends. .

  Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2285, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z2285: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (Z2287). If an ending command has been received (Z2288: Yes), an ending process (Z2288) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the ending process (Z2288) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z2287, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (Z2287: No), a process according to another command is executed (Z2289), and this process ends.

  Referring to FIG. 364, an ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364) which is one of the jackpot-related command receiving processes (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

  In the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364), first, it is determined whether the type of the promotion effect is ending (Z2371). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not ending (Z2371: No), it is determined whether the promotion completed flag 223dj provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2372). When it is determined that the promoted flag 223dj is set to OFF (Z2372: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is the jackpot B2 (Z2373). If the current jackpot type is jackpot B2 (Z2373: Yes), a display ending command indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2373 that the jackpot type is other than the jackpot B2 (Z2373: No), it is determined whether the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374). If the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to off (Z2374: No), the display ending command corresponding to the current big hit type is set (Z2376). If it is determined in the process of Z2372 that the promoted flag 223dj is set to ON (Z2372: Yes), the process of Z2376 described above is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2374 that the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374: Yes), the above-described processing of Z2375 is executed. After executing the processing of Z2375 or the processing of Z2376, the game state is set at the end of the big hit (Z2377), the display state command is set (Z2378), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, the type of the promotion effect is determined at the execution timing of the big hit game. Then, when the over-winning promotion promotion has been determined, it is determined whether or not the content promoted by the over-winning promotion promotion has been notified during the jackpot game, and if not performed, the ending promotion performance or the promotion during the round is performed. The process of switching to is executed.

  Thus, even if the over-winning promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect can be executed by switching to a different promotion effect even when the frequency of entering the ball into the specific winning opening 65a is low.

  With reference to FIG. 365, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114). In the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) in the sixth control example, the processes in Z2508 and Z2509 are not executed with respect to the variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269) in the first control example, and the processes in Z2511 to Z2515 are performed. It is different in that has been added. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After executing the process of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511). If it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to OFF (Z2511: No), the extracted stop type is set as it is (Z2512), and a display stop type command is set (Z2513). This processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2511, when it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511: Yes), a stop type in which an odd-numbered big hit symbol is set as a stop symbol is set (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to OFF (Z2515), the above-described processing of Z2513 is executed, and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 366, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 366) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 366 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (Z2107). The frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (Z2107) in the sixth control example does not execute the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 with respect to the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 272) in the first control example. , Z2830, Z2831, and Z2840. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  In the processing of Z2807, when it is determined that the frame button has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect setting is being performed (Z2830). When it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and a sensor input process is executed (Z2813). After executing the sensor input processing, other SW processing is executed (Z2840), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2830 that the effect is not being set (Z2830: No), the processing of Z2803 to 2804 described above is executed, and the sensor input processing (Z2813) and other SW processing (Z2840) Is executed, and the present process ends.

<Control processing by display control device in sixth control example>
Next, control processing by the display control device 114 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The sixth control example is different from the first control example in that the command determination processing (Z3302: FIG. 277) is changed to the command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367). The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the content of the command determination process 2 (Z3302). The command determination process 2 (Z3302) in the sixth control example is different from the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 277) in the first control example in that processes Z3430 to Z3435 are added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of Z3408, when it is determined that there is no display notice display command for display (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430). When it is determined that there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430: Yes), a symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) is executed.

  Here, the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 368 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431).

  In the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431), first, the stop type table of the odd-numbered big hit symbol is replaced and set (Z3441). Next, a stop symbol is set by comparing the stop type table with the stop symbol counter (Z3442). Next, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the set stop symbol is set to ON (Z3443), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 367, the description will be continued. In the processing of Z3430, when it is determined that there is no display symbol replacement command (Z3430: No), it is determined whether there is a display state command (Z3432). When it is determined that there is a display state command (Z3432: Yes), a game state setting process (Z3433) is executed.

  Here, the game state setting processing (Z3433) will be described with reference to FIG. 368 (b). FIG. 368 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state setting process (Z3433).

  In the game state setting process (Z3433), first, the game state indicated by the command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3451). Next, in the process of Z3451, the background color corresponding to the gaming state set in the background mode storage area 223i is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 367, the description will be continued. In the process of Z3432, when it is determined that there is no display status command (Z3432: No), it is determined whether there is a display jackpot-related command (Z3434). When it is determined that there is a jackpot-related command for display (Z3434: Yes), a jackpot-related display process (Z3435) is executed.

  Here, the jackpot-related display processing (Z3435) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related display processing (Z3435).

  In the jackpot-related display processing (Z3435), first, it is determined whether a display opening command has been received (Z3461). If it is determined that the display opening command has been received (Z3461: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display special winning command has not been received (Z3461: No), it is determined whether the display special winning command has been received (Z3463). When it is determined that the display special winning command has been received (Z3463: Yes), the special winning process (Z3464) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the special winning process (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z3463, when it is determined that the display special winning command has not been received (Z3463: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (Z3465). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z3465: Yes), a display data table for round display corresponding to the number of rounds of the command is set, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3465, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z3465: No), it is determined whether or not the display promotion round command has been received (Z3467). When it is determined that the display promotion round command has been received (Z3467: Yes), the display data table of the promotion round effect of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3467 that the display promotion round command has not been received (Z3467: No), it is determined whether the display ending command has been received (Z3469). When it is determined that the display ending command has been received (Z3469: Yes), the display data table of the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3469, when it is determined that the display ending command has not been received (Z3469: No), a process according to another command is executed (Z3471), and this process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 370, the big prize winning process (Z3464: FIG. 370), which is one of the processes of the jackpot-related display process (Z3435: FIG. 369), will be described. FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing the content of the special winning process (Z3464).

  In the big win processing (Z3364), first, in the processing of Z3463 of the big hit related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 369), it is determined whether or not the received big win command for display has been won in the promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z3480: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the winning number indicated by the received command and the winning effect is set (Z3481), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z3480: No), it is determined whether the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482). If it is determined that the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482: Yes), a display data table of the number of winnings indicated by the command and an over-winning prize corresponding to the outgoing effect is set (Z3483), and this processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3482 that the received command is not out of the promotion effect (Z3482: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484). If it is determined that the received command is a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484: Yes), an over-winning display data table corresponding to the number of winnings indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of Z3484, when it is determined that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484: No), it is determined whether the winning number indicated by the received command number is greater than 10 (S3484: No). Z3486: No). When it is determined that the winning number is greater than 10 (Z3486: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal over-winning effect is set (Z3487), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3486 that the number of winnings indicated by the number of received commands is less than 10 (Z3486), the processing is terminated as it is.

<Seventh control example>
Next, a seventh control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, a winning opening that triggers a lottery (change) based on the first special symbol, and a lottery based on the second special symbol whose lottery result is more likely to be a lottery result advantageous to the player than the first special symbol In addition to the sorting device 700 that alternately wins a ball with a winning opening that triggers (fluctuation), as a result of the determination as to whether or not the second special symbol ordinary symbol is a winning, the electric accessory 640a is selected when the winning is won for a long time. It was configured to open for a long time (2 seconds) to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. When a normal symbol is won for a long time, the effect is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 so that the player wins a ball in the second winning port 640. It was configured to allow the player to play the game (see FIG. 207).

  Further, in the second control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640, and during the normal state. When the change of the second special symbol is started, a special effect (see FIG. 291 (b)) is executed to provide the player with a special feeling. Furthermore, in the second control example, a special effect is not executed for a predetermined period (five fluctuations of the special symbol) from the end of the time saving state, even if the normal state is set as the gaming state. Was configured. Thus, when a predetermined number (up to four) of reserved balls of the second special symbol is secured (with the reserved second special symbol secured during the time saving state), the process is executed when the time saving state ends. The special effect described above is not executed in the second special symbol change. Thereby, the special feeling of the special effect can be maintained.

  On the other hand, in the seventh control example, when a lottery is won for a long time as a result of the lottery of the normal symbol, the game is performed by using the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result. The first control example is different from the first control example in that an effect (a long-time open effect) indicating that a winning has been achieved for a long time in a normal symbol lottery is performed for a player.

  Further, the present embodiment is different from the first control example in that the effect of the long opening effect is made different depending on the timing of winning for a long time as a result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols. Note that detailed descriptions of the same points as those in the above-described control examples are omitted.

  The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 371 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 371, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example causes the ball to flow down to the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80 with respect to the first control example described above. When performing a game for playing (left-handed game), a character simulating a “fish” is formed on the surface of the game board 13 (or forms the surface of the game board 13) as a guide display mode ZR1 as a guide of the position at which the ball is fired. When the member to be formed is an acrylic resin having high transparency, it is decorated (arranged) on the game board 13) so that the player can easily visually recognize the guide display mode ZR1.

  In addition, when performing a game (right-handed game) for causing a ball to flow down to the right region (right region) of the variable display device unit 80, “turtle” is used as a guide display mode ZR2 as a guide for a position at which the ball is fired. Is embellished (arranged) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 when a member forming the surface of the game board 13 is a highly permeable acrylic resin). Is configured such that the guide display mode ZR1 can be easily visually recognized.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp where on the game board 13 the right-handed game or the left-handed game can be executed by firing the ball. Further, by decorating a character (fish, turtle) for guiding a right-handed game or a left-handed game on the surface of the game board 13, a game direction is provided to the player on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the case of performing an effect (guidance effect) for guiding a (right-handed game or left-handed game), it is possible to execute an effect that is easily visually comprehensible to a player.

  In addition, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example has an area where the second winning opening 640 can be won when the left-handed game is performed with respect to the above-described first control example (electrically powered accessory). If the opening 640a is in the opening operation, the regulating nail ZK1 is implanted so that the ratio of the ball flowing down the second winning opening 640) decreases. On the other hand, the difference is that nails are implanted so that the ratio of balls passing through the opening 710 of the sorting device 700 is reduced when a right-handed game is performed. With this configuration, the distribution device 700 is aimed, a left-handed game (first game) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed (lottery), and the second winning opening 640 is aimed at. A right-handed game (second game) in which only 2 special symbols are changed (lottery) can be provided to the player.

  As in the first control example described above, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is in a state in which it is difficult to open, so that the player is inevitable. When the left-handed game is played and the time saving state is set, the player is inevitably performed the right-handed game because the electric accessory 640a is easily opened. In addition, for example, even when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, if the number of retained balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit (four), the right-handed game is performed any further. Even if it is not possible to acquire the reservation of the special symbol (the right to draw (change) the special symbol), it is possible to perform a left-handed game and also perform a game of acquiring the reserved ball of the first special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 372 (a), a description will be given of an effect mode displayed during normal symbol fluctuation in a case where the normal symbol is won for a long time in the seventh control example. FIG. 372 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode (long opening effect) of the third symbol display device 81 during the change of the ordinary symbol won for a long time. Note that the same elements as those in the above-described first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 372 (a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, an effect (long opening effect) indicating that the symbol has been won for a long period of time for the ordinary symbol is "Opening soon". Are displayed, and an opening target mode Za2 imitating the electric accessory 640a to be opened and a guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "turtle" indicating the game direction instructed by the player are displayed. This allows the player to visually and easily understand that the right-handed game is to be performed since the electric accessory 640a is opened.

  When the long opening effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. In the seventh control example, when the long opening effect is executed, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. However, instead of this configuration, for example, the currently executed A determining means for determining whether the special symbol variation lottery result is a lottery result (big hit, small hit, etc.) advantageous to the player, and a long opening effect and a third symbol based on the determination result of the determining means. Priority display determining means for determining which of the variable effects is to be displayed with priority, and display control means for controlling the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on the determination result of the priority display determining means. May be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to preferentially display the effect display for indicating a game result that is advantageous to the player, and thus it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the example described above, the effect determined to be displayed with priority (priority effect) is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm, and the effect determined to be not displayed with priority (non-priority effect) is displayed. It may be displayed in the reduced display area Za3. In addition, for example, a plurality of reduced display areas are prepared in different areas, and non-priority effects are determined according to the game result indicated by the effect determined as the non-priority effect. You may comprise so that the magnitude | size of the area | region which displays an effect may be changed. Further, the effect display on the side determined as the non-priority effect may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the above-described example, the configuration is shown in which the display area of each effect (variable effect, long open effect) is made variable based on the result of the lottery of the changing special symbol and the result of the lottery of the changing normal symbol. In addition to the above, for example, a reserved ball number discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, three) is provided. The display area of the long opening effect may be configured to be variable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 372 (b), a description will be given of an effect mode of a normal symbol during a long time game (during long opening). FIG. 372 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode (effect during long opening) of the third symbol display device 81 during a long time winning. Note that the same elements as those in the above-described first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 372 (b), the character “OPEN” indicating that the long opening is currently being performed is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm, and the opening target imitating the electric accessory 640a that is performing the opening operation is displayed. The mode Za2 is displayed in a display mode indicating the open state. Further, similarly to FIG. 372 (a), a guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "turtle" indicating a game direction instructed by the player is displayed, and a third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3.

  Next, a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the long opening effect is restricted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 373 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where the long opening effect is restricted among display modes of the third symbol display device 81 during a long time winning. Note that the same elements as those in the above-described first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, in the seventh control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the long opening effect described above with reference to FIG. 372 (a) is configured to be executed, and the normal state (the second state) is performed. In a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 640), when the ball is likely to win in the second winning port 640 (when a normal symbol is won for a long time), a state advantageous to the player (first). It is configured to surely notify the player of a change (a state in which the second special symbol is more likely to be a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the special symbol (a state where the lottery is easily performed)).

  In such a configuration, in the normal state immediately after the time saving state ends, for example, in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit (four), the normal symbol The long opening effect described above is also executed when winning for a long time. In this manner, in the state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol is at the upper limit, a new reserved ball is obtained even if the electric accessory 640a is long opened and a plurality of balls are won at the second entrance 640. And there is a problem that it is not possible to provide a special feeling of a long opening effect to a player.

  Therefore, in the seventh control example, the above-described predetermined period (the period until the special symbol is changed five times) from the end of the time saving state is described above, even if the normal symbol is won for a long time. It is configured such that the long opening effect is not executed (the effect during the long opening effect restriction is executed). Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the long opening effect has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 373, in the state where the long opening effect is restricted, the long opening effect shown in FIG. 372 (a) is not executed, and the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is performed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. Is displayed. Then, a guidance display mode Za1 imitating "fish" indicating a right-handed game is displayed as a game direction instructed to the player. As described above, even when a normal symbol is won for a long time in a state in which the normal state is set as the gaming state, the timing is set for a predetermined period (the number of special symbol changes is five times after the time saving state ends). If it is within the period until the execution, the long opening effect is prevented from being executed, so that it is possible to surely suppress providing a meaningless long opening effect to the player. it can. Also, immediately after finishing the time-saving state in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is the main, the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is executed excessively by acquiring a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol again. Can be suppressed.

  In the present control example, in order to suppress the execution of the long opening effect when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (four), a period during which the long opening effect is restricted (a restriction period) is set. After the time saving state ends, the period until the change of the special symbol is executed five times is set. However, other than that, for example, a predetermined time after the time saving state ends, that is, the change of the special symbol continues. It may be a period until the time required to execute five times elapses. In addition, during the above-described restriction period, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, two or less), the above-mentioned restriction period is cleared and the long opening effect is executed. May be configured.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the long opening effect is configured to be restricted within a predetermined period after the end of the working hours, but the long opening effect may be restricted by other conditions. If the special symbol change that is being executed wins the jackpot, or if the continuous effect is set so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol changes, or special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) The long opening effect may be restricted when it is determined, for example, that the winning ball in which the winning ball wins win information is included.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Control Example>
Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. The seventh control example is different from the second control example in that a long opening effect flag 223e1 is added. Other configurations are the same as those in the second control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Since the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example are the same, the various control processes related to the payout of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example are the same as those of the first control example described above. Is the same as On the other hand, various control processes (control example of the sound lamp control device 113) related to the effect of the seventh control example are the same as the second control example except for the above-described points. Therefore, the same parts as those in the first control example regarding the various control processes related to payouts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. And the description is omitted.

  Since the variation counter 223aj has been described in the second control example, a detailed description thereof will be omitted, but when the time saving state ends, a predetermined value (5) is set, and the variation display of the third symbol is performed. This is a counter that is decremented by one when it is set (when a special symbol is changed). In the seventh control example, the long opening effect is not executed until the value of the change number counter 223aj becomes 0.

  The long opening effect flag 223e1 is a flag for indicating that the long opening effect is being executed, and when set to ON, indicates that the long opening effect is being executed. This long opening effect flag 223e1 is for a case where a long-time opening command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and when it is determined that the fluctuation number counter 223aj is not 0 (Z2904 in FIG. 377: No). Is set to on (see Z2907 in FIG. 377), and is set to off when a long term end command for a normal symbol is received (Z2911 in FIG. 377).

<Control processing by main controller in seventh control example>
Next, control processing by the main control device in the seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example is different from the first control example in that the ordinary symbol variation process (Z106: see FIG. 250) is changed to the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (Z171: see FIG. 375). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 375, a description will be given of the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example. The ordinary symbol variation process 2 (Z171) in the seventh control example is different from the ordinary symbol variation process (Z106: see FIG. 250) in the first control example in that processes Z451 to Z453 are added. . Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and therefore, are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 375, when the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (Z171) is executed, the same processes of Z401 and Z402 as in the first control example are executed, and it is determined that the ordinary symbol is not being varied in the process of Z402. If this is the case (Z402: No), it is determined whether the long-time release flag 203i is set to ON (Z451). As described above in the first control example, this long-time opening flag 203i is set when the normal symbol is determined to have been won for a long time in the normal symbol change start process (Z408: FIG. 251) (Z426: Yes). , Is set to ON (Z428).

  In the process of Z451, when it is determined that the long-time release flag 203i is set to ON (Z451: Yes), the long-time release flag 203i is set to OFF (Z403), and a long-time end command is set. (Z452), and proceeds to the process of Z404. On the other hand, in the process of Z451, when it is determined that the long-time release flag 203i is not on (is off) (Z451: No), the process of Z403 and Z452 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z404. Then, the same processing of Z404 to Z409 as in the above-described first control example is executed, and this processing ends.

  That is, as described above, the long-time opening flag 203i is a flag that is set to be on from the timing when the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol won for a long time is started to the time when the long-time winning is finished.

  In the processing of Z402, when it is determined that the current symbol is changing normally (Z402: Yes), the processing of Z410 to Z413 at the same position as the above-described first control example is executed. A middle command is set (Z453), and this process ends. The long-time hit command set in Z453 is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (FIG. 255) of the main control device 110. The voice lamp control device 113, which has received the long hitting command, creates a display command for indicating to the player that the current time is a long hit (long open), and transmits the command to the display control device 114. I do. Then, the display control device 114 displays an effect display indicating that the long opening is being performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 372 (b)).

<Regarding control processing by voice lamp control device in seventh control example>
With reference to FIG. 376 and FIG. 377, control processing by the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example is different from the second control example in that the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) is changed to the command determination process 4 (Z2181: FIG. 376), and the long opening effect process (Z2272) is performed. The difference is in the added points. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The command determination process 4 (Z2181) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (Z2181). Command determination processing 4 (Z2181) in the seventh control example is different from command determination processing 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) in the second control example in that processing of Z2271 to Z2277 is added.

  Here, when the command determination processing 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processing of Z2201 to Z2209 as the command determination processing 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) of the second control example is performed. If it is determined in the processing of Z2208 that the special symbol winning command has not been received (Z2208: No), then it is determined whether or not a long-time hit related command has been received (Z2271), and it has been determined that it has been received. (Z2208: Yes), a long opening effect process described later is executed (Z2272), and this process ends. In the long opening effect process (Z2272), a process for setting a display mode of an effect to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a normal symbol is won for a long time is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2271, if it is determined that the long-time hit related command has not been received (Z2271: No), the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) of the second control example described above and Z2256 to Z2260 are executed. The same processing of Z2273 to Z2277 is executed, and this processing ends. That is, in the present control example, the main control device 110 is configured to receive a command set based on the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol, and a predetermined command (the fact that the main unit 110 wins for a long time in the lottery of the ordinary symbol). (Command shown), an effect for notifying the player of the fact can be set. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  Next, the contents of the long opening effect process (Z2272) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long opening effect process (Z2272). This long opening effect processing (Z2272) is for executing processing for setting an effect state of a long opening effect when a normal symbol is won for a long time, and the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state). Or, an effect mode is set according to the operation state of the ordinary symbol (during a fluctuation or a hit game) within a predetermined period after the end of the time saving state.

  When the long opening effect process (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the long-time hit related command received this time is a long-time hit opening command (Z2901). This long-time opening command is a command that is set when a normal symbol is won for a long time in a normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 251) of the main controller 110. If it is determined in the processing of Z2901 that the command is a long-time release command (Z2901: Yes), the current gaming state is extracted from the state storage area 223az (Z2902). Then, it is determined whether or not the extracted game state is during the time reduction (the time reduction state is set) (Z2903). If it is determined that the time is during the time reduction (Z2903: Yes), the long opening effect is executed. Since this is not the period, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2903, when it is determined that it is not during the working hours reduction (in the normal state) (Z2903: No), it is next determined whether or not the fluctuation count counter 223aj is larger than 0 (whether it is 1 or more) ( Z2904). Since the detailed description is given in the above-described second control example, a brief description will be given. However, when the final change in which the time saving state is set is stopped and displayed, the change number counter 223aj is set to a predetermined number (5 ) Is set, and the value is decremented by 1 every time the fluctuation display setting process is executed, and is a period from the end of the time saving state to the execution of a predetermined number of times of the fluctuation of the special symbol (5 times) Is a counter that is referred to in order to determine the value.

  In the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223aj is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2904: No), that is, at least five changes of the special symbol are executed after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that the game is in the normal state as the game state, it is a period in which the long opening effect can be executed, and the display long effect command is set (Z2906). Then, the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2907), and this processing ends.

  Here, the set display long rendering command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 258) of the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the display long effect command, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating the long opening effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 372 (a)).

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223aj is larger than 0 (Z2904: Yes), that is, in the state where the change of the special symbol has not been performed five times since the time saving state ends. If it is determined that there is, in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, it is a period in which the long opening effect cannot be executed, so the display left-handed long effect command is set (Z2905). The process ends.

  Here, the set display left-handed long rendering command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 258) of the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the display long effect command, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating that the long opening effect is being restricted on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 373).

  In the processing of Z2901, if it is determined that the long-time hit related command received this time is not a long-time hit release command (Z2901: No), then it is determined whether a long time hitting middle command has been received (Z2908). . The long-time hit command is set after the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory in the ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (Z171: FIG. 375) of the main controller 110, and during the long-time hit game This command indicates that there is.

  In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that the long-time hit command has been received (Z2908: Yes), it is then determined whether the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909), and the long opening effect flag is determined. If it is determined that 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909: Yes), a display long release command is set (Z2910), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2909, if it is determined that the long opening effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Z2909: No), the process of Z2910 is skipped and the process ends. .

  Here, the processing of Z2909 will be described. In the seventh control example, similarly to the first control example described above, the winning lottery is performed at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol (the timing at which the normal symbol fluctuation start process is executed), and the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning is won. Is determined so as to determine the operation mode (whether or not a long release is performed), and a release command per long time is set at that timing. Then, after the change time of the ordinary symbol (the minimum is 3 seconds and the maximum is 30 seconds) has elapsed since the setting of the open command per long time, the stop display of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is set, and then the electric symbol is displayed. The operation control of the accessory 640a is started.

  Therefore, a time lag of at least 3 seconds and a maximum of 30 seconds occurs between the reception of the long time release command and the long time per hour command. When the value of 223aj is greater than 0, a long-time opening command is set, and thereafter, there is a possibility that a long-time winning command is received at the timing when the value of the fluctuation counter 223aj is 0.

  In the seventh control example, in such a state, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed in accordance with the long opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, in the processing when the long opening command is received in the process when the long opening effect is received. In a state where the opening effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON, the display long opening command is not set even if the long hitting command is received. With this configuration, for example, the effect of the display mode based on the display left-handed long effect command (see FIG. 373) suddenly changes to the display mode based on the display long open command (FIG. 372 (b)). (See Reference) and giving the player an uncomfortable feeling can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 377, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that the long-time hit command has not been received (Z2908: No), it is next determined whether a long-time hit command has been received (Z2911). If it is determined that the command has been received (Z2911: Yes), the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to OFF (Z1912), a long opening end command for display is set (Z1913), and this processing ends.

  In the process of Z2208, when it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received from the main control device 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control device 110 ( Z2279). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command receiving process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: No), a process according to another command is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

<Control processing by display control device in seventh control example>
Next, control processing by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The seventh control example is different from the sixth control example in that command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) is changed to command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 378). The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 378) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing the content of the command determination process 3 (Z3321). Command determination processing 3 (Z3321) in the seventh control example is different from command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) in the sixth control example in that processing of Z3441 to Z3442 is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of Z3408, when it is determined that there is no display notice display command for display (Z3408: No), the process of Z3441 is executed. In the processing of Z3441, if it is determined that there is no display long release related command (Z3441: No), it is determined whether there is a display state command (Z3432). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a display long opening related command (Z3441: Yes), the long opening related processing (Z3442) is executed.

  In the long opening effect process (FIG. 379, Z3442), first, a display data table for a long opening effect corresponding to the received long opening effect command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the long opening effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z6202).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (Z6203), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is obtained. The time counter 233h is set (Z6204), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

  As described above, in the seventh control example, in the case where the normal state (a state in which the lottery (change) of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol per long time is set. Upon winning, a long open effect is executed during the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, the electric accessory 640a is opened to the player for a long time, and the game in which the second winning port 640 receives a ball can be reliably performed.

  Further, in the seventh control example, even when the normal state is set as the game state, the predetermined period after the end of the time saving period in which there is a high possibility that many reserved balls of the second special symbol are obtained in the normal state. If it is within, the execution of the long opening effect described above is restricted. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the quality of the privilege (the privilege for easily securing the reserved ball of the second special symbol) to be given to the player when the long opening effect is executed.

  In the present control example, in order to suppress the execution of the long opening effect when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (four), a period during which the long opening effect is restricted (a restriction period) is set. After the time saving state ends, the period until the change of the special symbol is executed five times is set. However, other than that, for example, a predetermined time after the time saving state ends, that is, the change of the special symbol continues. It may be a period until the time required to execute five times elapses. In addition, during the above-described restriction period, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, two or less), the above-mentioned restriction period is cleared and the long opening effect is executed. May be configured.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the long opening effect is configured to be restricted within a predetermined period after the end of the working hours, but the long opening effect may be restricted by other conditions. If the special symbol change that is being executed wins the jackpot, or if the continuous effect is set so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol changes, or special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) The long opening effect may be restricted when it is determined, for example, that the winning ball in which the winning ball wins win information is included.

  Specifically, for example, in the process of Z2903 in the long opening effect process (see FIG. 377), after determining Z2903: No, a process of determining whether or not the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON is provided. If it is determined that the effect flag 223ac is set to ON, the present process may be terminated without performing the long opening effect. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect without losing the priority order with respect to other effects to be executed.

  Further, in the seventh control example, different game methods are displayed on the display screen when the long opening effect is restricted and when the long opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the long opening effect is executed, the second winning device 640 is caused to perform a right-handed game to win a ball, and when the long opening effect is restricted, the distribution device 700 is used. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set so as to perform a left-handed game in order to win a ball. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (large), the first winning port 64 and the right second winning port 640 are aimed by the left-handed game, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small. Can play a game aiming at the second winning opening 640 by a right-handed game.

  In the seventh control example, the game board 13 is set so that the ease of the ball flowing down to the sorting device 700 and the second winning opening 640 is made different between the right-handed game and the left-handed game. The configuration is not limited to this. For example, by shooting a weak ball in a left-handed game, the ball can easily reach the second winning opening 640, and a stronger left-handed game is performed. Thus, the game board 13 may be configured so that the ball can easily reach the distribution device 700. As a result, the game result can be greatly changed by slightly changing the operation of the firing device, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the seventh control example, the configuration based on the control content of the main control device 110 in the above-described first control example is described, but the control of the main control device 110 used in the above-described first control example is described. The present invention is not limited to the content, and may be used for a control content of the main control device 110 of the second control example, that is, a type of gaming machine that executes a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol in preference to the first special symbol. good.

  In addition, at the end of the gaming state with electric support (a gaming state with low-probability electric support (time-saving gaming state) or with high-probability electric support (probable change gaming state)), a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) of reserved balls are provided. An effect that prohibits (does not execute) the effect of a normal symbol for a long time, or prompts the player to enter a game ball into the first entrance 64, on condition that it is stored for the second special symbol. And may be configured to be executed. With this configuration, even when the game is switched to the normal game state, if the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is small, it can be configured such that the effect of the normal symbol per long time is executed, (2) It is possible to suppress a problem of depriving a prize of winning a special symbol.

  Further, in the present control example, when switching to the normal gaming state, the effect of the normal symbol per long time is not performed until the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (5 times in the present embodiment), or the normal symbol is not changed. Is configured to switch to a different effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more) regardless of the game state, the normal symbol It may be configured not to perform a winning effect, or to switch to an effect different from a normal effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to perform an advantageous game in accordance with the state of the game. Further, as a condition for not performing an effect for a long time for a normal symbol, or for switching to an effect different from the normal time, a specific variation pattern is executed irrespective of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (for example, , A jackpot fluctuation pattern or a super-reach fluctuation pattern). In addition, time information from the RTC may be acquired, and the condition may be set as a switching condition if a specific time is about to close (for example, 5 minutes before). The conditions for switching may be set in combination with the conditions given in this control example.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine of a type different from the above control example. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and is not provided with a handle for launching a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Also, the configuration of each of the above embodiments may be configured to be combined or implemented in whole or in part.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (point where the player pushes in from the back to the front)
In an operating device having an operating means pressed by a player, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and in a position in which the operating means is protruded from the player with respect to the first state. And an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side of the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being directed to the side.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the effect is performed in a manner that enhances the expectation of a big hit for the player at the advanced position, the player can easily operate the operating means at the advanced position with a large acceleration. However, it was necessary to design the operating means to have a high strength. In this case, there is a problem in that the operation means becomes heavier as a whole, and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is set to the direction from the back side to the near side for the player, so that the straight up and down linear movement is performed. In this case, the part that cannot be operated is generated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means, so that the momentum of the pushing can be released.

  In addition, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulder and elbow from the player's playing position, it is difficult to apply a force in the forward direction, so the force exerted by the player on the operating means should be naturally reduced. Can be.

  In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft disposed on the back side of the player, configured to be capable of tilting up and down around the shaft, and having the operation means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, wherein the tilting means arranges the operation means in a direction opposite to a player in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured to rotate, and the operation means is arranged in the second state in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent the user from performing an operation of hitting the operation means.

  In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with the position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be pushed easily, so that a new pushing operation method with less pushing acceleration can be provided. In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

  With a new pushing operation method, for example, the outer side of the little finger of the left hand is placed near the axle bar, and the thumb side is turned to the operating means from the state where the hand is placed near the operating means with the palm rising up and down Examples include a method of operating in a manner of tilting down, a method of placing the tip of the middle finger near the shaft bar, and a method of operating in a manner of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state where the palm is arranged in a posture facing the operating means Is done.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means is set to a vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, since the pushing operation direction of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, the operability in the first state is ensured while the second operation is performed. It is possible to prevent destruction by the pushing operation in the state.

  In the gaming machine A3, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is automatically operable, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the gaming machine A4 acts in a direction in which it does not act in the opposite direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

  For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the driving unit from being subjected to a high load due to being pulled by the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button.

  In the gaming machine A4, it is possible to form a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and further comprises a maintenance means operated by the driving means, and the driving means is provided with an eccentric part through an eccentric portion. A rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of changing a phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in a maintained state; In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintenance state is released is changed. In both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation is performed. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is maintained in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. With this configuration, it is possible to change the movement width of the operation device by the urging unit. Therefore, a plurality of operation modes by the urging means can be configured.

In the gaming machine A5, in the maintenance state, the maintenance unit is configured to be movable in the biasing direction of the biasing unit, and the moving speed of the maintenance unit is increased or decreased in accordance with the rotation speed of the rotating unit. A gaming machine A6 configured such that the operation means moves following the movement of the maintenance means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force was only caused by the urging force, so that the mode of movement was limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode in which the operation means moves following the maintenance means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting unit is provided inside the operation device and irradiates light to a player, and the light emitting means is disposed in the second state as compared with the first state. However, from the viewpoint of a player, the area of the operation means is reduced, and the irradiation range of light emitted by the light emitting means is enlarged.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is illuminated by the light emitting means in the player's viewpoint compared to the first state. The area of the operation means is reduced as the irradiation range of the light is enlarged, so that the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to push the operation means unless aiming. In this manner, the power of the player during the operation can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operating means moves toward and away from the display means between the display means and the display means to change the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means. Gaming machine A8, which is a feature.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operating means moves toward and away from the display means between the display means and the light emitting means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to view the image on the display means.

<Characteristic B group> (The point where the repulsion during normal operation is small while responding to repeated hits is possible)
In an operation device having an operation means capable of allowing a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, a second state in which a movable range of operation to the terminal position is wider than the first state and the first state.
And a biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. The first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state is provided. A gaming machine B1 comprising, in a gaming machine, a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving an operating means from a first state to a second state in accordance with an operation of a player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
No. 8). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by a spring, and the operating means is automatically operated by a drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operating means is slow, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform a continuous hit operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the urging force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. 2
By returning the operating means by the driving means, the return can be accelerated, so that the player can enjoy the continuous tapping operation.

The gaming machine B1 includes a continuous hit determination unit that determines whether or not a continuous hit operation is performed based on a sensor detection value of a stroke operation unit within a predetermined time, and controls the second drive unit based on a detection value of the continuous hit determination unit. A gaming machine B2, which determines whether to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, it is determined whether or not to drive the second drive unit based on the detection value of the continuous hit determination unit. Therefore, the player does not perform the continuous hit operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press operation). The second driving means operates until the operation is performed), thereby preventing the player from feeling the load of pushing his hand back.

In the gaming machine B2, an end detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the end position, and determining whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A position difference detecting means for detecting, and a moving direction judging means for judging a moving direction of the operating means based on a time relationship between a detected value of the end detecting means and a detected value of the position difference detecting means; The gaming machine B3, wherein the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the direction of return is the direction of returning to the first state from the pushing end.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction to return to the first state from the pushing end, that is, the player's hand Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separating, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a form synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, the second driving device operates in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and it is possible to suppress the high load on the player's hand.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is constituted by a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Gaming machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a driving force for moving the operation means can be generated by effectively utilizing the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation unit is provided, and the second drive unit elastically supports the drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. Supporting means, wherein the supporting means increases the driving force for moving the operating means from the first state position to the second state position as the operating means approaches the end position. The gaming machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight abuts on the support frame in a state where the operation means is disposed at the terminal position, and generates a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force of the second driving unit is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting unit and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By separately generating the driving force and the driving force, the driving force applied to the operation means can be adjusted while the rotation of the driving motor is maintained. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the control can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and contacts the support frame based on the operation means being disposed at the end position. A gaming machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means. Accordingly, since the support means supporting the drive motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (a direction approaching the operation means), the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Characteristic C group> (Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration directing device)
A detecting sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operating means, the detecting sensor comprising a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring a speed of the operating means from a detection interval of the detecting sensor, and measuring means for the measuring means Threshold determining means for determining whether or not the measurement value measured by the control means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and repulsion means for generating a driving force directed in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, the threshold determining means When the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means increases as compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Gaming machine C1 characterized by the following.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
No. 8). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when it is emphasized that the player can operate lightly, the operation resistance is lowered, and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. Although the operation speed can be reduced to reduce the possibility of the operation means being damaged, the force required for the operation of the player increases, and there is a problem that the operation of the operation means becomes a burden for a weak player. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determining unit determines whether the speed of the operating unit is equal to or higher than the threshold, and when the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsive unit is increased. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and to reduce the speed of the operating means only when necessary. Therefore, the resilience means can improve operability and prevent destruction.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion unit includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force directed in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation unit, and the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value. The control for pushing out the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed, and before the operation means is arranged at a position where the voice coil motor can come into contact with the voice coil motor,
A gaming machine C2 wherein the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled, and the operating means can be decelerated, and the operating means is arranged at a position where the operating means can contact the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, it is possible to suppress an impact generated between the operation unit and the voice coil motor.

In the gaming machine C3, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are in contact with each other in the gaming machine C1 or C2, control is performed to increase a current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are in contact with each other, the control to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor is performed, so that the operation means is improved. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operation means while suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact between the control unit and the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operation means by spring elasticity. .

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity. Therefore, even when the moving speed of the operating means is high, the driving force is not delayed. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion unit compares the value measured by the threshold determination unit with a value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold when the value measured by the threshold determination unit is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold. A game machine C5, wherein a movable area of an end of the repulsion means and an end opposite to a side in contact with the operation means is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the rebounding means, which is the end opposite to the side in contact with the operating means, is reduced, so that the operation of the operating means is reduced. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased.

<Characteristic D group> (Driving means is prevented from being damaged by interrupting the transmission of driving force by the clutch)
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, Releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, wherein the releasing means reduces the driving force when a load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine D1 for canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing unit is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving unit and the operating unit via the transmitting unit becomes equal to or more than a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means while the operating means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disabled), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. it can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving unit is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, A gaming machine D2 characterized in that release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is being performed in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be released depending on the operation direction of the driving unit,
If the operating means is operated by the player when driving the driving means in an operation direction in which transmission of the driving force cannot be released, a large load may be applied to the driving means. For this reason, the degree of freedom of the effect at the time of effecting by operating the operation means is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the locking member for locking the button is moved in the releasing direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, the button operation can be made in two modes (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but in both cases, the drive force must be interrupted.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. In addition, the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means can be improved.

As a method of canceling the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting the operation direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is, for example, a meaning excluding a circumferential direction when the driving unit rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or may move in the radial direction.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, there is provided an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state where the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means comprises a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. Are provided respectively, and are provided with engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force in a state where they are in mesh with each other, and the engaging teeth are such that both surfaces opposed to the operating direction of the driving means are separated from the contact surface. A gaming machine D3 comprising a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in such a manner that the distance from the contact surface decreases.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means engages the driving force in a state in which the releasing means is engaged with the pressing surface which is pressed. On the other hand, since the transmission means is provided with the engagement teeth which are inclined in such a manner that both surfaces opposed to the operation direction of the drive means are tapered so as to be away from the contact surface, the transmission means is moved from the drive means by the engagement of the engagement teeth. The driving force can be released.

Further, between the drive means and the transmission means, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, the urging force is applied in the operation direction of the drive means via the engagement teeth. Load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving unit between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

Note that the size of the engaging portion of the engaging teeth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the release state, the resistance does not disappear completely and the resistance is restored periodically. Thus, when the player releases his / her hand, the button can be started to be operated within a short time.

In other words, when the button is driven "as an effect" and the player is holding the button,
One phase of button operation has passed. If the player releases his hand on the way and moves from the end of the one phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes longer,
The player started moving because the load on the player was released. "

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his / her hand and the load is released. This makes it possible to produce a feeling that the player has begun to move because the load on the player has been released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, an engagement surface between the transmission unit and the release unit is:
A gaming machine D4 formed of sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means early.
That is, when there is a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means approach and separate from each other at the tip of the engagement surface, the transmission means and the release means abut on the plane, and the transmission of the release means is performed. It is possible to suppress the stop of the movement along the direction approaching or moving away from the means. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation of the operation means can be started early.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operation unit is different between the case where the drive unit is continuously operated in the forward direction and the case where the drive unit is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, release of the driving force transmission is not limited to any one of the operation modes while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operation means. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, the operation mode of the operation unit is such that when the drive unit operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the drive unit for a predetermined period from the start of the operation is Similarly, the gaming machine D6 has a different operation after a lapse of the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means, the operating mode in the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is the same. Since the operation after the elapse of the predetermined period is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation means.

Here, by linking the difference in the operation mode of the operation unit with information that is beneficial to the player, such as a jackpot expectation, the player can operate the operation unit for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation unit changes. You can watch over.

Also, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the driving means, if the operation direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be. However, usually, the driving means is hidden from the player, and since the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and Can watch the operation of the operating means.

<Feature E group> (Change the position of the projection of the cam based on the rotation of the cam)
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, A first means for operating the operation means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, wherein the first means suppresses a position of the operation means from changing from the first position; Urging means for urging the operating means in the direction from the first position to the second position, and operating means moving from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means End means for variably forming a movement end of the game machine, wherein the first means suppresses a change in position of the operation means by engaging with the operation means, One of the means Releasing means for applying a load for releasing engagement with the means to the first means, wherein the release of the engagement by the release load means and the change of the moving end of the operating means in the end means are single. Machine E characterized by the driving means of
One.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operation means operated by a cam and fixed at a first position is fixed, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the operation means is extended by the urging force of the urging means. There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging operation can be changed by the terminating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement amount of the overhang operation of the operating means is changed according to the phase of the cam at the time of unlocking, the phase of the cam at the time of unlocking is variously changed. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing have been operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required, and the arrangement space for the driving means is increased.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. Thus, the driving means for changing the end position of the operating means by the terminating means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used in common, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

The gaming machine E2, wherein the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be caused based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. Thus, the number of detectors such as position sensors for detecting the state of the release load unit can be reduced, and the number of components can be reduced.

In addition, as a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is constituted by a cam and the release load means is constituted by a projection which rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle of the cam and the projection, In the case where the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, the synchronization between the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection is desynchronized, and in other phases, the method of synchronizing the rotation of the cam with the rotation of the projection,
Is exemplified.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is provided by a load given from the first means.
A gaming machine E3 operably disposed with respect to the transmission means, wherein the operation of the release load means switches whether or not the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably disposed on the transmission means by a load from the first means, and the release load means operates by the operation of the release load means. It is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate synchronously, so that the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission unit includes a first rotating member that rotates, the operation unit is supported eccentrically with respect to a rotation axis of the first rotation member, and the release load unit is configured to rotate the second rotation member. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but have different rotation periods, so that the second rotating means A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by contacting the first means with the phase.

According to this configuration, since the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operation means is maintained at the first position, and the operation means moves toward the second position, a plurality of types of end positions can be prepared. ,
You can expand the range of production. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position from the first position and an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with a similar configuration.

<Feature F group> (Vibration device supported by soft case)
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position, the operating means, and a second position to which the operating means reaches when the player performs an operation from the first position. And a receiving means arranged so as to be able to contact the vibrating part, wherein the operating means is arranged at the first position. Then, while the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which the vibrating portion cannot be brought into contact with the receiving device, when the operating device is disposed at the second position, the vibrating portion can be brought into contact with the receiving device. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with operating means operable by a player and vibration means for transmitting vibration to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not, when the vibrating means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or when the effect is transmitted to the player touching the frame of the gaming machine, the vibration is transmitted immediately after operating the operating means,
It is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. For this reason, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation in which the operating means is released at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). In some embodiments, the start of the vibration may not be ready before the hand is released, and the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating section contacts the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged at the first position or operated by the player and arranged at the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating section is continuously vibrated, the vibration can be made to be felt by the player only when the player operates the operation means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pushing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the operation mode of the player, Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, in the separated state, the vibration means is disposed so as to protrude into an occupied area occupied when the operation means is disposed at the second position, and the operation means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 changes to the contact state when the vibration means is moved out of the occupied area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the state changes from the separated state to the contact state. It is possible to change the contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating part,
The intensity of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, an effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation intensity of the player can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibration means without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the positioning of the receiving means can be performed while suppressing the vibration of the vibration means from being transmitted to the receiving means by the supporting means. Thereby, the receiving means and the vibration means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of the vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibration means during the vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating section and the receiving means abut. That is, when the vibrating part moves in the direction approaching the receiving means due to the expansion and contraction of the supporting means, it is possible to give momentum.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means has a deformation resistance along an operation direction of the operation means,
A gaming machine F5 characterized in that the resistance is reduced as compared with the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operation direction of the operation means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to a difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be set finely. it can.

Thus, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating part and the receiving means can be made different. .

In addition, as a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the support means is formed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending a rubber leg along the operation direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibratory means In the case of a rubber member, a method of manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a support means, and a rail for guiding the operating means to operate in the direction along the operation direction. And a coil spring for urging the vibrating means along the operation direction of the operating means.

In the gaming machine F3, a portion where the vibrating portion contacts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but is transmitted to the player via the receiving means which is separate from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration unit from being transmitted to the drive unit via the operation unit and the transmission unit, so that it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the drive unit. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

Further, since the vibration can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hands of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent a player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

In addition, as a receiving means, for example, a portion of the frame of the gaming machine, a portion near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, or an edge portion of a glass frame, etc. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a housing part that partially surrounds the operation unit, and the like.

<Characteristic G group> (One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part)
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and A driving unit that generates a driving force to be driven; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the operation unit, wherein the transmission unit includes a deforming unit that is elastically deformed by an overload. Gaming machine G1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means operable by a player, a driving means for generating a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting a driving force from the driving means to the operating means, There is a gaming machine provided with (for example, refer to JP-A-2014-144218).
. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operating means is held and fixed by the player, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means, a connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means,
There is a problem that a load is accumulated in a connecting portion between the transmission means and the driving means, and there is a possibility that these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, and the driving means and the transmission means The load applied to the connection portion with the connection can be reduced.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member rotatably supported, and the deformed portion forms a connection portion with a rotation shaft of the cam member. A gaming machine G2 wherein a fixing force is generated.

According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion functions as a portion that performs elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission unit, and a role as a portion that generates a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft.
Is provided. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a projecting portion projecting in parallel with a rotation axis, and the projecting portion and the operating means are connected to each other. The gaming machine G3, wherein the rotating shaft is inclined.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it is difficult to form the cam member and the protruding portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deforming portion is such that the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to the cam member, so that the projecting portion is attached to the cam member. The cam member can be easily formed of a single member as compared with a case where the cam member is slid, and the members can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the deformable portion to elastic deformation is compared with the rotational axis of the cam member in a first rotational direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line connecting the rotational axis and the protruding portion. A gaming machine characterized in that a deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which a straight line perpendicular to both a straight line connecting the convex portion and an extending direction of the rotating shaft is used as an axis. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G3, by changing the deformation resistance of the deformed portion in each direction, the state after the deformed portion is elastically deformed in the rotation axis direction is better. Compared to the state before the elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. Accordingly, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member is going to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means is reduced by the elastic deformation of the deformable portion. can do.

In the gaming machine G3 or G4, a friction member is provided at a predetermined distance in a direction parallel to a rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deformable portion. The gaming machine G5, wherein the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformable portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Abut on each other, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 comprising, in any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, detecting means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is displaced in an inclined manner with respect to an axis.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detecting means for detecting the displacement deviation becomes shorter, but as the arrangement interval of the detecting means becomes smaller, the configuration of the detecting means becomes more complicated and expensive. Therefore, there has been a problem that it is difficult to adopt a configuration that is inexpensive and detects the occurrence of overload early.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether at least a part of the cam member is displaced inclining with respect to the axis. Thus, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without driving the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. Thus, when an overload occurs, the load applied to the driving unit can be reduced.

<Characteristic H group>
In a gaming machine having a foul ball passage through which a foul ball that flows down toward the launching device among the game balls fired to the game area can pass, the foul ball passage allows the flowing down game ball to pass therethrough. A gaming machine H1 comprising one-way obstruction means for obstructing the progress of an object flowing backward.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an illegal act is performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball with the thread connected into the game area There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (for example, JP-A-2015-02).
No. 4179). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the yarn is pressed against the thread cutting teeth at the time of firing and the yarn is cut by the tension generated at that time, when the firing intensity of the game ball is weak, the game ball can not be cut completely without the yarn being cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
For this reason, for example, an illegal tool with game balls connected to both ends of the yarn is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the yarn is fired at a low firing intensity to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side While holding one of the game balls, the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread is driven into the game area, so that the thread can be removed from the guide path and the ball can be passed through the foul ball passage. A game ball can be connected to the other game ball by a thread, so that a load is externally applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball disposed in the game area. There is a problem that there is a possibility that an illegal profit can be obtained by manipulating the computer.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the one-way obstruction means can be used even when a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the yarn guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed. However, by hindering the movement of the yarn in the backward flow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illegal profit.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage includes a bent portion that bends a flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the yarn guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed with the bent portion, so that the yarn can be cut early.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion includes a load means on the inner corner side of the bending, which applies a load to the object flowing backward without applying a load to the flowing game ball.
.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to an object flowing backward (for example, a thread-like member) by the load unit.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is disposed in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the concave portion, the collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. Can be prevented.

In the gaming machine H3 or H4, a gaming machine H5 is provided with regulating means for regulating movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage is regulated by the regulating means. When a load is generated, the load applied to the member on the yarn can be prevented from being weakened by deforming the load means outward of the foul ball passage.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a payout ball is a portion for discharging a game ball paid out from a payout device, the receiving plate being a plate in which a foul ball arrives first on the front side of the front door. The gaming machine H6, wherein the ball discharge portion is disposed above a discharge-side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the game ball dispensed from the dispensing device is configured to pass before the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage so that the game ball can pass through the foul ball passage. When an illegal act of applying a load to the other game ball using the yarn guided to the game area is performed, the payout game ball is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the yarn. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of a payout ball discharging portion, which is a portion for discharging game balls paid out from the payout device, to a receiving plate, which is a plate where a foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided. The gaming machine H7, wherein the lower end of the outlet side outlet of the foul ball passage is lower than the lower end.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other gaming ball using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage was performed. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the paid out game balls.

<Characteristic I group> (Structure of the board holding surface)
A game device used during a game, and a receiving device that is open on one side that is opposite to the game device and that can receive the game device from the one side, the receiving device includes the game device. The game device is provided with a state changing unit that can be changed from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to an available state, which is a state in which the gaming unit can be used. A gaming machine I1 comprising: a proximity unit that approaches the gaming unit from the one side.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board can be rotated in the rotation direction parallel to the front of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame, and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, JP-A-2005-230420). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the gaming board is pushed into the position of use, so if the pushing of the gaming board is halfway, the pushing is performed again. It is necessary to perform such a repetitive operation, and there is a problem that the operation efficiency may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means includes the proximity means which is close to the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into the use state, the pressing of the game board can be prevented. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means abuts the game board and applies pushing force,
This has the effect that the game board can be pushed to the position in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side according to a state change to an unusable state in which the gaming means is disabled. .

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) in accordance with the state change of the gaming means to the unusable state. There is an effect that the work efficiency of the work can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing unit is configured to make the gaming unit unusable so that the unusable state occurs, and the proximity unit retreats outside the gaming unit. Gaming machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removing operation of the gaming means can be improved, and the game efficiency can be improved. Since the operation is performed when the means is disabled, the work efficiency can be further improved.

The gaming machine I4 according to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the state changing unit includes a contact unit that receives a load from the gaming unit when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, the state changing means changes to the usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means. Therefore, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means allows the state changing means to be used as a series of flows. State can be changed.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported on one side of the receiving means as a shaft, and is configured to be received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means includes the receiving means. A gaming machine I5, which is disposed on the other side of the game machine.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, using the width of the gaming means,
The load can be efficiently applied to the contact means via the game means.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means is such that the state changing means disables the gaming means. A gaming machine I6, comprising: a closing restricting portion for preventing the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means determines whether or not the gaming means can be used depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It can be determined whether or not to perform. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means keeps the unusable state.

<Characteristic J group> (Piano wire goto prevention with inverted cup and harness band)
A game means used during the game, and a receiving means which is open on one side which is opposite to the game means and which can receive the game means from the one side, the receiving means includes the game means and A gaming machine J1 comprising: arranging means arranged on a path communicated with the outside, wherein the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from outside at a plurality of places.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraudulent act of inserting a piano wire from a rotation axis side of a front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No.
26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient because there is only one anti-fraud unit.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, the arranging means is arranged on the path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, thereby preventing fraud. Can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the arranging unit includes a first unit that suppresses entry of a member from outside at a first location, and a second unit that inhibits entry of a member from outside at a second location.
A gaming machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of a member from outside by a different method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J1, the method of arranging means for suppressing the entry of a member from outside differs between the first location and the second location. As compared with the case where the number is increased, the entry of the member from the outside can be further suppressed.

It should be noted that the method for suppressing the entry from outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by closing a route, or a method of detecting improper activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means includes an intrusion restricting portion formed in a cup shape opened outward of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further entering.

In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting an electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the path from the outside to the gaming means on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion. Gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J3, when a fraud that penetrates the entry restricting portion due to high heat occurs, a change (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat is detected to detect an external influence. The effect of suppressing the entry of the member can be easily generated.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arranging means may include a member that has entered from the outside,
A gaming machine J5 comprising a cancellation means for guiding to a cancellation area far from the game means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, since the member entering from the outside is guided by the arranging means to the elimination area far from the gaming means, the entry of the member entering from the outside is prevented. Even if the degree is increased, it is possible to prevent a member entering from outside from reaching the game means.

<Characteristic K group> (five-piece decorative plate structure. Including fraud prevention)
A first unit and a second unit, which are arranged to face each other along the first direction and have at least one side connected thereto, and are disposed between the first unit and the second unit along the first direction; A connecting means for connecting the first means and the second means, and a connecting direction of the connecting part is set to a second direction intersecting the first direction. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that:

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a first unit and a second unit that are arranged to face each other and are connected at at least one side, and are disposed between the first unit and the second unit along a first direction. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing. When the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied to the first means. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by the three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction crossing the first direction, the third means is provided in the first direction. Therefore, the load applied from the vehicle can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the gaming machine K1, the connecting portion is disposed apart from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is provided a connected means connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that the gaming machine K3 is connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in an approaching third direction and fitting them together.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is provided connected means connected to the other side of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. Are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the first means oriented in a direction intersecting the third direction Resistance to the disassembly of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed outward.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitted portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
Thus, even if a wrongdo occurs in which the fitting portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled, the detection of the wrongdoing can be hastened.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening direction is the same as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

In one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, a light irradiating unit that irradiates light toward the first unit or the second unit and is fixed to the connected unit, and one of the first unit or the second unit. And a light guide means fixed to the member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation means into the inside thereof.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means and the second means from being displaced from the light guide means.

In the gaming machine K6, an abutting means is provided for abutting a surface in a region where the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means face each other.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine K6, the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained at a distance corresponding to the dimension of the contact means. Can be.
This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by receiving a load in the facing direction. Can be.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from being changed even when a load is applied in the facing direction when the first means or the second means is illegally disassembled. can do.

<Characteristic L group> (Point L utilizing curved light guide means. The point is not reached)
A light guiding means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of light passing through the inside, and a projected means to which light passing through the light guiding means is disposed opposite to the light guiding means, and The gaming machine L1, wherein the projection target device includes a concave facing portion disposed to face the concave portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion disposed to face the convex portion of the light guiding means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end face to the surface (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-265573). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, it is necessary to change the intensity of incident light in order to partially change the intensity of surface-emitted light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection target means includes the concave facing part and the convex facing part, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave facing part and the convex facing part. With the department,
The light emission intensity of the projection target can be changed.

In the gaming machine L1, the projection target means is configured such that the concave-facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex-facing portion is made of a material that transmits less light than the concave-facing portion. Gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the intensity of light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened, so that the light emitted from the light guide means is converged at the concave facing portion. The effect of the effect by the light can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, there is provided opposite projection means which is disposed on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guiding means interposed therebetween, and which projects light passing through the light guiding means. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light guide facing the concave portion and a portion of the light guide facing the convex portion are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L2, the portion of the opposite projection unit that is arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide unit and the portion that is arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide unit are light. Since the transmissivity is formed from substantially the same material, the same light is incident on the light guide means, so that the light is visually recognized through the projected means and the light is visually recognized through the opposite projection means. And can be different.

<Characteristic M group> (bass reflex speaker arrangement structure)
A first means and a second means which are arranged opposite to each other and are fixed to each other, and constitute the internal space in a fixed state; an acoustic means which is arranged in a state where at least a part thereof enters the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are provided at both left and right ends of a front frame, and which performs effects by sound output from the speakers (for example, JP-A-2016-1).
No. 6088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling to the rear side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine, and is sent out of the gaming machine.
There is a problem that the effect of giving a low tone is easily performed, but the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left and right width of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, a bending path is formed in the internal space of the first means and the second means by the bending means. By releasing the right and left widths, the vibration wave can be made to travel at an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means has a rib shape from at least one of the first means or the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2 comprising: a protruding portion protruding from the first means, the protruding tip of the protruding portion being in contact with the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in a direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. Abuts with each other to prevent the occurrence of a gap between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluid such as the vibration wave from passing through the gap in the bending path.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, an opening is provided to connect the internal space to the outside, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being closed by a game machine.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, The wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passage member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

The gaming machine M4, wherein in the gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed closer to the acoustic means than the projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the protruding portion and disconnected. be able to.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and the second means is fastened and fixed, and an effect means arranged below the support fastening means and performing an effect accompanying a game A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the production means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the production means from below, so that the support fastening means can be weighted without pressing the space used for production. Things can be adopted.

<Characteristic N group> (movable unit, reverse rotating flower. Petal that stops halfway)
A base member, a first displacement unit that is displaceably supported by the base member, a driving unit that applies a driving force to the first displacement unit, and a following state in which the first displacement unit is displaced in a displacement direction. A second switchable state in a non-following state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction.
And a displacing means, wherein at least the second displacing means is in a following state, the third displacing means being displaced in a direction opposite to the displacing direction of the second displacing means by a driving force of the driving means. A gaming machine N1 comprising:

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the extension / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means is extended / contracted, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means when performing the operation (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacing means expands and contracts, the direction of displacement of the first displacing means and the second displacing means is the same, so that a slow effect is produced, and the effect of the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means,
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the speed of the second displacement means felt by the player as a bodily sensation, as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

In the gaming machine N1, a resistance means for generating a resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means is provided, and the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Gaming machine N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the action of the resistance means causes the second displacement means to follow the first displacement means in a following state and a non-following state deviating from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of the mode of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing the state of the second displacement means using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is provided so as to be visible from the front surface.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible, so that the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and the player can visually recognize the resistance means. It can be shared with the function as the effect device.

In the gaming machine N4, a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member is provided, and the shaft means rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially and rotatably. Gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N4, the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the shaft means functioning as the rotation axis of the resistance means are fixed to the base member. As the posture of any one of the second displacement means and the resistance means changes, the posture of the other members or means also changes, so that the displacement resistance is prevented from rising excessively. Can be.

<Characteristic O group> (Utilization of shell buttons and punch holes. The point is not reached)
In a gaming machine including a first means and a housing means configured to house the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: an opening; and a second opening that is opened with a width equal to or greater than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include operating means operable by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a foreign object is inserted into a gap between the upper plate and the operation means, the foreign object remains inside and may cause a malfunction. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 has the second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the housing means and the first means, so that foreign matter is stored through the second opening. It can be easily removed outside the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where foreign matter remains inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the accommodating unit includes a support unit that supports the first unit, and the second opening is disposed on the opposite side of the support unit with the first unit therebetween. Gaming machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the support portion.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, before the water reaches the low water resistant portion, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured to have a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A gaming machine O4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
Since the opening has a shape based on the shape of the solid object in the different direction, the solid object can be easily removed through the second opening.

The gaming machine O5, wherein in any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is disposed closer to a player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially closed at the second opening. Can be done. This allows the player to be aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, so that the possibility of the solid object remaining remaining can be reduced. .

<Feature P group> (G2 notice control)
Determining means for performing the determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means being stopped and displayed In this case, in a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, an effect executing means for executing an effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; Determining means for determining that the specific effect is to be executed by the effect executing means for dynamic display of the identification information continuously, and determining that the specific effect is to be executed by the determining means; And a suspending means for suspending the execution of the specific effect until the return condition is satisfied, based on the establishment of the specific condition.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, a special effect is performed for a plurality of continuous variable effects, and a series of effects using a plurality of variable effects is provided to a player, so that the entertainment of the game is provided. (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541) has been proposed. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., by executing a plurality of continuous variable effects, if an informational effect or the like to be executed occurs irregularly during that time, the execution is delayed, etc. There is a possibility that a problem that the contents are difficult to understand may occur. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to easily understand the contents of a game.

  According to the gaming machine P1, even when the determination unit determines that the specific effect is to be executed for each of the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times, the specific effect is based on the establishment of the specific condition. Is interrupted until the return condition is satisfied, so that even if the execution of a specific effect has been determined, the execution can be interrupted to perform necessary control, etc. Easy games can be provided. In addition, the execution of the specific effect is resumed when the return condition is satisfied, so that the player can be notified that the specific effect has not been completed in the middle of the process, providing an easy-to-understand effect to the player. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine P1, operating means operable by the player, switching means capable of switching and setting the setting when the operating means is operated, and the setting based on the setting set by the switching means A game machine P2, comprising: a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when starting the dynamic display of the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting, so that the game is played. It is possible to change the dynamic display mode by the operation of the player, and it is possible to enrich the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed, and to suppress the player from getting tired of the game early. There is.

  In the gaming machine P2, the specific condition is satisfied when the setting is switched by the switching unit when the execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining unit. Gaming machine P3.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P2, when the setting is switched by the player, a specific effect is interrupted, and the dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is changed. It is possible to start, and even if the player switches the setting, the specific effect is similarly executed, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that it is difficult to recognize that the setting has been switched.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, a ball-in means for allowing a game ball to enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the ball-in means, and an acquisition means for the information And a storage unit for storing the information acquired by the storage unit, wherein the determination unit performs the determination based on the information stored in the storage unit. P4.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the game ball whose information is obtained by the game ball entering the ball entry means is allowed to enter the ball entry means. There is an effect that interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P4, the ball entry means includes at least a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the acquisition means includes the first ball entry means The first information can be acquired when a game ball enters the second ball, and the second information can be acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. The means dynamically displays first identification information for indicating a result of the determination when the first information is determined by the determination means, and when the second information is determined by the determination means, Is for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a result of the determination, wherein the determination unit preferentially determines the second information over the first information stored in the storage unit. And the specific condition is executed a plurality of times continuously. The second identification information is dynamically displayed in a state where execution of the specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information. Gaming machine P6.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P4, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information executed plural times continuously, the second ball entry is performed. Even if a ball enters the means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed with priority, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize the start.

  In the gaming machine P7, when the first ball entry means is in the first game state, the game ball is configured to enter the ball more easily than the second ball entry means, and the second ball entry means is A gaming machine P8 characterized in that it is configured to be easier to enter the ball than the first entering means when it is in a second gaming state different from the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P7, when the game is in the first game state, the first identification information continuously moves because the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means. This has the effect of making it easier to display the target, making it easier to execute a specific effect many times, and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic Q group> (G production)
Determining means for performing the determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means being stopped and displayed In this case, in a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, a specific effect of executing a specific effect with respect to a plurality of consecutive dynamic displays of the identification information is provided. A gaming machine Q1 comprising: an effect executing means.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . (Patent Document: JP 2010-057441 A). In this kind of pachinko machine and the like, it has been required to further improve the interest in the game. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine B1, even in the case of dynamic display of identification information that does not result in a specific determination, there is an effect that the identification information of a plurality of times can be shown as one dynamic display, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  In the gaming machine Q1, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means, based on the satisfaction of a specific condition, interruption means for interrupting the execution of the specific effect until a return condition is satisfied, A gaming machine Q2 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the execution of the specific effect is suspended until the return condition is established based on the establishment of the specific condition, so that the player can know that the specific condition has been established. There is an effect that it can be easily shown. In addition, when the return condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect is returned, so that the specific effect ends in the middle, the content of the effect becomes incomplete, and it is possible to suppress a problem that confuses the player. effective.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, operating means operable by a player, switching means capable of switching and setting when the operating means is operated, and the setting set by the switching means A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when starting the dynamic display of the identification information based on the game machine Q3.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operation means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. In addition, the dynamic display mode can be changed by the operation of the player, the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed can be abundant, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine Q3, the specific condition is satisfied when the setting is switched by the switching unit when the specific effect is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q3, when the setting is switched by the player, the specific effect is interrupted, and the dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is changed. It is possible to start, and even if the player switches the setting, the specific effect is similarly executed, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that it is difficult to recognize that the setting has been switched.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, ball-in means capable of entering a game ball, acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the ball-in means, and acquisition means thereof And a storage means for storing the information obtained by the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a game ball whose information is obtained by the game ball being entered into the ball entry means is allowed to enter the ball entry means. There is an effect that interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine Q6, characterized in that the gaming machine Q5 has a preliminary determination means for performing a determination before the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q5, the preliminary determination is performed by the preliminary determination means, so that the determination result can be identified before the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is.

  In the gaming machine Q5 or Q6, the entering means includes at least a first entering means and a second entering means different from the first entering means, and the obtaining means includes: The first information can be acquired when a game ball enters the ball means, and the second information can be acquired when a game ball enters the second ball means. When the first information is determined by the determination means, the dynamic display means dynamically displays first identification information for indicating a result of the determination, and the second information is determined by the determination means. In this case, the second identification information for indicating the determination result is dynamically displayed, and the specific condition is that the second identification information is dynamically displayed after the first identification information is dynamically displayed. Gaming machine Q7, which is established when target display is performed.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B5 or B6, if a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is executed a plurality of times in succession, the second effect Even if a ball enters the ball entry means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so the dynamic display of the second identification information is prioritized. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the game has been started.

  In the gaming machine Q7, a launching means capable of varying a firing force based on an operation of a player to launch a game ball, and a gaming ball fired at a first firing force by the launching means can flow down. The first flow path and a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path are configured to be difficult to flow, and a game ball fired at a second firing force different from the first firing force is configured to flow down. And a second flow path, wherein the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball, and wherein the second ball entry means, A gaming machine Q8, wherein gaming balls flowing down the second flow path are arranged at positions where they can enter.

  According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q7, there is an effect that the player can intentionally satisfy the specific condition easily by adjusting the firing force of the game ball.

<Characteristic R group> (If special figure 2 remains after the end of working hours, do not shift to charge effect until 5 changes)
First ball entry means in which game balls can always enter, and second ball entry means which can be changed into a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which the game balls are more difficult to enter than the first state; Acquisition means capable of acquiring first information when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and acquiring second information when a game ball enters the second ball entry means; A storage unit in which the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition unit are stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage unit Means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, and when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means Bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player , A determination means for determining whether a specific condition for changing the second ball entry means from the second state to the first state is satisfied, and an effect for indicating a determination result by the determination means. Is performed, and when the determination unit determines that the specific condition is satisfied, a production determination unit that can determine a specific production as the production performed by the production unit; A gaming machine R1 comprising: prohibition means for prohibiting execution of a specific effect by the effect determination unit when a condition is satisfied.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In a pachinko machine or the like of this type, when a special period in which entering the starting port is easier than usual is set, an effect is issued in advance or during the period that the special period will be executed. (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229733). When there is a high possibility that a large number of pending balls have been generated, for example, immediately after the state where it becomes easy to enter the ball into the starting port has ended, by performing the notification, the notification that is not advantageous to the player is performed. As a result, there is a possibility that a problem that the interest of the game is reduced may occur. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine R1, the execution of the specific effect indicating that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means by the satisfaction of the prohibition condition is not performed. It is possible to execute an effect in accordance with the needs of the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine R1, state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is more easily changed from the second state to the first state than in a normal state, The prohibition condition is a condition in which a first condition that is satisfied based on the setting of the normal state from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting unit is set as at least one condition. A gaming machine R2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, the first condition based on the termination of the special state in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entry means as the prohibition condition is set as the fulfillment condition. Since a large amount of second information is stored, a specific effect is executed during a period in which the profit for the player is low even when the game ball is thrown into the second ball entry means, thereby suppressing a problem of lowering the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine R2, when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting unit, a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored in the storage unit. The gaming machine R3, wherein the second condition that is satisfied is set as at least one condition.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, when the special state is completed, the second information is increased by providing a condition that a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored. The prohibition condition is satisfied only in the state in which the second information is stored, and the effect that the specific effect is not executed and the profit of the player is impaired can be suppressed even though the number of stored second information is small. .

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the determination unit is configured to change the second ball entry unit to the first state during the first period for a first period, and the determination result is longer than the first period. During the second period, it is configured to be able to determine a specific second determination result that is changed to the first state, and the effect determination unit is configured to perform the determination based on the determination of the specific second determination result. A gaming machine R4 characterized by determining an effect.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, it is possible to notify that the period is more advantageous to the player by executing the specific effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. is there.

<Feature S group> (Volume control)
In a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means. As a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means, a sound output means capable of outputting sound and a volume output by the sound output means can be set based on an operation from outside the gaming machine. Volume setting means, a first state in which the sound is output from the audio output means based on the volume set by the volume setting means, and the sound having a predetermined volume regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means. An output control unit that switches between a second state in which sound is output from the output unit, and a power cutoff state in which power supply for operating the game machine is cut off, and power supply to the game machine is performed. Gaming machine S1, and wherein the in case of a start has been restored condition, those having an initial setting means for setting the second state.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine and the like, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of variably setting a volume of a sound effect or a sound output as an effect by a player's operation, setting of a game store, etc. JP 2011-200511 A). In this type of gaming machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of more suitable volume control. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably controlling a sound volume.

  According to the gaming machine S1, when the power is turned on, the second state of outputting at a predetermined volume is set regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means. And there is an effect that suitable volume control can be executed.

  In the gaming machine S1, the second state is a state in which a sound volume is set so as to be lower than the lowest sound volume set by the sound volume setting means.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, in the second state, the volume is set to be lower than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means. There is an effect that the noise of the game store can be reduced. In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the output control means continuously sets the second state until the execution of one effect is completed by the effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the second state is continuously set until the execution of the first effect is completed, so that the power supply is provided during the period when the effect is not being executed. Even if the power is turned on, it is possible to recognize that the effect is executed after the power is turned on, based on the volume of one effect executed later.

  In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, when turning on the power to the gaming machine, an initial state setting means for setting the state of the gaming machine to an initial state on condition that a predetermined operation is performed from the outside. The gaming machine S4, wherein the audio output means outputs a predetermined notification sound at a maximum volume when the initial state is set.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the fact that the game machine has been initialized can be confirmed by the notification sound, and when the gaming machine is incorrectly initialized. This has the effect that fraud can be found early.

<Characteristic T group> (Hold symbol display area variable control)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and an identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, in the gaming machine having the bonus game execution unit stored in the storage unit before being determined by the determination unit. For each piece of information, a symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol, and a display mode of an area in which the symbol is displayed on the symbol display means is changed according to the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means. That the symbol display area varying means and, wherein the one having a game machine T1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting port during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the right to perform the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information, and the number of the retained ball information is (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541) has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, the display area in which the reserved ball information is displayed is difficult to understand in a state where the reserved ball information is not displayed. Was sought. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and aims to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine T1, the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed according to the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, the display mode of the display area in which the symbol is displayed is stored. There is an effect that it is possible to easily recognize the number of pieces of information and provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine T1, the symbol display means displays area information indicating an area in which the symbol is displayed, even when the symbol is not displayed, and the symbol display area changing means. Is a gaming machine T2 characterized in that the area information is variably displayed.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1, the area information is variably displayed according to the number of stored information, so that the area information corresponding to the number of symbols to be displayed is displayed. This has the effect of being easy to understand.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the symbol display means displays identification information capable of identifying an upper limit number of the information that can be stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1 or T2, there is an effect that the upper limit number can be recognized by the identification information and a game can be prevented from being performed so that the acquisition condition is satisfied beyond the upper limit number. .

  The gaming machine T4, wherein in the gaming machine T3, the identification information is set to be non-display when the symbol that is the upper limit number is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T3, the identification information is not displayed when the upper limit number of symbols is displayed, so that the display of the symbols is prevented from being hindered. This has the effect that the symbols can be easily identified.

  In any of the gaming machines T1 to T4, a period determining means for determining a period in which a predetermined number of the acquisition conditions are satisfied, and a display mode of an area in which the symbol is displayed based on the period determined by the period determining means. A gaming machine T5 comprising: a rule changing means for changing a display rule to be changed.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T4, the display rule for changing the display mode of the area in which the symbols are displayed is changed depending on the period until a predetermined number of acquisition conditions are satisfied. Therefore, the period in which the acquisition condition is satisfied can be recognized according to the manner in which the display mode is changed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T5, the symbol display area changing means displays the first display mode until the symbols are displayed in the first number, and the symbol display area changing means increases the first display mode by exceeding the first number. A gaming machine T6 characterized in that the gaming machine T6 is configured to change the display to a second display mode different from that of the first display mode.

  According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T5, the first display mode is displayed until the first number is displayed. It is possible to increase the willingness to establish and to enhance the interest of the game.

<Feature U group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and an identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, in the gaming machine having the bonus game execution unit stored in the storage unit before being determined by the determination unit. A symbol display unit for displaying a symbol corresponding to each piece of information; and a display mode for changing a display mode displayed on the symbol display unit based on a period during which the information is acquired by the acquisition unit by a predetermined number. Gaming machine U1, characterized in that those having a variable means.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting port during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the right to perform the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information, and the number of the retained ball information is (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541) has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player gets tired of the game early. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine U1, the display mode displayed on the symbol display means is variable depending on the period until the predetermined number of information is obtained, so that the player is also interested in the period until the predetermined number of information is obtained. And the effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine U2, wherein the display mode changing means changes a display mode in a display area where the symbols are displayed based on the period.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U1, the display mode of the display area in which the symbols are displayed is changed based on the period. There is an effect that it can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the display area in which the symbol is displayed in the symbol display means has a suggestion mode indicating that the symbol is an area in which the symbol is displayed even in a period in which the symbol is not displayed. A gaming machine U3, which is set for display.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the suggestion mode is displayed even in a period in which no symbols are displayed, so that it is possible to promptly confirm that information has been acquired. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine U3, the display mode changing means changes the suggestion mode corresponding to the period.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U3, the suggestion mode is changed in accordance with the period required for storing the predetermined number of information, so that the frequency at which the information is stored in the suggestion mode Is effective.

  In the gaming machine U3 or U4, the suggestion mode is displayed by being regularly changed based on the number of the displayed symbols, and the display mode variable unit is displayed based on the period. A gaming machine U5 variably displayed in a special suggestion mode different from the suggestion mode corresponding to the number of symbols in the game machine U5.

  According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U3 or U4, the frequency of acquiring information can be confirmed by the special suggestion mode, and the information mode varies irregularly and sometimes irregularly. There is an effect that a game can be performed while enjoying the situation.

<Feature V group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and an identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the information before being determined by the determination means is stored in the storage means in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine V1 having an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the storage of a number or more.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting port during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the right to perform the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information, and the number of the retained ball information is (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541) has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player gets tired of the game early. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine V1, a specific effect is executed by storing a predetermined number or more of information in the storage means, so that not only the determination result but also the number of stored information can be of interest. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine V1, a preliminary determination unit that performs a determination before the information stored by the storage unit is determined by the determination unit; A gaming machine V2 comprising: an effect determination unit capable of determining a type of the specific effect based on a determination result.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V1, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the result of the preliminary determination, so that the identification information is stored before the specific effect is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to suggest the determination result of the information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on period information corresponding to a period until a predetermined number of the information is stored by the storage means, wherein the type of the specific effect is determined. .

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the period information corresponding to the period until the predetermined number of information is stored in the storage means. There is an effect that the frequency at which information is stored by the effect can be identified.

  In any one of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the game machine has history information storage means for storing game history information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the specific effect is provided by the history information stored in the history information storage means. The type of the specific effect is determined based on the game machine V4.

  According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the history information of the game, so that the type of the specific effect is variable by continuing the game. This makes it possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continuously executed until the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage unit becomes equal to or less than a specific number. .

  According to the gaming machine V5, in any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continued until the number becomes equal to or less than the specific number, so that the player is prevented from playing the game so that the stored information does not become equal to or less than the specific number. There is an effect that can be motivated.

  In any of the gaming machines V1 to V5, for each piece of the information stored in the storage unit before being determined by the determination unit, a symbol display unit that displays a corresponding symbol, and stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine V6, comprising: symbol display area changing means for changing a display mode of an area in which the symbol is displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the number of pieces of the information.

  According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V5, the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed corresponding to the number of stored information, so that the information is stored. There is an effect that the number can be easily identified.

<Feature W group> (Lucky number)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and an identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, in the gaming machine having the bonus game execution unit stored in the storage unit before being determined by the determination unit. For each piece of information, a symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol, and when the information is stored in the storage means, the symbol display means is stored in the storage means at the time when the information is stored. Number information storage means for storing number information corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored before the determination by the determination means, and executing a specific effect based on the number information stored in the number information storage means A gaming machine W1 comprising:

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting port during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the right to perform the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information, and the number of the retained ball information is (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541) has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player gets tired of the game early. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine W1, when the information is stored, the number information corresponding to the number of information stored at the time when the information is stored is stored for the stored information, and the identification based on the number information is performed. Since the effect is executed, there is an effect that the interest when the information is stored can be further improved.

  The gaming machine W2, wherein in the gaming machine W1, the specific effect is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine W1, the specific effect is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific determination result, so that the specific determination result is determined. It is possible to make the player interested in the number information at the time when the played information is stored, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine W2, the specific effect is executed in a mode indicating an area in which the symbol corresponding to the number information stored for the information determined as the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine W3 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W2, it is possible to confirm the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific determination result last time by the specific effect when the symbol is displayed. There is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of a symbol being displayed in an area indicated by a specific effect.

  The gaming machine W4, wherein any of the gaming machines W1 to W3 is provided with a suggestion corresponding to the number information to the symbol.

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the design is provided with a suggestion mode corresponding to the number information, so when the number of pieces of information before being determined increases or decreases. Also, there is an effect that the number information at the time of storage can be recognized by the suggestion mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, a type determining unit that determines a type of the special bonus game executed by the special bonus game executing unit, and the number information of the specific effect when the special bonus game is executed. Notification means for notifying suggestion information indicating type information corresponding to the type of the privilege game executed based on the fact that the information is stored in the number of storages corresponding to Gaming machine W5.

  According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the suggestion information indicating the type of the bonus game being executed by storing information up to the storage number corresponding to the specific effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to play a game such that information is stored even during the privilege game, and it is possible to increase the efficiency of the game.

  The gaming machine W6, wherein the type of the privilege game is configured to be difficult to identify from the identification information for indicating the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W5, the type of the privilege game is configured to be difficult to identify from the identification information, so that the value that the suggestion information is notified can be increased. is there.

<Group X> (Derivation of charge production)
First ball entry means in which game balls can always enter, and second ball entry means which can be changed into a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which the game balls are more difficult to enter than the first state; Acquisition means capable of acquiring first information when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and acquiring second information when a game ball enters the second ball entry means; A storage unit in which the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition unit are stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage unit Means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, and when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means Bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player , A determination means for determining whether a specific condition for changing the second ball entry means from the second state to the second state is satisfied, and an effect for indicating a determination result by the determination means. And an effect determining means capable of determining a specific effect as an effect to be executed by the effecting means when the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the determining means. A gaming machine X1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, a movable member such as a wing-shaped member that restricts the ball from entering the starting port, and releases the restriction when the opening condition is satisfied and changes the ball so that the game ball can easily enter the ball. (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Publication No. 2011-229733) has proposed a gaming machine in which is attached to a starting port. In the above-described pachinko machines and the like, even if the opening condition is simply satisfied and the movable member moves, there is a possibility that a problem may occur that the player gets tired of the game. The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine X1, the player can easily determine that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific effect, and play the game not only with the specific determination result but also expecting the specific effect to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine X2, further comprising a prohibition unit for prohibiting the effect determination unit from determining a specific effect when the avoidance condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X1, the determination of the specific effect is prohibited by the establishment of the avoidance condition, so that the execution of the specific effect unnecessarily can be suppressed. effective.

  State setting means which can set a special state in which the second ball entry means is more easily changed from the second state to the first state than the normal state in the gaming machine X1 or X2; Wherein the avoidance condition sets at least one condition based on the setting of the normal state from the state where the special state is set by the state setting unit. Gaming machine X3.

  According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X1 or X2, at the timing when the special state is set to the normal state, there is a high possibility that a large amount of the second information is stored in the storage means. Has the effect that the problem of excessively entering the second ball entry means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine X3, the avoidance condition may be that the second information is stored in the storage unit when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting unit. A gaming machine X4 set as at least one condition.

  According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X3, there is an effect that a problem that the second information is excessively stored can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, a launching means capable of varying a firing force based on an operation of a player to fire a game ball, and a game ball fired by the firing means with a first firing force A first flow path configured to be able to flow down, and a game ball fired at a second firing force different from the first firing force, wherein a game ball flowing down the first flow path is configured to be difficult to flow down. A second flow path configured to be able to flow down, wherein the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where game balls flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball; The ball means is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the game ball flows down to the first flow path. A gaming machine X5 for notifying a player of suggestion information suggesting that a game be performed.

  According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the suggestion information for causing the gaming ball to flow down to the first flow path is notified, so that the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that a player enters a game ball into the second ball entry means changed to the first state.

<Group Y> (button pop-out control)
Operating means having an operating surface operable by a player, moving means for moving the operating surface of the operating means, and operation control means for controlling the operation of the moving means, The moving means is configured to be capable of executing a first operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means in a first movement mode and a second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means in a second movement mode different from the first movement mode. The movement control means executes the first operation when a first condition is satisfied, and executes the second operation when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine Y1 for controlling the operation of the gaming machine Y1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . This type of pachinko machine or the like is provided with operating means such as switches that can be operated by the player, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operating means can be changed, or the type of background can be changed. There has been proposed a gaming machine configured to be switchable (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that a player simply gets tired of playing a game by simply operating the operating means. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, since the operation surface of the operation means can be moved in different movement modes by the operation control means, the player can be watched by the operation means. Therefore, the effect of using the operation means can be enhanced, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Y1, the moving means moves the operation surface of the operation means from a predetermined initial position to a specific operation position.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, since the operation control means can change the movement mode until the operation surface of the operation means is moved to a specific operation position, the game can be performed even when the operation surface of the operation means moves. People can be interested.

  In the gaming machine Y2, the moving unit moves the operation surface of the operation unit such that a moving period in the second operation is longer than a moving period in the first operation. Gaming machine Y3.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, the moving period can be varied according to the control content of the operation control means, so that the player can be more interested in the process of moving the operation surface of the operation means.

  In the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the moving unit includes a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving an operation surface of the operation unit, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the operation unit. The operation control means performs a plurality of drive controls on the drive means, and varies the operation content of the moving means in accordance with the content of the drive control to be performed. A gaming machine Y4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine Y4, the operation content of the moving means can be made different by making the content of the drive control to the driving means different. Therefore, the control content of the operation control means can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine Y4, the driving unit generates the driving force by a rotation operation, and the operation control unit performs a first driving control for rotating the driving unit in a first direction as the plurality of driving controls. And a second drive control for rotating in a second direction different from the first direction, and the moving unit is configured to execute the second drive control when the first drive control is executed by the control unit. A gaming machine Y5 that performs one operation and executes the second operation when the second drive control is executed.

  According to the gaming machine Y5, since the moving means performs different operations by rotating the driving means in different directions, it is possible to easily change the movement mode of moving the operation surface of the operating means.

  The gaming machine Y6, further comprising a speed varying means capable of varying the rotation speed of the driving means.

  According to the gaming machine Y6, since the rotation speed is changed by the speed changing means, the movement mode of moving the operation surface of the operation means can be easily diversified, and the effect of the effect using the operation means can be improved. Can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine Y6, the second movement mode is to move an operation surface of the operation means to the specific operation position in accordance with a rotation speed of the drive means changed by the speed change means. Gaming machine Y7 characterized by the following.

  Discriminating means for executing discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied in the gaming machines Y1 to Y7; And a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect for indicating that the judgment result of the judgment means is the predetermined judgment result, wherein the moving means operates as the suggestion effect. The game machine Y8, wherein the operation control means determines the content of the operation control in accordance with the result of the determination by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine Y8, it is possible to suggest the determination result of the determination unit by the movement mode of the operation surface of the operation unit to be executed. Become. Therefore, the effect of the effect using the operation means can be enhanced.

<Characteristic Z group>
Operating means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player when predetermined operating conditions are satisfied; condition determining means for determining whether predetermined moving conditions are satisfied; and the predetermined movement by the condition determining means. Moving means capable of moving the operation surface of the operating means from the storage position to the protruding position when the condition is satisfied; movement control means for controlling the moving means; And an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the operation of the operation device, wherein the moving means comprises: a first operation for moving an operation surface of the operating means to the protruding position; And a second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position, and the movement control means is configured to perform the predetermined operation by the operation means, Yo When said effect is feasible, the gaming machine is characterized in that to perform said first operation Z1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . This type of pachinko machine or the like is provided with operating means such as switches that can be operated by the player, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operating means can be changed, or the type of background can be changed. There has been proposed a gaming machine configured to be switchable (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that a player simply gets tired of playing a game by simply operating the operating means. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine Z1, since the movement control means causes the movement means to perform the first operation regardless of whether or not to move the operation surface of the operation means, the movement means operates the movement of the operation surface of the operation means. By grasping whether or not it is possible, it is possible to prevent the player from being detected in advance, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, there is an effect that the player can expect the player to perform the second operation by performing the first operation.

  In the gaming machine Z1, the moving means includes a driving means for generating a driving force for moving an operation surface of the operating means by a rotation operation, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. Wherein the movement control means comprises: a first drive control for rotating the drive means in a first direction as the plurality of movement controls; and a rotation in a second direction different from the first direction. A second drive control to be performed, wherein the moving means executes the first operation when the first drive control is executed by the movement control means, and executes the second drive control. A gaming machine Z2 that executes the second operation when the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Z1, the operating surface of the operating unit can be configured not to move even when the driving unit is driven, and the position of the driving unit can be adjusted according to the state. Has the effect that it can be changed without moving it.

  In the gaming machine Z2, the gaming machine Z2 has a regulation state that can be changed between a regulation state for regulating movement of the operation surface of the operation means by the movement means and a release state for releasing the regulation. The first operation performed by the moving unit in response to the operation is to change the regulating unit to the release state, and the second operation is to move the operation surface of the operation unit to the projecting position. A gaming machine Z3, which is an operation.

  According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Z2, the operation of the moving means is restricted by the regulating means. Then, the moving means is operated so as to change the state of the regulating means in accordance with the control content executed by the operation control means. Therefore, even if the moving means is operated, it is possible to reliably control whether or not the operation surface of the operating means moves.

  In the gaming machine Z3, the transmitting means is a rotating member rotatable in synchronization with the rotating operation of the driving means, and an operating member connected to the operating means and on which the rotating operation of the rotating member acts. And the rotation member has a protrusion that can be brought into contact with the operation member, and the regulating unit rotates the drive unit in the first direction to move the protrusion to the operation member. The gaming machine Z4 is configured to change to the release state by being brought into contact with the game machine Z4.

  In the gaming machine Z4, the regulating means does not change to the released state when the driving means is rotated in the second direction to bring the protrusion into contact with the operating member. Gaming machine Z5.

  In the gaming machine Z5, the position at which the projecting portion stops is the same between when the first drive control is executed by the operation control means and when the second drive control is executed. Gaming machine Z6.

  Discriminating means for executing a discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied in the gaming machines Z1 to Z6; And a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect for indicating that the judgment result of the judgment means is the predetermined judgment result, wherein the predetermined movement condition is determined in accordance with the judgment result of the judgment means. Is a gaming machine Z7.

<Characteristic α group> (Overwinning at the time of big hit)
Determining means capable of executing the determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the counterpart obtaining means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means; When displayed, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game, a first privilege game in which a first privilege advantageous to a player is provided as the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, A second privilege game in which a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given; and a determining means capable of determining any of the second privilege game. Is executed, the information processing apparatus has type determining means for determining a notification type for notifying the player of notification information for notifying the type information of the executed privilege game from a plurality of types. Play with Machine α1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. (Patent Document: JP 2010-057441 A). In this type of gaming machine, there has been a demand for further enhancing the interest in the game. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine α1, when the privilege game is being executed, the notification type for suggesting the type of the bonus game is determined from a plurality of types. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine α1, a variable ball-in means that can be changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter easily than the open state, and the privilege game from the closed state Variable control means for performing an open game in which the variable ball-in means is varied until a predetermined number of game balls in the open state enter the variable ball-in means, and the notification type exceeds the predetermined number. A gaming machine α2 including at least a first notification type for notifying the notification information based on a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means.

  According to the gaming machine α2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine α1, the value of having the variable ball entry means allow more than a predetermined number of game balls to enter can be increased, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

  In the gaming machine α2, the bonus game is to execute the opening game a plurality of times, and when the first notification type is determined, based on that the opening game has been executed a predetermined number of times, A gaming machine α3 having a notification type switching means for switching to another notification type.

  According to the gaming machine α3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine α2, even when the first notification type is determined, the switching to another notification type is performed during the privilege game, so that the number of game balls exceeding a predetermined number is obtained. There is an effect that it is possible to switch so that the notification information is notified even when it is difficult to enter the ball.

  In the gaming machine α3, the notification type switching means switches to the other notification type on condition that the specific notification information is not notified in the first notification type. α4.

  According to the gaming machine α4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine α3, the notification type is switched on the condition that the specific notification information is not notified, so that there is an effect that a problem in which the notification is duplicated can be suppressed. .

<Characteristic β group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and an identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, in a game machine having a bonus game execution unit based on the information stored in the storage unit. The pre-determination execution means for performing the determination at the time, and the information determined as the specific determination result by the pre-determination execution means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means are stored. If so, the gaming machine β1, characterized in that those having a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. (Patent Document: JP 2010-057441 A). In this type of gaming machine, there has been a demand for further enhancing the interest in the game. This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine β1, when the bonus game is executed, if it is further determined that the bonus game is to be executed thereafter, the specific effect is executed, so that the specific effect is executed. There is an effect that the player can be expected to improve the interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine β1, in the bonus game, the probability that the specific determination result is determined by the player to be the first bonus game in which the normal gaming state is set after execution and the specific determination result after execution is higher than in the normal gaming state. A second privilege game in which a special game state is set is at least set, and the specific effect is configured to indicate that the special game state is set. Gaming machine β2.

  In the gaming machine β2, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode as a stop display mode indicating that the second privilege game is executed, and the first privilege game is executed. In the case where the identification information is dynamically displayed, a stop display switching unit capable of performing stop display in the specific stop display mode if the information determined as the specific determination result is stored. A gaming machine β3 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine β, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine β2, even when the first privilege game is executed, it is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, so that it is as if the second privilege game is executed. There is an effect that can be made to think.

  In the gaming machine β3, the stop display switching means stores the information determined to be the specific determination result when the identification information indicating that the first privilege game is to be executed is dynamically displayed. And switching to the specific stop display mode based on that the information determined to be the specific determination result is stored during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. Gaming machine β4.

  According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β3, the stop mode is switched even after the dynamic display is started, so that the effect of being able to increase the chances of being displayed in the specific stop mode can be increased. is there.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P8, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R4, S1 to S4, T1 to T6, U1 to U5, V1 to V6, W1 to W6, X1 to X4, Y1 to Y8, Z1 to Z7, α1 to α4, β1 to β4, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P8, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R4, S1 to S4, T1 to T6, U1 to U5, V1 to V6, W1 to W6, X1 to X4, Y1 to In any of Y8, Z1 to Z7, α1 to α4, and β1 to β4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P8, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R4, S1 to S4, T1 to T6, U1 to U5, V1 to V6, W1 to W6, X1 to X4, Y1 to The gaming machine γ3 according to any one of Y8, Z1 to Z7, α1 to α4, and β1 to β4, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. .
In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting port during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the right to perform the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information, and the number of the retained ball information is (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057541).
However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises: an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition; a storage unit in which the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored; Determining means for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means on the display means for a predetermined period of time And a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. For each piece of the information stored in the storage unit before being performed, a symbol display unit that displays a corresponding symbol, and a symbol display unit based on a period in which the information is acquired by the acquisition unit by a predetermined number. table A display mode changing means for changing the display mode that is one having a.
The gaming machine according to the second technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first technical concept, wherein the display mode changing unit changes a display mode in a display area where the symbol is displayed based on the period.
In the gaming machine according to the technical concept 1 or 2, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 suggests that the display area where the symbol is displayed in the symbol display means is an area where the symbol is displayed. The suggestion mode is set to be displayed even during a period in which the symbol is not displayed.
The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the third aspect, wherein the display mode changing unit changes the suggestion mode corresponding to the period.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, an acquisition unit that can acquire information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a storage unit that stores the information. Determining means for performing a determination based on the obtained information; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; Means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the means, For each of the information stored in the storage means, a symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol, and a display displayed on the symbol display means based on a period during which the information is acquired by the acquisition means by a predetermined number. state A display form changing means for varying the, and has a.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the display mode changing means changes the display mode in the display area where the symbol is displayed based on the period.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the display area in which the symbol is displayed in the symbol display means, a suggestion mode indicating that the symbol is displayed is set even in a period in which the symbol is not displayed. It is.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display mode changing means changes the suggestion mode corresponding to the period.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
114 display control device (dynamic display means)
203a Special symbol 1 holding ball storage area (storage means)
203b Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (storage means)
Z255, Z275 determining means z 307, Z31 5 obtaining means Z1004 benefits game execution means Z2106 symbol display unit
Z2229 symbol display area variable means

Claims (4)

An acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition;
Storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means,
Determining means for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means,
A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period,
A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit,
For each piece of the information stored in the storage unit before being determined by the determination unit, a symbol display unit that displays a corresponding symbol,
A game machine comprising: a display mode changing unit that changes a display mode displayed on the symbol display unit based on a period in which the information is obtained by the predetermined number by the obtaining unit.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display mode changing means changes a display mode in a display area where the symbol is displayed based on the period.   In the display area where the symbol is displayed in the symbol display means, a suggestion mode indicating that the symbol is displayed is set to be displayed even during a period in which the symbol is not displayed. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein:   The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the display mode changing unit changes the suggestion mode in accordance with the period.

Images